**preview**has

**blurred**sections. Sign up to view the full version! View Full Document

**Unformatted text preview: **PUZZLER
For thousands of years the spinning
Earth provided a natural standard for our
measurements of time. However, since
1972 we have added more than 20 leap
seconds to our clocks to keep them
synchronized to the Earth. Why are such
adjustments needed? What does it take
to be a good standard? (Don Mason/The
Stock Market and NASA)
chapter
Physics and Measurement
Chapter Outline
1.1 Standards of Length, Mass, and
Time
1.2 The Building Blocks of Matter
1.3 Density
1.4 Dimensional Analysis
2
1.5 Conversion of Units
1.6 Estimates and Order-of-Magnitude
Calculations
1.7 Signicant Figures
L
ike all other sciences, physics is based on experimental observations and quantitative measurements. The main objective of physics is to nd the limited number of fundamental laws that govern natural phenomena and to use them to
develop theories that can predict the results of future experiments. The fundamental laws used in developing theories are expressed in the language of mathematics, the tool that provides a bridge between theory and experiment.
When a discrepancy between theory and experiment arises, new theories must
be formulated to remove the discrepancy. Many times a theory is satisfactory only
under limited conditions; a more general theory might be satisfactory without
such limitations. For example, the laws of motion discovered by Isaac Newton
(1642 1727) in the 17th century accurately describe the motion of bodies at normal speeds but do not apply to objects moving at speeds comparable with the
speed of light. In contrast, the special theory of relativity developed by Albert Einstein (1879 1955) in the early 1900s gives the same results as Newtons laws at low
speeds but also correctly describes motion at speeds approaching the speed of
light. Hence, Einsteins is a more general theory of motion.
Classical physics, which means all of the physics developed before 1900, includes the theories, concepts, laws, and experiments in classical mechanics, thermodynamics, and electromagnetism.
Important contributions to classical physics were provided by Newton, who developed classical mechanics as a systematic theory and was one of the originators
of calculus as a mathematical tool. Major developments in mechanics continued in
the 18th century, but the elds of thermodynamics and electricity and magnetism
were not developed until the latter part of the 19th century, principally because
before that time the apparatus for controlled experiments was either too crude or
unavailable.
A new era in physics, usually referred to as modern physics, began near the end
of the 19th century. Modern physics developed mainly because of the discovery
that many physical phenomena could not be explained by classical physics. The
two most important developments in modern physics were the theories of relativity
and quantum mechanics. Einsteins theory of relativity revolutionized the traditional concepts of space, time, and energy; quantum mechanics, which applies to
both the microscopic and macroscopic worlds, was originally formulated by a number of distinguished scientists to provide descriptions of physical phenomena at
the atomic level.
Scientists constantly work at improving our understanding of phenomena and
fundamental laws, and new discoveries are made every day. In many research
areas, a great deal of overlap exists between physics, chemistry, geology, and
biology, as well as engineering. Some of the most notable developments are
(1) numerous space missions and the landing of astronauts on the Moon,
(2) microcircuitry and high-speed computers, and (3) sophisticated imaging techniques used in scientic research and medicine. The impact such developments
and discoveries have had on our society has indeed been great, and it is very likely
that future discoveries and developments will be just as exciting and challenging
and of great benet to humanity.
1.1
STANDARDS OF LENGTH, MASS, AND TIME
The laws of physics are expressed in terms of basic quantities that require a clear definition. In mechanics, the three basic quantities are length (L), mass (M), and time
(T). All other quantities in mechanics can be expressed in terms of these three.
3
4
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
If we are to report the results of a measurement to someone who wishes to reproduce this measurement, a standard must be dened. It would be meaningless if
a visitor from another planet were to talk to us about a length of 8 glitches if we
do not know the meaning of the unit glitch. On the other hand, if someone familiar with our system of measurement reports that a wall is 2 meters high and our
unit of length is dened to be 1 meter, we know that the height of the wall is twice
our basic length unit. Likewise, if we are told that a person has a mass of 75 kilograms and our unit of mass is dened to be 1 kilogram, then that person is 75
times as massive as our basic unit.1 Whatever is chosen as a standard must be readily accessible and possess some property that can be measured reliably measurements taken by different people in different places must yield the same result.
In 1960, an international committee established a set of standards for length,
mass, and other basic quantities. The system established is an adaptation of the
metric system, and it is called the SI system of units. (The abbreviation SI comes
from the systems French name Système International.) In this system, the units
of length, mass, and time are the meter, kilogram, and second, respectively. Other
SI standards established by the committee are those for temperature (the kelvin),
electric current (the ampere), luminous intensity (the candela), and the amount of
substance (the mole). In our study of mechanics we shall be concerned only with
the units of length, mass, and time.
Length
In A.D. 1120 the king of England decreed that the standard of length in his country would be named the yard and would be precisely equal to the distance from the
tip of his nose to the end of his outstretched arm. Similarly, the original standard
for the foot adopted by the French was the length of the royal foot of King Louis
XIV. This standard prevailed until 1799, when the legal standard of length in
France became the meter, dened as one ten-millionth the distance from the equator to the North Pole along one particular longitudinal line that passes through
Paris.
Many other systems for measuring length have been developed over the years,
but the advantages of the French system have caused it to prevail in almost all
countries and in scientic circles everywhere. As recently as 1960, the length of the
meter was dened as the distance between two lines on a specic platinum
iridium bar stored under controlled conditions in France. This standard was abandoned for several reasons, a principal one being that the limited accuracy with
which the separation between the lines on the bar can be determined does not
meet the current requirements of science and technology. In the 1960s and 1970s,
the meter was dened as 1 650 763.73 wavelengths of orange-red light emitted
from a krypton-86 lamp. However, in October 1983, the meter (m) was redened
as the distance traveled by light in vacuum during a time of 1/299 792 458
second. In effect, this latest denition establishes that the speed of light in vacuum is precisely 299 792 458 m per second.
Table 1.1 lists approximate values of some measured lengths.
1
The need for assigning numerical values to various measured physical quantities was expressed by
Lord Kelvin (William Thomson) as follows: I often say that when you can measure what you are speaking about, and express it in numbers, you should know something about it, but when you cannot express it in numbers, your knowledge is of a meagre and unsatisfactory kind. It may be the beginning of
knowledge but you have scarcely in your thoughts advanced to the state of science.
1.1
5
Standards of Length, Mass, and Time
TABLE 1.1 Approximate Values of Some Measured Lengths
Length (m)
Distance from the Earth to most remote known quasar
Distance from the Earth to most remote known normal galaxies
Distance from the Earth to nearest large galaxy
(M 31, the Andromeda galaxy)
Distance from the Sun to nearest star (Proxima Centauri)
One lightyear
Mean orbit radius of the Earth about the Sun
Mean distance from the Earth to the Moon
Distance from the equator to the North Pole
Mean radius of the Earth
Typical altitude (above the surface) of a satellite orbiting the Earth
Length of a football eld
Length of a housey
Size of smallest dust particles
Size of cells of most living organisms
Diameter of a hydrogen atom
Diameter of an atomic nucleus
Diameter of a proton
1.4
9
1026
1025
2
4
9.46
1.50
3.84
1.00
6.37
2
9.1
5
1022
1016
1015
1011
108
107
106
105
101
10 3
10
10
10
10
10
4
5
10
14
15
Mass
The basic SI unit of mass, the kilogram (kg), is dened as the mass of a specic platinum iridium alloy cylinder kept at the International Bureau of
Weights and Measures at Sèvres, France. This mass standard was established in
1887 and has not been changed since that time because platinum iridium is an
unusually stable alloy (Fig. 1.1a). A duplicate of the Sèvres cylinder is kept at the
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) in Gaithersburg, Maryland.
Table 1.2 lists approximate values of the masses of various objects.
web
Visit the Bureau at www.bipm.fr or the
National Institute of Standards at
www.NIST.gov
TABLE 1.2
Time
Before 1960, the standard of time was dened in terms of the mean solar day for the
1
1
1
year 1900.2 The mean solar second was originally dened as (60)(60)(24) of a mean
solar day. The rotation of the Earth is now known to vary slightly with time, however, and therefore this motion is not a good one to use for dening a standard.
In 1967, consequently, the second was redened to take advantage of the high
precision obtainable in a device known as an atomic clock (Fig. 1.1b). In this device,
the frequencies associated with certain atomic transitions can be measured to a
precision of one part in 1012. This is equivalent to an uncertainty of less than one
second every 30 000 years. Thus, in 1967 the SI unit of time, the second, was redened using the characteristic frequency of a particular kind of cesium atom as the
reference clock. The basic SI unit of time, the second (s), is dened as 9 192
631 770 times the period of vibration of radiation from the cesium-133
atom.3 To keep these atomic clocks and therefore all common clocks and
2
One solar day is the time interval between successive appearances of the Sun at the highest point it
reaches in the sky each day.
3
Period is dened as the time interval needed for one complete vibration.
Masses of Various Bodies
(Approximate Values)
Body
Visible
Universe
Milky Way
galaxy
Sun
Earth
Moon
Horse
Human
Frog
Mosquito
Bacterium
Hydrogen
atom
Electron
Mass (kg)
1052
7
1041
1.99
5.98
7.36
1030
1024
1022
103
102
10 1
10 5
10 15
1.67 10
9.11
10
27
31
6
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
Figure 1.1 (Top) The National Standard Kilogram No.
20, an accurate copy of the International Standard Kilogram kept at Sèvres, France, is housed under a double bell
jar in a vault at the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST). (Bottom) The primary frequency standard (an atomic clock) at the NIST. This device keeps
time with an accuracy of about 3 millionths of a second
per year. (Courtesy of National Institute of Standards and Technology,
U.S. Department of Commerce)
watches that are set to them synchronized, it has sometimes been necessary to
add leap seconds to our clocks. This is not a new idea. In 46 B.C. Julius Caesar began the practice of adding extra days to the calendar during leap years so that the
seasons occurred at about the same date each year.
Since Einsteins discovery of the linkage between space and time, precise measurement of time intervals requires that we know both the state of motion of the
clock used to measure the interval and, in some cases, the location of the clock as
well. Otherwise, for example, global positioning system satellites might be unable
to pinpoint your location with sufcient accuracy, should you need rescuing.
Approximate values of time intervals are presented in Table 1.3.
In addition to SI, another system of units, the British engineering system (sometimes called the conventional system), is still used in the United States despite acceptance of SI by the rest of the world. In this system, the units of length, mass, and
1.1
Standards of Length, Mass, and Time
TABLE 1.3 Approximate Values of Some Time Intervals
Interval (s)
Age of the Universe
Age of the Earth
Average age of a college student
One year
One day (time for one rotation of the Earth about its axis)
Time between normal heartbeats
Period of audible sound waves
Period of typical radio waves
Period of vibration of an atom in a solid
Period of visible light waves
Duration of a nuclear collision
Time for light to cross a proton
1017
1017
108
107
104
10 1
5
1.3
6.3
3.16
8.64
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
3
6
13
15
22
24
time are the foot (ft), slug, and second, respectively. In this text we shall use SI
units because they are almost universally accepted in science and industry. We
shall make some limited use of British engineering units in the study of classical
mechanics.
In addition to the basic SI units of meter, kilogram, and second, we can also
use other units, such as millimeters and nanoseconds, where the prexes milli- and
nano- denote various powers of ten. Some of the most frequently used prexes
for the various powers of ten and their abbreviations are listed in Table 1.4. For
TABLE 1.4 Prexes for SI Units
Power
Prex
Abbreviation
10 24
10 21
10 18
10 15
10 12
10 9
10 6
10 3
10 2
10 1
101
103
106
109
1012
1015
1018
1021
1024
yocto
zepto
atto
femto
pico
nano
micro
milli
centi
deci
deka
kilo
mega
giga
tera
peta
exa
zetta
yotta
y
z
a
f
p
n
m
c
d
da
k
M
G
T
P
E
Z
Y
7
8
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
example, 10 3 m is equivalent to 1 millimeter (mm), and 103 m corresponds
to 1 kilometer (km). Likewise, 1 kg is 103 grams (g), and 1 megavolt (MV) is
106 volts (V).
u
u
1.2
d
Quark
composition
of a proton
Proton
Neutron
Gold
nucleus
Nucleus
Gold
atoms
Gold
cube
Figure 1.2 Levels of organization
in matter. Ordinary matter consists
of atoms, and at the center of each
atom is a compact nucleus consisting of protons and neutrons. Protons and neutrons are composed of
quarks. The quark composition of
a proton is shown.
THE BUILDING BLOCKS OF MATTER
A 1-kg cube of solid gold has a length of 3.73 cm on a side. Is this cube nothing
but wall-to-wall gold, with no empty space? If the cube is cut in half, the two pieces
still retain their chemical identity as solid gold. But what if the pieces are cut again
and again, indenitely? Will the smaller and smaller pieces always be gold? Questions such as these can be traced back to early Greek philosophers. Two of them
Leucippus and his student Democritus could not accept the idea that such cuttings could go on forever. They speculated that the process ultimately must end
when it produces a particle that can no longer be cut. In Greek, atomos means not
sliceable. From this comes our English word atom.
Let us review briey what is known about the structure of matter. All ordinary
matter consists of atoms, and each atom is made up of electrons surrounding a
central nucleus. Following the discovery of the nucleus in 1911, the question
arose: Does it have structure? That is, is the nucleus a single particle or a collection
of particles? The exact composition of the nucleus is not known completely even
today, but by the early 1930s a model evolved that helped us understand how the
nucleus behaves. Specically, scientists determined that occupying the nucleus are
two basic entities, protons and neutrons. The proton carries a positive charge, and a
specic element is identied by the number of protons in its nucleus. This number is called the atomic number of the element. For instance, the nucleus of a hydrogen atom contains one proton (and so the atomic number of hydrogen is 1),
the nucleus of a helium atom contains two protons (atomic number 2), and the
nucleus of a uranium atom contains 92 protons (atomic number 92). In addition
to atomic number, there is a second number characterizing atoms mass number, dened as the number of protons plus neutrons in a nucleus. As we shall see,
the atomic number of an element never varies (i.e., the number of protons does
not vary) but the mass number can vary (i.e., the number of neutrons varies). Two
or more atoms of the same element having different mass numbers are isotopes
of one another.
The existence of neutrons was veried conclusively in 1932. A neutron has no
charge and a mass that is about equal to that of a proton. One of its primary purposes is to act as a glue that holds the nucleus together. If neutrons were not
present in the nucleus, the repulsive force between the positively charged particles
would cause the nucleus to come apart.
But is this where the breaking down stops? Protons, neutrons, and a host of
other exotic particles are now known to be composed of six different varieties of
particles called quarks, which have been given the names of up, down, strange,
2
charm, bottom, and top. The up, charm, and top quarks have charges of 3 that of
the proton, whereas the down, strange, and bottom quarks have charges of 1
3
that of the proton. The proton consists of two up quarks and one down quark
(Fig. 1.2), which you can easily show leads to the correct charge for the proton.
Likewise, the neutron consists of two down quarks and one up quark, giving a net
charge of zero.
1.3
1.3
9
Density
DENSITY
A property of any substance is its density (Greek letter rho), dened as the
amount of mass contained in a unit volume, which we usually express as mass per
unit volume:
m
V
(1.1)
For example, aluminum has a density of 2.70 g/cm3, and lead has a density of
11.3 g/cm3. Therefore, a piece of aluminum of volume 10.0 cm3 has a mass of
27.0 g, whereas an equivalent volume of lead has a mass of 113 g. A list of densities
for various substances is given Table 1.5.
The difference in density between aluminum and lead is due, in part, to their
different atomic masses. The atomic mass of an element is the average mass of one
atom in a sample of the element that contains all the elements isotopes, where the
relative amounts of isotopes are the same as the relative amounts found in nature.
The unit for atomic mass is the atomic mass unit (u), where 1 u 1.660 540 2
10 27 kg. The atomic mass of lead is 207 u, and that of aluminum is 27.0 u. However, the ratio of atomic masses, 207 u/27.0 u 7.67, does not correspond to the
ratio of densities, (11.3 g/cm3)/(2.70 g/cm3) 4.19. The discrepancy is due to
the difference in atomic separations and atomic arrangements in the crystal structure of these two substances.
The mass of a nucleus is measured relative to the mass of the nucleus of the
carbon-12 isotope, often written as 12C. (This isotope of carbon has six protons
and six neutrons. Other carbon isotopes have six protons but different numbers of
neutrons.) Practically all of the mass of an atom is contained within the nucleus.
Because the atomic mass of 12C is dened to be exactly 12 u, the proton and neutron each have a mass of about 1 u.
One mole (mol) of a substance is that amount of the substance that contains as many particles (atoms, molecules, or other particles) as there are
atoms in 12 g of the carbon-12 isotope. One mole of substance A contains the
same number of particles as there are in 1 mol of any other substance B. For example, 1 mol of aluminum contains the same number of atoms as 1 mol of lead.
TABLE 1.5 Densities of Various
Substances
Substance
Gold
Uranium
Lead
Copper
Iron
Aluminum
Magnesium
Water
Air
Density
(103 kg/m3)
19.3
18.7
11.3
8.92
7.86
2.70
1.75
1.00
0.0012
A table of the letters in the Greek
alphabet is provided on the back
endsheet of this textbook.
10
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
Experiments have shown that this number, known as Avogadros number, NA , is
NA
10 23 particles/mol
6.022 137
Avogadros number is dened so that 1 mol of carbon-12 atoms has a mass of
exactly 12 g. In general, the mass in 1 mol of any element is the elements atomic
mass expressed in grams. For example, 1 mol of iron (atomic mass 55.85 u) has
a mass of 55.85 g (we say its molar mass is 55.85 g/mol), and 1 mol of lead (atomic
mass 207 u) has a mass of 207 g (its molar mass is 207 g/mol). Because there
are 6.02 1023 particles in 1 mol of any element, the mass per atom for a given element is
m atom
molar mass
NA
(1.2)
For example, the mass of an iron atom is
m Fe
EXAMPLE 1.1
55.85 g/mol
6.02 10 23 atoms/mol
minum (27 g) contains 6.02
23
g/atom
(2.7 g/cm3)(0.20 cm3)
1.4
6.02
0.54 g
To nd the number of atoms N in this mass of aluminum, we
can set up a proportion using the fact that one mole of alu-
1023 atoms:
NA
27 g
Solution Since density equals mass per unit volume, the
mass m of the cube is
V
10
How Many Atoms in the Cube?
A solid cube of aluminum (density 2.7 g/cm3) has a volume
of 0.20 cm3. How many aluminum atoms are contained in the
cube?
m
9.28
N
(0.54 g)(6.02
27 g
N
0.54 g
10 23 atoms
27 g
N
0.54 g
10 23 atoms)
1.2
10 22 atoms
DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS
The word dimension has a special meaning in physics. It usually denotes the physical nature of a quantity. Whether a distance is measured in the length unit feet or
the length unit meters, it is still a distance. We say the dimension the physical
nature of distance is length.
The symbols we use in this book to specify length, mass, and time are L, M,
and T, respectively. We shall often use brackets [ ] to denote the dimensions of a
physical quantity. For example, the symbol we use for speed in this book is v, and
in our notation the dimensions of speed are written [v] L/T. As another example, the dimensions of area, for which we use the symbol A, are [A] L2. The dimensions of area, volume, speed, and acceleration are listed in Table 1.6.
In solving problems in physics, there is a useful and powerful procedure called
dimensional analysis. This procedure, which should always be used, will help minimize the need for rote memorization of equations. Dimensional analysis makes
use of the fact that dimensions can be treated as algebraic quantities. That is,
quantities can be added or subtracted only if they have the same dimensions. Furthermore, the terms on both sides of an equation must have the same dimensions.
1.4
Dimensional Analysis
TABLE 1.6 Dimensions and Common Units of Area, Volume,
Speed, and Acceleration
System
SI
British engineering
Area
(L2)
Volume
(L3)
Speed
(L/T)
Acceleration
(L/T 2)
m2
ft2
m3
ft3
m/s
ft/s
m/s2
ft/s2
By following these simple rules, you can use dimensional analysis to help determine whether an expression has the correct form. The relationship can be correct
only if the dimensions are the same on both sides of the equation.
To illustrate this procedure, suppose you wish to derive a formula for the distance x traveled by a car in a time t if the car starts from rest and moves with constant acceleration a. In Chapter 2, we shall nd that the correct expression is
x 1at 2. Let us use dimensional analysis to check the validity of this expression.
2
The quantity x on the left side has the dimension of length. For the equation to be
dimensionally correct, the quantity on the right side must also have the dimension
of length. We can perform a dimensional check by substituting the dimensions for
acceleration, L/T 2, and time, T, into the equation. That is, the dimensional form
of the equation x 1at 2 is
2
L
T2
T2
L
L
The units of time squared cancel as shown, leaving the unit of length.
A more general procedure using dimensional analysis is to set up an expression of the form
a nt m
x
where n and m are exponents that must be determined and the symbol indicates
a proportionality. This relationship is correct only if the dimensions of both sides
are the same. Because the dimension of the left side is length, the dimension of
the right side must also be length. That is,
[a nt m]
L
LT 0
Because the dimensions of acceleration are L/T 2 and the dimension of time is T,
we have
L
T2
n
Ln T m
Tm
L1
2n
L1
Because the exponents of L and T must be the same on both sides, the dimensional equation is balanced under the conditions m 2n 0, n 1, and m 2.
Returning to our original expression x
a nt mwe conclude that x
,
at 2This result
.
12
differs by a factor of 2 from the correct expression, which is x 2at . Because the
factor 1 is dimensionless, there is no way of determining it using dimensional
2
analysis.
11
12
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
Quick Quiz 1.1
True or False: Dimensional analysis can give you the numerical value of constants of proportionality that may appear in an algebraic expression.
EXAMPLE 1.2
Analysis of an Equation
The same table gives us L/T 2 for the dimensions of acceleration, and so the dimensions of at are
Show that the expression v at is dimensionally correct,
where v represents speed, a acceleration, and t a time interval.
L
(T)
T2
[at]
Solution
For the speed term, we have from Table 1.6
EXAMPLE 1.3
Therefore, the expression is dimensionally correct. (If the expression were given as v at 2, it would be dimensionally incorrect. Try it and see!)
L
T
[v]
Analysis of a Power Law
Suppose we are told that the acceleration a of a particle moving with uniform speed v in a circle of radius r is proportional
to some power of r, say r n, and some power of v, say v m. How
can we determine the values of n and m ?
Solution
This dimensional equation is balanced under the conditions
n
Therefore n
sion as
1
m
and
m
a
a
kr nv m
where k is a dimensionless constant of proportionality. Knowing the dimensions of a, r, and v, we see that the dimensional
equation must be
Ln(L/T)m
Ln
2
1, and we can write the acceleration expres-
Let us take a to be
L/T 2
L
T
kr
1v 2
k
v2
r
When we discuss uniform circular motion later, we shall see
that k 1 if a consistent set of units is used. The constant k
would not equal 1 if, for example, v were in km/h and you
wanted a in m/s2.
m/T m
QuickLab
1.5
Estimate the weight (in pounds) of
two large bottles of soda pop. Note
that 1 L of water has a mass of about
1 kg. Use the fact that an object
weighing 2.2 lb has a mass of 1 kg.
Find some bathroom scales and
check your estimate.
Sometimes it is necessary to convert units from one system to another. Conversion
factors between the SI units and conventional units of length are as follows:
CONVERSION OF UNITS
1 mi
1 609 m
1.609 km
1 ft
1m
39.37 in.
3.281 ft
1 in.
0.304 8 m
30.48 cm
0.025 4 m
2.54 cm (exactly)
A more complete list of conversion factors can be found in Appendix A.
Units can be treated as algebraic quantities that can cancel each other. For example, suppose we wish to convert 15.0 in. to centimeters. Because 1 in. is dened
as exactly 2.54 cm, we nd that
15.0 in.
(15.0 in.)(2.54 cm/in.)
38.1 cm
This works because multiplying by (2.54 cm) is the same as multiplying by 1, because
1 in.
the numerator and denominator describe identical things.
1.6
13
Estimates and Order-of-Magnitude Calculations
(Left) This road sign near Raleigh, North Carolina, shows distances in miles and kilometers. How
accurate are the conversions? (Billy E. Barnes/Stock Boston).
(Right) This vehicles speedometer gives speed readings in miles per hour and in kilometers per
hour. Try conrming the conversion between the two sets of units for a few readings of the dial.
(Paul Silverman/Fundamental Photographs)
EXAMPLE 1.4
The Density of a Cube
The mass of a solid cube is 856 g, and each edge has a length
of 5.35 cm. Determine the density of the cube in basic SI
units.
Solution
Because 1 g 10 3 kg and 1 cm
mass m and volume V in basic SI units are
m
1.6
856 g
10
3
kg/g
0.856 kg
10
2
V
L3
(5.35 cm
(5.35)3
6
10
10
m3
2
m/cm)3
1.53
10
4
m3
Therefore,
m, the
m
V
0.856 kg
1.53
10
ESTIMATES AND ORDER-OFMAGNITUDE CALCULATIONS
It is often useful to compute an approximate answer to a physical problem even
where little information is available. Such an approximate answer can then be
used to determine whether a more accurate calculation is necessary. Approximations are usually based on certain assumptions, which must be modied if greater
accuracy is needed. Thus, we shall sometimes refer to the order of magnitude of a
certain quantity as the power of ten of the number that describes that quantity. If,
for example, we say that a quantity increases in value by three orders of magnitude, this means that its value is increased by a factor of 103 1000. Also, if a
quantity is given as 3 103, we say that the order of magnitude of that quantity is
103 (or in symbolic form, 3 103 103). Likewise, the quantity 8 107 108.
The spirit of order-of-magnitude calculations, sometimes referred to as
guesstimates or ball-park gures, is given in the following quotation: Make an
estimate before every calculation, try a simple physical argument . . . before
every derivation, guess the answer to every puzzle. Courage: no one else needs to
4
m3
5.59
10 3 kg/m3
14
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
know what the guess is. 4 Inaccuracies caused by guessing too low for one number
are often canceled out by other guesses that are too high. You will nd that with
practice your guesstimates get better and better. Estimation problems can be fun
to work as you freely drop digits, venture reasonable approximations for unknown
numbers, make simplifying assumptions, and turn the question around into something you can answer in your head.
EXAMPLE 1.5
Breaths in a Lifetime
Estimate the number of breaths taken during an average life
span.
approximately
1 yr
Solution We shall start by guessing that the typical life
span is about 70 years. The only other estimate we must make
in this example is the average number of breaths that a person takes in 1 min. This number varies, depending on
whether the person is exercising, sleeping, angry, serene, and
so forth. To the nearest order of magnitude, we shall choose
10 breaths per minute as our estimate of the average. (This is
certainly closer to the true value than 1 breath per minute or
100 breaths per minute.) The number of minutes in a year is
EXAMPLE 1.6
days
yr
25
h
day
60
min
h
6
105 min
Notice how much simpler it is to multiply 400 25 than it
is to work with the more accurate 365 24. These approximate values for the number of days in a year and the number
of hours in a day are close enough for our purposes. Thus, in
70 years there will be (70 yr)(6 105 min/yr) 4 107
min. At a rate of 10 breaths/min, an individual would take
4
10 8 breaths in a lifetime.
Its a Long Way to San Jose
Estimate the number of steps a person would take walking
from New York to Los Angeles.
Solution Without looking up the distance between these
two cities, you might remember from a geography class that
they are about 3 000 mi apart. The next approximation we
must make is the length of one step. Of course, this length
depends on the person doing the walking, but we can estimate that each step covers about 2 ft. With our estimated step
size, we can determine the number of steps in 1 mi. Because
this is a rough calculation, we round 5 280 ft/mi to 5 000
ft/mi. (What percentage error does this introduce?) This
conversion factor gives us
5 000 ft/mi
2 ft/step
EXAMPLE 1.7
400
Now we switch to scientic notation so that we can do the
calculation mentally:
(3
10 3 mi)(2.5
10 3 steps/mi)
7.5
10 6 steps
10 7 steps
So if we intend to walk across the United States, it will take us
on the order of ten million steps. This estimate is almost certainly too small because we have not accounted for curving
roads and going up and down hills and mountains. Nonetheless, it is probably within an order of magnitude of the correct answer.
2 500 steps/mi
How Much Gas Do We Use?
Estimate the number of gallons of gasoline used each year by
all the cars in the United States.
Solution There are about 270 million people in the
United States, and so we estimate that the number of cars in
the country is 100 million (guessing that there are between
two and three people per car). We also estimate that the aver-
age distance each car travels per year is 10 000 mi. If we assume a gasoline consumption of 20 mi/gal or 0.05 gal/mi,
then each car uses about 500 gal/yr. Multiplying this by the
total number of cars in the United States gives an estimated
total consumption of 5
1010 gal
10 11 gal.
4 E. Taylor and J. A. Wheeler, Spacetime Physics, San Francisco, W. H. Freeman & Company, Publishers,
1966, p. 60.
1.7
1.7
15
Significant Figures
SIGNIFICANT FIGURES
When physical quantities are measured, the measured values are known only to
within the limits of the experimental uncertainty. The value of this uncertainty can
depend on various factors, such as the quality of the apparatus, the skill of the experimenter, and the number of measurements performed.
Suppose that we are asked to measure the area of a computer disk label using
a meter stick as a measuring instrument. Let us assume that the accuracy to which
we can measure with this stick is 0.1 cm. If the length of the label is measured to
be 5.5 cm, we can claim only that its length lies somewhere between 5.4 cm and
5.6 cm. In this case, we say that the measured value has two signicant gures.
Likewise, if the labels width is measured to be 6.4 cm, the actual value lies between 6.3 cm and 6.5 cm. Note that the signicant gures include the rst estimated digit. Thus we could write the measured values as (5.5 0.1) cm and
(6.4 0.1) cm.
Now suppose we want to nd the area of the label by multiplying the two measured values. If we were to claim the area is (5.5 cm)(6.4 cm) 35.2 cm2, our answer would be unjustiable because it contains three signicant gures, which is
greater than the number of signicant gures in either of the measured lengths. A
good rule of thumb to use in determining the number of signicant gures that
can be claimed is as follows:
When multiplying several quantities, the number of signicant gures in the
nal answer is the same as the number of signicant gures in the least accurate
of the quantities being multiplied, where least accurate means having the
lowest number of signicant gures. The same rule applies to division.
Applying this rule to the multiplication example above, we see that the answer
for the area can have only two signicant gures because our measured lengths
have only two signicant gures. Thus, all we can claim is that the area is 35 cm2,
realizing that the value can range between (5.4 cm)(6.3 cm) 34 cm2 and
(5.6 cm)(6.5 cm) 36 cm2.
Zeros may or may not be signicant gures. Those used to position the decimal point in such numbers as 0.03 and 0.007 5 are not signicant. Thus, there are
one and two signicant gures, respectively, in these two values. When the zeros
come after other digits, however, there is the possibility of misinterpretation. For
example, suppose the mass of an object is given as 1 500 g. This value is ambiguous because we do not know whether the last two zeros are being used to locate
the decimal point or whether they represent signicant gures in the measurement. To remove this ambiguity, it is common to use scientic notation to indicate
the number of signicant gures. In this case, we would express the mass as 1.5
103 g if there are two signicant gures in the measured value, 1.50 103 g if
there are three signicant gures, and 1.500 103 g if there are four. The same
rule holds when the number is less than 1, so that 2.3 10 4 has two signicant
gures (and so could be written 0.000 23) and 2.30 10 4 has three signicant
gures (also written 0.000 230). In general, a signicant gure is a reliably
known digit (other than a zero used to locate the decimal point).
For addition and subtraction, you must consider the number of decimal places
when you are determining how many signicant gures to report.
QuickLab
Determine the thickness of a page
from this book. (Note that numbers
that have no measurement errors
like the count of a number of
pages do not affect the signicant
gures in a calculation.) In terms of
signicant gures, why is it better to
measure the thickness of as many
pages as possible and then divide by
the number of sheets?
16
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
When numbers are added or subtracted, the number of decimal places in the
result should equal the smallest number of decimal places of any term in the
sum.
For example, if we wish to compute 123 5.35, the answer given to the correct number of signicant gures is 128 and not 128.35. If we compute the sum 1.000 1
0.000 3 1.000 4, the result has ve signicant gures, even though one of the terms
in the sum, 0.000 3, has only one signicant gure. Likewise, if we perform the subtraction 1.002 0.998 0.004, the result has only one signicant gure even though
one term has four signicant gures and the other has three. In this book, most of
the numerical examples and end-of-chapter problems will yield answers having three signicant gures. When carrying out estimates we shall typically work
with a single signicant gure.
Quick Quiz 1.2
Suppose you measure the position of a chair with a meter stick and record that the center
of the seat is 1.043 860 564 2 m from a wall. What would a reader conclude from this
recorded measurement?
EXAMPLE 1.8
The Area of a Rectangle
A rectangular plate has a length of (21.3 0.2) cm and a
width of (9.80 0.1) cm. Find the area of the plate and the
uncertainty in the calculated area.
Solution
Area
w
(21.3
EXAMPLE 1.9
0.2 cm)
(9.80
0.1 cm)
(21.3
(209
9.80
21.3
0.1
0.2
9.80) cm2
4) cm2
Because the input data were given to only three signicant
gures, we cannot claim any more in our result. Do you see
why we did not need to multiply the uncertainties 0.2 cm and
0.1 cm?
Installing a Carpet
A carpet is to be installed in a room whose length is measured
to be 12.71 m and whose width is measured to be 3.46 m. Find
the area of the room.
Solution If you multiply 12.71 m by 3.46 m on your calculator, you will get an answer of 43.976 6 m2. How many of
these numbers should you claim? Our rule of thumb for multiplication tells us that you can claim only the number of signicant gures in the least accurate of the quantities being
measured. In this example, we have only three signicant gures in our least accurate measurement, so we should express
our nal answer as 44.0 m2.
Note that in reducing 43.976 6 to three signicant gures
for our answer, we used a general rule for rounding off numbers that states that the last digit retained (the 9 in this example) is increased by 1 if the rst digit dropped (here, the 7) is
5 or greater. (A technique for avoiding error accumulation is
to delay rounding of numbers in a long calculation until you
have the nal result. Wait until you are ready to copy the answer from your calculator before rounding to the correct
number of signicant gures.)
Problems
17
SUMMARY
The three fundamental physical quantities of mechanics are length, mass, and
time, which in the SI system have the units meters (m), kilograms (kg), and seconds (s), respectively. Prexes indicating various powers of ten are used with these
three basic units. The density of a substance is dened as its mass per unit volume.
Different substances have different densities mainly because of differences in their
atomic masses and atomic arrangements.
The number of particles in one mole of any element or compound, called
Avogadros number, NA , is 6.02 1023.
The method of dimensional analysis is very powerful in solving physics problems. Dimensions can be treated as algebraic quantities. By making estimates and
making order-of-magnitude calculations, you should be able to approximate the
answer to a problem when there is not enough information available to completely
specify an exact solution.
When you compute a result from several measured numbers, each of which
has a certain accuracy, you should give the result with the correct number of significant gures.
QUESTIONS
1. In this chapter we described how the Earths daily rotation
on its axis was once used to dene the standard unit of
time. What other types of natural phenomena could serve
as alternative time standards?
2. Suppose that the three fundamental standards of the metric system were length, density, and time rather than
length, mass, and time. The standard of density in this system is to be dened as that of water. What considerations
about water would you need to address to make sure that
the standard of density is as accurate as possible?
3. A hand is dened as 4 in.; a foot is dened as 12 in. Why
should the hand be any less acceptable as a unit than the
foot, which we use all the time?
4. Express the following quantities using the prexes given in
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Table 1.4: (a) 3 10 4 m (b) 5 10 5 s
(c) 72 102 g.
Suppose that two quantities A and B have different dimensions. Determine which of the following arithmetic operations could be physically meaningful: (a) A B (b) A/B
(c) B A (d) AB.
What level of accuracy is implied in an order-of-magnitude
calculation?
Do an order-of-magnitude calculation for an everyday situation you might encounter. For example, how far do you
walk or drive each day?
Estimate your age in seconds.
Estimate the mass of this textbook in kilograms. If a scale is
available, check your estimate.
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
Section 1.3 Density
1. The standard kilogram is a platinum iridium cylinder
39.0 mm in height and 39.0 mm in diameter. What is
the density of the material?
2. The mass of the planet Saturn (Fig. P1.2) is 5.64
1026 kg, and its radius is 6.00 107 m. Calculate its
density.
3. How many grams of copper are required to make a hollow spherical shell having an inner radius of 5.70 cm
and an outer radius of 5.75 cm? The density of copper
is 8.92 g/cm3.
4. What mass of a material with density is required to
make a hollow spherical shell having inner radius r1 and
outer radius r 2 ?
5. Iron has molar mass 55.8 g/mol. (a) Find the volume
of 1 mol of iron. (b) Use the value found in (a) to determine the volume of one iron atom. (c) Calculate
the cube root of the atomic volume, to have an estimate for the distance between atoms in the solid.
(d) Repeat the calculations for uranium, finding its
molar mass in the periodic table of the elements in
Appendix C.
18
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
(a) What is the mass of a section 1.50 m long? (b) How
many atoms are there in this section? The density of
steel is 7.56 103 kg/m3.
11. A child at the beach digs a hole in the sand and, using a
pail, lls it with water having a mass of 1.20 kg. The molar mass of water is 18.0 g/mol. (a) Find the number of
water molecules in this pail of water. (b) Suppose the
quantity of water on the Earth is 1.32 1021 kg and remains constant. How many of the water molecules in
this pail of water were likely to have been in an equal
quantity of water that once lled a particular claw print
left by a dinosaur?
Section 1.4
Dimensional Analysis
12. The radius r of a circle inscribed in any triangle whose
sides are a, b, and c is given by
r
Figure P1.2
6. Two spheres are cut from a certain uniform rock. One
has radius 4.50 cm. The mass of the other is ve times
greater. Find its radius.
WEB 7. Calculate the mass of an atom of (a) helium, (b) iron,
and (c) lead. Give your answers in atomic mass units
and in grams. The molar masses are 4.00, 55.9, and
207 g/mol, respectively, for the atoms given.
8. On your wedding day your lover gives you a gold ring of
mass 3.80 g. Fifty years later its mass is 3.35 g. As an average, how many atoms were abraded from the ring
during each second of your marriage? The molar mass
of gold is 197 g/mol.
9. A small cube of iron is observed under a microscope.
The edge of the cube is 5.00 10 6 cm long. Find (a)
the mass of the cube and (b) the number of iron atoms
in the cube. The molar mass of iron is 55.9 g/mol, and
its density is 7.86 g/cm3.
10. A structural I-beam is made of steel. A view of its crosssection and its dimensions are shown in Figure P1.10.
T
36.0 cm
F
Figure P1.10
2
g
GMm
r2
Here F is the gravitational force, M and m are masses,
and r is a length. Force has the SI units kg m/s2. What
are the SI units of the proportionality constant G ?
17. The consumption of natural gas by a company satises
the empirical equation V 1.50t 0.008 00t 2, where V
is the volume in millions of cubic feet and t the time in
months. Express this equation in units of cubic feet and
seconds. Put the proper units on the coefcients. Assume a month is 30.0 days.
Section 1.5
1.00 cm
c)/s]1/2
where is the length of the pendulum and g is the freefall acceleration in units of length divided by the square
of time. Show that this equation is dimensionally correct.
15. Which of the equations below are dimensionally correct?
(a) v v 0 ax
(b) y (2 m) cos(kx), where k 2 m 1
16. Newtons law of universal gravitation is represented by
WEB
1.00 cm
b)(s
a)(s
where s is an abbreviation for (a b c)/2. Check this
formula for dimensional consistency.
13. The displacement of a particle moving under uniform
acceleration is some function of the elapsed time and
the acceleration. Suppose we write this displacement
s ka mt n, where k is a dimensionless constant. Show by
dimensional analysis that this expression is satised if
m 1 and n 2. Can this analysis give the value of k ?
14. The period T of a simple pendulum is measured in time
units and is described by
A view of Saturn from Voyager 2. (Courtesy of NASA)
15.0 cm
[(s
Conversion of Units
18. Suppose your hair grows at the rate 1/32 in. per day.
Find the rate at which it grows in nanometers per second. Since the distance between atoms in a molecule is
19
Problems
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
on the order of 0.1 nm, your answer suggests how
rapidly layers of atoms are assembled in this protein synthesis.
A rectangular building lot is 100 ft by 150 ft. Determine
the area of this lot in m2.
An auditorium measures 40.0 m 20.0 m 12.0 m.
The density of air is 1.20 kg/m3. What are (a) the volume of the room in cubic feet and (b) the weight of air
in the room in pounds?
Assume that it takes 7.00 min to ll a 30.0-gal gasoline
tank. (a) Calculate the rate at which the tank is lled in
gallons per second. (b) Calculate the rate at which the
tank is lled in cubic meters per second. (c) Determine
the time, in hours, required to ll a 1-cubic-meter volume at the same rate. (1 U.S. gal 231 in.3 )
A creature moves at a speed of 5.00 furlongs per fortnight (not a very common unit of speed). Given that
1 furlong 220 yards and 1 fortnight 14 days, determine the speed of the creature in meters per second.
What kind of creature do you think it might be?
A section of land has an area of 1 mi2 and contains
640 acres. Determine the number of square meters in
1 acre.
A quart container of ice cream is to be made in the
form of a cube. What should be the length of each edge
in centimeters? (Use the conversion 1 gal 3.786 L.)
A solid piece of lead has a mass of 23.94 g and a volume
of 2.10 cm3. From these data, calculate the density of
lead in SI units (kg/m3 ).
An astronomical unit (AU) is dened as the average distance between the Earth and the Sun. (a) How many astronomical units are there in one lightyear? (b) Determine the distance from the Earth to the Andromeda
galaxy in astronomical units.
The mass of the Sun is 1.99 1030 kg, and the mass of
an atom of hydrogen, of which the Sun is mostly composed, is 1.67 10 27 kg. How many atoms are there in
the Sun?
(a) Find a conversion factor to convert from miles per
hour to kilometers per hour. (b) In the past, a federal
law mandated that highway speed limits would be
55 mi/h. Use the conversion factor of part (a) to nd
this speed in kilometers per hour. (c) The maximum
highway speed is now 65 mi/h in some places. In kilometers per hour, how much of an increase is this over
the 55-mi/h limit?
At the time of this books printing, the U. S. national
debt is about $6 trillion. (a) If payments were made at
the rate of $1 000/s, how many years would it take to pay
off a $6-trillion debt, assuming no interest were charged?
(b) A dollar bill is about 15.5 cm long. If six trillion dollar bills were laid end to end around the Earths equator,
how many times would they encircle the Earth? Take the
radius of the Earth at the equator to be 6 378 km.
(Note: Before doing any of these calculations, try to
guess at the answers. You may be very surprised.)
WEB
30. (a) How many seconds are there in a year? (b) If one
micrometeorite (a sphere with a diameter of 1.00
10 6 m) strikes each square meter of the Moon each
second, how many years will it take to cover the Moon
to a depth of 1.00 m? (Hint: Consider a cubic box on
the Moon 1.00 m on a side, and nd how long it will
take to ll the box.)
31. One gallon of paint (volume 3.78 10 3 m3 ) covers
an area of 25.0 m2. What is the thickness of the paint on
the wall?
32. A pyramid has a height of 481 ft, and its base covers an
area of 13.0 acres (Fig. P1.32). If the volume of a pyramid is given by the expression V 1Bh, where B is the
3
area of the base and h is the height, nd the volume of
this pyramid in cubic meters. (1 acre 43 560 ft2 )
Figure P1.32
Problems 32 and 33.
33. The pyramid described in Problem 32 contains approximately two million stone blocks that average 2.50 tons
each. Find the weight of this pyramid in pounds.
34. Assuming that 70% of the Earths surface is covered
with water at an average depth of 2.3 mi, estimate the
mass of the water on the Earth in kilograms.
35. The amount of water in reservoirs is often measured in
acre-feet. One acre-foot is a volume that covers an area
of 1 acre to a depth of 1 ft. An acre is an area of
43 560 ft2. Find the volume in SI units of a reservoir
containing 25.0 acre-ft of water.
36. A hydrogen atom has a diameter of approximately
1.06 10 10 m, as dened by the diameter of the
spherical electron cloud around the nucleus. The hydrogen nucleus has a diameter of approximately
2.40 10 15 m. (a) For a scale model, represent the diameter of the hydrogen atom by the length of an American football eld (100 yards 300 ft), and determine
the diameter of the nucleus in millimeters. (b) The
atom is how many times larger in volume than its
nucleus?
37. The diameter of our disk-shaped galaxy, the Milky Way,
is about 1.0 105 lightyears. The distance to Messier
31 which is Andromeda, the spiral galaxy nearest to
the Milky Way is about 2.0 million lightyears. If a scale
model represents the Milky Way and Andromeda galax-
20
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
ies as dinner plates 25 cm in diameter, determine the
distance between the two plates.
38. The mean radius of the Earth is 6.37 106 m, and that
of the Moon is 1.74 108 cm. From these data calculate (a) the ratio of the Earths surface area to that of
the Moon and (b) the ratio of the Earths volume to
that of the Moon. Recall that the surface area of a
sphere is 4 r 2 and that the volume of a sphere is 4 r 3.
3
WEB
39. One cubic meter (1.00 m3 ) of aluminum has a mass of
2.70 103 kg, and 1.00 m3 of iron has a mass of
7.86 103 kg. Find the radius of a solid aluminum
sphere that balances a solid iron sphere of radius 2.00
cm on an equal-arm balance.
40. Let A1 represent the density of aluminum and Fe that
of iron. Find the radius of a solid aluminum sphere that
balances a solid iron sphere of radius r Fe on an equalarm balance.
Estimates and Order-ofMagnitude Calculations
Section 1.6
WEB
41. Estimate the number of Ping-Pong balls that would t
into an average-size room (without being crushed). In
your solution state the quantities you measure or estimate and the values you take for them.
42. McDonalds sells about 250 million packages of French
fries per year. If these fries were placed end to end, estimate how far they would reach.
43. An automobile tire is rated to last for 50 000 miles. Estimate the number of revolutions the tire will make in its
lifetime.
44. Approximately how many raindrops fall on a 1.0-acre
lot during a 1.0-in. rainfall?
45. Grass grows densely everywhere on a quarter-acre plot
of land. What is the order of magnitude of the number
of blades of grass on this plot of land? Explain your reasoning. (1 acre 43 560 ft2.)
46. Suppose that someone offers to give you $1 billion if
you can nish counting it out using only one-dollar
bills. Should you accept this offer? Assume you can
count one bill every second, and be sure to note that
you need about 8 hours a day for sleeping and eating
and that right now you are probably at least 18 years
old.
47. Compute the order of magnitude of the mass of a bathtub half full of water and of the mass of a bathtub half
full of pennies. In your solution, list the quantities you
take as data and the value you measure or estimate for
each.
48. Soft drinks are commonly sold in aluminum containers.
Estimate the number of such containers thrown away or
recycled each year by U.S. consumers. Approximately
how many tons of aluminum does this represent?
49. To an order of magnitude, how many piano tuners are
there in New York City? The physicist Enrico Fermi was
famous for asking questions like this on oral Ph.D. qual-
ifying examinations and for his own facility in making
order-of-magnitude calculations.
Section 1.7
Signicant Figures
50. Determine the number of signicant gures in the following measured values: (a) 23 cm (b) 3.589 s
(c) 4.67 103 m/s (d) 0.003 2 m.
51. The radius of a circle is measured to be 10.5 0.2 m.
Calculate the (a) area and (b) circumference of the circle and give the uncertainty in each value.
52. Carry out the following arithmetic operations: (a) the
sum of the measured values 756, 37.2, 0.83, and 2.5;
(b) the product 0.003 2 356.3; (c) the product
5.620
.
53. The radius of a solid sphere is measured to be (6.50
0.20) cm, and its mass is measured to be (1.85 0.02)
kg. Determine the density of the sphere in kilograms
per cubic meter and the uncertainty in the density.
54. How many signicant gures are in the following numbers: (a) 78.9 0.2, (b) 3.788 109, (c) 2.46 10 6,
and (d) 0.005 3?
55. A farmer measures the distance around a rectangular
eld. The length of the long sides of the rectangle is
found to be 38.44 m, and the length of the short sides is
found to be 19.5 m. What is the total distance around
the eld?
56. A sidewalk is to be constructed around a swimming
pool that measures (10.0 0.1) m by (17.0 0.1) m.
If the sidewalk is to measure (1.00 0.01) m wide by
(9.0 0.1) cm thick, what volume of concrete is needed,
and what is the approximate uncertainty of this volume?
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
57. In a situation where data are known to three signicant
digits, we write 6.379 m
6.38 m and 6.374 m
6.37 m. When a number ends in 5, we arbitrarily choose
to write 6.375 m 6.38 m. We could equally well write
6.375 m 6.37 m, rounding down instead of rounding up, since we would change the number 6.375 by
equal increments in both cases. Now consider an orderof-magnitude estimate, in which we consider factors
rather than increments. We write 500 m 103 m because 500 differs from 100 by a factor of 5 whereas it differs from 1000 by only a factor of 2. We write 437 m
103 m and 305 m 102 m. What distance differs from
100 m and from 1000 m by equal factors, so that we
could equally well choose to represent its order of magnitude either as 102 m or as 103 m?
58. When a droplet of oil spreads out on a smooth water
surface, the resulting oil slick is approximately one
molecule thick. An oil droplet of mass 9.00 10 7 kg
and density 918 kg/m3 spreads out into a circle of radius 41.8 cm on the water surface. What is the diameter
of an oil molecule?
21
Problems
59. The basic function of the carburetor of an automobile
is to atomize the gasoline and mix it with air to promote rapid combustion. As an example, assume that
30.0 cm3 of gasoline is atomized into N spherical
droplets, each with a radius of 2.00 10 5 m. What is
the total surface area of these N spherical droplets?
60. In physics it is important to use mathematical approximations. Demonstrate for yourself that for small angles
( 20°)
tan
sin
/180°
is in degrees. Use a calculawhere is in radians and
tor to nd the largest angle for which tan may be approximated by sin if the error is to be less than 10.0%.
61. A high fountain of water is located at the center of a circular pool as in Figure P1.61. Not wishing to get his feet
wet, a student walks around the pool and measures its
circumference to be 15.0 m. Next, the student stands at
the edge of the pool and uses a protractor to gauge the
angle of elevation of the top of the fountain to be 55.0°.
How high is the fountain?
64. A crystalline solid consists of atoms stacked up in a repeating lattice structure. Consider a crystal as shown in
Figure P1.64a. The atoms reside at the corners of cubes
of side L 0.200 nm. One piece of evidence for the
regular arrangement of atoms comes from the at surfaces along which a crystal separates, or cleaves, when
it is broken. Suppose this crystal cleaves along a face diagonal, as shown in Figure P1.64b. Calculate the spacing d between two adjacent atomic planes that separate
when the crystal cleaves.
L
d
(a)
(b)
Figure P1.64
55.0˚
Figure P1.61
62. Assume that an object covers an area A and has a uniform height h. If its cross-sectional area is uniform over
its height, then its volume is given by V Ah. (a) Show
that V Ah is dimensionally correct. (b) Show that the
volumes of a cylinder and of a rectangular box can be
written in the form V Ah, identifying A in each case.
(Note that A, sometimes called the footprint of the
object, can have any shape and that the height can be
replaced by average thickness in general.)
63. A useful fact is that there are about
107 s in one
year. Find the percentage error in this approximation,
where percentage error is dened as
Assumed value true value
True value
100%
65. A child loves to watch as you ll a transparent plastic
bottle with shampoo. Every horizontal cross-section of
the bottle is a circle, but the diameters of the circles all
have different values, so that the bottle is much wider in
some places than in others. You pour in bright green
shampoo with constant volume ow rate 16.5 cm3/s. At
what rate is its level in the bottle rising (a) at a point
where the diameter of the bottle is 6.30 cm and (b) at a
point where the diameter is 1.35 cm?
66. As a child, the educator and national leader Booker T.
Washington was given a spoonful (about 12.0 cm3) of
molasses as a treat. He pretended that the quantity increased when he spread it out to cover uniformly all of
a tin plate (with a diameter of about 23.0 cm). How
thick a layer did it make?
67. Assume there are 100 million passenger cars in the
United States and that the average fuel consumption is
20 mi/gal of gasoline. If the average distance traveled
by each car is 10 000 mi/yr, how much gasoline would
be saved per year if average fuel consumption could be
increased to 25 mi/gal?
68. One cubic centimeter of water has a mass of 1.00
10 3 kg. (a) Determine the mass of 1.00 m3 of water.
(b) Assuming biological substances are 98% water, esti-
22
CHAPTER 1
Physics and Measurements
mate the mass of a cell that has a diameter of 1.0 m, a
human kidney, and a y. Assume that a kidney is
roughly a sphere with a radius of 4.0 cm and that a
y is roughly a cylinder 4.0 mm long and 2.0 mm in
diameter.
69. The distance from the Sun to the nearest star is 4
1016 m. The Milky Way galaxy is roughly a disk of diameter 1021 m and thickness 1019 m. Find the order of
magnitude of the number of stars in the Milky Way. Assume the 4 10 16-m distance between the Sun and the
nearest star is typical.
70. The data in the following table represent measurements
of the masses and dimensions of solid cylinders of alu-
minum, copper, brass, tin, and iron. Use these data to
calculate the densities of these substances. Compare
your results for aluminum, copper, and iron with those
given in Table 1.5.
Substance
Aluminum
Copper
Brass
Tin
Iron
Mass (g)
Diameter
(cm)
Length (cm)
51.5
56.3
94.4
69.1
216.1
2.52
1.23
1.54
1.75
1.89
3.75
5.06
5.69
3.74
9.77
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
1.1
False. Dimensional analysis gives the units of the proportionality constant but provides no information about its
numerical value. For example, experiments show that
doubling the radius of a solid sphere increases its mass
8-fold, and tripling the radius increases the mass 27-fold.
Therefore, its mass is proportional to the cube of its radius. Because m
r 3we can write m k r 3. Dimen,
sional analysis shows that the proportionality constant k
must have units kg/m3, but to determine its numerical
value requires either experimental data or geometrical
reasoning.
1.2
Reporting all these digits implies you have determined
the location of the center of the chairs seat to the nearest 0.000 000 000 1 m. This roughly corresponds to
being able to count the atoms in your meter stick because each of them is about that size! It would probably
be better to record the measurement as 1.044 m: this indicates that you know the position to the nearest millimeter, assuming the meter stick has millimeter markings on its scale.
PUZZLER
In a moment the arresting cable will be
pulled taut, and the 140-mi/h landing of
this F/A-18 Hornet on the aircraft carrier
USS Nimitz will be brought to a sudden
conclusion. The pilot cuts power to the
engine, and the plane is stopped in less
than 2 s. If the cable had not been successfully engaged, the pilot would have
had to take off quickly before reaching
the end of the ight deck. Can the motion
of the plane be described quantitatively
in a way that is useful to ship and aircraft
designers and to pilots learning to land
on a postage stamp? (Courtesy of the
USS Nimitz/U.S. Navy)
chapter
Motion in One Dimension
Chapter Outline
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Displacement, Velocity, and Speed
Instantaneous Velocity and Speed
Acceleration
Motion Diagrams
2.6 Freely Falling Objects
2.7 (Optional) Kinematic Equations
Derived from Calculus
GOAL Problem-Solving Steps
One-Dimensional Motion with
Constant Acceleration
23
24
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
A
s a rst step in studying classical mechanics, we describe motion in terms of
space and time while ignoring the agents that caused that motion. This portion of classical mechanics is called kinematics. (The word kinematics has the
same root as cinema. Can you see why?) In this chapter we consider only motion in
one dimension. We rst dene displacement, velocity, and acceleration. Then, using these concepts, we study the motion of objects traveling in one dimension with
a constant acceleration.
From everyday experience we recognize that motion represents a continuous
change in the position of an object. In physics we are concerned with three types
of motion: translational, rotational, and vibrational. A car moving down a highway
is an example of translational motion, the Earths spin on its axis is an example of
rotational motion, and the back-and-forth movement of a pendulum is an example
of vibrational motion. In this and the next few chapters, we are concerned only
with translational motion. (Later in the book we shall discuss rotational and vibrational motions.)
In our study of translational motion, we describe the moving object as a particle regardless of its size. In general, a particle is a point-like mass having innitesimal size. For example, if we wish to describe the motion of the Earth around
the Sun, we can treat the Earth as a particle and obtain reasonably accurate data
about its orbit. This approximation is justied because the radius of the Earths orbit is large compared with the dimensions of the Earth and the Sun. As an example on a much smaller scale, it is possible to explain the pressure exerted by a gas
on the walls of a container by treating the gas molecules as particles.
2.1
TABLE 2.1
Position of the Car at
Various Times
Position
t(s)
x(m)
0
10
20
30
40
50
30
52
38
0
37
53
D ISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY, AND SPEED
The motion of a particle is completely known if the particles position in space is
known at all times. Consider a car moving back and forth along the x axis, as shown
in Figure 2.1a. When we begin collecting position data, the car is 30 m to the right
of a road sign. (Let us assume that all data in this example are known to two signicant gures. To convey this information, we should report the initial position as
3.0 101 m. We have written this value in this simpler form to make the discussion
easier to follow.) We start our clock and once every 10 s note the cars location relative to the sign. As you can see from Table 2.1, the car is moving to the right (which
we have dened as the positive direction) during the rst 10 s of motion, from position
to position . The position values now begin to decrease, however, because
the car is backing up from position
through position . In fact, at , 30 s after
we start measuring, the car is alongside the sign we are using as our origin of coordinates. It continues moving to the left and is more than 50 m to the left of the sign
when we stop recording information after our sixth data point. A graph of this information is presented in Figure 2.1b. Such a plot is called a position time graph.
If a particle is moving, we can easily determine its change in position. The displacement of a particle is dened as its change in position. As it moves from
an initial position x i to a nal position xf , its displacement is given by x f x i . We
use the Greek letter delta ( ) to denote the change in a quantity. Therefore, we
write the displacement, or change in position, of the particle as
x
xf
xi
(2.1)
From this denition we see that x is positive if xf is greater than x i and negative if
xf is less than x i .
2.1
60
60
Displacement, Velocity, and Speed
Figure 2.1 (a) A car moves back
and forth along a straight line
taken to be the x axis. Because we
are interested only in the cars
translational motion, we can treat it
as a particle. (b) Position time
graph for the motion of the
particle.
IT
LIM
/h
30 km
50
40
30
20
10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
x(m)
IT
LIM
/h
30 km
50
40
30
20
10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
x(m)
(a)
x(m)
60
x
40
t
20
0
20
40
60
t(s)
0
10
20
30
25
40
50
(b)
A very easy mistake to make is not to recognize the difference between displacement and distance traveled (Fig. 2.2). A baseball player hitting a home run
travels a distance of 360 ft in the trip around the bases. However, the players displacement is zero because his nal and initial positions are identical.
Displacement is an example of a vector quantity. Many other physical quantities, including velocity and acceleration, also are vectors. In general, a vector is a
physical quantity that requires the specication of both direction and magnitude. By contrast, a scalar is a quantity that has magnitude and no direction. In this chapter, we use plus and minus signs to indicate vector direction. We
can do this because the chapter deals with one-dimensional motion only; this
means that any object we study can be moving only along a straight line. For example, for horizontal motion, let us arbitrarily specify to the right as being the positive direction. It follows that any object always moving to the right undergoes a
26
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
Figure 2.2 Birds-eye view of a baseball
diamond. A batter who hits a home run
travels 360 ft as he rounds the bases, but his
displacement for the round trip is zero.
(Mark C. Burnett/Photo Researchers, Inc.)
positive displacement
x, and any object moving to the left undergoes a negative
displacement
x. We shall treat vectors in greater detail in Chapter 3.
There is one very important point that has not yet been mentioned. Note that
the graph in Figure 2.1b does not consist of just six data points but is actually a
smooth curve. The graph contains information about the entire 50-s interval during
which we watched the car move. It is much easier to see changes in position from
the graph than from a verbal description or even a table of numbers. For example, it
is clear that the car was covering more ground during the middle of the 50-s interval
than at the end. Between positions and , the car traveled almost 40 m, but during the last 10 s, between positions and , it moved less than half that far. A common way of comparing these different motions is to divide the displacement x that
occurs between two clock readings by the length of that particular time interval t.
This turns out to be a very useful ratio, one that we shall use many times. For convenience, the ratio has been given a special name average velocity. The average velocity vx of a particle is dened as the particles displacement x divided by
the time interval t during which that displacement occurred:
vx
Average velocity
3.2
x
t
(2.2)
where the subscript x indicates motion along the x axis. From this denition we
see that average velocity has dimensions of length divided by time (L/T) meters
per second in SI units.
Although the distance traveled for any motion is always positive, the average velocity of a particle moving in one dimension can be positive or negative, depending
on the sign of the displacement. (The time interval t is always positive.) If the coordinate of the particle increases in time (that is, if x f x i), then x is positive and
vx
x/ t is positive. This case corresponds to motion in the positive x direction.
If the coordinate decreases in time (that is, if x f x i), then x is negative and
hence v x is negative. This case corresponds to motion in the negative x direction.
2.2
27
Instantaneous Velocity and Speed
We can interpret average velocity geometrically by drawing a straight line between any two points on the position time graph in Figure 2.1b. This line forms
the hypotenuse of a right triangle of height x and base t. The slope of this line
is the ratio x/ t. For example, the line between positions
and
has a slope
equal to the average velocity of the car between those two times, (52 m 30 m)/
(10 s 0) 2.2 m/s.
In everyday usage, the terms speed and velocity are interchangeable. In physics,
however, there is a clear distinction between these two quantities. Consider a
marathon runner who runs more than 40 km, yet ends up at his starting point. His
average velocity is zero! Nonetheless, we need to be able to quantify how fast he
was running. A slightly different ratio accomplishes this for us. The average
speed of a particle, a scalar quantity, is dened as the total distance traveled divided by the total time it takes to travel that distance:
Average speed
total distance
total time
Average speed
The SI unit of average speed is the same as the unit of average velocity: meters
per second. However, unlike average velocity, average speed has no direction and
hence carries no algebraic sign.
Knowledge of the average speed of a particle tells us nothing about the details
of the trip. For example, suppose it takes you 8.0 h to travel 280 km in your car.
The average speed for your trip is 35 km/h. However, you most likely traveled at
various speeds during the trip, and the average speed of 35 km/h could result
from an innite number of possible speed values.
EXAMPLE 2.1
Calculating the Variables of Motion
Find the displacement, average velocity, and average speed of
the car in Figure 2.1a between positions and .
Solution The units of displacement must be meters, and
the numerical result should be of the same order of magnitude as the given position data (which means probably not 10
or 100 times bigger or smaller). From the position time
graph given in Figure 2.1b, note that x A 30 m at t A 0 s
and that x F
53 m at t F 50 s. Using these values along
with the denition of displacement, Equation 2.1, we nd
that
x
xF
xA
53 m
30 m
83 m
magnitude as the supplied data. A quick look at Figure 2.1a
indicates that this is the correct answer.
It is difcult to estimate the average velocity without completing the calculation, but we expect the units to be meters
per second. Because the car ends up to the left of where we
started taking data, we know the average velocity must be
negative. From Equation 2.2,
vx
53 m
50 s
xf
xi
tf
ti
30 m
0s
xA
tA
xF
tF
83 m
50 s
1.7 m/s
We nd the cars average speed for this trip by adding the
distances traveled and dividing by the total time:
This result means that the car ends up 83 m in the negative
direction (to the left, in this case) from where it started. This
number has the correct units and is of the same order of
2.2
x
t
Average speed
22 m
INSTANTANEOUS VELOCITY AND SPEED
Often we need to know the velocity of a particle at a particular instant in time,
rather than over a nite time interval. For example, even though you might want
to calculate your average velocity during a long automobile trip, you would be especially interested in knowing your velocity at the instant you noticed the police
52 m
50 s
53 m
2.5 m/s
28
60
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
x(m)
60
40
20
0
40
20
40
60
0
10
20
30
(a)
40
50
t(s)
(b)
Figure 2.3 (a) Graph representing the motion of the car in Figure 2.1. (b) An enlargement of
the upper left -hand corner of the graph shows how the blue line between positions and
approaches the green tangent line as point gets closer to point .
car parked alongside the road in front of you. In other words, you would like to be
able to specify your velocity just as precisely as you can specify your position by noting what is happening at a specic clock reading that is, at some specic instant.
It may not be immediately obvious how to do this. What does it mean to talk about
how fast something is moving if we freeze time and talk only about an individual
instant? This is a subtle point not thoroughly understood until the late 1600s. At
that time, with the invention of calculus, scientists began to understand how to describe an objects motion at any moment in time.
To see how this is done, consider Figure 2.3a. We have already discussed the
average velocity for the interval during which the car moved from position
to
position
( given by the slope of the dark blue line) and for the interval during
which it moved from
to
(represented by the slope of the light blue line).
Which of these two lines do you think is a closer approximation of the initial velocity of the car? The car starts out by moving to the right, which we dened to be the
positive direction. Therefore, being positive, the value of the average velocity during the
to
interval is probably closer to the initial value than is the value of
the average velocity during the
to
interval, which we determined to be negative in Example 2.1. Now imagine that we start with the dark blue line and slide
point to the left along the curve, toward point , as in Figure 2.3b. The line between the points becomes steeper and steeper, and as the two points get extremely
close together, the line becomes a tangent line to the curve, indicated by the green
line on the graph. The slope of this tangent line represents the velocity of the car
at the moment we started taking data, at point . What we have done is determine
the instantaneous velocity at that moment. In other words, the instantaneous velocity vx equals the limiting value of the ratio x/ t as t approaches zero:1
Denition of instantaneous
velocity
vx
3.3
1
lim
t:0
x
t
(2.3)
Note that the displacement x also approaches zero as t approaches zero. As x and t become
smaller and smaller, the ratio x/ t approaches a value equal to the slope of the line tangent to the
x -versus- t curve.
2.2
29
Instantaneous Velocity and Speed
In calculus notation, this limit is called the derivative of x with respect to t, written
dx/dt:
vx
lim
t:0
x
t
dx
dt
(2.4)
The instantaneous velocity can be positive, negative, or zero. When the slope
of the position time graph is positive, such as at any time during the rst 10 s in
Figure 2.3, vx is positive. After point , vx is negative because the slope is negative.
At the peak, the slope and the instantaneous velocity are zero.
From here on, we use the word velocity to designate instantaneous velocity.
When it is average velocity we are interested in, we always use the adjective average.
The instantaneous speed of a particle is dened as the magnitude of its
velocity. As with average speed, instantaneous speed has no direction associated
with it and hence carries no algebraic sign. For example, if one particle has a
velocity of 25 m/s along a given line and another particle has a velocity of
25 m/s along the same line, both have a speed2 of 25 m/s.
EXAMPLE 2.2
Average and Instantaneous Velocity
A particle moves along the x axis. Its x coordinate varies with
time according to the expression x
4t 2t 2, where x is in
3 The position time graph for this
meters and t is in seconds.
motion is shown in Figure 2.4. Note that the particle moves in
the negative x direction for the rst second of motion, is at rest
at the moment t 1 s, and moves in the positive x direction
for t 1 s. (a) Determine the displacement of the particle in
the time intervals t 0 to t 1 s and t 1 s to t 3 s.
x(m)
10
8
6
Slope = 2 m/s
2
Solution
During the rst time interval, we have a negative
slope and hence a negative velocity. Thus, we know that the
displacement between
and
must be a negative number
having units of meters. Similarly, we expect the displacement
between and to be positive.
In the rst time interval, we set t i t A 0 and
t f t B 1 s. Using Equation 2.1, with x
4t 2t 2, we obtain for the rst displacement
x A:B
xf
xi
[ 4(1)
xB
xA
2(1)2]
[ 4(0)
2
3
xi
t(s)
2
4
0
1
xD
xB
2
3
4
Figure 2.4
Position time graph for a particle having an x coordinate that varies in time according to the expression x
4t 2t 2.
[ 4(3)
To calculate the displacement during the second time interval, we set t i t B 1 s and t f t D 3 s:
xf
0
2(0)2]
2m
x B:D
Slope = 4 m/s
4
2(3)2]
[ 4(1)
2(1)2]
8m
These displacements can also be read directly from the position time graph.
As with velocity, we drop the adjective for instantaneous speed: Speed means instantaneous speed.
Simply to make it easier to read, we write the empirical equation as x
4t 2t 2 rather than as
x ( 4.00 m/s)t (2.00 m/s2)t 2.00. When an equation summarizes measurements, consider its coefcients to have as many signicant digits as other data quoted in a problem. Consider its coefcients to
have the units required for dimensional consistency. When we start our clocks at t 0 s, we usually do
not mean to limit the precision to a single digit. Consider any zero value in this book to have as many
signicant gures as you need.
30
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
(b) Calculate the average velocity during these two time
intervals.
These values agree with the slopes of the lines joining these
points in Figure 2.4.
Solution
(c) Find the instantaneous velocity of the particle at t
2.5 s.
In the rst time interval, t t f t i t B
t A 1 s. Therefore, using Equation 2.2 and the displacement
calculated in (a), we nd that
v x(A:B)
x A:B
t
2m
1s
In the second time interval, t
v x(B:D)
x B:D
t
Solution Certainly we can guess that this instantaneous velocity must be of the same order of magnitude as our previous results, that is, around 4 m/s. Examining the graph, we
see that the slope of the tangent at position
is greater than
the slope of the blue line connecting points
and . Thus,
we expect the answer to be greater than 4 m/s. By measuring
the slope of the position time graph at t 2.5 s, we nd that
2 m/s
2 s; therefore,
8m
2s
4 m/s
2.3
6 m/s
vx
ACCELERATION
In the last example, we worked with a situation in which the velocity of a particle
changed while the particle was moving. This is an extremely common occurrence.
(How constant is your velocity as you ride a city bus?) It is easy to quantify changes
in velocity as a function of time in exactly the same way we quantify changes in position as a function of time. When the velocity of a particle changes with time, the
particle is said to be accelerating. For example, the velocity of a car increases when
you step on the gas and decreases when you apply the brakes. However, we need a
better denition of acceleration than this.
Suppose a particle moving along the x axis has a velocity vxi at time ti and a velocity vxf at time tf , as in Figure 2.5a.
The average acceleration of the particle is dened as the change in velocity vx
divided by the time interval t during which that change occurred:
ax
Average acceleration
vx
t
vx f
tf
v xi
(2.5)
ti
As with velocity, when the motion being analyzed is one-dimensional, we can
use positive and negative signs to indicate the direction of the acceleration. Because the dimensions of velocity are L/T and the dimension of time is T, accelera-
= vx
ax
t
vx
Figure 2.5
(a) A particle moving along the x axis from to
has velocity vxi at t ti and velocity
vx f at t tf . (b) Velocity time
graph for the particle moving in a
straight line. The slope of the blue
straight line connecting and
is the average acceleration in the
time interval t t f t i .
vxf
vx
vxi
t
x
ti
v = vxi
tf
v = vxf
(a)
ti
tf
(b)
t
2.3
31
Acceleration
tion has dimensions of length divided by time squared, or L/T 2. The SI unit of acceleration is meters per second squared (m/s 2). It might be easier to interpret
these units if you think of them as meters per second per second. For example,
suppose an object has an acceleration of 2 m/s2. You should form a mental
image of the object having a velocity that is along a straight line and is increasing
by 2 m/s during every 1-s interval. If the object starts from rest, you should be
able to picture it moving at a velocity of 2 m/s after 1 s, at 4 m/s after 2 s, and
so on.
In some situations, the value of the average acceleration may be different over
different time intervals. It is therefore useful to dene the instantaneous acceleration
as the limit of the average acceleration as t approaches zero. This concept is analogous to the denition of instantaneous velocity discussed in the previous section.
If we imagine that point
is brought closer and closer to point
in Figure 2.5a
and take the limit of vx / t as t approaches zero, we obtain the instantaneous
acceleration:
dv x
dt
vx
t
lim
ax
t:0
(2.6)
Instantaneous acceleration
That is, the instantaneous acceleration equals the derivative of the velocity
with respect to time, which by denition is the slope of the velocity time graph
(Fig. 2.5b). Thus, we see that just as the velocity of a moving particle is the slope of
the particles x -t graph, the acceleration of a particle is the slope of the particles
vx -t graph. One can interpret the derivative of the velocity with respect to time as the
time rate of change of velocity. If ax is positive, then the acceleration is in the positive
x direction; if ax is negative, then the acceleration is in the negative x direction.
From now on we shall use the term acceleration to mean instantaneous acceleration. When we mean average acceleration, we shall always use the adjective
average.
Because vx dx/dt, the acceleration can also be written
ax
dvx
dt
d
dt
d 2x
dt 2
dx
dt
(2.7)
That is, in one-dimensional motion, the acceleration equals the second derivative of
x with respect to time.
Figure 2.6 illustrates how an acceleration time graph is related to a
velocity time graph. The acceleration at any time is the slope of the velocity time
graph at that time. Positive values of acceleration correspond to those points in
Figure 2.6a where the velocity is increasing in the positive x direction. The acceler-
vx
ax
tA
tB
(a)
tC
t
tC
tA
tB
(b)
t
Figure 2.6 Instantaneous acceleration can be obtained from the
vx -t graph. (a) The velocity time
graph for some motion. (b) The
acceleration time graph for the
same motion. The acceleration
given by the ax -t graph for any
value of t equals the slope of the
line tangent to the vx -t graph at the
same value of t.
32
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
ation reaches a maximum at time t A , when the slope of the velocity time graph is
a maximum. The acceleration then goes to zero at time t B , when the velocity is a
maximum (that is, when the slope of the vx -t graph is zero). The acceleration is
negative when the velocity is decreasing in the positive x direction, and it reaches
its most negative value at time t C .
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 2.3
Graphical Relationships Between x, vx , and ax
The position of an object moving along the x axis varies with
time as in Figure 2.7a. Graph the velocity versus time and the
acceleration versus time for the object.
Solution The velocity at any instant is the slope of the tangent to the x -t graph at that instant. Between t 0 and
t t A , the slope of the x -t graph increases uniformly, and so
the velocity increases linearly, as shown in Figure 2.7b. Between t A and t B , the slope of the x -t graph is constant, and so
the velocity remains constant. At t D , the slope of the x -t graph
is zero, so the velocity is zero at that instant. Between t D and
t E , the slope of the x -t graph and thus the velocity are negative and decrease uniformly in this interval. In the interval t E
to t F , the slope of the x -t graph is still negative, and at t F it
goes to zero. Finally, after t F , the slope of the x -t graph is
zero, meaning that the object is at rest for t t F .
The acceleration at any instant is the slope of the tangent
to the vx -t graph at that instant. The graph of acceleration
versus time for this object is shown in Figure 2.7c. The acceleration is constant and positive between 0 and t A, where the
slope of the vx -t graph is positive. It is zero between t A and t B
and for t t F because the slope of the vx -t graph is zero at
these times. It is negative between t B and t E because the slope
of the vx -t graph is negative during this interval.
Figure 2.7 (a) Position time graph for an object moving along
the x axis. (b) The velocity time graph for the object is obtained by
measuring the slope of the position time graph at each instant.
(c) The acceleration time graph for the object is obtained by measuring the slope of the velocity time graph at each instant.
x
(a)
tA
tB
tC
tD
tE tF
tA
O
tB
tC
tD
tE tF
t
vx
(b)
O
t
ax
(c)
O
tA
tB
tE
tF
t
Quick Quiz 2.1
Make a velocity time graph for the car in Figure 2.1a and use your graph to determine
whether the car ever exceeds the speed limit posted on the road sign (30 km/h).
EXAMPLE 2.4
Average and Instantaneous Acceleration
The velocity of a particle moving along the x axis varies in
time according to the expression vx (40 5t 2) m/s, where
t is in seconds. (a) Find the average acceleration in the time
interval t 0 to t 2.0 s.
Solution
Figure 2.8 is a vx -t graph that was created from
the velocity versus time expression given in the problem statement. Because the slope of the entire vx -t curve is negative,
we expect the acceleration to be negative.
2.3
vx(m/s)
40
33
Acceleration
v xf
v xi
vxB
vxA
tf
ax
ti
tB
tA
(20
40) m/s
(2.0
0) s
10 m/s2
30
Slope = 20 m/s2
20
The negative sign is consistent with our expectations
namely, that the average acceleration, which is represented by
the slope of the line (not shown) joining the initial and nal
points on the velocity time graph, is negative.
10
(b) Determine the acceleration at t
t(s)
0
2.0 s.
Solution
The velocity at any time t is vxi
t is
5t 2) m/s, and the velocity at any later time t
10
vxf
20
40
t)2
5(t
40
5t 2
(40
5( t)2
10t t
Therefore, the change in velocity over the time interval t is
30
0
1
2
3
4
vx
Figure 2.8
The velocity time graph for a particle moving along
the x axis according to the expression vx (40 5t 2) m/s. The acceleration at t 2 s is equal to the slope of the blue tangent line at
that time.
ax
lim
t:0
ax
vxA
vxB
(40
(40
5t A2) m/s
5t B
2)
m/s
[40
5(0)2] m/s
[40
5(2.0)2]
40 m/s
m/s
20 m/s
Therefore, the average acceleration in the specied time interval t t B t A 2.0 s is
vxi
vx
t
1
Applying this rule to Example 2.4, in which vx
dv x /dt
10t.
40
t:0
5 t)
10t m/s2
20 m/s2
What we have done by comparing the average acceleration
during the interval between
and
( 10 m/s2) with the
2) is compare the slope of
instantaneous value at ( 20 m/s
the line (not shown) joining
and
with the slope of the
tangent at .
Note that the acceleration is not constant in this example.
Situations involving constant acceleration are treated in Section 2.5.
At n
nAt n
lim ( 10t
( 10)(2.0) m/s2
where A and n are constants. (This is a very common functional form.) The derivative of x with respect to t is
dx
dt
5( t)2] m/s
2.0 s,
So far we have evaluated the derivatives of a function by starting with the denition of the function and then taking the limit of a specic ratio. Those of you familiar with calculus should recognize that there are specic rules for taking derivatives. These rules, which are listed in Appendix B.6, enable us to evaluate
derivatives quickly. For instance, one rule tells us that the derivative of any constant is zero. As another example, suppose x is proportional to some power of t,
such as in the expression
x
[ 10t t
Dividing this expression by t and taking the limit of the result as t approaches zero gives the acceleration at any time t :
Therefore, at t
We nd the velocities at t i t A 0 and tf t B 2.0 s by
substituting these values of t into the expression for the velocity:
vxf
5t 2, we nd that a x
34
CHAPTER 2
2.4
Motion in One Dimension
MOTION DIAGRAMS
The concepts of velocity and acceleration are often confused with each other, but
in fact they are quite different quantities. It is instructive to use motion diagrams
to describe the velocity and acceleration while an object is in motion. In order not
to confuse these two vector quantities, for which both magnitude and direction
are important, we use red for velocity vectors and violet for acceleration vectors, as
shown in Figure 2.9. The vectors are sketched at several instants during the motion of the object, and the time intervals between adjacent positions are assumed
to be equal. This illustration represents three sets of strobe photographs of a car
moving from left to right along a straight roadway. The time intervals between
ashes are equal in each diagram.
In Figure 2.9a, the images of the car are equally spaced, showing us that the
car moves the same distance in each time interval. Thus, the car moves with constant positive velocity and has zero acceleration.
In Figure 2.9b, the images become farther apart as time progresses. In this
case, the velocity vector increases in time because the cars displacement between
adjacent positions increases in time. The car is moving with a positive velocity and a
positive acceleration.
In Figure 2.9c, we can tell that the car slows as it moves to the right because its
displacement between adjacent images decreases with time. In this case, the car
moves to the right with a constant negative acceleration. The velocity vector decreases in time and eventually reaches zero. From this diagram we see that the acceleration and velocity vectors are not in the same direction. The car is moving
with a positive velocity but with a negative acceleration.
You should be able to construct motion diagrams for a car that moves initially
to the left with a constant positive or negative acceleration.
v
(a)
v
(b)
a
v
(c)
a
Figure 2.9 (a) Motion diagram for a car moving at constant velocity (zero acceleration).
(b) Motion diagram for a car whose constant acceleration is in the direction of its velocity. The
velocity vector at each instant is indicated by a red arrow, and the constant acceleration by a violet arrow. (c) Motion diagram for a car whose constant acceleration is in the direction opposite the
velocity at each instant.
2.5
35
One-Dimensional Motion with Constant Acceleration
Quick Quiz 2.2
(a) If a car is traveling eastward, can its acceleration be westward? (b) If a car is slowing
down, can its acceleration be positive?
2.5
ONE-DIMENSIONAL MOTION WITH
CONSTANT ACCELERATION
If the acceleration of a particle varies in time, its motion can be complex and difcult to analyze. However, a very common and simple type of one-dimensional motion is that in which the acceleration is constant. When this is the case, the average
acceleration over any time interval equals the instantaneous acceleration at any instant within the interval, and the velocity changes at the same rate throughout the
motion.
If we replace a x by ax in Equation 2.5 and take t i 0 and tf to be any later time
t, we nd that
ax
vx f
vxi
t
or
vx f
vxi
axt
(2.8)
(for constant ax )
Velocity as a function of time
This powerful expression enables us to determine an objects velocity at any time
t if we know the objects initial velocity and its (constant) acceleration. A
velocity time graph for this constant-acceleration motion is shown in Figure
2.10a. The graph is a straight line, the (constant) slope of which is the acceleration
ax ; this is consistent with the fact that ax dvx /dt is a constant. Note that the slope
is positive; this indicates a positive acceleration. If the acceleration were negative,
then the slope of the line in Figure 2.10a would be negative.
When the acceleration is constant, the graph of acceleration versus time (Fig.
2.10b) is a straight line having a slope of zero.
Quick Quiz 2.3
Describe the meaning of each term in Equation 2.8.
vx
ax
Slope = ax
Slope = 0
a xt
vxi
x
Slope = vxf
vxf
t
0
(a)
xi
ax
vxi
t
t
0
(b)
Figure 2.10 An object moving along the x axis with constant acceleration ax . (a) The
velocity time graph. (b) The acceleration time graph. (c) The position time graph.
Slope = vxi
t
0
(c)
t
36
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
Because velocity at constant acceleration varies linearly in time according to
Equation 2.8, we can express the average velocity in any time interval as the arithmetic mean of the initial velocity vxi and the nal velocity vx f :
v xi
vx
vx f
(2.9)
(for constant ax )
2
Note that this expression for average velocity applies only in situations in which the
acceleration is constant.
We can now use Equations 2.1, 2.2, and 2.9 to obtain the displacement of any
object as a function of time. Recalling that x in Equation 2.2 represents xf xi ,
and now using t in place of t (because we take ti 0), we can say
Displacement as a function of
velocity and time
xf
xi
1
2 (vxi
vxt
(for constant ax )
vx f )t
(2.10)
We can obtain another useful expression for displacement at constant acceleration by substituting Equation 2.8 into Equation 2.10:
xf
vx f
t
t
(d)
vx
xi
v xit
dx f
d
dt
dt
xf
(e)
vx
ax
1
(v
2 xi
xi
vx f 2
t
(b)
a x t)t
1
2
2a x t
(2.11)
xi
1
a t2
2x
v xi t
v xi
axt
Finally, we can obtain an expression for the nal velocity that does not contain
a time interval by substituting the value of t from Equation 2.8 into Equation 2.10:
ax
t
v xi
The position time graph for motion at constant (positive) acceleration shown in
Figure 2.10c is obtained from Equation 2.11. Note that the curve is a parabola. The
slope of the tangent line to this curve at t t i 0 equals the initial velocity vxi , and
the slope of the tangent line at any later time t equals the velocity at that time, vx f .
We can check the validity of Equation 2.11 by moving the xi term to the righthand side of the equation and differentiating the equation with respect to time:
ax
(a)
1
2 (v xi
xf
vx
xi
vxi2
vxf)
2ax(x f
vx f
vx f 2
vxi
2ax
ax
x i)
vxi2
(for constant ax )
(2.12)
For motion at zero acceleration, we see from Equations 2.8 and 2.11 that
vx f
xf
vxi vx
x i vxt
when ax
0
That is, when acceleration is zero, velocity is constant and displacement changes
linearly with time.
t
(c)
t
(f )
Figure 2.11 Parts (a), (b), and
(c) are vx -t graphs of objects in
one-dimensional motion. The possible accelerations of each object as
a function of time are shown in
scrambled order in (d), (e), and
(f).
Quick Quiz 2.4
In Figure 2.11, match each vx -t graph with the a x -t graph that best describes the motion.
Equations 2.8 through 2.12 are kinematic expressions that may be used to
solve any problem involving one-dimensional motion at constant accelera-
2.5
One-Dimensional Motion with Constant Acceleration
37
TABLE 2.2 Kinematic Equations for Motion in a Straight Line
Under Constant Acceleration
Equation
Information Given by Equation
vxf
vxi a x t
xf
x i 1(vxi vx f )t
2
xf
x i vxi t 1a x t 2
2
vx f 2 vxi 2 2a x (xf
x i)
Velocity as a function of time
Displacement as a function of velocity and time
Displacement as a function of time
Velocity as a function of displacement
Note: Motion is along the x axis.
tion. Keep in mind that these relationships were derived from the denitions of
velocity and acceleration, together with some simple algebraic manipulations and
the requirement that the acceleration be constant.
The four kinematic equations used most often are listed in Table 2.2 for convenience. The choice of which equation you use in a given situation depends on
what you know beforehand. Sometimes it is necessary to use two of these equations
to solve for two unknowns. For example, suppose initial velocity vxi and acceleration ax are given. You can then nd (1) the velocity after an interval t has elapsed,
using v x f v xi a x t, and (2) the displacement after an interval t has elapsed, using x f x i v xi t 1a x t 2. You should recognize that the quantities that vary dur2
ing the motion are velocity, displacement, and time.
You will get a great deal of practice in the use of these equations by solving a
number of exercises and problems. Many times you will discover that more than
one method can be used to obtain a solution. Remember that these equations of
kinematics cannot be used in a situation in which the acceleration varies with time.
They can be used only when the acceleration is constant.
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 2.5
The Velocity of Different Objects
Consider the following one-dimensional motions: (a) A ball
thrown directly upward rises to a highest point and falls back
into the throwers hand. (b) A race car starts from rest and
speeds up to 100 m/s. (c) A spacecraft drifts through space at
constant velocity. Are there any points in the motion of these
objects at which the instantaneous velocity is the same as the
average velocity over the entire motion? If so, identify the
point(s).
(b) The cars average velocity cannot be evaluated unambiguously with the information given, but it must be some value
between 0 and 100 m/s. Because the car will have every instantaneous velocity between 0 and 100 m/s at some time
during the interval, there must be some instant at which the
instantaneous velocity is equal to the average velocity.
Solution (a) The average velocity for the thrown ball is
zero because the ball returns to the starting point; thus its
displacement is zero. (Remember that average velocity is de-
(c) Because the spacecrafts instantaneous velocity is constant, its instantaneous velocity at any time and its average velocity over any time interval are the same.
EXAMPLE 2.6
ned as x/ t.) There is one point at which the instantaneous velocity is zero at the top of the motion.
Entering the Trafc Flow
(a) Estimate your average acceleration as you drive up the entrance ramp to an interstate highway.
Solution This problem involves more than our usual
amount of estimating! We are trying to come up with a value
of ax , but that value is hard to guess directly. The other three
variables involved in kinematics are position, velocity, and
time. Velocity is probably the easiest one to approximate. Let
us assume a nal velocity of 100 km/h, so that you can merge
with trafc. We multiply this value by 1 000 to convert kilome-
38
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
ters to meters and then divide by 3 600 to convert hours to
seconds. These two calculations together are roughly equivalent to dividing by 3. In fact, let us just say that the nal velocity is vx f 30 m/s. (Remember, you can get away with this
type of approximation and with dropping digits when performing mental calculations. If you were starting with British
units, you could approximate 1 mi/h as roughly
0.5 m/s and continue from there.)
Now we assume that you started up the ramp at about onethird your nal velocity, so that vxi 10 m/s. Finally, we assume that it takes about 10 s to get from vxi to vxf , basing this
guess on our previous experience in automobiles. We can
then nd the acceleration, using Equation 2.8:
ax
vxi
vxf
t
30 m/s 10 m/s
10 s
2 m/s2
Granted, we made many approximations along the way, but
this type of mental effort can be surprisingly useful and often
EXAMPLE 2.7
yields results that are not too different from those derived
from careful measurements.
(b) How far did you go during the rst half of the time interval during which you accelerated?
Solution We can calculate the distance traveled during
the rst 5 s from Equation 2.11:
xf
xi
v xi t
50 m
1
2
2a x t
25 m
(10 m/s)(5 s)
1
2 (2
m/s2)(5 s)2
75 m
This result indicates that if you had not accelerated, your initial velocity of 10 m/s would have resulted in a 50-m movement up the ramp during the rst 5 s. The additional 25 m is
the result of your increasing velocity during that interval.
Do not be afraid to attempt making educated guesses and
doing some fairly drastic number rounding to simplify mental
calculations. Physicists engage in this type of thought analysis
all the time.
Carrier Landing
A jet lands on an aircraft carrier at 140 mi/h ( 63 m/s).
(a) What is its acceleration if it stops in 2.0 s?
(b) What is the displacement of the plane while it is stopping?
Solution We dene our x axis as the direction of motion
of the jet. A careful reading of the problem reveals that in addition to being given the initial speed of 63 m/s, we also
know that the nal speed is zero. We also note that we are
not given the displacement of the jet while it is slowing
down. Equation 2.8 is the only equation in Table 2.2 that does
not involve displacement, and so we use it to nd the acceleration:
Solution We can now use any of the other three equations
in Table 2.2 to solve for the displacement. Let us choose
Equation 2.10:
ax
vxi
vx f
t
EXAMPLE 2.8
0
63 m/s
2.0 s
31 m/s2
xf
xi
1
2 (vxi
vx f )t
1
2 (63
m/s
0)(2.0 s)
63 m
If the plane travels much farther than this, it might fall into
the ocean. Although the idea of using arresting cables to enable planes to land safely on ships originated at about the
time of the First World War, the cables are still a vital part of
the operation of modern aircraft carriers.
Watch Out for the Speed Limit!
A car traveling at a constant speed of 45.0 m/s passes a
trooper hidden behind a billboard. One second after the
speeding car passes the billboard, the trooper sets out
from the billboard to catch it, accelerating at a constant
rate of 3.00 m/s2. How long does it take her to overtake the
car?
Solution A careful reading lets us categorize this as a constant-acceleration problem. We know that after the 1-s delay
in starting, it will take the trooper 15 additional seconds to
accelerate up to 45.0 m/s. Of course, she then has to continue to pick up speed (at a rate of 3.00 m/s per second) to
catch up to the car. While all this is going on, the car continues to move. We should therefore expect our result to be well
over 15 s. A sketch (Fig. 2.12) helps clarify the sequence of
events.
First, we write expressions for the position of each vehicle
as a function of time. It is convenient to choose the position
of the billboard as the origin and to set t B 0 as the time the
trooper begins moving. At that instant, the car has already
traveled a distance of 45.0 m because it has traveled at a constant speed of vx 45.0 m/s for 1 s. Thus, the initial position
of the speeding car is x B 45.0 m.
Because the car moves with constant speed, its accelera-
2.5
39
One-Dimensional Motion with Constant Acceleration
The trooper starts from rest at t 0 and accelerates at
3.00 m/s2 away from the origin. Hence, her position after any
time interval t can be found from Equation 2.11:
v x car = 45.0 m/s
a x car = 0
ax trooper = 3.00 m/s 2
1.00 s
tB = 0
xf
tC = ?
xi
v xi t
x trooper
tA =
0
0t
1
2
2a x t
1
2
2 a xt
1
2 (3.00
m/s2)t 2
The trooper overtakes the car at the instant her position
matches that of the car, which is position :
x trooper
1
2 (3.00
m/s2)t 2
x car
45.0 m
(45.0 m/s)t
This gives the quadratic equation
1.50t 2
Figure 2.12
A speeding car passes a hidden police ofcer.
tion is zero, and applying Equation 2.11 (with a x
for the cars position at any time t :
x car
xB
v x cart
45.0 m
0) gives
(45.0 m/s)t
A quick check shows that at t 0, this expression gives the
cars correct initial position when the trooper begins to
move: x car x B 45.0 m. Looking at limiting cases to see
whether they yield expected values is a very useful way to
make sure that you are obtaining reasonable results.
2.6
45.0t
45.0
The positive solution of this equation is t
0
31.0 s .
(For help in solving quadratic equations, see Appendix B.2.)
Note that in this 31.0-s time interval, the trooper travels a distance of about 1440 m. [This distance can be calculated from the cars constant speed: (45.0 m/s)(31 1) s
1 440 m.]
Exercise
This problem can be solved graphically. On the
same graph, plot position versus time for each vehicle, and
from the intersection of the two curves determine the time at
which the trooper overtakes the car.
FREELY FALLING OBJECTS
It is now well known that, in the absence of air resistance, all objects dropped
near the Earths surface fall toward the Earth with the same constant acceleration
under the inuence of the Earths gravity. It was not until about 1600 that this
conclusion was accepted. Before that time, the teachings of the great philosopher Aristotle (384 322 B.C.) had held that heavier objects fall faster than lighter
ones.
It was the Italian Galileo Galilei (1564 1642) who originated our presentday ideas concerning falling objects. There is a legend that he demonstrated the
law of falling objects by observing that two different weights dropped simultaneously from the Leaning Tower of Pisa hit the ground at approximately the same
time. Although there is some doubt that he carried out this particular experiment, it is well established that Galileo performed many experiments on objects
moving on inclined planes. In his experiments he rolled balls down a slight incline and measured the distances they covered in successive time intervals. The
purpose of the incline was to reduce the acceleration; with the acceleration reduced, Galileo was able to make accurate measurements of the time intervals. By
gradually increasing the slope of the incline, he was finally able to draw conclusions about freely falling objects because a freely falling ball is equivalent to a
ball moving down a vertical incline.
Astronaut David Scott released a
hammer and a feather simultaneously, and they fell in unison to the
lunar surface. (Courtesy of NASA)
40
CHAPTER 2
QuickLab
You might want to try the following experiment. Simultaneously drop a coin
and a crumpled-up piece of paper from the same height. If the effects of air resistance are negligible, both will have the same motion and will hit the oor at the
same time. In the idealized case, in which air resistance is absent, such motion is
referred to as free fall. If this same experiment could be conducted in a vacuum, in
which air resistance is truly negligible, the paper and coin would fall with the same
acceleration even when the paper is not crumpled. On August 2, 1971, such a
demonstration was conducted on the Moon by astronaut David Scott. He simultaneously released a hammer and a feather, and in unison they fell to the lunar surface. This demonstration surely would have pleased Galileo!
When we use the expression freely falling object, we do not necessarily refer to
an object dropped from rest. A freely falling object is any object moving
freely under the inuence of gravity alone, regardless of its initial motion.
Objects thrown upward or downward and those released from rest are all
falling freely once they are released. Any freely falling object experiences
an acceleration directed downward, regardless of its initial motion.
We shall denote the magnitude of the free-fall acceleration by the symbol g. The
value of g near the Earths surface decreases with increasing altitude. Furthermore,
slight variations in g occur with changes in latitude. It is common to dene up as
the y direction and to use y as the position variable in the kinematic equations.
At the Earths surface, the value of g is approximately 9.80 m/s2. Unless stated
otherwise, we shall use this value for g when performing calculations. For making
quick estimates, use g 10 m/s2.
If we neglect air resistance and assume that the free-fall acceleration does not
vary with altitude over short vertical distances, then the motion of a freely falling
object moving vertically is equivalent to motion in one dimension under constant
acceleration. Therefore, the equations developed in Section 2.5 for objects moving
with constant acceleration can be applied. The only modication that we need to
make in these equations for freely falling objects is to note that the motion is in
the vertical direction (the y direction) rather than in the horizontal (x) direction
and that the acceleration is downward and has a magnitude of 9.80 m/s2. Thus, we
g
9.80 m/s2, where the minus sign means that the acceleraalways take a y
tion of a freely falling object is downward. In Chapter 14 we shall study how to deal
with variations in g with altitude.
Use a pencil to poke a hole in the
bottom of a paper or polystyrene cup.
Cover the hole with your nger and
ll the cup with water. Hold the cup
up in front of you and release it. Does
water come out of the hole while the
cup is falling? Why or why not?
Denition of free fall
Free-fall acceleration
g 9.80 m/s2
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 2.9
Motion in One Dimension
The Daring Sky Divers
A sky diver jumps out of a hovering helicopter. A few seconds
later, another sky diver jumps out, and they both fall along
the same vertical line. Ignore air resistance, so that both sky
divers fall with the same acceleration. Does the difference in
their speeds stay the same throughout the fall? Does the vertical distance between them stay the same throughout the fall?
If the two divers were connected by a long bungee cord,
would the tension in the cord increase, lessen, or stay the
same during the fall?
Solution At any given instant, the speeds of the divers are
different because one had a head start. In any time interval
t after this instant, however, the two divers increase their
speeds by the same amount because they have the same acceleration. Thus, the difference in their speeds remains the
same throughout the fall.
The rst jumper always has a greater speed than the second. Thus, in a given time interval, the rst diver covers a
greater distance than the second. Thus, the separation distance between them increases.
Once the distance between the divers reaches the length
of the bungee cord, the tension in the cord begins to increase. As the tension increases, the distance between the
divers becomes greater and greater.
2.6
EXAMPLE 2.10
41
Freely Falling Objects
Describing the Motion of a Tossed Ball
A ball is tossed straight up at 25 m/s. Estimate its velocity at
1-s intervals.
Solution Let us choose the upward direction to be positive. Regardless of whether the ball is moving upward or
downward, its vertical velocity changes by approximately
10 m/s for every second it remains in the air. It starts out at
25 m/s. After 1 s has elapsed, it is still moving upward but at
15 m/s because its acceleration is downward (downward acceleration causes its velocity to decrease). After another second, its upward velocity has dropped to 5 m/s. Now comes
the tricky part after another half second, its velocity is zero.
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 2.11
The ball has gone as high as it will go. After the last half of
this 1-s interval, the ball is moving at 5 m/s. (The minus
sign tells us that the ball is now moving in the negative direction, that is, downward. Its velocity has changed from 5 m/s
to 5 m/s during that 1-s interval. The change in velocity is
still 5 [ 5]
10 m/s in that second.) It continues
downward, and after another 1 s has elapsed, it is falling at a
velocity of 15 m/s. Finally, after another 1 s, it has reached
its original starting point and is moving downward at
25 m/s. If the ball had been tossed vertically off a cliff so
that it could continue downward, its velocity would continue
to change by about 10 m/s every second.
Follow the Bouncing Ball
A tennis ball is dropped from shoulder height (about 1.5 m)
and bounces three times before it is caught. Sketch graphs of
its position, velocity, and acceleration as functions of time,
with the y direction dened as upward.
changes substantially during a very short time interval, and so
the acceleration must be quite great. This corresponds to the
very steep upward lines on the velocity time graph and to
the spikes on the acceleration time graph.
Solution
For our sketch let us stretch things out horizontally so that we can see what is going on. (Even if the ball
were moving horizontally, this motion would not affect its vertical motion.)
From Figure 2.13 we see that the ball is in contact with the
oor at points , , and . Because the velocity of the ball
changes from negative to positive three times during these
bounces, the slope of the position time graph must change
in the same way. Note that the time interval between bounces
decreases. Why is that?
During the rest of the balls motion, the slope of the
velocity time graph should be 9.80 m/s2. The acceleration time graph is a horizontal line at these times because
the acceleration does not change when the ball is in free fall.
When the ball is in contact with the oor, the velocity
tA
tB
tC
tD
tE
tF
y (m)
1
t(s)
0
vy (m/s) 4
t(s)
0
1.5
4
1.0
t(s)
0.5
ay (m/s2) 4
0.0
(a)
Figure 2.13 (a) A ball is dropped from a height of 1.5 m and
bounces from the oor. (The horizontal motion is not considered
here because it does not affect the vertical motion.) (b) Graphs of
position, velocity, and acceleration versus time.
8
12
(b)
42
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
Quick Quiz 2.5
Which values represent the balls velocity and acceleration at points
2.13?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
EXAMPLE 2.12
vy
vy
vy
vy
tB
in Figure
Not a Bad Throw for a Rookie!
Solution (a) As the stone travels from to , its velocity
must change by 20 m/s because it stops at . Because gravity
causes vertical velocities to change by about 10 m/s for every
second of free fall, it should take the stone about 2 s to go
from to in our drawing. (In a problem like this, a sketch
denitely helps you organize your thoughts.) To calculate the
time t B at which the stone reaches maximum height, we use
Equation 2.8, v y B v y A a y t, noting that vy B 0 and setting
the start of our clock readings at t A 0:
t
, and
0, a y 0
0, a y 9.80 m/s2
0, a y
9.80 m/s2
9.80 m/s, a y 0
A stone thrown from the top of a building is given an initial
velocity of 20.0 m/s straight upward. The building is 50.0 m
high, and the stone just misses the edge of the roof on its way
down, as shown in Figure 2.14. Using t A 0 as the time the
stone leaves the throwers hand at position , determine
(a) the time at which the stone reaches its maximum height,
(b) the maximum height, (c) the time at which the stone returns to the height from which it was thrown, (d) the velocity
of the stone at this instant, and (e) the velocity and position
of the stone at t 5.00 s.
20.0 m/s
,
( 9.80 m/s2)t
20.0 m/s
9.80 m/s2
t B = 2.04 s
y B = 20.4 m
vy B = 0
tA = 0
yA = 0
vy A = 20.0 m/s
t C = 4.08 s
yC = 0
vy C = 20.0 m/s
0
2.04 s
50.0 m
Our estimate was pretty close.
t D = 5.00 s
y D = 22.5 s
vy D = 29.0 m/s
(b) Because the average velocity for this rst interval is
10 m/s (the average of 20 m/s and 0 m/s) and because it
travels for about 2 s, we expect the stone to travel about 20 m.
By substituting our time interval into Equation 2.11, we can
nd the maximum height as measured from the position of
the thrower, where we set y i y A 0:
y max
yB
yB
vy A t
1
2
2a y t
(20.0 m/s)(2.04 s)
1
2(
9.80 m/s2)(2.04 s)2
20.4 m
t E = 5.83 s
y E = 50.0 m
vy E = 37.1 m/s
Our free-fall estimates are very accurate.
(c) There is no reason to believe that the stones motion
from
to
is anything other than the reverse of its motion
Figure 2.14 Position and velocity versus time for a freely falling
stone thrown initially upward with a velocity v yi 20.0 m/s.
2.7
from
to . Thus, the time needed for it to go from
to
should be twice the time needed for it to go from
to .
When the stone is back at the height from which it was
thrown (position ), the y coordinate is again zero. Using
Equation 2.11, with y f y C 0 and y i y A 0, we obtain
yC
yA
0
vy A t
1
2
2a y t
vy D
One solution is t
vy B
4.90t)
0
0, corresponding to the time the stone
starts its motion. The other solution is t
0 m/s
a yt
(d) Again, we expect everything at
to be the same as it
is at , except that the velocity is now in the opposite direction. The value for t found in (c) can be inserted into Equation 2.8 to give
vy D
vyA
a yt
20.0 m/s
20.0 m/s
a yt
( 9.80 m/s2)(5.00 s)
29.0 m/s
To demonstrate the power of our kinematic equations, we
can use Equation 2.11 to nd the position of the stone at
t D 5.00 s by considering the change in position between a
different pair of positions,
and . In this case, the time is
tD tC:
yD
yC
v y Ct
0m
vy A
( 9.80 m/s2)(4.08 s)
1
2(
20.0 m/s
1
2
2a y t
( 20.0 m/s)(5.00 s
9.80 m/s2)(5.00 s
4.08 s)
4.08 s)2
22.5 m
The velocity of the stone when it arrives back at its original
height is equal in magnitude to its initial velocity but opposite in direction. This indicates that the motion is symmetric.
Exercise
(e) For this part we consider what happens as the stone
falls from position , where it had zero vertical velocity, to
Answer
Find (a) the velocity of the stone just before it hits
the ground at
and (b) the total time the stone is in the air.
(a)
37.1 m/s
Optional Section
2.7
2.04 s)
We could just as easily have made our calculation between
positions and by making sure we use the correct time interval, t t D t A 5.00 s:
4.08 s, which is
the solution we are after. Notice that it is double the value we
calculated for t B .
vy C
( 9.80 m/s2)(5.00 s
29.0 m/s
This is a quadratic equation and so has two solutions for
t t C . The equation can be factored to give
t(20.0
position . Because the elapsed time for this part of the
motion is about 3 s, we estimate that the acceleration due
to gravity will have changed the speed by about 30 m/s.
We can calculate this from Equation 2.8, where we take
t tD tB:
4.90t 2
20.0t
43
Kinematic Equations Derived from Calculus
KINEMATIC EQUATIONS DERIVED FROM CALCULUS
This is an optional section that assumes the reader is familiar with the techniques
of integral calculus. If you have not yet studied integration in your calculus course,
you should skip this section or cover it after you become familiar with integration.
The velocity of a particle moving in a straight line can be obtained if its position
as a function of time is known. Mathematically, the velocity equals the derivative of
the position coordinate with respect to time. It is also possible to nd the displacement of a particle if its velocity is known as a function of time. In calculus, the procedure used to perform this task is referred to either as integration or as nding the
antiderivative. Graphically, it is equivalent to nding the area under a curve.
Suppose the vx -t graph for a particle moving along the x axis is as shown in
Figure 2.15. Let us divide the time interval t f t i into many small intervals, each of
duration tn . From the denition of average velocity we see that the displacement
during any small interval, such as the one shaded in Figure 2.15, is given by
x n v xn t n , where v xn is the average velocity in that interval. Therefore, the displacement during this small interval is simply the area of the shaded rectangle.
(b) 5.83 s
44
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
vx
Area = vxn tn
vxn
ti
tf
t
t n
Figure 2.15 Velocity versus time for a particle moving along the x axis. The area of the shaded
rectangle is equal to the displacement x in the time interval tn , while the total area under the
curve is the total displacement of the particle.
The total displacement for the interval t f
tangles:
x
t i is the sum of the areas of all the recv xn t n
n
where the symbol (upper case Greek sigma) signies a sum over all terms. In
this case, the sum is taken over all the rectangles from t i to tf . Now, as the intervals
are made smaller and smaller, the number of terms in the sum increases and the
sum approaches a value equal to the area under the velocity time graph. Therefore, in the limit n : , or t n : 0, the displacement is
x
lim
tn:0 n
vxn t n
(2.13)
or
Displacement
area under the vx -t graph
Note that we have replaced the average velocity v xn with the instantaneous velocity
vxn in the sum. As you can see from Figure 2.15, this approximation is clearly valid
in the limit of very small intervals. We conclude that if we know the vx -t graph for
motion along a straight line, we can obtain the displacement during any time interval by measuring the area under the curve corresponding to that time interval.
The limit of the sum shown in Equation 2.13 is called a denite integral and
is written
tf
Denite integral
lim
tn:0 n
vxn t n
ti
vx(t) dt
(2.14)
where vx(t ) denotes the velocity at any time t. If the explicit functional form of
vx(t ) is known and the limits are given, then the integral can be evaluated.
Sometimes the vx -t graph for a moving particle has a shape much simpler than
that shown in Figure 2.15. For example, suppose a particle moves at a constant ve-
2.7
vx
vx = vxi = constant
Kinematic Equations Derived from Calculus
Figure 2.16 The velocity time curve
for a particle moving with constant velocity vxi . The displacement of the particle
during the time interval t f t i is equal to
the area of the shaded rectangle.
t
vxi
vxi
ti
t
tf
locity vxi . In this case, the vx -t graph is a horizontal line, as shown in Figure 2.16,
and its displacement during the time interval t is simply the area of the shaded
rectangle:
x
(when v x f
v xi t
v xi
constant)
As another example, consider a particle moving with a velocity that is proportional to t, as shown in Figure 2.17. Taking vx a xt, where ax is the constant of proportionality (the acceleration), we nd that the displacement of the particle during the time interval t 0 to t t A is equal to the area of the shaded triangle in
Figure 2.17:
1
2 (t A)(a xt A)
x
1
2
2a x t A
Kinematic Equations
We now use the dening equations for acceleration and velocity to derive two of
our kinematic equations, Equations 2.8 and 2.11.
The dening equation for acceleration (Eq. 2.6),
ax
may be written as dv x
dvx
dt
a x dt or, in terms of an integral (or antiderivative), as
vx
a x dt
C1
vx
v x = a xt
a xtA
t
tA
Figure 2.17 The velocity time curve for a
particle moving with a velocity that is proportional to the time.
45
46
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
where C1 is a constant of integration. For the special case in which the acceleration
is constant, the ax can be removed from the integral to give
vx
ax
dt
C1
a xt
(2.15)
C1
The value of C1 depends on the initial conditions of the motion. If we take vx
when t 0 and substitute these values into the last equation, we have
v xi
a x(0)
C1
vxi
v xi
C1
Calling vx
vx f the velocity after the time interval t has passed and substituting
this and the value just found for C1 into Equation 2.15, we obtain kinematic Equation 2.8:
vxi
vxf
(for constant ax )
a xt
Now let us consider the dening equation for velocity (Eq. 2.4):
dx
dt
vx
We can write this as dx
v x dt or in integral form as
x
v x dt
C2
where C 2 is another constant of integration. Because v x
pression becomes
x
(vxi
axt)dt
x
vxi dt
ax
v xi t
1
2
2a x t
x
xi
v xit
1
2
2a x t
v xi
a xt, this ex-
C2
t dt
C2
C2
To nd C 2 , we make use of the initial condition that x
C 2 x i . Therefore, after substituting xf for x , we have
xf
vx f
x i when t
0. This gives
(for constant ax )
Once we move xi to the left side of the equation, we have kinematic Equation 2.11.
Recall that x f x i is equal to the displacement of the object, where xi is its initial
position.
2.2
This is the Nearest One Head
47
Besides what you might expect to learn about physics concepts, a very valuable skill
you should hope to take away from your physics course is the ability to solve complicated problems. The way physicists approach complex situations and break them
down into manageable pieces is extremely useful. We have developed a memory aid to
help you easily recall the steps required for successful problem solving. When working
on problems, the secret is to keep your GOAL in mind!
GOAL PROBLEM-SOLVING STEPS
Gather information
The rst thing to do when approaching a problem is to understand the situation.
Carefully read the problem statement, looking for key phrases like at rest or
freely falls. What information is given? Exactly what is the question asking? Dont
forget to gather information from your own experiences and common sense. What
should a reasonable answer look like? You wouldnt expect to calculate the speed
of an automobile to be 5 106 m/s. Do you know what units to expect? Are there
any limiting cases you can consider? What happens when an angle approaches 0°
or 90° or when a mass becomes huge or goes to zero? Also make sure you carefully
study any drawings that accompany the problem.
Organize your approach
Once you have a really good idea of what the problem is about, you need to think
about what to do next. Have you seen this type of question before? Being able to
classify a problem can make it much easier to lay out a plan to solve it. You should
almost always make a quick drawing of the situation. Label important events with
circled letters. Indicate any known values, perhaps in a table or directly on your
sketch.
Analyze the problem
Because you have already categorized the problem, it should not be too difcult to
select relevant equations that apply to this type of situation. Use algebra (and calculus, if necessary) to solve for the unknown variable in terms of what is given.
Substitute in the appropriate numbers, calculate the result, and round it to the
proper number of signicant gures.
Learn from your efforts
This is the most important part. Examine your numerical answer. Does it meet
your expectations from the rst step? What about the algebraic form of the result before you plugged in numbers? Does it make sense? (Try looking at the
variables in it to see whether the answer would change in a physically meaningful
way if they were drastically increased or decreased or even became zero.) Think
about how this problem compares with others you have done. How was it similar?
In what critical ways did it differ? Why was this problem assigned? You should have
learned something by doing it. Can you gure out what?
When solving complex problems, you may need to identify a series of subproblems and apply the GOAL process to each. For very simple problems, you probably
dont need GOAL at all. But when you are looking at a problem and you dont
know what to do next, remember what the letters in GOAL stand for and use that
as a guide.
47
48
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
SUMMARY
After a particle moves along the x axis from some initial position xi to some nal
position xf , its displacement is
(2.1)
x xf xi
The average velocity of a particle during some time interval is the displacement x divided by the time interval t during which that displacement occurred:
x
t
vx
(2.2)
The average speed of a particle is equal to the ratio of the total distance it
travels to the total time it takes to travel that distance.
The instantaneous velocity of a particle is dened as the limit of the ratio
x/ t as t approaches zero. By denition, this limit equals the derivative of x with
respect to t , or the time rate of change of the position:
lim
vx
t:0
x
t
dx
dt
(2.4)
The instantaneous speed of a particle is equal to the magnitude of its velocity.
The average acceleration of a particle is dened as the ratio of the change in
its velocity vx divided by the time interval t during which that change occurred:
vx f
vx
t
ax
tf
v xi
(2.5)
ti
The instantaneous acceleration is equal to the limit of the ratio vx / t as
t approaches 0. By denition, this limit equals the derivative of vx with respect to
t , or the time rate of change of the velocity:
vx
t
lim
ax
t:0
dv x
dt
(2.6)
The equations of kinematics for a particle moving along the x axis with uniform acceleration ax (constant in magnitude and direction) are
vx f
v xi
1
2 (v xi
1
2
2a x t
xf
xi
v xt
xf
xi
v xi t
2
2
vx f
(2.8)
a xt
vxi
2ax(x f
v x f )t
(2.10)
(2.11)
x i)
(2.12)
You should be able to use these equations and the denitions in this chapter to analyze the motion of any object moving with constant acceleration.
An object falling freely in the presence of the Earths gravity experiences a
free-fall acceleration directed toward the center of the Earth. If air resistance is neglected, if the motion occurs near the surface of the Earth, and if the range of the
motion is small compared with the Earths radius, then the free-fall acceleration g
is constant over the range of motion, where g is equal to 9.80 m/s2.
Complicated problems are best approached in an organized manner. You
should be able to recall and apply the steps of the GOAL strategy when you need
them.
49
Questions
QUESTIONS
1. Average velocity and instantaneous velocity are generally
different quantities. Can they ever be equal for a specic
type of motion? Explain.
2. If the average velocity is nonzero for some time interval,
does this mean that the instantaneous velocity is never
zero during this interval? Explain.
3. If the average velocity equals zero for some time interval t
and if vx (t) is a continuous function, show that the instantaneous velocity must go to zero at some time in this interval. (A sketch of x versus t might be useful in your proof.)
4. Is it possible to have a situation in which the velocity and
acceleration have opposite signs? If so, sketch a
velocity time graph to prove your point.
5. If the velocity of a particle is nonzero, can its acceleration
be zero? Explain.
6. If the velocity of a particle is zero, can its acceleration be
nonzero? Explain.
7. Can an object having constant acceleration ever stop and
stay stopped?
8. A stone is thrown vertically upward from the top of a building. Does the stones displacement depend on the location
of the origin of the coordinate system? Does the stones velocity depend on the origin? (Assume that the coordinate
system is stationary with respect to the building.) Explain.
9. A student at the top of a building of height h throws one
ball upward with an initial speed vyi and then throws a
second ball downward with the same initial speed. How
do the nal speeds of the balls compare when they reach
the ground?
10. Can the magnitude of the instantaneous velocity of an object ever be greater than the magnitude of its average velocity? Can it ever be less?
11. If the average velocity of an object is zero in some time interval, what can you say about the displacement of the object for that interval?
12. A rapidly growing plant doubles in height each week. At
the end of the 25th day, the plant reaches the height of a
building. At what time was the plant one-fourth the
height of the building?
13. Two cars are moving in the same direction in parallel lanes
along a highway. At some instant, the velocity of car A exceeds the velocity of car B. Does this mean that the acceleration of car A is greater than that of car B? Explain.
14. An apple is dropped from some height above the Earths
surface. Neglecting air resistance, how much does the apples speed increase each second during its descent?
15. Consider the following combinations of signs and values
for velocity and acceleration of a particle with respect to a
one-dimensional x axis:
Velocity
Acceleration
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Positive
Negative
Zero
Positive
Negative
Zero
Positive
Negative
Positive
Positive
Positive
Negative
Negative
Negative
Zero
Zero
Describe what the particle is doing in each case, and
give a real-life example for an automobile on an east-west
one-dimensional axis, with east considered to be the positive direction.
16. A pebble is dropped into a water well, and the splash is
heard 16 s later, as illustrated in Figure Q2.16. Estimate the
distance from the rim of the well to the waters surface.
17. Average velocity is an entirely contrived quantity, and
other combinations of data may prove useful in other
contexts. For example, the ratio t/ x, called the slowness of a moving object, is used by geophysicists when
discussing the motion of continental plates. Explain what
this quantity means.
Figure Q2.16
50
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
Section 2.1 Displacement, Velocity, and Speed
6. A person rst walks at a constant speed v 1 along a
straight line from A to B and then back along the line
from B to A at a constant speed v 2 . What are (a) her average speed over the entire trip and (b) her average velocity over the entire trip?
1. The position of a pinewood derby car was observed at
various times; the results are summarized in the table
below. Find the average velocity of the car for (a) the
rst second, (b) the last 3 s, and (c) the entire period
of observation.
Section 2.2
x (m)
t (s)
0
0
2.3
1.0
9.2
2.0
20.7
3.0
36.8
4.0
57.5
5.0
2. A motorist drives north for 35.0 min at 85.0 km/h and
then stops for 15.0 min. He then continues north, traveling 130 km in 2.00 h. (a) What is his total displacement? (b) What is his average velocity?
3. The displacement versus time for a certain particle moving along the x axis is shown in Figure P2.3. Find the average velocity in the time intervals (a) 0 to 2 s, (b) 0 to
4 s, (c) 2 s to 4 s, (d) 4 s to 7 s, (e) 0 to 8 s.
WEB
x(m)
10
8
Instantaneous Velocity and Speed
7. At t 1.00 s, a particle moving with constant velocity is
located at x
3.00 m, and at t 6.00 s the particle is
located at x 5.00 m. (a) From this information, plot
the position as a function of time. (b) Determine the
velocity of the particle from the slope of this graph.
8. The position of a particle moving along the x axis varies
in time according to the expression x 3t 2, where x is
in meters and t is in seconds. Evaluate its position (a) at
t. (c) Evaluate the limit
t 3.00 s and (b) at 3.00 s
of x/ t as t approaches zero to nd the velocity at
t 3.00 s.
9. A position time graph for a particle moving along the
x axis is shown in Figure P2.9. (a) Find the average
velocity in the time interval t 1.5 s to t 4.0 s.
(b) Determine the instantaneous velocity at t 2.0 s by
measuring the slope of the tangent line shown in the
graph. (c) At what value of t is the velocity zero?
6
x(m)
4
12
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
t(s)
10
2
8
4
6
6
4
2
Figure P2.3
Problems 3 and 11.
10t 2,
4. A particle moves according to the equation x
where x is in meters and t is in seconds. (a) Find the average velocity for the time interval from 2.0 s to 3.0 s.
(b) Find the average velocity for the time interval from
2.0 s to 2.1 s.
5. A person walks rst at a constant speed of 5.00 m/s
along a straight line from point A to point B and then
back along the line from B to A at a constant speed of
3.00 m/s. What are (a) her average speed over the entire
trip and (b) her average velocity over the entire trip?
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
t(s)
Figure P2.9
10. (a) Use the data in Problem 1 to construct a smooth
graph of position versus time. (b) By constructing tangents to the x(t ) curve, nd the instantaneous velocity
of the car at several instants. (c) Plot the instantaneous
velocity versus time and, from this, determine the average acceleration of the car. (d) What was the initial velocity of the car?
51
Problems
11. Find the instantaneous velocity of the particle described
in Figure P2.3 at the following times: (a) t 1.0 s,
(b) t 3.0 s, (c) t 4.5 s, and (d) t 7.5 s.
vx(m/s)
8
6
4
2
Section 2.3 Acceleration
12. A particle is moving with a velocity of 60.0 m/s in the
positive x direction at t 0. Between t 0 and t
15.0 s, the velocity decreases uniformly to zero. What
was the acceleration during this 15.0-s interval? What is
the signicance of the sign of your answer?
13. A 50.0-g superball traveling at 25.0 m/s bounces off a
brick wall and rebounds at 22.0 m/s. A high-speed camera records this event. If the ball is in contact with the
wall for 3.50 ms, what is the magnitude of the average
acceleration of the ball during this time interval? (Note:
1 ms 10 3 s.)
14. A particle starts from rest and accelerates as shown in
Figure P2.14. Determine: (a) the particles speed at
t 10 s and at t 20 s, and (b) the distance traveled in
the rst 20 s.
5
2
4
6
8
10
15
20
t(s)
Figure P2.15
vx(m/s)
8
6
4
2
ax(m/s2)
2
1 2 3 4 5 67
8 9 10
t(s)
4
6
8
2.0
1.0
Figure P2.16
t(s)
0
5.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
1.0
2.0
WEB
3.0
Figure P2.14
15. A velocity time graph for an object moving along the x
axis is shown in Figure P2.15. (a) Plot a graph of the acceleration versus time. (b) Determine the average acceleration of the object in the time intervals t 5.00 s to
t 15.0 s and t 0 to t 20.0 s.
16. A student drives a moped along a straight road as described by the velocity time graph in Figure P2.16.
Sketch this graph in the middle of a sheet of graph paper. (a) Directly above your graph, sketch a graph of
the position versus time, aligning the time coordinates
of the two graphs. (b) Sketch a graph of the acceleration versus time directly below the vx -t graph, again
aligning the time coordinates. On each graph, show the
numerical values of x and ax for all points of inection.
(c) What is the acceleration at t 6 s? (d) Find the position (relative to the starting point) at t 6 s. (e) What
is the mopeds nal position at t 9 s?
17. A particle moves along the x axis according to the equation x 2.00 3.00t t 2, where x is in meters and t is
in seconds. At t 3.00 s, nd (a) the position of the
particle, (b) its velocity, and (c) its acceleration.
18. An object moves along the x axis according to the equation x (3.00t 2 2.00t 3.00) m. Determine
(a) the average speed between t 2.00 s and t 3.00 s,
(b) the instantaneous speed at t 2.00 s and at t
3.00 s, (c) the average acceleration between t 2.00 s
and t 3.00 s, and (d) the instantaneous acceleration
at t 2.00 s and t 3.00 s.
19. Figure P2.19 shows a graph of vx versus t for the motion
of a motorcyclist as he starts from rest and moves along
the road in a straight line. (a) Find the average acceleration for the time interval t 0 to t 6.00 s. (b) Estimate the time at which the acceleration has its greatest
positive value and the value of the acceleration at that
instant. (c) When is the acceleration zero? (d) Estimate
the maximum negative value of the acceleration and
the time at which it occurs.
52
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
vx(m/s)
vx(m/s)
10
8
6
a
50
b
40
4
30
2
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
t(s)
20
10
Figure P2.19
0
Section 2.4 Motion Diagrams
20. Draw motion diagrams for (a) an object moving to the
right at constant speed, (b) an object moving to the
right and speeding up at a constant rate, (c) an object
moving to the right and slowing down at a constant
rate, (d) an object moving to the left and speeding up
at a constant rate, and (e) an object moving to the left
and slowing down at a constant rate. (f) How would
your drawings change if the changes in speed were not
uniform; that is, if the speed were not changing at a
constant rate?
WEB
21. Jules Verne in 1865 proposed sending people to the
Moon by ring a space capsule from a 220-m-long cannon with a nal velocity of 10.97 km/s. What would
have been the unrealistically large acceleration experienced by the space travelers during launch? Compare
your answer with the free-fall acceleration, 9.80 m/s2.
22. A certain automobile manufacturer claims that its superdeluxe sports car will accelerate from rest to a speed of
42.0 m/s in 8.00 s. Under the (improbable) assumption
that the acceleration is constant, (a) determine the acceleration of the car. (b) Find the distance the car travels in the rst 8.00 s. (c) What is the speed of the car
10.0 s after it begins its motion, assuming it continues to
move with the same acceleration?
23. A truck covers 40.0 m in 8.50 s while smoothly slowing
down to a nal speed of 2.80 m/s. (a) Find its original
speed. (b) Find its acceleration.
24. The minimum distance required to stop a car moving at
35.0 mi/h is 40.0 ft. What is the minimum stopping distance for the same car moving at 70.0 mi/h, assuming
the same rate of acceleration?
25. A body moving with uniform acceleration has a velocity
of 12.0 cm/s in the positive x direction when its x coordinate is 3.00 cm. If its x coordinate 2.00 s later is 5.00
cm, what is the magnitude of its acceleration?
26. Figure P2.26 represents part of the performance data
of a car owned by a proud physics student. (a) Calculate from the graph the total distance traveled.
(b) What distance does the car travel between the
times t 10 s and t 40 s? (c) Draw a graph of its ac-
20
30
40
c
50
t(s)
Figure P2.26
27.
Section 2.5 One-Dimensional Motion with
Constant Acceleration
10
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
celeration versus time between t 0 and t 50 s.
(d) Write an equation for x as a function of time for
each phase of the motion, represented by (i) 0a, (ii)
ab, (iii) bc. (e) What is the average velocity of the car
between t 0 and t 50 s?
A particle moves along the x axis. Its position is given by
the equation x 2.00 3.00t 4.00t 2 with x in meters
and t in seconds. Determine (a) its position at the instant it changes direction and (b) its velocity when it returns to the position it had at t 0.
The initial velocity of a body is 5.20 m/s. What is its velocity after 2.50 s (a) if it accelerates uniformly at 3.00 m/s2
and (b) if it accelerates uniformly at 3.00 m/s2 ?
A drag racer starts her car from rest and accelerates at
10.0 m/s2 for the entire distance of 400 m (1 mi). (a) How
4
long did it take the race car to travel this distance?
(b) What is the speed of the race car at the end of the run?
A car is approaching a hill at 30.0 m/s when its engine
suddenly fails, just at the bottom of the hill. The car
moves with a constant acceleration of 2.00 m/s2 while
coasting up the hill. (a) Write equations for the position
along the slope and for the velocity as functions of time,
taking x 0 at the bottom of the hill, where vi
30.0 m/s. (b) Determine the maximum distance the car
travels up the hill.
A jet plane lands with a speed of 100 m/s and can accelerate at a maximum rate of 5.00 m/s2 as it comes to
rest. (a) From the instant the plane touches the runway,
what is the minimum time it needs before it can come
to rest? (b) Can this plane land at a small tropical island
airport where the runway is 0.800 km long?
The driver of a car slams on the brakes when he sees a
tree blocking the road. The car slows uniformly with an
acceleration of 5.60 m/s2 for 4.20 s, making straight
skid marks 62.4 m long ending at the tree. With what
speed does the car then strike the tree?
Help! One of our equations is missing! We describe constant-acceleration motion with the variables and parameters vxi , vx f , ax , t, and xf xi . Of the equations in
Table 2.2, the rst does not involve x f x i . The second
does not contain ax , the third omits vx f , and the last
Problems
53
Figure P2.37
(Left) Col. John Stapp on rocket sled. (Courtesy of the U.S. Air Force)
(Right) Col. Stapps face is contorted by the stress of rapid negative acceleration. (Photri, Inc.)
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
leaves out t. So to complete the set there should be an
equation not involving vxi . Derive it from the others.
Use it to solve Problem 32 in one step.
An indestructible bullet 2.00 cm long is red straight
through a board that is 10.0 cm thick. The bullet strikes
the board with a speed of 420 m/s and emerges with a
speed of 280 m/s. (a) What is the average acceleration
of the bullet as it passes through the board? (b) What is
the total time that the bullet is in contact with the
board? (c) What thickness of board (calculated to
0.1 cm) would it take to stop the bullet, assuming
the bullets acceleration through all parts of the board
is the same?
A truck on a straight road starts from rest, accelerating
at 2.00 m/s2 until it reaches a speed of 20.0 m/s. Then
the truck travels for 20.0 s at constant speed until the
brakes are applied, stopping the truck in a uniform
manner in an additional 5.00 s. (a) How long is the
truck in motion? (b) What is the average velocity of the
truck for the motion described?
A train is traveling down a straight track at 20.0 m/s
when the engineer applies the brakes. This results in an
acceleration of 1.00 m/s2 as long as the train is in motion. How far does the train move during a 40.0-s time
interval starting at the instant the brakes are applied?
For many years the worlds land speed record was held
by Colonel John P. Stapp, USAF (Fig. P2.37). On March
19, 1954, he rode a rocket-propelled sled that moved
down the track at 632 mi/h. He and the sled were safely
brought to rest in 1.40 s. Determine (a) the negative acceleration he experienced and (b) the distance he traveled during this negative acceleration.
An electron in a cathode-ray tube (CRT) accelerates
uniformly from 2.00 104 m/s to 6.00 106 m/s over
1.50 cm. (a) How long does the electron take to travel
this 1.50 cm? (b) What is its acceleration?
A ball starts from rest and accelerates at 0.500 m/s2
while moving down an inclined plane 9.00 m long.
When it reaches the bottom, the ball rolls up another
plane, where, after moving 15.0 m, it comes to rest.
(a) What is the speed of the ball at the bottom of the
rst plane? (b) How long does it take to roll down
the rst plane? (c) What is the acceleration along the
second plane? (d) What is the balls speed 8.00 m along
the second plane?
40. Speedy Sue, driving at 30.0 m/s, enters a one-lane tunnel. She then observes a slow-moving van 155 m ahead
traveling at 5.00 m/s. Sue applies her brakes but can accelerate only at 2.00 m/s2 because the road is wet.
Will there be a collision? If so, determine how far into
the tunnel and at what time the collision occurs. If not,
determine the distance of closest approach between
Sues car and the van.
Section 2.6
Freely Falling Objects
Note: In all problems in this section, ignore the effects of air
resistance.
41. A golf ball is released from rest from the top of a very
tall building. Calculate (a) the position and (b) the velocity of the ball after 1.00 s, 2.00 s, and 3.00 s.
42. Every morning at seven oclock
Theres twenty terriers drilling on the rock.
The boss comes around and he says, Keep still
And bear down heavy on the cast-iron drill
And drill, ye terriers, drill. And drill, ye terriers, drill.
Its work all day for sugar in your tea . . .
And drill, ye terriers, drill.
One day a premature blast went off
And a mile in the air went big Jim Goff. And drill . . .
Then when next payday came around
Jim Goff a dollar short was found.
When he asked what for, came this reply:
You were docked for the time you were up in the sky. And
drill . . .
American folksong
What was Goffs hourly wage? State the assumptions you
make in computing it.
54
WEB
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
43. A student throws a set of keys vertically upward to her
sorority sister, who is in a window 4.00 m above. The
keys are caught 1.50 s later by the sisters outstretched
hand. (a) With what initial velocity were the keys
thrown? (b) What was the velocity of the keys just before they were caught?
44. A ball is thrown directly downward with an initial speed
of 8.00 m/s from a height of 30.0 m. How many seconds later does the ball strike the ground?
45. Emily challenges her friend David to catch a dollar bill as
follows: She holds the bill vertically, as in Figure P2.45,
with the center of the bill between Davids index nger
and thumb. David must catch the bill after Emily releases
it without moving his hand downward. If his reaction
time is 0.2 s, will he succeed? Explain your reasoning.
WEB
49. A daring ranch hand sitting on a tree limb wishes to
drop vertically onto a horse galloping under the tree.
The speed of the horse is 10.0 m/s, and the distance
from the limb to the saddle is 3.00 m. (a) What must be
the horizontal distance between the saddle and limb
when the ranch hand makes his move? (b) How long is
he in the air?
50. A ball thrown vertically upward is caught by the thrower
after 20.0 s. Find (a) the initial velocity of the ball and
(b) the maximum height it reaches.
51. A ball is thrown vertically upward from the ground with
an initial speed of 15.0 m/s. (a) How long does it take
the ball to reach its maximum altitude? (b) What is its
maximum altitude? (c) Determine the velocity and acceleration of the ball at t 2.00 s.
52. The height of a helicopter above the ground is given by
h 3.00t 3, where h is in meters and t is in seconds. After 2.00 s, the helicopter releases a small mailbag. How
long after its release does the mailbag reach the
ground?
(Optional)
2.7 Kinematic Equations Derived from Calculus
Figure P2.45
(George Semple)
46. A ball is dropped from rest from a height h above the
ground. Another ball is thrown vertically upward from
the ground at the instant the rst ball is released. Determine the speed of the second ball if the two balls are to
meet at a height h/2 above the ground.
47. A baseball is hit so that it travels straight upward after
being struck by the bat. A fan observes that it takes
3.00 s for the ball to reach its maximum height. Find
(a) its initial velocity and (b) the maximum height it
reaches.
48. A woman is reported to have fallen 144 ft from the 17th
oor of a building, landing on a metal ventilator box,
which she crushed to a depth of 18.0 in. She suffered
only minor injuries. Calculate (a) the speed of the
woman just before she collided with the ventilator box,
(b) her average acceleration while in contact with the
box, and (c) the time it took to crush the box.
53. Automotive engineers refer to the time rate of change
of acceleration as the jerk. If an object moves in one
dimension such that its jerk J is constant, (a) determine
expressions for its acceleration ax , velocity vx , and position x , given that its initial acceleration, speed, and position are ax i , vx i , and x i , respectively. (b) Show that
a x2 a xi2 2J(v x v xi).
54. The speed of a bullet as it travels down the barrel of a rie toward the opening is given by the expression
v ( 5.0 10 7)t 2 (3.0 10 5)t, where v is in meters per second and t is in seconds. The acceleration of
the bullet just as it leaves the barrel is zero. (a) Determine the acceleration and position of the bullet as a
function of time when the bullet is in the barrel.
(b) Determine the length of time the bullet is accelerated. (c) Find the speed at which the bullet leaves the
barrel. (d) What is the length of the barrel?
55. The acceleration of a marble in a certain uid is proportional to the speed of the marble squared and is
given (in SI units) by a
3.00v 2 for v 0. If the marble enters this uid with a speed of 1.50 m/s, how long
will it take before the marbles speed is reduced to half
of its initial value?
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
56. A motorist is traveling at 18.0 m/s when he sees a deer
in the road 38.0 m ahead. (a) If the maximum negative
acceleration of the vehicle is 4.50 m/s2, what is the
maximum reaction time t of the motorist that will allow him to avoid hitting the deer? (b) If his reaction
time is actually 0.300 s, how fast will he be traveling
when he hits the deer?
Problems
57. Another scheme to catch the roadrunner has failed. A
safe falls from rest from the top of a 25.0-m-high cliff toward Wile E. Coyote, who is standing at the base. Wile
rst notices the safe after it has fallen 15.0 m. How long
does he have to get out of the way?
58. A dogs hair has been cut and is now getting longer by
1.04 mm each day. With winter coming on, this rate of
hair growth is steadily increasing by 0.132 mm/day
every week. By how much will the dogs hair grow during ve weeks?
59. A test rocket is red vertically upward from a well. A catapult gives it an initial velocity of 80.0 m/s at ground
level. Subsequently, its engines re and it accelerates
upward at 4.00 m/s2 until it reaches an altitude of
1000 m. At that point its engines fail, and the rocket
goes into free fall, with an acceleration of 9.80 m/s2.
(a) How long is the rocket in motion above the ground?
(b) What is its maximum altitude? (c) What is its velocity just before it collides with the Earth? (Hint: Consider
the motion while the engine is operating separate from
the free-fall motion.)
60. A motorist drives along a straight road at a constant
speed of 15.0 m/s. Just as she passes a parked motorcycle police ofcer, the ofcer starts to accelerate at
2.00 m/s2 to overtake her. Assuming the ofcer maintains this acceleration, (a) determine the time it takes
the police ofcer to reach the motorist. Also nd
(b) the speed and (c) the total displacement of the
ofcer as he overtakes the motorist.
61. In Figure 2.10a, the area under the velocity time curve
between the vertical axis and time t (vertical dashed
line) represents the displacement. As shown, this area
consists of a rectangle and a triangle. Compute their areas and compare the sum of the two areas with the expression on the righthand side of Equation 2.11.
62. A commuter train travels between two downtown stations. Because the stations are only 1.00 km apart, the
train never reaches its maximum possible cruising
speed. The engineer minimizes the time t between the
two stations by accelerating at a rate a1 0.100 m/s2
for a time t 1 and then by braking with acceleration
a2
0.500 m/s2 for a time t 2 . Find the minimum
time of travel t and the time t 1 .
63. In a 100-m race, Maggie and Judy cross the nish line in
a dead heat, both taking 10.2 s. Accelerating uniformly,
Maggie took 2.00 s and Judy 3.00 s to attain maximum
speed, which they maintained for the rest of the race.
(a) What was the acceleration of each sprinter?
(b) What were their respective maximum speeds?
(c) Which sprinter was ahead at the 6.00-s mark, and by
how much?
64. A hard rubber ball, released at chest height, falls to
the pavement and bounces back to nearly the same
height. When it is in contact with the pavement, the
lower side of the ball is temporarily attened. Suppose
the maximum depth of the dent is on the order of
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
55
1 cm. Compute an order-of-magnitude estimate for
the maximum acceleration of the ball while it is in contact with the pavement. State your assumptions, the
quantities you estimate, and the values you estimate for
them.
A teenager has a car that speeds up at 3.00 m/s2 and
slows down at 4.50 m/s2. On a trip to the store, he accelerates from rest to 12.0 m/s, drives at a constant
speed for 5.00 s, and then comes to a momentary stop
at an intersection. He then accelerates to 18.0 m/s,
drives at a constant speed for 20.0 s, slows down for
2.67 s, continues for 4.00 s at this speed, and then
comes to a stop. (a) How long does the trip take?
(b) How far has he traveled? (c) What is his average
speed for the trip? (d) How long would it take to walk
to the store and back if he walks at 1.50 m/s?
A rock is dropped from rest into a well. (a) If the sound
of the splash is heard 2.40 s later, how far below the top
of the well is the surface of the water? The speed of
sound in air (at the ambient temperature) is 336 m/s.
(b) If the travel time for the sound is neglected, what
percentage error is introduced when the depth of the
well is calculated?
An inquisitive physics student and mountain climber
climbs a 50.0-m cliff that overhangs a calm pool of water. He throws two stones vertically downward, 1.00 s
apart, and observes that they cause a single splash. The
rst stone has an initial speed of 2.00 m/s. (a) How
long after release of the rst stone do the two stones hit
the water? (b) What was the initial velocity of the second stone? (c) What is the velocity of each stone at the
instant the two hit the water?
A car and train move together along parallel paths at
25.0 m/s, with the car adjacent to the rear of the train.
Then, because of a red light, the car undergoes a uniform acceleration of 2.50 m/s2 and comes to rest. It
remains at rest for 45.0 s and then accelerates back to a
speed of 25.0 m/s at a rate of 2.50 m/s2. How far behind the rear of the train is the car when it reaches the
speed of 25.0 m/s, assuming that the speed of the train
has remained 25.0 m/s?
Kathy Kool buys a sports car that can accelerate at the
rate of 4.90 m/s2. She decides to test the car by racing
with another speedster, Stan Speedy. Both start from
rest, but experienced Stan leaves the starting line 1.00 s
before Kathy. If Stan moves with a constant acceleration
of 3.50 m/s2 and Kathy maintains an acceleration of
4.90 m/s2, nd (a) the time it takes Kathy to overtake
Stan, (b) the distance she travels before she catches up
with him, and (c) the speeds of both cars at the instant
she overtakes him.
To protect his food from hungry bears, a boy scout
raises his food pack with a rope that is thrown over a
tree limb at height h above his hands. He walks away
from the vertical rope with constant velocity v boy , holding the free end of the rope in his hands (Fig. P2.70).
56
CHAPTER 2
Motion in One Dimension
TABLE P2.72 Height of a Rock versus Time
Time (s)
va
h
m
x
vboy
Figure P2.70
(a) Show that the speed v of the food pack is
x(x 2 h 2) 1/2 v boy , where x is the distance he has
walked away from the vertical rope. (b) Show that the
acceleration a of the food pack is h 2(x 2 h 2) 3/2 v boy2.
(c) What values do the acceleration and velocity have
shortly after he leaves the point under the pack
(x 0)? (d) What values do the packs velocity and acceleration approach as the distance x continues to increase?
71. In Problem 70, let the height h equal 6.00 m and the
speed v boy equal 2.00 m/s. Assume that the food pack
starts from rest. (a) Tabulate and graph the speed time
graph. (b) Tabulate and graph the acceleration time
graph. (Let the range of time be from 0 to 5.00 s and
the time intervals be 0.500 s.)
72. Astronauts on a distant planet toss a rock into the air.
With the aid of a camera that takes pictures at a steady
rate, they record the height of the rock as a function of
time as given in Table P2.72. (a) Find the average velocity of the rock in the time interval between each measurement and the next. (b) Using these average veloci-
Height (m)
Time (s)
Height (m)
0.00
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
5.00
5.75
6.40
6.94
7.38
7.72
7.96
8.10
8.13
8.07
7.90
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
3.75
4.00
4.25
4.50
4.75
5.00
7.62
7.25
6.77
6.20
5.52
4.73
3.85
2.86
1.77
0.58
ties to approximate instantaneous velocities at the midpoints of the time intervals, make a graph of velocity as
a function of time. Does the rock move with constant
acceleration? If so, plot a straight line of best t on the
graph and calculate its slope to nd the acceleration.
73. Two objects, A and B, are connected by a rigid rod that
has a length L. The objects slide along perpendicular
guide rails, as shown in Figure P2.73. If A slides to the
left with a constant speed v, nd the speed of B when
60.0°.
y
B
x
L
y
v
α
O
A
x
Figure P2.73
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
2.1 Your graph should look something like the one in (a).
This vx-t graph shows that the maximum speed is
about 5.0 m/s, which is 18 km/h ( 11 mi/h), and
so the driver was not speeding. Can you derive the acceleration time graph from the velocity time graph? It
should look something like the one in (b).
2.2 (a) Yes. This occurs when the car is slowing down, so that
the direction of its acceleration is opposite the direction
of its motion. (b) Yes. If the motion is in the direction
chosen as negative, a positive acceleration causes a decrease in speed.
2.3 The left side represents the nal velocity of an object.
The rst term on the right side is the velocity that the object had initially when we started watching it. The second
term is the change in that initial velocity that is caused by
the acceleration. If this second term is positive, then the
initial velocity has increased (v xf v x i ). If this term is negative, then the initial velocity has decreased (v xf v x i ).
57
Answers to Quick Quizzes
6.0
2
vx(m/s)
0.60
4.0
0.40
2.0
ax(m/s )
0.20
0.0
10
20
30
40
t (s)
50
0.00
10
2.0
t (s)
50
0.40
6.0
40
0.20
4.0
30
20
0.60
(a)
(b)
2.4 Graph (a) has a constant slope, indicating a constant acceleration; this is represented by graph (e).
Graph (b) represents a speed that is increasing constantly but not at a uniform rate. Thus, the acceleration must
be increasing, and the graph that best indicates this is (d).
Graph (c) depicts a velocity that rst increases at a
constant rate, indicating constant acceleration. Then the
velocity stops increasing and becomes constant, indicating zero acceleration. The best match to this situation is
graph (f).
2.5 (c). As can be seen from Figure 2.13b, the ball is at rest for
an innitesimally short time at these three points.
Nonetheless, gravity continues to act even though the ball
is instantaneously not moving.
PUZZLER
When this honeybee gets back to its
hive, it will tell the other bees how to return to the food it has found. By moving
in a special, very precisely dened pattern, the bee conveys to other workers
the information they need to nd a ower
bed. Bees communicate by speaking in
vectors. What does the bee have to tell
the other bees in order to specify where
the ower bed is located relative to the
hive? (E. Webber/Visuals Unlimited)
chapter
Vectors
Chapter Outline
3.1 Coordinate Systems
3.2 Vector and Scalar Quantities
3.3 Some Properties of Vectors
58
3.4 Components of a Vector and Unit
Vectors
3.1
59
Coordinate Systems
W
e often need to work with physical quantities that have both numerical and
directional properties. As noted in Section 2.1, quantities of this nature are
represented by vectors. This chapter is primarily concerned with vector algebra and with some general properties of vector quantities. We discuss the addition
and subtraction of vector quantities, together with some common applications to
physical situations.
Vector quantities are used throughout this text, and it is therefore imperative
that you master both their graphical and their algebraic properties.
y
(x, y)
Q
P
(3, 4)
3.1
2.2
COORDINATE SYSTEMS
(5, 3)
x
O
Many aspects of physics deal in some form or other with locations in space. In
Chapter 2, for example, we saw that the mathematical description of an objects
motion requires a method for describing the objects position at various times.
This description is accomplished with the use of coordinates, and in Chapter 2 we
used the cartesian coordinate system, in which horizontal and vertical axes intersect at a point taken to be the origin (Fig. 3.1). Cartesian coordinates are also
called rectangular coordinates.
Sometimes it is more convenient to represent a point in a plane by its plane polar coordinates (r, ), as shown in Figure 3.2a. In this polar coordinate system, r is the
distance from the origin to the point having cartesian coordinates (x, y), and is
the angle between r and a xed axis. This xed axis is usually the positive x axis,
and is usually measured counterclockwise from it. From the right triangle in Figure 3.2b, we nd that sin
y/r and that cos
x/r. (A review of trigonometric
functions is given in Appendix B.4.) Therefore, starting with the plane polar coordinates of any point, we can obtain the cartesian coordinates, using the equations
x
r cos
r sin
y
(x, y)
r
θ
x
O
(3.1)
y
Figure 3.1 Designation of points
in a cartesian coordinate system.
Every point is labeled with coordinates (x, y ).
(3.2)
y
sin θ = r
Furthermore, the denitions of trigonometry tell us that
y
x
tan
r
x 2
(3.3)
y2
(a)
(3.4)
These four expressions relating the coordinates (x, y) to the coordinates (r, )
apply only when is dened, as shown in Figure 3.2a in other words, when positive is an angle measured counterclockwise from the positive x axis. (Some scientic
calculators perform conversions between cartesian and polar coordinates based on
these standard conventions.) If the reference axis for the polar angle is chosen
to be one other than the positive x axis or if the sense of increasing is chosen differently, then the expressions relating the two sets of coordinates will change.
cos θ = x
θr
tan θ =
r
y
y
x
θ
x
(b)
Figure 3.2 (a) The plane polar
coordinates of a point are represented by the distance r and the angle , where is measured counterclockwise from the positive x axis.
(b) The right triangle used to relate (x, y ) to (r, ).
Quick Quiz 3.1
Would the honeybee at the beginning of the chapter use cartesian or polar coordinates
when specifying the location of the ower? Why? What is the honeybee using as an origin of
coordinates?
You may want to read Talking Apes
and Dancing Bees (1997) by Betsy
Wyckoff.
60
CHAPTER 3
EXAMPLE 3.1
Vectors
Polar Coordinates
The cartesian coordinates of a point in the xy plane are
(x, y) ( 3.50, 2.50) m, as shown in Figure 3.3. Find the
polar coordinates of this point.
y(m)
Solution
r
x 2
y2
tan
(
3.50 m)2
y
x
θ
2.50 m
3.50 m
4.30 m
0.714
216°
x(m)
Note that you must use the signs of x and y to nd that the
point lies in the third quadrant of the coordinate system.
That is,
216° and not 35.5°.
r
3.50, 2.50
Figure 3.3
( 2.50 m)2
Finding polar coordinates when cartesian coordinates
are given.
3.2
2.3
VECTOR AND SCALAR QUANTITIES
As noted in Chapter 2, some physical quantities are scalar quantities whereas others are vector quantities. When you want to know the temperature outside so that
you will know how to dress, the only information you need is a number and the
unit degrees C or degrees F. Temperature is therefore an example of a scalar
quantity, which is dened as a quantity that is completely specied by a number
and appropriate units. That is,
A scalar quantity is specied by a single value with an appropriate unit and has
no direction.
Other examples of scalar quantities are volume, mass, and time intervals. The
rules of ordinary arithmetic are used to manipulate scalar quantities.
If you are getting ready to pilot a small plane and need to know the wind velocity, you must know both the speed of the wind and its direction. Because direction is part of the information it gives, velocity is a vector quantity, which is dened as a physical quantity that is completely specied by a number and
appropriate units plus a direction. That is,
A vector quantity has both magnitude and direction.
Figure 3.4 As a particle moves
from to along an arbitrary
path represented by the broken
line, its displacement is a vector
quantity shown by the arrow drawn
from to .
Another example of a vector quantity is displacement, as you know from Chapter 2. Suppose a particle moves from some point
to some point
along a
straight path, as shown in Figure 3.4. We represent this displacement by drawing
an arrow from
to , with the tip of the arrow pointing away from the starting
point. The direction of the arrowhead represents the direction of the displacement, and the length of the arrow represents the magnitude of the displacement.
If the particle travels along some other path from
to , such as the broken line
in Figure 3.4, its displacement is still the arrow drawn from to .
3.3
(a)
61
Some Properties of Vectors
(b)
(c)
(a) The number of apples in the basket is one example of a scalar quantity. Can you think of
other examples? (Superstock) (b) Jennifer pointing to the right. A vector quantity is one that must
be specied by both magnitude and direction. (Photo by Ray Serway) (c) An anemometer is a device meteorologists use in weather forecasting. The cups spin around and reveal the magnitude
of the wind velocity. The pointer indicates the direction. (Courtesy of Peet Bros.Company, 1308 Doris
Avenue, Ocean, NJ 07712)
In this text, we use a boldface letter, such as A, to represent a vector quantity.
Another common method for vector notation that you should be aware of is the
:
use of an arrow over a letter, such as A . The magnitude of the vector A is written
either A or A . The magnitude of a vector has physical units, such as meters for
displacement or meters per second for velocity.
3.3
SOME PROPERTIES OF VECTORS
y
O
x
Equality of Two Vectors
For many purposes, two vectors A and B may be dened to be equal if they have
the same magnitude and point in the same direction. That is, A B only if A B
and if A and B point in the same direction along parallel lines. For example, all
the vectors in Figure 3.5 are equal even though they have different starting points.
This property allows us to move a vector to a position parallel to itself in a diagram
without affecting the vector.
Figure 3.5 These four vectors are
equal because they have equal
lengths and point in the same direction.
Adding Vectors
2.4
The rules for adding vectors are conveniently described by geometric methods. To
add vector B to vector A, rst draw vector A, with its magnitude represented by a
convenient scale, on graph paper and then draw vector B to the same scale with its
tail starting from the tip of A, as shown in Figure 3.6. The resultant vector R
A B is the vector drawn from the tail of A to the tip of B. This procedure is
known as the triangle method of addition.
For example, if you walked 3.0 m toward the east and then 4.0 m toward the
north, as shown in Figure 3.7, you would nd yourself 5.0 m from where you
R
=
A
+
B
B
A
Figure 3.6 When vector B is
added to vector A, the resultant R
is the vector that runs from the tail
of A to the tip of B.
CHAPTER 3
Vectors
m
)2
=5
.0
m
62
+D
)2
+(
4.0
D
+C
C
=A
|R
|=
+B
(3
.0
m
4.0 m
R
( 4.0 ) = 53°
3.0
θ = tan1
θ
B
A
3.0 m
Figure 3.8 Geometric construction for summing four vectors. The resultant vector R is by
denition the one that completes
the polygon.
Figure 3.7 Vector addition. Walking rst 3.0 m due east and then
4.0 m due north leaves you R
5.0 m from your starting point.
started, measured at an angle of 53° north of east. Your total displacement is the
vector sum of the individual displacements.
A geometric construction can also be used to add more than two vectors. This
is shown in Figure 3.8 for the case of four vectors. The resultant vector R A
B C D is the vector that completes the polygon. In other words, R is the
vector drawn from the tail of the rst vector to the tip of the last vector.
An alternative graphical procedure for adding two vectors, known as the parallelogram rule of addition, is shown in Figure 3.9a. In this construction, the
tails of the two vectors A and B are joined together and the resultant vector R is
the diagonal of a parallelogram formed with A and B as two of its four sides.
When two vectors are added, the sum is independent of the order of the addition. (This fact may seem trivial, but as you will see in Chapter 11, the order is important when vectors are multiplied). This can be seen from the geometric construction in Figure 3.9b and is known as the commutative law of addition:
A
Commutative law
B
B
(3.5)
A
When three or more vectors are added, their sum is independent of the way in
which the individual vectors are grouped together. A geometric proof of this rule
Commutative Law
=
B
R
Figure 3.9 (a) In this construction, the resultant R is the diagonal
of a parallelogram having sides A
and B. (b) This construction shows
that A B B A in other
words, that vector addition is commutative.
R
B
=
A
B
+
+
B
A
A
A
A
(a)
(b)
B
3.3
Figure 3.10 Geometric constructions for verifying the associative
law of addition.
Associative Law
C
+
+
(B
(A
+
B+C
A
C
B)
+
C)
C
63
Some Properties of Vectors
A+B
B
B
A
A
for three vectors is given in Figure 3.10. This is called the associative law of addition:
(3.6)
A (B C) (A B) C
Associative law
In summary, a vector quantity has both magnitude and direction and also
obeys the laws of vector addition as described in Figures 3.6 to 3.10. When two
or more vectors are added together, all of them must have the same units. It would
be meaningless to add a velocity vector (for example, 60 km/h to the east) to a displacement vector (for example, 200 km to the north) because they represent different physical quantities. The same rule also applies to scalars. For example, it
would be meaningless to add time intervals to temperatures.
Negative of a Vector
The negative of the vector A is dened as the vector that when added to A gives
zero for the vector sum. That is, A ( A) 0. The vectors A and A have the
same magnitude but point in opposite directions.
Subtracting Vectors
The operation of vector subtraction makes use of the denition of the negative of
a vector. We dene the operation A B as vector B added to vector A:
A
B
A
(3.7)
( B)
The geometric construction for subtracting two vectors in this way is illustrated in
Figure 3.11a.
Another way of looking at vector subtraction is to note that the difference
A B between two vectors A and B is what you have to add to the second vector
to obtain the rst. In this case, the vector A B points from the tip of the second
vector to the tip of the rst, as Figure 3.11b shows.
Vector Subtraction
B
A
C=AB
B
B
C=AB
A
(a)
(b)
Figure 3.11 (a) This construction shows how to subtract vector B
from vector A. The vector B is
equal in magnitude to vector B and
points in the opposite direction. To
subtract B from A, apply the rule of
vector addition to the combination
of A and B: Draw A along some
convenient axis, place the tail of
B at the tip of A, and C is the difference A B. (b) A second way
of looking at vector subtraction.
The difference vector C A B is
the vector that we must add to B to
obtain A.
64
CHAPTER 3
EXAMPLE 3.2
Vectors
A Vacation Trip
A car travels 20.0 km due north and then 35.0 km in a direction 60.0° west of north, as shown in Figure 3.12. Find the
magnitude and direction of the cars resultant displacement.
Solution In this example, we show two ways to nd the resultant of two vectors. We can solve the problem geometrically, using graph paper and a protractor, as shown in Figure
3.12. (In fact, even when you know you are going to be carryN
W
ing out a calculation, you should sketch the vectors to check
your results.) The displacement R is the resultant when the
two individual displacements A and B are added.
To solve the problem algebraically, we note that the magnitude of R can be obtained from the law of cosines as applied
to the triangle (see Appendix B.4). With
180° 60°
120° and R 2 A2 B 2 2AB cos , we nd that
R
A2 B 2 2AB cos
(20.0 km)2 (35.0 km)2
48.2 km
E
S
The direction of R measured from the northerly direction
can be obtained from the law of sines (Appendix B.4):
y(km)
sin
B
40
B
R
60.0°
θ
sin
20
βA
20
B
sin
R
sin
R
35.0 km
sin 120°
48.2 km
0.629
38.9°
x(km)
0
2(20.0 km)(35.0 km)cos 120°
Figure 3.12
Graphical method for nding the resultant displacement vector R A B.
The resultant displacement of the car is 48.2 km in a direction 38.9° west of north. This result matches what we found
graphically.
Multiplying a Vector by a Scalar
If vector A is multiplied by a positive scalar quantity m, then the product m A is
a vector that has the same direction as A and magnitude m A. If vector A is
multiplied by a negative scalar quantity m, then the product m A is directed opposite A. For example, the vector 5A is ve times as long as A and points in the
same direction as A; the vector 1 A is one-third the length of A and points in the
3
direction opposite A.
y
Quick Quiz 3.2
If vector B is added to vector A, under what condition does the resultant vector A
magnitude A B ? Under what conditions is the resultant vector equal to zero?
A
Ay
θ
O
Ax
3.4
x
Figure 3.13 Any vector A lying in
the x y plane can be represented by
a vector Ax lying along the x axis
and by a vector Ay lying along the y
axis, where A Ax Ay .
2.5
B have
COMPONENTS OF A VECTOR AND UNIT VECTORS
The geometric method of adding vectors is not recommended whenever great accuracy is required or in three-dimensional problems. In this section, we describe a
method of adding vectors that makes use of the projections of vectors along coordinate axes. These projections are called the components of the vector. Any vector
can be completely described by its components.
Consider a vector A lying in the xy plane and making an arbitrary angle with
the positive x axis, as shown in Figure 3.13. This vector can be expressed as the
3.4
65
Components of a Vector and Unit Vectors
sum of two other vectors A x and A y . From Figure 3.13, we see that the three vectors form a right triangle and that A A x A y . (If you cannot see why this equality holds, go back to Figure 3.9 and review the parallelogram rule.) We shall often
refer to the components of a vector A, written A x and A y (without the boldface
notation). The component A x represents the projection of A along the x axis, and
the component A y represents the projection of A along the y axis. These components can be positive or negative. The component A x is positive if A x points in the
positive x direction and is negative if A x points in the negative x direction. The
same is true for the component A y .
From Figure 3.13 and the denition of sine and cosine, we see that cos
Ay /A. Hence, the components of A are
Ax /A and that sin
Ax
A cos
(3.8)
Ay
A sin
(3.9)
Components of the vector A
These components form two sides of a right triangle with a hypotenuse of length
A. Thus, it follows that the magnitude and direction of A are related to its components through the expressions
A
Ax2
tan
Ay2
1
Ay
Ax
(3.10)
Magnitude of A
(3.11)
Direction of A
Note that the signs of the components Ax and Ay depend on the angle .
For example, if
120°, then A x is negative and A y is positive. If
225°, then
both A x and A y are negative. Figure 3.14 summarizes the signs of the components
when A lies in the various quadrants.
When solving problems, you can specify a vector A either with its components
A x and A y or with its magnitude and direction A and .
Quick Quiz 3.3
Can the component of a vector ever be greater than the magnitude of the vector?
Suppose you are working a physics problem that requires resolving a vector
into its components. In many applications it is convenient to express the components in a coordinate system having axes that are not horizontal and vertical but are
still perpendicular to each other. If you choose reference axes or an angle other
than the axes and angle shown in Figure 3.13, the components must be modied
accordingly. Suppose a vector B makes an angle
with the x axis dened in Figure 3.15. The components of B along the x and y axes are Bx
B cos
and
By
B sin , as specied by Equations 3.8 and 3.9. The magnitude and direction
of B are obtained from expressions equivalent to Equations 3.10 and 3.11. Thus,
we can express the components of a vector in any coordinate system that is convenient for a particular situation.
y
Ax negative
Ax positive
Ay positive
Ay positive
Ax negative
Ax positive
Ay negative
Ay negative
Figure 3.14 The signs of the
components of a vector A depend
on the quadrant in which the vector is located.
y
x
B
By
θ
Unit Vectors
Vector quantities often are expressed in terms of unit vectors. A unit vector is a
dimensionless vector having a magnitude of exactly 1. Unit vectors are used
to specify a given direction and have no other physical signicance. They are used
solely as a convenience in describing a direction in space. We shall use the symbols
x
Bx
O
Figure 3.15 The component vectors of B in a coordinate system
that is tilted.
66
CHAPTER 3
Vectors
i, j, and k to represent unit vectors pointing in the positive x, y, and z directions,
respectively. The unit vectors i, j, and k form a set of mutually perpendicular vectors in a right-handed coordinate system, as shown in Figure 3.16a. The magnitude
of each unit vector equals 1; that is, i
j
k
1.
Consider a vector A lying in the xy plane, as shown in Figure 3.16b. The product of the component Ax and the unit vector i is the vector Ax i, which lies on the x
axis and has magnitude Ax . (The vector Ax i is an alternative representation of
vector A x .) Likewise, A y j is a vector of magnitude Ay lying on the y axis. (Again,
vector A y j is an alternative representation of vector A y .) Thus, the unit vector notation for the vector A is
Ax i
A
(3.12)
Ay j
For example, consider a point lying in the xy plane and having cartesian coordinates (x, y ), as in Figure 3.17. The point can be specied by the position vector r,
which in unit vector form is given by
r
Position vector
xi
(3.13)
yj
This notation tells us that the components of r are the lengths x and y.
Now let us see how to use components to add vectors when the geometric
method is not sufciently accurate. Suppose we wish to add vector B to vector A,
where vector B has components Bx and By . All we do is add the x and y components separately. The resultant vector R A B is therefore
R
y
(Ax i
Ay j)
(Bx i
(Ax
Bx)i
(Ay
By j)
or
R
x
j
Because R
Rx i
(3.14)
By)j
R y j , we see that the components of the resultant vector are
i
Rx
Bx
Ry
k
Ax
Ay
By
(3.15)
z
y
(a)
y
y
(x, y)
By
R
Ry
Ay j
A
r
Ay
B
A
x
Ax i
x
O
x
(b)
Figure 3.16 (a) The unit vectors
i, j, and k are directed along the x,
y, and z axes, respectively. (b) Vector A Ax i Ay j lying in the xy
plane has components Ax and Ay .
Figure 3.17 The point whose
cartesian coordinates are (x, y ) can
be represented by the position vector r x i y j.
Bx
Ax
Rx
Figure 3.18 This geometric construction
for the sum of two vectors shows the relationship between the components of the resultant R and the components of the individual vectors.
3.4
67
Components of a Vector and Unit Vectors
We obtain the magnitude of R and the angle it makes with the x axis from its components, using the relationships
R
R x2
(Ax
Bx)2
Ry
Ay
By
Rx
R y2
Ax
Bx
tan
(Ay
By)2
(3.16)
(3.17)
We can check this addition by components with a geometric construction, as
shown in Figure 3.18. Remember that you must note the signs of the components
when using either the algebraic or the geometric method.
At times, we need to consider situations involving motion in three component directions. The extension of our methods to three-dimensional vectors is
straightforward. If A and B both have x, y, and z components, we express them in
the form
A
Ax i
Ay j
Az k
(3.18)
B
Bx i
By j
Bz k
(3.19)
The sum of A and B is
R
(Ax
Bx)i
(Ay
By)j
(Az
Bz)k
(3.20)
Note that Equation 3.20 differs from Equation 3.14: in Equation 3.20, the resultant
vector also has a z component R z Az Bz .
Quick Quiz 3.4
If one component of a vector is not zero, can the magnitude of the vector be zero? Explain.
Quick Quiz 3.5
If A
B
0, what can you say about the components of the two vectors?
Problem-Solving Hints
Adding Vectors
When you need to add two or more vectors, use this step-by-step procedure:
Select a coordinate system that is convenient. (Try to reduce the number of
components you need to nd by choosing axes that line up with as many
vectors as possible.)
Draw a labeled sketch of the vectors described in the problem.
Find the x and y components of all vectors and the resultant components
(the algebraic sum of the components) in the x and y directions.
If necessary, use the Pythagorean theorem to nd the magnitude of the resultant vector and select a suitable trigonometric function to nd the angle
that the resultant vector makes with the x axis.
QuickLab
Write an expression for the vector describing the displacement of a y that
moves from one corner of the oor
of the room that you are in to the opposite corner of the room, near the
ceiling.
68
CHAPTER 3
EXAMPLE 3.3
Vectors
The Sum of Two Vectors
Find the sum of two vectors A and B lying in the xy plane and
given by
A
(2.0i
2.0j) m
and
B
(2.0i
The magnitude of R is given by Equation 3.16:
4.0j) m
A
B
(4.0i
2.0)i m
(2.0
(2.0
4.0)j m
2.0j) m
or
Rx
EXAMPLE 3.4
4.0 m
Ry
Solution Rather than looking at a sketch on at paper, visualize the problem as follows: Start with your ngertip at the
front left corner of your horizontal desktop. Move your ngertip 15 cm to the right, then 30 cm toward the far side of
the desk, then 12 cm vertically upward, then 23 cm to the
right, then 14 cm horizontally toward the front edge of the
desk, then 5.0 cm vertically toward the desk, then 13 cm to
the left, and (nally!) 15 cm toward the back of the desk. The
A sin( 45.0°)
0.50
4.0 m
Rx
x axis, and that angle for this vector is
333°.
mathematical calculation keeps track of this motion along
the three perpendicular axes:
R
d1
d2
(15
d3
13)i cm
23
(12
(25i
14
15)j cm
0)k cm
5.0
31j
(30
7.0k) cm
The resultant displacement has components R x
R y 31 cm, and R z 7.0 cm. Its magnitude is
R
R x 2
Ry2
25 cm,
Rz2
(25 cm)2
(31 cm)2
(7.0 cm)2
40 cm
Taking a Hike
y(km)
N
W
E
S
20
If we denote the displacement vectors on the
rst and second days by A and B, respectively, and use the car
as the origin of coordinates, we obtain the vectors shown in
Figure 3.19. Displacement A has a magnitude of 25.0 km and
is directed 45.0° below the positive x axis. From Equations 3.8
and 3.9, its components are
Ay
2.0 m
Your calculator likely gives the answer
27° for
tan 1( 0.50). This answer is correct if we interpret it to
mean 27° clockwise from the x axis. Our standard form has
been to quote the angles measured counterclockwise from
Solution
A cos( 45.0°)
Ry
tan
A hiker begins a trip by rst walking 25.0 km southeast from
her car. She stops and sets up her tent for the night. On the second day, she walks 40.0 km in a direction 60.0° north of east, at
which point she discovers a forest rangers tower. (a) Determine the components of the hikers displacement for each day.
Ax
20 m
The Resultant Displacement
A particle undergoes three consecutive displacements: d1
(15i 30j 12k) cm, d2 (23i 14 j 5.0k) cm, and
d3 ( 13i 15j) cm. Find the components of the resultant
displacement and its magnitude.
EXAMPLE 3.5
( 2.0 m)2
We can nd the direction of R from Equation 3.17:
the
2.0 m
(4.0 m)2
R y2
4.5 m
Solution Comparing this expression for A with the general expression A Ax i Ay j, we see that Ax 2.0 m and
that Ay 2.0 m. Likewise, Bx 2.0 m and By
4.0 m. We
obtain the resultant vector R, using Equation 3.14:
R
R x2
R
(25.0 km)(0.707)
(25.0 km)(0.707)
10
0
Car
10
20
17.7 km
17.7 km
Tower
R
Figure 3.19
R
A
B.
45.0° 20
A
x(km)
30 40
B
60.0°
50
Tent
The total displacement of the hiker is the vector
3.4
69
Components of a Vector and Unit Vectors
The negative value of Ay indicates that the hiker walks in the
negative y direction on the rst day. The signs of Ax and Ay
also are evident from Figure 3.19.
The second displacement B has a magnitude of 40.0 km
and is 60.0° north of east. Its components are
Rx
Ax
Ry
Ay
17.7 km
Bx
By
20.0 km
17.7 km
37.7 km
34.6 km
16.9 km
In unit vector form, we can write the total displacement as
Bx
B cos 60.0°
(40.0 km)(0.500)
20.0 km
R
By
B sin 60.0°
(40.0 km)(0.866)
Exercise
Determine the magnitude and direction of the total displacement.
Answer
Solution
The resultant displacement for the trip R
has components given by Equation 3.15:
A
B
Solution
It is convenient to choose the coordinate system
shown in Figure 3.20, where the x axis points to the east and
the y axis points to the north. Let us denote the three consecutive displacements by the vectors a, b, and c. Displacement a
has a magnitude of 175 km and the components
ax
a cos(30.0°)
(175 km)(0.866)
152 km
ay
a sin(30.0°)
(175 km)(0.500)
87.5 km
Displacement b, whose magnitude is 153 km, has the components
bx
b cos(110°)
(153 km)( 0.342)
by
b sin(110°)
(153 km)(0.940)
52.3 km
144 km
Finally, displacement c, whose magnitude is 195 km, has the
components
cx
c cos(180°)
(195 km)( 1)
cy
c sin(180°)
195 km
0
Therefore, the components of the position vector R from the
starting point to city C are
Rx
ax
bx
cx
152 km
52.3 km
195 km
87.5 km
144 km
0
95.3 km
y(km)
N
250
B
W
c
200
150
b
E
110°
R
by
cy
232 km
R
( 95.3i
232j) km.
That
is, the airplane can reach city C from the starting point by
rst traveling 95.3 km due west and then by traveling 232 km
due north.
A
a
30.0°
ay
In unit vector notation,
100
50
Ry
S
20.0°
50
41.3 km, 24.1° north of east from the car.
Lets Fly Away!
A commuter airplane takes the route shown in Figure 3.20.
First, it ies from the origin of the coordinate system shown
to city A, located 175 km in a direction 30.0° north of east.
Next, it ies 153 km 20.0° west of north to city B. Finally, it
ies 195 km due west to city C. Find the location of city C relative to the origin.
C
16.9j) km
34.6 km
(b) Determine the components of the hikers resultant
displacement R for the trip. Find an expression for R in
terms of unit vectors.
EXAMPLE 3.6
(37.7i
x(km)
100 150 200
Exercise
Find the magnitude and direction of R.
Figure 3.20
The airplane starts at the origin, ies rst to city A,
then to city B, and nally to city C.
Answer
251 km, 22.3° west of north.
70
CHAPTER 3
Vectors
R=A+B
R
B
R
B
A
A
(a)
(b)
Figure 3.21 (a) Vector addition by the triangle method. (b) Vector addition by the
parallelogram rule.
SUMMARY
y
A
Ay
θ
O
Ax
x
Figure 3.22 The addition of the
two vectors Ax and Ay gives vector A.
Note that Ax Ax i and Ay A y j,
where Ax and Ay are the components of
vector A.
Scalar quantities are those that have only magnitude and no associated direction. Vector quantities have both magnitude and direction and obey the laws of
vector addition.
We can add two vectors A and B graphically, using either the triangle method
or the parallelogram rule. In the triangle method (Fig. 3.21a), the resultant vector
R A B runs from the tail of A to the tip of B. In the parallelogram method
(Fig. 3.21b), R is the diagonal of a parallelogram having A and B as two of its sides.
You should be able to add or subtract vectors, using these graphical methods.
The x component Ax of the vector A is equal to the projection of A along the x
axis of a coordinate system, as shown in Figure 3.22, where Ax A cos . The y
component Ay of A is the projection of A along the y axis, where Ay A sin . Be
sure you can determine which trigonometric functions you should use in all situations, especially when is dened as something other than the counterclockwise
angle from the positive x axis.
If a vector A has an x component Ax and a y component Ay , the vector can be
expressed in unit vector form as A Ax i Ay j. In this notation, i is a unit vector
pointing in the positive x direction, and j is a unit vector pointing in the positive y
direction. Because i and j are unit vectors, i
j
1.
We can nd the resultant of two or more vectors by resolving all vectors into
their x and y components, adding their resultant x and y components, and then
using the Pythagorean theorem to nd the magnitude of the resultant vector. We
can nd the angle that the resultant vector makes with respect to the x axis by using a suitable trigonometric function.
QUESTIONS
1. Two vectors have unequal magnitudes. Can their sum be
zero? Explain.
2. Can the magnitude of a particles displacement be greater
than the distance traveled? Explain.
3. The magnitudes of two vectors A and B are A 5 units
and B 2 units. Find the largest and smallest values possible for the resultant vector R A B.
4. Vector A lies in the xy plane. For what orientations of vector A will both of its components be negative? For what
orientations will its components have opposite signs?
5. If the component of vector A along the direction of vector
B is zero, what can you conclude about these two vectors?
6. Can the magnitude of a vector have a negative value? Explain.
7. Which of the following are vectors and which are not:
force, temperature, volume, ratings of a television show,
height, velocity, age?
8. Under what circumstances would a nonzero vector lying in
the xy plane ever have components that are equal in magnitude?
9. Is it possible to add a vector quantity to a scalar quantity?
Explain.
71
Problems
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
Section 3.1
WEB
Coordinate Systems
1. The polar coordinates of a point are r 5.50 m and
240°. What are the cartesian coordinates of this
point?
2. Two points in the xy plane have cartesian coordinates
(2.00, 4.00) m and ( 3.00, 3.00) m. Determine
(a) the distance between these points and (b) their polar coordinates.
3. If the cartesian coordinates of a point are given by (2, y)
and its polar coordinates are (r, 30°), determine y and r.
4. Two points in a plane have polar coordinates (2.50 m,
30.0°) and (3.80 m, 120.0°). Determine (a) the cartesian coordinates of these points and (b) the distance
between them.
5. A y lands on one wall of a room. The lower left-hand
corner of the wall is selected as the origin of a twodimensional cartesian coordinate system. If the y is located at the point having coordinates (2.00, 1.00) m,
(a) how far is it from the corner of the room? (b) what
is its location in polar coordinates?
6. If the polar coordinates of the point (x, y ) are (r, ),
determine the polar coordinates for the points
(a) ( x, y ), (b) ( 2x, 2y ), and (c) (3x, 3y ).
Section 3.2
WEB
13.
14.
WEB
15.
y
Vector and Scalar Quantities
Section 3.3
12.
ative x axis. Using graphical methods, nd (a) the vector sum A B and (b) the vector difference A B.
A force F1 of magnitude 6.00 units acts at the origin in a
direction 30.0° above the positive x axis. A second force
F2 of magnitude 5.00 units acts at the origin in the direction of the positive y axis. Find graphically the magnitude and direction of the resultant force F1 + F2 .
A person walks along a circular path of radius 5.00 m. If
the person walks around one half of the circle, nd
(a) the magnitude of the displacement vector and
(b) how far the person walked. (c) What is the magnitude of the displacement if the person walks all the way
around the circle?
A dog searching for a bone walks 3.50 m south, then
8.20 m at an angle 30.0° north of east, and nally
15.0 m west. Using graphical techniques, nd the dogs
resultant displacement vector.
Each of the displacement vectors A and B shown in Figure P3.15 has a magnitude of 3.00 m. Find graphically
(a) A B, (b) A B, (c) B A, (d) A 2B. Report
all angles counterclockwise from the positive x axis.
Some Properties of Vectors
B
7. An airplane ies 200 km due west from city A to city B
and then 300 km in the direction 30.0° north of west
from city B to city C. (a) In straight-line distance, how
far is city C from city A? (b) Relative to city A, in what
direction is city C?
8. A pedestrian moves 6.00 km east and then 13.0 km
north. Using the graphical method, nd the magnitude
and direction of the resultant displacement vector.
9. A surveyor measures the distance across a straight river
by the following method: Starting directly across from a
tree on the opposite bank, she walks 100 m along the
riverbank to establish a baseline. Then she sights across
to the tree. The angle from her baseline to the tree is
35.0°. How wide is the river?
10. A plane ies from base camp to lake A, a distance of
280 km at a direction 20.0° north of east. After dropping off supplies, it ies to lake B, which is 190 km and
30.0° west of north from lake A. Graphically determine
the distance and direction from lake B to the base
camp.
11. Vector A has a magnitude of 8.00 units and makes an
angle of 45.0° with the positive x axis. Vector B also has
a magnitude of 8.00 units and is directed along the neg-
3.00 m
A
0m
3.0
30.0°
O
Figure P3.15
x
Problems 15 and 39.
16. Arbitrarily dene the instantaneous vector height of a
person as the displacement vector from the point
halfway between the feet to the top of the head. Make
an order-of-magnitude estimate of the total vector
height of all the people in a city of population 100 000
(a) at 10 a.m. on a Tuesday and (b) at 5 a.m. on a Saturday. Explain your reasoning.
17. A roller coaster moves 200 ft horizontally and then rises
135 ft at an angle of 30.0° above the horizontal. It then
travels 135 ft at an angle of 40.0° downward. What is its
displacement from its starting point? Use graphical
techniques.
18. The driver of a car drives 3.00 km north, 2.00 km northeast (45.0° east of north), 4.00 km west, and then
72
CHAPTER 3
Vectors
3.00 km southeast (45.0° east of south). Where does he
end up relative to his starting point? Work out your answer graphically. Check by using components. (The car
is not near the North Pole or the South Pole.)
19. Fox Mulder is trapped in a maze. To nd his way out, he
walks 10.0 m, makes a 90.0° right turn, walks 5.00 m,
makes another 90.0° right turn, and walks 7.00 m. What
is his displacement from his initial position?
24.
Section 3.4 Components of a Vector and Unit Vectors
20. Find the horizontal and vertical components of the 100-m
displacement of a superhero who ies from the top of a
tall building following the path shown in Figure P3.20.
WEB
25.
26.
y
30.0°
x
27.
100 m
28.
Figure P3.20
21. A person walks 25.0° north of east for 3.10 km. How far
would she have to walk due north and due east to arrive
at the same location?
22. While exploring a cave, a spelunker starts at the entrance and moves the following distances: She goes
75.0 m north, 250 m east, 125 m at an angle 30.0° north
of east, and 150 m south. Find the resultant displacement from the cave entrance.
23. In the assembly operation illustrated in Figure P3.23, a
robot rst lifts an object upward along an arc that forms
one quarter of a circle having a radius of 4.80 cm and
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Figure P3.23
lying in an east west vertical plane. The robot then
moves the object upward along a second arc that forms
one quarter of a circle having a radius of 3.70 cm and
lying in a north south vertical plane. Find (a) the magnitude of the total displacement of the object and
(b) the angle the total displacement makes with the
vertical.
Vector B has x, y, and z components of 4.00, 6.00, and
3.00 units, respectively. Calculate the magnitude of B
and the angles that B makes with the coordinate axes.
A vector has an x component of 25.0 units and a y
component of 40.0 units. Find the magnitude and direction of this vector.
A map suggests that Atlanta is 730 mi in a direction
5.00° north of east from Dallas. The same map shows
that Chicago is 560 mi in a direction 21.0° west of north
from Atlanta. Assuming that the Earth is at, use this information to nd the displacement from Dallas to
Chicago.
A displacement vector lying in the xy plane has a magnitude of 50.0 m and is directed at an angle of 120° to the
positive x axis. Find the x and y components of this vector and express the vector in unit vector notation.
If A 2.00i 6.00j and B 3.00i 2.00j, (a) sketch
the vector sum C A B and the vector difference
D A B. (b) Find solutions for C and D, rst in
terms of unit vectors and then in terms of polar coordinates, with angles measured with respect to the x axis.
Find the magnitude and direction of the resultant of
three displacements having x and y components (3.00,
2.00) m, ( 5.00, 3.00) m, and (6.00, 1.00) m.
Vector A has x and y components of 8.70 cm and
15.0 cm, respectively; vector B has x and y components
of 13.2 cm and 6.60 cm, respectively. If A B
3C 0, what are the components of C?
Consider two vectors A 3i 2j and B
i 4j.
Calculate (a) A B, (b) A B, (c) A B ,
(d) A B , (e) the directions of A B and A B.
A boy runs 3.00 blocks north, 4.00 blocks northeast, and
5.00 blocks west. Determine the length and direction of
the displacement vector that goes from the starting
point to his nal position.
Obtain expressions in component form for the position
vectors having polar coordinates (a) 12.8 m, 150°;
(b) 3.30 cm, 60.0°; (c) 22.0 in., 215°.
Consider the displacement vectors A (3i 3j) m,
B (i 4j) m, and C ( 2i 5j) m. Use the component method to determine (a) the magnitude and direction of the vector D A B C and (b) the magnitude and direction of E
A B C.
A particle undergoes the following consecutive displacements: 3.50 m south, 8.20 m northeast, and 15.0 m west.
What is the resultant displacement?
In a game of American football, a quarterback takes the
ball from the line of scrimmage, runs backward for 10.0
yards, and then sideways parallel to the line of scrimmage for 15.0 yards. At this point, he throws a forward
Problems
pass 50.0 yards straight downeld perpendicular to the
line of scrimmage. What is the magnitude of the footballs resultant displacement?
37. The helicopter view in Figure P3.37 shows two people
pulling on a stubborn mule. Find (a) the single force
that is equivalent to the two forces shown and (b) the
force that a third person would have to exert on the
mule to make the resultant force equal to zero. The
forces are measured in units of newtons.
y
F1 =
120 N
F2 =
80.0 N
75.0˚
60.0˚
x
Figure P3.37
38. A novice golfer on the green takes three strokes to sink
the ball. The successive displacements are 4.00 m to the
north, 2.00 m northeast, and 1.00 m 30.0° west of south.
Starting at the same initial point, an expert golfer could
make the hole in what single displacement?
39. Find the x and y components of the vectors A and B
shown in Figure P3.15; then derive an expression for
the resultant vector A B in unit vector notation.
40. You are standing on the ground at the origin of a coordinate system. An airplane ies over you with constant
velocity parallel to the x axis and at a constant height of
7.60 103 m. At t 0, the airplane is directly above
you, so that the vector from you to it is given by P0
(7.60 103 m)j. At t 30.0 s, the position vector leading from you to the airplane is P30 (8.04 103 m)i
(7.60 103 m)j. Determine the magnitude and orientation of the airplanes position vector at t 45.0 s.
41. A particle undergoes two displacements. The rst has a
magnitude of 150 cm and makes an angle of 120° with
the positive x axis. The resultant displacement has a magnitude of 140 cm and is directed at an angle of 35.0° to
the positive x axis. Find the magnitude and direction of
the second displacement.
73
42. Vectors A and B have equal magnitudes of 5.00. If the
sum of A and B is the vector 6.00 j, determine the angle
between A and B.
43. The vector A has x, y, and z components of 8.00, 12.0,
and 4.00 units, respectively. (a) Write a vector expression for A in unit vector notation. (b) Obtain a
unit vector expression for a vector B one-fourth the
length of A pointing in the same direction as A. (c) Obtain a unit vector expression for a vector C three times
the length of A pointing in the direction opposite the
direction of A.
44. Instructions for nding a buried treasure include the
following: Go 75.0 paces at 240°, turn to 135° and walk
125 paces, then travel 100 paces at 160°. The angles are
measured counterclockwise from an axis pointing to
the east, the x direction. Determine the resultant displacement from the starting point.
45. Given the displacement vectors A (3i 4j 4k) m
and B (2i 3j 7k) m, nd the magnitudes of the
vectors (a) C A B and (b) D 2A B, also expressing each in terms of its x, y, and z components.
46. A radar station locates a sinking ship at range 17.3 km
and bearing 136° clockwise from north. From the same
station a rescue plane is at horizontal range 19.6 km,
153° clockwise from north, with elevation 2.20 km.
(a) Write the vector displacement from plane to ship,
letting i represent east, j north, and k up. (b) How far
apart are the plane and ship?
47. As it passes over Grand Bahama Island, the eye of a hurricane is moving in a direction 60.0° north of west with
a speed of 41.0 km/h. Three hours later, the course of
the hurricane suddenly shifts due north and its speed
slows to 25.0 km/h. How far from Grand Bahama is the
eye 4.50 h after it passes over the island?
48. (a) Vector E has magnitude 17.0 cm and is directed
27.0° counterclockwise from the x axis. Express it in
unit vector notation. (b) Vector F has magnitude
17.0 cm and is directed 27.0° counterclockwise from the
y axis. Express it in unit vector notation. (c) Vector
G has magnitude 17.0 cm and is directed 27.0° clockwise
from the y axis. Express it in unit vector notation.
49. Vector A has a negative x component 3.00 units in
length and a positive y component 2.00 units in length.
(a) Determine an expression for A in unit vector notation. (b) Determine the magnitude and direction of A.
(c) What vector B, when added to vector A, gives a resultant vector with no x component and a negative y
component 4.00 units in length?
50. An airplane starting from airport A ies 300 km east,
then 350 km at 30.0° west of north, and then 150 km
north to arrive nally at airport B. (a) The next day, another plane ies directly from airport A to airport B in a
straight line. In what direction should the pilot travel in
this direct ight? (b) How far will the pilot travel in this
direct ight? Assume there is no wind during these
ights.
74
WEB
CHAPTER 3
Vectors
51. Three vectors are oriented as shown in Figure P3.51,
20.0 units, B
40.0 units, and
where A
C
30.0 units. Find (a) the x and y components of
the resultant vector (expressed in unit vector notation)
and (b) the magnitude and direction of the resultant
vector.
y
100 m
Start
y
x
300 m
End
B
200 m
A
45.0°
O
45.0°
x
52. If A (6.00i
units, and C
such that a A
8.00j) units, B ( 8.00i 3.00j)
(26.0i 19.0j) units, determine a and b
b B C 0.
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
53. Two vectors A and B have precisely equal magnitudes.
For the magnitude of A B to be 100 times greater
than the magnitude of A B, what must be the angle
between them?
54. Two vectors A and B have precisely equal magnitudes.
For the magnitude of A B to be greater than the
magnitude of A B by the factor n, what must be the
angle between them?
55. A vector is given by R 2.00i 1.00j 3.00k. Find
(a) the magnitudes of the x, y, and z components,
(b) the magnitude of R, and (c) the angles between R
and the x, y, and z axes.
56. Find the sum of these four vector forces: 12.0 N to the
right at 35.0° above the horizontal, 31.0 N to the left at
55.0° above the horizontal, 8.40 N to the left at 35.0° below the horizontal, and 24.0 N to the right at 55.0° below the horizontal. (Hint: Make a drawing of this situation and select the best axes for x and y so that you have
the least number of components. Then add the vectors,
using the component method.)
57. A person going for a walk follows the path shown in Figure P3.57. The total trip consists of four straight-line
paths. At the end of the walk, what is the persons resultant displacement measured from the starting point?
58. In general, the instantaneous position of an object is
specied by its position vector P leading from a xed
150 m
Figure P3.57
C
Figure P3.51
30°
60°
origin to the location of the object. Suppose that for a
certain object the position vector is a function of time,
given by P 4i 3j 2t j, where P is in meters and t is
in seconds. Evaluate d P/dt. What does this derivative
represent about the object?
59. A jet airliner, moving initially at 300 mi/h to the east,
suddenly enters a region where the wind is blowing at
100 mi/h in a direction 30.0° north of east. What are
the new speed and direction of the aircraft relative to
the ground?
60. A pirate has buried his treasure on an island with ve
trees located at the following points: A(30.0 m,
20.0 m), B(60.0 m, 80.0 m), C ( 10.0 m, 10.0 m),
D(40.0 m, 30.0 m), and E( 70.0 m, 60.0 m). All
points are measured relative to some origin, as in Figure P3.60. Instructions on the map tell you to start at A
and move toward B, but to cover only one-half the distance between A and B. Then, move toward C, covering
one-third the distance between your current location
and C. Next, move toward D, covering one-fourth the
distance between where you are and D. Finally, move toward E, covering one-fth the distance between you and
E, stop, and dig. (a) What are the coordinates of the
point where the pirates treasure is buried? (b) ReB
E
y
x
C
A
D
Figure P3.60
75
Answers to Quick Quizzes
arrange the order of the trees, (for instance, B(30.0 m,
20.0 m), A(60.0 m, 80.0 m), E( 10.0 m, 10.0 m),
C(40.0 m, 30.0 m), and D( 70.0 m, 60.0 m), and repeat the calculation to show that the answer does not
depend on the order of the trees.
61. A rectangular parallelepiped has dimensions a, b, and c,
as in Figure P3.61. (a) Obtain a vector expression for
the face diagonal vector R1 . What is the magnitude of
this vector? (b) Obtain a vector expression for the body
diagonal vector R2 . Note that R1 , c k, and R2 make a
right triangle, and prove that the magnitude of R2 is
a 2 b 2 c 2.
62. A point lying in the xy plane and having coordinates
(x, y ) can be described by the position vector given by
r x i y j. (a) Show that the displacement vector for a
particle moving from (x 1 , y 1 ) to (x 2 , y 2 ) is given by
d (x 2 x 1 )i ( y 2 y 1 )j. (b) Plot the position vectors r1 and r2 and the displacement vector d, and verify
by the graphical method that d r2 r1 .
63. A point P is described by the coordinates (x, y ) with respect to the normal cartesian coordinate system shown
in Figure P3.63. Show that (x , y ), the coordinates of
this point in the rotated coordinate system, are related
to (x, y ) and the rotation angle by the expressions
x
x cos
y cos
x sin
y
z
y sin
y
a
P
b
y
x
O
x
R2
α
c
O
R1
x
y
Figure P3.61
Figure P3.63
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
3.1 The honeybee needs to communicate to the other honeybees how far it is to the ower and in what direction they
must y. This is exactly the kind of information that polar
coordinates convey, as long as the origin of the coordinates is the beehive.
3.2 The resultant has magnitude A B when vector A is oriented in the same direction as vector B. The resultant
vector is A B 0 when vector A is oriented in the direction opposite vector B and A B.
3.3 No. In two dimensions, a vector and its components form
a right triangle. The vector is the hypotenuse and must be
longer than either side. Problem 61 extends this concept
to three dimensions.
3.4 No. The magnitude of a vector A is equal to
Ax2
Ay2 Az2. Therefore, if any component is nonzero, A cannot be zero. This generalization of the Pythagorean theorem is left for you to prove in Problem 61.
3.5 The fact that A B 0 tells you that A
B. Therefore, the components of the two vectors must have oppoBy ,
Bx , Ay
site signs and equal magnitudes: Ax
Bz .
and Az
PUZZLER
This airplane is used by NASA for astronaut training. When it ies along a certain curved path, anything inside the
plane that is not strapped down begins to
oat. What causes this strange effect?
(NASA)
web
For more information on microgravity in
general and on this airplane, visit
http://microgravity.msfc.nasa.gov/
and http://www.jsc.nasa.gov/coop/
kc135/kc135.html
chapter
Motion in Two Dimensions
Chapter Outline
4.1 The Displacement, Velocity, and
Acceleration Vectors
4.2 Two-Dimensional Motion with
Constant Acceleration
4.3 Projectile Motion
76
4.4 Uniform Circular Motion
4.5 Tangential and Radial Acceleration
4.6 Relative Velocity and Relative
Acceleration
4.1
77
The Displacement, Velocity, and Acceleration Vectors
I
n this chapter we deal with the kinematics of a particle moving in two dimensions. Knowing the basics of two-dimensional motion will allow us to examine
in future chapters a wide variety of motions, ranging from the motion of satellites in orbit to the motion of electrons in a uniform electric eld. We begin by
studying in greater detail the vector nature of displacement, velocity, and acceleration. As in the case of one-dimensional motion, we derive the kinematic equations
for two-dimensional motion from the fundamental denitions of these three quantities. We then treat projectile motion and uniform circular motion as special cases
of motion in two dimensions. We also discuss the concept of relative motion,
which shows why observers in different frames of reference may measure different
displacements, velocities, and accelerations for a given particle.
y
4.1
THE DISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY, AND
ACCELERATION VECTORS
r
ti
In Chapter 2 we found that the motion of a particle moving along a straight line is
completely known if its position is known as a function of time. Now let us extend
this idea to motion in the xy plane. We begin by describing the position of a particle by its position vector r, drawn from the origin of some coordinate system to the
particle located in the xy plane, as in Figure 4.1. At time ti the particle is at point
, and at some later time tf it is at point . The path from
to
is not necessarily a straight line. As the particle moves from
to
in the time interval
t t f t i , its position vector changes from ri to rf . As we learned in Chapter 2,
displacement is a vector, and the displacement of the particle is the difference between its nal position and its initial position. We now formally dene the displacement vector r for the particle of Figure 4.1 as being the difference between its nal position vector and its initial position vector:
r rf ri
(4.1)
rf
O
Figure 4.1
Displacement vector
We dene the average velocity of a particle during the time interval t as the
displacement of the particle divided by that time interval:
r
t
(4.2)
Multiplying or dividing a vector quantity by a scalar quantity changes only the magnitude of the vector, not its direction. Because displacement is a vector quantity
and the time interval is a scalar quantity, we conclude that the average velocity is a
vector quantity directed along r.
Note that the average velocity between points is independent of the path taken.
This is because average velocity is proportional to displacement, which depends
Path of
particle
x
A particle moving in
the xy plane is located with the position vector r drawn from the origin to the particle. The displacement of the particle as it moves
from to in the time interval
t t f ti is equal to the vector
r rf ri .
The direction of r is indicated in Figure 4.1. As we see from the gure, the magnitude of r is less than the distance traveled along the curved path followed by
the particle.
As we saw in Chapter 2, it is often useful to quantify motion by looking at the
ratio of a displacement divided by the time interval during which that displacement occurred. In two-dimensional (or three-dimensional) kinematics, everything
is the same as in one-dimensional kinematics except that we must now use vectors
rather than plus and minus signs to indicate the direction of motion.
v
tf
ri
Average velocity
78
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
Figure 4.2 As a particle moves between two points, its average velocity is
in the direction of the displacement vector r. As the end point of the path is
moved from to
to
, the respective displacements and corresponding
time intervals become smaller and
smaller. In the limit that the end point
approaches , t approaches zero, and
the direction of r approaches that of
the line tangent to the curve at . By
denition, the instantaneous velocity at
is in the direction of this tangent
line.
y Direction of v at
"
'
r3
r2
r1
x
O
only on the initial and nal position vectors and not on the path taken. As we did
with one-dimensional motion, we conclude that if a particle starts its motion at
some point and returns to this point via any path, its average velocity is zero for
this trip because its displacement is zero.
Consider again the motion of a particle between two points in the xy plane, as
shown in Figure 4.2. As the time interval over which we observe the motion becomes smaller and smaller, the direction of the displacement approaches that of
the line tangent to the path at .
The instantaneous velocity v is dened as the limit of the average velocity
r/ t as t approaches zero:
v
Instantaneous velocity
lim
t:0
r
t
dr
dt
(4.3)
That is, the instantaneous velocity equals the derivative of the position vector with
respect to time. The direction of the instantaneous velocity vector at any point in a
particles path is along a line tangent to the path at that point and in the direction
of motion (Fig. 4.3).
The magnitude of the instantaneous velocity vector v
v is called the speed,
which, as you should remember, is a scalar quantity.
y
v
vf
vi
vf
ri
rf
O
vi
or
vi
v
vf
x
Figure 4.3 A particle moves
from position to position .
Its velocity vector changes from
vi to vf . The vector diagrams at
the upper right show two ways
of determining the vector v
from the initial and nal
velocities.
4.2
79
Two-Dimensional Motion with Constant Acceleration
As a particle moves from one point to another along some path, its instantaneous velocity vector changes from vi at time ti to vf at time tf . Knowing the velocity at these points allows us to determine the average acceleration of the particle:
The average acceleration of a particle as it moves from one position to another is dened as the change in the instantaneous velocity vector v divided by
the time t during which that change occurred:
vf
vi
tf
a
ti
v
t
(4.4)
Average acceleration
Because it is the ratio of a vector quantity v and a scalar quantity t, we conclude
that average acceleration a is a vector quantity directed along v. As indicated in
Figure 4.3, the direction of v is found by adding the vector vi (the negative of
vi ) to the vector vf , because by denition v vf vi .
When the average acceleration of a particle changes during different time intervals, it is useful to dene its instantaneous acceleration a:
The instantaneous acceleration a is dened as the limiting value of the ratio
v/ t as t approaches zero:
a
3.5
lim
t:0
v
t
dv
dt
(4.5)
In other words, the instantaneous acceleration equals the derivative of the velocity
vector with respect to time.
It is important to recognize that various changes can occur when a particle accelerates. First, the magnitude of the velocity vector (the speed) may change with
time as in straight-line (one-dimensional) motion. Second, the direction of the velocity vector may change with time even if its magnitude (speed) remains constant,
as in curved-path (two-dimensional) motion. Finally, both the magnitude and the
direction of the velocity vector may change simultaneously.
Quick Quiz 4.1
The gas pedal in an automobile is called the accelerator. (a) Are there any other controls in an
automobile that can be considered accelerators? (b) When is the gas pedal not an accelerator?
4.2
TWO-DIMENSIONAL MOTION WITH
CONSTANT ACCELERATION
Let us consider two-dimensional motion during which the acceleration remains
constant in both magnitude and direction.
The position vector for a particle moving in the x y plane can be written
r
xi
yj
(4.6)
where x, y, and r change with time as the particle moves while i and j remain constant. If the position vector is known, the velocity of the particle can be obtained
from Equations 4.3 and 4.6, which give
v
vxi
vy j
(4.7)
Instantaneous acceleration
80
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
Because a is assumed constant, its components ax and ay also are constants. Therefore, we can apply the equations of kinematics to the x and y components of the
velocity vector. Substituting vx f vxi a x t and vy f vyi a y t into Equation 4.7 to
determine the nal velocity at any time t, we obtain
vf
vf
Velocity vector as a function of time
(v xi a x t)i (v yi a y t)j
(v xi i v yi j) (a x i a y j)t
vi at
(4.8)
This result states that the velocity of a particle at some time t equals the vector sum
of its initial velocity vi and the additional velocity at acquired in the time t as a result of constant acceleration.
Similarly, from Equation 2.11 we know that the x and y coordinates of a particle moving with constant acceleration are
xf
Position vector as a function of
time
xi
v xit
1
2
2 a xt
yf
yi
v yit
1
2
2 a yt
Substituting these expressions into Equation 4.6 (and labeling the nal position
vector rf ) gives
rf (x i v xit 1a xt 2)i (y i v yit 1a yt 2)j
2
2
(x i i y i j) (v xi i v yi j)t 1(a x i a y j)t 2
2
(4.9)
rf ri vit 1at 2
2
This equation tells us that the displacement vector r rf ri is the vector sum
of a displacement vi t arising from the initial velocity of the particle and a displacement 1at 2 resulting from the uniform acceleration of the particle.
2
Graphical representations of Equations 4.8 and 4.9 are shown in Figure 4.4.
For simplicity in drawing the gure, we have taken ri 0 in Figure 4.4a. That is,
we assume the particle is at the origin at t t i 0. Note from Figure 4.4a that rf is
generally not along the direction of either vi or a because the relationship between these quantities is a vector expression. For the same reason, from Figure
4.4b we see that vf is generally not along the direction of vi or a. Finally, note that
vf and rf are generally not in the same direction.
y
y
ayt
1 a t2
2y
vyf
rf
yf
vf
1 at 2
2
vyi
vyit
at
vi
x
vit
vxi
x
vxit
xf
(a)
axt
1 a t2
2x
vxf
(b)
Figure 4.4 Vector representations and components of (a) the displacement and (b) the velocity of a particle moving with a uniform acceleration a. To simplify the drawing, we have set ri 0.
4.2
81
Two-Dimensional Motion with Constant Acceleration
Because Equations 4.8 and 4.9 are vector expressions, we may write them in
component form:
vf
vi
rf
ri
vit
v xf
v yf
12
2 at
v xi
v yi
a xt
a yt
xf
yf
at
xi
yi
v xit
v yit
(4.8a)
1a t 2
2x
1
2
2 a yt
(4.9a)
These components are illustrated in Figure 4.4. The component form of the equations for vf and rf show us that two-dimensional motion at constant acceleration is
equivalent to two independent motions one in the x direction and one in the y direction having constant accelerations ax and ay .
EXAMPLE 4.1
Motion in a Plane
A particle starts from the origin at t 0 with an initial velocity having an x component of 20 m/s and a y component of
15 m/s. The particle moves in the xy plane with an x component of acceleration only, given by ax 4.0 m/s2. (a) Determine the components of the velocity vector at any time
and the total velocity vector at any time.
Solution After carefully reading the problem, we realize
we can set vxi 20 m/s, vyi
15 m/s, ax 4.0 m/s2, and
ay 0. This allows us to sketch a rough motion diagram of
the situation. The x component of velocity starts at 20 m/s
and increases by 4.0 m/s every second. The y component of
velocity never changes from its initial value of
15 m/s.
From this information we sketch some velocity vectors as
shown in Figure 4.5. Note that the spacing between successive
images increases as time goes on because the velocity is increasing.
The equations of kinematics give
vxf
v xi
a xt
vyf
v yi
a yt
(20
4.0t) m/s
15 m/s
0
vxf i
v yf j
[(20
4.0t)i
(b) Calculate the velocity and speed of the particle at t
5.0 s.
Solution
vf
With t
{[20
5.0 s, the result from part (a) gives
4.0(5.0)]i
15j} m/s
(40i
15j) m/s
This result tells us that at t 5.0 s, vxf 40 m/s and vyf
15 m/s. Knowing these two components for this twodimensional motion, we can nd both the direction and the
magnitude of the velocity vector. To determine the angle
that v makes with the x axis at t 5.0 s, we use the fact that
tan
vyf /vxf :
15 m/s
Therefore,
vf
We could also obtain this result using Equation 4.8 directly, noting that a 4.0i m/s2 and vi (20i 15j) m/s.
According to this result, the x component of velocity increases while the y component remains constant; this is consistent with what we predicted. After a long time, the x component will be so great that the y component will be
negligible. If we were to extend the objects path in Figure
4.5, eventually it would become nearly parallel to the x axis. It
is always helpful to make comparisons between nal answers
and initial stated conditions.
15j] m/s
tan
y
x
1
v yf
vxf
tan
1
15 m/s
40 m/s
21°
where the minus sign indicates an angle of 21° below the positive x axis. The speed is the magnitude of vf :
vf
vf
vx f 2
vyf 2
(40)2
( 15)2 m/s
43 m/s
In looking over our result, we notice that if we calculate vi
from the x and y components of vi , we nd that v f v i . Does
this make sense?
Figure 4.5
Motion diagram for the particle.
(c) Determine the x and y coordinates of the particle at
any time t and the position vector at this time.
82
CHAPTER 4
Solution
Because x i
xf
v xit
yf
v yit
0 at t
yi
1
2
2 a xt
Motion in Two Dimensions
(Alternatively, we could obtain rf by applying Equation 4.9 directly, with vi (20i 15j) m/s and a 4.0i m/s2. Try it!)
Thus, for example, at t 5.0 s, x 150 m, y
75 m, and
rf (150i 75j) m. The magnitude of the displacement of
the particle from the origin at t 5.0 s is the magnitude of rf
at this time:
0, Equation 2.11 gives
2.0t 2) m
(20t
( 15t) m
rf
xf i
yf j
2.0t 2)i
[(20t
4.3
(150)2
rf
rf
Therefore, the position vector at any time t is
( 75)2 m
170 m
Note that this is not the distance that the particle travels in
this time! Can you determine this distance from the available
data?
15t j] m
PROJECTILE MOTION
Anyone who has observed a baseball in motion (or, for that matter, any other object thrown into the air) has observed projectile motion. The ball moves in a
curved path, and its motion is simple to analyze if we make two assumptions:
(1) the free-fall acceleration g is constant over the range of motion and is directed
downward,1 and (2) the effect of air resistance is negligible.2 With these assumptions, we nd that the path of a projectile, which we call its trajectory, is always a
parabola. We use these assumptions throughout this chapter.
To show that the trajectory of a projectile is a parabola, let us choose our reference frame such that the y direction is vertical and positive is upward. Because air
g (as in one-dimensional free fall)
resistance is neglected, we know that a y
and that a x 0. Furthermore, let us assume that at t 0, the projectile leaves the
origin (x i y i 0) with speed vi , as shown in Figure 4.6. The vector vi makes an
angle i with the horizontal, where i is the angle at which the projectile leaves the
origin. From the denitions of the cosine and sine functions we have
Assumptions of projectile motion
3.5
cos
i
v xi /v i
sin
v yi /v i
i
Therefore, the initial x and y components of velocity are
v i cos
v xi
Horizontal position component
i
v i sin
v yi
i
Substituting the x component into Equation 4.9a with xi
that
x f v xit (v i cos i)t
Repeating with the y component and using yi
yf
Vertical position component
v yit
1
2
2 a yt
Next, we solve Equation 4.10 for t
for t into Equation 4.11; this gives
y
(tan i)x
0 and ay
xf /(vi cos
i)
2v i cos2
(4.10)
(4.11)
and substitute this expression
g
2
0, we nd
g , we obtain
12
2 gt
(v i sin i)t
0 and ax
x2
(4.12)
i
1
This assumption is reasonable as long as the range of motion is small compared with the radius of the
Earth (6.4 106 m). In effect, this assumption is equivalent to assuming that the Earth is at over the
range of motion considered.
2
This assumption is generally not justied, especially at high velocities. In addition, any spin imparted
to a projectile, such as that applied when a pitcher throws a curve ball, can give rise to some very interesting effects associated with aerodynamic forces, which will be discussed in Chapter 15.
4.3
83
Projectile Motion
y
vy
vy = 0
v
g
vx i
vx i
θ
vi
vyi
θ
vx i
vy
v
θi
vx i
vxi
x
θi
vyi
v
Figure 4.6 The parabolic path of a projectile that leaves the origin with a velocity vi . The velocity vector v changes with time in both magnitude and direction. This change is the result of acceleration in the negative y direction. The x component of velocity remains constant in time because there is no acceleration along the horizontal direction. The y component of velocity is zero
at the peak of the path.
This equation is valid for launch angles in the range 0
/2. We have left
i
the subscripts off the x and y because the equation is valid for any point (x, y)
along the path of the projectile. The equation is of the form y ax bx 2, which is
the equation of a parabola that passes through the origin. Thus, we have shown
that the trajectory of a projectile is a parabola. Note that the trajectory is completely specied if both the initial speed vi and the launch angle i are known.
The vector expression for the position vector of the projectile as a function of
time follows directly from Equation 4.9, with ri 0 and a g:
r
vit
1
2
2 gt
This expression is plotted in Figure 4.7.
y
1
2
gt 2
(x, y)
vit
r
O
x
Figure 4.7 The position vector r of a projectile whose initial velocity at the origin is vi . The vector vi t would be the displacement of the projectile if gravity were absent, and the vector 1 g t 2 is its
2
vertical displacement due to its downward gravitational acceleration.
A welder cuts holes through a heavy metal
construction beam with a hot torch. The
sparks generated in the process follow parabolic paths.
QuickLab
Place two tennis balls at the edge of a
tabletop. Sharply snap one ball horizontally off the table with one hand
while gently tapping the second ball
off with your other hand. Compare
how long it takes the two to reach the
oor. Explain your results.
84
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
Multiash exposure of a tennis
player executing a forehand swing.
Note that the ball follows a parabolic path characteristic of a projectile. Such photographs can be
used to study the quality of sports
equipment and the performance of
an athlete.
It is interesting to realize that the motion of a particle can be considered the
superposition of the term vi t, the displacement if no acceleration were present,
and the term 1 gt 2, which arises from the acceleration due to gravity. In other
2
words, if there were no gravitational acceleration, the particle would continue to
move along a straight path in the direction of vi . Therefore, the vertical distance
1
2
2 gt through which the particle falls off the straight-line path is the same distance that a freely falling body would fall during the same time interval. We conclude that projectile motion is the superposition of two motions: (1) constant-velocity motion in the horizontal direction and (2) free-fall motion in
the vertical direction. Except for t, the time of ight, the horizontal and vertical
components of a projectiles motion are completely independent of each other.
EXAMPLE 4.2
Approximating Projectile Motion
A ball is thrown in such a way that its initial vertical and horizontal components of velocity are 40 m/s and 20 m/s, respectively. Estimate the total time of ight and the distance
the ball is from its starting point when it lands.
Solution We start by remembering that the two velocity
components are independent of each other. By considering
the vertical motion rst, we can determine how long the ball
remains in the air. Then, we can use the time of ight to estimate the horizontal distance covered.
A motion diagram like Figure 4.8 helps us organize what
we know about the problem. The acceleration vectors are all
the same, pointing downward with a magnitude of nearly
10 m/s2. The velocity vectors change direction. Their hori-
Figure 4.8
Motion diagram for a projectile.
4.3
zontal components are all the same: 20 m/s. Because the vertical motion is free fall, the vertical components of the velocity vectors change, second by second, from 40 m/s to roughly
30, 20, and 10 m/s in the upward direction, and then to
0 m/s. Subsequently, its velocity becomes 10, 20, 30, and
40 m/s in the downward direction. Thus it takes the ball
85
Projectile Motion
about 4 s to go up and another 4 s to come back down, for a
total time of ight of approximately 8 s. Because the horizontal component of velocity is 20 m/s, and because the ball
travels at this speed for 8 s, it ends up approximately 160 m
from its starting point.
Horizontal Range and Maximum Height of a Projectile
y
Let us assume that a projectile is red from the origin at ti 0 with a positive vyi component, as shown in Figure 4.9. Two points are especially interesting to analyze: the
peak point , which has cartesian coordinates (R/2, h), and the point , which has
coordinates (R, 0). The distance R is called the horizontal range of the projectile, and
the distance h is its maximum height. Let us nd h and R in terms of vi , i , and g.
We can determine h by noting that at the peak, vy A 0. Therefore, we can use
Equation 4.8a to determine the time t A it takes the projectile to reach the peak:
vyf
v yi
a yt
0
v i sin
tA
v i sin
g
(v i sin i)
h
v i2 sin2
2g
v i sin
g
i
i
h
θi
x
R
Substituting this expression for t A into the y part of Equation 4.9a and replacing
y f y A with h, we obtain an expression for h in terms of the magnitude and direction of the initial velocity vector:
h
vi
O
gtA
i
vy A = 0
1
2g
v i sin
g
i
Figure 4.9 A projectile red
from the origin at ti 0 with an
initial velocity vi . The maximum
height of the projectile is h, and
the horizontal range is R . At , the
peak of the trajectory, the particle
has coordinates (R /2, h).
2
i
(4.13)
Maximum height of projectile
The range R is the horizontal distance that the projectile travels in twice the time
it takes to reach its peak, that is, in a time t B 2t A . Using the x part of Equation 4.9a,
noting that vxi vx B vi cos i , and setting R x B at t 2t A , we nd that
R
v xit B
(v i cos i)2t A
(v i cos i)
Using the identity sin 2
more compact form
2v i sin
g
2 sin
R
cos
i
2v i2 sin i cos
g
i
(see Appendix B.4), we write R in the
v i2 sin 2
g
i
(4.14)
Keep in mind that Equations 4.13 and 4.14 are useful for calculating h and R
only if vi and i are known (which means that only vi has to be specied) and if
the projectile lands at the same height from which it started, as it does in Figure 4.9.
The maximum value of R from Equation 4.14 is R max v i2/g. This result follows from the fact that the maximum value of sin 2 i is 1, which occurs when 2 i
90°. Therefore, R is a maximum when i 45°.
Range of projectile
86
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
y(m)
150
vi = 50 m/s
75°
100
60°
45°
50
30°
15°
x(m)
50
100
150
200
250
Figure 4.10 A projectile red from the origin with an initial speed of 50 m/s at various angles
of projection. Note that complementary values of i result in the same value of x (range of the
projectile).
QuickLab
To carry out this investigation, you
need to be outdoors with a small ball,
such as a tennis ball, as well as a wristwatch. Throw the ball straight up as
hard as you can and determine the
initial speed of your throw and the
approximate maximum height of the
ball, using only your watch. What
happens when you throw the ball at
some angle
90°? Does this
change the time of ight (perhaps
because it is easier to throw)? Can
you still determine the maximum
height and initial speed?
Figure 4.10 illustrates various trajectories for a projectile having a given initial
speed but launched at different angles. As you can see, the range is a maximum
for i 45°. In addition, for any i other than 45°, a point having cartesian coordinates (R, 0) can be reached by using either one of two complementary values of i ,
such as 75° and 15°. Of course, the maximum height and time of ight for one of
these values of i are different from the maximum height and time of ight for the
complementary value.
Quick Quiz 4.2
As a projectile moves in its parabolic path, is there any point along the path where the velocity and acceleration vectors are (a) perpendicular to each other? (b) parallel to each
other? (c) Rank the ve paths in Figure 4.10 with respect to time of ight, from the shortest
to the longest.
Problem-Solving Hints
Projectile Motion
We suggest that you use the following approach to solving projectile motion
problems:
Select a coordinate system and resolve the initial velocity vector into x and y
components.
Follow the techniques for solving constant-velocity problems to analyze the
horizontal motion. Follow the techniques for solving constant-acceleration
problems to analyze the vertical motion. The x and y motions share the
same time of ight t .
4.3
EXAMPLE 4.3
87
Projectile Motion
The Long-Jump
A long-jumper leaves the ground at an angle of 20.0° above
the horizontal and at a speed of 11.0 m/s. (a) How far does
he jump in the horizontal direction? (Assume his motion is
equivalent to that of a particle.)
Solution
Because the initial speed and launch angle are
given, the most direct way of solving this problem is to use
the range formula given by Equation 4.14. However, it is
more instructive to take a more general approach and use
Figure 4.9. As before, we set our origin of coordinates at the
takeoff point and label the peak as
and the landing point
as . The horizontal motion is described by Equation 4.10:
xB
xf
(v i cos
i)t B
(11.0 m/s)(cos 20.0°)t B
The value of x B can be found if the total time of the jump
is known. We are able to nd t B by remembering that
g and by using the y part of Equation 4.8a. We also
ay
note that at the top of the jump the vertical component of velocity vy A is zero:
vy f
0
tA
vyA
v i sin
gt A
i
(11.0 m/s) sin 20.0°
(9.80 m/s2)t A
0.384 s
This is the time needed to reach the top of the jump. Because of the symmetry of the vertical motion, an identical
time interval passes before the jumper returns to the ground.
Therefore, the total time in the air is t B 2t A 0.768 s. Substituting this value into the above expression for xf gives
xf
xB
(11.0 m/s)(cos 20.0°)(0.768 s)
7.94 m
This is a reasonable distance for a world-class athlete.
(b) What is the maximum height reached?
Solution
We nd the maximum height reached by using
Equation 4.11:
y max
yA
(v i sin
1
2
2 gt A
i)t A
(11.0 m/s)(sin 20.0°)(0.384 s)
1
2 (9.80
m/s2)(0.384 s)2
0.722 m
Treating the long-jumper as a particle is an oversimplication. Nevertheless, the values obtained are reasonable.
In a long-jump event, 1993 United States champion Mike Powell
can leap horizontal distances of at least 8 m.
EXAMPLE 4.4
To check these calculations, use Equations 4.13
and 4.14 to nd the maximum height and horizontal range.
A Bulls-Eye Every Time
In a popular lecture demonstration, a projectile is red at a
target in such a way that the projectile leaves the gun at the
same time the target is dropped from rest, as shown in Figure
4.11. Show that if the gun is initially aimed at the stationary
target, the projectile hits the target.
Solution
Exercise
We can argue that a collision results under the
conditions stated by noting that, as soon as they are released,
the projectile and the target experience the same accelera-
tion a y
g. First, note from Figure 4.11b that the initial y
coordinate of the target is x T tan i and that it falls through a
1
distance 2gt 2 in a time t . Therefore, the y coordinate of the
target at any moment after release is
yT
x T tan
i
12
2 gt
Now if we use Equation 4.9a to write an expression for the y
coordinate of the projectile at any moment, we obtain
yP
x P tan
i
12
2 gt
88
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
y
Target
t
igh
e
in
1
2
gt 2
x T tan θ i
θ
L
vi
Point of
collision
θi
0
Gun
s
of
yT
x
xT
(b)
(a)
Figure 4.11
(a) Multiash photograph of projectile target demonstration. If the gun is aimed directly at the target and is red at the same
instant the target begins to fall, the projectile will hit the target. Note that the velocity of the projectile (red arrows) changes in direction and
magnitude, while the downward acceleration (violet arrows) remains constant. (Central Scientic Company.) (b) Schematic diagram of the projectile target demonstration. Both projectile and target fall through the same vertical distance in a time t because both experience the same
g.
acceleration a y
Thus, by comparing the two previous equations, we see that
when the y coordinates of the projectile and target are the
same, their x coordinates are the same and a collision results.
That is, when y P y T , x P x T . You can obtain the same result, using expressions for the position vectors for the projectile and target.
EXAMPLE 4.5
Note that a collision will not always take place owing to a
further restriction: A collision can result only when
vi sin i gd/2, where d is the initial elevation of the target
above the oor. If vi sin i is less than this value, the projectile
will strike the oor before reaching the target.
Thats Quite an Arm!
A stone is thrown from the top of a building upward at an
angle of 30.0° to the horizontal and with an initial speed of
20.0 m/s, as shown in Figure 4.12. If the height of the building is 45.0 m, (a) how long is it before the stone hits the
ground?
y
v i = 20.0 m/s
(0, 0)
x
θi = 30.0°
Solution We have indicated the various parameters in Figure 4.12. When working problems on your own, you should
always make a sketch such as this and label it.
The initial x and y components of the stones velocity are
vxi
vi cos
i
(20.0 m/s)(cos 30.0°)
17.3 m/s
vyi
vi sin
i
(20.0 m/s)(sin 30.0°)
45.0 m
10.0 m/s
To nd t , we can use y f vyi t 1a yt 2 (Eq. 4.9a) with
2
yf
45.0 m, a y
g, and vyi 10.0 m/s (there is a minus
sign on the numerical value of yf because we have chosen the
top of the building as the origin):
45.0 m
(10.0 m/s)t
1
2 (9.80
Solving the quadratic equation for t gives, for the positive
root, t
4.22 s.
xf = ?
y f = 45.0 m
m/s2)t 2
Does the negative root have any physical
xf
Figure 4.12
4.3
meaning? (Can you think of another way of nding t from
the information given?)
(b) What is the speed of the stone just before it strikes the
ground?
EXAMPLE 4.6
10.0 m/s
vyf
(9.80 m/s2)(4.22 s)
31.4 m/s
The negative sign indicates that the stone is moving downward. Because vx f vxi 17.3 m/s, the required speed is
vf
Solution We can use Equation 4.8a, v y f v yi a y t , with
t 4.22 s to obtain the y component of the velocity just before the stone strikes the ground:
89
Projectile Motion
vx f 2
Exercise
Answer
vy f 2
(17.3)2
( 31.4)2 m/s
35.9 m/s
Where does the stone strike the ground?
73.0 m from the base of the building.
The Stranded Explorers
An Alaskan rescue plane drops a package of emergency rations to a stranded party of explorers, as shown in Figure
4.13. If the plane is traveling horizontally at 40.0 m/s and is
100 m above the ground, where does the package strike the
ground relative to the point at which it was released?
Solution For this problem we choose the coordinate system shown in Figure 4.13, in which the origin is at the point
of release of the package. Consider rst the horizontal motion of the package. The only equation available to us for
nding the distance traveled along the horizontal direction is
x f v xi t (Eq. 4.9a). The initial x component of the package
velocity is the same as that of the plane when the package is
released: 40.0 m/s. Thus, we have
(40.0 m/s)t
xf
If we know t , the length of time the package is in the air,
then we can determine xf , the distance the package travels in
the horizontal direction. To nd t , we use the equations that
describe the vertical motion of the package. We know that at
the instant the package hits the ground, its y coordinate is
yf
100 m. We also know that the initial vertical component of the package velocity vyi is zero because at the moment of release, the package had only a horizontal component of velocity.
From Equation 4.9a, we have
y
12
2 gt
yf
40.0 m/s
1
2 (9.80
100 m
t
x
m/s2)t 2
4.52 s
Substitution of this value for the time of ight into the
equation for the x coordinate gives
xf
100 m
(40.0 m/s)(4.52 s)
181 m
The package hits the ground 181 m to the right of the drop
point.
Exercise
What are the horizontal and vertical components
of the velocity of the package just before it hits the ground?
Answer
vxf
40.0 m/s; vy f
44.3 m/s.
Exercise
Where is the plane when the package hits the
ground? (Assume that the plane does not change its speed or
course.)
Figure 4.13
Answer
Directly over the package.
90
CHAPTER 4
EXAMPLE 4.7
Motion in Two Dimensions
The End of the Ski Jump
A ski jumper leaves the ski track moving in the horizontal direction with a speed of 25.0 m/s, as shown in Figure 4.14.
The landing incline below him falls off with a slope of 35.0°.
Where does he land on the incline?
d cos 35.0° and y f
d sin 35.0°. Substituting these relationships into (1) and (2), we obtain
(3)
d cos 35.0°
(4)
Solution It is reasonable to expect the skier to be airborne for less than 10 s, and so he will not go farther than
250 m horizontally. We should expect the value of d, the distance traveled along the incline, to be of the same order of
magnitude. It is convenient to select the beginning of the
jump as the origin (x i 0, y i 0). Because v xi 25.0 m/s
and v yi 0, the x and y component forms of Equation 4.9a
are
(1)
(2)
xf
v xi t
yf
1
2 (9.80
d sin 35.0°
1
2 (9.80
m/s2)t 2
Solving (3) for t and substituting the result into (4), we nd
that d 109 m. Hence, the x and y coordinates of the point
at which he lands are
d cos 35.0°
xf
d sin 35.0°
yf
(109 m) cos 35.0°
(109 m) sin 35.0°
89.3 m
62.5 m
(25.0 m/s)t
1
2
2a y t
(25.0 m/s)t
Exercise
Determine how long the jumper is airborne and
his vertical component of velocity just before he lands.
m/s2)t 2
From the right triangle in Figure 4.14, we see that the
jumpers x and y coordinates at the landing point are x f
Answer
3.57 s;
35.0 m/s.
25.0 m/s
(0, 0)
θ = 35.0°
y
d
x
Figure 4.14
What would have occurred if the skier in the last example happened to be carrying a stone and let go of it while in midair? Because the stone has the same initial velocity as the skier, it will stay near him as he moves that is, it oats alongside him. This is a technique that NASA uses to train astronauts. The plane
pictured at the beginning of the chapter ies in the same type of projectile path
that the skier and stone follow. The passengers and cargo in the plane fall along-
4.4
91
Uniform Circular Motion
QuickLab
Armed with nothing but a ruler and
the knowledge that the time between
images was 1/30 s, nd the horizontal speed of the yellow ball in Figure
4.15. (Hint: Start by analyzing the motion of the red ball. Because you
know its vertical acceleration, you can
calibrate the distances depicted in
the photograph. Then you can nd
the horizontal speed of the yellow
ball.)
Figure 4.15
This multiash photograph of two balls released simultaneously illustrates both free fall (red ball)
and projectile motion (yellow ball). The
yellow ball was projected horizontally,
while the red ball was released from
rest. (Richard Megna/Fundamental Pho-
tographs)
side each other; that is, they have the same trajectory. An astronaut can release a
piece of equipment and it will oat freely alongside her hand. The same thing
happens in the space shuttle. The craft and everything in it are falling as they orbit
the Earth.
4.4
3.6
UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Figure 4.16a shows a car moving in a circular path with constant linear speed v.
Such motion is called uniform circular motion. Because the cars direction of motion changes, the car has an acceleration, as we learned in Section 4.1. For any motion, the velocity vector is tangent to the path. Consequently, when an object moves
in a circular path, its velocity vector is perpendicular to the radius of the circle.
We now show that the acceleration vector in uniform circular motion is always
perpendicular to the path and always points toward the center of the circle. An acvi
vf
r
v
r
vi
r θ r
θ
O
θ
θ
vf
v
O
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 4.16 (a) A car moving along a circular path at constant speed experiences uniform circular motion. (b) As a particle moves from to , its velocity vector changes from vi to vf .
(c) The construction for determining the direction of the change in velocity v, which is toward
the center of the circle for small r.
92
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
celeration of this nature is called a centripetal (center-seeking) acceleration, and
its magnitude is
ar
v2
r
(4.15)
where r is the radius of the circle and the notation ar is used to indicate that the
centripetal acceleration is along the radial direction.
To derive Equation 4.15, consider Figure 4.16b, which shows a particle rst at
point and then at point . The particle is at at time ti , and its velocity at that
time is vi . It is at at some later time tf , and its velocity at that time is vf . Let us assume here that vi and vf differ only in direction; their magnitudes (speeds) are the
same (that is, v i v f v). To calculate the acceleration of the particle, let us begin with the dening equation for average acceleration (Eq. 4.4):
a
vf
vi
v
tf
ti
t
This equation indicates that we must subtract vi from vf , being sure to treat them
as vectors, where v vf vi is the change in the velocity. Because vi
v vf ,
we can nd the vector v, using the vector triangle in Figure 4.16c.
Now consider the triangle in Figure 4.16b, which has sides r and r. This triangle and the one in Figure 4.16c, which has sides v and v, are similar. This fact enables us to write a relationship between the lengths of the sides:
v
v
r
r
This equation can be solved for v and the expression so obtained substituted into
a
v/ t (Eq. 4.4) to give
a
vr
rt
Now imagine that points
and
in Figure 4.16b are extremely close together. In this case v points toward the center of the circular path, and because
the acceleration is in the direction of v, it too points toward the center. Furthermore, as
and
approach each other, t approaches zero, and the ratio r/ t
approaches the speed v. Hence, in the limit t : 0, the magnitude of the acceleration is
ar
v2
r
Thus, we conclude that in uniform circular motion, the acceleration is directed toward the center of the circle and has a magnitude given by v 2/r, where v is the
speed of the particle and r is the radius of the circle. You should be able to show
that the dimensions of a r are L/T 2. We shall return to the discussion of circular
motion in Section 6.1.
4.5
3.6
TANGENTIAL AND RADIAL ACCELERATION
Now let us consider a particle moving along a curved path where the velocity
changes both in direction and in magnitude, as shown in Figure 4.17. As is always
the case, the velocity vector is tangent to the path, but now the direction of the ac-
4.5
Path of
particle
93
Tangential and Radial Acceleration
at
a
ar
ar
ar
a
at
at
a
Figure 4.17 The motion of a particle along an arbitrary curved path lying in the xy plane. If
the velocity vector v (always tangent to the path) changes in direction and magnitude, the component vectors of the acceleration a are a tangential component a t and a radial component ar .
celeration vector a changes from point to point. This vector can be resolved into
two component vectors: a radial component vector ar and a tangential component
vector at . Thus, a can be written as the vector sum of these component vectors:
a
at
ar
(4.16)
Total acceleration
The tangential acceleration causes the change in the speed of the particle. It
is parallel to the instantaneous velocity, and its magnitude is
at
dv
dt
(4.17)
Tangential acceleration
The radial acceleration arises from the change in direction of the velocity
vector as described earlier and has an absolute magnitude given by
ar
v2
r
(4.18)
where r is the radius of curvature of the path at the point in question. Because ar
and at are mutually perpendicular component vectors of a, it follows that
a a r2 a t2 . As in the case of uniform circular motion, ar in nonuniform circular motion always points toward the center of curvature, as shown in Figure 4.17.
Also, at a given speed, ar is large when the radius of curvature is small (as at points
and in Figure 4.17) and small when r is large (such as at point ). The direction of at is either in the same direction as v (if v is increasing) or opposite v (if v
is decreasing).
In uniform circular motion, where v is constant, at 0 and the acceleration is
always completely radial, as we described in Section 4.4. (Note: Eq. 4.18 is identical
to Eq. 4.15.) In other words, uniform circular motion is a special case of motion
along a curved path. Furthermore, if the direction of v does not change, then
there is no radial acceleration and the motion is one-dimensional (in this case,
ar 0, but at may not be zero).
Quick Quiz 4.3
(a) Draw a motion diagram showing velocity and acceleration vectors for an object moving
with constant speed counterclockwise around a circle. Draw similar diagrams for an object
moving counterclockwise around a circle but (b) slowing down at constant tangential acceleration and (c) speeding up at constant tangential acceleration.
It is convenient to write the acceleration of a particle moving in a circular path
in terms of unit vectors. We do this by dening the unit vectors ˆ and ˆ shown in
r
Radial acceleration
94
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
y
a = ar + at
at
ˆ
ˆ
r
a
r
ar
θ
x
O
O
(a)
(b)
ˆ
Figure 4.18 (a) Descriptions of the unit vectors r and ˆ. (b) The total acceleration a of a particle moving along a curved path (which at any instant is part of a circle of radius r ) is the sum of
radial and tangential components. The radial component is directed toward the center of curvature. If the tangential component of acceleration becomes zero, the particle follows uniform circular motion.
r
Figure 4.18a, where ˆ is a unit vector lying along the radius vector and directed radially outward from the center of the circle and ˆ is a unit vector tangent to the
circle. The direction of ˆ is in the direction of increasing , where is measured
r
counterclockwise from the positive x axis. Note that both ˆ and ˆ move along with
the particle and so vary in time. Using this notation, we can express the total acceleration as
a
at
ar
dv
dt
ˆ
v2
ˆ
r
r
(4.19)
These vectors are described in Figure 4.18b. The negative sign on the v 2/r term in
Equation 4.19 indicates that the radial acceleration is always directed radially inr
ward, opposite ˆ.
Quick Quiz 4.4
Based on your experience, draw a motion diagram showing the position, velocity, and acceleration vectors for a pendulum that, from an initial position 45° to the right of a central vertical line, swings in an arc that carries it to a nal position 45° to the left of the central vertical line. The arc is part of a circle, and you should use the center of this circle as the origin
for the position vectors.
EXAMPLE 4.8
The Swinging Ball
A ball tied to the end of a string 0.50 m in length swings in a
vertical circle under the inuence of gravity, as shown in Fig20° with the
ure 4.19. When the string makes an angle
vertical, the ball has a speed of 1.5 m/s. (a) Find the magnitude of the radial component of acceleration at this instant.
Solution The diagram from the answer to Quick Quiz 4.4
(p. 109) applies to this situation, and so we have a good idea
of how the acceleration vector varies during the motion. Fig-
ure 4.19 lets us take a closer look at the situation. The radial
acceleration is given by Equation 4.18. With v 1.5 m/s and
r 0.50 m, we nd that
ar
v2
r
(1.5 m/s)2
0.50 m
4.5 m/s2
(b) What is the magnitude of the tangential acceleration
when
20°?
4.6
Solution
When the ball is at an angle to the vertical, it
has a tangential acceleration of magnitude g sin (the component of g tangent to the circle). Therefore, at
20°,
horizontal positions (
90° and 270°), a t
g and ar has a
value between its minimum and maximum values.
3.4 m/s2.
g sin 20°
at
95
Relative Velocity and Relative Acceleration
(c) Find the magnitude and direction of the total acceleration a at
20°.
θ
Solution
Because a
ar
at , the magnitude of a at
20° is
a
If
r
a r2
a t2
(4.5)2
(3.4)2 m/s2
5.6 m/s2
1
at
ar
tan
1
3.4 m/s2
4.5 m/s2
ar
37°
Note that a, at , and ar all change in direction and magnitude as the ball swings through the circle. When the ball is at
its lowest elevation (
0), at 0 because there is no tangential component of g at this angle; also, ar is a maximum because v is a maximum. If the ball has enough speed to reach
its highest position (
180°), then at is again zero but ar is a
minimum because v is now a minimum. Finally, in the two
3.7
v0
is the angle between a and the string, then
tan
4.6
g
φ
a
at
Figure 4.19 Motion of a ball suspended by a string of length r.
The ball swings with nonuniform circular motion in a vertical plane,
and its acceleration a has a radial component a r and a tangential
component a t .
RELATIVE VELOCITY AND RELATIVE ACCELERATION
In this section, we describe how observations made by different observers in different frames of reference are related to each other. We nd that observers in different frames of reference may measure different displacements, velocities, and accelerations for a given particle. That is, two observers moving relative to each other
generally do not agree on the outcome of a measurement.
For example, suppose two cars are moving in the same direction with speeds
of 50 mi/h and 60 mi/h. To a passenger in the slower car, the speed of the faster
car is 10 mi/h. Of course, a stationary observer will measure the speed of the faster
car to be 60 mi/h, not 10 mi/h. Which observer is correct? They both are! This
simple example demonstrates that the velocity of an object depends on the frame
of reference in which it is measured.
Suppose a person riding on a skateboard (observer A) throws a ball in such a
way that it appears in this persons frame of reference to move rst straight upward
and then straight downward along the same vertical line, as shown in Figure 4.20a.
A stationary observer B sees the path of the ball as a parabola, as illustrated in Figure 4.20b. Relative to observer B, the ball has a vertical component of velocity (resulting from the initial upward velocity and the downward acceleration of gravity)
and a horizontal component.
Another example of this concept that of is a package dropped from an airplane ying with a constant velocity; this is the situation we studied in Example
4.6. An observer on the airplane sees the motion of the package as a straight line
toward the Earth. The stranded explorer on the ground, however, sees the trajectory of the package as a parabola. If, once it drops the package, the airplane con-
96
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
Path seen
by observer B
Path seen
by observer A
A
A
B
(a)
(b)
Figure 4.20 (a) Observer A on a moving vehicle throws a ball upward and sees it rise and fall
in a straight-line path. (b) Stationary observer B sees a parabolic path for the same ball.
tinues to move horizontally with the same velocity, then the package hits the
ground directly beneath the airplane (if we assume that air resistance is neglected)!
In a more general situation, consider a particle located at point
in Figure
4.21. Imagine that the motion of this particle is being described by two observers,
one in reference frame S, xed relative to the Earth, and another in reference
frame S , moving to the right relative to S (and therefore relative to the Earth)
with a constant velocity v0 . (Relative to an observer in S , S moves to the left with a
velocity v0 .) Where an observer stands in a reference frame is irrelevant in this
discussion, but for purposes of this discussion let us place each observer at her or
his respective origin.
We label the position of the particle relative to the S frame with the position
vector r and that relative to the S frame with the position vector r , both after
some time t . The vectors r and r are related to each other through the expression
rr
v0t, or
Galilean coordinate
transformation
r
r
v0t
(4.20)
S
S
r
r
O
v0t
Figure 4.21
O
v0
A particle located at is
described by two observers, one in the
xed frame of reference S , and the other
in the frame S , which moves to the right
with a constant velocity v0 . The vector r is
the particles position vector relative to S ,
and r is its position vector relative to S .
4.6
97
Relative Velocity and Relative Acceleration
The woman standing on the beltway sees the walking man pass by at a slower speed than the
woman standing on the stationary oor does.
That is, after a time t, the S frame is displaced to the right of the S frame by an
amount v0t .
If we differentiate Equation 4.20 with respect to time and note that v0 is constant, we obtain
dr
dr
v0
dt
dt
v
v
v0
(4.21)
where v is the velocity of the particle observed in the S frame and v is its velocity
observed in the S frame. Equations 4.20 and 4.21 are known as Galilean transformation equations. They relate the coordinates and velocity of a particle as measured in a frame xed relative to the Earth to those measured in a frame moving
with uniform motion relative to the Earth.
Although observers in two frames measure different velocities for the particle,
they measure the same acceleration when v0 is constant. We can verify this by taking
the time derivative of Equation 4.21:
dv
dt
dv
dt
d v0
dt
Because v0 is constant, d v0 /dt 0. Therefore, we conclude that a
a because
a
d v /dt and a d v/dt. That is, the acceleration of the particle measured
by an observer in the Earths frame of reference is the same as that measured by any other observer moving with constant velocity relative to the
Earths frame.
Quick Quiz 4.5
A passenger in a car traveling at 60 mi/h pours a cup of coffee for the tired driver. Describe
the path of the coffee as it moves from a Thermos bottle into a cup as seen by (a) the passenger and (b) someone standing beside the road and looking in the window of the car as
it drives past. (c) What happens if the car accelerates while the coffee is being poured?
Galilean velocity transformation
98
CHAPTER 4
EXAMPLE 4.9
Motion in Two Dimensions
A Boat Crossing a River
A boat heading due north crosses a wide river with a speed of
10.0 km/h relative to the water. The water in the river has a uniform speed of 5.00 km/h due east relative to the Earth. Determine the velocity of the boat relative to an observer standing on
either bank.
Solution
We know vbr , the velocity of the boat relative to
the river, and vrE , the velocity of the river relative to the Earth.
What we need to nd is vbE , the velocity of the boat relative to
the Earth. The relationship between these three quantities is
vbE
vbr
The boat is moving at a speed of 11.2 km/h in the direction
26.6° east of north relative to the Earth.
Exercise
If the width of the river is 3.0 km, nd the time it
takes the boat to cross it.
Answer
vrE
The terms in the equation must be manipulated as vector
quantities; the vectors are shown in Figure 4.22. The quantity
vbr is due north, vrE is due east, and the vector sum of the
two, vbE , is at an angle , as dened in Figure 4.22. Thus, we
can nd the speed v bE of the boat relative to the Earth by using the Pythagorean theorem:
v bE
v br
2
v rE
2
18 min.
(10.0)2
(5.00)2
vrE
N
vbE
vbr
km/h
W
E
S
θ
11.2 km/h
The direction of vbE is
tan
1
v rE
v br
EXAMPLE 4.10
1
tan
5.00
10.0
26.6°
Figure 4.22
Which Way Should We Head?
If the boat of the preceding example travels with the same
speed of 10.0 km/h relative to the river and is to travel
due north, as shown in Figure 4.23, what should its heading
be?
Exercise
If the width of the river is 3.0 km, nd the time it
takes the boat to cross it.
Answer
21 min.
Solution
As in the previous example, we know vrE and the
magnitude of the vector vbr , and we want vbE to be directed
across the river. Figure 4.23 shows that the boat must head
upstream in order to travel directly northward across the
river. Note the difference between the triangle in Figure 4.22
and the one in Figure 4.23 specically, that the hypotenuse
in Figure 4.23 is no longer vbE . Therefore, when we use the
Pythagorean theorem to nd vbE this time, we obtain
v bE
v br2
v rE2
(10.0)2
(5.00)2 km/h
8.66 km/h
vrE
N
vbE
vbr
1
v rE
v bE
tan
1
5.00
8.66
30.0°
The boat must steer a course 30.0° west of north.
E
S
θ
Now that we know the magnitude of vbE , we can nd the direction in which the boat is heading:
tan
W
Figure 4.23
Summary
SUMMARY
If a particle moves with constant acceleration a and has velocity vi and position ri at
t 0, its velocity and position vectors at some later time t are
vf
vi
rf
ri
(4.8)
at
vi t
1
2
at 2
(4.9)
For two-dimensional motion in the xy plane under constant acceleration, each of
these vector expressions is equivalent to two component expressions one for the
motion in the x direction and one for the motion in the y direction. You should be
able to break the two-dimensional motion of any object into these two components.
Projectile motion is one type of two-dimensional motion under constant acceleration, where a x 0 and a y
g. It is useful to think of projectile motion as
the superposition of two motions: (1) constant-velocity motion in the x direction
and (2) free-fall motion in the vertical direction subject to a constant downward
acceleration of magnitude g 9.80 m/s2. You should be able to analyze the motion in terms of separate horizontal and vertical components of velocity, as shown
in Figure 4.24.
A particle moving in a circle of radius r with constant speed v is in uniform
circular motion. It undergoes a centripetal (or radial) acceleration ar because the
direction of v changes in time. The magnitude of ar is
ar
v2
r
(4.18)
and its direction is always toward the center of the circle.
If a particle moves along a curved path in such a way that both the magnitude
and the direction of v change in time, then the particle has an acceleration vector
that can be described by two component vectors: (1) a radial component vector ar
that causes the change in direction of v and (2) a tangential component vector
at that causes the change in magnitude of v. The magnitude of ar is v 2/r, and the
magnitude of at is d v /dt. You should be able to sketch motion diagrams for an
object following a curved path and show how the velocity and acceleration vectors
change as the objects motion varies.
The velocity v of a particle measured in a xed frame of reference S can be related to the velocity v of the same particle measured in a moving frame of reference S by
v
v v0
(4.21)
where v0 is the velocity of S relative to S. You should be able to translate back and
forth between different frames of reference.
vxf = vx i = vi cos θi
vi
(x, y)
θi
Figure 4.24
x
Projectile motion
is equivalent to
vy i
y
vy f
y
x
Horizontal
and
motion at
constant velocity
Vertical motion
at constant
acceleration
Analyzing projectile motion in terms of horizontal and vertical components.
99
100
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
QUESTIONS
1. Can an object accelerate if its speed is constant? Can an
object accelerate if its velocity is constant?
2. If the average velocity of a particle is zero in some time interval, what can you say about the displacement of the
particle for that interval?
3. If you know the position vectors of a particle at two points
along its path and also know the time it took to get from
one point to the other, can you determine the particles
instantaneous velocity? Its average velocity? Explain.
4. Describe a situation in which the velocity of a particle is
always perpendicular to the position vector.
5. Explain whether or not the following particles have an acceleration: (a) a particle moving in a straight line with
constant speed and (b) a particle moving around a curve
with constant speed.
6. Correct the following statement: The racing car rounds
the turn at a constant velocity of 90 mi/h.
7. Determine which of the following moving objects have an
approximately parabolic trajectory: (a) a ball thrown in
an arbitrary direction, (b) a jet airplane, (c) a rocket leaving the launching pad, (d) a rocket whose engines fail a
few minutes after launch, (e) a tossed stone moving to
the bottom of a pond.
8. A rock is dropped at the same instant that a ball at the
same initial elevation is thrown horizontally. Which will
have the greater speed when it reaches ground level?
9. A spacecraft drifts through space at a constant velocity.
Suddenly, a gas leak in the side of the spacecraft causes a
constant acceleration of the spacecraft in a direction perpendicular to the initial velocity. The orientation of the
spacecraft does not change, and so the acceleration remains perpendicular to the original direction of the velocity. What is the shape of the path followed by the
spacecraft in this situation?
10. A ball is projected horizontally from the top of a building.
One second later another ball is projected horizontally
from the same point with the same velocity. At what point
in the motion will the balls be closest to each other? Will
the rst ball always be traveling faster than the second
ball? How much time passes between the moment the
rst ball hits the ground and the moment the second one
hits the ground? Can the horizontal projection velocity of
the second ball be changed so that the balls arrive at the
ground at the same time?
11. A student argues that as a satellite orbits the Earth in a
circular path, the satellite moves with a constant velocity
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
and therefore has no acceleration. The professor claims
that the student is wrong because the satellite must have a
centripetal acceleration as it moves in its circular orbit.
What is wrong with the students argument?
What is the fundamental difference between the unit vecˆ
tors r and ˆ and the unit vectors i and j?
At the end of its arc, the velocity of a pendulum is zero. Is
its acceleration also zero at this point?
If a rock is dropped from the top of a sailboats mast, will
it hit the deck at the same point regardless of whether the
boat is at rest or in motion at constant velocity?
A stone is thrown upward from the top of a building.
Does the stones displacement depend on the location of
the origin of the coordinate system? Does the stones velocity depend on the location of the origin?
Is it possible for a vehicle to travel around a curve without
accelerating? Explain.
A baseball is thrown with an initial velocity of (10i 15j)
m/s. When it reaches the top of its trajectory, what are
(a) its velocity and (b) its acceleration? Neglect the effect
of air resistance.
An object moves in a circular path with constant speed v.
(a) Is the velocity of the object constant? (b) Is its acceleration constant? Explain.
A projectile is red at some angle to the horizontal with
some initial speed vi , and air resistance is neglected. Is
the projectile a freely falling body? What is its acceleration in the vertical direction? What is its acceleration in
the horizontal direction?
A projectile is red at an angle of 30° from the horizontal
with some initial speed. Firing at what other projectile angle results in the same range if the initial speed is the
same in both cases? Neglect air resistance.
A projectile is red on the Earth with some initial velocity.
Another projectile is red on the Moon with the same initial velocity. If air resistance is neglected, which projectile
has the greater range? Which reaches the greater altitude? (Note that the free-fall acceleration on the Moon is
about 1.6 m/s2.)
As a projectile moves through its parabolic trajectory,
which of these quantities, if any, remain constant:
(a) speed, (b) acceleration, (c) horizontal component of
velocity, (d) vertical component of velocity?
A passenger on a train that is moving with constant velocity drops a spoon. What is the acceleration of the spoon
relative to (a) the train and (b) the Earth?
Problems
101
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
6. The vector position of a particle varies in time according to the expression r (3.00i 6.00t 2 j) m. (a) Find
expressions for the velocity and acceleration as functions of time. (b) Determine the particles position and
velocity at t 1.00 s.
7. A sh swimming in a horizontal plane has velocity
vi (4.00i 1.00j) m/s at a point in the ocean whose
displacement from a certain rock is ri (10.0 i 4.00j)
m. After the sh swims with constant acceleration for
20.0 s, its velocity is v (20.0 i 5.00 j) m/s. (a) What
are the components of the acceleration? (b) What is the
direction of the acceleration with respect to the unit vector i? (c) Where is the sh at t 25.0 s if it maintains its
original acceleration and in what direction is it moving?
8. A particle initially located at the origin has an acceleration of a 3.00j m/s2 and an initial velocity of vi
5.00i m/s. Find (a) the vector position and velocity at
any time t and (b) the coordinates and speed of the
particle at t 2.00 s.
The Displacement, Velocity, and Acceleration
Section 4.1
Vectors
WEB
1. A motorist drives south at 20.0 m/s for 3.00 min, then
turns west and travels at 25.0 m/s for 2.00 min, and nally travels northwest at 30.0 m/s for 1.00 min. For this
6.00-min trip, nd (a) the total vector displacement,
(b) the average speed, and (c) the average velocity. Use
a coordinate system in which east is the positive x axis.
2. Suppose that the position vector for a particle is given
as r x i y j, with x at b and y ct 2 d, where
a 1.00 m/s, b 1.00 m, c 0.125 m/s2, and d 1.00
m. (a) Calculate the average velocity during the time interval from t 2.00 s to t 4.00 s. (b) Determine the
velocity and the speed at t 2.00 s.
3. A golf ball is hit off a tee at the edge of a cliff. Its x and y
coordinates versus time are given by the following expressions:
x
(18.0 m/s)t
and
y
(4.00 m/s)t
(4.90 m/s2)t 2
(a) Write a vector expression for the balls position as a
function of time, using the unit vectors i and j. By taking
derivatives of your results, write expressions for (b) the
velocity vector as a function of time and (c) the acceleration vector as a function of time. Now use unit vector notation to write expressions for (d) the position, (e) the
velocity, and (f) the acceleration of the ball, all at
t 3.00 s.
4. The coordinates of an object moving in the xy plane
vary with time according to the equations
x
(5.00 m) sin t
and
y
(4.00 m)
(5.00 m)cos t
where t is in seconds and has units of seconds 1.
(a) Determine the components of velocity and components of acceleration at t 0. (b) Write expressions for
the position vector, the velocity vector, and the acceleration vector at any time t 0. (c) Describe the path of
the object on an xy graph.
Two-Dimensional Motion
with Constant Acceleration
Section 4.2
5. At t 0, a particle moving in the xy plane with constant
acceleration has a velocity of vi (3.00i 2.00 j) m/s
when it is at the origin. At t 3.00 s, the particles velocity is v (9.00i 7.00 j) m/s. Find (a) the acceleration of the particle and (b) its coordinates at any time t .
Section 4.3
Projectile Motion
(Neglect air resistance in all problems and take g
9.80 m/s2.)
9. In a local bar, a customer slides an empty beer mug
down the counter for a rell. The bartender is momentarily distracted and does not see the mug, which slides
off the counter and strikes the oor 1.40 m from the
base of the counter. If the height of the counter is
0.860 m, (a) with what velocity did the mug leave the
counter and (b) what was the direction of the mugs
velocity just before it hit the oor?
10. In a local bar, a customer slides an empty beer mug
down the counter for a rell. The bartender is momentarily distracted and does not see the mug, which slides
off the counter and strikes the oor at distance d from
the base of the counter. If the height of the counter is h,
(a) with what velocity did the mug leave the counter
and (b) what was the direction of the mugs velocity just
before it hit the oor?
WEB
11. One strategy in a snowball ght is to throw a rst snowball at a high angle over level ground. While your opponent is watching the rst one, you throw a second one
at a low angle and timed to arrive at your opponent before or at the same time as the rst one. Assume both
snowballs are thrown with a speed of 25.0 m/s. The rst
one is thrown at an angle of 70.0° with respect to the
horizontal. (a) At what angle should the second (lowangle) snowball be thrown if it is to land at the same
point as the rst? (b) How many seconds later should
102
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
WEB
19.
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
the second snowball be thrown if it is to land at the
same time as the rst?
A tennis player standing 12.6 m from the net hits the
ball at 3.00° above the horizontal. To clear the net, the
ball must rise at least 0.330 m. If the ball just clears the
net at the apex of its trajectory, how fast was the ball
moving when it left the racket?
An artillery shell is red with an initial velocity of
300 m/s at 55.0° above the horizontal. It explodes on a
mountainside 42.0 s after ring. What are the x and y
coordinates of the shell where it explodes, relative to its
ring point?
An astronaut on a strange planet nds that she can
jump a maximum horizontal distance of 15.0 m if her
initial speed is 3.00 m/s. What is the free-fall acceleration on the planet?
A projectile is red in such a way that its horizontal
range is equal to three times its maximum height. What
is the angle of projection? Give your answer to three signicant gures.
A ball is tossed from an upper-story window of a building. The ball is given an initial velocity of 8.00 m/s at an
angle of 20.0° below the horizontal. It strikes the
ground 3.00 s later. (a) How far horizontally from the
base of the building does the ball strike the ground?
(b) Find the height from which the ball was thrown.
(c) How long does it take the ball to reach a point
10.0 m below the level of launching?
A cannon with a muzzle speed of 1 000 m/s is used to
start an avalanche on a mountain slope. The target is
2 000 m from the cannon horizontally and 800 m above
the cannon. At what angle, above the horizontal, should
the cannon be red?
Consider a projectile that is launched from the origin of
an xy coordinate system with speed vi at initial angle i
above the horizontal. Note that at the apex of its trajectory the projectile is moving horizontally, so that the
slope of its path is zero. Use the expression for the trajectory given in Equation 4.12 to nd the x coordinate
that corresponds to the maximum height. Use this x coordinate and the symmetry of the trajectory to determine the horizontal range of the projectile.
A placekicker must kick a football from a point 36.0 m
(about 40 yards) from the goal, and half the crowd
hopes the ball will clear the crossbar, which is 3.05 m
high. When kicked, the ball leaves the ground with a
speed of 20.0 m/s at an angle of 53.0° to the horizontal.
(a) By how much does the ball clear or fall short of
clearing the crossbar? (b) Does the ball approach the
crossbar while still rising or while falling?
20. A reghter 50.0 m away from a burning building directs a stream of water from a re hose at an angle of
30.0° above the horizontal, as in Figure P4.20. If the
speed of the stream is 40.0 m/s, at what height will the
water strike the building?
h
vi
θi
Figure P4.20
d
Problems 20 and 21. (Frederick McKinney/FPG Interna-
tional)
21. A reghter a distance d from a burning building directs a stream of water from a re hose at angle i above
the horizontal as in Figure P4.20. If the initial speed of
the stream is vi , at what height h does the water strike
the building?
22. A soccer player kicks a rock horizontally off a cliff
40.0 m high into a pool of water. If the player hears the
sound of the splash 3.00 s later, what was the initial
speed given to the rock? Assume the speed of sound in
air to be 343 m/s.
103
Problems
23. A basketball star covers 2.80 m horizontally in a jump to
dunk the ball (Fig. P4.23). His motion through space
can be modeled as that of a particle at a point called his
center of mass (which we shall dene in Chapter 9). His
center of mass is at elevation 1.02 m when he leaves the
oor. It reaches a maximum height of 1.85 m above the
oor and is at elevation 0.900 m when he touches down
again. Determine (a) his time of ight (his hang
time), (b) his horizontal and (c) vertical velocity components at the instant of takeoff, and (d) his takeoff angle. (e) For comparison, determine the hang time of a
whitetail deer making a jump with center-of-mass elevations y i 1.20 m, y max 2.50 m, y f 0.700 m.
Section 4.4
WEB
Uniform Circular Motion
24. The orbit of the Moon about the Earth is approximately
circular, with a mean radius of 3.84 108 m. It takes
27.3 days for the Moon to complete one revolution
about the Earth. Find (a) the mean orbital speed of the
Moon and (b) its centripetal acceleration.
25. The athlete shown in Figure P4.25 rotates a 1.00-kg discus along a circular path of radius 1.06 m. The maximum
speed of the discus is 20.0 m/s. Determine the magnitude of the maximum radial acceleration of the discus.
Figure P4.25
Figure P4.23
(Top, Ron Chapple/FPG International;
bottom, Bill Lea/Dembinsky Photo Associates)
(Sam Sargent/Liaison International)
26. From information on the endsheets of this book, compute, for a point located on the surface of the Earth at
the equator, the radial acceleration due to the rotation
of the Earth about its axis.
27. A tire 0.500 m in radius rotates at a constant rate of
200 rev/min. Find the speed and acceleration of a small
stone lodged in the tread of the tire (on its outer edge).
(Hint: In one revolution, the stone travels a distance
equal to the circumference of its path, 2 r.)
28. During liftoff, Space Shuttle astronauts typically feel accelerations up to 1.4g, where g 9.80 m/s2. In their
training, astronauts ride in a device where they experience such an acceleration as a centripetal acceleration.
Specically, the astronaut is fastened securely at the end
of a mechanical arm that then turns at constant speed
in a horizontal circle. Determine the rotation rate, in
revolutions per second, required to give an astronaut a
centripetal acceleration of 1.40g while the astronaut
moves in a circle of radius 10.0 m.
29. Young David who slew Goliath experimented with slings
before tackling the giant. He found that he could revolve a sling of length 0.600 m at the rate of 8.00 rev/s.
If he increased the length to 0.900 m, he could revolve
the sling only 6.00 times per second. (a) Which rate of
rotation gives the greater speed for the stone at the end
of the sling? (b) What is the centripetal acceleration of
the stone at 8.00 rev/s? (c) What is the centripetal acceleration at 6.00 rev/s?
104
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
30. The astronaut orbiting the Earth in Figure P4.30 is
preparing to dock with a Westar VI satellite. The satellite is in a circular orbit 600 km above the Earths surface, where the free-fall acceleration is 8.21 m/s2. The
radius of the Earth is 6 400 km. Determine the speed of
the satellite and the time required to complete one orbit around the Earth.
at a given instant of time. At this instant, nd (a) the radial acceleration, (b) the speed of the particle, and
(c) its tangential acceleration.
34. A student attaches a ball to the end of a string 0.600 m
in length and then swings the ball in a vertical circle.
The speed of the ball is 4.30 m/s at its highest point
and 6.50 m/s at its lowest point. Find the acceleration
of the ball when the string is vertical and the ball is at
(a) its highest point and (b) its lowest point.
35. A ball swings in a vertical circle at the end of a rope
1.50 m long. When the ball is 36.9° past the lowest point
and on its way up, its total acceleration is ( 22.5i
20.2j) m/s2. At that instant, (a) sketch a vector diagram
showing the components of this acceleration, (b) determine the magnitude of its radial acceleration, and
(c) determine the speed and velocity of the ball.
Section 4.6
Figure P4.30
Section 4.5
(Courtesy of NASA)
Tangential and Radial Acceleration
31. A train slows down as it rounds a sharp horizontal
curve, slowing from 90.0 km/h to 50.0 km/h in the
15.0 s that it takes to round the curve. The radius of the
curve is 150 m. Compute the acceleration at the moment the train speed reaches 50.0 km/h. Assume that
the train slows down at a uniform rate during the 15.0-s
interval.
32. An automobile whose speed is increasing at a rate of
0.600 m/s2 travels along a circular road of radius 20.0 m.
When the instantaneous speed of the automobile is 4.00
m/s, nd (a) the tangential acceleration component,
(b) the radial acceleration component, and (c) the
magnitude and direction of the total acceleration.
33. Figure P4.33 shows the total acceleration and velocity of
a particle moving clockwise in a circle of radius 2.50 m
a = 15.0 m/s2
v
2.50 m
30.0°
a
Figure P4.33
Relative Velocity and Relative Acceleration
36. Heather in her Corvette accelerates at the rate of
(3.00i 2.00 j) m/s2, while Jill in her Jaguar accelerates
at (1.00i 3.00 j) m/s2. They both start from rest at the
origin of an xy coordinate system. After 5.00 s, (a) what
is Heathers speed with respect to Jill, (b) how far apart
are they, and (c) what is Heathers acceleration relative
to Jill?
37. A river has a steady speed of 0.500 m/s. A student swims
upstream a distance of 1.00 km and swims back to the
starting point. If the student can swim at a speed of
1.20 m/s in still water, how long does the trip take?
Compare this with the time the trip would take if the
water were still.
38. How long does it take an automobile traveling in the
left lane at 60.0 km/h to pull alongside a car traveling
in the right lane at 40.0 km/h if the cars front bumpers
are initially 100 m apart?
39. The pilot of an airplane notes that the compass indicates a heading due west. The airplanes speed relative
to the air is 150 km/h. If there is a wind of 30.0 km/h
toward the north, nd the velocity of the airplane relative to the ground.
40. Two swimmers, Alan and Beth, start at the same point in
a stream that ows with a speed v. Both move at the
same speed c (c v) relative to the stream. Alan swims
downstream a distance L and then upstream the same
distance. Beth swims such that her motion relative to
the ground is perpendicular to the banks of the stream.
She swims a distance L in this direction and then back.
The result of the motions of Alan and Beth is that they
both return to the starting point. Which swimmer returns rst? (Note: First guess at the answer.)
41. A child in danger of drowning in a river is being carried
downstream by a current that has a speed of 2.50 km/h.
The child is 0.600 km from shore and 0.800 km upstream of a boat landing when a rescue boat sets out.
(a) If the boat proceeds at its maximum speed of
20.0 km/h relative to the water, what heading relative to
the shore should the pilot take? (b) What angle does
105
Problems
the boat velocity make with the shore? (c) How long
does it take the boat to reach the child?
42. A bolt drops from the ceiling of a train car that is accelerating northward at a rate of 2.50 m/s2. What is the acceleration of the bolt relative to (a) the train car and
(b) the Earth?
43. A science student is riding on a atcar of a train traveling along a straight horizontal track at a constant speed
of 10.0 m/s. The student throws a ball into the air along
a path that he judges to make an initial angle of 60.0°
with the horizontal and to be in line with the track. The
students professor, who is standing on the ground
nearby, observes the ball to rise vertically. How high
does she see the ball rise?
Path of the projectile
vi
θi
48.
49.
50.
51.
vi
vi
θi
θi
Figure P4.45
46. A ball on the end of a string is whirled around in a horizontal circle of radius 0.300 m. The plane of the circle
is 1.20 m above the ground. The string breaks and the
ball lands 2.00 m (horizontally) away from the point on
the ground directly beneath the balls location when
the string breaks. Find the radial acceleration of the
ball during its circular motion.
47. A projectile is red up an incline (incline angle ) with
an initial speed vi at an angle i with respect to the horizontal ( i
), as shown in Figure P4.47. (a) Show that
the projectile travels a distance d up the incline, where
d
2v i2 cos
g
i
sin(
cos2
i
)
φ
Figure P4.47
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
44. A ball is thrown with an initial speed vi at an angle i with
the horizontal. The horizontal range of the ball is R , and
the ball reaches a maximum height R/6. In terms of R
and g, nd (a) the time the ball is in motion, (b) the
balls speed at the peak of its path, (c) the initial vertical
component of its velocity, (d) its initial speed, and (e) the
angle i . (f) Suppose the ball is thrown at the same initial
speed found in part (d) but at the angle appropriate for
reaching the maximum height. Find this height. (g) Suppose the ball is thrown at the same initial speed but at the
angle necessary for maximum range. Find this range.
45. As some molten metal splashes, one droplet ies off to
the east with initial speed vi at angle i above the horizontal, and another droplet ies off to the west with the
same speed at the same angle above the horizontal, as
in Figure P4.45. In terms of vi and i , nd the distance
between the droplets as a function of time.
d
52.
53.
(b) For what value of i is d a maximum, and what is
that maximum value of d ?
A student decides to measure the muzzle velocity of the
pellets from his BB gun. He points the gun horizontally.
On a vertical wall a distance x away from the gun, a target is placed. The shots hit the target a vertical distance
y below the gun. (a) Show that the vertical displacement
component of the pellets when traveling through the
air is given by y Ax 2, where A is a constant. (b) Express the constant A in terms of the initial velocity and
the free-fall acceleration. (c) If x 3.00 m and y
0.210 m, what is the initial speed of the pellets?
A home run is hit in such a way that the baseball just
clears a wall 21.0 m high, located 130 m from home
plate. The ball is hit at an angle of 35.0° to the horizontal, and air resistance is negligible. Find (a) the initial
speed of the ball, (b) the time it takes the ball to reach
the wall, and (c) the velocity components and the speed
of the ball when it reaches the wall. (Assume the ball is
hit at a height of 1.00 m above the ground.)
An astronaut standing on the Moon res a gun so that
the bullet leaves the barrel initially moving in a horizontal direction. (a) What must be the muzzle speed of the
bullet so that it travels completely around the Moon and
returns to its original location? (b) How long does this
trip around the Moon take? Assume that the free-fall acceleration on the Moon is one-sixth that on the Earth.
A pendulum of length 1.00 m swings in a vertical plane
(Fig. 4.19). When the pendulum is in the two horizontal
positions
90° and
270°, its speed is 5.00 m/s.
(a) Find the magnitude of the radial acceleration and
tangential acceleration for these positions. (b) Draw a
vector diagram to determine the direction of the total acceleration for these two positions. (c) Calculate the magnitude and direction of the total acceleration.
A basketball player who is 2.00 m tall is standing on the
oor 10.0 m from the basket, as in Figure P4.52. If he
shoots the ball at a 40.0° angle with the horizontal, at
what initial speed must he throw so that it goes through
the hoop without striking the backboard? The basket
height is 3.05 m.
A particle has velocity components
vx
4 m/s
vy
(6 m/s2)t
4 m/s
Calculate the speed of the particle and the direction
tan 1 (vy /vx ) of the velocity vector at t 2.00 s.
54. When baseball players throw the ball in from the outeld, they usually allow it to take one bounce before it
reaches the inelder on the theory that the ball arrives
106
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
vi
40.0°
A
B
3.05 m
1.20 m
30.0°
2.00 m
30.0°
vi
10.0 m
Figure P4.52
Figure P4.57
sooner that way. Suppose that the angle at which a
bounced ball leaves the ground is the same as the angle
at which the outelder launched it, as in Figure P4.54,
but that the balls speed after the bounce is one half of
what it was before the bounce. (a) Assuming the ball is
always thrown with the same initial speed, at what angle
should the ball be thrown in order to go the same distance D with one bounce (blue path) as a ball thrown
upward at 45.0° with no bounce (green path)? (b) Determine the ratio of the times for the one-bounce and
no-bounce throws.
θ
45.0°
θ
D
Figure P4.54
58. A quarterback throws a football straight toward a receiver with an initial speed of 20.0 m/s, at an angle of
30.0° above the horizontal. At that instant, the receiver
is 20.0 m from the quarterback. In what direction and
with what constant speed should the receiver run to
catch the football at the level at which it was thrown?
59. A bomber is ying horizontally over level terrain, with a
speed of 275 m/s relative to the ground, at an altitude
of 3 000 m. Neglect the effects of air resistance. (a) How
far will a bomb travel horizontally between its release
from the plane and its impact on the ground? (b) If the
plane maintains its original course and speed, where
will it be when the bomb hits the ground? (c) At what
angle from the vertical should the telescopic bombsight
be set so that the bomb will hit the target seen in the
sight at the time of release?
60. A person standing at the top of a hemispherical rock of
radius R kicks a ball (initially at rest on the top of the
rock) to give it horizontal velocity vi as in Figure P4.60.
(a) What must be its minimum initial speed if the ball is
never to hit the rock after it is kicked? (b) With this initial speed, how far from the base of the rock does the
ball hit the ground?
55. A boy can throw a ball a maximum horizontal distance
of 40.0 m on a level eld. How far can he throw the
same ball vertically upward? Assume that his muscles
give the ball the same speed in each case.
56. A boy can throw a ball a maximum horizontal distance
of R on a level eld. How far can he throw the same ball
vertically upward? Assume that his muscles give the ball
the same speed in each case.
57. A stone at the end of a sling is whirled in a vertical circle of radius 1.20 m at a constant speed vi 1.50 m/s
as in Figure P4.57. The center of the string is 1.50 m
above the ground. What is the range of the stone if it is
released when the sling is inclined at 30.0° with the horizontal (a) at A ? (b) at B ? What is the acceleration of
the stone (c) just before it is released at A ? (d) just after
it is released at A ?
vi
R
Figure P4.60
x
107
Problems
61. A hawk is ying horizontally at 10.0 m/s in a straight WEB
line, 200 m above the ground. A mouse it has been carrying struggles free from its grasp. The hawk continues
on its path at the same speed for 2.00 s before attempting to retrieve its prey. To accomplish the retrieval, it
dives in a straight line at constant speed and recaptures
the mouse 3.00 m above the ground. (a) Assuming no
air resistance, nd the diving speed of the hawk.
(b) What angle did the hawk make with the horizontal
during its descent? (c) For how long did the mouse enjoy free fall?
62. A truck loaded with cannonball watermelons stops suddenly to avoid running over the edge of a washed-out
bridge (Fig. P4.62). The quick stop causes a number of
melons to y off the truck. One melon rolls over the
edge with an initial speed vi 10.0 m/s in the horizontal direction. A cross-section of the bank has the shape
of the bottom half of a parabola with its vertex at the
edge of the road, and with the equation y 2 16x,
where x and y are measured in meters. What are the x
and y coordinates of the melon when it splatters on the
bank?
vi = 10 m/s
65. A car is parked on a steep incline overlooking the
ocean, where the incline makes an angle of 37.0° below
the horizontal. The negligent driver leaves the car in
neutral, and the parking brakes are defective. The car
rolls from rest down the incline with a constant acceleration of 4.00 m/s2, traveling 50.0 m to the edge of a vertical cliff. The cliff is 30.0 m above the ocean. Find
(a) the speed of the car when it reaches the edge of the
cliff and the time it takes to get there, (b) the velocity of
the car when it lands in the ocean, (c) the total time the
car is in motion, and (d) the position of the car when it
lands in the ocean, relative to the base of the cliff.
66. The determined coyote is out once more to try to capture the elusive roadrunner. The coyote wears a pair of
Acme jet-powered roller skates, which provide a constant horizontal acceleration of 15.0 m/s2 (Fig. P4.66).
The coyote starts off at rest 70.0 m from the edge of a
cliff at the instant the roadrunner zips past him in the
direction of the cliff. (a) If the roadrunner moves with
constant speed, determine the minimum speed he must
have to reach the cliff before the coyote. At the brink of
the cliff, the roadrunner escapes by making a sudden
turn, while the coyote continues straight ahead. (b) If
the cliff is 100 m above the oor of a canyon, determine
where the coyote lands in the canyon (assume his skates
remain horizontal and continue to operate when he is
in ight). (c) Determine the components of the coyotes impact velocity.
Coyoté
Stupidus
Chicken
Delightus
EP
BE
BEE
P
Figure P4.62
63. A catapult launches a rocket at an angle of 53.0° above
the horizontal with an initial speed of 100 m/s. The
rocket engine immediately starts a burn, and for 3.00 s
the rocket moves along its initial line of motion with an
acceleration of 30.0 m/s2. Then its engine fails, and the
rocket proceeds to move in free fall. Find (a) the maximum altitude reached by the rocket, (b) its total time of
ight, and (c) its horizontal range.
64. A river ows with a uniform velocity v. A person in a
motorboat travels 1.00 km upstream, at which time she
passes a log oating by. Always with the same throttle
setting, the boater continues to travel upstream for another 60.0 min and then returns downstream to her
starting point, which she reaches just as the same log
does. Find the velocity of the river. (Hint: The time of
travel of the boat after it meets the log equals the time
of travel of the log.)
Figure P4.66
67. A skier leaves the ramp of a ski jump with a velocity of
10.0 m/s, 15.0° above the horizontal, as in Figure P4.67.
The slope is inclined at 50.0°, and air resistance is negligible. Find (a) the distance from the ramp to where the
jumper lands and (b) the velocity components just before the landing. (How do you think the results might
be affected if air resistance were included? Note that
jumpers lean forward in the shape of an airfoil, with
their hands at their sides, to increase their distance.
Why does this work?)
108
CHAPTER 4
Motion in Two Dimensions
68. Two soccer players, Mary and Jane, begin running from
nearly the same point at the same time. Mary runs in an
easterly direction at 4.00 m/s, while Jane takes off in a
direction 60.0° north of east at 5.40 m/s. (a) How long
is it before they are 25.0 m apart? (b) What is the velocity of Jane relative to Mary? (c) How far apart are they
after 4.00 s?
69. Do not hurt yourself; do not strike your hand against
anything. Within these limitations, describe what you do
to give your hand a large acceleration. Compute an order-of-magnitude estimate of this acceleration, stating
the quantities you measure or estimate and their values.
70. An enemy ship is on the western side of a mountain island, as shown in Figure P4.70. The enemy ship can maneuver to within 2 500 m of the 1 800-m-high mountain
peak and can shoot projectiles with an initial speed of
250 m/s. If the eastern shoreline is horizontally 300 m
from the peak, what are the distances from the eastern
shore at which a ship can be safe from the bombardment of the enemy ship?
10.0 m/s
15.0°
50.0°
Figure P4.67
v i = 250 m/s
vi
1800 m
θH θ L
2500 m
300 m
Figure P4.70
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
4.1 (a) Because acceleration occurs whenever the velocity
changes in any way with an increase or decrease in
speed, a change in direction, or both the brake pedal
can also be considered an accelerator because it causes
the car to slow down. The steering wheel is also an accelerator because it changes the direction of the velocity
vector. (b) When the car is moving with constant speed,
the gas pedal is not causing an acceleration; it is an accelerator only when it causes a change in the speedometer reading.
4.2 (a) At only one point the peak of the trajectory are
the velocity and acceleration vectors perpendicular to
each other. (b) If the object is thrown straight up or
down, v and a are parallel to each other throughout the
downward motion. Otherwise, the velocity and acceleration vectors are never parallel to each other. (c) The
greater the maximum height, the longer it takes the projectile to reach that altitude and then fall back down from
it. So, as the angle increases from 0° to 90°, the time of
flight increases. Therefore, the 15° angle gives the shortest time of ight, and the 75° angle gives the longest.
4.3 (a) Because the object is moving with a constant speed,
the velocity vector is always the same length; because the
motion is circular, this vector is always tangent to the circle. The only acceleration is that which changes the direction of the velocity vector; it points radially inward.
(a)
109
Answers to Quick Quizzes
(b) Now there is a component of the acceleration vector
that is tangent to the circle and points in the direction
opposite the velocity. As a result, the acceleration vector
does not point toward the center. The object is slowing
down, and so the velocity vectors become shorter and
shorter.
4.4 The motion diagram is as shown below. Note that each
position vector points from the pivot point at the center
of the circle to the position of the ball.
v=0
v=0
a
(b)
v
(c) Now the tangential component of the acceleration
points in the same direction as the velocity. The object is
speeding up, and so the velocity vectors become longer
and longer.
(c)
4.5 (a) The passenger sees the coffee pouring nearly vertically into the cup, just as if she were standing on the
ground pouring it. (b) The stationary observer sees the
coffee moving in a parabolic path with a constant horizontal velocity of 60 mi/h ( 88 ft/s) and a downward
acceleration of g. If it takes the coffee 0.10 s to reach
the cup, the stationary observer sees the coffee moving
8.8 ft horizontally before it hits the cup! (c) If the car
slows suddenly, the coffee reaches the place where the
cup would have been had there been no change in velocity
and continues falling because the cup has not yet
reached that location. If the car rapidly speeds up, the
coffee falls behind the cup. If the car accelerates sideways, the coffee again ends up somewhere other than
the cup.
PUZZLER
The Spirit of Akron is an airship that is
more than 60 m long. When it is parked
at an airport, one person can easily support it overhead using a single hand.
Nonetheless, it is impossible for even a
very strong adult to move the ship
abruptly. What property of this huge airship makes it very difcult to cause any
sudden changes in its motion? (Courtesy of Edward E. Ogden)
web
For more information about the airship,
visit http://www.goodyear.com/us/blimp/
index.html
chapter
The Laws of Motion
Chapter Outline
5.1 The Concept of Force
5.5 The Force of Gravity and Weight
5.2 Newtons First Law and Inertial
Frames
5.6 Newtons Third Law
5.3 Mass
5.4 Newtons Second Law
110
5.7 Some Applications of Newtons
Laws
5.8 Forces of Friction
5.1
111
The Concept of Force
I
n Chapters 2 and 4, we described motion in terms of displacement, velocity,
and acceleration without considering what might cause that motion. What
might cause one particle to remain at rest and another particle to accelerate? In
this chapter, we investigate what causes changes in motion. The two main factors
we need to consider are the forces acting on an object and the mass of the object.
We discuss the three basic laws of motion, which deal with forces and masses and
were formulated more than three centuries ago by Isaac Newton. Once we understand these laws, we can answer such questions as What mechanism changes motion? and Why do some objects accelerate more than others?
5.1
THE CONCEPT OF FORCE
Everyone has a basic understanding of the concept of force from everyday experience. When you push your empty dinner plate away, you exert a force on it. Similarly, you exert a force on a ball when you throw or kick it. In these examples, the
word force is associated with muscular activity and some change in the velocity of an
object. Forces do not always cause motion, however. For example, as you sit reading this book, the force of gravity acts on your body and yet you remain stationary.
As a second example, you can push (in other words, exert a force) on a large boulder and not be able to move it.
What force (if any) causes the Moon to orbit the Earth? Newton answered this
and related questions by stating that forces are what cause any change in the velocity of an object. Therefore, if an object moves with uniform motion (constant velocity), no force is required for the motion to be maintained. The Moons velocity
is not constant because it moves in a nearly circular orbit around the Earth. We
now know that this change in velocity is caused by the force exerted on the Moon
by the Earth. Because only a force can cause a change in velocity, we can think of
force as that which causes a body to accelerate. In this chapter, we are concerned with
the relationship between the force exerted on an object and the acceleration of
that object.
What happens when several forces act simultaneously on an object? In this
case, the object accelerates only if the net force acting on it is not equal to zero.
The net force acting on an object is dened as the vector sum of all forces acting
on the object. (We sometimes refer to the net force as the total force, the resultant
force, or the unbalanced force.) If the net force exerted on an object is zero, then
the acceleration of the object is zero and its velocity remains constant. That
is, if the net force acting on the object is zero, then the object either remains at
rest or continues to move with constant velocity. When the velocity of an object is
constant (including the case in which the object remains at rest), the object is said
to be in equilibrium.
When a coiled spring is pulled, as in Figure 5.1a, the spring stretches. When a
stationary cart is pulled sufcently hard that friction is overcome, as in Figure 5.1b,
the cart moves. When a football is kicked, as in Figure 5.1c, it is both deformed
and set in motion. These situations are all examples of a class of forces called contact forces. That is, they involve physical contact between two objects. Other examples of contact forces are the force exerted by gas molecules on the walls of a container and the force exerted by your feet on the oor.
Another class of forces, known as eld forces, do not involve physical contact between two objects but instead act through empty space. The force of gravitational
attraction between two objects, illustrated in Figure 5.1d, is an example of this
class of force. This gravitational force keeps objects bound to the Earth. The plan-
A body accelerates because of an
external force
Denition of equilibrium
112
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
Contact forces
Field forces
m
(a)
M
(d)
q
(b)
+Q
(e)
Iron
(c)
N
S
(f)
Figure 5.1 Some examples of applied forces. In each case a force is exerted on the object
within the boxed area. Some agent in the environment external to the boxed area exerts a force
on the object.
ets of our Solar System are bound to the Sun by the action of gravitational forces.
Another common example of a eld force is the electric force that one electric
charge exerts on another, as shown in Figure 5.1e. These charges might be those
of the electron and proton that form a hydrogen atom. A third example of a eld
force is the force a bar magnet exerts on a piece of iron, as shown in Figure 5.1f.
The forces holding an atomic nucleus together also are eld forces but are very
short in range. They are the dominating interaction for particle separations of the
order of 10 15 m.
Early scientists, including Newton, were uneasy with the idea that a force can
act between two disconnected objects. To overcome this conceptual problem,
Michael Faraday (1791 1867) introduced the concept of a eld. According to this
approach, when object 1 is placed at some point P near object 2, we say that object
1 interacts with object 2 by virtue of the gravitational eld that exists at P. The
gravitational eld at P is created by object 2. Likewise, a gravitational eld created
by object 1 exists at the position of object 2. In fact, all objects create a gravitational eld in the space around themselves.
The distinction between contact forces and eld forces is not as sharp as you
may have been led to believe by the previous discussion. When examined at the
atomic level, all the forces we classify as contact forces turn out to be caused by
5.1
113
The Concept of Force
electric (eld) forces of the type illustrated in Figure 5.1e. Nevertheless, in developing models for macroscopic phenomena, it is convenient to use both classications of forces. The only known fundamental forces in nature are all eld forces:
(1) gravitational forces between objects, (2) electromagnetic forces between electric charges, (3) strong nuclear forces between subatomic particles, and (4) weak
nuclear forces that arise in certain radioactive decay processes. In classical physics,
we are concerned only with gravitational and electromagnetic forces.
Measuring the Strength of a Force
2
4
3
0
1
2
3
4
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
It is convenient to use the deformation of a spring to measure force. Suppose we
apply a vertical force to a spring scale that has a xed upper end, as shown in Figure 5.2a. The spring elongates when the force is applied, and a pointer on the
scale reads the value of the applied force. We can calibrate the spring by dening
the unit force F1 as the force that produces a pointer reading of 1.00 cm. (Because
force is a vector quantity, we use the bold-faced symbol F.) If we now apply a different downward force F2 whose magnitude is 2 units, as seen in Figure 5.2b, the
pointer moves to 2.00 cm. Figure 5.2c shows that the combined effect of the two
collinear forces is the sum of the effects of the individual forces.
Now suppose the two forces are applied simultaneously with F1 downward and
F2 horizontal, as illustrated in Figure 5.2d. In this case, the pointer reads
5 cm2 2.24 cm. The single force F that would produce this same reading is the
sum of the two vectors F1 and F2 , as described in Figure 5.2d. That is,
F
tan 1( 0.500)
26.6°.
F 12 F 22 2.24 units, and its direction is
Because forces are vector quantities, you must use the rules of vector addition to obtain the net force acting on an object.
F2
θ
F1
F1
F2
(a)
Figure 5.2
(b)
F1
F
F2
(c)
(d)
The vector nature of a force is tested with a spring scale. (a) A downward force F1
elongates the spring 1 cm. (b) A downward force F2 elongates the spring 2 cm. (c) When F1 and
F2 are applied simultaneously, the spring elongates by 3 cm. (d) When F1 is downward and F2 is
2 2 cm
horizontal, the combination of the two forces elongates the spring 1 2
5 cm.
QuickLab
Find a tennis ball, two drinking
straws, and a friend. Place the ball on
a table. You and your friend can each
apply a force to the ball by blowing
through the straws (held horizontally
a few centimeters above the table) so
that the air rushing out strikes the
ball. Try a variety of congurations:
Blow in opposite directions against
the ball, blow in the same direction,
blow at right angles to each other,
and so forth. Can you verify the vector nature of the forces?
114
CHAPTER 5
5.2
4.2
QuickLab
Use a drinking straw to impart a
strong, short-duration burst of air
against a tennis ball as it rolls along a
tabletop. Make the force perpendicular to the balls path. What happens
to the balls motion? What is different
if you apply a continuous force (constant magnitude and direction) that
is directed along the direction of motion?
Newtons rst law
Denition of inertia
The Laws of Motion
NEWTONS FIRST LAW AND INERTIAL FRAMES
Before we state Newtons rst law, consider the following simple experiment. Suppose a book is lying on a table. Obviously, the book remains at rest. Now imagine
that you push the book with a horizontal force great enough to overcome the
force of friction between book and table. (This force you exert, the force of friction, and any other forces exerted on the book by other objects are referred to as
external forces.) You can keep the book in motion with constant velocity by applying
a force that is just equal in magnitude to the force of friction and acts in the opposite direction. If you then push harder so that the magnitude of your applied force
exceeds the magnitude of the force of friction, the book accelerates. If you stop
pushing, the book stops after moving a short distance because the force of friction
retards its motion. Suppose you now push the book across a smooth, highly waxed
oor. The book again comes to rest after you stop pushing but not as quickly as before. Now imagine a oor so highly polished that friction is absent; in this case, the
book, once set in motion, moves until it hits a wall.
Before about 1600, scientists felt that the natural state of matter was the state
of rest. Galileo was the rst to take a different approach to motion and the natural
state of matter. He devised thought experiments, such as the one we just discussed
for a book on a frictionless surface, and concluded that it is not the nature of an
object to stop once set in motion: rather, it is its nature to resist changes in its motion.
In his words, Any velocity once imparted to a moving body will be rigidly maintained as long as the external causes of retardation are removed.
This new approach to motion was later formalized by Newton in a form that
has come to be known as Newtons rst law of motion:
In the absence of external forces, an object at rest remains at rest and an object
in motion continues in motion with a constant velocity (that is, with a constant
speed in a straight line).
In simpler terms, we can say that when no force acts on an object, the acceleration of the object is zero. If nothing acts to change the objects motion, then its
velocity does not change. From the rst law, we conclude that any isolated object
(one that does not interact with its environment) is either at rest or moving with
constant velocity. The tendency of an object to resist any attempt to change its velocity is called the inertia of the object. Figure 5.3 shows one dramatic example of
a consequence of Newtons rst law.
Another example of uniform (constant-velocity) motion on a nearly frictionless
surface is the motion of a light disk on a lm of air (the lubricant), as shown in Figure 5.4. If the disk is given an initial velocity, it coasts a great distance before stopping.
Finally, consider a spaceship traveling in space and far removed from any planets or other matter. The spaceship requires some propulsion system to change its
velocity. However, if the propulsion system is turned off when the spaceship
reaches a velocity v, the ship coasts at that constant velocity and the astronauts get
a free ride (that is, no propulsion system is required to keep them moving at the
velocity v).
Inertial Frames
Denition of inertial frame
As we saw in Section 4.6, a moving object can be observed from any number of reference frames. Newtons rst law, sometimes called the law of inertia, denes a special set of reference frames called inertial frames. An inertial frame of reference
5.2
115
Newtons First Law and Inertial Frames
Figure 5.3 Unless a net external force acts on it, an object at rest remains at rest and
an object in motion continues
in motion with constant velocity. In this case, the wall of the
building did not exert a force
on the moving train that was
large enough to stop it.
Isaac Newton
is one that is not accelerating. Because Newtons rst law deals only with objects
that are not accelerating, it holds only in inertial frames. Any reference frame that
moves with constant velocity relative to an inertial frame is itself an inertial frame.
(The Galilean transformations given by Equations 4.20 and 4.21 relate positions
and velocities between two inertial frames.)
A reference frame that moves with constant velocity relative to the distant stars
is the best approximation of an inertial frame, and for our purposes we can consider planet Earth as being such a frame. The Earth is not really an inertial frame
because of its orbital motion around the Sun and its rotational motion about its
own axis. As the Earth travels in its nearly circular orbit around the Sun, it experiences an acceleration of about 4.4 10 3 m/s2 directed toward the Sun. In addition, because the Earth rotates about its own axis once every 24 h, a point on the
equator experiences an additional acceleration of 3.37 10 2 m/s2 directed toward the center of the Earth. However, these accelerations are small compared
with g and can often be neglected. For this reason, we assume that the Earth is an
inertial frame, as is any other frame attached to it.
If an object is moving with constant velocity, an observer in one inertial frame
(say, one at rest relative to the object) claims that the acceleration of the object
and the resultant force acting on it are zero. An observer in any other inertial frame
also nds that a 0 and F 0 for the object. According to the rst law, a body
at rest and one moving with constant velocity are equivalent. A passenger in a car
moving along a straight road at a constant speed of 100 km/h can easily pour coffee into a cup. But if the driver steps on the gas or brake pedal or turns the steering wheel while the coffee is being poured, the car accelerates and it is no longer
an inertial frame. The laws of motion do not work as expected, and the coffee
ends up in the passengers lap!
English physicist
and mathematician (1642 1727)
Isaac Newton was one of the most
brilliant scientists in history. Before
the age of 30, he formulated the basic
concepts and laws of mechanics, discovered the law of universal gravitation, and invented the mathematical
methods of calculus. As a consequence of his theories, Newton was
able to explain the motions of the
planets, the ebb and ow of the tides,
and many special features of the motions of the Moon and the Earth. He
also interpreted many fundamental
observations concerning the nature
of light. His contributions to physical
theories dominated scientic thought
for two centuries and remain important today. (Giraudon/Art Resource)
v = constant
Air flow
Electric blower
Figure 5.4 Air hockey takes advantage of Newtons rst law to
make the game more exciting.
116
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
Quick Quiz 5.1
True or false: (a) It is possible to have motion in the absence of a force. (b) It is possible to
have force in the absence of motion.
5.3
4.3
Denition of mass
M ASS
Imagine playing catch with either a basketball or a bowling ball. Which ball is
more likely to keep moving when you try to catch it? Which ball has the greater
tendency to remain motionless when you try to throw it? Because the bowling ball
is more resistant to changes in its velocity, we say it has greater inertia than the basketball. As noted in the preceding section, inertia is a measure of how an object responds to an external force.
Mass is that property of an object that species how much inertia the object
has, and as we learned in Section 1.1, the SI unit of mass is the kilogram. The
greater the mass of an object, the less that object accelerates under the action of
an applied force. For example, if a given force acting on a 3-kg mass produces an
acceleration of 4 m/s2, then the same force applied to a 6-kg mass produces an acceleration of 2 m/s2.
To describe mass quantitatively, we begin by comparing the accelerations a
given force produces on different objects. Suppose a force acting on an object of
mass m1 produces an acceleration a1 , and the same force acting on an object of mass
m 2 produces an acceleration a2 . The ratio of the two masses is dened as the inverse ratio of the magnitudes of the accelerations produced by the force:
m1
m2
a2
a1
(5.1)
If one object has a known mass, the mass of the other object can be obtained from
acceleration measurements.
Mass is an inherent property of an object and is independent of the objects surroundings and of the method used to measure it. Also, mass is a
scalar quantity and thus obeys the rules of ordinary arithmetic. That is, several
masses can be combined in simple numerical fashion. For example, if you combine a 3-kg mass with a 5-kg mass, their total mass is 8 kg. We can verify this result
experimentally by comparing the acceleration that a known force gives to several
objects separately with the acceleration that the same force gives to the same objects combined as one unit.
Mass should not be confused with weight. Mass and weight are two different
quantities. As we see later in this chapter, the weight of an object is equal to the magnitude of the gravitational force exerted on the object and varies with location. For
example, a person who weighs 180 lb on the Earth weighs only about 30 lb on the
Moon. On the other hand, the mass of a body is the same everywhere: an object having a mass of 2 kg on the Earth also has a mass of 2 kg on the Moon.
Mass and weight are different
quantities
5.4
4.4
NEWTONS SECOND LAW
Newtons rst law explains what happens to an object when no forces act on it. It
either remains at rest or moves in a straight line with constant speed. Newtons second law answers the question of what happens to an object that has a nonzero resultant force acting on it.
5.4
117
Newtons Second Law
Imagine pushing a block of ice across a frictionless horizontal surface. When
you exert some horizontal force F, the block moves with some acceleration a. If
you apply a force twice as great, the acceleration doubles. If you increase the applied force to 3F, the acceleration triples, and so on. From such observations, we
conclude that the acceleration of an object is directly proportional to the resultant force acting on it.
The acceleration of an object also depends on its mass, as stated in the preceding section. We can understand this by considering the following experiment. If
you apply a force F to a block of ice on a frictionless surface, then the block undergoes some acceleration a. If the mass of the block is doubled, then the same
applied force produces an acceleration a/2. If the mass is tripled, then the same
applied force produces an acceleration a/3, and so on. According to this observation, we conclude that the magnitude of the acceleration of an object is inversely proportional to its mass.
These observations are summarized in Newtons second law:
The acceleration of an object is directly proportional to the net force acting on
it and inversely proportional to its mass.
Newtons second law
Thus, we can relate mass and force through the following mathematical statement
of Newtons second law:1
F
(5.2)
ma
Note that this equation is a vector expression and hence is equivalent to three
component equations:
Fx
ma x
Fy
ma y
Fz
ma z
(5.3)
Newtons second law
component form
Quick Quiz 5.2
Is there any relationship between the net force acting on an object and the direction in
which the object moves?
Unit of Force
The SI unit of force is the newton, which is dened as the force that, when acting
on a 1-kg mass, produces an acceleration of 1 m/s2. From this denition and Newtons second law, we see that the newton can be expressed in terms of the following fundamental units of mass, length, and time:
1 kg m/s2
1N
(5.4)
In the British engineering system, the unit of force is the pound, which is
dened as the force that, when acting on a 1-slug mass,2 produces an acceleration
of 1 ft/s2:
1 lb
1 slug ft/s2
A convenient approximation is that 1 N
1
4
(5.5)
lb.
1
Equation 5.2 is valid only when the speed of the object is much less than the speed of light. We treat
the relativistic situation in Chapter 39.
2
The slug is the unit of mass in the British engineering system and is that systems counterpart of the
SI unit the kilogram. Because most of the calculations in our study of classical mechanics are in SI units,
the slug is seldom used in this text.
Denition of newton
118
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
TABLE 5.1 Units of Force, Mass, and Accelerationa
System of Units
Mass
Acceleration
Force
SI
British engineering
kg
slug
m/s2
ft/s2
N
lb
a
1N
kg m/s2
slug ft/s2
0.225 lb.
The units of force, mass, and acceleration are summarized in Table 5.1.
We can now understand how a single person can hold up an airship but is not
able to change its motion abruptly, as stated at the beginning of the chapter. The
mass of the blimp is greater than 6 800 kg. In order to make this large mass accelerate appreciably, a very large force is required certainly one much greater than
a human can provide.
EXAMPLE 5.1
An Accelerating Hockey Puck
A hockey puck having a mass of 0.30 kg slides on the horizontal, frictionless surface of an ice rink. Two forces act on
the puck, as shown in Figure 5.5. The force F1 has a magnitude of 5.0 N, and the force F2 has a magnitude of 8.0 N. Determine both the magnitude and the direction of the pucks
acceleration.
Solution
Fx
The resultant force in the y direction is
Fy
F 1y
(5.0 N)( 0.342)
F 1 cos( 20°)
F 2x
(5.0 N)(0.940)
(8.0 N)(0.866)
Fx
m
ay
8.7 N
8.7 N
0.30 kg
5.2 N
29 m/s2
Fy
ax
F 2 cos 60°
(8.0 N)(0.500)
F 2 sin 60°
Now we use Newtons second law in component form to nd
the x and y components of acceleration:
The resultant force in the x direction is
F 1x
F 1 sin( 20°)
F 2y
5.2 N
0.30 kg
17 m/s2
m
The acceleration has a magnitude of
a
y
(17)2 m/s2
34 m/s2
and its direction relative to the positive x axis is
F2
tan
F1 = 5.0 N
F2 = 8.0 N
60°
20°
(29)2
x
F1
Figure 5.5 A hockey puck moving on a frictionless surface accelerates in the direction of the resultant force F1 F2 .
1
ay
ax
tan
1
17
29
30°
We can graphically add the vectors in Figure 5.5 to check the
reasonableness of our answer. Because the acceleration vector is along the direction of the resultant force, a drawing
showing the resultant force helps us check the validity of the
answer.
Exercise
Determine the components of a third force that,
when applied to the puck, causes it to have zero acceleration.
Answer
F 3x
8.7 N, F 3y
5.2 N.
5.5
5.5
THE FORCE OF GRAVITY AND WEIGHT
We are well aware that all objects are attracted to the Earth. The attractive force
exerted by the Earth on an object is called the force of gravity Fg . This force is
directed toward the center of the Earth,3 and its magnitude is called the weight
of the object.
We saw in Section 2.6 that a freely falling object experiences an acceleration g
acting toward the center of the Earth. Applying Newtons second law F m a to a
freely falling object of mass m, with a g and F Fg , we obtain
Fg
(5.6)
mg
Thus, the weight of an object, being dened as the magnitude of Fg , is mg. (You
should not confuse the italicized symbol g for gravitational acceleration with the
nonitalicized symbol g used as the abbreviation for gram.)
Because it depends on g, weight varies with geographic location. Hence,
weight, unlike mass, is not an inherent property of an object. Because g decreases
with increasing distance from the center of the Earth, bodies weigh less at higher
altitudes than at sea level. For example, a 1 000-kg palette of bricks used in the
construction of the Empire State Building in New York City weighed about 1 N less
by the time it was lifted from sidewalk level to the top of the building. As another
example, suppose an object has a mass of 70.0 kg. Its weight in a location where
g 9.80 m/s2 is Fg mg 686 N (about 150 lb). At the top of a mountain, however, where g 9.77 m/s2, its weight is only 684 N. Therefore, if you want to lose
weight without going on a diet, climb a mountain or weigh yourself at 30 000 ft
during an airplane ight!
Because weight Fg mg, we can compare the masses of two objects by measuring their weights on a spring scale. At a given location, the ratio of the weights
of two objects equals the ratio of their masses.
The life-support unit strapped to the back
of astronaut Edwin Aldrin weighed 300 lb
on the Earth. During his training, a 50-lb
mock-up was used. Although this effectively
simulated the reduced weight the unit
would have on the Moon, it did not correctly mimic the unchanging mass. It was
just as difcult to accelerate the unit (perhaps by jumping or twisting suddenly) on
the Moon as on the Earth.
3
119
The Force of Gravity and Weight
This statement ignores the fact that the mass distribution of the Earth is not perfectly spherical.
Denition of weight
QuickLab
Drop a pen and your textbook simultaneously from the same height and
watch as they fall. How can they have
the same acceleration when their
weights are so different?
120
CHAPTER 5
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 5.2
The Laws of Motion
How Much Do You Weigh in an Elevator?
You have most likely had the experience of standing in an elevator that accelerates upward as it moves toward a higher
oor. In this case, you feel heavier. In fact, if you are standing
on a bathroom scale at the time, the scale measures a force
magnitude that is greater than your weight. Thus, you have
tactile and measured evidence that leads you to believe you
are heavier in this situation. Are you heavier?
Solution No, your weight is unchanged. To provide the
acceleration upward, the oor or scale must exert on your
feet an upward force that is greater in magnitude than your
weight. It is this greater force that you feel, which you interpret as feeling heavier. The scale reads this upward force, not
your weight, and so its reading increases.
Quick Quiz 5.3
A baseball of mass m is thrown upward with some initial speed. If air resistance is neglected,
what forces are acting on the ball when it reaches (a) half its maximum height and (b) its
maximum height?
5.6
4.5
Newtons third law
NEWTONS THIRD LAW
If you press against a corner of this textbook with your ngertip, the book pushes
back and makes a small dent in your skin. If you push harder, the book does the
same and the dent in your skin gets a little larger. This simple experiment illustrates a general principle of critical importance known as Newtons third law:
If two objects interact, the force F12 exerted by object 1 on object 2 is equal in
magnitude to and opposite in direction to the force F21 exerted by object 2 on
object 1:
F12
(5.7)
F21
This law, which is illustrated in Figure 5.6a, states that a force that affects the motion of an object must come from a second, external, object. The external object, in
turn, is subject to an equal-magnitude but oppositely directed force exerted on it.
Fhn
Fnh
F12 = F21
2
F12
F21
1
(a)
(b)
Figure 5.6 Newtons third law. (a) The force F12 exerted by object 1 on object 2 is equal in
magnitude to and opposite in direction to the force F21 exerted by object 2 on object 1. (b) The
force Fhn exerted by the hammer on the nail is equal to and opposite the force Fnh exerted by
the nail on the hammer.
5.6
121
Newtons Third Law
This is equivalent to stating that a single isolated force cannot exist. The force
that object 1 exerts on object 2 is sometimes called the action force, while the force
object 2 exerts on object 1 is called the reaction force. In reality, either force can be
labeled the action or the reaction force. The action force is equal in magnitude
to the reaction force and opposite in direction. In all cases, the action and
reaction forces act on different objects. For example, the force acting on a
freely falling projectile is Fg m g, which is the force of gravity exerted by the
Earth on the projectile. The reaction to this force is the force exerted by the projectile on the Earth, Fg
Fg . The reaction force Fg accelerates the Earth toward
the projectile just as the action force Fg accelerates the projectile toward the Earth.
However, because the Earth has such a great mass, its acceleration due to this reaction force is negligibly small.
Another example of Newtons third law is shown in Figure 5.6b. The force exerted by the hammer on the nail (the action force Fhn ) is equal in magnitude and
opposite in direction to the force exerted by the nail on the hammer (the reaction
force Fnh). It is this latter force that causes the hammer to stop its rapid forward
motion when it strikes the nail.
You experience Newtons third law directly whenever you slam your st against
a wall or kick a football. You should be able to identify the action and reaction
forces in these cases.
F
Compression of a football as the
force exerted by a players foot sets
the ball in motion.
Quick Quiz 5.4
A person steps from a boat toward a dock. Unfortunately, he forgot to tie the boat to the
dock, and the boat scoots away as he steps from it. Analyze this situation in terms of Newtons third law.
The force of gravity Fg was dened as the attractive force the Earth exerts on
an object. If the object is a TV at rest on a table, as shown in Figure 5.7a, why does
the TV not accelerate in the direction of Fg ? The TV does not accelerate because
the table holds it up. What is happening is that the table exerts on the TV an upward force n called the normal force.4 The normal force is a contact force that
prevents the TV from falling through the table and can have any magnitude
needed to balance the downward force Fg , up to the point of breaking the table. If
someone stacks books on the TV, the normal force exerted by the table on the TV
increases. If someone lifts up on the TV, the normal force exerted by the table on
the TV decreases. (The normal force becomes zero if the TV is raised off the table.)
The two forces in an action reaction pair always act on different objects.
For the hammer-and-nail situation shown in Figure 5.6b, one force of the pair acts
on the hammer and the other acts on the nail. For the unfortunate person stepping out of the boat in Quick Quiz 5.4, one force of the pair acts on the person,
and the other acts on the boat.
For the TV in Figure 5.7, the force of gravity Fg and the normal force n are not
an action reaction pair because they act on the same body the TV. The two reaction forces in this situation Fg and n are exerted on objects other than the
TV. Because the reaction to Fg is the force Fg exerted by the TV on the Earth and
the reaction to n is the force n exerted by the TV on the table, we conclude that
Fg
4
Fg
Normal in this context means perpendicular.
and
n
n
Denition of normal force
122
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
n
n
Fg
Fg
n
Fg
(a)
(b)
Figure 5.7
When a TV is at rest on a table, the forces acting on the TV are the normal force n
and the force of gravity Fg , as illustrated in part (b). The reaction to n is the force n exerted by
the TV on the table. The reaction to Fg is the force Fg exerted by the TV on the Earth.
The forces n and n have the same magnitude, which is the same as that of Fg until
the table breaks. From the second law, we see that, because the TV is in equilibrium (a 0), it follows5 that F g n mg.
Quick Quiz 5.5
If a y collides with the windshield of a fast-moving bus, (a) which experiences the greater impact force: the y or the bus, or is the same force experienced by both? (b) Which experiences
the greater acceleration: the y or the bus, or is the same acceleration experienced by both?
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 5.3
You Push Me and Ill Push You
A large man and a small boy stand facing each other on frictionless ice. They put their hands together and push against
each other so that they move apart. (a) Who moves away with
the higher speed?
Solution This situation is similar to what we saw in Quick
Quiz 5.5. According to Newtons third law, the force exerted
by the man on the boy and the force exerted by the boy on
the man are an action reaction pair, and so they must be
equal in magnitude. (A bathroom scale placed between their
hands would read the same, regardless of which way it faced.)
5
Therefore, the boy, having the lesser mass, experiences the
greater acceleration. Both individuals accelerate for the same
amount of time, but the greater acceleration of the boy over
this time interval results in his moving away from the interaction with the higher speed.
(b) Who moves farther while their hands are in contact?
Solution Because the boy has the greater acceleration, he
moves farther during the interval in which the hands are in
contact.
Technically, we should write this equation in the component form Fgy ny mgy . This component
notation is cumbersome, however, and so in situations in which a vector is parallel to a coordinate axis,
we usually do not include the subscript for that axis because there is no other component.
5.7
5.7
4.6
123
Some Applications of Newtons Laws
SOME APPLICATIONS OF NEWTONS LAWS
In this section we apply Newtons laws to objects that are either in equilibrium
(a 0) or accelerating along a straight line under the action of constant external
forces. We assume that the objects behave as particles so that we need not worry
about rotational motion. We also neglect the effects of friction in those problems
involving motion; this is equivalent to stating that the surfaces are frictionless. Finally, we usually neglect the mass of any ropes involved. In this approximation, the
magnitude of the force exerted at any point along a rope is the same at all points
along the rope. In problem statements, the synonymous terms light, lightweight, and
of negligible mass are used to indicate that a mass is to be ignored when you work
the problems.
When we apply Newtons laws to an object, we are interested only in external forces that act on the object. For example, in Figure 5.7 the only external
forces acting on the TV are n and Fg . The reactions to these forces, n and Fg , act
on the table and on the Earth, respectively, and therefore do not appear in Newtons second law applied to the TV.
When a rope attached to an object is pulling on the object, the rope exerts a
force T on the object, and the magnitude of that force is called the tension in the
rope. Because it is the magnitude of a vector quantity, tension is a scalar quantity.
Consider a crate being pulled to the right on a frictionless, horizontal surface,
as shown in Figure 5.8a. Suppose you are asked to nd the acceleration of the
crate and the force the oor exerts on it. First, note that the horizontal force being applied to the crate acts through the rope. Use the symbol T to denote the
force exerted by the rope on the crate. The magnitude of T is equal to the tension
in the rope. A dotted circle is drawn around the crate in Figure 5.8a to remind you
that you are interested only in the forces acting on the crate. These are illustrated
in Figure 5.8b. In addition to the force T, this force diagram for the crate includes
the force of gravity Fg and the normal force n exerted by the oor on the crate.
Such a force diagram, referred to as a free-body diagram, shows all external
forces acting on the object. The construction of a correct free-body diagram is an
important step in applying Newtons laws. The reactions to the forces we have
listed namely, the force exerted by the crate on the rope, the force exerted by
the crate on the Earth, and the force exerted by the crate on the oor are not included in the free-body diagram because they act on other bodies and not on the
crate.
We can now apply Newtons second law in component form to the crate. The
only force acting in the x direction is T. Applying Fx max to the horizontal motion gives
Fx
T
ma x
or
ax
T
m
No acceleration occurs in the y direction. Applying
yields
n
( F g)
0
or
n
Tension
(a)
n
y
T
x
Fy
may with ay
0
Fg
That is, the normal force has the same magnitude as the force of gravity but is in
the opposite direction.
If T is a constant force, then the acceleration ax T/m also is constant.
Hence, the constant-acceleration equations of kinematics from Chapter 2 can be
used to obtain the crates displacement x and velocity vx as functions of time. Be-
Fg
(b)
Figure 5.8 (a) A crate being
pulled to the right on a frictionless
surface. (b) The free-body diagram
representing the external forces
acting on the crate.
124
CHAPTER 5
cause ax
F
The Laws of Motion
T/m
constant, Equations 2.8 and 2.11 can be written as
v xf
x
Fg
n
Figure 5.9 When one object
pushes downward on another object with a force F, the normal
force n is greater than the force of
gravity: n Fg F.
T
T
v xi t
1
2
T2
t
m
In the situation just described, the magnitude of the normal force n is equal to
the magnitude of Fg , but this is not always the case. For example, suppose a book
is lying on a table and you push down on the book with a force F, as shown in Figure 5.9. Because the book is at rest and therefore not accelerating, Fy 0, which
gives n F g F 0, or n F g F. Other examples in which n F g are presented later.
Consider a lamp suspended from a light chain fastened to the ceiling, as in
Figure 5.10a. The free-body diagram for the lamp (Figure 5.10b) shows that the
forces acting on the lamp are the downward force of gravity Fg and the upward
force T exerted by the chain. If we apply the second law to the lamp, noting that
a 0, we see that because there are no forces in the x direction, Fx 0 provides
no helpful information. The condition Fy may 0 gives
Fy
T = T
T
t
m
v xi
T
Fg
0
or
T
Fg
Again, note that T and Fg are not an action reaction pair because they act on the
same object the lamp. The reaction force to T is T , the downward force exerted
by the lamp on the chain, as shown in Figure 5.10c. The ceiling exerts on the
chain a force T that is equal in magnitude to the magnitude of T and points in
the opposite direction.
(c)
(a)
Figure 5.10
Fg
(b)
(a) A lamp suspended from a ceiling by a chain of
negligible mass. (b) The forces acting on the lamp are the force of
gravity Fg and the force exerted by
the chain T. (c) The forces acting
on the chain are the force exerted
by the lamp T and the force exerted by the ceiling T .
Problem-Solving Hints
Applying Newtons Laws
The following procedure is recommended when dealing with problems involving Newtons laws:
Draw a simple, neat diagram of the system.
Isolate the object whose motion is being analyzed. Draw a free-body diagram
for this object. For systems containing more than one object, draw separate
free-body diagrams for each object. Do not include in the free-body diagram
forces exerted by the object on its surroundings. Establish convenient coordinate axes for each object and nd the components of the forces along
these axes.
Apply Newtons second law, F m a, in component form. Check your dimensions to make sure that all terms have units of force.
Solve the component equations for the unknowns. Remember that you must
have as many independent equations as you have unknowns to obtain a
complete solution.
Make sure your results are consistent with the free-body diagram. Also check
the predictions of your solutions for extreme values of the variables. By doing so, you can often detect errors in your results.
5.7
EXAMPLE 5.4
125
Some Applications of Newtons Laws
A Trafc Light at Rest
A trafc light weighing 125 N hangs from a cable tied to two
other cables fastened to a support. The upper cables make
angles of 37.0° and 53.0° with the horizontal. Find the tension in the three cables.
Solution Figure 5.11a shows the type of drawing we might
make of this situation. We then construct two free-body diagrams one for the trafc light, shown in Figure 5.11b, and
one for the knot that holds the three cables together, as seen
in Figure 5.11c. This knot is a convenient object to choose because all the forces we are interested in act through it. Because the acceleration of the system is zero, we know that the
net force on the light and the net force on the knot are both
zero.
In Figure 5.11b the force T3 exerted by the vertical cable
supports the light, and so T3
125 N.
Fg
(1)
Fx
(2)
Fy
T2
T1
T2
T3
T1 cos 37.0
T2 cos 53.0
0
T1 sin 37.0
T2 sin 53.0
125 N
0) allows us to
T1 sin 37.0°
1.33T1
0
99.9 N
This problem is important because it combines what we have
learned about vectors with the new topic of forces. The general approach taken here is very powerful, and we will repeat
it many times.
In what situation does T1
Answer
T2 ?
When the two cables attached to the support make
equal angles with the horizontal.
y
T2
T1
T2
53.0°
37.0°
T3
(b)
x
T3
Fg
(a)
125 N
75.1 N
T1
53.0°
T1
1.33T1
(1.33T1)(sin 53.0°)
T3
37.0°
0
This value for T2 is substituted into (2) to yield
Exercise
Knowing that the knot is in equilibrium (a
write
0
T2 sin 53.0°
cos 37.0°
cos 53.0°
T1
T2
y Component
T2 cos 53.0°
From (1) we see that the horizontal components of T1 and T2
must be equal in magnitude, and from (2) we see that the
sum of the vertical components of T1 and T2 must balance
the weight of the light. We solve (1) for T2 in terms of T1 to
obtain
choose the coordinate axes shown in Figure 5.11c and resolve
the forces acting on the knot into their components:
x Component
T1 sin 37.0°
( 125 N)
Next, we
Force
T1 cos 37.0°
(c)
Figure 5.11 (a) A trafc light suspended by cables. (b) Free-body diagram for the trafc light. (c) Free-body diagram for the knot where the three cables are joined.
126
CHAPTER 5
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 5.5
The Laws of Motion
Forces Between Cars in a Train
In a train, the cars are connected by couplers, which are under
tension as the locomotive pulls the train. As you move down
the train from locomotive to caboose, does the tension in the
couplers increase, decrease, or stay the same as the train
speeds up? When the engineer applies the brakes, the couplers are under compression. How does this compression
force vary from locomotive to caboose? (Assume that only the
brakes on the wheels of the engine are applied.)
Solution As the train speeds up, the tension decreases
from the front of the train to the back. The coupler between
EXAMPLE 5.6
the locomotive and the rst car must apply enough force to
accelerate all of the remaining cars. As you move back along
the train, each coupler is accelerating less mass behind it.
The last coupler has to accelerate only the caboose, and so it
is under the least tension.
When the brakes are applied, the force again decreases
from front to back. The coupler connecting the locomotive
to the rst car must apply a large force to slow down all the
remaining cars. The nal coupler must apply a force large
enough to slow down only the caboose.
Crate on a Frictionless Incline
A crate of mass m is placed on a frictionless inclined plane of
angle . (a) Determine the acceleration of the crate after it is
released.
Solution Because we know the forces acting on the crate,
we can use Newtons second law to determine its acceleration. (In other words, we have classied the problem; this
gives us a hint as to the approach to take.) We make a sketch
as in Figure 5.12a and then construct the free-body diagram
for the crate, as shown in Figure 5.12b. The only forces acting
on the crate are the normal force n exerted by the inclined
plane, which acts perpendicular to the plane, and the force
of gravity Fg m g, which acts vertically downward. For problems involving inclined planes, it is convenient to choose the
coordinate axes with x downward along the incline and y perpendicular to it, as shown in Figure 5.12b. (It is possible to
solve the problem with standard horizontal and vertical
axes. You may want to try this, just for practice.) Then, we rey
place the force of gravity by a component of magnitude
mg sin along the positive x axis and by one of magnitude
mg cos along the negative y axis.
Now we apply Newtons second law in component form,
noting that ay 0:
(1)
Fx
mg sin
(2)
Fy
n
mg cos
ma x
0
Solving (1) for ax , we see that the acceleration along the incline
is caused by the component of Fg directed down the incline:
(3)
ax
g sin
Note that this acceleration component is independent of the
mass of the crate! It depends only on the angle of inclination
and on g .
From (2) we conclude that the component of Fg perpendicular to the incline is balanced by the normal force; that is, n
mg cos . This is one example of a situation in which the normal force is not equal in magnitude to the weight of the object.
n
a
mg sin θ
d
θ
(a)
mg cos θ
θ
x
mg
(b)
Figure 5.12 (a) A crate of mass m sliding down a frictionless incline. (b) The free-body diagram for the crate. Note that its acceleration along the incline is g sin .
Special Cases Looking over our results, we see that in the
extreme case of
90°, ax g and n 0. This condition
corresponds to the crates being in free fall. When
0,
ax 0 and n mg (its maximum value); in this case, the
crate is sitting on a horizontal surface.
(b) Suppose the crate is released from rest at the top of
the incline, and the distance from the front edge of the crate
to the bottom is d. How long does it take the front edge to
reach the bottom, and what is its speed just as it gets there?
Solution
2.11, x f
Because ax constant, we can apply Equation
x i v xi t 1a x t 2, to analyze the crates motion.
2
5.7
With the displacement xf
0, we obtain
(5)
1
2
2 a xt
d
(4)
d and vxi
xi
t
2d
ax
Using Equation 2.12, v xf 2
we nd that
vxf 2 2a xd
EXAMPLE 5.7
v xi2
2d
g sin
x i), with vxi
2a x(x f
0,
Solution Common sense tells us that both blocks must experience the same acceleration because they remain in contact with each other. Just as in the preceding example, we
make a labeled sketch and free-body diagrams, which are
shown in Figure 5.13. In Figure 5.13a the dashed line indicates that we treat the two blocks together as a system. Because F is the only external horizontal force acting on the system (the two blocks), we have
F x(system)
ax
2gd sin
We see from equations (4) and (5) that the time t needed to
reach the bottom and the speed vxf , like acceleration, are independent of the crates mass. This suggests a simple method
you can use to measure g , using an inclined air track: Measure the angle of inclination, some distance traveled by a cart
along the incline, and the time needed to travel that distance. The value of g can then be calculated from (4).
F
(m 1
m 2)a x
(b) Determine the magnitude of the contact force between the two blocks.
Solution To solve this part of the problem, we must treat
each block separately with its own free-body diagram, as in
Figures 5.13b and 5.13c. We denote the contact force by P.
From Figure 5.13c, we see that the only horizontal force acting on block 2 is the contact force P (the force exerted by
block 1 on block 2), which is directed to the right. Applying
Newtons second law to block 2 gives
(2)
F
m1
Treating the two blocks together as a system simplies the
solution but does not provide information about internal
forces.
F
m1
m2
(a)
n1
n2
y
P
F
Fx
P
m 2a x
Substituting into (2) the value of ax given by (1), we obtain
m2
(3)
x
2a x d
vxf
One Block Pushes Another
Two blocks of masses m1 and m 2 are placed in contact with
each other on a frictionless horizontal surface. A constant
horizontal force F is applied to the block of mass m1 . (a) Determine the magnitude of the acceleration of the two-block
system.
(1)
127
Some Applications of Newtons Laws
m1
P
m2
m1g
(b)
Figure 5.13
m 2g
(c)
P
m2
m 2a x
m1
m2
F
From this result, we see that the contact force P exerted by
block 1 on block 2 is less than the applied force F. This is consistent with the fact that the force required to accelerate
block 2 alone must be less than the force required to produce the same acceleration for the two-block system.
It is instructive to check this expression for P by considering the forces acting on block 1, shown in Figure 5.13b. The
horizontal forces acting on this block are the applied force F
to the right and the contact force P to the left (the force exerted by block 2 on block 1). From Newtons third law, P is
the reaction to P, so that P
P . Applying Newtons second law to block 1 produces
(4)
Fx
F
P
F
P
m 1a x
128
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
Substituting into (4) the value of ax from (1), we obtain
P
F
m 1a x
F
m 1F
m1 m 2
m2
m1
m2
F
If m1 4.00 kg, m 2 3.00 kg, and F 9.00 N,
nd the magnitude of the acceleration of the system and the
magnitude of the contact force.
Answer
This agrees with (3), as it must.
EXAMPLE 5.8
Exercise
1.29 m/s2; P
ax
3.86 N.
Weighing a Fish in an Elevator
A person weighs a sh of mass m on a spring scale attached to
the ceiling of an elevator, as illustrated in Figure 5.14. Show
that if the elevator accelerates either upward or downward,
the spring scale gives a reading that is different from the
weight of the sh.
If the elevator moves upward with an acceleration a relative to an observer standing outside the elevator in an inertial
frame (see Fig. 5.14a), Newtons second law applied to the
sh gives the net force on the sh:
Solution
where we have chosen upward as the positive direction. Thus,
we conclude from (1) that the scale reading T is greater than
the weight mg if a is upward, so that ay is positive, and that
the reading is less than mg if a is downward, so that ay is
negative.
For example, if the weight of the sh is 40.0 N and a is upward, so that ay
2.00 m/s2, the scale reading from (1) is
The external forces acting on the sh are the
downward force of gravity Fg m g and the force T exerted
by the scale. By Newtons third law, the tension T is also the
reading of the scale. If the elevator is either at rest or moving
at constant velocity, the sh is not accelerating, and so
F y T mg 0 or T mg (remember that the scalar mg
is the weight of the sh).
(1)
a
Fy
T
mg
ma y
a
T
T
mg
mg
(a)
(b)
Observer in
inertial frame
Figure 5.14 Apparent weight versus true weight. (a) When the elevator accelerates upward, the
spring scale reads a value greater than the weight of the sh. (b) When the elevator accelerates downward, the spring scale reads a value less than the weight of the sh.
5.7
(2)
T
ma y
mg
(40.0 N)
ay
mg
Hence, if you buy a sh by weight in an elevator, make
sure the sh is weighed while the elevator is either at rest or
accelerating downward! Furthermore, note that from the information given here one cannot determine the direction of
motion of the elevator.
1
g
2.00 m/s2
9.80 m/s2
1
48.2 N
2.00 m/s2, then (2) gives us
If a is downward so that ay
T
mg
ay
g
2.00 m/s2
9.80 m/s2
(40.0 N)
1
1
31.8 N
EXAMPLE 5.9
Special Cases If the elevator cable breaks, the elevator
falls freely and ay
g. We see from (2) that the scale reading T is zero in this case; that is, the sh appears to be weightless. If the elevator accelerates downward with an acceleration greater than g, the sh (along with the person in the
elevator) eventually hits the ceiling because the acceleration
of sh and person is still that of a freely falling object relative
to an outside observer.
Atwoods Machine
When two objects of unequal mass are hung vertically over a
frictionless pulley of negligible mass, as shown in Figure
5.15a, the arrangement is called an Atwood machine. The de-
m1
a
a
m2
(a)
T
T
m1
m2
m1g
m2g
(b)
Figure 5.15
129
Some Applications of Newtons Laws
Atwoods machine. (a) Two objects (m 2 m1 ) connected by a cord of negligible mass strung over a frictionless pulley.
(b) Free-body diagrams for the two objects.
vice is sometimes used in the laboratory to measure the freefall acceleration. Determine the magnitude of the acceleration of the two objects and the tension in the lightweight
cord.
Solution If we were to dene our system as being made
up of both objects, as we did in Example 5.7, we would have
to determine an internal force (tension in the cord). We must
dene two systems here one for each object and apply
Newtons second law to each. The free-body diagrams for the
two objects are shown in Figure 5.15b. Two forces act on each
object: the upward force T exerted by the cord and the downward force of gravity.
We need to be very careful with signs in problems such as
this, in which a string or rope passes over a pulley or some
other structure that causes the string or rope to bend. In Figure 5.15a, notice that if object 1 accelerates upward, then object 2 accelerates downward. Thus, for consistency with signs,
if we dene the upward direction as positive for object 1, we
must dene the downward direction as positive for object 2.
With this sign convention, both objects accelerate in the
same direction as dened by the choice of sign. With this sign
convention applied to the forces, the y component of the net
force exerted on object 1 is T m1g, and the y component of
the net force exerted on object 2 is m 2g T. Because the objects are connected by a cord, their accelerations must be
equal in magnitude. (Otherwise the cord would stretch or
break as the distance between the objects increased.) If we assume m 2 m1 , then object 1 must accelerate upward and object 2 downward.
When Newtons second law is applied to object 1, we
obtain
(1)
Fy
T
m 1g
m 1a y
T
m 2a y
Similarly, for object 2 we nd
(2)
Fy
m 2g
130
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
When (2) is added to (1), T drops out and we get
m 1g
(3)
m 2g
m 1a y
ay
m2
m1
the ratio of the unbalanced force on the system (m 2g m 1g)
to the total mass of the system (m 1 m 2), as expected from
Newtons second law.
m 2a y
m1
g
m2
Special Cases When m 1 m 2 , then ay 0 and T m1 g,
as we would expect for this balanced case. If m 2
m1 , then
ay g (a freely falling body) and T 2m1 g.
When (3) is substituted into (1), we obtain
Exercise
(4)
Find the magnitude of the acceleration and the
string tension for an Atwood machine in which m1 2.00 kg
and m 2 4.00 kg.
2m 1m 2
g
m1 m2
T
The result for the acceleration in (3) can be interpreted as
EXAMPLE 5.10
Answer
3.27 m/s2, T
ay
26.1 N.
Acceleration of Two Objects Connected by a Cord
A ball of mass m1 and a block of mass m 2 are attached by a
lightweight cord that passes over a frictionless pulley of negligible mass, as shown in Figure 5.16a. The block lies on a frictionless incline of angle . Find the magnitude of the acceleration of the two objects and the tension in the cord.
rection. Applying Newtons second law in component form to
the block gives
Solution Because the objects are connected by a cord
(which we assume does not stretch), their accelerations have
the same magnitude. The free-body diagrams are shown in
Figures 5.16b and 5.16c. Applying Newtons second law in
component form to the ball, with the choice of the upward
direction as positive, yields
In (3) we have replaced ax with a because that is the accelerations only component. In other words, the two objects have accelerations of the same magnitude a, which is what we are trying
to nd. Equations (1) and (4) provide no information regarding the acceleration. However, if we solve (2) for T and then
substitute this value for T into (3) and solve for a, we obtain
(1)
Fx
Fy
T
Fx
m 2g sin
(4)
Fy
n
0
(2)
(3)
m 1g
m 1a y
(5)
m 1a
Note that in order for the ball to accelerate upward, it is necessary that T m1 g. In (2) we have replaced ay with a because the acceleration has only a y component.
For the block it is convenient to choose the positive x axis
along the incline, as shown in Figure 5.16c. Here we choose
the positive direction to be down the incline, in the x di-
(6)
y
T
T
T
m1
m1
θ
(a)
m2g sin θ
θ
x
x
m 2g cos θ
m 1g
(b)
m 2a
0
m 1g
m2
1)
m 1m 2g(sin
m1 m2
n
a
a
m 2a x
When this value for a is substituted into (2), we nd
y
m2
m 2g cos
m 2g sin
m1
a
T
m 2g
(c)
Figure 5.16 (a) Two objects
connected by a lightweight cord
strung over a frictionless pulley.
(b) Free-body diagram for the
ball. (c) Free-body diagram for
the block. (The incline is frictionless.)
5.8
Note that the block accelerates down the incline only if
m 2 sin
m1 (that is, if a is in the direction we assumed). If
m1 m 2 sin , then the acceleration is up the incline for the
block and downward for the ball. Also note that the result for
the acceleration (5) can be interpreted as the resultant force
acting on the system divided by the total mass of the system; this
is consistent with Newtons second law. Finally, if
90°, then
the results for a and T are identical to those of Example 5.9.
5.8
131
Forces of Friction
Exercise
If m1 10.0 kg, m 2
the acceleration of each object.
5.00 kg, and
45.0°, nd
a
4.22 m/s2, where the negative sign indicates
that the block accelerates up the incline and the ball accelerates downward.
Answer
FORCES OF FRICTION
When a body is in motion either on a surface or in a viscous medium such as air or
water, there is resistance to the motion because the body interacts with its surroundings. We call such resistance a force of friction. Forces of friction are very
important in our everyday lives. They allow us to walk or run and are necessary for
the motion of wheeled vehicles.
Have you ever tried to move a heavy desk across a rough oor? You push
harder and harder until all of a sudden the desk seems to break free and subsequently moves relatively easily. It takes a greater force to start the desk moving
than it does to keep it going once it has started sliding. To understand why this
happens, consider a book on a table, as shown in Figure 5.17a. If we apply an external horizontal force F to the book, acting to the right, the book remains stationary if F is not too great. The force that counteracts F and keeps the book from
moving acts to the left and is called the frictional force f.
As long as the book is not moving, f F. Because the book is stationary, we
call this frictional force the force of static friction fs . Experiments show that this
force arises from contacting points that protrude beyond the general level of the
surfaces in contact, even for surfaces that are apparently very smooth, as shown in
the magnied view in Figure 5.17a. (If the surfaces are clean and smooth at the
atomic level, they are likely to weld together when contact is made.) The frictional
force arises in part from one peaks physically blocking the motion of a peak from
the opposing surface, and in part from chemical bonding of opposing points as
they come into contact. If the surfaces are rough, bouncing is likely to occur, further complicating the analysis. Although the details of friction are quite complex
at the atomic level, this force ultimately involves an electrical interaction between
atoms or molecules.
If we increase the magnitude of F, as shown in Figure 5.17b, the magnitude of
fs increases along with it, keeping the book in place. The force fs cannot increase
indenitely, however. Eventually the surfaces in contact can no longer supply sufcient frictional force to counteract F, and the book accelerates. When it is on the
verge of moving, fs is a maximum, as shown in Figure 5.17c. When F exceeds fs,max ,
the book accelerates to the right. Once the book is in motion, the retarding frictional force becomes less than fs,max (see Fig. 5.17c). When the book is in motion,
we call the retarding force the force of kinetic friction fk . If F fk , then the
book moves to the right with constant speed. If F fk , then there is an unbalanced
force F fk in the positive x direction, and this force accelerates the book to the
right. If the applied force F is removed, then the frictional force fk acting to the
left accelerates the book in the negative x direction and eventually brings it to rest.
Experimentally, we nd that, to a good approximation, both fs,max and fk are
proportional to the normal force acting on the book. The following empirical laws
of friction summarize the experimental observations:
Force of static friction
Force of kinetic friction
132
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
n
n
F
F
fs
Motion
fk
mg
mg
(a)
(b)
|f|
fs, max
fs
=F
fk = µkn
0
F
Kinetic region
Static region
(c)
Figure 5.17 The direction of the force of friction f between a book and a rough surface is opposite the direction of the applied force F. Because the two surfaces are both rough, contact is
made only at a few points, as illustrated in the magnied view. (a) The magnitude of the force
of static friction equals the magnitude of the applied force. (b) When the magnitude of the applied force exceeds the magnitude of the force of kinetic friction, the book accelerates to the
right. (c) A graph of frictional force versus applied force. Note that fs,max fk .
The direction of the force of static friction between any two surfaces in contact with
each other is opposite the direction of relative motion and can have values
fs
sn
(5.8)
where the dimensionless constant s is called the coefcient of static friction
and n is the magnitude of the normal force. The equality in Equation 5.8 holds
when one object is on the verge of moving, that is, when fs fs,max
s n. The
inequality holds when the applied force is less than s n.
The direction of the force of kinetic friction acting on an object is opposite the
direction of the objects sliding motion relative to the surface applying the frictional force and is given by
(5.9)
fk
kn
is the coefcient of kinetic friction.
k and s depend on the nature of the surfaces, but k is generally
less than s . Typical values range from around 0.03 to 1.0. Table 5.2 lists some
reported values.
where
k
The values of
5.8
133
Forces of Friction
TABLE 5.2 Coefcients of Frictiona
s
Steel on steel
Aluminum on steel
Copper on steel
Rubber on concrete
Wood on wood
Glass on glass
Waxed wood on wet snow
Waxed wood on dry snow
Metal on metal (lubricated)
Ice on ice
Teon on Teon
Synovial joints in humans
0.74
0.61
0.53
1.0
0.25 0.5
0.94
0.14
0.15
0.1
0.04
0.01
k
0.57
0.47
0.36
0.8
0.2
0.4
0.1
0.04
0.06
0.03
0.04
0.003
a
All values are approximate. In some cases, the coefcient of friction can exceed 1.0.
The coefcients of friction are nearly independent of the area of contact be-
tween the surfaces. To understand why, we must examine the difference between the apparent contact area, which is the area we see with our eyes, and the
real contact area, represented by two irregular surfaces touching, as shown in the
magnied view in Figure 5.17a. It seems that increasing the apparent contact
area does not increase the real contact area. When we increase the apparent
area (without changing anything else), there is less force per unit area driving
the jagged points together. This decrease in force counteracts the effect of having more points involved.
Although the coefcient of kinetic friction can vary with speed, we shall usually neglect any such variations in this text. We can easily demonstrate the approximate nature of the equations by trying to get a block to slip down an incline at
constant speed. Especially at low speeds, the motion is likely to be characterized by
alternate episodes of sticking and movement.
Quick Quiz 5.6
A crate is sitting in the center of a atbed truck. The truck accelerates to the right, and the
crate moves with it, not sliding at all. What is the direction of the frictional force exerted by
the truck on the crate? (a) To the left. (b) To the right. (c) No frictional force because the
crate is not sliding.
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 5.11
If you would like to learn more
about this subject, read the article
Friction at the Atomic Scale by J.
Krim in the October 1996 issue of
Scientic American.
QuickLab
Can you apply the ideas of Example
5.12 to determine the coefcients of
static and kinetic friction between the
cover of your book and a quarter?
What should happen to those coefcients if you make the measurements
between your book and two quarters
taped one on top of the other?
Why Does the Sled Accelerate?
A horse pulls a sled along a level, snow-covered road, causing
the sled to accelerate, as shown in Figure 5.18a. Newtons
third law states that the sled exerts an equal and opposite
force on the horse. In view of this, how can the sled accelerate? Under what condition does the system (horse plus sled)
move with constant velocity?
Solution It is important to remember that the forces described in Newtons third law act on different objects the
horse exerts a force on the sled, and the sled exerts an equalmagnitude and oppositely directed force on the horse. Because we are interested only in the motion of the sled, we do
not consider the forces it exerts on the horse. When deter-
134
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
T
T
fsled
fhorse
(b)
(a)
(c)
Figure 5.18
mining the motion of an object, you must add only the forces
on that object. The horizontal forces exerted on the sled are
the forward force T exerted by the horse and the backward
force of friction fsled between sled and snow (see Fig. 5.18b).
When the forward force exceeds the backward force, the sled
accelerates to the right.
The force that accelerates the system (horse plus sled) is
the frictional force fhorse exerted by the Earth on the horses
feet. The horizontal forces exerted on the horse are the forward force fhorse exerted by the Earth and the backward tension force T exerted by the sled (Fig. 5.18c). The resultant of
EXAMPLE 5.12
Experimental Determination of
s
these two forces causes the horse to accelerate. When fhorse
balances fsled , the system moves with constant velocity.
Exercise
Are the normal force exerted by the snow on the
horse and the gravitational force exerted by the Earth on the
horse a third-law pair?
Answer No, because they act on the same object. Third-law
force pairs are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction,
and the forces act on different objects.
and
k
The following is a simple method of measuring coefcients of
friction: Suppose a block is placed on a rough surface inclined relative to the horizontal, as shown in Figure 5.19. The
incline angle is increased until the block starts to move. Let
us show that by measuring the critical angle c at which this
slipping just occurs, we can obtain s .
of slipping but has not yet moved. When we take x to be parallel to the plane and y perpendicular to it, Newtons second
law applied to the block for this balanced situation gives
Solution
We can eliminate mg by substituting mg
(2) into (1) to get
The only forces acting on the block are the force
of gravity m g, the normal force n, and the force of static friction fs . These forces balance when the block is on the verge
Static case:
fs
n
mg sin θ
θ
mg
Fy
n
n
mg sin
cos
θ
Figure 5.19 The external forces exerted on a block lying on a
rough incline are the force of gravity m g , the normal force n, and
the force of friction f. For convenience, the force of gravity is resolved into a component along the incline mg sin and a component
perpendicular to the incline mg cos .
n tan
sn
x
Static case:
mg cos θ
mg sin
mg cos
sin
ma x
0
ma y
fs
0
n/cos
from
n tan
When the incline is at the critical angle c , we know that fs
fs,max
s n, and so at this angle, (3) becomes
y
f
Fx
(2)
(3)
(1)
tan
s
c
c
For example, if the block just slips at c 20°, then we nd
that s tan 20° 0.364.
Once the block starts to move at
c , it accelerates
down the incline and the force of friction is fk
k n. However, if is reduced to a value less than c , it may be possible
to nd an angle c such that the block moves down the incline with constant speed (ax 0). In this case, using (1) and
(2) with fs replaced by fk gives
Kinetic case:
where
c
c.
k
tan
c
5.8
EXAMPLE 5.13
The Sliding Hockey Puck
A hockey puck on a frozen pond is given an initial speed of
20.0 m/s. If the puck always remains on the ice and slides
115 m before coming to rest, determine the coefcient of kinetic friction between the puck and ice.
Solution The forces acting on the puck after it is in motion are shown in Figure 5.20. If we assume that the force of
kinetic friction fk remains constant, then this force produces
a uniform acceleration of the puck in the direction opposite
its velocity, causing the puck to slow down. First, we nd this
acceleration in terms of the coefcient of kinetic friction, using Newtons second law. Knowing the acceleration of the
puck and the distance it travels, we can then use the equations of kinematics to nd the coefcient of kinetic friction.
n
Motion
Dening rightward and upward as our positive directions,
we apply Newtons second law in component form to the
puck and obtain
(1)
Fx
(2)
Fy
n
ma x
mg
0
kn
(a y
kmg
ax
0)
mg. Therefore,
ma x
kg
The negative sign means the acceleration is to the left; this
means that the puck is slowing down. The acceleration is independent of the mass of the puck and is constant because
we assume that k remains constant.
Because the acceleration is constant, we can use Equation
2.12, v xf 2 v xi2 2a x(x f x i), with xi 0 and vxf 0:
2ax f
v xi2
2
k gx f
0
2
k
mg
Figure 5.20 After the puck is given an initial velocity to the right,
the only external forces acting on it are the force of gravity m g , the
normal force n, and the force of kinetic friction fk .
Note that
k
v xi
2gx f
k
fk
(20.0 m/s)2
2(9.80 m/s2)(115 m)
0.177
is dimensionless.
Acceleration of Two Connected Objects When Friction Is Present
A block of mass m1 on a rough, horizontal surface is connected to a ball of mass m 2 by a lightweight cord over a lightweight, frictionless pulley, as shown in Figure 5.21a. A force
of magnitude F at an angle with the horizontal is applied to
the block as shown. The coefcient of kinetic friction between the block and surface is k . Determine the magnitude
of the acceleration of the two objects.
Solution
fk
But fk
k n, and from (2) we see that n
(1) becomes
v xi2
EXAMPLE 5.14
135
Forces of Friction
We start by drawing free-body diagrams for the
two objects, as shown in Figures 5.21b and 5.21c. (Are you beginning to see the similarities in all these examples?) Next,
we apply Newtons second law in component form to each
object and use Equation 5.9, f k
kn. Then we can solve for
the acceleration in terms of the parameters given.
The applied force F has x and y components F cos and
F sin , respectively. Applying Newtons second law to both
objects and assuming the motion of the block is to the right,
we obtain
Motion of block:
(1)
Fx
F cos
fk
T
m 1a x
m 1a
(2)
Fy
n
F sin
m 1a y
m 2a x
0
Fy
(3)
0
Fx
Motion of ball:
T
m 1g
m 2g
m 2a y
m 2a
Note that because the two objects are connected, we can
equate the magnitudes of the x component of the acceleration of the block and the y component of the acceleration of
the ball. From Equation 5.9 we know that fk
k n, and from
(2) we know that n m1 g F sin (note that in this case n is
not equal to m1 g); therefore,
(4)
fk
k(m 1g
F sin )
That is, the frictional force is reduced because of the positive
136
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
y component of F. Substituting (4) and the value of T from
(3) into (1) gives
k(m 1g
F cos
F sin )
m 2(a
g)
m 1a
Solving for a, we obtain
(5)
a
F(cos
sin ) g(m 2
m1 m2
k
Note that the acceleration of the block can be either to
the right or to the left,6 depending on the sign of the numerator in (5). If the motion is to the left, then we must reverse
the sign of fk in (1) because the force of kinetic friction must
oppose the motion. In this case, the value of a is the same as
in (5), with k replaced by
k.
km 1)
y
n
a
m1
F
θ
F sin θ
F
x
T
θ
T
F cos θ
fk
m2
a
m 2g
m2
(a)
(b)
m 1g
(c)
Figure 5.21
(a) The external force F applied as shown can cause the block to accelerate to the right.
(b) and (c) The free-body diagrams, under the assumption that the block accelerates to the right and the
ball accelerates upward. The magnitude of the force of kinetic friction in this case is given by
fk
F sin ).
kn
k(m1g
APPLICATION
Automobile Antilock Braking Systems (ABS)
If an automobile tire is rolling and not slipping on a road surface, then the maximum frictional force that the road can exert on the tire is the force of static friction s n . One must use
static friction in this situation because at the point of contact
between the tire and the road, no sliding of one surface over
the other occurs if the tire is not skidding. However, if the
tire starts to skid, the frictional force exerted on it is reduced
to the force of kinetic friction k n . Thus, to maximize the
frictional force and minimize stopping distance, the wheels
must maintain pure rolling motion and not skid. An additional benet of maintaining wheel rotation is that directional control is not lost as it is in skidding.
Unfortunately, in emergency situations drivers typically
press down as hard as they can on the brake pedal, locking
the brakes. This stops the wheels from rotating, ensuring a
skid and reducing the frictional force from the static to the
kinetic case. To address this problem, automotive engineers
6 Equation 5 shows that when
a given angle .
7
have developed antilock braking systems (ABS) that very
briey release the brakes when a wheel is just about to stop
turning. This maintains rolling contact between the tire and
the pavement. When the brakes are released momentarily,
the stopping distance is greater than it would be if the brakes
were being applied continuously. However, through the use
of computer control, the brake-off time is kept to a minimum. As a result, the stopping distance is much less than
what it would be if the wheels were to skid.
Let us model the stopping of a car by examining real data.
In a recent issue of AutoWeek,7 the braking performance for a
Toyota Corolla was measured. These data correspond to the
braking force acquired by a highly trained, professional driver. We begin by assuming constant acceleration. (Why do we
need to make this assumption?) The magazine provided the
initial speed and stopping distance in non-SI units. After converting these values to SI we use v xf 2 v xi2 2a x x to deterkm 1
AutoWeek magazine, 48:22 23, 1998.
m 2 , there is a range of values of F for which no motion occurs at
137
Summary
mine the acceleration at different speeds. These do not vary
greatly, and so our assumption of constant acceleration is reasonable.
Initial Speed
Stopping Distance
Initial Speed
(mi/h)
Stopping Distance
no skid (m)
Stopping distance
skidding (m)
30
60
80
10.4
43.6
76.5
13.9
55.5
98.9
Acceleration
(mi/h)
(m/s)
(ft)
(m)
(m/s2)
30
60
80
13.4
26.8
35.8
34
143
251
10.4
43.6
76.5
8.67
8.25
8.36
We take an average value of acceleration of 8.4 m/s2,
which is approximately 0.86g. We then calculate the coefcient of friction from F
ma; this gives s 0.86 for
s mg
the Toyota. This is lower than the rubber-to-concrete value
given in Table 5.2. Can you think of any reasons for this?
Let us now estimate the stopping distance of the car if the
wheels were skidding. Examining Table 5.2 again, we see that
the difference between the coefcients of static and kinetic
friction for rubber against concrete is about 0.2. Let us therefore assume that our coefcients differ by the same amount,
so that k 0.66. This allows us to calculate estimated stopping distances for the case in which the wheels are locked
and the car skids across the pavement. The results illustrate
the advantage of not allowing the wheels to skid.
An ABS keeps the wheels rotating, with the result that the
higher coefcient of static friction is maintained between the
tires and road. This approximates the technique of a professional driver who is able to maintain the wheels at the point
of maximum frictional force. Let us estimate the ABS performance by assuming that the magnitude of the acceleration is
not quite as good as that achieved by the professional driver
but instead is reduced by 5%.
We now plot in Figure 5.22 vehicle speed versus distance
from where the brakes were applied (at an initial speed of
80 mi/h 37.5 m/s) for the three cases of amateur driver,
professional driver, and estimated ABS performance (amateur driver). We nd that a markedly shorter distance is necessary for stopping without locking the wheels and skidding
and a satisfactory value of stopping distance when the ABS
computer maintains tire rotation.
The purpose of the ABS is to help typical drivers (whose tendency is to lock the wheels in an emergency) to better maintain
control of their automobiles and minimize stopping distance.
Speed (m/s)
40
Amateur driver
Professional driver
ABS, amateur driver
20
0
0
50
100
Distance from point
of application of brakes (m)
Figure 5.22 This plot of vehicle speed versus distance
from where the brakes were applied shows that an antilock
braking system (ABS) approaches the performance of a
trained professional driver.
SUMMARY
Newtons rst law states that, in the absence of an external force, a body at rest
remains at rest and a body in uniform motion in a straight line maintains that motion. An inertial frame is one that is not accelerating.
Newtons second law states that the acceleration of an object is directly proportional to the net force acting on it and inversely proportional to its mass. The
net force acting on an object equals the product of its mass and its acceleration:
F m a. You should be able to apply the x and y component forms of this equation to describe the acceleration of any object acting under the inuence of speci-
138
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
n
F
m
f
Fg
A block pulled to the right on a
rough horizontal surface
F
n
m
f
θ
Fg
A block pulled up a rough incline
n1
F
F
m1
n2
m1
P
m2
P
m2
Fg 2
Fg 1
Two blocks in contact, pushed to the
right on a frictionless surface
Note: P = P because they are an actionreaction pair
.
T
n
m1
T
m1
m2
f
m2
Fg 1
Fg 2
Two masses connected by a light cord. The
surface is rough, and the pulley is frictionless.
Figure 5.23
Various systems (left) and the corresponding free-body diagrams (right).
Questions
139
ed forces. If the object is either stationary or moving with constant velocity, then
the forces must vectorially cancel each other.
The force of gravity exerted on an object is equal to the product of its mass
(a scalar quantity) and the free-fall acceleration: Fg m g. The weight of an object is the magnitude of the force of gravity acting on the object.
Newtons third law states that if two objects interact, then the force exerted by
object 1 on object 2 is equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to the force exerted by object 2 on object 1. Thus, an isolated force cannot exist in nature. Make
sure you can identify third-law pairs and the two objects upon which they act.
The maximum force of static friction fs,max between an object and a surface
is proportional to the normal force acting on the object. In general, fs
s n,
where s is the coefcient of static friction and n is the magnitude of the normal
force. When an object slides over a surface, the direction of the force of kinetic
friction fk is opposite the direction of sliding motion and is also proportional to
the magnitude of the normal force. The magnitude of this force is given by fk
k n, where k is the coefcient of kinetic friction.
More on Free-Body Diagrams
To be successful in applying Newtons second law to a system, you must be able to
recognize all the forces acting on the system. That is, you must be able to construct
the correct free-body diagram. The importance of constructing the free-body diagram cannot be overemphasized. In Figure 5.23 a number of systems are presented together with their free-body diagrams. You should examine these carefully
and then construct free-body diagrams for other systems described in the end-ofchapter problems. When a system contains more than one element, it is important
that you construct a separate free-body diagram for each element.
As usual, F denotes some applied force, Fg m g is the force of gravity, n denotes a normal force, f is the force of friction, and T is the force whose magnitude
is the tension exerted on an object.
QUESTIONS
1. A passenger sitting in the rear of a bus claims that he was
injured when the driver slammed on the brakes, causing
a suitcase to come ying toward the passenger from the
front of the bus. If you were the judge in this case, what
disposition would you make? Why?
2. A space explorer is in a spaceship moving through space
far from any planet or star. She notices a large rock, taken
as a specimen from an alien planet, oating around the
cabin of the spaceship. Should she push it gently toward a
storage compartment or kick it toward the compartment?
Why?
3. A massive metal object on a rough metal surface may undergo contact welding to that surface. Discuss how this affects the frictional force between object and surface.
4. The observer in the elevator of Example 5.8 would claim
that the weight of the sh is T, the scale reading. This
claim is obviously wrong. Why does this observation differ
from that of a person in an inertial frame outside the
elevator?
5. Identify the action reaction pairs in the following situa-
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
tions: a man takes a step; a snowball hits a woman in the
back; a baseball player catches a ball; a gust of wind
strikes a window.
A ball is held in a persons hand. (a) Identify all the external forces acting on the ball and the reaction to each.
(b) If the ball is dropped, what force is exerted on it
while it is falling? Identify the reaction force in this case.
(Neglect air resistance.)
If a car is traveling westward with a constant speed of
20 m/s, what is the resultant force acting on it?
When the locomotive in Figure 5.3 broke through the
wall of the train station, the force exerted by the locomotive on the wall was greater than the force the wall could
exert on the locomotive. Is this statement true or in
need of correction? Explain your answer.
A rubber ball is dropped onto the oor. What force
causes the ball to bounce?
What is wrong with the statement, Because the car is at
rest, no forces are acting on it? How would you correct
this statement?
140
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
11. Suppose you are driving a car along a highway at a high
speed. Why should you avoid slamming on your brakes if
you want to stop in the shortest distance? That is, why
should you keep the wheels turning as you brake?
12. If you have ever taken a ride in an elevator of a high-rise
building, you may have experienced a nauseating sensation of heaviness and lightness depending on the direction of the acceleration. Explain these sensations. Are
we truly weightless in free-fall?
13. The driver of a speeding empty truck slams on the brakes
and skids to a stop through a distance d. (a) If the truck
carried a heavy load such that its mass were doubled,
what would be its skidding distance? (b) If the initial
speed of the truck is halved, what would be its skidding
distance?
14. In an attempt to dene Newtons third law, a student states
that the action and reaction forces are equal in magnitude
and opposite in direction to each other. If this is the case,
how can there ever be a net force on an object?
15. What force causes (a) a propeller-driven airplane to
move? (b) a rocket? (c) a person walking?
16. Suppose a large and spirited Freshman team is beating
the Sophomores in a tug-of-war contest. The center of the
17.
18.
19.
20.
rope being tugged is gradually accelerating toward the
Freshman team. State the relationship between the
strengths of these two forces: First, the force the Freshmen exert on the Sophomores; and second, the force the
Sophomores exert on the Freshmen.
If you push on a heavy box that is at rest, you must exert
some force to start its motion. However, once the box is
sliding, you can apply a smaller force to maintain that
motion. Why?
A weight lifter stands on a bathroom scale. He pumps a
barbell up and down. What happens to the reading on
the scale as this is done? Suppose he is strong enough to
actually throw the barbell upward. How does the reading
on the scale vary now?
As a rocket is red from a launching pad, its speed and
acceleration increase with time as its engines continue to
operate. Explain why this occurs even though the force of
the engines exerted on the rocket remains constant.
In the motion picture It Happened One Night (Columbia
Pictures, 1934), Clark Gable is standing inside a stationary bus in front of Claudette Colbert, who is seated. The
bus suddenly starts moving forward, and Clark falls into
Claudettes lap. Why did this happen?
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
Sections 5.1 through 5.6
1. A force F applied to an object of mass m1 produces an
acceleration of 3.00 m/s2. The same force applied to a
second object of mass m 2 produces an acceleration of
1.00 m/s2. (a) What is the value of the ratio m1 /m 2 ?
(b) If m1 and m 2 are combined, nd their acceleration
under the action of the force F.
2. A force of 10.0 N acts on a body of mass 2.00 kg. What
are (a) the bodys acceleration, (b) its weight in newtons, and (c) its acceleration if the force is doubled?
3. A 3.00-kg mass undergoes an acceleration given by a
(2.00i 5.00j) m/s2. Find the resultant force F and
its magnitude.
4. A heavy freight train has a mass of 15 000 metric tons.
If the locomotive can pull with a force of 750 000 N,
how long does it take to increase the speed from 0 to
80.0 km/h?
5. A 5.00-g bullet leaves the muzzle of a rie with a speed
of 320 m/s. The expanding gases behind it exert what
force on the bullet while it is traveling down the barrel
of the rie, 0.820 m long? Assume constant acceleration
and negligible friction.
6. After uniformly accelerating his arm for 0.090 0 s, a
pitcher releases a baseball of weight 1.40 N with a veloc-
ity of 32.0 m/s horizontally forward. If the ball starts
from rest, (a) through what distance does the ball accelerate before its release? (b) What force does the pitcher
exert on the ball?
7. After uniformly accelerating his arm for a time t, a
pitcher releases a baseball of weight Fg j with a velocity v i. If the ball starts from rest, (a) through what distance does the ball accelerate before its release?
(b) What force does the pitcher exert on the ball?
8. Dene one pound as the weight of an object of mass
0.453 592 37 kg at a location where the acceleration
due to gravity is 32.174 0 ft/s2. Express the pound as
one quantity with one SI unit.
WEB 9. A 4.00-kg object has a velocity of 3.00i m/s at one instant. Eight seconds later, its velocity has increased to
(8.00i 10.0j) m/s. Assuming the object was subject to
a constant total force, nd (a) the components of the
force and (b) its magnitude.
10. The average speed of a nitrogen molecule in air is
about 6.70 102 m/s, and its mass is 4.68 10 26 kg.
(a) If it takes 3.00 10 13 s for a nitrogen molecule to
hit a wall and rebound with the same speed but moving
in the opposite direction, what is the average acceleration of the molecule during this time interval? (b) What
average force does the molecule exert on the wall?
141
Problems
11. An electron of mass 9.11 10 31 kg has an initial speed
of 3.00 105 m/s. It travels in a straight line, and its
speed increases to 7.00 105 m/s in a distance of
5.00 cm. Assuming its acceleration is constant, (a) determine the force exerted on the electron and (b) compare this force with the weight of the electron, which we
neglected.
12. A woman weighs 120 lb. Determine (a) her weight in
newtons and (b) her mass in kilograms.
13. If a man weighs 900 N on the Earth, what would he
weigh on Jupiter, where the acceleration due to gravity
is 25.9 m/s2?
14. The distinction between mass and weight was discovered after Jean Richer transported pendulum clocks
from Paris to French Guiana in 1671. He found that
they ran slower there quite systematically. The effect was
reversed when the clocks returned to Paris. How much
weight would you personally lose in traveling from
Paris, where g 9.809 5 m/s2, to Cayenne, where g
9.780 8 m/s2 ? (We shall consider how the free-fall acceleration inuences the period of a pendulum in Section
13.4.)
15. Two forces F1 and F2 act on a 5.00-kg mass. If F1
20.0 N and F2 15.0 N, nd the accelerations in
(a) and (b) of Figure P5.15.
F2
F2
90.0°
60.0°
F1
m
F1
m
(a)
(b)
Figure P5.15
16. Besides its weight, a 2.80-kg object is subjected to one
other constant force. The object starts from rest and in
1.20 s experiences a displacement of (4.20 m)i
(3.30 m)j, where the direction of j is the upward vertical
direction. Determine the other force.
17. You stand on the seat of a chair and then hop off.
(a) During the time you are in ight down to the oor,
the Earth is lurching up toward you with an acceleration of what order of magnitude? In your solution explain your logic. Visualize the Earth as a perfectly solid
object. (b) The Earth moves up through a distance of
what order of magnitude?
18. Forces of 10.0 N north, 20.0 N east, and 15.0 N south
are simultaneously applied to a 4.00-kg mass as it rests
on an air table. Obtain the objects acceleration.
19. A boat moves through the water with two horizontal
forces acting on it. One is a 2000-N forward push
caused by the motor; the other is a constant 1800-N resistive force caused by the water. (a) What is the acceler-
ation of the 1 000-kg boat? (b) If it starts from rest, how
far will it move in 10.0 s? (c) What will be its speed at
the end of this time?
20. Three forces, given by F1 ( 2.00i 2.00j) N, F2
(5.00i 3.00j) N, and F3 ( 45.0i) N, act on an object to give it an acceleration of magnitude 3.75 m/s2.
(a) What is the direction of the acceleration? (b) What
is the mass of the object? (c) If the object is initially at
rest, what is its speed after 10.0 s? (d) What are the velocity components of the object after 10.0 s?
21. A 15.0-lb block rests on the oor. (a) What force does
the oor exert on the block? (b) If a rope is tied to the
block and run vertically over a pulley, and the other end
is attached to a free-hanging 10.0-lb weight, what is the
force exerted by the oor on the 15.0-lb block? (c) If we
replace the 10.0-lb weight in part (b) with a 20.0-lb
weight, what is the force exerted by the oor on the
15.0-lb block?
Section 5.7
Some Applications of Newtons Laws
22. A 3.00-kg mass is moving in a plane, with its x and y coordinates given by x 5 t 2 1 and y 3 t 3 2, where
x and y are in meters and t is in seconds. Find the magnitude of the net force acting on this mass at t 2.00 s.
23. The distance between two telephone poles is 50.0 m.
When a 1.00-kg bird lands on the telephone wire midway between the poles, the wire sags 0.200 m. Draw a
free-body diagram of the bird. How much tension does
the bird produce in the wire? Ignore the weight of the
wire.
24. A bag of cement of weight 325 N hangs from three
wires as shown in Figure P5.24. Two of the wires make
angles 1 60.0° and 2 25.0° with the horizontal. If
the system is in equilibrium, nd the tensions T1 , T2 ,
and T3 in the wires.
θ1
θ2
T1
T2
T3
Figure P5.24
Problems 24 and 25.
142
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
25. A bag of cement of weight Fg hangs from three wires as
shown in Figure P5.24. Two of the wires make angles 1
and 2 with the horizontal. If the system is in equilibrium, show that the tension in the left-hand wire is
T1
Fg cos
2/sin( 1
2)
5.00 kg
26. You are a judge in a childrens kite-ying contest, and
two children will win prizes for the kites that pull most
strongly and least strongly on their strings. To measure
string tensions, you borrow a weight hanger, some slotted weights, and a protractor from your physics teacher
and use the following protocol, illustrated in Figure
P5.26: Wait for a child to get her kite well-controlled,
hook the hanger onto the kite string about 30 cm from
her hand, pile on weights until that section of string is
horizontal, record the mass required, and record the
angle between the horizontal and the string running up
to the kite. (a) Explain how this method works. As you
construct your explanation, imagine that the childrens
parents ask you about your method, that they might
make false assumptions about your ability without concrete evidence, and that your explanation is an opportunity to give them condence in your evaluation technique. (b) Find the string tension if the mass required
to make the string horizontal is 132 g and the angle of
the kite string is 46.3°.
5.00 kg
(a)
5.00 kg
30.0°
5.00 kg
5.00 kg
(c)
(b)
Figure P5.27
WEB
turns to the re at the same speed with the bucket now
making an angle of 7.00° with the vertical. What is the
mass of the water in the bucket?
29. A 1.00-kg mass is observed to accelerate at 10.0 m/s2 in
a direction 30.0° north of east (Fig. P5.29). The force
F2 acting on the mass has a magnitude of 5.00 N and is
directed north. Determine the magnitude and direction
of the force F1 acting on the mass.
s2
F2
a=
Figure P5.26
27. The systems shown in Figure P5.27 are in equilibrium.
If the spring scales are calibrated in newtons, what do
they read? (Neglect the masses of the pulleys and
strings, and assume the incline is frictionless.)
28. A re helicopter carries a 620-kg bucket of water at the
end of a cable 20.0 m long. As the aircraft ies back
from a re at a constant speed of 40.0 m/s, the cable
makes an angle of 40.0° with respect to the vertical.
(a) Determine the force of air resistance on the bucket.
(b) After lling the bucket with sea water, the pilot re-
1.00 kg
/
0m
.
10
30.0°
F1
Figure P5.29
30. A simple accelerometer is constructed by suspending a
mass m from a string of length L that is tied to the top
of a cart. As the cart is accelerated the string-mass system makes a constant angle with the vertical.
(a) Assuming that the string mass is negligible compared with m, derive an expression for the carts acceleration in terms of and show that it is independent of
143
Problems
the mass m and the length L . (b) Determine the acceleration of the cart when
23.0°.
31. Two people pull as hard as they can on ropes attached
to a boat that has a mass of 200 kg. If they pull in the
same direction, the boat has an acceleration of
1.52 m/s2 to the right. If they pull in opposite directions, the boat has an acceleration of 0.518 m/s2 to the
left. What is the force exerted by each person on the
boat? (Disregard any other forces on the boat.)
32. Draw a free-body diagram for a block that slides down a
frictionless plane having an inclination of
15.0°
(Fig. P5.32). If the block starts from rest at the top and
the length of the incline is 2.00 m, nd (a) the acceleration of the block and (b) its speed when it reaches the
bottom of the incline.
θ
Figure P5.32
35. Two masses m1 and m 2 situated on a frictionless, horizontal surface are connected by a light string. A force F
is exerted on one of the masses to the right (Fig.
P5.35). Determine the acceleration of the system and
the tension T in the string.
T
m1
Figure P5.35
m2
F
Problems 35 and 51.
36. Two masses of 3.00 kg and 5.00 kg are connected by a
light string that passes over a frictionless pulley, as was
shown in Figure 5.15a. Determine (a) the tension in the
string, (b) the acceleration of each mass, and (c) the
distance each mass will move in the rst second of motion if they start from rest.
37. In the system shown in Figure P5.37, a horizontal force
Fx acts on the 8.00-kg mass. The horizontal surface is
frictionless.(a) For what values of Fx does the 2.00-kg
mass accelerate upward? (b) For what values of Fx is the
tension in the cord zero? (c) Plot the acceleration of
the 8.00-kg mass versus Fx . Include values of Fx from
100 N to 100 N.
ax
WEB
33. A block is given an initial velocity of 5.00 m/s up a frictionless 20.0° incline. How far up the incline does the
block slide before coming to rest?
34. Two masses are connected by a light string that passes
over a frictionless pulley, as in Figure P5.34. If the incline is frictionless and if m1 2.00 kg, m 2 6.00 kg,
and
55.0°, nd (a) the accelerations of the masses,
(b) the tension in the string, and (c) the speed of each
mass 2.00 s after being released from rest.
8.00
kg
Fx
2.00
kg
Figure P5.37
38. Mass m1 on a frictionless horizontal table is connected
to mass m 2 by means of a very light pulley P1 and a light
xed pulley P2 as shown in Figure P5.38. (a) If a1 and a2
m1
P1
m2
m2
θ
Figure P5.34
P2
m1
Figure P5.38
144
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
are the accelerations of m1 and m 2 , respectively, what is
the relationship between these accelerations? Express
(b) the tensions in the strings and (c) the accelerations
a1 and a2 in terms of the masses m1 and m 2 and g.
39. A 72.0-kg man stands on a spring scale in an elevator.
Starting from rest, the elevator ascends, attaining its
maximum speed of 1.20 m/s in 0.800 s. It travels with
this constant speed for the next 5.00 s. The elevator
then undergoes a uniform acceleration in the negative
y direction for 1.50 s and comes to rest. What does the
spring scale register (a) before the elevator starts to
move? (b) during the rst 0.800 s? (c) while the elevator is traveling at constant speed? (d) during the time it
is slowing down?
Section 5.8
WEB
θ
Forces of Friction
40. The coefcient of static friction is 0.800 between the
soles of a sprinters running shoes and the level track
surface on which she is running. Determine the maximum acceleration she can achieve. Do you need to
know that her mass is 60.0 kg?
41. A 25.0-kg block is initially at rest on a horizontal surface. A horizontal force of 75.0 N is required to set the
block in motion. After it is in motion, a horizontal force
of 60.0 N is required to keep the block moving with
constant speed. Find the coefcients of static and kinetic friction from this information.
42. A racing car accelerates uniformly from 0 to 80.0 mi/h
in 8.00 s. The external force that accelerates the car is
the frictional force between the tires and the road. If
the tires do not slip, determine the minimum coefcient of friction between the tires and the road.
43. A car is traveling at 50.0 mi/h on a horizontal highway.
(a) If the coefcient of friction between road and tires
on a rainy day is 0.100, what is the minimum distance in
which the car will stop? (b) What is the stopping distance when the surface is dry and s 0.600?
44. A woman at an airport is towing her 20.0-kg suitcase at
constant speed by pulling on a strap at an angle of
above the horizontal (Fig. P5.44). She pulls on the strap
with a 35.0-N force, and the frictional force on the suitcase is 20.0 N. Draw a free-body diagram for the suitcase. (a) What angle does the strap make with the horizontal? (b) What normal force does the ground exert
on the suitcase?
45. A 3.00-kg block starts from rest at the top of a 30.0° incline and slides a distance of 2.00 m down the incline in
1.50 s. Find (a) the magnitude of the acceleration of
the block, (b) the coefcient of kinetic friction between
block and plane, (c) the frictional force acting on the
block, and (d) the speed of the block after it has slid
2.00 m.
46. To determine the coefcients of friction between rubber and various surfaces, a student uses a rubber eraser
and an incline. In one experiment the eraser begins to
slip down the incline when the angle of inclination is
Figure P5.44
36.0° and then moves down the incline with constant
speed when the angle is reduced to 30.0°. From these
data, determine the coefcients of static and kinetic
friction for this experiment.
47. A boy drags his 60.0-N sled at constant speed up a 15.0°
hill. He does so by pulling with a 25.0-N force on a rope
attached to the sled. If the rope is inclined at 35.0° to
the horizontal, (a) what is the coefcient of kinetic friction between sled and snow? (b) At the top of the hill,
he jumps on the sled and slides down the hill. What is
the magnitude of his acceleration down the slope?
48. Determine the stopping distance for a skier moving
down a slope with friction with an initial speed of
20.0 m/s (Fig. P5.48). Assume k 0.180 and
5.00°.
n
f
x
mg
θ
Figure P5.48
49. A 9.00-kg hanging weight is connected by a string over a
pulley to a 5.00-kg block that is sliding on a at table
(Fig. P5.49). If the coefcient of kinetic friction is
0.200, nd the tension in the string.
50. Three blocks are connected on a table as shown in Figure P5.50. The table is rough and has a coefcient of ki-
145
Problems
5.00 kg
T
9.00 kg
Figure P5.49
M
x
1.00 kg
Figure P5.52
4.00 kg
2.00 kg
50.0°
P
Figure P5.53
Figure P5.50
netic friction of 0.350. The three masses are 4.00 kg,
1.00 kg, and 2.00 kg, and the pulleys are frictionless.
Draw a free-body diagram for each block. (a) Determine the magnitude and direction of the acceleration
of each block. (b) Determine the tensions in the two
cords.
51. Two blocks connected by a rope of negligible mass are
being dragged by a horizontal force F (see Fig. P5.35).
Suppose that F 68.0 N, m1 12.0 kg, m 2 18.0 kg,
and the coefcient of kinetic friction between each
block and the surface is 0.100. (a) Draw a free-body diagram for each block. (b) Determine the tension T and
the magnitude of the acceleration of the system.
52. A block of mass 2.20 kg is accelerated across a rough
surface by a rope passing over a pulley, as shown in Figure P5.52. The tension in the rope is 10.0 N, and the
pulley is 10.0 cm above the top of the block. The coefcient of kinetic friction is 0.400. (a) Determine the acceleration of the block when x 0.400 m. (b) Find the
value of x at which the acceleration becomes zero.
53. A block of mass 3.00 kg is pushed up against a wall by a
force P that makes a 50.0° angle with the horizontal as
shown in Figure P5.53. The coefcient of static friction
between the block and the wall is 0.250. Determine the
possible values for the magnitude of P that allow the
block to remain stationary.
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
54. A time-dependent force F (8.00i 4.00t j) N (where
t is in seconds) is applied to a 2.00-kg object initially at
rest. (a) At what time will the object be moving with a
speed of 15.0 m/s? (b) How far is the object from its
initial position when its speed is 15.0 m/s? (c) What is
the objects displacement at the time calculated in (a)?
55. An inventive child named Pat wants to reach an apple
in a tree without climbing the tree. Sitting in a chair
connected to a rope that passes over a frictionless pulley
(Fig. P5.55), Pat pulls on the loose end of the rope with
such a force that the spring scale reads 250 N. Pats
weight is 320 N, and the chair weighs 160 N. (a) Draw
free-body diagrams for Pat and the chair considered as
separate systems, and draw another diagram for Pat and
the chair considered as one system. (b) Show that the
acceleration of the system is upward and nd its magnitude. (c) Find the force Pat exerts on the chair.
56. Three blocks are in contact with each other on a frictionless, horizontal surface, as in Figure P5.56. A horizontal force F is applied to m1 . If m1 2.00 kg, m 2
3.00 kg, m 3 4.00 kg, and F 18.0 N, draw a separate
free-body diagram for each block and nd (a) the acceleration of the blocks, (b) the resultant force on each
block, and (c) the magnitudes of the contact forces between the blocks.
146
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
WEB
the system is in equilibrium, nd (e) the minimum
value of M and (f) the maximum value of M. (g) Compare the values of T2 when M has its minimum and
maximum values.
59. A mass M is held in place by an applied force F and a
pulley system as shown in Figure P5.59. The pulleys are
massless and frictionless. Find (a) the tension in each
section of rope, T1 , T2 , T3 , T4 , and T5 and (b) the magnitude of F. (Hint: Draw a free-body diagram for each
pulley.)
T4
Figure P5.55
T1
m1
F
m2
T2
T3
m3
T5
Figure P5.56
M
F
57. A high diver of mass 70.0 kg jumps off a board 10.0 m
above the water. If his downward motion is stopped
2.00 s after he enters the water, what average upward
force did the water exert on him?
58. Consider the three connected objects shown in Figure
P5.58. If the inclined plane is frictionless and the
system is in equilibrium, nd (in terms of m, g, and )
(a) the mass M and (b) the tensions T1 and T2 . If the
value of M is double the value found in part (a), nd
(c) the acceleration of each object, and (d) the tensions T1 and T2 . If the coefcient of static friction
between m and 2m and the inclined plane is s , and
T2
T1
m
2m
M
θ
Figure P5.59
60. Two forces, given by F1 ( 6.00i 4.00j) N and F2
( 3.00i 7.00j) N, act on a particle of mass 2.00 kg that
is initially at rest at coordinates ( 2.00 m, 4.00 m).
(a) What are the components of the particles velocity at
t 10.0 s? (b) In what direction is the particle moving at
t 10.0 s? (c) What displacement does the particle undergo during the rst 10.0 s? (d) What are the coordinates of the particle at t 10.0 s?
61. A crate of weight Fg is pushed by a force P on a horizontal oor. (a) If the coefcient of static friction is s and
P is directed at an angle below the horizontal, show
that the minimum value of P that will move the crate is
given by
P
Figure P5.58
s
Fg sec (1
s
tan )
1
(b) Find the minimum value of P that can produce mo-
147
Problems
tion when s 0.400, Fg 100 N, and
0°, 15.0°,
30.0°, 45.0°, and 60.0°.
62. Review Problem. A block of mass m 2.00 kg is released from rest h 0.500 m from the surface of a
table, at the top of a
30.0° incline as shown in Figure P5.62. The frictionless incline is xed on a table of
height H 2.00 m. (a) Determine the acceleration of
the block as it slides down the incline. (b) What is the
velocity of the block as it leaves the incline? (c) How far
from the table will the block hit the oor? (d) How
much time has elapsed between when the block is released and when it hits the oor? (e) Does the mass of
the block affect any of the above calculations?
65. A block of mass m 2.00 kg rests on the left edge of a
block of larger mass M 8.00 kg. The coefcient of kinetic friction between the two blocks is 0.300, and the
surface on which the 8.00-kg block rests is frictionless. A
constant horizontal force of magnitude F 10.0 N is applied to the 2.00-kg block, setting it in motion as shown
in Figure P5.65a. If the length L that the leading edge of
the smaller block travels on the larger block is 3.00 m,
(a) how long will it take before this block makes it to the
right side of the 8.00-kg block, as shown in Figure
P5.65b? (Note: Both blocks are set in motion when F is
applied.) (b) How far does the 8.00-kg block move in
the process?
L
m
F
m
M
h
θ
(a)
H
F
m
M
R
(b)
Figure P5.62
Figure P5.65
63. A 1.30-kg toaster is not plugged in. The coefcient of
static friction between the toaster and a horizontal
countertop is 0.350. To make the toaster start moving,
you carelessly pull on its electric cord. (a) For the cord
tension to be as small as possible, you should pull at
what angle above the horizontal? (b) With this angle,
how large must the tension be?
64. A 2.00-kg aluminum block and a 6.00-kg copper block
are connected by a light string over a frictionless pulley.
They sit on a steel surface, as shown in Figure P5.64,
and
30.0°. Do they start to move once any holding
mechanism is released? If so, determine (a) their acceleration and (b) the tension in the string. If not, determine the sum of the magnitudes of the forces of friction
acting on the blocks.
Aluminum
Copper
m1
m2
Steel
θ
Figure P5.64
66. A student is asked to measure the acceleration of a cart
on a frictionless inclined plane as seen in Figure
P5.32, using an air track, a stopwatch, and a meter stick.
The height of the incline is measured to be 1.774 cm,
and the total length of the incline is measured to be
d 127.1 cm. Hence, the angle of inclination is determined from the relation sin
1.774/127.1. The cart
is released from rest at the top of the incline, and its displacement x along the incline is measured versus time,
where x 0 refers to the initial position of the cart. For
x values of 10.0 cm, 20.0 cm, 35.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 75.0 cm,
and 100 cm, the measured times to undergo these displacements (averaged over ve runs) are 1.02 s, 1.53 s,
2.01 s, 2.64 s, 3.30 s, and 3.75 s, respectively. Construct a
graph of x versus t 2, and perform a linear least-squares
t to the data. Determine the acceleration of the cart
from the slope of this graph, and compare it with the
value you would get using a
g sin , where g
9.80 m/s2.
67. A 2.00-kg block is placed on top of a 5.00-kg block as in
Figure P5.67. The coefcient of kinetic friction between
the 5.00-kg block and the surface is 0.200. A horizontal
force F is applied to the 5.00-kg block. (a) Draw a freebody diagram for each block. What force accelerates
the 2.00-kg block? (b) Calculate the magnitude of the
force necessary to pull both blocks to the right with an
148
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
2.00
kg
5.00 kg
F
Figure P5.67
acceleration of 3.00 m/s2. (c) Find the minimum coefcient of static friction between the blocks such that the
2.00-kg block does not slip under an acceleration of
3.00 m/s2.
68. A 5.00-kg block is placed on top of a 10.0-kg block (Fig.
P5.68). A horizontal force of 45.0 N is applied to the
10.0-kg block, and the 5.00-kg block is tied to the wall.
The coefcient of kinetic friction between all surfaces is
0.200. (a) Draw a free-body diagram for each block and
identify the action reaction forces between the blocks.
(b) Determine the tension in the string and the magnitude of the acceleration of the 10.0-kg block.
5.00 kg
70. Initially the system of masses shown in Figure P5.69 is
held motionless. All surfaces, pulley, and wheels are frictionless. Let the force F be zero and assume that m 2 can
move only vertically. At the instant after the system of
masses is released, nd (a) the tension T in the string,
(b) the acceleration of m 2 , (c) the acceleration of M,
and (d) the acceleration of m1 . (Note: The pulley accelerates along with the cart.)
71. A block of mass 5.00 kg sits on top of a second block of
mass 15.0 kg, which in turn sits on a horizontal table.
The coefcients of friction between the two blocks are
0.300 and k 0.100. The coefcients of friction
s
between the lower block and the rough table are s
0.500 and k 0.400. You apply a constant horizontal
force to the lower block, just large enough to make this
block start sliding out from between the upper block
and the table. (a) Draw a free-body diagram of each
block, naming the forces acting on each. (b) Determine
the magnitude of each force on each block at the instant when you have started pushing but motion has not
yet started. (c) Determine the acceleration you measure
for each block.
72. Two blocks of mass 3.50 kg and 8.00 kg are connected
by a string of negligible mass that passes over a frictionless pulley (Fig. P5.72). The inclines are frictionless.
Find (a) the magnitude of the acceleration of each
block and (b) the tension in the string.
8.00 kg
3.50 kg
10.0 kg
F = 45.0 N
35.0°
Figure P5.72
35.0°
Problems 72 and 73.
Figure P5.68
69. What horizontal force must be applied to the cart
shown in Figure P5.69 so that the blocks remain stationary relative to the cart? Assume all surfaces, wheels, and
pulley are frictionless. (Hint: Note that the force exerted by the string accelerates m1 .)
m1
F
Figure P5.69
M
m2
Problems 69 and 70.
73. The system shown in Figure P5.72 has an acceleration
of magnitude 1.50 m/s2. Assume the coefcients of kinetic friction between block and incline are the same
for both inclines. Find (a) the coefcient of kinetic friction and (b) the tension in the string.
74. In Figure P5.74, a 500-kg horse pulls a sledge of mass
100 kg. The system (horse plus sledge) has a forward
acceleration of 1.00 m/s2 when the frictional force exerted on the sledge is 500 N. Find (a) the tension in the
connecting rope and (b) the magnitude and direction
of the force of friction exerted on the horse. (c) Verify
that the total forces of friction the ground exerts on the
system will give the system an acceleration of 1.00 m/s2.
75. A van accelerates down a hill (Fig. P5.75), going from
rest to 30.0 m/s in 6.00 s. During the acceleration, a toy
(m 0.100 kg) hangs by a string from the vans ceiling.
The acceleration is such that the string remains perpendicular to the ceiling. Determine (a) the angle and
(b) the tension in the string.
149
Answers to Quick Quizzes
100 kg
terms of 1 , that the sections of string between the outside butteries and the inside butteries form with the
horizontal. (c) Show that the distance D between the
end points of the string is
500 kg
D
L
5
2 cos
1
2 cos tan
1
1
tan
2
1
1
77. Before 1960 it was believed that the maximum attainable coefcient of static friction for an automobile tire
was less than 1. Then about 1962, three companies independently developed racing tires with coefcients of
1.6. Since then, tires have improved, as illustrated in
this problem. According to the 1990 Guinness Book of
Records, the fastest time in which a piston-engine car
initially at rest has covered a distance of one-quarter
mile is 4.96 s. This record was set by Shirley Muldowney
in September 1989 (Fig. P5.77). (a) Assuming that the
rear wheels nearly lifted the front wheels off the pavement, what minimum value of s is necessary to achieve
the record time? (b) Suppose Muldowney were able to
double her engine power, keeping other things equal.
How would this change affect the elapsed time?
Figure P5.74
θ
θ
Figure P5.75
76. A mobile is formed by supporting four metal butteries
of equal mass m from a string of length L . The points of
support are evenly spaced a distance apart as shown in
Figure P5.76. The string forms an angle 1 with the ceiling at each end point. The center section of string is
horizontal. (a) Find the tension in each section of
string in terms of 1 , m, and g. (b) Find the angle 2 , in
D
θ1
θ2
θ2
Figure P5.77
θ1
m
L=5
m
m
m
Figure P5.76
78. An 8.40-kg mass slides down a xed, frictionless inclined plane. Use a computer to determine and tabulate the normal force exerted on the mass and its acceleration for a series of incline angles (measured from
the horizontal) ranging from 0 to 90° in 5° increments.
Plot a graph of the normal force and the acceleration as
functions of the incline angle. In the limiting cases of 0
and 90°, are your results consistent with the known behavior?
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
5.1 (a) True. Newtons rst law tells us that motion requires
no force: An object in motion continues to move at constant velocity in the absence of external forces. (b) True.
A stationary object can have several forces acting on it,
but if the vector sum of all these external forces is zero,
there is no net force and the object remains stationary.
It also is possible to have a net force and no motion, but
only for an instant. A ball tossed vertically upward stops
at the peak of its path for an innitesimally short time,
but the force of gravity is still acting on it. Thus, al-
150
CHAPTER 5
The Laws of Motion
though v 0 at the peak, the net force acting on the
ball is not zero.
5.2 No. Direction of motion is part of an objects velocity,
and force determines the direction of acceleration, not
that of velocity.
5.3 (a) Force of gravity. (b) Force of gravity. The only external force acting on the ball at all points in its trajectory
is the downward force of gravity.
5.4 As the person steps out of the boat, he pushes against it
with his foot, expecting the boat to push back on him so
that he accelerates toward the dock. However, because
the boat is untied, the force exerted by the foot causes
the boat to scoot away from the dock. As a result, the
person is not able to exert a very large force on the boat
before it moves out of reach. Therefore, the boat does
not exert a very large reaction force on him, and he
ends up not being accelerated sufciently to make it to
the dock. Consequently, he falls into the water instead.
If a small dog were to jump from the untied boat toward
the dock, the force exerted by the boat on the dog
would probably be enough to ensure the dogs successful landing because of the dogs small mass.
5.5 (a) The same force is experienced by both. The y and
bus experience forces that are equal in magnitude but
opposite in direction. (b) The y. Because the y has
such a small mass, it undergoes a very large acceleration.
The huge mass of the bus means that it more effectively
resists any change in its motion.
5.6 (b) The crate accelerates to the right. Because the only
horizontal force acting on it is the force of static friction
between its bottom surface and the truck bed, that force
must also be directed to the right.
PUZZLER
This sky diver is falling at more than
50 m/s (120 mi/h), but once her parachute opens, her downward velocity will
be greatly reduced. Why does she slow
down rapidly when her chute opens, enabling her to fall safely to the ground? If
the chute does not function properly, the
sky diver will almost certainly be seriously injured. What force exerted on
her limits her maximum speed?
(Guy Savage/Photo Researchers, Inc.)
chapter
Circular Motion and Other
Applications of Newtons Laws
Chapter Outline
6.1 Newtons Second Law Applied to
Uniform Circular Motion
6.2 Nonuniform Circular Motion
6.3 (Optional) Motion in Accelerated
6.4 (Optional) Motion in the Presence
of Resistive Forces
6.5 (Optional) Numerical Modeling in
Particle Dynamics
Frames
151
152
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
I
n the preceding chapter we introduced Newtons laws of motion and applied
them to situations involving linear motion. Now we discuss motion that is
slightly more complicated. For example, we shall apply Newtons laws to objects
traveling in circular paths. Also, we shall discuss motion observed from an accelerating frame of reference and motion in a viscous medium. For the most part, this
chapter is a series of examples selected to illustrate the application of Newtons
laws to a wide variety of circumstances.
6.1
NEWTONS SECOND LAW APPLIED TO
UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
In Section 4.4 we found that a particle moving with uniform speed v in a circular
path of radius r experiences an acceleration ar that has a magnitude
v2
r
ar
4.7
The acceleration is called the centripetal acceleration because ar is directed toward
the center of the circle. Furthermore, ar is always perpendicular to v. (If there
were a component of acceleration parallel to v, the particles speed would be
changing.)
Consider a ball of mass m that is tied to a string of length r and is being
whirled at constant speed in a horizontal circular path, as illustrated in Figure 6.1.
Its weight is supported by a low-friction table. Why does the ball move in a circle?
Because of its inertia, the tendency of the ball is to move in a straight line; however, the string prevents motion along a straight line by exerting on the ball a
force that makes it follow the circular path. This force is directed along the string
toward the center of the circle, as shown in Figure 6.1. This force can be any one
of our familiar forces causing an object to follow a circular path.
If we apply Newtons second law along the radial direction, we nd that the
value of the net force causing the centripetal acceleration can be evaluated:
Force causing centripetal
acceleration
Fr
mar
m
v2
r
(6.1)
m
Fr
r
Fr
Figure 6.1 Overhead view of a ball moving
in a circular path in a horizontal plane. A
force Fr directed toward the center of the circle keeps the ball moving in its circular path.
6.1
Newtons Second Law Applied to Uniform Circular Motion
153
Figure 6.2 When the string breaks, the
ball moves in the direction tangent to the
circle.
r
A force causing a centripetal acceleration acts toward the center of the circular
path and causes a change in the direction of the velocity vector. If that force
should vanish, the object would no longer move in its circular path; instead, it
would move along a straight-line path tangent to the circle. This idea is illustrated
in Figure 6.2 for the ball whirling at the end of a string. If the string breaks at
some instant, the ball moves along the straight-line path tangent to the circle at
the point where the string broke.
Quick Quiz 6.1
Is it possible for a car to move in a circular path in such a way that it has a tangential acceleration but no centripetal acceleration?
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 6.1
An athlete in the process of throwing the hammer at the 1996
Olympic Games in Atlanta, Georgia. The force exerted by the chain
is the force causing the circular
motion. Only when the athlete releases the hammer will it move
along a straight-line path tangent to
the circle.
Forces That Cause Centripetal Acceleration
The force causing centripetal acceleration is sometimes
called a centripetal force. We are familiar with a variety of forces
in nature friction, gravity, normal forces, tension, and so
forth. Should we add centripetal force to this list?
Solution No; centripetal force should not be added to this
list. This is a pitfall for many students. Giving the force causing circular motion a name centripetal force leads many
students to consider it a new kind of force rather than a new
role for force. A common mistake in force diagrams is to draw
all the usual forces and then to add another vector for the
centripetal force. But it is not a separate force it is simply
one of our familiar forces acting in the role of a force that causes
a circular motion.
Consider some examples. For the motion of the Earth
around the Sun, the centripetal force is gravity. For an object
sitting on a rotating turntable, the centripetal force is friction.
For a rock whirled on the end of a string, the centripetal
force is the force of tension in the string. For an amusementpark patron pressed against the inner wall of a rapidly rotating circular room, the centripetal force is the normal force exerted by the wall. Whats more, the centripetal force could
be a combination of two or more forces. For example, as a
Ferris-wheel rider passes through the lowest point, the centripetal force on her is the difference between the normal
force exerted by the seat and her weight.
154
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Figure 6.3 A ball that had been moving in a circular path is acted on by various external forces
that change its path.
Quick Quiz 6.2
QuickLab
Tie a string to a tennis ball, swing it in
a circle, and then, while it is swinging,
let go of the string to verify your answer to the last part of Quick Quiz 6.2.
A ball is following the dotted circular path shown in Figure 6.3 under the inuence of a
force. At a certain instant of time, the force on the ball changes abruptly to a new force, and
the ball follows the paths indicated by the solid line with an arrowhead in each of the four
parts of the gure. For each part of the gure, describe the magnitude and direction of the
force required to make the ball move in the solid path. If the dotted line represents the
path of a ball being whirled on the end of a string, which path does the ball follow if
the string breaks?
Let us consider some examples of uniform circular motion. In each case, be
sure to recognize the external force (or forces) that causes the body to move in its
circular path.
EXAMPLE 6.2
How Fast Can It Spin?
A ball of mass 0.500 kg is attached to the end of a cord
1.50 m long. The ball is whirled in a horizontal circle as was
shown in Figure 6.1. If the cord can withstand a maximum
tension of 50.0 N, what is the maximum speed the ball can attain before the cord breaks? Assume that the string remains
horizontal during the motion.
Solution It is difcult to know what might be a reasonable
value for the answer. Nonetheless, we know that it cannot be
too large, say 100 m/s, because a person cannot make a ball
move so quickly. It makes sense that the stronger the cord,
the faster the ball can twirl before the cord breaks. Also, we
expect a more massive ball to break the cord at a lower
speed. (Imagine whirling a bowling ball!)
Because the force causing the centripetal acceleration in
this case is the force T exerted by the cord on the ball, Equation 6.1 yields for Fr mar
v2
Tm
r
EXAMPLE 6.3
Solving for v, we have
v
Tr
m
This shows that v increases with T and decreases with larger
m, as we expect to see for a given v, a large mass requires a
large tension and a small mass needs only a small tension.
The maximum speed the ball can have corresponds to the
maximum tension. Hence, we nd
vmax
Tmaxr
m
(50.0 N)(1.50 m)
0.500 kg
12.2 m/s
Exercise
Calculate the tension in the cord if the speed of
the ball is 5.00 m/s.
Answer
8.33 N.
The Conical Pendulum
A small object of mass m is suspended from a string of length
L . The object revolves with constant speed v in a horizontal
circle of radius r, as shown in Figure 6.4. (Because the string
sweeps out the surface of a cone, the system is known as a
conical pendulum.) Find an expression for v.
Solution
Let us choose to represent the angle between
string and vertical. In the free-body diagram shown in Figure
6.4, the force T exerted by the string is resolved into a vertical
component T cos and a horizontal component T sin acting toward the center of revolution. Because the object does
6.1
not accelerate in the vertical direction, Fy
may 0, and
the upward vertical component of T must balance the downward force of gravity. Therefore,
(1)
T cos
155
Newtons Second Law Applied to Uniform Circular Motion
Because the force providing the centripetal acceleration in
this example is the component T sin , we can use Newtons
second law and Equation 6.1 to obtain
mg
(2)
T sin
Fr
mv 2
r
ma r
Dividing (2) by (1) and remembering that sin
tan , we eliminate T and nd that
Lθ
T cos θ
r
Figure 6.4
v
T sin θ
mg
The conical pendulum and its free-body diagram.
rg tan
From the geometry in Figure 6.4, we note that r
therefore,
v
mg
EXAMPLE 6.4
v2
rg
tan
θ
T
/cos
Lg sin
L sin ;
tan
Note that the speed is independent of the mass of the object.
What Is the Maximum Speed of the Car?
A 1 500-kg car moving on a at, horizontal road negotiates a
curve, as illustrated in Figure 6.5. If the radius of the curve is
35.0 m and the coefcient of static friction between the tires
and dry pavement is 0.500, nd the maximum speed the car
can have and still make the turn successfully.
Solution From experience, we should expect a maximum
speed less than 50 m/s. (A convenient mental conversion is
that 1 m/s is roughly 2 mi/h.) In this case, the force that enables the car to remain in its circular path is the force of static friction. (Because no slipping occurs at the point of contact between road and tires, the acting force is a force of
static friction directed toward the center of the curve. If this
force of static friction were zero for example, if the car
were on an icy road the car would continue in a straight
line and slide off the road.) Hence, from Equation 6.1 we
have
fs
(a)
n
fs
(1)
Figure 6.5 (a) The force of static friction directed toward the center of the curve keeps the car moving in a circular path. (b) The freebody diagram for the car.
m
v2
r
The maximum speed the car can have around the curve is
the speed at which it is on the verge of skidding outward. At
this point, the friction force has its maximum value
fs,max
sn. Because the car is on a horizontal road, the magnitude of the normal force equals the weight (n mg ) and
thus fs,max
smg. Substituting this value for fs into (1), we
nd that the maximum speed is
mg
(b)
fs
vmax
fs,maxr
m
smgr
m
s gr
(0.500)(9.80 m/s2)(35.0 m)
13.1 m/s
156
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
Note that the maximum speed does not depend on the mass
of the car. That is why curved highways do not need multiple
speed limit signs to cover the various masses of vehicles using
the road.
EXAMPLE 6.5
Exercise
On a wet day, the car begins to skid on the curve
when its speed reaches 8.00 m/s. What is the coefcient of
static friction in this case?
Answer
0.187.
The Banked Exit Ramp
A civil engineer wishes to design a curved exit ramp for a
highway in such a way that a car will not have to rely on friction to round the curve without skidding. In other words, a
car moving at the designated speed can negotiate the curve
even when the road is covered with ice. Such a ramp is usually banked; this means the roadway is tilted toward the inside
of the curve. Suppose the designated speed for the ramp is to
be 13.4 m/s (30.0 mi/h) and the radius of the curve is
50.0 m. At what angle should the curve be banked?
Solution On a level (unbanked) road, the force that
causes the centripetal acceleration is the force of static friction between car and road, as we saw in the previous example. However, if the road is banked at an angle , as shown in
Figure 6.6, the normal force n has a horizontal component
n sin pointing toward the center of the curve. Because the
ramp is to be designed so that the force of static friction is
zero, only the component n sin causes the centripetal acceleration. Hence, Newtons second law written for the radial direction gives
(1)
Fr
The car is in equilibrium in the vertical direction. Thus, from
Fy 0, we have
(2)
n cos
θ
n cos θ
n sin θ
θ
mg
mg
Figure 6.6
Car rounding a curve on a road banked at an angle
to the horizontal. When friction is neglected, the force that causes
the centripetal acceleration and keeps the car moving in its circular
path is the horizontal component of the normal force. Note that n is
the sum of the forces exerted by the road on the wheels.
EXAMPLE 6.6
mg
Dividing (1) by (2) gives
tan
v2
rg
tan
n
mv2
r
n sin
1
(13.4 m/s)2
(50.0 m)(9.80 m/s2)
20.1°
If a car rounds the curve at a speed less than 13.4 m/s,
friction is needed to keep it from sliding down the bank (to
the left in Fig. 6.6). A driver who attempts to negotiate the
curve at a speed greater than 13.4 m/s has to depend on friction to keep from sliding up the bank (to the right in Fig.
6.6). The banking angle is independent of the mass of the vehicle negotiating the curve.
Exercise Write Newtons second law applied to the radial
direction when a frictional force fs is directed down the bank,
toward the center of the curve.
Answer
n sin
fs cos
mv 2
r
Satellite Motion
This example treats a satellite moving in a circular orbit
around the Earth. To understand this situation, you must
know that the gravitational force between spherical objects
and small objects that can be modeled as particles having
masses m1 and m 2 and separated by a distance r is attractive
and has a magnitude
m1m2
Fg G
r2
6.1
where G 6.673 10 11 N m2/kg2. This is Newtons law of
gravitation, which we study in Chapter 14.
Consider a satellite of mass m moving in a circular orbit
around the Earth at a constant speed v and at an altitude h
above the Earths surface, as illustrated in Figure 6.7. Determine the speed of the satellite in terms of G, h, RE (the radius
of the Earth), and ME (the mass of the Earth).
Solution The only external force acting on the satellite is
the force of gravity, which acts toward the center of the Earth
and keeps the satellite in its circular orbit. Therefore,
Fr
r
h
Fg
G
MEm
r2
From Newtons second law and Equation 6.1 we obtain
G
MEm
r2
m
v2
r
Solving for v and remembering that the distance r from the
center of the Earth to the satellite is r RE h, we obtain
(1)
RE
157
Newtons Second Law Applied to Uniform Circular Motion
v
GME
r
GME
RE h
If the satellite were orbiting a different planet, its velocity
would increase with the mass of the planet and decrease as
the satellites distance from the center of the planet increased.
Fg
Exercise
v
m
Figure 6.7 A satellite of mass m moving around the Earth at a constant speed v in a circular orbit of radius r RE h . The force Fg
acting on the satellite that causes the centripetal acceleration is the
gravitational force exerted by the Earth on the satellite.
EXAMPLE 6.7
A satellite is in a circular orbit around the Earth at
an altitude of 1 000 km. The radius of the Earth is equal to
6.37 106 m, and its mass is 5.98 1024 kg. Find the speed
of the satellite, and then nd the period, which is the time it
needs to make one complete revolution.
Answer
103 m/s; 6.29
7.36
103 s = 105 min.
Lets Go Loop-the-Loop!
A pilot of mass m in a jet aircraft executes a loop-the-loop, as
shown in Figure 6.8a. In this maneuver, the aircraft moves in
a vertical circle of radius 2.70 km at a constant speed of
225 m/s. Determine the force exerted by the seat on the pilot
(a) at the bottom of the loop and (b) at the top of the loop.
Express your answers in terms of the weight of the pilot mg.
Solution We expect the answer for (a) to be greater than
that for (b) because at the bottom of the loop the normal
and gravitational forces act in opposite directions, whereas at
the top of the loop these two forces act in the same direction.
It is the vector sum of these two forces that gives the force of
constant magnitude that keeps the pilot moving in a circular
path. To yield net force vectors with the same magnitude, the
normal force at the bottom (where the normal and gravitational forces are in opposite directions) must be greater than
that at the top (where the normal and gravitational forces are
in the same direction). (a) The free-body diagram for the pilot at the bottom of the loop is shown in Figure 6.8b. The
only forces acting on him are the downward force of gravity
Fg m g and the upward force n bot exerted by the seat. Because the net upward force that provides the centripetal ac-
celeration has a magnitude n bot mg, Newtons second law
for the radial direction combined with Equation 6.1 gives
Fr
nbot
nbot
mg
mg
m
v2
r
m
v2
r
mg 1
v2
rg
Substituting the values given for the speed and radius gives
nbot
mg 1
(2.70
(225 m/s)2
103 m)(9.80 m/s2)
2.91mg
Hence, the magnitude of the force n bot exerted by the seat
on the pilot is greater than the weight of the pilot by a factor
of 2.91. This means that the pilot experiences an apparent
weight that is greater than his true weight by a factor of 2.91.
(b) The free-body diagram for the pilot at the top of the
loop is shown in Figure 6.8c. As we noted earlier, both the
gravitational force exerted by the Earth and the force n top exerted by the seat on the pilot act downward, and so the net
downward force that provides the centripetal acceleration has
158
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
Figure 6.8 (a) An aircraft executes a loop-the-loop maneuver as
it moves in a vertical circle at constant speed. (b) Free-body diagram for the pilot at the bottom
of the loop. In this position the
pilot experiences an apparent
weight greater than his true
weight. (c) Free-body diagram for
the pilot at the top of the loop.
n bot
Top
A
ntop
mg
mg
(b)
(c)
Bottom
(a)
a magnitude n top
Fr
ntop
ntop
m
ntop
mg
mg
v2
r
mg
(2.70
mg. Applying Newtons second law yields
m
v2
r
mg
v2
rg
In this case, the magnitude of the force exerted by the seat
on the pilot is less than his true weight by a factor of 0.913,
and the pilot feels lighter.
Exercise
Determine the magnitude of the radially directed
force exerted on the pilot by the seat when the aircraft is at
point A in Figure 6.8a, midway up the loop.
1
(225 m/s)2
103 m)(9.80 m/s2)
1
0.913mg
Answer
nA
1.913mg directed to the right.
Quick Quiz 6.3
A bead slides freely along a curved wire at constant speed, as shown in the overhead view of
Figure 6.9. At each of the points , , and , draw the vector representing the force that
the wire exerts on the bead in order to cause it to follow the path of the wire at that point.
QuickLab
Hold a shoe by the end of its lace and
spin it in a vertical circle. Can you
feel the difference in the tension in
the lace when the shoe is at top of the
circle compared with when the shoe
is at the bottom?
Figure 6.9
6.2
NONUNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
In Chapter 4 we found that if a particle moves with varying speed in a circular
path, there is, in addition to the centripetal (radial) component of acceleration, a
tangential component having magnitude dv/dt. Therefore, the force acting on the
6.2
Nonuniform Circular Motion
159
Some examples of forces acting during circular motion. (Left) As these speed skaters round a
curve, the force exerted by the ice on their skates provides the centripetal acceleration.
(Right) Passengers on a corkscrew roller coaster. What are the origins of the forces in this
example?
Figure 6.10 When the force acting on a particle moving in a circular path has a tangential component Ft , the
particles speed changes. The total force exerted on the
particle in this case is the vector sum of the radial force
and the tangential force. That is, F Fr Ft .
F
Fr
Ft
particle must also have a tangential and a radial component. Because the total acceleration is a ar at , the total force exerted on the particle is F Fr Ft , as
shown in Figure 6.10. The vector Fr is directed toward the center of the circle and is
responsible for the centripetal acceleration. The vector Ft tangent to the circle is responsible for the tangential acceleration, which represents a change in the speed of
the particle with time. The following example demonstrates this type of motion.
EXAMPLE 6.8
Keep Your Eye on the Ball
A small sphere of mass m is attached to the end of a cord of
length R and whirls in a vertical circle about a xed point O,
as illustrated in Figure 6.11a. Determine the tension in the
cord at any instant when the speed of the sphere is v and the
cord makes an angle with the vertical.
Solution Unlike the situation in Example 6.7, the speed is
not uniform in this example because, at most points along the
path, a tangential component of acceleration arises from the
gravitational force exerted on the sphere. From the free-body
diagram in Figure 6.11b, we see that the only forces acting on
160
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
vtop
mg
Ttop
R
O
O
T
mg cos θ
T bot
θ
v bot
mg sin θ
θ
Figure 6.11 (a) Forces acting on a sphere
of mass m connected to a cord of length R and
rotating in a vertical circle centered at O.
(b) Forces acting on the sphere at the top and
bottom of the circle. The tension is a maximum at the bottom and a minimum at the top.
mg
mg
(a)
(b)
the sphere are the gravitational force Fg m g exerted by the
Earth and the force T exerted by the cord. Now we resolve Fg
into a tangential component mg sin and a radial component
mg cos . Applying Newtons second law to the forces acting
on the sphere in the tangential direction yields
Ft
mg sin
at
g sin
mat
This tangential component of the acceleration causes v to
change in time because at dv/dt.
Applying Newtons second law to the forces acting on the
sphere in the radial direction and noting that both T and ar
are directed toward O, we obtain
Fr
T
T
m
mv2
R
mg cos
v2
R
Special Cases At the top of the path, where
have cos 180°
180°, we
1, and the tension equation becomes
Ttop
m
v2
top
R
g
This is the minimum value of T. Note that at this point at 0
and therefore the acceleration is purely radial and directed
downward.
At the bottom of the path, where
0, we see that, because cos 0 1,
v2
bot
Tbot m
g
R
This is the maximum value of T. At this point, at is again 0
and the acceleration is now purely radial and directed upward.
Exercise
At what position of the sphere would the cord
most likely break if the average speed were to increase?
g cos
Answer
At the bottom, where T has its maximum value.
Optional Section
6.3
MOTION IN ACCELERATED FRAMES
When Newtons laws of motion were introduced in Chapter 5, we emphasized that
they are valid only when observations are made in an inertial frame of reference.
In this section, we analyze how an observer in a noninertial frame of reference
(one that is accelerating) applies Newtons second law.
6.3
4.8
161
Motion in Accelerated Frames
To understand the motion of a system that is noninertial because an object is
moving along a curved path, consider a car traveling along a highway at a high
speed and approaching a curved exit ramp, as shown in Figure 6.12a. As the car
takes the sharp left turn onto the ramp, a person sitting in the passenger seat
slides to the right and hits the door. At that point, the force exerted on her by the
door keeps her from being ejected from the car. What causes her to move toward
the door? A popular, but improper, explanation is that some mysterious force acting from left to right pushes her outward. (This is often called the centrifugal
force, but we shall not use this term because it often creates confusion.) The passenger invents this ctitious force to explain what is going on in her accelerated
frame of reference, as shown in Figure 6.12b. (The driver also experiences this effect but holds on to the steering wheel to keep from sliding to the right.)
The phenomenon is correctly explained as follows. Before the car enters the
ramp, the passenger is moving in a straight-line path. As the car enters the ramp
and travels a curved path, the passenger tends to move along the original straightline path. This is in accordance with Newtons rst law: The natural tendency of a
body is to continue moving in a straight line. However, if a sufciently large force
(toward the center of curvature) acts on the passenger, as in Figure 6.12c, she will
move in a curved path along with the car. The origin of this force is the force of
friction between her and the car seat. If this frictional force is not large enough,
she will slide to the right as the car turns to the left under her. Eventually, she encounters the door, which provides a force large enough to enable her to follow the
same curved path as the car. She slides toward the door not because of some mysterious outward force but because the force of friction is not sufciently great
to allow her to travel along the circular path followed by the car.
In general, if a particle moves with an acceleration a relative to an observer in
an inertial frame, that observer may use Newtons second law and correctly claim
that F m a. If another observer in an accelerated frame tries to apply Newtons
second law to the motion of the particle, the person must introduce ctitious
forces to make Newtons second law work. These forces invented by the observer
in the accelerating frame appear to be real. However, we emphasize that these ctitious forces do not exist when the motion is observed in an inertial frame.
Fictitious forces are used only in an accelerating frame and do not represent real
forces acting on the particle. (By real forces, we mean the interaction of the particle with its environment.) If the ctitious forces are properly dened in the accelerating frame, the description of motion in this frame is equivalent to the description given by an inertial observer who considers only real forces. Usually, we
analyze motions using inertial reference frames, but there are cases in which it is
more convenient to use an accelerating frame.
Figure 6.12 (a) A car approaching a curved exit ramp. What causes a front-seat passenger to
move toward the right-hand door? (b) From the frame of reference of the passenger, a (ctitious) force pushes her toward the right door. (c) Relative to the reference frame of the Earth,
the car seat applies a leftward force to the passenger, causing her to change direction along with
the rest of the car.
QuickLab
Use a string, a small weight, and a
protractor to measure your acceleration as you start sprinting from a
standing position.
Fictitious forces
(a)
(b)
(c)
162
CHAPTER 6
EXAMPLE 6.9
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
Fictitious Forces in Linear Motion
A small sphere of mass m is hung by a cord from the ceiling
of a boxcar that is accelerating to the right, as shown in Figure 6.13. According to the inertial observer at rest (Fig.
6.13a), the forces on the sphere are the force T exerted by
the cord and the force of gravity. The inertial observer concludes that the acceleration of the sphere is the same as that
of the boxcar and that this acceleration is provided by the
horizontal component of T. Also, the vertical component of
T balances the force of gravity. Therefore, she writes Newtons second law as F T m g m a, which in component form becomes
Inertial observer
(1)
Fx
T sin
Fy
T cos
Noninertial observer
ma
(2)
Because the deection of the cord from the vertical serves as
a measure of acceleration, a simple pendulum can be used as an
accelerometer.
According to the noninertial observer riding in the car
(Fig. 6.13b), the cord still makes an angle with the vertical;
however, to her the sphere is at rest and so its acceleration is
zero. Therefore, she introduces a ctitious force to balance
the horizontal component of T and claims that the net force
on the sphere is zero! In this noninertial frame of reference,
Newtons second law in component form yields
mg
0
Thus, by solving (1) and (2) simultaneously for a, the inertial
observer can determine the magnitude of the cars acceleration through the relationship
a
g tan
Fx
T sin
Ffictitious
Fy
T cos
mg
0
If we recognize that Fctitious ma inertial ma, then these expressions are equivalent to (1) and (2); therefore, the noninertial observer obtains the same mathematical results as the inertial observer does. However, the physical interpretation of the
deection of the cord differs in the two frames of reference.
a
Inertial
observer
Tθ
mg
(a)
Noninertial
observer
Fctitious
0
Tθ
mg
(b)
Figure 6.13 A small sphere suspended from the ceiling of a boxcar accelerating to the right is deected as shown. (a) An inertial observer at rest outside the car claims that the acceleration of the
sphere is provided by the horizontal component of T. (b) A noninertial observer riding in the car says
that the net force on the sphere is zero and that the deection of the cord from the vertical is due to a
ctitious force Fctitious that balances the horizontal component of T.
6.4
EXAMPLE 6.10
Motion in the Presence of Resistive Forces
Fictitious Force in a Rotating System
According to a noninertial observer attached to the
turntable, the block is at rest and its acceleration is zero.
Therefore, she must introduce a ctitious outward force of
magnitude mv 2/r to balance the inward force exerted by the
string. According to her, the net force on the block is zero,
and she writes Newtons second law as T mv 2/r 0.
Suppose a block of mass m lying on a horizontal, frictionless
turntable is connected to a string attached to the center of
the turntable, as shown in Figure 6.14. According to an inertial observer, if the block rotates uniformly, it undergoes an
acceleration of magnitude v 2/r, where v is its linear speed.
The inertial observer concludes that this centripetal acceleration is provided by the force T exerted by the string and
writes Newtons second law as T mv 2/r.
n
Noninertial observer
n
T
Fctitious =
mg
T
mv 2
r
mg
(a)
Inertial observer
(b)
Figure 6.14 A block of mass m connected to a string tied to the center of a rotating turntable.
(a) The inertial observer claims that the force causing the circular motion is provided by the force T
exerted by the string on the block. (b) The noninertial observer claims that the block is not accelerating, and therefore she introduces a ctitious force of magnitude mv 2/r that acts outward and balances
the force T.
Optional Section
6.4
4.9
163
MOTION IN THE PRESENCE OF RESISTIVE FORCES
In the preceding chapter we described the force of kinetic friction exerted on an
object moving on some surface. We completely ignored any interaction between
the object and the medium through which it moves. Now let us consider the effect
of that medium, which can be either a liquid or a gas. The medium exerts a resistive force R on the object moving through it. Some examples are the air resistance associated with moving vehicles (sometimes called air drag ) and the viscous
forces that act on objects moving through a liquid. The magnitude of R depends
on such factors as the speed of the object, and the direction of R is always opposite
the direction of motion of the object relative to the medium. The magnitude of R
nearly always increases with increasing speed.
The magnitude of the resistive force can depend on speed in a complex way,
and here we consider only two situations. In the rst situation, we assume the resistive force is proportional to the speed of the moving object; this assumption is
valid for objects falling slowly through a liquid and for very small objects, such as
dust particles, moving through air. In the second situation, we assume a resistive
force that is proportional to the square of the speed of the moving object; large
objects, such as a skydiver moving through air in free fall, experience such a force.
164
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
v=0
a=g
v
R
vt
v
0.63vt
mg
(a)
t
τ
v = vt
a=0
(c)
(b)
Figure 6.15
(a) A small sphere falling through a liquid. (b) Motion diagram of the sphere as it
falls. (c) Speed time graph for the sphere. The sphere reaches a maximum, or terminal, speed
vt , and the time constant is the time it takes to reach 0.63vt .
Resistive Force Proportional to Object Speed
If we assume that the resistive force acting on an object moving through a liquid
or gas is proportional to the objects speed, then the magnitude of the resistive
force can be expressed as
R
(6.2)
bv
where v is the speed of the object and b is a constant whose value depends on the
properties of the medium and on the shape and dimensions of the object. If the
object is a sphere of radius r, then b is proportional to r.
Consider a small sphere of mass m released from rest in a liquid, as in Figure
6.15a. Assuming that the only forces acting on the sphere are the resistive force bv
and the force of gravity Fg , let us describe its motion.1 Applying Newtons second
law to the vertical motion, choosing the downward direction to be positive, and
noting that Fy mg bv, we obtain
mg
bv
ma
m
dv
dt
(6.3)
where the acceleration dv/dt is downward. Solving this expression for the acceleration gives
dv
dt
Terminal speed
g
b
v
m
(6.4)
This equation is called a differential equation, and the methods of solving it may not
be familiar to you as yet. However, note that initially, when v 0, the resistive
force bv is also zero and the acceleration dv/dt is simply g. As t increases, the resistive force increases and the acceleration decreases. Eventually, the acceleration
becomes zero when the magnitude of the resistive force equals the spheres
weight. At this point, the sphere reaches its terminal speed vt , and from then on
1
There is also a buoyant force acting on the submerged object. This force is constant, and its magnitude
is equal to the weight of the displaced liquid. This force changes the apparent weight of the sphere by a
constant factor, so we will ignore the force here. We discuss buoyant forces in Chapter 15.
6.4
165
Motion in the Presence of Resistive Forces
it continues to move at this speed with zero acceleration, as shown in Figure 6.15b.
We can obtain the terminal speed from Equation 6.3 by setting a dv/dt 0.
This gives
mg bvt 0
or
vt mg/b
The expression for v that satises Equation 6.4 with v
v
mg
(1
b
e
bt/m)
vt (1
e
t/
0 at t
0 is
(6.5)
)
This function is plotted in Figure 6.15c. The time constant
m/b (Greek letter
tau) is the time it takes the sphere to reach 63.2% ( 1 1/e) of its terminal
speed. This can be seen by noting that when t
, Equation 6.5 yields v 0.632vt .
We can check that Equation 6.5 is a solution to Equation 6.4 by direct differentiation:
mg d
mg bt/m
dv
d mg
e
e bt/m ge bt/m
dt
dt
b
b
b dt
Aerodynamic car. A streamlined
body reduces air drag and increases fuel efciency.
(See Appendix Table B.4 for the derivative of e raised to some power.) Substituting
into Equation 6.4 both this expression for dv/dt and the expression for v given by
Equation 6.5 shows that our solution satises the differential equation.
EXAMPLE 6.11
Sphere Falling in Oil
A small sphere of mass 2.00 g is released from rest in a large
vessel lled with oil, where it experiences a resistive force proportional to its speed. The sphere reaches a terminal speed
of 5.00 cm/s. Determine the time constant and the time it
takes the sphere to reach 90% of its terminal speed.
Solution
vt
Because the terminal
mg/b, the coefcient b is
b
mg
vt
speed
is
given
2.00 g
392 g/s
t/
e
e
t/
t/
)
0.900
e
1
0.100
t
ln(0.100)
t
(2.00 g)(980 cm/s2)
5.00 cm/s
vt(1
2.30
by
2.30
2.30(5.10
10
3
s)
11.7
10
3
s
11.7 ms
392 g/s
Thus, the sphere reaches 90% of its terminal (maximum)
speed in a very short time.
Therefore, the time constant is
m
b
0.900vt
5.10
10
3
s
The speed of the sphere as a function of time is given by
Equation 6.5. To nd the time t it takes the sphere to reach a
speed of 0.900vt , we set v 0.900vt in Equation 6.5 and solve
for t :
Exercise What is the spheres speed through the oil at t
11.7 ms? Compare this value with the speed the sphere would
have if it were falling in a vacuum and so were inuenced
only by gravity.
Answer
4.50 cm/s in oil versus 11.5 cm/s in free fall.
Air Drag at High Speeds
For objects moving at high speeds through air, such as airplanes, sky divers, cars,
and baseballs, the resistive force is approximately proportional to the square of the
speed. In these situations, the magnitude of the resistive force can be expressed as
R
1
2D
Av2
(6.6)
166
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
where is the density of air, A is the cross-sectional area of the falling object measured in a plane perpendicular to its motion, and D is a dimensionless empirical
quantity called the drag coefcient. The drag coefcient has a value of about 0.5 for
spherical objects but can have a value as great as 2 for irregularly shaped objects.
Let us analyze the motion of an object in free fall subject to an upward air
resistive force of magnitude R 1 D Av2. Suppose an object of mass m is re2
leased from rest. As Figure 6.16 shows, the object experiences two external forces:
the downward force of gravity Fg m g and the upward resistive force R. (There is
also an upward buoyant force that we neglect.) Hence, the magnitude of the net
force is
R
v
R
mg
F
vt
mg
Figure 6.16 An object falling
through air experiences a resistive
force R and a gravitational force
Fg m g. The object reaches terminal speed (on the right) when the
net force acting on it is zero, that
is, when R
Fg or R mg. Before this occurs, the acceleration
varies with speed according to
Equation 6.8.
1
2D
mg
Av2
(6.7)
where we have taken downward to be the positive vertical direction. Substituting
F ma into Equation 6.7, we nd that the object has a downward acceleration of
magnitude
DA
ag
v2
(6.8)
2m
We can calculate the terminal speed vt by using the fact that when the force of
gravity is balanced by the resistive force, the net force on the object is zero and
therefore its acceleration is zero. Setting a 0 in Equation 6.8 gives
DA
2m
vt2
0
vt
g
2mg
DA
(6.9)
Using this expression, we can determine how the terminal speed depends on the
dimensions of the object. Suppose the object is a sphere of radius r. In this case,
A r2 (from A
r 2 ) and m r3 (because the mass is proportional to the
volume of the sphere, which is V 4 r3). Therefore, vt r.
3
Table 6.1 lists the terminal speeds for several objects falling through air.
The high cost of fuel has prompted many truck owners to install wind deectors on their cabs to
reduce drag.
6.4
Motion in the Presence of Resistive Forces
167
TABLE 6.1 Terminal Speed for Various Objects Falling Through Air
Object
Sky diver
Baseball (radius 3.7 cm)
Golf ball (radius 2.1 cm)
Hailstone (radius 0.50 cm)
Raindrop (radius 0.20 cm)
Mass (kg)
75
0.145
0.046
4.8 10
3.4 10
Cross-Sectional Area
(m2)
vt (m/s)
0.70
10
10
10
10
60
43
44
14
9.0
4
5
4.2
1.4
7.9
1.3
3
3
5
5
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 6.12
Consider a sky surfer who jumps from a plane with her feet
attached rmly to her surfboard, does some tricks, and then
opens her parachute. Describe the forces acting on her during these maneuvers.
Solution When the surfer rst steps out of the plane, she
has no vertical velocity. The downward force of gravity causes
her to accelerate toward the ground. As her downward speed
increases, so does the upward resistive force exerted by the
air on her body and the board. This upward force reduces
their acceleration, and so their speed increases more slowly.
Eventually, they are going so fast that the upward resistive
force matches the downward force of gravity. Now the net
force is zero and they no longer accelerate, but reach their
terminal speed. At some point after reaching terminal speed,
she opens her parachute, resulting in a drastic increase in the
upward resistive force. The net force (and thus the acceleration) is now upward, in the direction opposite the direction
of the velocity. This causes the downward velocity to decrease
rapidly; this means the resistive force on the chute also decreases. Eventually the upward resistive force and the downward force of gravity balance each other and a much smaller
terminal speed is reached, permitting a safe landing.
(Contrary to popular belief, the velocity vector of a sky
diver never points upward. You may have seen a videotape
in which a sky diver appeared to rocket upward once the
chute opened. In fact, what happened is that the diver
slowed down while the person holding the camera continued falling at high speed.)
EXAMPLE 6.13
A sky surfer takes advantage of the upward force of the air on her
board. (
Falling Coffee Filters
The dependence of resistive force on speed is an empirical
relationship. In other words, it is based on observation rather
than on a theoretical model. A series of stacked lters is
dropped, and the terminal speeds are measured. Table 6.2
presents data for these coffee lters as they fall through the
air. The time constant is small, so that a dropped lter
quickly reaches terminal speed. Each lter has a mass of
1.64 g. When the lters are nested together, they stack in
168
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
such a way that the front-facing surface area does not increase. Determine the relationship between the resistive force
exerted by the air and the speed of the falling lters.
Solution At terminal speed, the upward resistive force balances the downward force of gravity. So, a single lter falling
at its terminal speed experiences a resistive force of
R
1.64 g
1000 g/kg
mg
(9.80 m/s2)
0.016 1 N
Two lters nested together experience 0.032 2 N of resistive
force, and so forth. A graph of the resistive force on the lters as a function of terminal speed is shown in Figure 6.17a.
A straight line would not be a good t, indicating that the resistive force is not proportional to the speed. The curved line
is for a second-order polynomial, indicating a proportionality
of the resistive force to the square of the speed. This proportionality is more clearly seen in Figure 6.17b, in which the resistive force is plotted as a function of the square of the terminal speed.
TABLE 6.2
Terminal Speed for
Stacked Coffee Filters
Number
of Filters
vt
(m/s)a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.01
1.40
1.63
2.00
2.25
2.40
2.57
2.80
3.05
3.22
All values of vt are approximate.
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
Resistive force (N)
Resistive force (N)
a
Pleated coffee lters can be nested together so
that the force of air resistance can be studied.
(
0
1
2
3
4
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
0
2
4
6
8
Terminal speed (m/s)
Terminal speed squared (m/s)2
(a)
(b)
Figure 6.17 (a) Relationship between the resistive force acting on falling coffee lters and their terminal speed. The curved line is a second-order polynomial t. (b) Graph relating the resistive force to
the square of the terminal speed. The t of the straight line to the data points indicates that the resistive force is proportional to the terminal speed squared. Can you nd the proportionality constant?
10
12
6.5
EXAMPLE 6.14
169
Numerical Modeling in Particle Dynamics
Resistive Force Exerted on a Baseball
A pitcher hurls a 0.145-kg baseball past a batter at 40.2 m/s
( 90 mi/h). Find the resistive force acting on the ball at this
speed.
Solution
We do not expect the air to exert a huge force
on the ball, and so the resistive force we calculate from Equation 6.6 should not be more than a few newtons. First, we
must determine the drag coefcient D. We do this by imagining that we drop the baseball and allow it to reach terminal
speed. We solve Equation 6.9 for D and substitute the appropriate values for m, vt , and A from Table 6.1. Taking the density of air as 1.29 kg/m3, we obtain
D
2 mg
vt2 A
0.284
2(0.145 kg)(9.80 m/s2)
(43 m/s)2 (1.29 kg/m3)(4.2 10
3
m2)
This number has no dimensions. We have kept an extra digit
beyond the two that are signicant and will drop it at the end
of our calculation.
We can now use this value for D in Equation 6.6 to nd
the magnitude of the resistive force:
R
1
2
2 D Av
1
2 (0.284)(1.29
kg/m3)(4.2
10
3
m2)(40.2 m/s)2
1.2 N
Optional Section
6.5
NUMERICAL MODELING IN PARTICLE DYNAMICS 2
As we have seen in this and the preceding chapter, the study of the dynamics of a
particle focuses on describing the position, velocity, and acceleration as functions of
time. Cause-and-effect relationships exist among these quantities: Velocity causes
position to change, and acceleration causes velocity to change. Because acceleration is the direct result of applied forces, any analysis of the dynamics of a particle
usually begins with an evaluation of the net force being exerted on the particle.
Up till now, we have used what is called the analytical method to investigate the
position, velocity, and acceleration of a moving particle. Let us review this method
briey before learning about a second way of approaching problems in dynamics.
(Because we conne our discussion to one-dimensional motion in this section,
boldface notation will not be used for vector quantities.)
If a particle of mass m moves under the inuence of a net force F, Newtons
second law tells us that the acceleration of the particle is a
F/m. In general, we
apply the analytical method to a dynamics problem using the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sum all the forces acting on the particle to get the net force F.
Use this net force to determine the acceleration from the relationship a
F/m.
Use this acceleration to determine the velocity from the relationship dv/dt a.
Use this velocity to determine the position from the relationship dx/dt v.
The following straightforward example illustrates this method.
EXAMPLE 6.15
An Object Falling in a Vacuum Analytical Method
Consider a particle falling in a vacuum under the inuence
of the force of gravity, as shown in Figure 6.18. Use the analytical method to nd the acceleration, velocity, and position of
the particle.
2
Solution The only force acting on the particle is the
downward force of gravity of magnitude Fg , which is also the
net force. Applying Newtons second law, we set the net force
acting on the particle equal to the mass of the particle times
The authors are most grateful to Colonel James Head of the U.S. Air Force Academy for preparing
this section. See the Student Tools CD-ROM for some assistance with numerical modeling.
170
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
its acceleration (taking upward to be the positive y direction):
Fg
ma y
In these expressions, yi and vyi represent the position and
speed of the particle at t i 0.
mg
g, which means the acceleration is constant. BeThus, a y
g, which may be incause dv y /dt a y, we see that dv y /dt
tegrated to yield
v y(t)
v yi
gt
Then, because v y dy/dt, the position of the particle is obtained from another integration, which yields the well-known
result
y(t)
yi
v yi t
12
2 gt
mg
Figure 6.18
An object falling in vacuum under the inuence
of gravity.
The analytical method is straightforward for many physical situations. In the
real world, however, complications often arise that make analytical solutions difcult and perhaps beyond the mathematical abilities of most students taking introductory physics. For example, the net force acting on a particle may depend on
the particles position, as in cases where the gravitational acceleration varies with
height. Or the force may vary with velocity, as in cases of resistive forces caused by
motion through a liquid or gas.
Another complication arises because the expressions relating acceleration, velocity, position, and time are differential equations rather than algebraic ones. Differential equations are usually solved using integral calculus and other special
techniques that introductory students may not have mastered.
When such situations arise, scientists often use a procedure called numerical
modeling to study motion. The simplest numerical model is called the Euler
method, after the Swiss mathematician Leonhard Euler (1707 1783).
The Euler Method
In the Euler method for solving differential equations, derivatives are approximated as ratios of nite differences. Considering a small increment of time t, we
can approximate the relationship between a particles speed and the magnitude of
its acceleration as
a(t)
v(t
v
t
t)
t
v(t)
t) of the particle at the end of the time interval t is apThen the speed v(t
proximately equal to the speed v (t ) at the beginning of the time interval plus the
magnitude of the acceleration during the interval multiplied by t :
v(t
t)
v(t)
a(t) t
(6.10)
Because the acceleration is a function of time, this estimate of v(t
t) is accurate
only if the time interval t is short enough that the change in acceleration during
it is very small (as is discussed later). Of course, Equation 6.10 is exact if the acceleration is constant.
6.5
Numerical Modeling in Particle Dynamics
The position x(t
t) of the particle at the end of the interval
found in the same manner:
v(t)
x
t
x(t
t)
t
x(t
t)
x(t)
t can be
v(t) t
1
2
x(t)
(6.11)
t)2
You may be tempted to add the term a(
to this result to make it look like
the familiar kinematics equation, but this term is not included in the Euler
method because t is assumed to be so small that t 2 is nearly zero.
If the acceleration at any instant t is known, the particles velocity and position
at a time t
t can be calculated from Equations 6.10 and 6.11. The calculation
then proceeds in a series of nite steps to determine the velocity and position at
any later time. The acceleration is determined from the net force acting on the
particle, and this force may depend on position, velocity, or time:
a(x, v, t)
F(x, v, t)
m
(6.12)
It is convenient to set up the numerical solution to this kind of problem by
numbering the steps and entering the calculations in a table, a procedure that is illustrated in Table 6.3.
The equations in the table can be entered into a spreadsheet and the calculations performed row by row to determine the velocity, position, and acceleration
as functions of time. The calculations can also be carried out by using a program
written in either BASIC, C
, or FORTRAN or by using commercially available
mathematics packages for personal computers. Many small increments can be
taken, and accurate results can usually be obtained with the help of a computer.
Graphs of velocity versus time or position versus time can be displayed to help you
visualize the motion.
One advantage of the Euler method is that the dynamics is not obscured the
fundamental relationships between acceleration and force, velocity and acceleration, and position and velocity are clearly evident. Indeed, these relationships
form the heart of the calculations. There is no need to use advanced mathematics,
and the basic physics governs the dynamics.
The Euler method is completely reliable for innitesimally small time increments, but for practical reasons a nite increment size must be chosen. For the nite difference approximation of Equation 6.10 to be valid, the time increment
must be small enough that the acceleration can be approximated as being constant during the increment. We can determine an appropriate size for the time in-
TABLE 6.3 The Euler Method for Solving Dynamics Problems
Step
Time
0
1
2
3
t0
t1
t2
t3
n
tn
t0
t1
t2
Position
t
t
t
x0
x1
x2
x3
xn
x0
x1
x2
Velocity
v0 t
v1 t
v2 t
171
v0
v1
v2
v3
vn
v0
v1
v2
Acceleration
a0 t
a1 t
a2 t
a0
a1
a2
a3
an
F (x 0 , v0 , t 0)/m
F (x 1 , v 1 , t 1)/m
F (x 2 , v 2 , t 2)/m
F (x 3 , v 3 , t 3)/m
See the spreadsheet le Baseball
with Drag on the Student Web
site (address below) for an
example of how this technique can
be applied to nd the initial speed
of the baseball described in
Example 6.14. We cannot use our
regular approach because our
kinematics equations assume
constant acceleration. Eulers
method provides a way to
circumvent this difculty.
A detailed solution to Problem 41
involving iterative integration
appears in the Student Solutions
Manual and Study Guide and is
posted on the Web at http:/
www.saunderscollege.com/physics
172
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
crement by examining the particular problem being investigated. The criterion for
the size of the time increment may need to be changed during the course of the
motion. In practice, however, we usually choose a time increment appropriate to
the initial conditions and use the same value throughout the calculations.
The size of the time increment inuences the accuracy of the result, but unfortunately it is not easy to determine the accuracy of an Euler-method solution
without a knowledge of the correct analytical solution. One method of determining the accuracy of the numerical solution is to repeat the calculations with a
smaller time increment and compare results. If the two calculations agree to a certain number of signicant gures, you can assume that the results are correct to
that precision.
SUMMARY
Newtons second law applied to a particle moving in uniform circular motion states
that the net force causing the particle to undergo a centripetal acceleration is
Fr
mar
mv2
r
(6.1)
You should be able to use this formula in situations where the force providing the
centripetal acceleration could be the force of gravity, a force of friction, a force of
string tension, or a normal force.
A particle moving in nonuniform circular motion has both a centripetal component of acceleration and a nonzero tangential component of acceleration. In
the case of a particle rotating in a vertical circle, the force of gravity provides the
tangential component of acceleration and part or all of the centripetal component
of acceleration. Be sure you understand the directions and magnitudes of the velocity and acceleration vectors for nonuniform circular motion.
An observer in a noninertial (accelerating) frame of reference must introduce
ctitious forces when applying Newtons second law in that frame. If these ctitious forces are properly dened, the description of motion in the noninertial
frame is equivalent to that made by an observer in an inertial frame. However, the
observers in the two frames do not agree on the causes of the motion. You should
be able to distinguish between inertial and noninertial frames and identify the ctitious forces acting in a noninertial frame.
A body moving through a liquid or gas experiences a resistive force that is
speed-dependent. This resistive force, which opposes the motion, generally increases with speed. The magnitude of the resistive force depends on the shape of
the body and on the properties of the medium through which the body is moving.
In the limiting case for a falling body, when the magnitude of the resistive force
equals the bodys weight, the body reaches its terminal speed. You should be able
to apply Newtons laws to analyze the motion of objects moving under the inuence of resistive forces. You may need to apply Eulers method if the force depends on velocity, as it does for air drag.
QUESTIONS
1. Because the Earth rotates about its axis and revolves
around the Sun, it is a noninertial frame of reference. Assuming the Earth is a uniform sphere, why would the ap-
parent weight of an object be greater at the poles than at
the equator?
2. Explain why the Earth bulges at the equator.
Problems
3. Why is it that an astronaut in a space capsule orbiting the
Earth experiences a feeling of weightlessness?
4. Why does mud y off a rapidly turning automobile tire?
5. Imagine that you attach a heavy object to one end of a
spring and then whirl the spring and object in a horizontal circle (by holding the free end of the spring). Does
the spring stretch? If so, why? Discuss this in terms of the
force causing the circular motion.
6. It has been suggested that rotating cylinders about 10 mi
in length and 5 mi in diameter be placed in space and
used as colonies. The purpose of the rotation is to simulate gravity for the inhabitants. Explain this concept for
producing an effective gravity.
7. Why does a pilot tend to black out when pulling out of a
steep dive?
173
8. Describe a situation in which a car driver can have
a centripetal acceleration but no tangential acceleration.
9. Describe the path of a moving object if its acceleration is
constant in magnitude at all times and (a) perpendicular
to the velocity; (b) parallel to the velocity.
10. Analyze the motion of a rock falling through water in
terms of its speed and acceleration as it falls. Assume that
the resistive force acting on the rock increases as the
speed increases.
11. Consider a small raindrop and a large raindrop falling
through the atmosphere. Compare their terminal speeds.
What are their accelerations when they reach terminal
speed?
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
Newtons Second Law
Applied to Uniform Circular Motion
Section 6.1
1. A toy car moving at constant speed completes one lap
around a circular track (a distance of 200 m) in 25.0 s.
(a) What is its average speed? (b) If the mass of the car
is 1.50 kg, what is the magnitude of the force that keeps
it in a circle?
2. A 55.0-kg ice skater is moving at 4.00 m/s when she
grabs the loose end of a rope, the opposite end of
which is tied to a pole. She then moves in a circle of radius 0.800 m around the pole. (a) Determine the force
exerted by the rope on her arms. (b) Compare this
force with her weight.
3. A light string can support a stationary hanging load of
25.0 kg before breaking. A 3.00-kg mass attached to the
string rotates on a horizontal, frictionless table in a circle of radius 0.800 m. What range of speeds can the
mass have before the string breaks?
4. In the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, the speed of
the electron is approximately 2.20 106 m/s. Find
(a) the force acting on the electron as it revolves in a
circular orbit of radius 0.530 10 10 m and (b) the
centripetal acceleration of the electron.
5. In a cyclotron (one type of particle accelerator), a
deuteron (of atomic mass 2.00 u) reaches a nal speed
of 10.0% of the speed of light while moving in a circular
path of radius 0.480 m. The deuteron is maintained in
the circular path by a magnetic force. What magnitude
of force is required?
6. A satellite of mass 300 kg is in a circular orbit around
the Earth at an altitude equal to the Earths mean radius (see Example 6.6). Find (a) the satellites orbital
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
speed, (b) the period of its revolution, and (c) the gravitational force acting on it.
Whenever two Apollo astronauts were on the surface of
the Moon, a third astronaut orbited the Moon. Assume
the orbit to be circular and 100 km above the surface of
the Moon. If the mass of the Moon is 7.40 1022 kg and
its radius is 1.70 106 m, determine (a) the orbiting astronauts acceleration, (b) his orbital speed, and (c) the
period of the orbit.
The speed of the tip of the minute hand on a town
clock is 1.75 10 3 m/s. (a) What is the speed of the
tip of the second hand of the same length? (b) What is
the centripetal acceleration of the tip of the second
hand?
A coin placed 30.0 cm from the center of a rotating,
horizontal turntable slips when its speed is 50.0 cm/s.
(a) What provides the force in the radial direction
when the coin is stationary relative to the turntable?
(b) What is the coefcient of static friction between
coin and turntable?
The cornering performance of an automobile is evaluated on a skid pad, where the maximum speed that a
car can maintain around a circular path on a dry, at
surface is measured. The centripetal acceleration, also
called the lateral acceleration, is then calculated as a
multiple of the free-fall acceleration g. The main factors
affecting the performance are the tire characteristics
and the suspension system of the car. A Dodge Viper
GTS can negotiate a skid pad of radius 61.0 m at
86.5 km/h. Calculate its maximum lateral acceleration.
A crate of eggs is located in the middle of the atbed of
a pickup truck as the truck negotiates an unbanked
174
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
curve in the road. The curve may be regarded as an arc
of a circle of radius 35.0 m. If the coefcient of static
friction between crate and truck is 0.600, how fast can
WEB
the truck be moving without the crate sliding?
12. A car initially traveling eastward turns north by traveling
in a circular path at uniform speed as in Figure P6.12.
The length of the arc ABC is 235 m, and the car completes the turn in 36.0 s. (a) What is the acceleration
when the car is at B located at an angle of 35.0°? Express your answer in terms of the unit vectors i and j.
Determine (b) the car s average speed and (c) its average acceleration during the 36.0-s interval.
hump? (b) What must be the speed of the car over the
hump if she is to experience weightlessness? (That is, if
her apparent weight is zero.)
15. Tarzan (m 85.0 kg) tries to cross a river by swinging
from a vine. The vine is 10.0 m long, and his speed at
the bottom of the swing (as he just clears the water) is
8.00 m/s. Tarzan doesnt know that the vine has a
breaking strength of 1 000 N. Does he make it safely
across the river?
16. A hawk ies in a horizontal arc of radius 12.0 m at a
constant speed of 4.00 m/s. (a) Find its centripetal acceleration. (b) It continues to y along the same horizontal arc but steadily increases its speed at the rate of
1.20 m/s2. Find the acceleration (magnitude and direction) under these conditions.
y
O
35.0°
C
17. A 40.0-kg child sits in a swing supported by two chains,
each 3.00 m long. If the tension in each chain at the
lowest point is 350 N, nd (a) the childs speed at the
lowest point and (b) the force exerted by the seat on
the child at the lowest point. (Neglect the mass of the
seat.)
18. A child of mass m sits in a swing supported by two
chains, each of length R. If the tension in each chain at
the lowest point is T, nd (a) the childs speed at the
lowest point and (b) the force exerted by the seat on
the child at the lowest point. (Neglect the mass of the
seat.)
x
B
A
Figure P6.12
13. Consider a conical pendulum with an 80.0-kg bob on a
10.0-m wire making an angle of
5.00° with the vertical (Fig. P6.13). Determine (a) the horizontal and vertical components of the force exerted by the wire on the
pendulum and (b) the radial acceleration of the bob.
θ
WEB
19. A pail of water is rotated in a vertical circle of radius
1.00 m. What must be the minimum speed of the pail at
the top of the circle if no water is to spill out?
20. A 0.400-kg object is swung in a vertical circular path on
a string 0.500 m long. If its speed is 4.00 m/s at the top
of the circle, what is the tension in the string there?
21. A roller-coaster car has a mass of 500 kg when fully
loaded with passengers (Fig. P6.21). (a) If the car has a
speed of 20.0 m/s at point A, what is the force exerted
by the track on the car at this point? (b) What is the
maximum speed the car can have at B and still remain
on the track?
B
15.0 m
Figure P6.13
Section 6.2
10.0 m
A
Nonuniform Circular Motion
14. A car traveling on a straight road at 9.00 m/s goes over
a hump in the road. The hump may be regarded as an
arc of a circle of radius 11.0 m. (a) What is the apparent
weight of a 600-N woman in the car as she rides over the
Figure P6.21
175
Problems
22. A roller coaster at the Six Flags Great America amusement park in Gurnee, Illinois, incorporates some of the
latest design technology and some basic physics. Each
vertical loop, instead of being circular, is shaped like a
teardrop (Fig. P6.22). The cars ride on the inside of the
loop at the top, and the speeds are high enough to ensure that the cars remain on the track. The biggest loop
is 40.0 m high, with a maximum speed of 31.0 m/s
(nearly 70 mi/h) at the bottom. Suppose the speed at
the top is 13.0 m/s and the corresponding centripetal
acceleration is 2g. (a) What is the radius of the arc of
the teardrop at the top? (b) If the total mass of the cars
plus people is M, what force does the rail exert on this
total mass at the top? (c) Suppose the roller coaster had
a loop of radius 20.0 m. If the cars have the same speed,
13.0 m/s at the top, what is the centripetal acceleration
at the top? Comment on the normal force at the top in
this situation.
24. A 5.00-kg mass attached to a spring scale rests on a frictionless, horizontal surface as in Figure P6.24. The
spring scale, attached to the front end of a boxcar, reads
18.0 N when the car is in motion. (a) If the spring scale
reads zero when the car is at rest, determine the acceleration of the car. (b) What will the spring scale read if
the car moves with constant velocity? (c) Describe the
forces acting on the mass as observed by someone in
the car and by someone at rest outside the car.
5.00 kg
Figure P6.24
Figure P6.22
(Frank Cezus/FPG International)
(Optional)
Section 6.3
Motion in Accelerated Frames
23. A merry-go-round makes one complete revolution in
12.0 s. If a 45.0-kg child sits on the horizontal oor of
the merry-go-round 3.00 m from the center, nd (a) the
childs acceleration and (b) the horizontal force of friction that acts on the child. (c) What minimum coefcient of static friction is necessary to keep the child
from slipping?
25. A 0.500-kg object is suspended from the ceiling of an
accelerating boxcar as was seen in Figure 6.13. If a
3.00 m/s2, nd (a) the angle that the string makes with
the vertical and (b) the tension in the string.
26. The Earth rotates about its axis with a period of 24.0 h.
Imagine that the rotational speed can be increased. If
an object at the equator is to have zero apparent weight,
(a) what must the new period be? (b) By what factor
would the speed of the object be increased when the
planet is rotating at the higher speed? (Hint: See Problem 53 and note that the apparent weight of the object
becomes zero when the normal force exerted on it is
zero. Also, the distance traveled during one period is
2 R, where R is the Earths radius.)
27. A person stands on a scale in an elevator. As the elevator
starts, the scale has a constant reading of 591 N. As the
elevator later stops, the scale reading is 391 N. Assume
the magnitude of the acceleration is the same during
starting and stopping, and determine (a) the weight of
the person, (b) the persons mass, and (c) the acceleration of the elevator.
28. A child on vacation wakes up. She is lying on her back.
The tension in the muscles on both sides of her neck is
55.0 N as she raises her head to look past her toes and
out the motel window. Finally, it is not raining! Ten minutes later she is screaming and sliding feet rst down a
water slide at a constant speed of 5.70 m/s, riding high
on the outside wall of a horizontal curve of radius 2.40 m
(Fig. P6.28). She raises her head to look forward past
her toes; nd the tension in the muscles on both sides
of her neck.
176
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
40.0 m/s
20.0 m
40.0°
620 kg
Figure P6.34
Figure P6.28
35.
29. A plumb bob does not hang exactly along a line directed to the center of the Earth, because of the Earths
rotation. How much does the plumb bob deviate from a
radial line at 35.0° north latitude? Assume that the
Earth is spherical.
36.
(Optional)
Section 6.4
Motion in the Presence of Resistive Forces
30. A sky diver of mass 80.0 kg jumps from a slow-moving
aircraft and reaches a terminal speed of 50.0 m/s.
(a) What is the acceleration of the sky diver when her
speed is 30.0 m/s? What is the drag force exerted on
the diver when her speed is (b) 50.0 m/s? (c) 30.0 m/s?
31. A small piece of Styrofoam packing material is dropped
from a height of 2.00 m above the ground. Until it
reaches terminal speed, the magnitude of its acceleration is given by a g bv. After falling 0.500 m, the
Styrofoam effectively reaches its terminal speed, and
then takes 5.00 s more to reach the ground. (a) What is
the value of the constant b ? (b) What is the acceleration
at t 0? (c) What is the acceleration when the speed is
0.150 m/s?
32. (a) Estimate the terminal speed of a wooden sphere
(density 0.830 g/cm3) falling through the air if its radius is 8.00 cm. (b) From what height would a freely
falling object reach this speed in the absence of air
resistance?
33. Calculate the force required to pull a copper ball of radius 2.00 cm upward through a uid at the constant
speed 9.00 cm/s. Take the drag force to be proportional
to the speed, with proportionality constant 0.950 kg/s.
Ignore the buoyant force.
34. A re helicopter carries a 620-kg bucket at the end of a
cable 20.0 m long as in Figure P6.34. As the helicopter
ies to a re at a constant speed of 40.0 m/s, the cable
makes an angle of 40.0° with respect to the vertical. The
bucket presents a cross-sectional area of 3.80 m2 in a
plane perpendicular to the air moving past it. Determine the drag coefcient assuming that the resistive
WEB
37.
38.
39.
force is proportional to the square of the buckets
speed.
A small, spherical bead of mass 3.00 g is released from
rest at t 0 in a bottle of liquid shampoo. The terminal
speed is observed to be vt 2.00 cm/s. Find (a) the
value of the constant b in Equation 6.4, (b) the time
the bead takes to reach 0.632vt , and (c) the value of the
resistive force when the bead reaches terminal speed.
The mass of a sports car is 1 200 kg. The shape of the
car is such that the aerodynamic drag coefcient is
0.250 and the frontal area is 2.20 m2. Neglecting all
other sources of friction, calculate the initial acceleration of the car if, after traveling at 100 km/h, it is
shifted into neutral and is allowed to coast.
A motorboat cuts its engine when its speed is 10.0 m/s
and coasts to rest. The equation governing the motion
of the motorboat during this period is v vi e ct, where
v is the speed at time t, vi is the initial speed, and c is a
constant. At t 20.0 s, the speed is 5.00 m/s. (a) Find
the constant c. (b) What is the speed at t 40.0 s?
(c) Differentiate the expression for v (t ) and thus show
that the acceleration of the boat is proportional to the
speed at any time.
Assume that the resistive force acting on a speed skater
is f
kmv 2, where k is a constant and m is the skater s
mass. The skater crosses the nish line of a straight-line
race with speed vf and then slows down by coasting on
his skates. Show that the skater s speed at any time t
after crossing the nish line is v (t ) vf /(1 ktvf ).
You can feel a force of air drag on your hand if you
stretch your arm out of the open window of a speeding
car. (Note: Do not get hurt.) What is the order of magnitude of this force? In your solution, state the quantities
you measure or estimate and their values.
(Optional)
6.5 Numerical Modeling in Particle Dynamics
40. A 3.00-g leaf is dropped from a height of 2.00 m above
the ground. Assume the net downward force exerted on
the leaf is F mg bv, where the drag factor is b
0.030 0 kg/s. (a) Calculate the terminal speed of the
leaf. (b) Use Euler s method of numerical analysis to
nd the speed and position of the leaf as functions of
177
Problems
WEB
time, from the instant it is released until 99% of terminal speed is reached. (Hint: Try t 0.005 s.)
41. A hailstone of mass 4.80 10 4 kg falls through the air
and experiences a net force given by
F
42.
43.
44.
45.
mg
Cv 2
where C 2.50 10 5 kg/m. (a) Calculate the terminal speed of the hailstone. (b) Use Euler s method of
numerical analysis to nd the speed and position of the
hailstone at 0.2-s intervals, taking the initial speed to be
zero. Continue the calculation until the hailstone
reaches 99% of terminal speed.
A 0.142-kg baseball has a terminal speed of 42.5 m/s
(95 mi/h). (a) If a baseball experiences a drag force of
magnitude R Cv 2, what is the value of the constant C ?
(b) What is the magnitude of the drag force when the
speed of the baseball is 36.0 m/s? (c) Use a computer
to determine the motion of a baseball thrown vertically
upward at an initial speed of 36.0 m/s. What maximum height does the ball reach? How long is it in
the air? What is its speed just before it hits the ground?
A 50.0-kg parachutist jumps from an airplane and falls
with a drag force proportional to the square of the
speed R Cv 2. Take C 0.200 kg/m with the parachute closed and C 20.0 kg/m with the chute open.
(a) Determine the terminal speed of the parachutist in
both congurations, before and after the chute is
opened. (b) Set up a numerical analysis of the motion
and compute the speed and position as functions of
time, assuming the jumper begins the descent at
1 000 m above the ground and is in free fall for 10.0 s
before opening the parachute. (Hint: When the parachute opens, a sudden large acceleration takes place; a
smaller time step may be necessary in this region.)
Consider a 10.0-kg projectile launched with an initial
speed of 100 m/s, at an angle of 35.0° elevation. The resistive force is R
b v, where b 10.0 kg/s. (a) Use a
numerical method to determine the horizontal and vertical positions of the projectile as functions of time.
(b) What is the range of this projectile? (c) Determine
the elevation angle that gives the maximum range for
the projectile. (Hint: Adjust the elevation angle by trial
and error to nd the greatest range.)
A professional golfer hits a golf ball of mass 46.0 g with
her 5-iron, and the ball rst strikes the ground 155 m
(170 yards) away. The ball experiences a drag force of
magnitude R Cv 2 and has a terminal speed of
44.0 m/s. (a) Calculate the drag constant C for the golf
ball. (b) Use a numerical method to analyze the trajectory of this shot. If the initial velocity of the ball makes
an angle of 31.0° (the loft angle) with the horizontal,
what initial speed must the ball have to reach the 155-m
distance? (c) If the same golfer hits the ball with her 9iron (47.0° loft) and it rst strikes the ground 119 m
away, what is the initial speed of the ball? Discuss the
differences in trajectories between the two shots.
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
46. An 1 800-kg car passes over a bump in a road that follows the arc of a circle of radius 42.0 m as in Figure
P6.46. (a) What force does the road exert on the car as
the car passes the highest point of the bump if the car
travels at 16.0 m/s? (b) What is the maximum speed the
car can have as it passes this highest point before losing
contact with the road?
47. A car of mass m passes over a bump in a road that follows the arc of a circle of radius R as in Figure P6.46.
(a) What force does the road exert on the car as the car
passes the highest point of the bump if the car travels at
a speed v ? (b) What is the maximum speed the car can
have as it passes this highest point before losing contact
with the road?
v
Figure P6.46
Problems 46 and 47.
48. In one model of a hydrogen atom, the electron in orbit
around the proton experiences an attractive force of
about 8.20 10 8 N. If the radius of the orbit is 5.30
10 11 m, how many revolutions does the electron make
each second? (This number of revolutions per unit time
is called the frequency of the motion.) See the inside
front cover for additional data.
49. A student builds and calibrates an accelerometer, which
she uses to determine the speed of her car around a
certain unbanked highway curve. The accelerometer is
a plumb bob with a protractor that she attaches to the
roof of her car. A friend riding in the car with her observes that the plumb bob hangs at an angle of 15.0°
from the vertical when the car has a speed of 23.0 m/s.
(a) What is the centripetal acceleration of the car
rounding the curve? (b) What is the radius of the
curve? (c) What is the speed of the car if the plumb bob
deection is 9.00° while the car is rounding the same
curve?
50. Suppose the boxcar shown in Figure 6.13 is moving with
constant acceleration a up a hill that makes an angle
with the horizontal. If the hanging pendulum makes a
constant angle with the perpendicular to the ceiling,
what is a ?
51. An air puck of mass 0.250 kg is tied to a string and allowed to revolve in a circle of radius 1.00 m on a fric-
178
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
tionless horizontal table. The other end of the string
passes through a hole in the center of the table, and a
mass of 1.00 kg is tied to it (Fig. P6.51). The suspended
mass remains in equilibrium while the puck on the
tabletop revolves. What are (a) the tension in the string,
(b) the force exerted by the string on the puck, and
(c) the speed of the puck?
52. An air puck of mass m1 is tied to a string and allowed
to revolve in a circle of radius R on a frictionless horizontal table. The other end of the string passes
through a hole in the center of the table, and a mass
m 2 is tied to it (Fig. P6.51). The suspended mass remains in equilibrium while the puck on the tabletop revolves. What are (a) the tension in the string? (b) the
central force exerted on the puck? (c) the speed of the
puck?
that, when the mass sits a distance L up along the sloping side, the speed of the mass must be
v
(g L sin )1/2
m
L
θ
Figure P6.55
Figure P6.51
WEB
Problems 51 and 52.
53. Because the Earth rotates about its axis, a point on the
equator experiences a centripetal acceleration of
0.033 7 m/s2, while a point at one of the poles experiences no centripetal acceleration. (a) Show that at the
equator the gravitational force acting on an object (the
true weight) must exceed the objects apparent weight.
(b) What is the apparent weight at the equator and at
the poles of a person having a mass of 75.0 kg? (Assume
the Earth is a uniform sphere and take g 9.800 m/s2.)
54. A string under a tension of 50.0 N is used to whirl a
rock in a horizontal circle of radius 2.50 m at a speed of
20.4 m/s. The string is pulled in and the speed of the
rock increases. When the string is 1.00 m long and the
speed of the rock is 51.0 m/s, the string breaks. What is
the breaking strength (in newtons) of the string?
55. A childs toy consists of a small wedge that has an acute
angle ( Fig. P6.55). The sloping side of the wedge is
frictionless, and a mass m on it remains at constant
height if the wedge is spun at a certain constant speed.
The wedge is spun by rotating a vertical rod that is
rmly attached to the wedge at the bottom end. Show
56. The pilot of an airplane executes a constant-speed loopthe-loop maneuver. His path is a vertical circle. The
speed of the airplane is 300 mi/h, and the radius of the
circle is 1 200 ft. (a) What is the pilots apparent weight
at the lowest point if his true weight is 160 lb? (b) What
is his apparent weight at the highest point? (c) Describe
how the pilot could experience apparent weightlessness
if both the radius and the speed can be varied. (Note:
His apparent weight is equal to the force that the seat
exerts on his body.)
57. For a satellite to move in a stable circular orbit at a constant speed, its centripetal acceleration must be inversely proportional to the square of the radius r of the
orbit. (a) Show that the tangential speed of a satellite is
proportional to r 1/2. (b) Show that the time required
to complete one orbit is proportional to r 3/2.
58. A penny of mass 3.10 g rests on a small 20.0-g block supported by a spinning disk (Fig. P6.58). If the coef-
Disk
Penny
12.0 cm
Block
Figure P6.58
179
Problems
cients of friction between block and disk are 0.750 (static) and 0.640 (kinetic) while those for the penny and
block are 0.450 (kinetic) and 0.520 (static), what is the
maximum rate of rotation (in revolutions per minute)
that the disk can have before either the block or the
penny starts to slip?
59. Figure P6.59 shows a Ferris wheel that rotates four times
each minute and has a diameter of 18.0 m. (a) What is
the centripetal acceleration of a rider? What force does
the seat exert on a 40.0-kg rider (b) at the lowest point
of the ride and (c) at the highest point of the ride?
(d) What force (magnitude and direction) does the seat
exert on a rider when the rider is halfway between top
and bottom?
8.00 m
2.50 m
θ
Figure P6.61
Figure P6.59
(Color Box/FPG)
60. A space station, in the form of a large wheel 120 m in
diameter, rotates to provide an articial gravity of
3.00 m/s2 for persons situated at the outer rim. Find
the rotational frequency of the wheel (in revolutions
per minute) that will produce this effect.
61. An amusement park ride consists of a rotating circular
platform 8.00 m in diameter from which 10.0-kg seats
are suspended at the end of 2.50-m massless chains
(Fig. P6.61). When the system rotates, the chains make
an angle
28.0° with the vertical. (a) What is the
speed of each seat? (b) Draw a free-body diagram of a
40.0-kg child riding in a seat and nd the tension in the
chain.
62. A piece of putty is initially located at point A on the rim
of a grinding wheel rotating about a horizontal axis.
The putty is dislodged from point A when the diameter
through A is horizontal. The putty then rises vertically
and returns to A the instant the wheel completes one
revolution. (a) Find the speed of a point on the rim of
the wheel in terms of the acceleration due to gravity
and the radius R of the wheel. (b) If the mass of the
putty is m, what is the magnitude of the force that held
it to the wheel?
63. An amusement park ride consists of a large vertical
cylinder that spins about its axis fast enough that any
person inside is held up against the wall when the oor
drops away (Fig. P6.63). The coefcient of static friction between person and wall is s , and the radius of
the cylinder is R. (a) Show that the maximum period of
revolution necessary to keep the person from falling is
T (4 2R s /g )1/2. (b) Obtain a numerical value for T
Figure P6.63
180
CHAPTER 6
Circular Motion and Other Applications of Newtons Laws
if R 4.00 m and s 0.400. How many revolutions
per minute does the cylinder make?
64. An example of the Coriolis effect. Suppose air resistance is
negligible for a golf ball. A golfer tees off from a location precisely at i 35.0° north latitude. He hits the
ball due south, with range 285 m. The balls initial velocity is at 48.0° above the horizontal. (a) For what
length of time is the ball in ight? The cup is due south
of the golfer s location, and he would have a hole-inone if the Earth were not rotating. As shown in Figure
P6.64, the Earths rotation makes the tee move in a circle of radius RE cos i (6.37 106 m) cos 35.0°, completing one revolution each day. (b) Find the eastward
speed of the tee, relative to the stars. The hole is also
moving eastward, but it is 285 m farther south and thus
at a slightly lower latitude f . Because the hole moves
eastward in a slightly larger circle, its speed must be
greater than that of the tee. (c) By how much does the
holes speed exceed that of the tee? During the time the
ball is in ight, it moves both upward and downward, as
well as southward with the projectile motion you studied
in Chapter 4, but it also moves eastward with the speed
you found in part (b). The hole moves to the east at a
faster speed, however, pulling ahead of the ball with the
relative speed you found in part (c). (d) How far to the
west of the hole does the ball land?
66. A car rounds a banked curve as shown in Figure 6.6.
The radius of curvature of the road is R, the banking
angle is , and the coefcient of static friction is s .
(a) Determine the range of speeds the car can have
without slipping up or down the banked surface.
(b) Find the minimum value for s such that the minimum speed is zero. (c) What is the range of speeds possible if R 100 m,
10.0°, and s 0.100 (slippery
conditions)?
67. A single bead can slide with negligible friction on a wire
that is bent into a circle of radius 15.0 cm, as in Figure
P6.67. The circle is always in a vertical plane and rotates
steadily about its vertical diameter with a period of
0.450 s. The position of the bead is described by the angle that the radial line from the center of the loop to
the bead makes with the vertical. (a) At what angle up
from the lowest point can the bead stay motionless relative to the turning circle? (b) Repeat the problem if the
period of the circles rotation is 0.850 s.
θ
Golf ball
trajectory
R E cos φ i
φi
Figure P6.67
Figure P6.64
65. A curve in a road forms part of a horizontal circle. As a
car goes around it at constant speed 14.0 m/s, the total
force exerted on the driver has magnitude 130 N. What
are the magnitude and direction of the total force exerted on the driver if the speed is 18.0 m/s instead?
68. The expression F arv br 2v 2 gives the magnitude of
the resistive force (in newtons) exerted on a sphere of
radius r (in meters) by a stream of air moving at speed
v (in meters per second), where a and b are constants
with appropriate SI units. Their numerical values are
a 3.10 10 4 and b 0.870. Using this formula, nd
the terminal speed for water droplets falling under
their own weight in air, taking the following values for
the drop radii: (a) 10.0 m, (b) 100 m, (c) 1.00 mm.
Note that for (a) and (c) you can obtain accurate answers without solving a quadratic equation, by considering which of the two contributions to the air resistance
is dominant and ignoring the lesser contribution.
69. A model airplane of mass 0.750 kg ies in a horizontal
circle at the end of a 60.0-m control wire, with a speed
of 35.0 m/s. Compute the tension in the wire if it makes
a constant angle of 20.0° with the horizontal. The forces
exerted on the airplane are the pull of the control wire,
181
Answers to Quick Quizzes
its own weight, and aerodynamic lift, which acts at 20.0°
inward from the vertical as shown in Figure P6.69.
Flift
20.0°
stable spread position versus the time of fall t. (a) Convert the distances in feet into meters. (b) Graph d (in
meters) versus t. (c) Determine the value of the terminal speed vt by nding the slope of the straight portion
of the curve. Use a least-squares t to determine this
slope.
t (s)
20.0°
T
mg
Figure P6.69
70. A 9.00-kg object starting from rest falls through a viscous medium and experiences a resistive force R
b v, where v is the velocity of the object. If the objects
speed reaches one-half its terminal speed in 5.54 s,
(a) determine the terminal speed. (b) At what time is
the speed of the object three-fourths the terminal
speed? (c) How far has the object traveled in the rst
5.54 s of motion?
71. Members of a skydiving club were given the following
data to use in planning their jumps. In the table, d is
the distance fallen from rest by a sky diver in a free-fall
d (ft)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
16
62
138
242
366
504
652
808
971
1 138
1 309
1 483
1 657
1 831
2 005
2 179
2 353
2 527
2 701
2 875
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
6.1 No. The tangential acceleration changes just the speed
part of the velocity vector. For the car to move in a circle, the direction of its velocity vector must change, and
the only way this can happen is for there to be a centripetal acceleration.
6.2 (a) The ball travels in a circular path that has a larger radius than the original circular path, and so there must
be some external force causing the change in the velocity vectors direction. The external force must not be as
strong as the original tension in the string because if it
were, the ball would follow the original path. (b) The
ball again travels in an arc, implying some kind of external force. As in part (a), the external force is directed toward the center of the new arc and not toward the center of the original circular path. (c) The ball undergoes
an abrupt change in velocity from tangent to the circle to perpendicular to it and so must have experienced a large force that had one component opposite
the balls velocity (tangent to the circle) and another
component radially outward. (d) The ball travels in a
straight line tangent to the original path. If there is an
external force, it cannot have a component perpendicular to this line because if it did, the path would curve. In
fact, if the string breaks and there is no other force acting on the ball, Newtons rst law says the ball will travel
along such a tangent line at constant speed.
6.3 At the path is along the circumference of the larger
circle. Therefore, the wire must be exerting a force on
the bead directed toward the center of the circle. Because the speed is constant, there is no tangential force
component. At the path is not curved, and so the wire
exerts no force on the bead. At the path is again
curved, and so the wire is again exerting a force on the
bead. This time the force is directed toward the center
of the smaller circle. Because the radius of this circle is
smaller, the magnitude of the force exerted on the bead
is larger here than at .
PUZZLER
Chum salmon climbing a ladder in the
McNeil River in Alaska. Why are sh ladders like this often built around dams? Do
the ladders reduce the amount of work
that the sh must do to get past the dam?
(Daniel J. Cox/Tony Stone Images)
chapter
Work and Kinetic Energy
Chapter Outline
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Work Done by a Constant Force
The Scalar Product of Two Vectors
Work Done by a Varying Force
Kinetic Energy and the Work
Kinetic Energy Theorem
7.5 Power
182
7.6 (Optional) Energy and the Automobile
7.7 (Optional) Kinetic Energy at High
Speeds
7.1
183
Work Done by a Constant Force
T
he concept of energy is one of the most important topics in science and engineering. In everyday life, we think of energy in terms of fuel for transportation
and heating, electricity for lights and appliances, and foods for consumption.
However, these ideas do not really dene energy. They merely tell us that fuels are
needed to do a job and that those fuels provide us with something we call energy.
In this chapter, we rst introduce the concept of work. Work is done by a force
acting on an object when the point of application of that force moves through
some distance and the force has a component along the line of motion. Next, we
dene kinetic energy, which is energy an object possesses because of its motion. In
general, we can think of energy as the capacity that an object has for performing
work. We shall see that the concepts of work and kinetic energy can be applied to
the dynamics of a mechanical system without resorting to Newtons laws. In a complex situation, in fact, the energy approach can often allow a much simpler
analysis than the direct application of Newtons second law. However, it is important to note that the work energy concepts are based on Newtons laws and therefore allow us to make predictions that are always in agreement with these laws.
This alternative method of describing motion is especially useful when the
force acting on a particle varies with the position of the particle. In this case, the acceleration is not constant, and we cannot apply the kinematic equations developed
in Chapter 2. Often, a particle in nature is subject to a force that varies with the position of the particle. Such forces include the gravitational force and the force exerted on an object attached to a spring. Although we could analyze situations like
these by applying numerical methods such as those discussed in Section 6.5, utilizing the ideas of work and energy is often much simpler. We describe techniques for
treating complicated systems with the help of an extremely important theorem
called the work kinetic energy theorem, which is the central topic of this chapter.
7.1
5.1
WORK DONE BY A CONSTANT FORCE
Almost all the terms we have used thus far velocity, acceleration, force, and so
on convey nearly the same meaning in physics as they do in everyday life. Now,
however, we encounter a term whose meaning in physics is distinctly different
from its everyday meaning. That new term is work.
To understand what work means to the physicist, consider the situation illustrated in Figure 7.1. A force is applied to a chalkboard eraser, and the eraser slides
along the tray. If we are interested in how effective the force is in moving the
(a)
Figure 7.1
(b)
An eraser being pushed along a chalkboard tray. (Charles D. Winters)
(c)
184
CHAPTER 7
F
Work and Kinetic Energy
eraser, we need to consider not only the magnitude of the force but also its direction. If we assume that the magnitude of the applied force is the same in all three
photographs, it is clear that the push applied in Figure 7.1b does more to move
the eraser than the push in Figure 7.1a. On the other hand, Figure 7.1c shows a
situation in which the applied force does not move the eraser at all, regardless of
how hard it is pushed. (Unless, of course, we apply a force so great that we break
something.) So, in analyzing forces to determine the work they do, we must consider the vector nature of forces. We also need to know how far the eraser moves
along the tray if we want to determine the work required to cause that motion.
Moving the eraser 3 m requires more work than moving it 2 cm.
Let us examine the situation in Figure 7.2, where an object undergoes a displacement d along a straight line while acted on by a constant force F that makes
an angle with d.
θ F cos θ
θ
d
Figure 7.2 If an object undergoes a displacement d under the
action of a constant force F, the
work done by the force is
(F cos )d.
The work W done on an object by an agent exerting a constant force on
the object is the product of the component of the force in the direction of the
displacement and the magnitude of the displacement:
Work done by a constant force
W
n
F
θ
mg
Figure 7.3 When an object is displaced on a frictionless, horizontal,
surface, the normal force n and the
force of gravity m g do no work on
the object. In the situation shown
here, F is the only force doing
work on the object.
5.3
Fd cos
(7.1)
As an example of the distinction between this denition of work and our
everyday understanding of the word, consider holding a heavy chair at arms
length for 3 min. At the end of this time interval, your tired arms may lead you to
think that you have done a considerable amount of work on the chair. According
to our denition, however, you have done no work on it whatsoever.1 You exert a
force to support the chair, but you do not move it. A force does no work on an object if the object does not move. This can be seen by noting that if d 0, Equation
7.1 gives W 0 the situation depicted in Figure 7.1c.
Also note from Equation 7.1 that the work done by a force on a moving object
is zero when the force applied is perpendicular to the objects displacement. That
90°, then W 0 because cos 90° 0. For example, in Figure 7.3, the
is, if
work done by the normal force on the object and the work done by the force of
gravity on the object are both zero because both forces are perpendicular to the
displacement and have zero components in the direction of d.
The sign of the work also depends on the direction of F relative to d. The
work done by the applied force is positive when the vector associated with the
component F cos is in the same direction as the displacement. For example,
when an object is lifted, the work done by the applied force is positive because the
direction of that force is upward, that is, in the same direction as the displacement. When the vector associated with the component F cos is in the direction
opposite the displacement, W is negative. For example, as an object is lifted, the
work done by the gravitational force on the object is negative. The factor cos in
the denition of W (Eq. 7.1) automatically takes care of the sign. It is important to
note that work is an energy transfer; if energy is transferred to the system (object), W is positive; if energy is transferred from the system, W is negative.
1
Actually, you do work while holding the chair at arms length because your muscles are continuously
contracting and relaxing; this means that they are exerting internal forces on your arm. Thus, work is
being done by your body but internally on itself rather than on the chair.
7.1
If an applied force F acts along the direction of the displacement, then
and cos 0 1. In this case, Equation 7.1 gives
W
185
Work Done by a Constant Force
0
Fd
Work is a scalar quantity, and its units are force multiplied by length. Therefore, the SI unit of work is the newton meter (N m). This combination of units is
used so frequently that it has been given a name of its own: the joule (J).
Quick Quiz 7.1
Can the component of a force that gives an object a centripetal acceleration do any work on
the object? (One such force is that exerted by the Sun on the Earth that holds the Earth in
a circular orbit around the Sun.)
In general, a particle may be moving with either a constant or a varying velocity under the inuence of several forces. In these cases, because work is a scalar
quantity, the total work done as the particle undergoes some displacement is the
algebraic sum of the amounts of work done by all the forces.
EXAMPLE 7.1
Mr. Clean
A man cleaning a oor pulls a vacuum cleaner with a force of
magnitude F 50.0 N at an angle of 30.0° with the horizontal (Fig. 7.4a). Calculate the work done by the force on the
vacuum cleaner as the vacuum cleaner is displaced 3.00 m to
the right.
50.0 N
n
Solution
Because they aid us in clarifying which forces are
acting on the object being considered, drawings like Figure
7.4b are helpful when we are gathering information and organizing a solution. For our analysis, we use the denition of
work (Eq. 7.1):
W
mg
(F cos )d
(50.0 N)(cos 30.0°)(3.00 m)
One thing we should learn from this problem is that the
normal force n, the force of gravity Fg m g, and the upward
component of the applied force (50.0 N) (sin 30.0°) do no
work on the vacuum cleaner because these forces are perpendicular to its displacement.
Exercise
Find the work done by the man on the vacuum
cleaner if he pulls it 3.0 m with a horizontal force of 32 N.
96 J.
(a)
130 N m
130 J
Answer
30.0°
n
50.0 N
y
30.0°
x
mg
(b)
Figure 7.4 (a) A vacuum cleaner being pulled at an angle of 30.0°
with the horizontal. (b) Free-body diagram of the forces acting on
the vacuum cleaner.
186
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
d
F
The weightlifter does no work on the weights as he holds them on his shoulders. (If he could rest
the bar on his shoulders and lock his knees, he would be able to support the weights for quite
some time.) Did he do any work when he raised the weights to this height?
mg
h
Quick Quiz 7.2
A person lifts a heavy box of mass m a vertical distance h and then walks horizontally a distance d while holding the box, as shown in Figure 7.5. Determine (a) the work he does on
the box and (b) the work done on the box by the force of gravity.
Figure 7.5
A person lifts a box of
mass m a vertical distance h and then
walks horizontally a distance d.
7.2
2.6
Work expressed as a dot product
T HE SCALAR PRODUCT OF TWO VECTORS
Because of the way the force and displacement vectors are combined in Equation
7.1, it is helpful to use a convenient mathematical tool called the scalar product.
This tool allows us to indicate how F and d interact in a way that depends on how
close to parallel they happen to be. We write this scalar product F d. (Because of
the dot symbol, the scalar product is often called the dot product.) Thus, we can
express Equation 7.1 as a scalar product:
W
Fd
Fd cos
(7.2)
In other words, F d (read F dot d) is a shorthand notation for Fd cos .
Scalar product of any two vectors
A and B
In general, the scalar product of any two vectors A and B is a scalar quantity
equal to the product of the magnitudes of the two vectors and the cosine of the
angle between them:
AB
AB cos
(7.3)
This relationship is shown in Figure 7.6. Note that A and B need not have the
same units.
7.2
187
The Scalar Product of Two Vectors
In Figure 7.6, B cos is the projection of B onto A. Therefore, Equation 7.3
says that A B is the product of the magnitude of A and the projection of B onto
A.2
From the right-hand side of Equation 7.3 we also see that the scalar product is
commutative.3 That is,
AB
The order of the dot product can
be reversed
BA
Finally, the scalar product obeys the distributive law of multiplication, so
that
A (B
C)
AB
AC
B
The dot product is simple to evaluate from Equation 7.3 when A is either perpendicular or parallel to B. If A is perpendicular to B (
90°), then A B 0.
(The equality A B = 0 also holds in the more trivial case when either A or B is
zero.) If vector A is parallel to vector B and the two point in the same direction
0), then A B AB. If vector A is parallel to vector B but the two point in op(
posite directions (
180°), then A B
AB. The scalar product is negative
when 90°
180°.
The unit vectors i, j, and k, which were dened in Chapter 3, lie in the positive x, y, and z directions, respectively, of a right-handed coordinate system. Therefore, it follows from the denition of A B that the scalar products of these unit
vectors are
ii
jj
kk
1
(7.4)
ij
ik
jk
0
(7.5)
Equations 3.18 and 3.19 state that two vectors A and B can be expressed in
component vector form as
A
Ax i
Ay j
Az k
B
Bx i
By j
Bz k
Using the information given in Equations 7.4 and 7.5 shows that the scalar product of A and B reduces to
AB
Ax Bx
Ay By
Az Bz
(7.6)
(Details of the derivation are left for you in Problem 7.10.) In the special case in
which A B, we see that
AA
Ax2
Ay2
Az2
A2
Quick Quiz 7.3
If the dot product of two vectors is positive, must the vectors have positive rectangular components?
2
This is equivalent to stating that A B equals the product of the magnitude of B and the projection of
A onto B.
3
This may seem obvious, but in Chapter 11 you will see another way of combining vectors that proves
useful in physics and is not commutative.
θ
A . B = AB cos θ
B cos θ
A
Figure 7.6 The scalar product
A B equals the magnitude of A
multiplied by B cos , which is the
projection of B onto A.
Dot products of unit vectors
188
CHAPTER 7
EXAMPLE 7.2
Work and Kinetic Energy
The Scalar Product
The vectors A and B are given by A 2i 3j and B
2j. (a) Determine the scalar product A B.
i
Solution
The magnitudes of A and B are
Solution
A
AB
(2i
3j) ( i
2j)
2i i
2i 2j
3j i
4(0)
3(0)
6(1)
B
3j 2j
2(1)
2
6
Ax2
Bx2
By2
AB
AB
cos
F
Fx2
Fy2
(2)2
13
5
4
4
135
65
4
8.06
60.2°
Work Done by a Constant Force
Solution Substituting the expressions for F and d into
Equations 7.4 and 7.5, we obtain
Fd
W
Solution
d
1
cos
(5.0i
5.0i 2.0i
y2
(3)2
Using Equation 7.3 and the result from part (a) we nd that
4
A particle moving in the xy plane undergoes a displacement
d (2.0i 3.0j) m as a constant force F (5.0i 2.0j) N
acts on the particle. (a) Calculate the magnitude of the displacement and that of the force.
x2
(2)2
( 1)2
Ay2
where we have used the facts that i i j j 1 and i j j i
0. The same result is obtained when we use Equation 7.6 directly, where Ax 2, Ay 3, Bx
1, and By 2.
EXAMPLE 7.3
between A and B.
(b) Find the angle
10
(2.0)2
(3.0)2
(5.0)2
0
6
3.0j) N m
2.0j 2.0i
16 N m
2.0j 3.0j
16 J
3.6 m
Exercise
(2.0)2
0
2.0j) (2.0i
5.0i 3.0j
5.4 N
Answer
Calculate the angle between F and d.
35°.
(b) Calculate the work done by F.
7.3
5.2
WORK DONE BY A VARYING FORCE
Consider a particle being displaced along the x axis under the action of a varying
force. The particle is displaced in the direction of increasing x from x xi to x
xf . In such a situation, we cannot use W ( F cos )d to calculate the work done by
the force because this relationship applies only when F is constant in magnitude
and direction. However, if we imagine that the particle undergoes a very small displacement x, shown in Figure 7.7a, then the x component of the force Fx is approximately constant over this interval; for this small displacement, we can express
the work done by the force as
W
Fx x
This is just the area of the shaded rectangle in Figure 7.7a. If we imagine that the
Fx versus x curve is divided into a large number of such intervals, then the total
work done for the displacement from xi to xf is approximately equal to the sum of
a large number of such terms:
xf
W
Fx x
xi
7.3
Area = A = Fx x
Figure 7.7
(a) The work done by the force component Fx
for the small displacement x is Fx x, which equals the area
of the shaded rectangle. The total work done for the displacement from x i to xf is approximately equal to the sum of
the areas of all the rectangles. (b) The work done by the
component Fx of the varying force as the particle moves from
xi to xf is exactly equal to the area under this curve.
Fx
Fx
xf
xi
189
Work Done by a Varying Force
x
x
(a)
Fx
Work
xf
xi
x
(b)
If the displacements are allowed to approach zero, then the number of terms in
the sum increases without limit but the value of the sum approaches a denite
value equal to the area bounded by the Fx curve and the x axis:
xf
lim
x :0 x
i
xf
Fx x
xi
Fx dx
This denite integral is numerically equal to the area under the Fx -versus-x
curve between xi and xf . Therefore, we can express the work done by Fx as the particle moves from xi to xf as
xf
W
xi
(7.7)
Fx dx
Work done by a varying force
This equation reduces to Equation 7.1 when the component Fx F cos is constant.
If more than one force acts on a particle, the total work done is just the work
done by the resultant force. If we express the resultant force in the x direction as
Fx , then the total work, or net work, done as the particle moves from xi to xf is
xf
W
EXAMPLE 7.4
Wnet
xi
(7.8)
Fx dx
Calculating Total Work Done from a Graph
A force acting on a particle varies with x, as shown in Figure
7.8. Calculate the work done by the force as the particle
moves from x 0 to x 6.0 m.
Solution The work done by the force is equal to the area
under the curve from xA 0 to x C 6.0 m. This area is
equal to the area of the rectangular section from to plus
190
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
the area of the triangular section from
to . The area of
the rectangle is (4.0)(5.0) N m 20 J, and the area of the
1
triangle is 2(2.0)(5.0) N m 5.0 J. Therefore, the total work
Fx(N)
5
done is 25 J.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
x(m)
Figure 7.8 The force acting on a particle is constant for the rst 4.0 m
of motion and then decreases linearly with x from x B 4.0 m to x C
6.0 m. The net work done by this force is the area under the curve.
EXAMPLE 7.5
Work Done by the Sun on a Probe
The interplanetary probe shown in Figure 7.9a is attracted to
the Sun by a force of magnitude
F
1022/x 2
1.3
where x is the distance measured outward from the Sun to
the probe. Graphically and analytically determine how much
Marss
orbit
Sun
work is done by the Sun on the probe as the probe Sun separation changes from 1.5 1011 m to 2.3 1011 m.
Graphical Solution The minus sign in the formula for
the force indicates that the probe is attracted to the Sun. Because the probe is moving away from the Sun, we expect to
calculate a negative value for the work done on it.
A spreadsheet or other numerical means can be used to
generate a graph like that in Figure 7.9b. Each small square
of the grid corresponds to an area (0.05 N)(0.1 1011 m)
5 108 N m. The work done is equal to the shaded area in
Figure 7.9b. Because there are approximately 60 squares
shaded, the total area (which is negative because it is below
the x axis) is about 3 1010 N m. This is the work done by
the Sun on the probe.
Earths orbit
(a)
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
× 1011 x(m)
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
F(N)
(b)
Figure 7.9 (a) An interplanetary probe moves
from a position near the Earths orbit radially outward from the Sun, ending up near the orbit of
Mars. (b) Attractive force versus distance for the interplanetary probe.
7.3
Analytical Solution We can use Equation 7.7 to calculate a more precise value for the work done on the probe by
the Sun. To solve this integral, we use the rst formula of
Table B.5 in Appendix B with n
2:
2.3 1011
W
1.5
1022
1.3
1022)
1.5 1011
x
2
dx
1022)( x
2.3
1
1011
1)
Work Done by a Spring
A common physical system for which the force varies with position is shown in Figure 7.10. A block on a horizontal, frictionless surface is connected to a spring. If
the spring is either stretched or compressed a small distance from its unstretched
(equilibrium) conguration, it exerts on the block a force of magnitude
Fs
(7.9)
kx
where x is the displacement of the block from its unstretched (x 0) position and
k is a positive constant called the force constant of the spring. In other words, the
force required to stretch or compress a spring is proportional to the amount of
stretch or compression x. This force law for springs, known as Hookes law, is
valid only in the limiting case of small displacements. The value of k is a measure
of the stiffness of the spring. Stiff springs have large k values, and soft springs have
small k values.
Quick Quiz 7.4
What are the units for k, the force constant in Hookes law?
The negative sign in Equation 7.9 signies that the force exerted by the spring
is always directed opposite the displacement. When x 0 as in Figure 7.10a, the
spring force is directed to the left, in the negative x direction. When x 0 as in
Figure 7.10c, the spring force is directed to the right, in the positive x direction.
When x 0 as in Figure 7.10b, the spring is unstretched and Fs 0. Because the
spring force always acts toward the equilibrium position (x 0), it sometimes is
called a restoring force. If the spring is compressed until the block is at the point
x max and is then released, the block moves from x max through zero to x max.
If the spring is instead stretched until the block is at the point x max and is then released, the block moves from x max through zero to x max. It then reverses direction, returns to x max, and continues oscillating back and forth.
Suppose the block has been pushed to the left a distance x max from equilibrium and is then released. Let us calculate the work Ws done by the spring force as
the block moves from xi
x max to xf 0. Applying Equation 7.7 and assuming
the block may be treated as a particle, we obtain
xf
Ws
xi
Fs dx
1
1011
No; the value of W depends only on the initial and
nal positions, not on the path taken between these points.
1.5 1011
5.3
1.5
1010 J
Answer
2.3 1011
( 1.3
3.0
1022)
Does it matter whether the path of the probe is
not directed along a radial line away from the Sun?
2.3 1011
( 1.3
( 1.3
Exercise
dx
x2
1011
191
Work Done by a Varying Force
0
( kx)dx
x max
12
2 kxmax
(7.10)
Spring force
192
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
Fs is negative.
x is positive.
x
x
x=0
(a)
Fs = 0
x=0
x
x=0
(b)
Fs is positive.
x is negative.
x
x
x=0
(c)
Fs
1
Area = kx 2max
2
kx max
x
0
xmax
Fs = kx
(d)
Figure 7.10
The force exerted by a spring on a block varies with the blocks displacement x
from the equilibrium position x 0. (a) When x is positive (stretched spring), the spring force is
directed to the left. (b) When x is zero (natural length of the spring), the spring force is zero.
(c) When x is negative (compressed spring), the spring force is directed to the right. (d) Graph
of Fs versus x for the block spring system. The work done by the spring force as the block moves
from x max to 0 is the area of the shaded triangle, 1 kx 2 .
max
2
where we have used the indenite integral x ndx x n 1/(n 1) with n 1. The
work done by the spring force is positive because the force is in the same direction
as the displacement (both are to the right). When we consider the work done by
the spring force as the block moves from xi 0 to xf x max, we nd that
7.3
193
Work Done by a Varying Force
12
Ws
2 kx max because for this part of the motion the displacement is to the right
and the spring force is to the left. Therefore, the net work done by the spring force
as the block moves from xi
x max to xf x max is zero.
Figure 7.10d is a plot of Fs versus x. The work calculated in Equation 7.10 is
the area of the shaded triangle, corresponding to the displacement from x max to
0. Because the triangle has base x max and height kx max, its area is 1 kx2 , the work
2 max
done by the spring as given by Equation 7.10.
If the block undergoes an arbitrary displacement from x xi to x xf , the
work done by the spring force is
xf
1
2
2 kxi
( kx)dx
Ws
xi
1
2
2 kxf
(7.11)
For example, if the spring has a force constant of 80 N/m and is compressed
3.0 cm from equilibrium, the work done by the spring force as the block moves
from xi
3.0 cm to its unstretched position xf 0 is 3.6 10 2 J. From Equation 7.11 we also see that the work done by the spring force is zero for any motion
that ends where it began (xi xf ). We shall make use of this important result in
Chapter 8, in which we describe the motion of this system in greater detail.
Equations 7.10 and 7.11 describe the work done by the spring on the block.
Now let us consider the work done on the spring by an external agent that stretches
the spring very slowly from xi 0 to xf x max, as in Figure 7.11. We can calculate
this work by noting that at any value of the displacement, the applied force Fapp is
equal to and opposite the spring force Fs , so that Fapp
( kx ) kx. Therefore,
the work done by this applied force (the external agent) is
x max
WFapp
0
x max
Fapp dx
kx dx
0
1
2
2 kx max
Work done by a spring
Fs
Fapp
xi = 0
xf = x max
Figure 7.11 A block being
pulled from xi 0 to xf x max on
a frictionless surface by a force
Fapp . If the process is carried out
very slowly, the applied force is
equal to and opposite the spring
force at all times.
This work is equal to the negative of the work done by the spring force for this displacement.
EXAMPLE 7.6
Measuring k for a Spring
A common technique used to measure the force constant of
a spring is described in Figure 7.12. The spring is hung vertically, and an object of mass m is attached to its lower end. Under the action of the load mg, the spring stretches a distance d from its equilibrium position. Because the spring
force is upward (opposite the displacement), it must balance
the downward force of gravity m g when the system is at rest.
In this case, we can apply Hookes law to give Fs
kd mg,
or
k
k
d
mg
d
For example, if a spring is stretched 2.0 cm by a suspended
object having a mass of 0.55 kg, then the force constant is
mg
d
Fs
(0.55 kg)(9.80 m/s2)
2.0 10 2 m
2.7
102 N/m
mg
(a)
Figure 7.12
(b)
(c)
Determining the force constant k of a spring. The
elongation d is caused by the attached object, which has a weight mg.
Because the spring force balances the force of gravity, it follows that
k mg/d.
194
CHAPTER 7
7.4
5.7
d
ΣF
m
vi
vf
Figure 7.13 A particle undergoing a displacement d and a change
in velocity under the action of a
constant net force F.
Work and Kinetic Energy
KINETIC ENERGY AND THE
WORK KINETIC ENERGY THEOREM
It can be difcult to use Newtons second law to solve motion problems involving
complex forces. An alternative approach is to relate the speed of a moving particle
to its displacement under the inuence of some net force. If the work done by the
net force on a particle can be calculated for a given displacement, then the change
in the particles speed can be easily evaluated.
Figure 7.13 shows a particle of mass m moving to the right under the action of
a constant net force F. Because the force is constant, we know from Newtons second law that the particle moves with a constant acceleration a. If the particle is displaced a distance d, the net work done by the total force F is
W
(7.12)
(ma)d
Fd
In Chapter 2 we found that the following relationships are valid when a particle
undergoes constant acceleration:
d
1
2 (vi
vf )t
vf
a
vi
t
where vi is the speed at t 0 and vf is the speed at time t. Substituting these expressions into Equation 7.12 gives
vf
W
m
W
1
2
2 mvf
vi
t
1
2 (vi
vf)t
1
2
2 mvi
(7.13)
1
2
2 mv
The quantity
represents the energy associated with the motion of the
particle. This quantity is so important that it has been given a special name kinetic energy. The net work done on a particle by a constant net force F acting
on it equals the change in kinetic energy of the particle.
In general, the kinetic energy K of a particle of mass m moving with a speed v
is dened as
Kinetic energy is energy associated
with the motion of a body
K
1
2
2 mv
(7.14)
TABLE 7.1 Kinetic Energies for Various Objects
Object
Mass (kg)
Earth orbiting the Sun
Moon orbiting the Earth
Rocket moving at escape speeda
Automobile at 55 mi/h
Running athlete
Stone dropped from 10 m
Golf ball at terminal speed
Raindrop at terminal speed
Oxygen molecule in air
5.98 1024
7.35 1022
500
2 000
70
1.0
0.046
3.5 10 5
5.3 10 26
a
Speed (m/s) Kinetic Energy ( J)
2.98 104
1.02 103
1.12 104
25
10
14
44
9.0
500
2.65
3.82
3.14
6.3
3.5
9.8
4.5
1.4
6.6
1033
1028
1010
105
103
101
101
10 3
10 21
Escape speed is the minimum speed an object must attain near the Earths surface if it is to escape
the Earths gravitational force.
7.4
5.4
195
Kinetic Energy and the Work Kinetic Energy Theorem
Kinetic energy is a scalar quantity and has the same units as work. For example, a 2.0-kg object moving with a speed of 4.0 m/s has a kinetic energy of 16 J.
Table 7.1 lists the kinetic energies for various objects.
It is often convenient to write Equation 7.13 in the form
W
Kf
Ki
(7.15)
K
Work kinetic energy theorem
That is, Ki
W Kf .
Equation 7.15 is an important result known as the work kinetic energy theorem. It is important to note that when we use this theorem, we must include all
of the forces that do work on the particle in the calculation of the net work done.
From this theorem, we see that the speed of a particle increases if the net work
done on it is positive because the nal kinetic energy is greater than the initial kinetic energy. The particles speed decreases if the net work done is negative because the nal kinetic energy is less than the initial kinetic energy.
The work kinetic energy theorem as expressed by Equation 7.15 allows us to
think of kinetic energy as the work a particle can do in coming to rest, or the
amount of energy stored in the particle. For example, suppose a hammer (our
particle) is on the verge of striking a nail, as shown in Figure 7.14. The moving
hammer has kinetic energy and so can do work on the nail. The work done on the
nail is equal to Fd, where F is the average force exerted on the nail by the hammer
and d is the distance the nail is driven into the wall.4
We derived the work kinetic energy theorem under the assumption of a constant net force, but it also is valid when the force varies. To see this, suppose the
net force acting on a particle in the x direction is Fx . We can apply Newtons second law, Fx max , and use Equation 7.8 to express the net work done as
xf
xf
W
Fx dx
xi
max dx
xi
If the resultant force varies with x, the acceleration and speed also depend on x.
Because we normally consider acceleration as a function of t, we now use the following chain rule to express a in a slightly different way:
a
dv
dt
dv dx
dx dt
dv
dx
v
Figure 7.14 The moving hammer has kinetic energy and thus
can do work on the nail, driving it
into the wall.
Substituting this expression for a into the above equation for W gives
xf
W
mv
xi
W
dv
dx
dx
1
2
2 mv f
vf
mv dv
vi
1
2
2 mv i
(7.16)
The limits of the integration were changed from x values to v values because the
variable was changed from x to v. Thus, we conclude that the net work done on a
particle by the net force acting on it is equal to the change in the kinetic energy of
the particle. This is true whether or not the net force is constant.
4
Note that because the nail and the hammer are systems of particles rather than single particles, part of
the hammers kinetic energy goes into warming the hammer and the nail upon impact. Also, as the nail
moves into the wall in response to the impact, the large frictional force between the nail and the wood
results in the continuous transformation of the kinetic energy of the nail into further temperature increases in the nail and the wood, as well as in deformation of the wall. Energy associated with temperature changes is called internal energy and will be studied in detail in Chapter 20.
The net work done on a particle
equals the change in its kinetic
energy
196
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
Situations Involving Kinetic Friction
One way to include frictional forces in analyzing the motion of an object sliding
on a horizontal surface is to describe the kinetic energy lost because of friction.
Suppose a book moving on a horizontal surface is given an initial horizontal velocity vi and slides a distance d before reaching a nal velocity vf as shown in Figure
7.15. The external force that causes the book to undergo an acceleration in the
negative x direction is the force of kinetic friction fk acting to the left, opposite the
motion. The initial kinetic energy of the book is 1 mvi2, and its nal kinetic energy
2
is 1 mvf 2 . Applying Newtons second law to the book can show this. Because the
2
only force acting on the book in the x direction is the friction force, Newtons second law gives fk max . Multiplying both sides of this expression by d and using
Equation 2.12 in the form vxf 2 vxi2 2ax d for motion under constant accelerafkd (max)d 1 mvxf 2 1 mvxi2 or
tion give
2
2
Kfriction
Loss in kinetic energy due to
friction
d
vi
vf
fk
Figure 7.15 A book sliding to
the right on a horizontal surface
slows down in the presence of a
force of kinetic friction acting to
the left. The initial velocity of the
book is vi , and its nal velocity is
vf . The normal force and the force
of gravity are not included in the
diagram because they are perpendicular to the direction of motion
and therefore do not inuence the
books velocity.
EXAMPLE 7.7
(7.17a)
fk d
This result species that the amount by which the force of kinetic friction changes
the kinetic energy of the book is equal to fk d. Part of this lost kinetic energy goes
into warming up the book, and the rest goes into warming up the surface over
which the book slides. In effect, the quantity fk d is equal to the work done by kinetic friction on the book plus the work done by kinetic friction on the surface.
(We shall study the relationship between temperature and energy in Part III of this
text.) When friction as well as other forces acts on an object, the work kinetic
energy theorem reads
Ki
Wother
fk d
Kf
(7.17b)
Here, Wother represents the sum of the amounts of work done on the object by
forces other than kinetic friction.
Quick Quiz 7.5
Can frictional forces ever increase an objects kinetic energy?
A Block Pulled on a Frictionless Surface
A 6.0-kg block initially at rest is pulled to the right along a
horizontal, frictionless surface by a constant horizontal force
of 12 N. Find the speed of the block after it has moved 3.0 m.
n
Solution We have made a drawing of this situation in Figure 7.16a. We could apply the equations of kinematics to determine the answer, but let us use the energy approach for
n
vf
F
vf
F
fk
d
mg
d
mg
(a)
(b)
Figure 7.16 A block pulled to the right by a
constant horizontal force. (a) Frictionless surface.
(b) Rough surface.
7.4
practice. The normal force balances the force of gravity on
the block, and neither of these vertically acting forces does
work on the block because the displacement is horizontal.
Because there is no friction, the net external force acting on
the block is the 12-N force. The work done by this force is
W
(12 N)(3.0 m)
Fd
36 N m
EXAMPLE 7.8
Kf
Ki
1
2
2 mvf
Answer
0
(12 N)(3.0 m)
36 J
In this case we must use Equation 7.17a to calculate the kinetic energy lost to friction K friction . The magnitude of the
frictional force is
fk
kn
(0.15)(6.0 kg)(9.80 m/s2)
k mg
8.82 N
The change in kinetic energy due to friction is
K friction
fk d
2.0 m/s2; vf
ax
3.5 m/s.
A Block Pulled on a Rough Surface
7.7:
Fd
12 m2/s2
Find the acceleration of the block and determine
its nal speed, using the kinematics equation vxf 2
vxi2 2ax d.
0
(8.82 N)(3.0 m)
26.5 J
1
2
(6.0 kg) vf 2
2(9.5 J)/(6.0 kg)
vf
3.18 m2/s2
1.8 m/s
After sliding the 3-m distance on the rough surface, the block
is moving at a speed of 1.8 m/s; in contrast, after covering
the same distance on a frictionless surface (see Example 7.7),
its speed was 3.5 m/s.
Exercise
Find the acceleration of the block from Newtons
second law and determine its nal speed, using equations of
kinematics.
Answer
26.5 J
36 J
vf 2
The applied force does work just as in Example
W
2(36 J)
6.0 kg
3.5 m/s
vf
Find the nal speed of the block described in Example 7.7 if
the surface is not frictionless but instead has a coefcient of
kinetic friction of 0.15.
Solution
2W
m
vf 2
Exercise
36 J
Using the work kinetic energy theorem and noting that
the initial kinetic energy is zero, we obtain
W
197
Kinetic Energy and the Work Kinetic Energy Theorem
ax
0.53 m/s2; vf
1.8 m/s.
The nal speed of the block follows from Equation 7.17b:
1
2
mvi2
Wother
fk d
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 7.9
1
2
mvf 2
Does the Ramp Lessen the Work Required?
A man wishes to load a refrigerator onto a truck using a
ramp, as shown in Figure 7.17. He claims that less work would
be required to load the truck if the length L of the ramp were
increased. Is his statement valid?
Solution No. Although less force is required with a longer
ramp, that force must act over a greater distance if the same
amount of work is to be done. Suppose the refrigerator is
wheeled on a dolly up the ramp at constant speed. The
L
Figure 7.17 A refrigerator attached to a
frictionless wheeled dolly is moved up a ramp
at constant speed.
198
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
normal force exerted by the ramp on the refrigerator is directed 90° to the motion and so does no work on the refrigerator. Because K 0, the work kinetic energy theorem gives
W
Wby man
Wby gravity
0
the refrigerator mg times the vertical height h through which
mgh. (The miit is displaced times cos 180°, or W by gravity
nus sign arises because the downward force of gravity is opposite the displacement.) Thus, the man must do work mgh on
the refrigerator, regardless of the length of the ramp.
The work done by the force of gravity equals the weight of
QuickLab
Attach two paperclips to a ruler so
that one of the clips is twice the distance from the end as the other.
Place the ruler on a table with two
small wads of paper against the clips,
which act as stops. Sharply swing the
ruler through a small angle, stopping
it abruptly with your nger. The outer
paper wad will have twice the speed
of the inner paper wad as the two
slide on the table away from the ruler.
Compare how far the two wads slide.
How does this relate to the results of
Conceptual Example 7.10?
Consider the chum salmon attempting to swim upstream in the photograph at
the beginning of this chapter. The steps of a sh ladder built around a dam do
not change the total amount of work that must be done by the salmon as they leap
through some vertical distance. However, the ladder allows the sh to perform
that work in a series of smaller jumps, and the net effect is to raise the vertical position of the sh by the height of the dam.
Crumpled wads of paper
Paperclips
These cyclists are working hard and expending energy as they pedal uphill in Marin County, CA.
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 7.10
Useful Physics for Safer Driving
A certain car traveling at an initial speed v slides a distance d
to a halt after its brakes lock. Assuming that the cars initial
speed is instead 2v at the moment the brakes lock, estimate
the distance it slides.
Solution Let us assume that the force of kinetic friction
between the car and the road surface is constant and the
same for both speeds. The net force multiplied by the displacement of the car is equal to the initial kinetic energy of
the car (because Kf 0). If the speed is doubled, as it is in
this example, the kinetic energy is quadrupled. For a given
constant applied force (in this case, the frictional force), the
distance traveled is four times as great when the initial speed is
doubled, and so the estimated distance that the car slides is 4d.
7.5
EXAMPLE 7.11
A Block Spring System
A block of mass 1.6 kg is attached to a horizontal spring that
has a force constant of 1.0 103 N/m, as shown in Figure
7.10. The spring is compressed 2.0 cm and is then released
from rest. (a) Calculate the speed of the block as it passes
through the equilibrium position x 0 if the surface is frictionless.
Solution
In this situation, the block starts with vi 0 at
xi
2.0 cm, and we want to nd vf at xf 0. We use Equation 7.10 to nd the work done by the spring with xmax
xi
2.0 cm
2.0 10 2 m:
Ws
12
2 kx max
1
2 (1.0
103 N/m)( 2.0
10
2
m)2
Ws
1
2
2 mvf
0.20 J
1
2 (1.6
vf
Solution Certainly, the answer has to be less than what we
found in part (a) because the frictional force retards the motion. We use Equation 7.17 to calculate the kinetic energy lost
because of friction and add this negative value to the kinetic
energy found in the absence of friction. The kinetic energy
lost due to friction is
K
(4.0 N)(2.0
fk d
Kf
1
2 (1.6
0.20 J
kg)vf 2
vf 2
0.40 J
1.6 kg
vf
0
0.25 m2/s2
0.50 m/s
2
m)
0.24 J
1.6 kg
0.080 J
0.12 J
5.8
1
2
2 mvf
0.15 m2/s2
0.39 m/s
As expected, this value is somewhat less than the 0.50 m/s we
found in part (a). If the frictional force were greater, then
the value we obtained as our answer would have been even
smaller.
(b) Calculate the speed of the block as it passes through
the equilibrium position if a constant frictional force of 4.0 N
retards its motion from the moment it is released.
7.5
0.080 J
0.12 J
1
2
2 mvi
kg)vf 2
10
In part (a), the nal kinetic energy without this loss was
found to be 0.20 J. Therefore, the nal kinetic energy in the
presence of friction is
0.20 J
Using the work kinetic energy theorem with vi 0, we obtain the change in kinetic energy of the block due to the
work done on it by the spring:
vf 2
199
Power
POWER
Imagine two identical models of an automobile: one with a base-priced four-cylinder engine; and the other with the highest-priced optional engine, a mighty eightcylinder powerplant. Despite the differences in engines, the two cars have the
same mass. Both cars climb a roadway up a hill, but the car with the optional engine takes much less time to reach the top. Both cars have done the same amount
of work against gravity, but in different time periods. From a practical viewpoint, it
is interesting to know not only the work done by the vehicles but also the rate at
which it is done. In taking the ratio of the amount of work done to the time taken
to do it, we have a way of quantifying this concept. The time rate of doing work is
called power.
If an external force is applied to an object (which we assume acts as a particle), and if the work done by this force in the time interval t is W, then the average power expended during this interval is dened as
W
t
The work done on the object contributes to the increase in the energy of the object. Therefore, a more general denition of power is the time rate of energy transfer.
In a manner similar to how we approached the denition of velocity and accelera-
Average power
200
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
tion, we can dene the instantaneous power
age power as t approaches zero:
as the limiting value of the aver-
W
t
lim
t:0
dW
dt
where we have represented the increment of work done by dW. We nd from
Equation 7.2, letting the displacement be expressed as d s, that dW F d s.
Therefore, the instantaneous power can be written
dW
dt
Instantaneous power
F
ds
dt
(7.18)
Fv
where we use the fact that v d s/dt.
The SI unit of power is joules per second (J/s), also called the watt (W) (after
James Watt, the inventor of the steam engine):
1W
The watt
1 kg m2/s3
1 J/s
The symbol W (not italic) for watt should not be confused with the symbol W
(italic) for work.
A unit of power in the British engineering system is the horsepower (hp):
1 hp
746 W
A unit of energy (or work) can now be dened in terms of the unit of power.
One kilowatt hour (kWh) is the energy converted or consumed in 1 h at the constant rate of 1 kW 1 000 J/s. The numerical value of 1 kWh is
The kilowatt hour is a unit of
energy
(103 W)(3 600 s)
1 kWh
106 J
3.60
It is important to realize that a kilowatt hour is a unit of energy, not power.
When you pay your electric bill, you pay the power company for the total electrical
energy you used during the billing period. This energy is the power used multiplied by the time during which it was used. For example, a 300-W lightbulb run for
12 h would convert (0.300 kW)(12 h) 3.6 kWh of electrical energy.
Quick Quiz 7.6
Suppose that an old truck and a sports car do the same amount of work as they climb a hill
but that the truck takes much longer to accomplish this work. How would graphs of versus t compare for the two vehicles?
EXAMPLE 7.12
Power Delivered by an Elevator Motor
An elevator car has a mass of 1 000 kg and is carrying passengers having a combined mass of 800 kg. A constant frictional
force of 4 000 N retards its motion upward, as shown in Figure 7.18a. (a) What must be the minimum power delivered
by the motor to lift the elevator car at a constant speed of
3.00 m/s?
Solution The motor must supply the force of magnitude
T that pulls the elevator car upward. Reading that the speed
is constant provides the hint that a 0, and therefore we
know from Newtons second law that Fy 0. We have drawn
a free-body diagram in Figure 7.18b and have arbitrarily specied that the upward direction is positive. From Newtons second law we obtain
Fy
T
f
Mg
0
where M is the total mass of the system (car plus passengers),
equal to 1 800 kg. Therefore,
T
f
Mg
4.00
103 N
2.16
104
N
(1.80
103 kg)(9.80 m/s2)
7.6
Using Equation 7.18 and the fact that T is in the same direction as v, we nd that
Tv
Tv
long as the speed is less than /T
2.77 m/s, but it is
greater when the elevators speed exceeds this value.
Motor
104 N)(3.00 m/s)
(2.16
201
Energy and the Automobile
6.48
104 W
T
(b) What power must the motor deliver at the instant its
speed is v if it is designed to provide an upward acceleration
of 1.00 m/s2?
+
Solution Now we expect to obtain a value greater than we
did in part (a), where the speed was constant, because the
motor must now perform the additional task of accelerating
the car. The only change in the setup of the problem is that
now a 0. Applying Newtons second law to the car gives
Fy
T
T
f
M(a
Mg
g)
f
103 kg)(1.00
(1.80
2.34
f
Ma
104
9.80)m/s2
4.00
103 N
Mg
N
Therefore, using Equation 7.18, we obtain for the required
power
Tv
(2.34
104v) W
where v is the instantaneous speed of the car in meters per
second. The power is less than that obtained in part (a) as
(a)
(b)
Figure 7.18 (a) The motor exerts an upward force T on the elevator car. The magnitude of this force is the tension T in the cable connecting the car and motor. The downward forces acting on the car
are a frictional force f and the force of gravity Fg M g. (b) The
free-body diagram for the elevator car.
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 7.13
In part (a) of the preceding example, the motor delivers
power to lift the car, and yet the car moves at constant speed.
A student analyzing this situation notes that the kinetic energy of the car does not change because its speed does not
change. This student then reasons that, according to the
work kinetic energy theorem, W
K 0. Knowing that
W/t, the student concludes that the power delivered by
the motor also must be zero. How would you explain this apparent paradox?
Solution The work kinetic energy theorem tells us that
the net force acting on the system multiplied by the displacement is equal to the change in the kinetic energy of the system. In our elevator case, the net force is indeed zero (that is,
T Mg f 0), and so W ( F y)d 0. However, the
power from the motor is calculated not from the net force but
rather from the force exerted by the motor acting in the direction of motion, which in this case is T and not zero.
Optional Section
7.6
ENERGY AND THE AUTOMOBILE
Automobiles powered by gasoline engines are very inefcient machines. Even under ideal conditions, less than 15% of the chemical energy in the fuel is used to
power the vehicle. The situation is much worse under stop-and-go driving conditions in a city. In this section, we use the concepts of energy, power, and friction to
analyze automobile fuel consumption.
202
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
Many mechanisms contribute to energy loss in an automobile. About 67% of
the energy available from the fuel is lost in the engine. This energy ends up in the
atmosphere, partly via the exhaust system and partly via the cooling system. (As we
shall see in Chapter 22, the great energy loss from the exhaust and cooling systems
is required by a fundamental law of thermodynamics.) Approximately 10% of the
available energy is lost to friction in the transmission, drive shaft, wheel and axle
bearings, and differential. Friction in other moving parts dissipates approximately
6% of the energy, and 4% of the energy is used to operate fuel and oil pumps and
such accessories as power steering and air conditioning. This leaves a mere 13% of
the available energy to propel the automobile! This energy is used mainly to balance the energy loss due to exing of the tires and the friction caused by the air,
which is more commonly referred to as air resistance.
Let us examine the power required to provide a force in the forward direction
that balances the combination of the two frictional forces. The coefcient of
rolling friction between the tires and the road is about 0.016. For a 1 450-kg car,
the weight is 14 200 N and the force of rolling friction has a magnitude of n
mg 227 N. As the speed of the car increases, a small reduction in the normal
force occurs as a result of a decrease in atmospheric pressure as air ows over the
top of the car. (This phenomenon is discussed in Chapter 15.) This reduction in
the normal force causes a slight reduction in the force of rolling friction fr with increasing speed, as the data in Table 7.2 indicate.
Now let us consider the effect of the resistive force that results from the movement of air past the car. For large objects, the resistive force fa associated with air
friction is proportional to the square of the speed (in meters per second; see Section 6.4) and is given by Equation 6.6:
fa
1
2D
Av2
where D is the drag coefcient, is the density of air, and A is the cross-sectional
area of the moving object. We can use this expression to calculate the fa values in
Table 7.2, using D 0.50,
1.293 kg/m3, and A 2 m2.
The magnitude of the total frictional force ft is the sum of the rolling frictional
force and the air resistive force:
ft
fr
fa
At low speeds, road friction is the predominant resistive force, but at high
speeds air drag predominates, as shown in Table 7.2. Road friction can be decreased by a reduction in tire exing (for example, by an increase in the air pres-
TABLE 7.2 Frictional Forces and Power Requirements for a Typical Car a
v (m/s)
n (N)
fr (N)
fa (N)
ft (N)
ft v (kW)
0
8.9
17.8
26.8
35.9
44.8
14 200
14 100
13 900
13 600
13 200
12 600
227
226
222
218
211
202
0
51
204
465
830
1 293
227
277
426
683
1 041
1 495
0
2.5
7.6
18.3
37.3
67.0
a In this table, n is the normal force, f is road friction, f is air friction, f is total friction, and
r
a
t
the power delivered to the wheels.
is
7.6
203
Energy and the Automobile
sure slightly above recommended values) and by the use of radial tires. Air drag
can be reduced through the use of a smaller cross-sectional area and by streamlining the car. Although driving a car with the windows open increases air drag and
thus results in a 3% decrease in mileage, driving with the windows closed and the
air conditioner running results in a 12% decrease in mileage.
The total power needed to maintain a constant speed v is ft v, and it is this
power that must be delivered to the wheels. For example, from Table 7.2 we see
that at v 26.8 m/s (60 mi/h) the required power is
ft v
(683 N) 26.8
m
s
18.3 kW
This power can be broken down into two parts: (1) the power fr v needed to compensate for road friction, and (2) the power fa v needed to compensate for air drag. At v
26.8 m/s, we obtain the values
r
fr v
(218 N) 26.8
m
s
5.84 kW
a
fa v
(465 N) 26.8
m
s
12.5 kW
Note that
r
a.
On the other hand, at v 44.8 m/s (100 mi/h), r 9.05 kW, a 57.9 kW,
and
67.0 kW. This shows the importance of air drag at high speeds.
EXAMPLE 7.14
Gas Consumed by a Compact Car
A compact car has a mass of 800 kg, and its efciency is rated
at 18%. (That is, 18% of the available fuel energy is delivered
to the wheels.) Find the amount of gasoline used to accelerate the car from rest to 27 m/s (60 mi/h). Use the fact that
the energy equivalent of 1 gal of gasoline is 1.3 108 J.
Number of gallons
Solution
The energy required to accelerate the car from
rest to a speed v is its nal kinetic energy 1 mv 2:
2
K
would supply 1.3 108 J of energy. Because the engine is
only 18% efcient, each gallon delivers only (0.18)(1.3
108 J) 2.3 107 J. Hence, the number of gallons used to
accelerate the car is
1
2
2 mv
1
2 (800
kg)(27 m/s)2
2.9
105 J
2.9
2.3
105 J
107 J/gal
0.013 gal
At cruising speed, this much gasoline is sufcient to propel
the car nearly 0.5 mi. This demonstrates the extreme energy
requirements of stop-and-start driving.
If the engine were 100% efcient, each gallon of gasoline
EXAMPLE 7.15
Power Delivered to Wheels
Suppose the compact car in Example 7.14 gets 35 mi/gal at
60 mi/h. How much power is delivered to the wheels?
Solution By simply canceling units, we determine that the
car consumes 60 mi/h 35 mi/gal 1.7 gal/h. Using the
fact that each gallon is equivalent to 1.3 108 J, we nd that
the total power used is
(1.7 gal/h)(1.3 108 J/gal)
3.6 103 s/h
2.2
3.6
108 J
103 s
62 kW
Because 18% of the available power is used to propel the car,
the power delivered to the wheels is (0.18)(62 kW)
11 kW.
This is 40% less than the 18.3-kW value obtained
for the 1 450-kg car discussed in the text. Vehicle mass is
clearly an important factor in power-loss mechanisms.
204
CHAPTER 7
EXAMPLE 7.16
Work and Kinetic Energy
Car Accelerating Up a Hill
y
Consider a car of mass m that is accelerating up a hill, as
shown in Figure 7.19. An automotive engineer has measured
the magnitude of the total resistive force to be
(218
ft
0.70v 2)
x
n
F
N
where v is the speed in meters per second. Determine the
power the engine must deliver to the wheels as a function of
speed.
ft
θ
mg
Solution
The forces on the car are shown in Figure 7.19,
in which F is the force of friction from the road that propels
the car; the remaining forces have their usual meaning. Applying Newtons second law to the motion along the road surface, we nd that
Fx
F
F
ft
ma
ma
mg sin
mg sin
mg sin
ma
Figure 7.19
1.0 m/s2, and
lated to be
ft
mva
(218
0.70v2)
mva
mvg sin
218v
mvg sin
The term mva represents the power that the engine must deliver to accelerate the car. If the car moves at constant speed,
this term is zero and the total power requirement is reduced.
The term mvg sin is the power required to provide a force
to balance a component of the force of gravity as the car
moves up the incline. This term would be zero for motion on
a horizontal surface. The term 218v is the power required to
provide a force to balance road friction, and the term 0.70v 3
is the power needed to do work on the air.
If we take m 1 450 kg, v 27 m/s ( 60 mi/h), a
218 v
0.70 v 3
52 hp
(1 450 kg)(27 m/s)(9.80 m/s2)(sin 10°)
67 kW
0.70v 3
are calcu-
(1 450 kg)(27 m/s)(1.0 m/s2)
39 kW
Therefore, the power required to move the car forward is
Fv
10°, then the various terms in
89 hp
218(27 m/s)
0.70(27
5.9 kW
m/s)3
14 kW
7.9 hp
19 hp
Hence, the total power required is 126 kW, or
168 hp.
Note that the power requirements for traveling at constant
speed on a horizontal surface are only 20 kW, or 27 hp (the
sum of the last two terms). Furthermore, if the mass were
halved (as in the case of a compact car), then the power required also is reduced by almost the same factor.
Optional Section
7.7
KINETIC ENERGY AT HIGH SPEEDS
The laws of Newtonian mechanics are valid only for describing the motion of particles moving at speeds that are small compared with the speed of light in a vacuum
c ( 3.00 108 m/s). When speeds are comparable to c, the equations of Newtonian mechanics must be replaced by the more general equations predicted by the
theory of relativity. One consequence of the theory of relativity is that the kinetic
energy of a particle of mass m moving with a speed v is no longer given by
K mv 2/2. Instead, one must use the relativistic form of the kinetic energy:
Relativistic kinetic energy
K
mc2
1
1
(v/c)2
1
(7.19)
According to this expression, speeds greater than c are not allowed because, as
v approaches c, K approaches . This limitation is consistent with experimental ob-
Summary
servations on subatomic particles, which have shown that no particles travel at
speeds greater than c. (In other words, c is the ultimate speed.) From this relativistic point of view, the work kinetic energy theorem says that v can only approach c
because it would take an innite amount of work to attain the speed v c.
All formulas in the theory of relativity must reduce to those in Newtonian mechanics at low particle speeds. It is instructive to show that this is the case for the
kinetic energy relationship by analyzing Equation 7.19 when v is small compared
with c. In this case, we expect K to reduce to the Newtonian expression. We can
check this by using the binomial expansion (Appendix B.5) applied to the quantity [1 (v/c )2] 1/2, with v/c V 1. If we let x (v/c )2, the expansion gives
(1
1
x)1/2
32
x
8
x
2
1
Making use of this expansion in Equation 7.19 gives
mc2 1
v2
2c2
12
mv
2
K
3
v4
m2
8
c
12
mv
2
3 v4
8 c4
1
v
V1
c
for
Thus, we see that the relativistic kinetic energy expression does indeed reduce to
the Newtonian expression for speeds that are small compared with c. We shall return to the subject of relativity in Chapter 39.
SUMMARY
The work done by a constant force F acting on a particle is dened as the product
of the component of the force in the direction of the particles displacement and
the magnitude of the displacement. Given a force F that makes an angle with the
displacement vector d of a particle acted on by the force, you should be able to determine the work done by F using the equation
W
Fd cos
(7.1)
The scalar product (dot product) of two vectors A and B is dened by the relationship
AB
AB cos
(7.3)
where the result is a scalar quantity and is the angle between the two vectors. The
scalar product obeys the commutative and distributive laws.
If a varying force does work on a particle as the particle moves along the x axis
from xi to xf , you must use the expression
xf
W
xi
Fx dx
(7.7)
where Fx is the component of force in the x direction. If several forces are acting
on the particle, the net work done by all of the forces is the sum of the amounts of
work done by all of the forces.
205
206
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
The kinetic energy of a particle of mass m moving with a speed v (where v is
small compared with the speed of light) is
1
2
2 mv
K
(7.14)
The work kinetic energy theorem states that the net work done on a particle by external forces equals the change in kinetic energy of the particle:
W
Kf
Ki
1
2
2 mvf
1
2
2 mvi
(7.16)
If a frictional force acts, then the work kinetic energy theorem can be modied
to give
Ki
Wother
fk d
Kf
(7.17b)
The instantaneous power is dened as the time rate of energy transfer. If
an agent applies a force F to an object moving with a velocity v, the power delivered by that agent is
dW
dt
Fv
(7.18)
QUESTIONS
1. Consider a tug-of-war in which two teams pulling on a
rope are evenly matched so that no motion takes place.
Assume that the rope does not stretch. Is work done on
the rope? On the pullers? On the ground? Is work done
on anything?
2. For what values of is the scalar product (a) positive and
(b) negative?
3. As the load on a spring hung vertically is increased, one
would not expect the Fs-versus-x curve to always remain
linear, as shown in Figure 7.10d. Explain qualitatively
what you would expect for this curve as m is increased.
4. Can the kinetic energy of an object be negative? Explain.
5. (a) If the speed of a particle is doubled, what happens to
its kinetic energy? (b) If the net work done on a particle
is zero, what can be said about the speed?
6. In Example 7.16, does the required power increase or decrease as the force of friction is reduced?
7. An automobile sales representative claims that a soupedup 300-hp engine is a necessary option in a compact car
(instead of a conventional 130-hp engine). Suppose you
intend to drive the car within speed limits ( 55 mi/h)
and on at terrain. How would you counter this sales
pitch?
8. One bullet has twice the mass of another bullet. If both
bullets are red so that they have the same speed, which
has the greater kinetic energy? What is the ratio of the kinetic energies of the two bullets?
9. When a punter kicks a football, is he doing any work on
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
the ball while his toe is in contact with it? Is he doing
any work on the ball after it loses contact with his toe?
Are any forces doing work on the ball while it is in
ight?
Discuss the work done by a pitcher throwing a baseball.
What is the approximate distance through which the
force acts as the ball is thrown?
Two sharpshooters re 0.30-caliber ries using identical
shells. The barrel of rie A is 2.00 cm longer than that of
rie B. Which rie will have the higher muzzle speed?
(Hint: The force of the expanding gases in the barrel accelerates the bullets.)
As a simple pendulum swings back and forth, the forces
acting on the suspended mass are the force of gravity, the
tension in the supporting cord, and air resistance.
(a) Which of these forces, if any, does no work on the
pendulum? (b) Which of these forces does negative work
at all times during its motion? (c) Describe the work done
by the force of gravity while the pendulum is swinging.
The kinetic energy of an object depends on the frame of
reference in which its motion is measured. Give an example to illustrate this point.
An older model car accelerates from 0 to a speed v in
10 s. A newer, more powerful sports car accelerates from
0 to 2v in the same time period. What is the ratio of powers expended by the two cars? Consider the energy coming from the engines to appear only as kinetic energy of
the cars.
207
Problems
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
Section 7.1 Work Done by a Constant Force
WEB
1. A tugboat exerts a constant force of 5 000 N on a ship
moving at constant speed through a harbor. How much
work does the tugboat do on the ship in a distance of
3.00 km?
2. A shopper in a supermarket pushes a cart with a force
of 35.0 N directed at an angle of 25.0° downward from
the horizontal. Find the work done by the shopper as
she moves down an aisle 50.0 m in length.
3. A raindrop (m 3.35 10 5 kg) falls vertically at constant speed under the inuence of gravity and air resistance. After the drop has fallen 100 m, what is the work
done (a) by gravity and (b) by air resistance?
4. A sledge loaded with bricks has a total mass of 18.0 kg
and is pulled at constant speed by a rope. The rope is
inclined at 20.0° above the horizontal, and the sledge
moves a distance of 20.0 m on a horizontal surface. The
coefcient of kinetic friction between the sledge and
the surface is 0.500. (a) What is the tension of the rope?
(b) How much work is done on the sledge by the rope?
(c) What is the energy lost due to friction?
5. A block of mass 2.50 kg is pushed 2.20 m along a frictionless horizontal table by a constant 16.0-N force directed 25.0° below the horizontal. Determine the work
done by (a) the applied force, (b) the normal force exerted by the table, and (c) the force of gravity. (d) Determine the total work done on the block.
6. A 15.0-kg block is dragged over a rough, horizontal surface by a 70.0-N force acting at 20.0° above the horizontal. The block is displaced 5.00 m, and the coefcient of
kinetic friction is 0.300. Find the work done by (a) the
70-N force, (b) the normal force, and (c) the force of
gravity. (d) What is the energy loss due to friction?
(e) Find the total change in the blocks kinetic energy.
7. Batman, whose mass is 80.0 kg, is holding onto the free
end of a 12.0-m rope, the other end of which is xed to
a tree limb above. He is able to get the rope in motion
as only Batman knows how, eventually getting it to swing
enough so that he can reach a ledge when the rope
makes a 60.0° angle with the vertical. How much work
was done against the force of gravity in this maneuver?
WEB
y
118°
x
132°
32.8 N
17.3 cm/s
Figure P7.14
Section 7.3
Section 7.2 The Scalar Product of Two Vectors
In Problems 8 to 14, calculate all numerical answers to three
signicant gures.
8. Vector A has a magnitude of 5.00 units, and vector B
has a magnitude of 9.00 units. The two vectors make an
angle of 50.0° with each other. Find A B.
9. Vector A extends from the origin to a point having polar coordinates (7, 70°), and vector B extends from the
origin to a point having polar coordinates (4, 130°).
Find A B.
10. Given two arbitrary vectors A and B, show that A B
Ax Bx Ay By Az Bz . (Hint: Write A and B in unit vector
form and use Equations 7.4 and 7.5.)
11. A force F (6i 2j) N acts on a particle that undergoes a displacement d (3i j)m. Find (a) the work
done by the force on the particle and (b) the angle between F and d.
12. For A 3i j k, B
i 2j 5k, and C 2j
3k, nd C (A B).
13. Using the denition of the scalar product, nd the angles between (a) A 3i 2j and B 4i 4j; (b) A
2i 4j and B 3i 4j 2k; (c) A i 2j 2k
and B 3j 4k.
14. Find the scalar product of the vectors in Figure P7.14.
WEB
Work Done by a Varying Force
15. The force acting on a particle varies as shown in Figure
P7.15. Find the work done by the force as the particle
moves (a) from x 0 to x 8.00 m, (b) from x 8.00 m
to x 10.0 m, and (c) from x 0 to x 10.0 m.
16. The force acting on a particle is Fx (8x 16) N,
where x is in meters. (a) Make a plot of this force versus
x from x 0 to x 3.00 m. (b) From your graph, nd
the net work done by this force as the particle moves
from x 0 to x 3.00 m.
17. A particle is subject to a force Fx that varies with position
as in Figure P7.17. Find the work done by the force on
the body as it moves (a) from x 0 to x 5.00 m,
208
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
Fx(N)
k2
6
k1
4
2
2
4
6
8
10
x(m)
2
4
Figure P7.15
2000
Total
1500
force
(N)
1000
Fx(N)
3
500
2
1
0
2
4
6
8
10 12 14 16
x(m)
0
10
20 30 40
Distance (cm)
50
60
Figure P7.21
Figure P7.17
18.
19.
20.
21.
Problems 17 and 32.
(b) from x 5.00 m to x 10.0 m, and (c) from x
10.0 m to x 15.0 m. (d) What is the total work done
by the force over the distance x 0 to x 15.0 m?
A force F (4x i 3y j) N acts on an object as it moves
in the x direction from the origin to x 5.00 m. Find
the work W
F dr done on the object by the force.
When a 4.00-kg mass is hung vertically on a certain light
spring that obeys Hookes law, the spring stretches
2.50 cm. If the 4.00-kg mass is removed, (a) how far will
the spring stretch if a 1.50-kg mass is hung on it and
(b) how much work must an external agent do to
stretch the same spring 4.00 cm from its unstretched
position?
An archer pulls her bow string back 0.400 m by exerting
a force that increases uniformly from zero to 230 N.
(a) What is the equivalent spring constant of the bow?
(b) How much work is done by the archer in pulling
the bow?
A 6 000-kg freight car rolls along rails with negligible
friction. The car is brought to rest by a combination of
two coiled springs, as illustrated in Figure P7.21. Both
springs obey Hookes law with k1 1 600 N/m and
k 2 3 400 N/m. After the rst spring compresses a distance of 30.0 cm, the second spring (acting with the
rst) increases the force so that additional compression
occurs, as shown in the graph. If the car is brought to
rest 50.0 cm after rst contacting the two-spring system,
nd the cars initial speed.
22. A 100-g bullet is red from a rie having a barrel
0.600 m long. Assuming the origin is placed where the
bullet begins to move, the force (in newtons) exerted
on the bullet by the expanding gas is 15 000
10 000x 25 000x 2, where x is in meters. (a) Determine the work done by the gas on the bullet as the bullet travels the length of the barrel. (b) If the barrel is
1.00 m long, how much work is done and how does this
value compare with the work calculated in part (a)?
23. If it takes 4.00 J of work to stretch a Hookes-law spring
10.0 cm from its unstressed length, determine the extra
work required to stretch it an additional 10.0 cm.
24. If it takes work W to stretch a Hookes-law spring a distance d from its unstressed length, determine the extra
work required to stretch it an additional distance d .
25. A small mass m is pulled to the top of a frictionless halfcylinder (of radius R ) by a cord that passes over the top
of the cylinder, as illustrated in Figure P7.25. (a) If the
mass moves at a constant speed, show that F mg cos .
(Hint: If the mass moves at a constant speed, the component of its acceleration tangent to the cylinder must
be zero at all times.) (b) By directly integrating
W
F d s, nd the work done in moving the mass at
constant speed from the bottom to the top of the half-
Problems
F
m
R
θ
Figure P7.25
cylinder. Here d s represents an incremental displacement of the small mass.
26. Express the unit of the force constant of a spring in
terms of the basic units meter, kilogram, and second.
Section 7.4
Kinetic Energy and the Work Kinetic Energy
Theorem
27. A 0.600-kg particle has a speed of 2.00 m/s at point A
and kinetic energy of 7.50 J at point B. What is (a) its kinetic energy at A ? (b) its speed at B ? (c) the total work
done on the particle as it moves from A to B ?
28. A 0.300-kg ball has a speed of 15.0 m/s. (a) What is its
kinetic energy? (b) If its speed were doubled, what
would be its kinetic energy?
29. A 3.00-kg mass has an initial velocity vi (6.00i
2.00j) m/s. (a) What is its kinetic energy at this time?
(b) Find the total work done on the object if its velocity
changes to (8.00i 4.00j) m/s. (Hint: Remember that
v 2 v v.)
30. A mechanic pushes a 2 500-kg car, moving it from rest
and making it accelerate from rest to a speed v. He does
5 000 J of work in the process. During this time, the car
moves 25.0 m. If friction between the car and the road
is negligible, (a) what is the nal speed v of the car? (b)
What constant horizontal force did he exert on the car?
31. A mechanic pushes a car of mass m, doing work W in
making it accelerate from rest. If friction between the
car and the road is negligible, (a) what is the nal
speed of the car? During the time the mechanic pushes
the car, the car moves a distance d. (b) What constant
horizontal force did the mechanic exert on the car?
32. A 4.00-kg particle is subject to a total force that varies
with position, as shown in Figure P7.17. The particle
starts from rest at x 0. What is its speed at (a) x
5.00 m, (b) x 10.0 m, (c) x 15.0 m?
33. A 40.0-kg box initially at rest is pushed 5.00 m along a
rough, horizontal oor with a constant applied horizontal force of 130 N. If the coefcient of friction between
the box and the oor is 0.300, nd (a) the work done
by the applied force, (b) the energy loss due to friction,
(c) the work done by the normal force, (d) the work
done by gravity, (e) the change in kinetic energy of the
box, and (f) the nal speed of the box.
WEB
209
34. You can think of the work kinetic energy theorem as a
second theory of motion, parallel to Newtons laws in
describing how outside inuences affect the motion
of an object. In this problem, work out parts (a) and
(b) separately from parts (c) and (d) to compare the
predictions of the two theories. In a rie barrel, a 15.0-g
bullet is accelerated from rest to a speed of 780 m/s.
(a) Find the work that is done on the bullet. (b) If the
rie barrel is 72.0 cm long, nd the magnitude of the
average total force that acted on it, as F W/(d cos ).
(c) Find the constant acceleration of a bullet that starts
from rest and gains a speed of 780 m/s over a distance
of 72.0 cm. (d) Find the total force that acted on it as
F ma.
35. A crate of mass 10.0 kg is pulled up a rough incline with
an initial speed of 1.50 m/s. The pulling force is 100 N
parallel to the incline, which makes an angle of 20.0°
with the horizontal. The coefcient of kinetic friction is
0.400, and the crate is pulled 5.00 m. (a) How much
work is done by gravity? (b) How much energy is lost
because of friction? (c) How much work is done by the
100-N force? (d) What is the change in kinetic energy of
the crate? (e) What is the speed of the crate after it has
been pulled 5.00 m?
36. A block of mass 12.0 kg slides from rest down a frictionless 35.0° incline and is stopped by a strong spring with
k 3.00 104 N/m. The block slides 3.00 m from the
point of release to the point where it comes to rest
against the spring. When the block comes to rest, how
far has the spring been compressed?
37. A sled of mass m is given a kick on a frozen pond. The
kick imparts to it an initial speed vi 2.00 m/s. The coefcient of kinetic friction between the sled and the ice
is k 0.100. Utilizing energy considerations, nd the
distance the sled moves before it stops.
38. A picture tube in a certain television set is 36.0 cm long.
The electrical force accelerates an electron in the tube
from rest to 1.00% of the speed of light over this distance. Determine (a) the kinetic energy of the electron
as it strikes the screen at the end of the tube, (b) the
magnitude of the average electrical force acting on the
electron over this distance, (c) the magnitude of the average acceleration of the electron over this distance,
and (d) the time of ight.
39. A bullet with a mass of 5.00 g and a speed of 600 m/s
penetrates a tree to a depth of 4.00 cm. (a) Use work
and energy considerations to nd the average frictional
force that stops the bullet. (b) Assuming that the frictional force is constant, determine how much time
elapsed between the moment the bullet entered the
tree and the moment it stopped.
40. An Atwoods machine (see Fig. 5.15) supports masses of
0.200 kg and 0.300 kg. The masses are held at rest beside each other and then released. Neglecting friction,
what is the speed of each mass the instant it has moved
0.400 m?
210
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
41. A 2.00-kg block is attached to a spring of force constant
500 N/m, as shown in Figure 7.10. The block is pulled
5.00 cm to the right of equilibrium and is then released
from rest. Find the speed of the block as it passes
through equilibrium if (a) the horizontal surface is frictionless and (b) the coefcient of friction between the
block and the surface is 0.350.
Section 7.5
WEB
Power
42. Make an order-of-magnitude estimate of the power a car
engine contributes to speeding up the car to highway
speed. For concreteness, consider your own car (if you
use one). In your solution, state the physical quantities
you take as data and the values you measure or estimate
for them. The mass of the vehicle is given in the
owners manual. If you do not wish to consider a car,
think about a bus or truck for which you specify the
necessary physical quantities.
43. A 700-N Marine in basic training climbs a 10.0-m vertical rope at a constant speed in 8.00 s. What is his power
output?
44. If a certain horse can maintain 1.00 hp of output for
2.00 h, how many 70.0-kg bundles of shingles can the
horse hoist (using some pulley arrangement) to the
roof of a house 8.00 m tall, assuming 70.0% efciency?
45. A certain automobile engine delivers 2.24 104 W
(30.0 hp) to its wheels when moving at a constant speed
of 27.0 m/s ( 60 mi/h). What is the resistive force acting on the automobile at that speed?
46. A skier of mass 70.0 kg is pulled up a slope by a motordriven cable. (a) How much work is required for him to
be pulled a distance of 60.0 m up a 30.0° slope (assumed
frictionless) at a constant speed of 2.00 m/s? (b) A motor
of what power is required to perform this task?
47. A 650-kg elevator starts from rest. It moves upward for
3.00 s with constant acceleration until it reaches its
cruising speed of 1.75 m/s. (a) What is the average
power of the elevator motor during this period?
(b) How does this power compare with its power when
it moves at its cruising speed?
48. An energy-efcient lightbulb, taking in 28.0 W of power,
can produce the same level of brightness as a conventional bulb operating at 100-W power. The lifetime of
the energy-efcient bulb is 10 000 h and its purchase
price is $17.0, whereas the conventional bulb has a lifetime of 750 h and costs $0.420 per bulb. Determine the
total savings obtained through the use of one energyefcient bulb over its lifetime as opposed to the use of
conventional bulbs over the same time period. Assume
an energy cost of $0.080 0 per kilowatt hour.
(Optional)
Section 7.7
Kinetic Energy at High Speeds
52. An electron moves with a speed of 0.995c. (a) What is its
kinetic energy? (b) If you use the classical expression to
calculate its kinetic energy, what percentage error
results?
53. A proton in a high-energy accelerator moves with a
speed of c/2. Using the work kinetic energy theorem,
nd the work required to increase its speed to
(a) 0.750c and (b) 0.995c.
54. Find the kinetic energy of a 78.0-kg spacecraft launched
out of the Solar System with a speed of 106 km/s using
(a) the classical equation K 1 mv 2 and (b) the rela2
tivistic equation.
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
55. A baseball outelder throws a 0.150-kg baseball at a
speed of 40.0 m/s and an initial angle of 30.0°. What is
the kinetic energy of the baseball at the highest point of
the trajectory?
56. While running, a person dissipates about 0.600 J of mechanical energy per step per kilogram of body mass. If a
60.0-kg runner dissipates a power of 70.0 W during a
race, how fast is the person running? Assume a running
step is 1.50 m in length.
57. A particle of mass m moves with a constant acceleration
a. If the initial position vector and velocity of the particle are ri and vi , respectively, use energy arguments to
show that its speed vf at any time satises the equation
vf 2
(Optional)
Section 7.6
burning 1 gal of gasoline supplies 1.34 108 J of energy, nd the amount of gasoline used by the car in accelerating from rest to 55.0 mi/h. Here you may ignore
the effects of air resistance and rolling resistance.
(b) How many such accelerations will 1 gal provide?
(c) The mileage claimed for the car is 38.0 mi/gal at
55 mi/h. What power is delivered to the wheels (to
overcome frictional effects) when the car is driven at
this speed?
50. Suppose the empty car described in Table 7.2 has a fuel
economy of 6.40 km/L (15 mi/gal) when traveling at
26.8 m/s (60 mi/h). Assuming constant efciency, determine the fuel economy of the car if the total mass of
the passengers and the driver is 350 kg.
51. When an air conditioner is added to the car described
in Problem 50, the additional output power required to
operate the air conditioner is 1.54 kW. If the fuel economy of the car is 6.40 km/L without the air conditioner,
what is it when the air conditioner is operating?
Energy and the Automobile
49. A compact car of mass 900 kg has an overall motor efciency of 15.0%. (That is, 15.0% of the energy supplied
by the fuel is delivered to the wheels of the car.) (a) If
vi 2
2a (rf
ri )
where rf is the position vector of the particle at that
same time.
58. The direction of an arbitrary vector A can be completely specied with the angles , , and that the vec-
211
Problems
tor makes with the x, y, and z axes, respectively. If A
Ax i A y j A z k, (a) nd expressions for cos , cos ,
and cos ( known as direction cosines) and (b) show
that these angles satisfy the relation cos2
cos2
cos2
1. (Hint: Take the scalar product of A with i, j,
and k separately.)
59. A 4.00-kg particle moves along the x axis. Its position
varies with time according to x t 2.0t 3, where x is in
meters and t is in seconds. Find (a) the kinetic energy at
any time t, (b) the acceleration of the particle and the
force acting on it at time t, (c) the power being delivered to the particle at time t, and (d) the work done on
the particle in the interval t 0 to t 2.00 s.
60. A traveler at an airport takes an escalator up one oor
(Fig. P7.60). The moving staircase would itself carry
him upward with vertical velocity component v between
entry and exit points separated by height h. However,
while the escalator is moving, the hurried traveler
climbs the steps of the escalator at a rate of n steps/s.
Assume that the height of each step is hs . (a) Determine
the amount of work done by the traveler during his escalator ride, given that his mass is m. (b) Determine the
work the escalator motor does on this person.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
calculate the work done by this force when the spring is
stretched 0.100 m.
In a control system, an accelerometer consists of a
4.70-g mass sliding on a low-friction horizontal rail. A
low-mass spring attaches the mass to a ange at one end
of the rail. When subject to a steady acceleration of
0.800g, the mass is to assume a location 0.500 cm away
from its equilibrium position. Find the stiffness constant
required for the spring.
A 2 100-kg pile driver is used to drive a steel I-beam into
the ground. The pile driver falls 5.00 m before coming
into contact with the beam, and it drives the beam
12.0 cm into the ground before coming to rest. Using
energy considerations, calculate the average force the
beam exerts on the pile driver while the pile driver is
brought to rest.
A cyclist and her bicycle have a combined mass of
75.0 kg. She coasts down a road inclined at 2.00° with
the horizontal at 4.00 m/s and down a road inclined at
4.00° at 8.00 m/s. She then holds on to a moving vehicle and coasts on a level road. What power must the vehicle expend to maintain her speed at 3.00 m/s? Assume that the force of air resistance is proportional to
her speed and that other frictional forces remain constant. (Warning: You must not attempt this dangerous
maneuver.)
A single constant force F acts on a particle of mass m.
The particle starts at rest at t 0. (a) Show that the instantaneous power delivered by the force at any time t is
(F 2/m)t. (b) If F 20.0 N and m 5.00 kg, what is the
power delivered at t 3.00 s?
A particle is attached between two identical springs on a
horizontal frictionless table. Both springs have spring
constant k and are initially unstressed. (a) If the particle
is pulled a distance x along a direction perpendicular to
the initial conguration of the springs, as in Figure
P7.66, show that the force exerted on the particle by the
springs is
F
2kx 1
L
x 2
L2
i
(b) Determine the amount of work done by this force
in moving the particle from x A to x 0.
k
L
x
A
Figure P7.60
(©Ron Chapple/FPG)
61. When a certain spring is stretched beyond its proportional limit, the restoring force satises the equation
F
kx
x 3. If k 10.0 N/m and
100 N/m3,
L
k
Top view
Figure P7.66
212
CHAPTER 7
Work and Kinetic Energy
67. Review Problem. Two constant forces act on a 5.00-kg
object moving in the xy plane, as shown in Figure P7.67.
Force F1 is 25.0 N at 35.0°, while F2 42.0 N at 150°.
At time t 0, the object is at the origin and has velocity
(4.0i 2.5 j) m/s. (a) Express the two forces in
unit vector notation. Use unit vector notation for
your other answers. (b) Find the total force on the object. (c) Find the objects acceleration. Now, considering the instant t 3.00 s, (d) nd the objects velocity,
(e) its location, (f) its kinetic energy from 1 mv f 2 , and
2
WEB
(g) its kinetic energy from 1 mv i 2
F d.
2
y
F2
F1
150°
35.0°
x
4.0
32
6.0
49
8.0
64
10
79
71. The ball launcher in a pinball machine has a spring that
has a force constant of 1.20 N/cm (Fig. P7.71). The surface on which the ball moves is inclined 10.0° with respect to the horizontal. If the spring is initially compressed 5.00 cm, nd the launching speed of a 100-g
ball when the plunger is released. Friction and the mass
of the plunger are negligible.
72. In diatomic molecules, the constituent atoms exert attractive forces on each other at great distances and repulsive forces at short distances. For many molecules,
the Lennard Jones law is a good approximation to the
magnitude of these forces:
F
68. When different weights are hung on a spring, the
spring stretches to different lengths as shown in the following table. (a) Make a graph of the applied force versus the extension of the spring. By least-squares tting,
determine the straight line that best ts the data. (You
may not want to use all the data points.) (b) From the
slope of the best-t line, nd the spring constant k.
(c) If the spring is extended to 105 mm, what force
does it exert on the suspended weight?
2.0
15
Figure P7.71
13
Figure P7.67
F (N)
L (mm)
10.0°
12
14
98 112
16
126
18
149
69. A 200-g block is pressed against a spring of force constant 1.40 kN/m until the block compresses the spring
10.0 cm. The spring rests at the bottom of a ramp inclined at 60.0° to the horizontal. Using energy considerations, determine how far up the incline the block
moves before it stops (a) if there is no friction between
the block and the ramp and (b) if the coefcient of kinetic friction is 0.400.
70. A 0.400-kg particle slides around a horizontal track. The
track has a smooth, vertical outer wall forming a circle
with a radius of 1.50 m. The particle is given an initial
speed of 8.00 m/s. After one revolution, its speed has
dropped to 6.00 m/s because of friction with the rough
oor of the track. (a) Find the energy loss due to friction in one revolution. (b) Calculate the coefcient of
kinetic friction. (c) What is the total number of revolutions the particle makes before stopping?
F0 2
7
r
r
where r is the center-to-center distance between the
atoms in the molecule, is a length parameter, and F0 is
the force when r
. For an oxygen molecule, F0
9.60 10 11 N and
3.50 10 10 m. Determine
the work done by this force if the atoms are pulled
apart from r 4.00
10 10 m to r 9.00
10 10 m.
73. A horizontal string is attached to a 0.250-kg mass lying
on a rough, horizontal table. The string passes over a
light, frictionless pulley, and a 0.400-kg mass is then attached to its free end. The coefcient of sliding friction
between the 0.250-kg mass and the table is 0.200. Using
the work kinetic energy theorem, determine (a) the
speed of the masses after each has moved 20.0 m from
rest and (b) the mass that must be added to the 0.250-kg
mass so that, given an initial velocity, the masses continue to move at a constant speed. (c) What mass must
be removed from the 0.400-kg mass so that the same
outcome as in part (b) is achieved?
74. Suppose a car is modeled as a cylinder moving with a
speed v, as in Figure P7.74. In a time t, a column of air
v t
v
A
Figure P7.74
213
Answers to Quick Quizzes
of mass m must be moved a distance v t and, hence,
1
must be given a kinetic energy 2 ( m)v 2. Using this
model, show that the power loss due to air resistance is
1
1
3
2
2 Av and that the resistive force is 2 Av , where is the
density of air.
75. A particle moves along the x axis from x 12.8 m to
x 23.7 m under the inuence of a force
F
x3
375
3.75 x
where F is in newtons and x is in meters. Using numerical integration, determine the total work done by this
force during this displacement. Your result should be
accurate to within 2%.
76. More than 2 300 years ago the Greek teacher Aristotle
wrote the rst book called Physics. The following passage, rephrased with more precise terminology, is from
the end of the books Section Eta:
Let be the power of an agent causing motion; w,
the thing moved; d, the distance covered; and t, the
time taken. Then (1) a power equal to will in a
period of time equal to t move w/2 a distance 2d ;
or (2) it will move w/2 the given distance d in time
t/2. Also, if (3) the given power moves the given
object w a distance d/2 in time t/2, then (4) /2
will move w/2 the given distance d in the given
time t.
(a) Show that Aristotles proportions are included in
the equation t bwd, where b is a proportionality constant. (b) Show that our theory of motion includes this
part of Aristotles theory as one special case. In particular, describe a situation in which it is true, derive the
equation representing Aristotles proportions, and determine the proportionality constant.
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
7.1 No. The force does no work on the object because the
force is pointed toward the center of the circle and is
therefore perpendicular to the motion.
7.2 (a) Assuming the person lifts with a force of magnitude
mg, the weight of the box, the work he does during the
vertical displacement is mgh because the force is in the
direction of the displacement. The work he does during
the horizontal displacement is zero because now the
force he exerts on the box is perpendicular to the displacement. The net work he does is mgh 0 mgh.
(b) The work done by the gravitational force on the box
as the box is displaced vertically is mgh because the direction of this force is opposite the direction of the displacement. The work done by the gravitational force is
zero during the horizontal displacement because now
the direction of this force is perpendicular to the direction of the displacement. The net work done by the
gravitational force mgh 0
mgh. The total work
done on the box is mgh mgh 0.
7.3 No. For example, consider the two vectors A 3i 2 j
and B 2i j. Their dot product is A B 8, yet both
vectors have negative y components.
7.4 Force divided by displacement, which in SI units is newtons per meter (N/m).
7.5 Yes, whenever the frictional force has a component along
the direction of motion. Consider a crate sitting on the
bed of a truck as the truck accelerates to the east. The
static friction force exerted on the crate by the truck acts
to the east to give the crate the same acceleration as the
truck (assuming that the crate does not slip). Because
the crate accelerates, its kinetic energy must increase.
7.6 Because the two vehicles perform the same amount of
work, the areas under the two graphs are equal. However, the graph for the low-power truck extends over a
longer time interval and does not extend as high on the
axis as the graph for the sports car does.
High-power sports car
Low-power truck
t
PUZZLER
A common scene at a carnival is the
Ring-the-Bell attraction, in which the
player swings a heavy hammer downward in an attempt to project a mass upward to ring a bell. What is the best
strategy to win the game and impress
your friends? (Robert E. Daemmrich/Tony
Stone Images)
chapter
Potential Energy and
Conservation of Energy
Chapter Outline
8.1
8.2
Potential Energy
8.7
Conservative and
Nonconservative Forces
(Optional) Energy Diagrams and
the Equilibrium of a System
8.8
8.3
Conservative Forces and
Potential Energy
Conservation of Energy in
General
8.9
Conservation of Mechanical
Energy
(Optional) Mass Energy
Equivalence
8.10 (Optional) Quantization of
8.4
8.5
8.6
214
Work Done by Nonconservative
Forces
Relationship Between
Conservative Forces and
Potential Energy
Energy
8.1
Potential Energy
I
n Chapter 7 we introduced the concept of kinetic energy, which is the energy
associated with the motion of an object. In this chapter we introduce another
form of energy potential energy, which is the energy associated with the arrangement of a system of objects that exert forces on each other. Potential energy can
be thought of as stored energy that can either do work or be converted to kinetic
energy.
The potential energy concept can be used only when dealing with a special
class of forces called conservative forces. When only conservative forces act within an
isolated system, the kinetic energy gained (or lost) by the system as its members
change their relative positions is balanced by an equal loss (or gain) in potential
energy. This balancing of the two forms of energy is known as the principle of conservation of mechanical energy.
Energy is present in the Universe in various forms, including mechanical, electromagnetic, chemical, and nuclear. Furthermore, one form of energy can be converted to another. For example, when an electric motor is connected to a battery,
the chemical energy in the battery is converted to electrical energy in the motor,
which in turn is converted to mechanical energy as the motor turns some device.
The transformation of energy from one form to another is an essential part of the
study of physics, engineering, chemistry, biology, geology, and astronomy.
When energy is changed from one form to another, the total amount present
does not change. Conservation of energy means that although the form of energy
may change, if an object (or system) loses energy, that same amount of energy appears in another object or in the objects surroundings.
8.1
5.3
POTENTIAL ENERGY
An object that possesses kinetic energy can do work on another object for example, a moving hammer driving a nail into a wall. Now we shall introduce another
form of energy. This energy, called potential energy U, is the energy associated
with a system of objects.
Before we describe specic forms of potential energy, we must rst dene a
system, which consists of two or more objects that exert forces on one another. If
the arrangement of the system changes, then the potential energy of the
system changes. If the system consists of only two particle-like objects that exert
forces on each other, then the work done by the force acting on one of the objects
causes a transformation of energy between the objects kinetic energy and other
forms of the systems energy.
Gravitational Potential Energy
As an object falls toward the Earth, the Earth exerts a gravitational force m g on the
object, with the direction of the force being the same as the direction of the objects motion. The gravitational force does work on the object and thereby increases the objects kinetic energy. Imagine that a brick is dropped from rest directly above a nail in a board lying on the ground. When the brick is released, it
falls toward the ground, gaining speed and therefore gaining kinetic energy. The
brick Earth system has potential energy when the brick is at any distance above
the ground (that is, it has the potential to do work), and this potential energy is
converted to kinetic energy as the brick falls. The conversion from potential energy to kinetic energy occurs continuously over the entire fall. When the brick
reaches the nail and the board lying on the ground, it does work on the nail,
215
216
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
driving it into the board. What determines how much work the brick is able to do
on the nail? It is easy to see that the heavier the brick, the farther in it drives the
nail; also the higher the brick is before it is released, the more work it does when it
strikes the nail.
The product of the magnitude of the gravitational force mg acting on an object and the height y of the object is so important in physics that we give it a name:
the gravitational potential energy. The symbol for gravitational potential energy
is Ug , and so the dening equation for gravitational potential energy is
Ug
Gravitational potential energy
mg
d
yi
mg
Gravitational potential energy is the potential energy of the object Earth system.
This potential energy is transformed into kinetic energy of the system by the gravitational force. In this type of system, in which one of the members (the Earth) is
much more massive than the other (the object), the massive object can be modeled as stationary, and the kinetic energy of the system can be represented entirely
by the kinetic energy of the lighter object. Thus, the kinetic energy of the system is
represented by that of the object falling toward the Earth. Also note that Equation
8.1 is valid only for objects near the surface of the Earth, where g is approximately
constant.1
Let us now directly relate the work done on an object by the gravitational
force to the gravitational potential energy of the object Earth system. To do this,
let us consider a brick of mass m at an initial height yi above the ground, as shown
in Figure 8.1. If we neglect air resistance, then the only force that does work on
the brick as it falls is the gravitational force exerted on the brick m g. The work Wg
done by the gravitational force as the brick undergoes a downward displacement
d is
yf
Figure 8.1 The work done on
the brick by the gravitational force
as the brick falls from a height yi to
a height yf is equal to m gy i m gy f .
(8.1)
mgy
Wg
(m g) d
( mg j) (yf
yi) j
mgyi
mgyf
where we have used the fact that j j 1 (Eq. 7.4). If an object undergoes
both a horizontal and a vertical displacement, so that d (xf xi)i (yf yi)j,
then the work done by the gravitational force is still mgyi mgyf because
mg j (xf xi)i 0. Thus, the work done by the gravitational force depends only
on the change in y and not on any change in the horizontal position x.
We just learned that the quantity mgy is the gravitational potential energy of
the system Ug , and so we have
Wg
Ui
Uf
(Uf
Ui)
Ug
(8.2)
From this result, we see that the work done on any object by the gravitational force
is equal to the negative of the change in the systems gravitational potential energy.
Also, this result demonstrates that it is only the difference in the gravitational potential energy at the initial and nal locations that matters. This means that we are
free to place the origin of coordinates in any convenient location. Finally, the work
done by the gravitational force on an object as the object falls to the Earth is the
same as the work done were the object to start at the same point and slide down an
incline to the Earth. Horizontal motion does not affect the value of Wg .
The unit of gravitational potential energy is the same as that of work the
joule. Potential energy, like work and kinetic energy, is a scalar quantity.
1
The assumption that the force of gravity is constant is a good one as long as the vertical displacement
is small compared with the Earths radius.
8.1
217
Potential Energy
Quick Quiz 8.1
Can the gravitational potential energy of a system ever be negative?
EXAMPLE 8.1
The Bowler and the Sore Toe
A bowling ball held by a careless bowler slips from the
bowlers hands and drops on the bowlers toe. Choosing oor
level as the y 0 point of your coordinate system, estimate
the total work done on the ball by the force of gravity as the
ball falls. Repeat the calculation, using the top of the bowlers
head as the origin of coordinates.
Solution First, we need to estimate a few values. A bowling
ball has a mass of approximately 7 kg, and the top of a persons toe is about 0.03 m above the oor. Also, we shall assume the ball falls from a height of 0.5 m. Holding nonsignificant digits until we nish the problem, we calculate the
gravitational potential energy of the ball Earth system just
before the ball is released to be Ui mg yi
(7 kg)
(9.80 m/s2)(0.5 m) 34.3 J. A similar calculation for when
the ball reaches his toe gives Uf mg yf
(7 kg)
(9.80 m/s2)(0.03 m) 2.06 J. So, the work done by the gravitational force is Wg Ui Uf 32.24 J. We should probably
keep only one digit because of the roughness of our estimates; thus, we estimate that the gravitational force does 30 J
of work on the bowling ball as it falls. The system had 30 J of
gravitational potential energy relative to the top of the toe before the ball began its fall.
When we use the bowlers head (which we estimate to be
1.50 m above the oor) as our origin of coordinates, we nd
that Ui mg yi
(7 kg)(9.80 m/s2)( 1 m)
68.6 J and
that Uf mg yf
(7 kg)(9.80 m/s2)( 1.47 m)
100.8 J.
The work being done by the gravitational force is still
Wg
Ui
Uf
32.24 J
30 J.
Elastic Potential Energy
Now consider a system consisting of a block plus a spring, as shown in Figure 8.2.
kx. In the previous
The force that the spring exerts on the block is given by Fs
chapter, we learned that the work done by the spring force on a block connected
to the spring is given by Equation 7.11:
Ws
1
2
2 kxi
1
2
2 kxf
(8.3)
In this situation, the initial and nal x coordinates of the block are measured from
its equilibrium position, x 0. Again we see that Ws depends only on the initial
and nal x coordinates of the object and is zero for any closed path. The elastic
potential energy function associated with the system is dened by
Us
12
2 kx
(8.4)
The elastic potential energy of the system can be thought of as the energy stored
in the deformed spring (one that is either compressed or stretched from its equilibrium position). To visualize this, consider Figure 8.2, which shows a spring on a
frictionless, horizontal surface. When a block is pushed against the spring (Fig.
8.2b) and the spring is compressed a distance x , the elastic potential energy stored
in the spring is kx 2/2. When the block is released from rest, the spring snaps back
to its original length and the stored elastic potential energy is transformed into kinetic energy of the block (Fig. 8.2c). The elastic potential energy stored in the
spring is zero whenever the spring is undeformed (x 0). Energy is stored in the
spring only when the spring is either stretched or compressed. Furthermore, the
elastic potential energy is a maximum when the spring has reached its maximum
compression or extension (that is, when x is a maximum). Finally, because the
elastic potential energy is proportional to x 2, we see that Us is always positive in a
deformed spring.
Elastic potential energy stored in a
spring
218
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
x=0
m
(a)
x
Us =
m
12
2 kx
Ki = 0
(b)
x=0
v
m
Us = 0
Kf =
(c)
8.2
2
1
2 mv
Figure 8.2 (a) An undeformed
spring on a frictionless horizontal
surface. (b) A block of mass m is
pushed against the spring, compressing it a distance x. (c) When the
block is released from rest, the elastic
potential energy stored in the spring
is transferred to the block in the
form of kinetic energy.
CONSERVATIVE AND NONCONSERVATIVE FORCES
The work done by the gravitational force does not depend on whether an object
falls vertically or slides down a sloping incline. All that matters is the change in the
objects elevation. On the other hand, the energy loss due to friction on that incline depends on the distance the object slides. In other words, the path makes no
difference when we consider the work done by the gravitational force, but it does
make a difference when we consider the energy loss due to frictional forces. We
can use this varying dependence on path to classify forces as either conservative or
nonconservative.
Of the two forces just mentioned, the gravitational force is conservative and
the frictional force is nonconservative.
Conservative Forces
Properties of a conservative force
Conservative forces have two important properties:
1. A force is conservative if the work it does on a particle moving between any two
points is independent of the path taken by the particle.
2. The work done by a conservative force on a particle moving through any closed
path is zero. (A closed path is one in which the beginning and end points are
identical.)
The gravitational force is one example of a conservative force, and the force
that a spring exerts on any object attached to the spring is another. As we learned
in the preceding section, the work done by the gravitational force on an object
moving between any two points near the Earths surface is Wg mg yi mg yf .
From this equation we see that Wg depends only on the initial and nal y coordi-
8.3
219
Conservative Forces and Potential Energy
nates of the object and hence is independent of the path. Furthermore, Wg is zero
when the object moves over any closed path (where yi yf ).
For the case of the object spring system, the work Ws done by the spring force
is given by Ws 1kxi2 1kxf 2 (Eq. 8.3). Again, we see that the spring force is con2
2
servative because Ws depends only on the initial and nal x coordinates of the object and is zero for any closed path.
We can associate a potential energy with any conservative force and can do this
only for conservative forces. In the previous section, the potential energy associated
with the gravitational force was dened as Ug mgy. In general, the work Wc done
on an object by a conservative force is equal to the initial value of the potential energy associated with the object minus the nal value:
Wc
Ui
Uf
U
(8.5)
Work done by a conservative force
This equation should look familiar to you. It is the general form of the equation
for work done by the gravitational force (Eq. 8.2) and that for the work done by
the spring force (Eq. 8.3).
Nonconservative Forces
5.3
A force is nonconservative if it causes a change in mechanical energy E,
which we dene as the sum of kinetic and potential energies. For example, if a
book is sent sliding on a horizontal surface that is not frictionless, the force of kinetic friction reduces the books kinetic energy. As the book slows down, its kinetic
energy decreases. As a result of the frictional force, the temperatures of the book
and surface increase. The type of energy associated with temperature is internal energy, which we will study in detail in Chapter 20. Experience tells us that this internal energy cannot be transferred back to the kinetic energy of the book. In other
words, the energy transformation is not reversible. Because the force of kinetic
friction changes the mechanical energy of a system, it is a nonconservative force.
From the work kinetic energy theorem, we see that the work done by a conservative force on an object causes a change in the kinetic energy of the object.
The change in kinetic energy depends only on the initial and nal positions of the
object, and not on the path connecting these points. Let us compare this to the
sliding book example, in which the nonconservative force of friction is acting between the book and the surface. According to Equation 7.17a, the change in kinetic energy of the book due to friction is K friction
fkd , where d is the length
of the path over which the friction force acts. Imagine that the book slides from A
to B over the straight-line path of length d in Figure 8.3. The change in kinetic energy is fkd . Now, suppose the book slides over the semicircular path from A to B.
In this case, the path is longer and, as a result, the change in kinetic energy is
greater in magnitude than that in the straight-line case. For this particular path,
the change in kinetic energy is fk d/2 , since d is the diameter of the semicircle.
Thus, we see that for a nonconservative force, the change in kinetic energy depends on the path followed between the initial and nal points. If a potential energy is involved, then the change in the total mechanical energy depends on the
path followed. We shall return to this point in Section 8.5.
8.3
CONSERVATIVE FORCES AND POTENTIAL ENERGY
In the preceding section we found that the work done on a particle by a conservative force does not depend on the path taken by the particle. The work depends
only on the particles initial and nal coordinates. As a consequence, we can de-
Properties of a nonconservative
force
A
d
B
Figure 8.3 The loss in mechanical energy due to the force of kinetic friction depends on the path
taken as the book is moved from A
to B. The loss in mechanical energy
is greater along the red path than
along the blue path.
220
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
ne a potential energy function U such that the work done by a conservative
force equals the decrease in the potential energy of the system. The work done by
a conservative force F as a particle moves along the x axis is2
xf
Wc
xi
Fx dx
U
(8.6)
where Fx is the component of F in the direction of the displacement. That is, the
work done by a conservative force equals the negative of the change in the
potential energy associated with that force, where the change in the potential
energy is dened as U Uf Ui .
We can also express Equation 8.6 as
xf
U
Uf
Ui
xi
Fx dx
(8.7)
Therefore, U is negative when Fx and dx are in the same direction, as when an object is lowered in a gravitational eld or when a spring pushes an object toward
equilibrium.
The term potential energy implies that the object has the potential, or capability,
of either gaining kinetic energy or doing work when it is released from some point
under the inuence of a conservative force exerted on the object by some other
member of the system. It is often convenient to establish some particular location
xi as a reference point and measure all potential energy differences with respect to
it. We can then dene the potential energy function as
xf
Uf (x)
xi
Fx dx
Ui
(8.8)
The value of Ui is often taken to be zero at the reference point. It really does
not matter what value we assign to Ui , because any nonzero value merely shifts
Uf (x) by a constant amount, and only the change in potential energy is physically
meaningful.
If the conservative force is known as a function of position, we can use Equation 8.8 to calculate the change in potential energy of a system as an object within
the system moves from xi to xf . It is interesting to note that in the case of onedimensional displacement, a force is always conservative if it is a function of position only. This is not necessarily the case for motion involving two- or three-dimensional displacements.
8.4
5.9
CONSERVATION OF MECHANICAL ENERGY
An object held at some height h above the oor has no kinetic energy. However, as
we learned earlier, the gravitational potential energy of the object Earth system is
equal to mgh. If the object is dropped, it falls to the oor; as it falls, its speed and
thus its kinetic energy increase, while the potential energy of the system decreases.
If factors such as air resistance are ignored, whatever potential energy the system
loses as the object moves downward appears as kinetic energy of the object. In
other words, the sum of the kinetic and potential energies the total mechanical
energy E remains constant. This is an example of the principle of conservation
2
For a general displacement, the work done in two or three dimensions also equals Ui
f
U
F ds
U(x, y, z). We write this formally as W
i
Ui
Uf .
Uf , where
8.4
221
Conservation of Mechanical Energy
of mechanical energy. For the case of an object in free fall, this principle tells us
that any increase (or decrease) in potential energy is accompanied by an equal decrease (or increase) in kinetic energy. Note that the total mechanical energy of
a system remains constant in any isolated system of objects that interact
only through conservative forces.
Because the total mechanical energy E of a system is dened as the sum of the
kinetic and potential energies, we can write
E
K
(8.9)
U
We can state the principle of conservation of energy as Ei
Ki
Ui
Kf
Ef , and so we have
(8.10)
Uf
It is important to note that Equation 8.10 is valid only when no energy is
added to or removed from the system. Furthermore, there must be no nonconservative forces doing work within the system.
Consider the carnival Ring-the-Bell event illustrated at the beginning of the
chapter. The participant is trying to convert the initial kinetic energy of the hammer into gravitational potential energy associated with a weight that slides on a
vertical track. If the hammer has sufcient kinetic energy, the weight is lifted high
enough to reach the bell at the top of the track. To maximize the hammers kinetic energy, the player must swing the heavy hammer as rapidly as possible. The
fast-moving hammer does work on the pivoted target, which in turn does work on
the weight. Of course, greasing the track (so as to minimize energy loss due to friction) would also help but is probably not allowed!
If more than one conservative force acts on an object within a system, a potential energy function is associated with each force. In such a case, we can apply the
principle of conservation of mechanical energy for the system as
Ki
Ui
Kf
Uf
Total mechanical energy
(8.11)
where the number of terms in the sums equals the number of conservative forces
present. For example, if an object connected to a spring oscillates vertically, two
conservative forces act on the object: the spring force and the gravitational force.
The mechanical energy of an
isolated system remains constant
QuickLab
Dangle a shoe from its lace and use it
as a pendulum. Hold it to the side, release it, and note how high it swings
at the end of its arc. How does this
height compare with its initial height?
You may want to check Question 8.3
as part of your investigation.
Twin Falls on the Island of Kauai, Hawaii. The gravitational potential energy of the water Earth system when the water is at
the top of the falls is converted to kinetic energy once that water begins falling. How did the water get to the top of the cliff?
In other words, what was the original source of the gravitational potential energy when the water was at the top? (Hint:
This same source powers nearly everything on the planet.)
222
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
Quick Quiz 8.2
A ball is connected to a light spring suspended vertically, as shown in Figure 8.4. When displaced downward from its equilibrium position and released, the ball oscillates up and down.
If air resistance is neglected, is the total mechanical energy of the system (ball plus spring
plus Earth) conserved? How many forms of potential energy are there for this situation?
Quick Quiz 8.3
m
Three identical balls are thrown from the top of a building, all with the same initial speed.
The rst is thrown horizontally, the second at some angle above the horizontal, and the
third at some angle below the horizontal, as shown in Figure 8.5. Neglecting air resistance,
rank the speeds of the balls at the instant each hits the ground.
Figure 8.4 A ball connected to a
massless spring suspended vertically. What forms of potential energy are associated with the
ball spring Earth system when
the ball is displaced downward?
2
1
3
Figure 8.5 Three identical balls are thrown
with the same initial speed from the top of a
building.
EXAMPLE 8.2
Ball in Free Fall
A ball of mass m is dropped from a height h above the
ground, as shown in Figure 8.6. (a) Neglecting air resistance,
determine the speed of the ball when it is at a height y above
the ground.
Solution Because the ball is in free fall, the only force acting on it is the gravitational force. Therefore, we apply the
principle of conservation of mechanical energy to the
ball Earth system. Initially, the system has potential energy
but no kinetic energy. As the ball falls, the total mechanical
energy remains constant and equal to the initial potential energy of the system.
At the instant the ball is released, its kinetic energy is
Ki 0 and the potential energy of the system is Ui mgh.
When the ball is at a distance y above the ground, its kinetic
energy is Kf 1mvf 2 and the potential energy relative to the
2
ground is Uf mgy. Applying Equation 8.10, we obtain
Ki
0
Ui
mgh
vf 2
Kf
Uf
1
2
2 mvf
2g (h
mgy
y)
yi = h
Ui = mgh
Ki = 0
yf = y
Uf = mg y
K f = 1 mvf2
2
h
vf
y
y=0
Ug = 0
Figure 8.6 A ball is dropped from a height h above the ground.
Initially, the total energy of the ball Earth system is potential energy,
equal to mgh relative to the ground. At the elevation y, the total energy is the sum of the kinetic and potential energies.
8.4
2g (h
vf
(b) Determine the speed of the ball at y if at the instant of
release it already has an initial speed vi at the initial altitude h.
Solution In this case, the initial energy includes kinetic
energy equal to 1mvi2, and Equation 8.10 gives
2
1
2
2 mvf
mgh
EXAMPLE 8.3
vf 2
y)
The speed is always positive. If we had been asked to nd the
balls velocity, we would use the negative value of the square
root as the y component to indicate the downward motion.
1
2
2 mvi
223
Conservation of Mechanical Energy
mgy
vi2
2g(h
vi2
vf
y)
2g(h
y)
This result is consistent with the expression vy f 2
vy i 2 2g (yf yi ) from kinematics, where yi h. Furthermore, this result is valid even if the initial velocity is at an angle to the horizontal (the projectile situation) for two reasons: (1) energy is a scalar, and the kinetic energy depends
only on the magnitude of the velocity; and (2) the change in
the gravitational potential energy depends only on the
change in position in the vertical direction.
The Pendulum
A pendulum consists of a sphere of mass m attached to a light
cord of length L, as shown in Figure 8.7. The sphere is released from rest when the cord makes an angle A with the
vertical, and the pivot at P is frictionless. (a) Find the speed
of the sphere when it is at the lowest point .
Solution The only force that does work on the sphere is
the gravitational force. (The force of tension is always perpendicular to each element of the displacement and hence does
no work.) Because the gravitational force is conservative, the
total mechanical energy of the pendulum Earth system is
constant. (In other words, we can classify this as an energy
conservation problem.) As the pendulum swings, continuous
transformation between potential and kinetic energy occurs.
At the instant the pendulum is released, the energy of the system is entirely potential energy. At point the pendulum has
kinetic energy, but the system has lost some potential energy.
At
the system has regained its initial potential energy, and
the kinetic energy of the pendulum is again zero.
If we measure the y coordinates of the sphere from the
center of rotation, then yA
L cos A and yB
L. Therefore, UA
mgL cos A and UB
mgL. Applying the principle of conservation of mechanical energy to the system gives
KA
0
(1)
UA
mgL cos
KB
1
2
2 mvB
A
2 gL(1
vB
UB
cos
mgL
A)
(b) What is the tension TB in the cord at
?
Solution Because the force of tension does no work, we
cannot determine the tension using the energy method. To
nd TB , we can apply Newtons second law to the radial direction. First, recall that the centripetal acceleration of a particle
moving in a circle is equal to v 2/r directed toward the center
of rotation. Because r L in this example, we obtain
(2)
Fr
TB
mg
mar
m
P
vB2
L
Substituting (1) into (2) gives the tension at point
L cos θA
θA
L
(3)
TB
mg
2 mg (1
mg (3
T
2 cos
cos
:
A)
A)
From (2) we see that the tension at
is greater than the
weight of the sphere. Furthermore, (3) gives the expected result that TB mg when the initial angle A 0.
mg
Figure 8.7
If the sphere is released from rest at the angle A it will
never swing above this position during its motion. At the start of the
motion, position , the energy is entirely potential. This initial potential energy is all transformed into kinetic energy at the lowest elevation . As the sphere continues to move along the arc, the energy
again becomes entirely potential energy at .
Exercise
A pendulum of length 2.00 m and mass 0.500 kg
is released from rest when the cord makes an angle of 30.0°
with the vertical. Find the speed of the sphere and the tension in the cord when the sphere is at its lowest point.
Answer
2.29 m/s; 6.21 N.
224
CHAPTER 8
8.5
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
WORK DONE BY NONCONSERVATIVE FORCES
As we have seen, if the forces acting on objects within a system are conservative,
then the mechanical energy of the system remains constant. However, if some of
the forces acting on objects within the system are not conservative, then the mechanical energy of the system does not remain constant. Let us examine two types
of nonconservative forces: an applied force and the force of kinetic friction.
Work Done by an Applied Force
When you lift a book through some distance by applying a force to it, the force
you apply does work Wapp on the book, while the gravitational force does work Wg
on the book. If we treat the book as a particle, then the net work done on the
book is related to the change in its kinetic energy as described by the work
kinetic energy theorem given by Equation 7.15:
Wapp
Wg
K
(8.12)
Because the gravitational force is conservative, we can use Equation 8.2 to express
the work done by the gravitational force in terms of the change in potential enU. Substituting this into Equation 8.12 gives
ergy, or Wg
Wapp
K
U
(8.13)
Note that the right side of this equation represents the change in the mechanical
energy of the book Earth system. This result indicates that your applied force
transfers energy to the system in the form of kinetic energy of the book and gravitational potential energy of the book Earth system. Thus, we conclude that if an
object is part of a system, then an applied force can transfer energy into or out
of the system.
Situations Involving Kinetic Friction
QuickLab
Find a friend and play a game of
racquetball. After a long volley, feel
the ball and note that it is warm. Why
is that?
Kinetic friction is an example of a nonconservative force. If a book is given some
initial velocity on a horizontal surface that is not frictionless, then the force of kinetic friction acting on the book opposes its motion and the book slows down and
eventually stops. The force of kinetic friction reduces the kinetic energy of the
book by transforming kinetic energy to internal energy of the book and part of the
horizontal surface. Only part of the books kinetic energy is transformed to internal energy in the book. The rest appears as internal energy in the surface. (When
you trip and fall while running across a gymnasium oor, not only does the skin on
your knees warm up but so does the oor!)
As the book moves through a distance d, the only force that does work is the
force of kinetic friction. This force causes a decrease in the kinetic energy of the
book. This decrease was calculated in Chapter 7, leading to Equation 7.17a, which
we repeat here:
Kfriction
fkd
(8.14)
If the book moves on an incline that is not frictionless, a change in the gravitational potential energy of the book Earth system also occurs, and fkd is the
amount by which the mechanical energy of the system changes because of the
force of kinetic friction. In such cases,
E
K
U
fkd
(8.15)
where Ei
E
Ef .
8.5
225
Work Done by Nonconservative Forces
Quick Quiz 8.4
Write down the work kinetic energy theorem for the general case of two objects that are
connected by a spring and acted upon by gravity and some other external applied force. Include the effects of friction as Efriction .
Problem-Solving Hints
Conservation of Energy
We can solve many problems in physics using the principle of conservation of
energy. You should incorporate the following procedure when you apply this
principle:
Dene your system, which may include two or more interacting particles, as
well as springs or other systems in which elastic potential energy can be
stored. Choose the initial and nal points.
Identify zero points for potential energy (both gravitational and spring). If
there is more than one conservative force, write an expression for the potential energy associated with each force.
Determine whether any nonconservative forces are present. Remember that
if friction or air resistance is present, mechanical energy is not conserved.
If mechanical energy is conserved, you can write the total initial energy
E i K i U i at some point. Then, write an expression for the total nal energy E f K f U f at the nal point that is of interest. Because mechanical
energy is conserved, you can equate the two total energies and solve for the
quantity that is unknown.
If frictional forces are present (and thus mechanical energy is not conserved ),
rst write expressions for the total initial and total nal energies. In this
case, the difference between the total nal mechanical energy and the total
initial mechanical energy equals the change in mechanical energy in the system due to friction.
EXAMPLE 8.4
Crate Sliding Down a Ramp
A 3.00-kg crate slides down a ramp. The ramp is 1.00 m in
length and inclined at an angle of 30.0°, as shown in Figure
8.8. The crate starts from rest at the top, experiences a constant frictional force of magnitude 5.00 N, and continues to
move a short distance on the at oor after it leaves the
ramp. Use energy methods to determine the speed of the
crate at the bottom of the ramp.
Solution Because vi 0, the initial kinetic energy at the
top of the ramp is zero. If the y coordinate is measured from
the bottom of the ramp (the nal position where the potential energy is zero) with the upward direction being positive,
then yi 0.500 m. Therefore, the total mechanical energy of
the crate Earth system at the top is all potential energy:
Ei
Ki
Ui
0
Ui
mg yi
(3.00 kg)(9.80 m/s2)(0.500 m)
14.7 J
vi = 0
d = 1.00 m
vf
0.500 m
30.0°
Figure 8.8 A crate slides down a ramp under the inuence of gravity. The potential energy decreases while the kinetic energy increases.
226
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
We cannot say that Ei Ef because a nonconservative force
reduces the mechanical energy of the system: the force of kinetic friction acting on the crate. In this case, Equation 8.15
gives E
fk d, where d is the displacement along the
ramp. (Remember that the forces normal to the ramp do no
work on the crate because they are perpendicular to the displacement.) With fk 5.00 N and d 1.00 m, we have
E
fkd
(5.00 N)(1.00 m)
5.00 J
This result indicates that the system loses some mechanical
energy because of the presence of the nonconservative frictional force. Applying Equation 8.15 gives
EXAMPLE 8.5
Ei
1
2
2 mvf
mgyi
fk d
1
2
2 mvf
When the crate reaches the bottom of the ramp, the potential energy of the system is zero because the elevation of
the crate is yf 0. Therefore, the total mechanical energy of
the system when the crate reaches the bottom is all kinetic
energy:
Ef Kf Uf 1mvf 2 0
2
14.7 J
5.00 J
9.70 J
Ef
vf 2
vf
19.4 J
3.00 kg
6.47 m2/s2
2.54 m/s
Exercise Use Newtons second law to nd the acceleration
of the crate along the ramp, and use the equations of kinematics to determine the nal speed of the crate.
Answer
Exercise
3.23 m/s2; 2.54 m/s.
Answer
3.13 m/s; 4.90 m/s2.
Assuming the ramp to be frictionless, nd the nal speed of the crate and its acceleration along the ramp.
Motion on a Curved Track
Ki
A child of mass m rides on an irregularly curved slide of
height h 2.00 m, as shown in Figure 8.9. The child starts
from rest at the top. (a) Determine his speed at the bottom,
assuming no friction is present.
Solution The normal force n does no work on the child
because this force is always perpendicular to each element of
the displacement. Because there is no friction, the mechanical energy of the child Earth system is conserved. If we measure the y coordinate in the upward direction from the bottom of the slide, then yi h, yf 0, and we obtain
n
0
Fg = m g
mgh
vf
Kf
Uf
1
2
2 mvf
0
2gh
Note that the result is the same as it would be had the child
fallen vertically through a distance h ! In this example,
h 2.00 m, giving
vf
2gh
2(9.80 m/s2)(2.00 m)
6.26 m/s
(b) If a force of kinetic friction acts on the child, how
much mechanical energy does the system lose? Assume that
vf 3.00 m/s and m 20.0 kg.
Solution In this case, mechanical energy is not conserved,
and so we must use Equation 8.15 to nd the loss of mechanical energy due to friction:
E
2.00 m
Ui
Ef
Ei
(Kf
Uf )
(Ki
Ui )
(1mvf 2 0) (0 mgh) 1mvf 2 mgh
2
2
1
2
(20.0 kg)(9.80 m/s2)(2.00
2 (20.0 kg)(3.00 m/s)
m)
302 J
Figure 8.9 If the slide is frictionless, the speed of the child at the
bottom depends only on the height of the slide.
Again, E is negative because friction is reducing mechanical
energy of the system (the nal mechanical energy is less than
the initial mechanical energy). Because the slide is curved,
the normal force changes in magnitude and direction during
the motion. Therefore, the frictional force, which is proportional to n, also changes during the motion. Given this changing frictional force, do you think it is possible to determine
k from these data?
8.5
EXAMPLE 8.6
Lets Go Skiing!
A skier starts from rest at the top of a frictionless incline of
height 20.0 m, as shown in Figure 8.10. At the bottom of the
incline, she encounters a horizontal surface where the coefcient of kinetic friction between the skis and the snow is
0.210. How far does she travel on the horizontal surface before coming to rest?
To nd the distance the skier travels before coming to
rest, we take KC 0. With vB 19.8 m/s and the frictional
force given by fk
kn
kmg, we obtain
E
(KC
UC)
(KB
2gh
2(9.80
m/s2)(20.0
m)
19.8 m/s
Now we apply Equation 8.15 as the skier moves along the
rough horizontal surface from
to . The change in mechanical energy along the horizontal is E
fkd, where d is
the horizontal displacement.
EC
EB
UB)
(0
0)
kmgd
(1mvB2
2
0)
kmgd
Solution First, let us calculate her speed at the bottom of
the incline, which we choose as our zero point of potential
energy. Because the incline is frictionless, the mechanical energy of the skier Earth system remains constant, and we nd,
as we did in the previous example, that
vB
227
Work Done by Nonconservative Forces
d
vB2
2 kg
(19.8 m/s)2
2(0.210)(9.80 m/s2)
95.2 m
Exercise
Find the horizontal distance the skier travels before coming to rest if the incline also has a coefcient of kinetic friction equal to 0.210.
Answer
40.3 m.
20.0 m
y
20.0°
x
d
Figure 8.10 The skier slides down the slope and onto a level surface, stopping after a distance d
from the bottom of the hill.
EXAMPLE 8.7
The Spring-Loaded Popgun
The launching mechanism of a toy gun consists of a spring of
unknown spring constant (Fig. 8.11a). When the spring is
compressed 0.120 m, the gun, when red vertically, is able to
launch a 35.0-g projectile to a maximum height of 20.0 m
above the position of the projectile before ring. (a) Neglecting all resistive forces, determine the spring constant.
Solution
Because the projectile starts from rest, the initial
kinetic energy is zero. If we take the zero point for the gravita-
tional potential energy of the projectile Earth system to be at
the lowest position of the projectile x A , then the initial gravitational potential energy also is zero. The mechanical energy of
this system is constant because no nonconservative forces are
present.
Initially, the only mechanical energy in the system is the
elastic potential energy stored in the spring of the gun,
Us A kx2/2, where the compression of the spring is
x 0.120 m. The projectile rises to a maximum height
228
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
EA
EC
Ug A
Us A
KC
0
12
2 kx
0
m)2
(0.0350 kg)(9.80 m/s2)(20.0 m)
x C = 20.0 m
KA
0
1
2 k(0.120
v
k
Ug C
mgh
Us C
0
953 N/m
(b) Find the speed of the projectile as it moves through
the equilibrium position of the spring (where xB 0.120 m)
as shown in Figure 8.11b.
xB = 0.120 m
x
x
xA = 0
Solution As already noted, the only mechanical energy in
the system at
is the elastic potential energy kx 2/2. The total energy of the system as the projectile moves through the
equilibrium position of the spring comprises the kinetic energy of the projectile mv B2/2, and the gravitational potential
energy mgx B . Hence, the principle of the conservation of mechanical energy in this case gives
EA
Ug A
Us A
KB
0
KA
EB
12
2 kx
0
1
2
2 mvB
Ug B
Us B
mg xB
0
Solving for v B gives
vB
(a)
Figure 8.11
(b)
kx2
m
2g xB
(953 N/m)(0.120 m)2
0.0350 kg
2(9.80 m/s2)(0.120 m)
19.7 m/s
A spring-loaded popgun.
You should compare the different examples we have presented so far in this chapter. Note how breaking the problem
into a sequence of labeled events helps in the analysis.
xC h 20.0 m, and so the nal gravitational potential energy when the projectile reaches its peak is mgh. The nal kinetic energy of the projectile is zero, and the nal elastic potential energy stored in the spring is zero. Because the
mechanical energy of the system is constant, we nd that
EXAMPLE 8.8
Exercise
What is the speed of the projectile when it is at a
height of 10.0 m?
Answer
14.0 m/s.
Block Spring Collision
A block having a mass of 0.80 kg is given an initial velocity
vA 1.2 m/s to the right and collides with a spring of negligible mass and force constant k 50 N/m, as shown in Figure 8.12. (a) Assuming the surface to be frictionless, calculate
the maximum compression of the spring after the collision.
Solution Our system in this example consists of the block
and spring. Before the collision, at , the block has kinetic
energy and the spring is uncompressed, so that the elastic potential energy stored in the spring is zero. Thus, the total mechanical energy of the system before the collision is just
1
2
, the spring is fully com2 mvA . After the collision, at
pressed; now the block is at rest and so has zero kinetic energy, while the energy stored in the spring has its maximum
value 1kx2 1kxm2 , where the origin of coordinates x 0 is
2
2
chosen to be the equilibrium position of the spring and x m is
8.5
229
Work Done by Nonconservative Forces
x=0
vA
1
E = mvA2
2
(a)
vB
1
1
E = mv B2 + kx B2
2
2
(b)
xB
vC = 0
1
E = kxm2
2
(c)
xm
vD = vA
1
1
E = mv D2 = mvA2
2
2
(d)
Figure 8.12 A block sliding on a smooth, horizontal surface collides with a light spring. (a) Initially the mechanical energy is all kinetic energy. (b) The mechanical energy is the sum of the kinetic
energy of the block and the elastic potential energy in the spring.
(c) The energy is entirely potential energy. (d) The energy is transformed back to the kinetic energy of the block. The total energy remains constant throughout the motion.
Multiash photograph of a pole vault event. How
many forms of energy can you identify in this picture?
of the block at the moment it collides with the spring is vA
1.2 m/s, what is the maximum compression in the spring?
Solution In this case, mechanical energy is not conserved
because a frictional force acts on the block. The magnitude
of the frictional force is
the maximum compression of the spring, which in this case
happens to be x C . The total mechanical energy of the system
is conserved because no nonconservative forces act on objects within the system.
Because mechanical energy is conserved, the kinetic energy of the block before the collision must equal the maximum potential energy stored in the fully compressed spring:
EA
KA
1
2
2 mvA
EC
Us A
KC
Us C
0
xm
E
m
v
kA
25xB2
0.15 m
Note that we have not included Ug terms because no change
in vertical position occurred.
(b) Suppose a constant force of kinetic friction acts between the block and the surface, with k 0.50. If the speed
3.92 N
3.92xB
fk xB
Substituting this into Equation 8.15 gives
Ef
1
2
2 (50)xB
0.80 kg
(1.2 m/s)
50 N/m
0.50(0.80 kg)(9.80 m/s2)
kmg
Therefore, the change in the blocks mechanical energy due
to friction as the block is displaced from the equilibrium position of the spring (where we have set our origin) to x B is
E
1
2
2 kxm
0
kn
fk
Ei
(0
1
2
2 k xB )
1
2
2 (0.80)(1.2)
3.92xB
0.576
(1mvA2
2
0)
fkxB
3.92xB
0
Solving the quadratic equation for x B gives xB 0.092 m and
xB
0.25 m. The physically meaningful root is xB
0.092 m. The negative root does not apply to this situation
because the block must be to the right of the origin (positive
value of x ) when it comes to rest. Note that 0.092 m is less
than the distance obtained in the frictionless case of part (a).
This result is what we expect because friction retards the motion of the system.
230
CHAPTER 8
EXAMPLE 8.9
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
Connected Blocks in Motion
Two blocks are connected by a light string that passes over a
frictionless pulley, as shown in Figure 8.13. The block of mass
m1 lies on a horizontal surface and is connected to a spring of
force constant k. The system is released from rest when the
spring is unstretched. If the hanging block of mass m 2 falls a
distance h before coming to rest, calculate the coefcient of
kinetic friction between the block of mass m1 and the surface.
where Ug Ug f Ug i is the change in the systems gravitational potential energy and Us Usf Usi is the change in
the systems elastic potential energy. As the hanging block
falls a distance h, the horizontally moving block moves the
same distance h to the right. Therefore, using Equation 8.15,
we nd that the loss in energy due to friction between the
horizontally sliding block and the surface is
(2)
Solution The key word rest appears twice in the problem
statement, telling us that the initial and nal velocities and kinetic energies are zero. (Also note that because we are concerned only with the beginning and ending points of the motion, we do not need to label events with circled letters as we
did in the previous two examples. Simply using i and f is sufcient to keep track of the situation.) In this situation, the system consists of the two blocks, the spring, and the Earth. We
need to consider two forms of potential energy: gravitational
and elastic. Because the initial and nal kinetic energies of
the system are zero, K 0, and we can write
(1)
E
Ug
E
fk h
km1gh
The change in the gravitational potential energy of the system is associated with only the falling block because the vertical coordinate of the horizontally sliding block does not
change. Therefore, we obtain
(3)
Ug
Ug f
0
Ugi
m2 gh
where the coordinates have been measured from the lowest
position of the falling block.
The change in the elastic potential energy stored in the
spring is
(4)
Us
Us f
12
2 kh
Usi
Us
0
Substituting Equations (2), (3), and (4) into Equation (1)
gives
m2gh 1kh2
km1gh
2
k
m2g
k
m1
m2
h
Figure 8.13 As the hanging block moves from its highest elevation to its lowest, the system loses gravitational potential energy but
gains elastic potential energy in the spring. Some mechanical energy
is lost because of friction between the sliding block and the surface.
EXAMPLE 8.10
1
2 kh
m1g
This setup represents a way of measuring the coefcient of
kinetic friction between an object and some surface. As you
can see from the problem, sometimes it is easier to work with
the changes in the various types of energy rather than the actual values. For example, if we wanted to calculate the numerical value of the gravitational potential energy associated with
the horizontally sliding block, we would need to specify the
height of the horizontal surface relative to the lowest position
of the falling block. Fortunately, this is not necessary because
the gravitational potential energy associated with the rst
block does not change.
A Grand Entrance
You are designing apparatus to support an actor of mass
65 kg who is to y down to the stage during the performance of a play. You decide to attach the actors harness to a
130-kg sandbag by means of a lightweight steel cable running
smoothly over two frictionless pulleys, as shown in Figure
8.14a. You need 3.0 m of cable between the harness and the
nearest pulley so that the pulley can be hidden behind a curtain. For the apparatus to work successfully, the sandbag must
never lift above the oor as the actor swings from above the
stage to the oor. Let us call the angle that the actors cable
makes with the vertical . What is the maximum value can
have before the sandbag lifts off the oor?
Solution We need to draw on several concepts to solve
this problem. First, we use the principle of the conservation
of mechanical energy to nd the actors speed as he hits the
oor as a function of and the radius R of the circular path
through which he swings. Next, we apply Newtons second
8.6
law to the actor at the bottom of his path to nd the cable
tension as a function of the given parameters. Finally, we note
that the sandbag lifts off the oor when the upward force exerted on it by the cable exceeds the gravitational force acting
on it; the normal force is zero when this happens.
Applying conservation of energy to the actor Earth system gives
Ki
(1)
0
Ui
mactor g yi
Kf
where yi is the initial height of the actor above the oor and vf is
the speed of the actor at the instant before he lands. (Note that
Ki 0 because he starts from rest and that Uf 0 because we
set the level of the actors harness when he is standing on the
oor as the zero level of potential energy.) From the geometry
in Figure 8.14a, we see that yi R R cos
R(1 cos ).
Using this relationship in Equation (1), we obtain
vf 2
(2)
Uf
1
2
2 mactorvf
2gR(1
cos )
Now we apply Newtons second law to the actor when he is at
the bottom of the circular path, using the free-body diagram
in Figure 8.14b as a guide:
0
Fy
(3)
θ
R
231
Relationship Between Conservative Forces and Potential Energy
T
T
mactorg
mactorg
mactor
mactor
vf
vf 2
R
2
R
A force of the same magnitude as T is transmitted to the
sandbag. If it is to be just lifted off the oor, the normal force
on it becomes zero, and we require that T mbagg, as shown
in Figure 8.14c. Using this condition together with Equations
(2) and (3), we nd that
mbagg
Actor
Sandbag
Solving for
tain
cos
mactorg
mactor
cos )
2gR(1
R
and substituting in the given parameters, we ob3mactor
mbag
2mactor
(a)
3(65 kg) 130 kg
2(65 kg)
1
2
60°
T
T
m actor
m bag
m actor g
m bag g
(b)
(c)
Figure 8.14 (a) An actor uses some clever staging to make his entrance. (b) Free-body diagram for actor at the bottom of the circular
path. (c) Free-body diagram for sandbag.
8.6
Notice that we did not need to be concerned with the length
R of the cable from the actors harness to the leftmost pulley.
The important point to be made from this problem is that it
is sometimes necessary to combine energy considerations
with Newtons laws of motion.
Exercise If the initial angle
40°, nd the speed of the
actor and the tension in the cable just before he reaches the
oor. (Hint: You cannot ignore the length R 3.0 m in this
calculation.)
Answer
3.7 m/s; 940 N.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN CONSERVATIVE FORCES
AND POTENTIAL ENERGY
Once again let us consider a particle that is part of a system. Suppose that the particle moves along the x axis, and assume that a conservative force with an x compo-
232
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
nent Fx acts on the particle. Earlier in this chapter, we showed how to determine
the change in potential energy of a system when we are given the conservative
force. We now show how to nd Fx if the potential energy of the system is known.
In Section 8.2 we learned that the work done by the conservative force as its
point of application undergoes a displacement x equals the negative of the
change in the potential energy associated with that force; that is,
W Fx x
U. If the point of application of the force undergoes an innitesimal displacement dx, we can express the innitesimal change in the potential energy of the system dU as
Fx dx
dU
Therefore, the conservative force is related to the potential energy function
through the relationship3
Relationship between force
and potential energy
dU
dx
Fx
(8.16)
That is, any conservative force acting on an object within a system equals the
negative derivative of the potential energy of the system with respect to x.
We can easily check this relationship for the two examples already discussed.
In the case of the deformed spring, Us 1kx2, and therefore
2
Fs
dUs
dx
d12
( kx )
dx 2
kx
which corresponds to the restoring force in the spring. Because the gravitational
potential energy function is Ug mgy, it follows from Equation 8.16 that
Fg
mg when we differentiate Ug with respect to y instead of x.
We now see that U is an important function because a conservative force can
be derived from it. Furthermore, Equation 8.16 should clarify the fact that adding
a constant to the potential energy is unimportant because the derivative of a constant is zero.
Quick Quiz 8.5
What does the slope of a graph of U(x) versus x represent?
Optional Section
8.7
ENERGY DIAGRAMS AND THE
EQUILIBRIUM OF A SYSTEM
The motion of a system can often be understood qualitatively through a graph of
its potential energy versus the separation distance between the objects in the system. Consider the potential energy function for a block spring system, given by
Us 1kx2. This function is plotted versus x in Figure 8.15a. (A common mistake is
2
to think that potential energy on the graph represents height. This is clearly not
U
U
U
U
j
k
, where
, and so forth, are
x
y
z
x
partial derivatives. In the language of vector calculus, F equals the negative of the gradient of the scalar
quantity U (x, y, z ).
3
In three dimensions, the expression is F
i
8.7
Energy Diagrams and the Equilibrium of a System
Us
Us =
1
2
kx 2
E
xm
0
xm
x
(a)
Figure 8.15 (a) Potential energy as a
function of x for the block spring system shown in (b). The block oscillates
between the turning points, which have
the coordinates x
xm . Note that the
restoring force exerted by the spring always acts toward x 0, the position of
stable equilibrium.
m
x=0
xm
(b)
the case here, where the block is only moving horizontally.) The force Fs exerted
by the spring on the block is related to Us through Equation 8.16:
Fs
dUs
dx
kx
As we saw in Quick Quiz 8.5, the force is equal to the negative of the slope of the
U versus x curve. When the block is placed at rest at the equilibrium position of
the spring (x 0), where Fs 0, it will remain there unless some external force
Fext acts on it. If this external force stretches the spring from equilibrium, x is positive and the slope dU/dx is positive; therefore, the force Fs exerted by the spring is
negative, and the block accelerates back toward x 0 when released. If the external force compresses the spring, then x is negative and the slope is negative; therefore, Fs is positive, and again the mass accelerates toward x 0 upon release.
From this analysis, we conclude that the x 0 position for a block spring system is one of stable equilibrium. That is, any movement away from this position
results in a force directed back toward x 0. In general, positions of stable
equilibrium correspond to points for which U(x) is a minimum.
From Figure 8.15 we see that if the block is given an initial displacement xm
and is released from rest, its total energy initially is the potential energy stored in
1
the spring 2kxm2. As the block starts to move, the system acquires kinetic energy
and loses an equal amount of potential energy. Because the total energy must remain constant, the block oscillates (moves back and forth) between the two points
x
xm and x
xm , called the turning points. In fact, because no energy is lost
(no friction), the block will oscillate between xm and xm forever. (We discuss
these oscillations further in Chapter 13.) From an energy viewpoint, the energy of
the system cannot exceed 1kxm2; therefore, the block must stop at these points
2
and, because of the spring force, must accelerate toward x 0.
Another simple mechanical system that has a position of stable equilibrium is
a ball rolling about in the bottom of a bowl. Anytime the ball is displaced from its
lowest position, it tends to return to that position when released.
233
234
CHAPTER 8
Now consider a particle moving along the x axis under the inuence of a conservative force Fx , where the U versus x curve is as shown in Figure 8.16. Once
again, Fx 0 at x 0, and so the particle is in equilibrium at this point. However,
this is a position of unstable equilibrium for the following reason: Suppose that
the particle is displaced to the right (x 0). Because the slope is negative for
x 0, Fx
dU/dx is positive and the particle accelerates away from x 0. If instead the particle is at x 0 and is displaced to the left (x 0), the force is negative because the slope is positive for x 0, and the particle again accelerates away
from the equilibrium position. The position x 0 in this situation is one of unstable equilibrium because for any displacement from this point, the force pushes the
particle farther away from equilibrium. The force pushes the particle toward a position of lower potential energy. A pencil balanced on its point is in a position of unstable equilibrium. If the pencil is displaced slightly from its absolutely vertical position and is then released, it will surely fall over. In general, positions of
unstable equilibrium correspond to points for which U(x) is a maximum.
Finally, a situation may arise where U is constant over some region and hence
Fx 0. This is called a position of neutral equilibrium. Small displacements from
this position produce neither restoring nor disrupting forces. A ball lying on a at
horizontal surface is an example of an object in neutral equilibrium.
U
Positive slope
x<0
Negative slope
x>0
x
0
Figure 8.16
A plot of U versus x
for a particle that has a position of
unstable equilibrium located at x
0. For any nite displacement of
the particle, the force on the particle is directed away from x 0.
EXAMPLE 8.11
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
Force and Energy on an Atomic Scale
The potential energy associated with the force between two
neutral atoms in a molecule can be modeled by the
Lennard Jones potential energy function:
12
U(x)
4
x
6
x
where x is the separation of the atoms. The function U(x) contains two parameters and that are determined from experiments. Sample values for the interaction between two atoms
in a molecule are
0.263 nm and
1.51 10 22 J.
(a) Using a spreadsheet or similar tool, graph this function
and nd the most likely distance between the two atoms.
Solution We expect to nd stable equilibrium when the
two atoms are separated by some equilibrium distance and
the potential energy of the system of two atoms (the molecule) is a minimum. One can minimize the function U(x) by
taking its derivative and setting it equal to zero:
dU(x)
dx
4
4
d
dx
12
x
12
x13
12
6
x
66
x7
2.95
10
10
(b) Determine Fx(x) the force that one atom exerts on
the other in the molecule as a function of separation and
argue that the way this force behaves is physically plausible
when the atoms are close together and far apart.
Solution Because the atoms combine to form a molecule,
we reason that the force must be attractive when the atoms
are far apart. On the other hand, the force must be repulsive
when the two atoms get very close together. Otherwise, the
molecule would collapse in on itself. Thus, the force must
change sign at the critical separation, similar to the way
spring forces switch sign in the change from extension to
compression. Applying Equation 8.16 to the Lennard Jones
potential energy function gives
0
dU(x)
dx
4
d
dx
4
Fx
12 12
x13
0
Solving for x the equilibrium separation of the two atoms
in the molecule and inserting the given information yield
x
are at their critical separation, and then increases again as
the atoms move apart. When U(x) is a minimum, the atoms
are in stable equilbrium; this indicates that this is the most
likely separation between them.
m.
We graph the Lennard Jones function on both sides of
this critical value to create our energy diagram, as shown in
Figure 8.17a. Notice how U(x) is extremely large when the
atoms are very close together, is a minimum when the atoms
12
x
6
x
66
x7
This result is graphed in Figure 8.17b. As expected, the force
is positive (repulsive) at small atomic separations, zero when
the atoms are at the position of stable equilibrium [recall
how we found the minimum of U(x)], and negative (attractive) at greater separations. Note that the force approaches
zero as the separation between the atoms becomes very great.
8.8
235
Conservation of Energy in General
U ( J ) × 1023
5.0
x (m) × 1010
0
5.0
10
15
20
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
(a)
F (N) × 1012
6.0
3.0
x (m) × 1010
0
3.0
6.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
(b)
Figure 8.17 (a) Potential energy curve associated with a molecule. The distance x is the separation between the two atoms making up the molecule. (b) Force exerted on one atom by the other.
8.8
CONSERVATION OF ENERGY IN GENERAL
We have seen that the total mechanical energy of a system is constant when only
conservative forces act within the system. Furthermore, we can associate a potential energy function with each conservative force. On the other hand, as we saw in
Section 8.5, mechanical energy is lost when nonconservative forces such as friction
are present.
In our study of thermodynamics later in this course, we shall nd that mechanical energy can be transformed into energy stored inside the various objects
that make up the system. This form of energy is called internal energy. For example,
when a block slides over a rough surface, the mechanical energy lost because of
friction is transformed into internal energy that is stored temporarily inside the
block and inside the surface, as evidenced by a measurable increase in the temperature of both block and surface. We shall see that on a submicroscopic scale, this
internal energy is associated with the vibration of atoms about their equilibrium
positions. Such internal atomic motion involves both kinetic and potential energy.
Therefore, if we include in our energy expression this increase in the internal energy of the objects that make up the system, then energy is conserved.
This is just one example of how you can analyze an isolated system and always find that the total amount of energy it contains does not change, as long as
you account for all forms of energy. That is, energy can never be created or
destroyed. Energy may be transformed from one form to another, but the
Total energy is always conserved
236
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
total energy of an isolated system is always constant. From a universal
point of view, we can say that the total energy of the Universe is constant. If
one part of the Universe gains energy in some form, then another part must
lose an equal amount of energy. No violation of this principle has ever been
found.
Optional Section
8.9
MASS ENERGY EQUIVALENCE
This chapter has been concerned with the important principle of energy conservation and its application to various physical phenomena. Another important principle, conservation of mass, states that in any physical or chemical process,
mass is neither created nor destroyed. That is, the mass before the process
equals the mass after the process.
For centuries, scientists believed that energy and mass were two quantities that
were separately conserved. However, in 1905 Einstein made the brilliant discovery
that the mass of any system is a measure of the energy of that system. Hence, energy and mass are related concepts. The relationship between the two is given by
Einsteins most famous formula:
ER
mc 2
(8.17)
where c is the speed of light and E R is the energy equivalent of a mass m . The subscript R on the energy refers to the rest energy of an object of mass m that is,
the energy of the object when its speed is v 0.
The rest energy associated with even a small amount of matter is enormous.
For example, the rest energy of 1 kg of any substance is
ER
mc 2
(1 kg)(3
10 8 m/s)2
9
10 16 J
This is equivalent to the energy content of about 15 million barrels of crude oil
about one days consumption in the United States! If this energy could easily be released as useful work, our energy resources would be unlimited.
In reality, only a small fraction of the energy contained in a material sample
can be released through chemical or nuclear processes. The effects are greatest in
nuclear reactions, in which fractional changes in energy, and hence mass, of approximately 10 3 are routinely observed. A good example is the enormous
amount of energy released when the uranium-235 nucleus splits into two smaller
nuclei. This happens because the sum of the masses of the product nuclei is
slightly less than the mass of the original 235 U nucleus. The awesome nature of the
energy released in such reactions is vividly demonstrated in the explosion of a nuclear weapon.
Equation 8.17 indicates that energy has mass. Whenever the energy of an object
changes in any way, its mass changes as well. If E is the change in energy of an object, then its change in mass is
m
E
c2
(8.18)
Anytime energy E in any form is supplied to an object, the change in the mass of
the object is m
E/c 2. However, because c 2 is so large, the changes in mass in
any ordinary mechanical experiment or chemical reaction are too small to be
detected.
8.10 Quantization of Energy
EXAMPLE 8.12
Here Comes the Sun
The Sun converts an enormous amount of matter to energy.
Each second, 4.19 109 kg approximately the capacity of
400 average-sized cargo ships is changed to energy. What is
the power output of the Sun?
Solution We nd the energy liberated per second by
means of a straightforward conversion:
ER
(4.19
109 kg)(3.00
108 m/s)2
3.77
1026 J
We then apply the denition of power:
3.77 1026 J
1.00 s
3.77
The Sun radiates uniformly in all directions, and so only a
very tiny fraction of its total output is collected by the Earth.
Nonetheless this amount is sufcient to supply energy to
nearly everything on the Earth. (Nuclear and geothermal energy are the only alternatives.) Plants absorb solar energy and
convert it to chemical potential energy (energy stored in the
plants molecules). When an animal eats the plant, this chemical potential energy can be turned into kinetic and other
forms of energy. You are reading this book with solarpowered eyes!
1026 W
Optional Section
8.10
QUANTIZATION OF ENERGY
Certain physical quantities such as electric charge are quantized; that is, the quantities have discrete values rather than continuous values. The quantized nature of
energy is especially important in the atomic and subatomic world. As an example,
let us consider the energy levels of the hydrogen atom (which consists of an electron orbiting around a proton). The atom can occupy only certain energy levels,
called quantum states, as shown in Figure 8.18a. The atom cannot have any energy
values lying between these quantum states. The lowest energy level E 1 is called the
E
E4
E3
Energy
Energy (arbitrary units)
E2
E1
Hydrogen atom
(a)
237
Earth satellite
(b)
Figure 8.18 Energy-level diagrams: (a) Quantum states of the hydrogen atom. The lowest state
E 1 is the ground state. (b) The energy levels of an Earth satellite are also quantized but are so
close together that they cannot be distinguished from one another.
238
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
ground state of the atom. The ground state corresponds to the state that an isolated
atom usually occupies. The atom can move to higher energy states by absorbing
energy from some external source or by colliding with other atoms. The highest
energy on the scale shown in Figure 8.18a, E , corresponds to the energy of the
atom when the electron is completely removed from the proton. The energy difference E
E1 is called the ionization energy. Note that the energy levels get
closer together at the high end of the scale.
Next, consider a satellite in orbit about the Earth. If you were asked to describe the possible energies that the satellite could have, it would be reasonable
(but incorrect) to say that it could have any arbitrary energy value. Just like that of
the hydrogen atom, however, the energy of the satellite is quantized. If you
were to construct an energy level diagram for the satellite showing its allowed energies, the levels would be so close to one another, as shown in Figure 8.18b, that it
would be difcult to discern that they were not continuous. In other words, we
have no way of experiencing quantization of energy in the macroscopic world;
hence, we can ignore it in describing everyday experiences.
SUMMARY
If a particle of mass m is at a distance y above the Earths surface, the gravitational potential energy of the particle Earth system is
Ug
(8.1)
mgy
The elastic potential energy stored in a spring of force constant k is
12
2 kx
Us
(8.4)
You should be able to apply these two equations in a variety of situations to determine the potential an object has to perform work.
A force is conservative if the work it does on a particle moving between two
points is independent of the path the particle takes between the two points. Furthermore, a force is conservative if the work it does on a particle is zero when the
particle moves through an arbitrary closed path and returns to its initial position.
A force that does not meet these criteria is said to be nonconservative.
A potential energy function U can be associated only with a conservative
force. If a conservative force F acts on a particle that moves along the x axis from
x i to xf , then the change in the potential energy of the system equals the negative
of the work done by that force:
xf
Uf
Ui
xi
Fx dx
(8.7)
You should be able to use calculus to nd the potential energy associated with a
conservative force and vice versa.
The total mechanical energy of a system is dened as the sum of the kinetic energy and the potential energy:
E
K
(8.9)
U
If no external forces do work on a system and if no nonconservative forces are
acting on objects inside the system, then the total mechanical energy of the system
is constant:
Ki
Ui
Kf
Uf
(8.10)
Problems
239
If nonconservative forces (such as friction) act on objects inside a system, then
mechanical energy is not conserved. In these situations, the difference between the
total nal mechanical energy and the total initial mechanical energy of the system
equals the energy transferred to or from the system by the nonconservative forces.
QUESTIONS
1. Many mountain roads are constructed so that they spiral
around a mountain rather than go straight up the slope.
Discuss this design from the viewpoint of energy and
power.
2. A ball is thrown straight up into the air. At what position
is its kinetic energy a maximum? At what position is the
gravitational potential energy a maximum?
3. A bowling ball is suspended from the ceiling of a lecture
hall by a strong cord. The bowling ball is drawn away from
its equilibrium position and released from rest at the tip
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Figure Q8.3
of the students nose as in Figure Q8.3. If the student remains stationary, explain why she will not be struck by the
ball on its return swing. Would the student be safe if she
pushed the ball as she released it?
One person drops a ball from the top of a building, while
another person at the bottom observes its motion. Will
these two people agree on the value of the potential energy of the ball Earth system? on its change in potential
energy? on the kinetic energy of the ball?
When a person runs in a track event at constant velocity,
is any work done? (Note: Although the runner moves with
constant velocity, the legs and arms accelerate.) How does
air resistance enter into the picture? Does the center of
mass of the runner move horizontally?
Our body muscles exert forces when we lift, push, run,
jump, and so forth. Are these forces conservative?
If three conservative forces and one nonconservative
force act on a system, how many potential energy terms
appear in the equation that describes this system?
Consider a ball xed to one end of a rigid rod whose
other end pivots on a horizontal axis so that the rod can
rotate in a vertical plane. What are the positions of stable
and unstable equilibrium?
Is it physically possible to have a situation where
E U 0?
What would the curve of U versus x look like if a particle
were in a region of neutral equilibrium?
Explain the energy transformations that occur during
(a) the pole vault, (b) the shot put, (c) the high jump.
What is the source of energy in each case?
Discuss some of the energy transformations that occur
during the operation of an automobile.
If only one external force acts on a particle, does it
necessarily change the particles (a) kinetic energy?
(b) velocity?
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
Section 8.1 Potential Energy
Section 8.2 Conservative and Nonconservative Forces
1. A 1 000-kg roller coaster is initially at the top of a rise, at
point A. It then moves 135 ft, at an angle of 40.0° below
the horizontal, to a lower point B. (a) Choose point B to
be the zero level for gravitational potential energy. Find
the potential energy of the roller coaster Earth system
at points A and B and the change in its potential energy
as the coaster moves. (b) Repeat part (a), setting the
zero reference level at point A.
240
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
2. A 40.0-N child is in a swing that is attached to ropes
2.00 m long. Find the gravitational potential energy of
the child Earth system relative to the childs lowest position when (a) the ropes are horizontal, (b) the ropes
make a 30.0° angle with the vertical, and (c) the child is
at the bottom of the circular arc.
3. A 4.00-kg particle moves from the origin to position C,
which has coordinates x 5.00 m and y 5.00 m
(Fig. P8.3). One force on it is the force of gravity acting
in the negative y direction. Using Equation 7.2, calculate the work done by gravity as the particle moves from
O to C along (a) OAC, (b) OBC, and (c) OC. Your results should all be identical. Why?
WEB
7.
8.
y
C
B
O
(5.00, 5.00) m
A
Figure P8.3
x
Problems 3, 4, and 5.
4. (a) Suppose that a constant force acts on an object. The
force does not vary with time, nor with the position or
velocity of the object. Start with the general denition
for work done by a force
f
F ds
W
9.
10.
time tf ? (b) If the potential energy of the system at time
tf is 5.00 J, are any nonconservative forces acting on the
particle? Explain.
A single conservative force acts on a 5.00-kg particle.
The equation F x (2x 4) N, where x is in meters, describes this force. As the particle moves along the x axis
from x 1.00 m to x 5.00 m, calculate (a) the work
done by this force, (b) the change in the potential energy of the system, and (c) the kinetic energy of the particle at x 5.00 m if its speed at x 1.00 m is 3.00 m/s.
A single constant force F (3i 5j) N acts on a
4.00-kg particle. (a) Calculate the work done by this
force if the particle moves from the origin to the point
having the vector position r (2i 3j) m. Does this
result depend on the path? Explain. (b) What is the
speed of the particle at r if its speed at the origin is
4.00 m/s? (c) What is the change in the potential
energy of the system?
A single conservative force acting on a particle varies as
F ( Ax Bx 2)i N, where A and B are constants and
x is in meters. (a) Calculate the potential energy function U (x) associated with this force, taking U 0 at
x 0. (b) Find the change in potential energy and
change in kinetic energy as the particle moves from
x 2.00 m to x 3.00 m.
A particle of mass 0.500 kg is shot from P as shown in
Figure P8.10. The particle has an initial velocity vi with a
horizontal component of 30.0 m/s. The particle rises to
a maximum height of 20.0 m above P. Using the law of
conservation of energy, determine (a) the vertical component of vi , (b) the work done by the gravitational
force on the particle during its motion from P to B, and
(c) the horizontal and the vertical components of the
velocity vector when the particle reaches B.
i
and show that the force is conservative. (b) As a special
case, suppose that the force F (3i 4j) N acts on a
particle that moves from O to C in Figure P8.3. Calculate the work done by F if the particle moves along each
one of the three paths OAC, OBC, and OC. (Your three
answers should be identical.)
5. A force acting on a particle moving in the xy plane is
given by F (2 y i x 2 j) N, where x and y are in meters. The particle moves from the origin to a nal position having coordinates x 5.00 m and y 5.00 m, as
in Figure P8.3. Calculate the work done by F along
(a) OAC, (b) OBC, (c) OC. (d) Is F conservative or nonconservative? Explain.
Section 8.3
Section 8.4
Conservative Forces and Potential Energy
Conservation of Mechanical Energy
6. At time ti , the kinetic energy of a particle in a system is
30.0 J and the potential energy of the system is 10.0 J. At
some later time tf , the kinetic energy of the particle is
18.0 J. (a) If only conservative forces act on the particle,
what are the potential energy and the total energy at
vi
P
θ
60.0 m
20.0 m
g
A
B
Figure P8.10
11. A 3.00-kg mass starts from rest and slides a distance d
down a frictionless 30.0° incline. While sliding, it comes
into contact with an unstressed spring of negligible
mass, as shown in Figure P8.11. The mass slides an additional 0.200 m as it is brought momentarily to rest by
compression of the spring (k 400 N/m). Find the initial separation d between the mass and the spring.
241
Problems
12. A mass m starts from rest and slides a distance d down a
frictionless incline of angle . While sliding, it contacts
an unstressed spring of negligible mass, as shown in Figure P8.11. The mass slides an additional distance x as it
is brought momentarily to rest by compression of the
spring (of force constant k ). Find the initial separation
d between the mass and the spring.
A
h
R
m = 3.00 kg
d
Figure P8.15
k = 400 N/m
θ = 30.0°
Figure P8.11
Problems 11 and 12.
13. A particle of mass m 5.00 kg is released from point
and slides on the frictionless track shown in Figure
P8.13. Determine (a) the particles speed at points
and and (b) the net work done by the force of gravity
in moving the particle from to .
m
cal spring of constant k 5 000 N/m and is pushed
downward so that the spring is compressed 0.100 m. After the block is released, it travels upward and then
leaves the spring. To what maximum height above the
point of release does it rise?
18. Dave Johnson, the bronze medalist at the 1992 Olympic
decathlon in Barcelona, leaves the ground for his high
jump with a vertical velocity component of 6.00 m/s.
How far up does his center of gravity move as he makes
the jump?
19. A 0.400-kg ball is thrown straight up into the air and
reaches a maximum altitude of 20.0 m. Taking its initial
position as the point of zero potential energy and using
energy methods, nd (a) its initial speed, (b) its total
mechanical energy, and (c) the ratio of its kinetic energy to the potential energy of the ball Earth system
when the ball is at an altitude of 10.0 m.
20. In the dangerous sport of bungee-jumping, a daring
student jumps from a balloon with a specially designed
5.00 m
3.20 m
2.00 m
Figure P8.13
14. A simple, 2.00-m-long pendulum is released from rest
when the support string is at an angle of 25.0° from the
vertical. What is the speed of the suspended mass at the
bottom of the swing?
15. A bead slides without friction around a loop-the-loop
(Fig. P8.15). If the bead is released from a height h
3.50R, what is its speed at point A ? How great is the normal force on it if its mass is 5.00 g?
16. A 120-g mass is attached to the bottom end of an unstressed spring. The spring is hanging vertically and has
a spring constant of 40.0 N/m. The mass is dropped.
(a) What is its maximum speed? (b) How far does it
drop before coming to rest momentarily?
17. A block of mass 0.250 kg is placed on top of a light verti-
Figure P8.20
Bungee-jumping. (Gamma)
242
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
elastic cord attached to his ankles, as shown in Figure
P8.20. The unstretched length of the cord is 25.0 m, the
student weighs 700 N, and the balloon is 36.0 m above
the surface of a river below. Assuming that Hookes law
describes the cord, calculate the required force constant
if the student is to stop safely 4.00 m above the river.
21. Two masses are connected by a light string passing over a
light frictionless pulley, as shown in Figure P8.21. The
5.00-kg mass is released from rest. Using the law of conservation of energy, (a) determine the speed of the 3.00kg mass just as the 5.00-kg mass hits the ground and (b)
nd the maximum height to which the 3.00-kg mass rises.
22. Two masses are connected by a light string passing over
a light frictionless pulley, as shown in Figure P8.21. The
mass m1 (which is greater than m 2) is released from rest.
Using the law of conservation of energy, (a) determine
the speed of m 2 just as m1 hits the ground in terms of
m 1, m 2, and h, and (b) nd the maximum height to
which m 2 rises.
cal circular arc (Fig. P8.25). Suppose a performer with
mass m and holding the bar steps off an elevated platform, starting from rest with the ropes at an angle of i
with respect to the vertical. Suppose the size of the performers body is small compared with the length , that
she does not pump the trapeze to swing higher, and that
air resistance is negligible. (a) Show that when the ropes
make an angle of with respect to the vertical, the performer must exert a force
F
mg (3 cos
2 cos
i)
in order to hang on. (b) Determine the angle i at which
the force required to hang on at the bottom of the swing
is twice the performers weight.
θ
m1
m2
3.00 kg
h
5.00 kg
4.00 m
Figure P8.25
Figure P8.21
Problems 21 and 22.
23. A 20.0-kg cannon ball is red from a cannon with a
muzzle speed of 1 000 m/s at an angle of 37.0° with the
horizontal. A second ball is red at an angle of 90.0°.
Use the law of conservation of mechanical energy to
nd (a) the maximum height reached by each ball and
(b) the total mechanical energy at the maximum height
for each ball. Let y 0 at the cannon.
24. A 2.00-kg ball is attached to the bottom end of a length
of 10-lb (44.5-N) shing line. The top end of the shing
line is held stationary. The ball is released from rest
while the line is taut and horizontal (
90.0°). At
what angle (measured from the vertical) will the shing line break?
25. The circus apparatus known as the trapeze consists of a
bar suspended by two parallel ropes, each of length .
The trapeze allows circus performers to swing in a verti-
26. After its release at the top of the rst rise, a rollercoaster car moves freely with negligible friction. The
roller coaster shown in Figure P8.26 has a circular loop
of radius 20.0 m. The car barely makes it around the
loop: At the top of the loop, the riders are upside down
and feel weightless. (a) Find the speed of the roller
coaster car at the top of the loop (position 3). Find the
speed of the roller coaster car (b) at position 1 and
(c) at position 2. (d) Find the difference in height between positions 1 and 4 if the speed at position 4 is
10.0 m/s.
27. A light rigid rod is 77.0 cm long. Its top end is pivoted
on a low-friction horizontal axle. The rod hangs straight
down at rest, with a small massive ball attached to its
bottom end. You strike the ball, suddenly giving it a horizontal velocity so that it swings around in a full circle.
What minimum speed at the bottom is required to
make the ball go over the top of the circle?
243
Problems
3.00 kg
4
3
2
5.00 kg
Figure P8.31
1
Figure P8.26
Section 8.5
Work Done by Nonconservative Forces
28. A 70.0-kg diver steps off a 10.0-m tower and drops
straight down into the water. If he comes to rest 5.00 m
beneath the surface of the water, determine the average
resistance force that the water exerts on the diver.
29. A force Fx , shown as a function of distance in Figure
P8.29, acts on a 5.00-kg mass. If the particle starts from
rest at x 0 m, determine the speed of the particle at
x 2.00, 4.00, and 6.00 m.
32. A 2 000-kg car starts from rest and coasts down from the
top of a 5.00-m-long driveway that is sloped at an angle
of 20.0° with the horizontal. If an average friction force
of 4 000 N impedes the motion of the car, nd the
speed of the car at the bottom of the driveway.
33. A 5.00-kg block is set into motion up an inclined plane
with an initial speed of 8.00 m/s (Fig. P8.33). The block
comes to rest after traveling 3.00 m along the plane,
which is inclined at an angle of 30.0° to the horizontal.
For this motion determine (a) the change in the blocks
kinetic energy, (b) the change in the potential energy,
and (c) the frictional force exerted on it (assumed to be
constant). (d) What is the coefcient of kinetic friction?
v i = 8.00 m/s
3.00 m
Fx(N)
5
4
3
2
1
0
30.0°
12345678
x(m)
Figure P8.33
Figure P8.29
WEB
30. A softball pitcher swings a ball of mass 0.250 kg around
a vertical circular path of radius 60.0 cm before releasing it from her hand. The pitcher maintains a component of force on the ball of constant magnitude 30.0 N
in the direction of motion around the complete path.
The speed of the ball at the top of the circle is 15.0 m/s.
If the ball is released at the bottom of the circle, what is
its speed upon release?
31. The coefcient of friction between the 3.00-kg block
and the surface in Figure P8.31 is 0.400. The system
starts from rest. What is the speed of the 5.00-kg ball
when it has fallen 1.50 m?
34. A boy in a wheelchair (total mass, 47.0 kg) wins a race
with a skateboarder. He has a speed of 1.40 m/s at the
crest of a slope 2.60 m high and 12.4 m long. At the bottom of the slope, his speed is 6.20 m/s. If air resistance
and rolling resistance can be modeled as a constant frictional force of 41.0 N, nd the work he did in pushing
forward on his wheels during the downhill ride.
35. A parachutist of mass 50.0 kg jumps out of a balloon at
a height of 1 000 m and lands on the ground with a
speed of 5.00 m/s. How much energy was lost to air friction during this jump?
36. An 80.0-kg sky diver jumps out of a balloon at an altitude of 1 000 m and opens the parachute at an altitude
of 200.0 m. (a) Assuming that the total retarding force
244
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
on the diver is constant at 50.0 N with the parachute
closed and constant at 3 600 N with the parachute open,
what is the speed of the diver when he lands on the
ground? (b) Do you think the sky diver will get hurt? Explain. (c) At what height should the parachute be opened
so that the nal speed of the sky diver when he hits the
ground is 5.00 m/s? (d) How realistic is the assumption
that the total retarding force is constant? Explain.
37. A toy cannon uses a spring to project a 5.30-g soft rubber ball. The spring is originally compressed by 5.00 cm
and has a stiffness constant of 8.00 N/m. When it is
red, the ball moves 15.0 cm through the barrel of the
cannon, and there is a constant frictional force of
0.032 0 N between the barrel and the ball. (a) With
what speed does the projectile leave the barrel of the
cannon? (b) At what point does the ball have maximum
speed? (c) What is this maximum speed?
38. A 1.50-kg mass is held 1.20 m above a relaxed, massless
vertical spring with a spring constant of 320 N/m. The
mass is dropped onto the spring. (a) How far does it
compress the spring? (b) How far would it compress the
spring if the same experiment were performed on the
Moon, where g 1.63 m/s2? (c) Repeat part (a), but
this time assume that a constant air-resistance force of
0.700 N acts on the mass during its motion.
39. A 3.00-kg block starts at a height h 60.0 cm on a
plane that has an inclination angle of 30.0°, as shown in
Figure P8.39. Upon reaching the bottom, the block
slides along a horizontal surface. If the coefcient of
friction on both surfaces is k 0.200, how far does the
block slide on the horizontal surface before coming to
rest? (Hint: Divide the path into two straight-line parts.)
42. A potential energy function for a two-dimensional force
is of the form U 3x 3y 7x. Find the force that acts at
the point (x, y).
(Optional)
Section 8.7
Energy Diagrams and the Equilibrium of a
System
43. A particle moves along a line where the potential energy depends on its position r, as graphed in Figure
P8.43. In the limit as r increases without bound, U (r )
approaches 1 J. (a) Identify each equilibrium position
for this particle. Indicate whether each is a point of stable, unstable, or neutral equilibrium. (b) The particle
will be bound if its total energy is in what range? Now
suppose the particle has energy 3 J. Determine
(c) the range of positions where it can be found,
(d) its maximum kinetic energy, (e) the location at
which it has maximum kinetic energy, and (f) its binding energy that is, the additional energy that it would
have to be given in order for it to move out to r : .
U( J)
+6
+4
+2
0
2
2
4
6
r (mm)
4
6
m = 3.00 kg
Figure P8.43
h = 60.0 cm
θ = 30.0°
Figure P8.39
40. A 75.0-kg sky diver is falling with a terminal speed of
60.0 m/s. Determine the rate at which he is losing mechanical energy.
Relationship Between Conservative
Forces and Potential Energy
Section 8.6
WEB
41. The potential energy of a two-particle system separated
by a distance r is given by U(r) A/r, where A is a constant. Find the radial force Fr that each particle exerts
on the other.
44. A right circular cone can be balanced on a horizontal
surface in three different ways. Sketch these three equilibrium congurations and identify them as positions of
stable, unstable, or neutral equilibrium.
45. For the potential energy curve shown in Figure P8.45,
(a) determine whether the force Fx is positive, negative,
or zero at the ve points indicated. (b) Indicate points
of stable, unstable, and neutral equilibrium. (c) Sketch
the curve for Fx versus x from x 0 to x 9.5 m.
46. A hollow pipe has one or two weights attached to its inner surface, as shown in Figure P8.46. Characterize
each conguration as being stable, unstable, or neutral
equilibrium and explain each of your choices (CM indicates center of mass).
47. A particle of mass m is attached between two identical
springs on a horizontal frictionless tabletop. The
245
Problems
(Optional)
48. Find the energy equivalents of (a) an electron of mass
9.11 10 31 kg, (b) a uranium atom with a mass of
4.00 10 25 kg, (c) a paper clip of mass 2.00 g, and
(d) the Earth (of mass 5.99 1024 kg).
49. The expression for the kinetic energy of a particle moving
with speed v is given by Equation 7.19, which can be written as K
mc 2 mc 2, where
[1 (v/c)2] 1/2.
The term mc 2 is the total energy of the particle, and the
term mc 2 is its rest energy. A proton moves with a speed of
0.990c, where c is the speed of light. Find (a) its rest energy, (b) its total energy, and (c) its kinetic energy.
6
4
2
0
2
4
6
8
x(m)
2
4
Figure P8.45
O
Mass Energy Equivalence
Section 8.9
U (J)
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
O × CM
× CM
O
× CM
50. A block slides down a curved frictionless track and then
up an inclined plane as in Figure P8.50. The coefcient
of kinetic friction between the block and the incline is
k . Use energy methods to show that the maximum
height reached by the block is
y max
(a)
(b)
h
1
k
cot
(c)
Figure P8.46
springs have spring constant k, and each is initially unstressed. (a) If the mass is pulled a distance x along a direction perpendicular to the initial conguration of the
springs, as in Figure P8.47, show that the potential energy of the system is
U(x)
kx 2
2kL(L
x 2
L 2)
(Hint: See Problem 66 in Chapter 7.) (b) Make a plot of
U (x) versus x and identify all equilibrium points. Assume that L 1.20 m and k 40.0 N/m. (c) If the
mass is pulled 0.500 m to the right and then released,
what is its speed when it reaches the equilibrium point
x 0?
k
L
x
L
m
k
Top View
Figure P8.47
x
h
ymax
θ
Figure P8.50
51. Close to the center of a campus is a tall silo topped with
a hemispherical cap. The cap is frictionless when wet.
Someone has somehow balanced a pumpkin at the
highest point. The line from the center of curvature of
the cap to the pumpkin makes an angle i 0° with the
vertical. On a rainy night, a breath of wind makes the
pumpkin start sliding downward from rest. It loses contact with the cap when the line from the center of the
hemisphere to the pumpkin makes a certain angle with
the vertical; what is this angle?
52. A 200-g particle is released from rest at point along
the horizontal diameter on the inside of a frictionless,
hemispherical bowl of radius R 30.0 cm (Fig. P8.52).
Calculate (a) the gravitational potential energy when
the particle is at point relative to point , ( b) the kinetic energy of the particle at point , (c) its speed at
point , and (d) its kinetic energy and the potential
energy at point .
246
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
R
2R/3
Figure P8.52
WEB
Problems 52 and 53.
53. The particle described in Problem 52 (Fig. P8.52) is released from rest at , and the surface of the bowl is
rough. The speed of the particle at is 1.50 m/s.
(a) What is its kinetic energy at ? ( b) How much energy is lost owing to friction as the particle moves from
to ? (c) Is it possible to determine from these results in any simple manner? Explain.
54. Review Problem. The mass of a car is 1 500 kg. The
shape of the body is such that its aerodynamic drag coefcient is D 0.330 and the frontal area is 2.50 m2. Assuming that the drag force is proportional to v 2 and neglecting other sources of friction, calculate the power
the car requires to maintain a speed of 100 km/h as it
climbs a long hill sloping at 3.20°.
55. Make an order-of-magnitude estimate of your power
output as you climb stairs. In your solution, state the
physical quantities you take as data and the values you
measure or estimate for them. Do you consider your
peak power or your sustainable power?
56. A childs pogo stick (Fig. P8.56) stores energy in a
spring (k 2.50 104 N/m). At position (xA
0.100 m), the spring compression is a maximum and
the child is momentarily at rest. At position (x B 0),
the spring is relaxed and the child is moving upward. At
position , the child is again momentarily at rest at the
top of the jump. Assuming that the combined mass of
the child and the pogo stick is 25.0 kg, (a) calculate the
total energy of the system if both potential energies are
zero at x 0, (b) determine x C , (c) calculate the speed
of the child at x 0, (d) determine the value of x for
xC
xA
Figure P8.56
which the kinetic energy of the system is a maximum,
and (e) calculate the childs maximum upward speed.
57. A 10.0-kg block is released from point in Figure
P8.57. The track is frictionless except for the portion
between and , which has a length of 6.00 m. The
block travels down the track, hits a spring of force constant k 2 250 N/m, and compresses the spring
0.300 m from its equilibrium position before coming to
rest momentarily. Determine the coefcient of kinetic
friction between the block and the rough surface between and .
58. A 2.00-kg block situated on a rough incline is connected
to a spring of negligible mass having a spring constant
of 100 N/m (Fig. P8.58). The pulley is frictionless. The
block is released from rest when the spring is unstretched. The block moves 20.0 cm down the incline
before coming to rest. Find the coefcient of kinetic
friction between block and incline.
3.00 m
6.00 m
Figure P8.57
247
Problems
left by the spring and continues to move in that direction beyond the springs unstretched position. Finally,
the mass comes to rest at a distance D to the left of the
unstretched spring. Find (a) the distance of compression d, (b) the speed v of the mass at the unstretched
position when the mass is moving to the left, and
(c) the distance D between the unstretched spring and
the point at which the mass comes to rest.
k = 100 N/m
2.00 kg
37.0°
Figure P8.58
Problems 58 and 59.
k
59. Review Problem. Suppose the incline is frictionless for
the system described in Problem 58 (see Fig. P8.58).
The block is released from rest with the spring initially
unstretched. (a) How far does it move down the incline
before coming to rest? (b) What is its acceleration at its
lowest point? Is the acceleration constant? (c) Describe
the energy transformations that occur during the descent.
60. The potential energy function for a system is given by
U (x)
x 3 2 x 2 3x. (a) Determine the force Fx as
a function of x. (b) For what values of x is the force
equal to zero? (c) Plot U (x) versus x and Fx versus x, and
indicate points of stable and unstable equilibrium.
61. A 20.0-kg block is connected to a 30.0-kg block by a
string that passes over a frictionless pulley. The 30.0-kg
block is connected to a spring that has negligible mass
and a force constant of 250 N/m, as shown in Figure
P8.61. The spring is unstretched when the system is as
shown in the gure, and the incline is frictionless. The
20.0-kg block is pulled 20.0 cm down the incline (so
that the 30.0-kg block is 40.0 cm above the oor) and is
released from rest. Find the speed of each block when
the 30.0-kg block is 20.0 cm above the oor (that is,
when the spring is unstretched).
20.0 kg
30.0 kg
20.0 cm
40.0°
Figure P8.61
62. A 1.00-kg mass slides to the right on a surface having a
coefcient of friction
0.250 (Fig. P8.62). The mass
has a speed of vi 3.00 m/s when it makes contact with
a light spring that has a spring constant k 50.0 N/m.
The mass comes to rest after the spring has been compressed a distance d. The mass is then forced toward the
m
vi
d
vf = 0
v
v=0
D
Figure P8.62
WEB
63. A block of mass 0.500 kg is pushed against a horizontal
spring of negligible mass until the spring is compressed
a distance x (Fig. P8.63). The spring constant is
450 N/m. When it is released, the block travels along a
frictionless, horizontal surface to point B, at the bottom
of a vertical circular track of radius R 1.00 m, and
continues to move up the track. The speed of the block
at the bottom of the track is vB 12.0 m/s, and the
block experiences an average frictional force of 7.00 N
while sliding up the track. (a) What is x ? (b) What
speed do you predict for the block at the top of the
track? (c) Does the block actually reach the top of the
track, or does it fall off before reaching the top?
64. A uniform chain of length 8.00 m initially lies stretched
out on a horizontal table. (a) If the coefcient of static
friction between the chain and the table is 0.600, show
that the chain will begin to slide off the table if at least
3.00 m of it hangs over the edge of the table. (b) Determine the speed of the chain as all of it leaves the table,
given that the coefcient of kinetic friction between the
chain and the table is 0.400.
248
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
T
67. A ball having mass m is connected by a strong string of
length L to a pivot point and held in place in a vertical
position. A wind exerting constant force of magnitude F
is blowing from left to right as in Figure P8.67a. (a) If
the ball is released from rest, show that the maximum
height H it reaches, as measured from its initial height,
is
vT
R
vB
H
x
k
m
B
Figure P8.63
65. An object of mass m is suspended from a post on top of
a cart by a string of length L as in Figure P8.65a. The
cart and object are initially moving to the right at constant speed vi . The cart comes to rest after colliding and
sticking to a bumper as in Figure P8.65b, and the suspended object swings through an angle . (a) Show that
the speed is v i 2gL(1 cos ). (b) If L 1.20 m
and
35.0°, nd the initial speed of the cart. (Hint:
The force exerted by the string on the object does no
work on the object.)
1
2L
(mg/F )2
Check that the above formula is valid both when
0 H L and when L H 2L. (Hint: First determine the potential energy associated with the constant
wind force.) (b) Compute the value of H using the values m 2.00 kg, L 2.00 m, and F 14.7 N. (c) Using
these same values, determine the equilibrium height of
the ball. (d) Could the equilibrium height ever be
greater than L ? Explain.
Pivot
Pivot
F
F
L
L
m
H
m
vi
(b)
(a)
Figure P8.67
L
θ
m
(a)
(b)
Figure P8.65
66. A child slides without friction from a height h along a
curved water slide (Fig. P8.66). She is launched from a
height h/5 into the pool. Determine her maximum airborne height y in terms of h and .
68. A ball is tied to one end of a string. The other end of
the string is xed. The ball is set in motion around a
vertical circle without friction. At the top of the circle,
the ball has a speed of v i Rg, as shown in Figure
P8.68. At what angle should the string be cut so that
the ball will travel through the center of the circle?
vi =
Rg
The path
after string
is cut m
R
C
θ
h
θ
y
Figure P8.68
h/5
Figure P8.66
69. A ball at the end of a string whirls around in a vertical
circle. If the balls total energy remains constant, show
that the tension in the string at the bottom is greater
249
Problems
than the tension at the top by a value six times the
weight of the ball.
70. A pendulum comprising a string of length L and a
sphere swings in the vertical plane. The string hits a peg
located a distance d below the point of suspension (Fig.
P8.70). (a) Show that if the sphere is released from a
height below that of the peg, it will return to this height
after striking the peg. (b) Show that if the pendulum is
released from the horizontal position (
90°) and is
to swing in a complete circle centered on the peg, then
the minimum value of d must be 3L/5.
θ
L
the other side? (Hint: First determine the potential energy associated with the wind force.) (b) Once the rescue is complete, Tarzan and Jane must swing back
across the river. With what minimum speed must they
begin their swing? Assume that Tarzan has a mass of
80.0 kg.
72. A child starts from rest and slides down the frictionless
slide shown in Figure P8.72. In terms of R and H, at what
height h will he lose contact with the section of radius R ?
d
Peg
H
R
Figure P8.70
71. Jane, whose mass is 50.0 kg, needs to swing across a
river (having width D ) lled with man-eating crocodiles
to save Tarzan from danger. However, she must swing
into a wind exerting constant horizontal force F on a
vine having length L and initially making an angle
with the vertical (Fig. P8.71). Taking D 50.0 m, F
110 N, L 40.0 m, and
50.0°, (a) with what minimum speed must Jane begin her swing to just make it to
θ
φ
L
Wind
F
Jane
Figure P8.72
73. A 5.00-kg block free to move on a horizontal, frictionless surface is attached to one end of a light horizontal
spring. The other end of the spring is xed. The spring
is compressed 0.100 m from equilibrium and is then released. The speed of the block is 1.20 m/s when it
passes the equilibrium position of the spring. The same
experiment is now repeated with the frictionless surface
replaced by a surface for which k 0.300. Determine
the speed of the block at the equilibrium position of the
spring.
74. A 50.0-kg block and a 100-kg block are connected by a
string as in Figure P8.74. The pulley is frictionless and
of negligible mass. The coefcient of kinetic friction between the 50.0-kg block and the incline is k 0.250.
Determine the change in the kinetic energy of the
50.0-kg block as it moves from to , a distance of
20.0 m.
Tarzan
50.0 kg
D
100 kg
v
37.0°
Figure P8.71
Figure P8.74
250
CHAPTER 8
Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
8.1 Yes, because we are free to choose any point whatsoever
as our origin of coordinates, which is the Ug 0 point.
If the object is below the origin of coordinates that we
choose, then Ug 0 for the object Earth system.
8.2 Yes, the total mechanical energy of the system is conserved because the only forces acting are conservative:
the force of gravity and the spring force. There are two
forms of potential energy: (1) gravitational potential energy and (2) elastic potential energy stored in the spring.
8.3 The rst and third balls speed up after they are thrown,
while the second ball initially slows down but then
speeds up after reaching its peak. The paths of all three
balls are parabolas, and the balls take different times to
reach the ground because they have different initial velocities. However, all three balls have the same speed at
the moment they hit the ground because all start with
the same kinetic energy and undergo the same change
in gravitational potential energy. In other words,
E total 1mv 2 mgh is the same for all three balls at the
2
start of the motion.
8.4 Designate one object as No. 1 and the other as No. 2.
The external force does work Wapp on the system. If
Wapp 0, then the system energy increases. If Wapp 0,
then the system energy decreases. The effect of friction
is to decrease the total system energy. Equation 8.15
then becomes
E
W app
E friction
K
[K 1f
U
K 2f )
[(Ug1f
(K 1i
Ug 2f
K 2i )]
Usf)
(Ug 1i
Ug 2i
Usi)]
You may nd it easier to think of this equation with its
terms in a different order, saying
total initial energy
K 1i
K 2i
Ug1i
net change
Ug 2i
Usi
K 1f
total nal energy
W app
K 2f
f kd
Ug1f
Ug 2f
Usf
8.5 The slope of a U (x)-versus-x graph is by denition
dU (x)/dx. From Equation 8.16, we see that this expression is equal to the negative of the x component of the
conservative force acting on an object that is part of the
system.
PUZZLER
Airbags have saved countless lives by
reducing the forces exerted on vehicle
occupants during collisions. How can
airbags change the force needed to
bring a person from a high speed to a
complete stop? Why are they usually
safer than seat belts alone? (Courtesy
of Saab)
chapter
Linear Momentum and Collisions
Chapter Outline
9.1 Linear Momentum and Its
Conservation
9.2 Impulse and Momentum
9.3 Collisions
9.4 Elastic and Inelastic Collisions in
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
Two-Dimensional Collisions
The Center of Mass
Motion of a System of Particles
(Optional) Rocket Propulsion
One Dimension
251
252
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
C
onsider what happens when a golf ball is struck by a club. The ball is given a
very large initial velocity as a result of the collision; consequently, it is able to
travel more than 100 m through the air. The ball experiences a large acceleration. Furthermore, because the ball experiences this acceleration over a very short
time interval, the average force exerted on it during the collision is very great. According to Newtons third law, the ball exerts on the club a reaction force that is
equal in magnitude to and opposite in direction to the force exerted by the club
on the ball. This reaction force causes the club to accelerate. Because the club is
much more massive than the ball, however, the acceleration of the club is much
less than the acceleration of the ball.
One of the main objectives of this chapter is to enable you to understand and
analyze such events. As a rst step, we introduce the concept of momentum, which is
useful for describing objects in motion and as an alternate and more general
means of applying Newtons laws. For example, a very massive football player is often said to have a great deal of momentum as he runs down the eld. A much less
massive player, such as a halfback, can have equal or greater momentum if his
speed is greater than that of the more massive player. This follows from the fact
that momentum is dened as the product of mass and velocity. The concept of
momentum leads us to a second conservation law, that of conservation of momentum. This law is especially useful for treating problems that involve collisions between objects and for analyzing rocket propulsion. The concept of the center of
mass of a system of particles also is introduced, and we shall see that the motion of
a system of particles can be described by the motion of one representative particle
located at the center of mass.
9.1
LINEAR MOMENTUM AND ITS CONSERVATION
In the preceding two chapters we studied situations too complex to analyze easily
with Newtons laws. In fact, Newton himself used a form of his second law slightly
different from F m a (Eq. 5.2) a form that is considerably easier to apply in
complicated circumstances. Physicists use this form to study everything from subatomic particles to rocket propulsion. In studying situations such as these, it is often useful to know both something about the object and something about its motion. We start by dening a new term that incorporates this information:
Denition of linear momentum of
a particle
The linear momentum of a particle of mass m moving with a velocity v is dened to be the product of the mass and velocity:
p
6.2
(9.1)
mv
Linear momentum is a vector quantity because it equals the product of a scalar
quantity m and a vector quantity v. Its direction is along v, it has dimensions
ML/T, and its SI unit is kg m/s.
If a particle is moving in an arbitrary direction, p must have three components, and Equation 9.1 is equivalent to the component equations
px
mvx
py
mvy
pz
mvz
(9.2)
As you can see from its denition, the concept of momentum provides a quantitative distinction between heavy and light particles moving at the same velocity. For
example, the momentum of a bowling ball moving at 10 m/s is much greater than
that of a tennis ball moving at the same speed. Newton called the product m v
9.1
253
Linear Momentum and Its Conservation
quantity of motion; this is perhaps a more graphic description than our present-day
word momentum, which comes from the Latin word for movement.
Quick Quiz 9.1
Two objects have equal kinetic energies. How do the magnitudes of their momenta compare? (a) p 1 p 2 , (b) p 1 p 2 , (c) p 1 p 2 , (d) not enough information to tell.
Using Newtons second law of motion, we can relate the linear momentum of a
particle to the resultant force acting on the particle: The time rate of change of the
linear momentum of a particle is equal to the net force acting on the particle:
F
dp
dt
d(m v)
dt
Newtons second law for a particle
(9.3)
In addition to situations in which the velocity vector varies with time, we can
use Equation 9.3 to study phenomena in which the mass changes. The real value
of Equation 9.3 as a tool for analysis, however, stems from the fact that when the
net force acting on a particle is zero, the time derivative of the momentum of the
particle is zero, and therefore its linear momentum1 is constant. Of course, if
the particle is isolated, then by necessity F 0 and p remains unchanged. This
means that p is conserved. Just as the law of conservation of energy is useful in
solving complex motion problems, the law of conservation of momentum can
greatly simplify the analysis of other types of complicated motion.
Conservation of Momentum for a Two-Particle System
6.2
Consider two particles 1 and 2 that can interact with each other but are isolated
from their surroundings (Fig. 9.1). That is, the particles may exert a force on each
other, but no external forces are present. It is important to note the impact of
Newtons third law on this analysis. If an internal force from particle 1 (for example, a gravitational force) acts on particle 2, then there must be a second internal
force equal in magnitude but opposite in direction that particle 2 exerts on
particle 1.
Suppose that at some instant, the momentum of particle 1 is p1 and that of
particle 2 is p2 . Applying Newtons second law to each particle, we can write
F21
d p1
dt
F12
and
d p2
dt
where F21 is the force exerted by particle 2 on particle 1 and F12 is the force exerted by particle 1 on particle 2. Newtons third law tells us that F12 and F21 are
equal in magnitude and opposite in direction. That is, they form an action reaction pair F12
F21 . We can express this condition as
F21
F12
0
or as
d p1
dt
1 In
d p2
dt
d
(p1
dt
p2)
0
this chapter, the terms momentum and linear momentum have the same meaning. Later, in Chapter
11, we shall use the term angular momentum when dealing with rotational motion.
p1 = m1v1
m1
F21
F12
m2
p2 = m 2v2
Figure 9.1 At some instant, the
momentum of particle 1 is p1
m1v1 and the momentum of particle 2 is p2 m 2v2 . Note that F12
F21 . The total momentum of the
system ptot is equal to the vector
sum p1 p2 .
254
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
Because the time derivative of the total momentum ptot p1 p2 is zero, we conclude that the total momentum of the system must remain constant:
ptot
p
p1
p2
(9.4)
constant
system
or, equivalently,
p1i
p2i
p1f
(9.5)
p2f
where pli and p2i are the initial values and p1f and p2f the nal values of the momentum during the time interval dt over which the reaction pair interacts. Equation 9.5 in component form demonstrates that the total momenta in the x, y, and z
directions are all independently conserved:
pix
system
pf x
piy
system
system
pf y
system
piz
system
pf z
(9.6)
system
This result, known as the law of conservation of linear momentum, can be extended to any number of particles in an isolated system. It is considered one of the
most important laws of mechanics. We can state it as follows:
Conservation of momentum
Whenever two or more particles in an isolated system interact, the total momentum of the system remains constant.
This law tells us that the total momentum of an isolated system at all times
equals its initial momentum.
Notice that we have made no statement concerning the nature of the forces
acting on the particles of the system. The only requirement is that the forces must
be internal to the system.
Quick Quiz 9.2
Your physical education teacher throws a baseball to you at a certain speed, and you catch
it. The teacher is next going to throw you a medicine ball whose mass is ten times the mass
of the baseball. You are given the following choices: You can have the medicine ball thrown
with (a) the same speed as the baseball, (b) the same momentum, or (c) the same kinetic
energy. Rank these choices from easiest to hardest to catch.
EXAMPLE 9.1
The Floating Astronaut
A SkyLab astronaut discovered that while concentrating on
writing some notes, he had gradually oated to the middle of
an open area in the spacecraft. Not wanting to wait until he
oated to the opposite side, he asked his colleagues for a
push. Laughing at his predicament, they decided not to help,
and so he had to take off his uniform and throw it in one direction so that he would be propelled in the opposite direction. Estimate his resulting velocity.
Solution We begin by making some reasonable guesses of
relevant data. Let us assume we have a 70-kg astronaut who
threw his 1-kg uniform at a speed of 20 m/s. For conve-
v1f
Figure 9.2
somewhere.
v2f
A hapless astronaut has discarded his uniform to get
9.2
nience, we set the positive direction of the x axis to be the direction of the throw (Fig. 9.2). Let us also assume that the x
axis is tangent to the circular path of the spacecraft.
We take the system to consist of the astronaut and the uniform. Because of the gravitational force (which keeps the astronaut, his uniform, and the entire spacecraft in orbit), the
system is not really isolated. However, this force is directed
perpendicular to the motion of the system. Therefore, momentum is constant in the x direction because there are no
external forces in this direction.
The total momentum of the system before the throw is
zero (m1v1i m2v2i 0). Therefore, the total momentum after the throw must be zero; that is,
m1v1f
EXAMPLE 9.2
m2v2f
With m1 70 kg, v2f 20i m/s, and m2 1 kg, solving for
v1f , we nd the recoil velocity of the astronaut to be
v1f
1 kg
(20i m/s)
70 kg
m2
v
m1 2f
0.3i m/s
The negative sign for v1f indicates that the astronaut is moving to the left after the throw, in the direction opposite the
direction of motion of the uniform, in accordance with Newtons third law. Because the astronaut is much more massive
than his uniform, his acceleration and consequent velocity
are much smaller than the acceleration and velocity of the
uniform.
0
Breakup of a Kaon at Rest
One type of nuclear particle, called the neutral kaon (K0 ),
breaks up into a pair of other particles called pions (
and
) that are oppositely charged but equal in mass, as illustrated in Figure 9.3. Assuming the kaon is initially at rest,
prove that the two pions must have momenta that are equal
in magnitude and opposite in direction.
Solution
255
Impulse and Momentum
The important point behind this problem is that even though
it deals with objects that are very different from those in the
preceding example, the physics is identical: Linear momentum is conserved in an isolated system.
Κ0
The breakup of the kaon can be written
Before
decay
(at rest)
K 0 9:
If we let p be the momentum of the positive pion and p
the momentum of the negative pion, the nal momentum of
the system consisting of the two pions can be written
pf
p
6.3
&
6.4
p+
π
p
Figure 9.3 A kaon at rest breaks up spontaneously into a pair of
oppositely charged pions. The pions move apart with momenta that
are equal in magnitude but opposite in direction.
IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM
As we have seen, the momentum of a particle changes if a net force acts on the
particle. Knowing the change in momentum caused by a force is useful in solving
some types of problems. To begin building a better understanding of this important concept, let us assume that a single force F acts on a particle and that this
force may vary with time. According to Newtons second law, F d p/dt, or
dp
F dt
(9.7)
integrate2
We can
this expression to nd the change in the momentum of a particle when the force acts over some time interval. If the momentum of the particle
2 Note
π+
After decay
Because the kaon is at rest before the breakup, we know that
pi 0. Because momentum is conserved, p i p f 0, so that
p
p
0, or
p
p
9.2
p
that here we are integrating force with respect to time. Compare this with our efforts in Chapter 7,
where we integrated force with respect to position to express the work done by the force.
256
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
changes from pi at time ti to pf at time tf , integrating Equation 9.7 gives
tf
p
pf
pi
F dt
(9.8)
ti
To evaluate the integral, we need to know how the force varies with time. The
quantity on the right side of this equation is called the impulse of the force F acting on a particle over the time interval t tf ti . Impulse is a vector dened by
tf
I
Impulse of a force
F dt
p
(9.9)
ti
The impulse of the force F acting on a particle equals the change in the momentum of the particle caused by that force.
Impulse momentum theorem
F
tf
ti
t
(a)
F
This statement, known as the impulse momentum theorem,3 is equivalent to
Newtons second law. From this denition, we see that impulse is a vector quantity
having a magnitude equal to the area under the force time curve, as described in
Figure 9.4a. In this gure, it is assumed that the force varies in time in the general
manner shown and is nonzero in the time interval t tf ti . The direction of
the impulse vector is the same as the direction of the change in momentum. Impulse has the dimensions of momentum that is, ML/T. Note that impulse is not
a property of a particle; rather, it is a measure of the degree to which an external
force changes the momentum of the particle. Therefore, when we say that an impulse is given to a particle, we mean that momentum is transferred from an external agent to that particle.
Because the force imparting an impulse can generally vary in time, it is convenient to dene a time-averaged force
1
t
F
F
Area = Ft
ti
tf
t
tf
F dt
(9.10)
ti
where t tf ti . (This is an application of the mean value theorem of calculus.)
Therefore, we can express Equation 9.9 as
(b)
I
Ft
(9.11)
Figure 9.4
(a) A force acting on
a particle may vary in time. The impulse imparted to the particle by
the force is the area under the
force versus time curve. (b) In the
time interval t, the time-averaged
force (horizontal dashed line)
gives the same impulse to a particle
as does the time-varying force described in part (a).
This time-averaged force, described in Figure 9.4b, can be thought of as the constant force that would give to the particle in the time interval t the same impulse
that the time-varying force gives over this same interval.
In principle, if F is known as a function of time, the impulse can be calculated
from Equation 9.9. The calculation becomes especially simple if the force acting
on the particle is constant. In this case, F F and Equation 9.11 becomes
I
Ft
(9.12)
In many physical situations, we shall use what is called the impulse approximation, in which we assume that one of the forces exerted on a particle acts
for a short time but is much greater than any other force present. This approximation is especially useful in treating collisions in which the duration of the
3Although
we assumed that only a single force acts on the particle, the impulse momentum theorem is
valid when several forces act; in this case, we replace F in Equation 9.9 with F.
9.2
257
Impulse and Momentum
During the brief time the club is in contact with the ball, the ball gains momentum as a result of
the collision, and the club loses the same amount of momentum.
collision is very short. When this approximation is made, we refer to the force as
an impulsive force. For example, when a baseball is struck with a bat, the time of the
collision is about 0.01 s and the average force that the bat exerts on the ball in this
time is typically several thousand newtons. Because this is much greater than the
magnitude of the gravitational force, the impulse approximation justies our ignoring the weight of the ball and bat. When we use this approximation, it is important to remember that pi and pf represent the momenta immediately before and after the collision, respectively. Therefore, in any situation in which it is proper to
use the impulse approximation, the particle moves very little during the collision.
QuickLab
If you can nd someone willing, play
catch with an egg. What is the best
way to move your hands so that the
egg does not break when you change
its momentum to zero?
Quick Quiz 9.3
Two objects are at rest on a frictionless surface. Object 1 has a greater mass than object 2.
When a force is applied to object 1, it accelerates through a distance d. The force is removed from object 1 and is applied to object 2. At the moment when object 2 has accelerated through the same distance d, which statements are true? (a) p 1 p 2 , (b) p 1 p 2 ,
(c) p 1 p 2 , (d) K1 K2 , (e) K1 K2 , (f) K1 K2 .
EXAMPLE 9.3
Teeing Off
A golf ball of mass 50 g is struck with a club (Fig. 9.5). The
force exerted on the ball by the club varies from zero, at the instant before contact, up to some maximum value (at which the
ball is deformed) and then back to zero when the ball leaves
the club. Thus, the force time curve is qualitatively described
by Figure 9.4. Assuming that the ball travels 200 m, estimate the
magnitude of the impulse caused by the collision.
Solution
Let us use
to denote the moment when the
club rst contacts the ball,
to denote the moment when
the club loses contact with the ball as the ball starts on its trajectory, and
to denote its landing. Neglecting air resistance, we can use Equation 4.14 for the range of a projectile:
R
xC
v B2
sin 2
g
B
Let us assume that the launch angle B is 45°, the angle that
provides the maximum range for any given launch velocity.
This assumption gives sin 2 B 1, and the launch velocity of
258
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
the ball is
vB
x C g
(200 m)(9.80 m/s2)
44 m/s
Considering the time interval for the collision, vi vA 0
and vf v B for the ball. Hence, the magnitude of the impulse imparted to the ball is
I
p
mv B
mvA
(50
10
3
kg)(44 m/s)
0
2.2 kg m/s
Exercise
If the club is in contact with the ball for a time of
4.5 10 4 s, estimate the magnitude of the average force exerted by the club on the ball.
4.9 103 N, a value that is extremely large when
compared with the weight of the ball, 0.49 N.
Answer
EXAMPLE 9.4
Figure 9.5
A golf ball being struck by a club. (© Harold E. Edgerton/
Courtesy of Palm Press, Inc.)
How Good Are the Bumpers?
In a particular crash test, an automobile of mass 1 500 kg collides with a wall, as shown in Figure 9.6. The initial and nal
velocities of the automobile are vi
15.0i m/s and
vf 2.60i m/s, respectively. If the collision lasts for 0.150 s,
nd the impulse caused by the collision and the average
force exerted on the automobile.
The initial and nal momenta of the automobile are
pi
m vi
(1 500 kg)( 15.0i m/s)
pf
m vf
(1 500 kg)(2.60 i m/s)
0.39
I
p
pf
pi
( 2.25
I
104i kg m/s
2.64
0.39
104i
104i kg m/s
kg m/s)
104i kg m/s
The average force exerted on the automobile is
p
t
F
2.64
10 4 i kg m/s
0.150 s
1.76
Before
15.0 m/s
After
2.60 m/s
Figure 9.6
(a) This cars momentum
changes as a result of its collision with
the wall. (b) In a crash test, much of the
cars initial kinetic energy is transformed
into energy used to damage the car.
(a)
104 i kg m/s
Hence, the impulse is
Solution
Let us assume that the force exerted on the car
by the wall is large compared with other forces on the car so
that we can apply the impulse approximation. Furthermore,
we note that the force of gravity and the normal force exerted by the road on the car are perpendicular to the motion
and therefore do not affect the horizontal momentum.
2.25
(b)
105i N
9.3
Note that the magnitude of this force is large compared with
the weight of the car (mg 1.47 104 N), which justies
our initial assumption. Of note in this problem is how the
259
Collisions
signs of the velocities indicated the reversal of directions.
What would the mathematics be describing if both the initial
and nal velocities had the same sign?
Quick Quiz 9.4
Rank an automobile dashboard, seatbelt, and airbag in terms of (a) the impulse and
(b) the average force they deliver to a front-seat passenger during a collision.
9.3
6.5
&
6.6
COLLISIONS
In this section we use the law of conservation of linear momentum to describe
what happens when two particles collide. We use the term collision to represent
the event of two particles coming together for a short time and thereby producing
impulsive forces on each other. These forces are assumed to be much greater
than any external forces present.
A collision may entail physical contact between two macroscopic objects, as described in Figure 9.7a, but the notion of what we mean by collision must be generalized because physical contact on a submicroscopic scale is ill-dened and
hence meaningless. To understand this, consider a collision on an atomic scale
(Fig. 9.7b), such as the collision of a proton with an alpha particle (the nucleus of
a helium atom). Because the particles are both positively charged, they never
come into physical contact with each other; instead, they repel each other because
of the strong electrostatic force between them at close separations. When two particles 1 and 2 of masses m1 and m 2 collide as shown in Figure 9.7, the impulsive
forces may vary in time in complicated ways, one of which is described in Figure
9.8. If F21 is the force exerted by particle 2 on particle 1, and if we assume that no
external forces act on the particles, then the change in momentum of particle 1
due to the collision is given by Equation 9.8:
F21
F12
m1
m2
(a)
p
+
++
4
He
(b)
Figure 9.7 (a) The collision between two objects as the result of
direct contact. (b) The collision
between two charged particles.
tf
p1
ti
F21 dt
Likewise, if F12 is the force exerted by particle 1 on particle 2, then the change in
momentum of particle 2 is
F
tf
p2
ti
F12 dt
F12
From Newtons third law, we conclude that
p1
p1
p2
p2
0
Because the total momentum of the system is psystem p1 p2 , we conclude that
the change in the momentum of the system due to the collision is zero:
psystem
p1
p2
t
F21
constant
This is precisely what we expect because no external forces are acting on the system (see Section 9.2). Because the impulsive forces are internal, they do not
change the total momentum of the system (only external forces can do that).
Figure 9.8 The impulse force as
a function of time for the two colliding particles described in Figure
F21.
9.7a. Note that F12
260
CHAPTER 9
Momentum is conserved for any
collision
EXAMPLE 9.5
Linear Momentum and Collisions
Therefore, we conclude that the total momentum of an isolated system just
before a collision equals the total momentum of the system just after the
collision.
Carry Collision Insurance!
A car of mass 1800 kg stopped at a trafc light is struck from
the rear by a 900-kg car, and the two become entangled. If
the smaller car was moving at 20.0 m/s before the collision,
what is the velocity of the entangled cars after the collision?
Solution We can guess that the nal speed is less than
20.0 m/s, the initial speed of the smaller car. The total momentum of the system (the two cars) before the collision
must equal the total momentum immediately after the collision because momentum is conserved in any type of collision.
The magnitude of the total momentum before the collision is
equal to that of the smaller car because the larger car is initially at rest:
pi
m1v1i
(900 kg)(20.0 m/s)
1.80
104 kg m/s
After the collision, the magnitude of the momentum of
the entangled cars is
pf
(m1
m2)vf
(2 700 kg)vf
Equating the momentum before to the momentum after
and solving for vf , the nal velocity of the entangled cars, we
have
vf
1.80
pi
m1
m2
104 kg m/s
2 700 kg
6.67 m/s
The direction of the nal velocity is the same as the velocity
of the initially moving car.
Exercise What would be the nal speed if the two cars each
had a mass of 900 kg?
Answer
10.0 m/s.
Quick Quiz 9.5
As a ball falls toward the Earth, the balls momentum increases because its speed increases.
Does this mean that momentum is not conserved in this situation?
Quick Quiz 9.6
A skater is using very low-friction rollerblades. A friend throws a Frisbee straight at her. In
which case does the Frisbee impart the greatest impulse to the skater: (a) she catches the
Frisbee and holds it, (b) she catches it momentarily but drops it, (c) she catches it and at
once throws it back to her friend?
When the bowling ball and pin collide, part of the balls momentum
is transferred to the pin. Consequently, the pin acquires momentum and kinetic energy, and the
ball loses momentum and kinetic
energy. However, the total momentum of the system (ball and pin) remains constant.
Elastic collision
9.4
ELASTIC AND INELASTIC COLLISIONS
IN ONE DIMENSION
As we have seen, momentum is conserved in any collision in which external forces
are negligible. In contrast, kinetic energy may or may not be constant, depending on the type of collision. In fact, whether or not kinetic energy is the same before
and after the collision is used to classify collisions as being either elastic or inelastic.
An elastic collision between two objects is one in which total kinetic energy (as
well as total momentum) is the same before and after the collision. Billiard-ball collisions
and the collisions of air molecules with the walls of a container at ordinary temperatures are approximately elastic. Truly elastic collisions do occur, however, between
atomic and subatomic particles. Collisions between certain objects in the macroscopic world, such as billiard-ball collisions, are only approximately elastic because
some deformation and loss of kinetic energy take place.
9.4
261
Elastic and Inelastic Collisions in One Dimension
An inelastic collision is one in which total kinetic energy is not the same before and
after the collision (even though momentum is constant). Inelastic collisions are of two
types. When the colliding objects stick together after the collision, as happens
when a meteorite collides with the Earth, the collision is called perfectly inelastic.
When the colliding objects do not stick together, but some kinetic energy is lost, as
in the case of a rubber ball colliding with a hard surface, the collision is called inelastic (with no modifying adverb). For example, when a rubber ball collides with
a hard surface, the collision is inelastic because some of the kinetic energy of the
ball is lost when the ball is deformed while it is in contact with the surface.
In most collisions, kinetic energy is not the same before and after the collision
because some of it is converted to internal energy, to elastic potential energy when
the objects are deformed, and to rotational energy. Elastic and perfectly inelastic
collisions are limiting cases; most collisions fall somewhere between them.
In the remainder of this section, we treat collisions in one dimension and consider the two extreme cases perfectly inelastic and elastic collisions. The important distinction between these two types of collisions is that momentum is constant in all collisions, but kinetic energy is constant only in elastic
collisions.
Inelastic collision
QuickLab
Hold a Ping-Pong ball or tennis ball
on top of a basketball. Drop them
both at the same time so that the basketball hits the oor, bounces up, and
hits the smaller falling ball. What
happens and why?
Perfectly Inelastic Collisions
Consider two particles of masses m1 and m 2 moving with initial velocities v1i and v2i
along a straight line, as shown in Figure 9.9. The two particles collide head-on,
stick together, and then move with some common velocity vf after the collision.
Because momentum is conserved in any collision, we can say that the total momentum before the collision equals the total momentum of the composite system after
the collision:
m1v1i
m2v2i
vf
(m1
(9.13)
m2)vf
m1v1i
m1
m2v2i
m2
(9.14)
Before collision
m1
v1i
m2
v2i
(a)
After collision
Quick Quiz 9.7
Which is worse, crashing into a brick wall at 40 mi/h or crashing head-on into an oncoming
car that is identical to yours and also moving at 40 mi/h?
vf
m1 + m2
(b)
Elastic Collisions
6.6
Now consider two particles that undergo an elastic head-on collision (Fig. 9.10).
In this case, both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved; therefore, we have
m1v1i
1
2
2 m1v1i
m2v2i
1
2
2 m2v2i
m1v1f
1
2
2 m1v1f
m2v2f
1
2
2 m2v2f
(9.15)
(9.16)
Because all velocities in Figure 9.10 are either to the left or the right, they can be
represented by the corresponding speeds along with algebraic signs indicating direction. We shall indicate v as positive if a particle moves to the right and negative
Figure 9.9 Schematic representation of a perfectly inelastic head-on
collision between two particles:
(a) before collision and (b) after
collision.
262
CHAPTER 9
Before collision
m1
v1i
v2i
m2
(a)
After collision
v1f
v2f
Linear Momentum and Collisions
if it moves to the left. As has been seen in earlier chapters, it is common practice
to call these values speed even though this term technically refers to the magnitude of the velocity vector, which does not have an algebraic sign.
In a typical problem involving elastic collisions, there are two unknown quantities, and Equations 9.15 and 9.16 can be solved simultaneously to nd these. An alternative approach, however one that involves a little mathematical manipulation of Equation 9.16 often simplies this process. To see how, let us cancel the
factor 1 in Equation 9.16 and rewrite it as
2
m1(v1i2
(b)
Figure 9.10
Schematic representation of an elastic head-on collision between two particles: (a) before collision and (b) after
collision.
v1f 2 )
m2(v2f 2
v2i2 )
m2(v2f
v2i )(v2f
and then factor both sides:
m1(v1i
v1f )(v1i
v1f )
v2i )
(9.17)
Next, let us separate the terms containing m1 and m 2 in Equation 9.15 to get
m1(v1i
v1f )
m2(v2f
v2i )
(9.18)
To obtain our nal result, we divide Equation 9.17 by Equation 9.18 and get
v1i
v1i
v1f
v2f
(v1f
v2i
v2i
v2f )
(9.19)
This equation, in combination with Equation 9.15, can be used to solve problems
dealing with elastic collisions. According to Equation 9.19, the relative speed of
the two particles before the collision v1i v2i equals the negative of their relative
speed after the collision, (v1f v2f ).
Suppose that the masses and initial velocities of both particles are known.
Equations 9.15 and 9.19 can be solved for the nal speeds in terms of the initial
speeds because there are two equations and two unknowns:
v1f
m1
m1
v2f
2m1
v
m1 m2 1i
Elastic collision: relationships
between nal and initial velocities
m2
v
m2 1i
2m2
v
m1 m2 2i
(9.20)
m2
m1
(9.21)
m1
v
m2 2i
It is important to remember that the appropriate signs for v1i and v2i must be included in Equations 9.20 and 9.21. For example, if particle 2 is moving to the left
initially, then v2i is negative.
Let us consider some special cases: If m1 m 2 , then v1f v2i and v2f v1i .
That is, the particles exchange speeds if they have equal masses. This is approximately what one observes in head-on billiard ball collisions the cue ball stops,
and the struck ball moves away from the collision with the same speed that the cue
ball had.
If particle 2 is initially at rest, then v2i 0 and Equations 9.20 and 9.21 become
Elastic collision: particle 2 initially
at rest
v1f
m1
m1
m2
v
m2 1i
(9.22)
v2f
2m1
v
m1 m2 1i
(9.23)
If m1 is much greater than m 2 and v2i 0 , we see from Equations 9.22 and
9.23 that v1f v1i and v2f 2v1i . That is, when a very heavy particle collides headon with a very light one that is initially at rest, the heavy particle continues its mo-
9.4
263
Elastic and Inelastic Collisions in One Dimension
tion unaltered after the collision, and the light particle rebounds with a speed
equal to about twice the initial speed of the heavy particle. An example of such a
collision would be that of a moving heavy atom, such as uranium, with a light
atom, such as hydrogen.
If m 2 is much greater than m1 and particle 2 is initially at rest, then v1f
v1i
and v2f v2i 0. That is, when a very light particle collides head-on with a very
heavy particle that is initially at rest, the light particle has its velocity reversed and
the heavy one remains approximately at rest.
EXAMPLE 9.6
The Ballistic Pendulum
The ballistic pendulum (Fig. 9.11) is a system used to measure the speed of a fast-moving projectile, such as a bullet.
The bullet is red into a large block of wood suspended from
some light wires. The bullet embeds in the block, and the entire system swings through a height h. The collision is perfectly inelastic, and because momentum is conserved, Equation 9.14 gives the speed of the system right after the
collision, when we assume the impulse approximation. If we
call the bullet particle 1 and the block particle 2, the total kinetic energy right after the collision is
(1)
With v2i
1
2 (m1
Kf
Exercise
In a ballistic pendulum experiment, suppose that
h
5.00 cm, m1 5.00 g, and m 2 1.00 kg. Find (a) the
initial speed of the bullet and (b) the loss in mechanical energy due to the collision.
Answer
199 m/s; 98.5 J.
m2)vf 2
0, Equation 9.14 becomes
(2)
m1v1i
m1 m2
vf
m1 + m 2
Substituting this value of vf into (1) gives
Kf
m12v1i2
2(m1 m2)
m1
Note that this kinetic energy immediately after the collision is
less than the initial kinetic energy of the bullet. In all the energy changes that take place after the collision, however, the
total amount of mechanical energy remains constant; thus,
we can say that after the collision, the kinetic energy of the
block and bullet at the bottom is transformed to potential energy at the height h :
m12v1i2
2(m1 m2)
(m1
v1i
m2
vf
h
(a)
m2)gh
Solving for v1i , we obtain
v1i
m1
m2
m1
2gh
This expression tells us that it is possible to obtain the initial
speed of the bullet by measuring h and the two masses.
Because the collision is perfectly inelastic, some mechanical energy is converted to internal energy and it would be incorrect to equate the initial kinetic energy of the incoming
bullet to the nal gravitational potential energy of the
bullet block combination.
(b)
Figure 9.11 (a) Diagram of a ballistic pendulum. Note that v1i is
the velocity of the bullet just before the collision and vf v1f v2f
is the velocity of the bullet block system just after the perfectly inelastic collision. (b) Multiash photograph of a ballistic pendulum
used in the laboratory.
264
CHAPTER 9
EXAMPLE 9.7
Linear Momentum and Collisions
A Two-Body Collision with a Spring
A block of mass m 1 1.60 kg initially moving to the right with
a speed of 4.00 m/s on a frictionless horizontal track collides
with a spring attached to a second block of mass m 2 2.10 kg
initially moving to the left with a speed of 2.50 m/s, as shown
in Figure 9.12a. The spring constant is 600 N/m. (a) At the instant block 1 is moving to the right with a speed of 3.00 m/s,
as in Figure 9.12b, determine the velocity of block 2.
Solution
First, note that the initial velocity of block 2 is
2.50 m/s because its direction is to the left. Because momentum is conserved for the system of two blocks, we have
m1v1i
m2v2i
m1v1f
(1.60 kg)(4.00 m/s)
m2v2 f
v2 f
1
2
2 m1v1i
1
2
2 m2 v2i
1
2
2 m1v1f
1
2
2 m2 v2f
12
2 kx
Substituting the given values and the result to part (a) into
this expression gives
x
0.173 m
It is important to note that we needed to use the principles of
both conservation of momentum and conservation of mechanical energy to solve the two parts of this problem.
(2.10 kg)( 2.50 m/s)
(1.60 kg)(3.00 m/s)
Solution To determine the distance that the spring is
compressed, shown as x in Figure 9.12b, we can use the concept of conservation of mechanical energy because no friction or other nonconservative forces are acting on the system.
Thus, we have
(2.10 kg)v2 f
1.74 m/s
Exercise
The negative value for v2f means that block 2 is still moving to
the left at the instant we are considering.
(b) Determine the distance the spring is compressed at
that instant.
v1i = (4.00i) m/s
Find the velocity of block 1 and the compression
in the spring at the instant that block 2 is at rest.
Answer
v1f = (3.00i) m/s
v2i = (2.50i) m/s
k
m1
0.719 m/s to the right; 0.251 m.
v2f
k
m2
m1
m2
x
(a)
(b)
Figure 9.12
EXAMPLE 9.8
Slowing Down Neutrons by Collisions
In a nuclear reactor, neutrons are produced when a 235U
92
atom splits in a process called ssion. These neutrons are
moving at about 107 m/s and must be slowed down to about
103 m/s before they take part in another ssion event. They
are slowed down by being passed through a solid or liquid
material called a moderator. The slowing-down process involves
elastic collisions. Let us show that a neutron can lose most of
its kinetic energy if it collides elastically with a moderator
containing light nuclei, such as deuterium (in heavy water,
D2O) or carbon (in graphite).
Solution Let us assume that the moderator nucleus of
mass mm is at rest initially and that a neutron of mass mn and
initial speed vni collides with it head-on.
Because these are elastic collisions, the rst thing we do is
recognize that both momentum and kinetic energy are constant. Therefore, Equations 9.22 and 9.23 can be applied to
the head-on collision of a neutron with a moderator nucleus.
We can represent this process by a drawing such as Figure
9.10.
The initial kinetic energy of the neutron is
9.4
Kni
1
2
2 mnvni
After the collision, the neutron has kinetic energy 1 mnvnf 2,
2
and we can substitute into this the value for vnf given by
Equation 9.22:
Knf
1
2
2 mnvnf
mn
2
mn
mn
mm
mm
Knf
fn
Kni
mn
mn
mm
mm
Kmf
1
2
2 mmvmf
vni2
(2)
2
From this result, we see that the nal kinetic energy of the
neutron is small when mm is close to mn and zero when mn
mm .
We can use Equation 9.23, which gives the nal speed of
the particle that was initially at rest, to calculate the kinetic
energy of the moderator nucleus after the collision:
Kmf
fm
Kni
An ingenious device that illustrates conservation of momentum and kinetic energy is shown
in Figure 9.13a. It consists of ve identical hard balls supported by strings of equal lengths.
When ball 1 is pulled out and released, after the almost-elastic collision between it and ball
2, ball 5 moves out, as shown in Figure 9.13b. If balls 1 and 2 are pulled out and released,
balls 4 and 5 swing out, and so forth. Is it ever possible that, when ball 1 is released, balls 4
and 5 will swing out on the opposite side and travel with half the speed of ball 1, as in Figure 9.13c?
5
1
(a)
2345
1234
This can happen.
(b)
1
v
Figure 9.13
v
4
2345
123
Can this happen?
(c)
An executive stress reliever.
4mnmm
(mn mm)2
Because the total kinetic energy of the system is conserved,
(2) can also be obtained from (1) with the condition that
fn fm 1, so that fm 1 fn .
Suppose that heavy water is used for the moderator. For
collisions of the neutrons with deuterium nuclei in D2O
(mm 2mn), fn 1/9 and fm 8/9. That is, 89% of the
neutrons kinetic energy is transferred to the deuterium nucleus. In practice, the moderator efciency is reduced because head-on collisions are very unlikely.
How do the results differ when graphite (12C, as found in
pencil lead) is used as the moderator?
Quick Quiz 9.8
v
2mn2mm
v2
(mn mm)2 ni
Hence, the fraction fm of the initial kinetic energy transferred
to the moderator nucleus is
2
Therefore, the fraction fn of the initial kinetic energy possessed by the neutron after the collision is
(1)
265
Elastic and Inelastic Collisions in One Dimension
5
v/2
266
CHAPTER 9
9.5
Linear Momentum and Collisions
TWO-DIMENSIONAL COLLISIONS
In Sections 9.1 and 9.3, we showed that the momentum of a system of two particles
is constant when the system is isolated. For any collision of two particles, this result
implies that the momentum in each of the directions x, y, and z is constant. However, an important subset of collisions takes place in a plane. The game of billiards
is a familiar example involving multiple collisions of objects moving on a twodimensional surface. For such two-dimensional collisions, we obtain two component equations for conservation of momentum:
m1v1ix
m2v2ix
m1v1fx
m2v2 fx
m1v1iy
m2v2iy
m1v1fy
m2v2fy
Let us consider a two-dimensional problem in which particle 1 of mass m1 collides with particle 2 of mass m 2 , where particle 2 is initially at rest, as shown in Figure 9.14. After the collision, particle 1 moves at an angle with respect to the horizontal and particle 2 moves at an angle with respect to the horizontal. This is
called a glancing collision. Applying the law of conservation of momentum in component form, and noting that the initial y component of the momentum of the
two-particle system is zero, we obtain
m1v1i
m1v1f cos
m2v2 f cos
(9.24)
0
m1v1f sin
m2v2 f sin
(9.25)
where the minus sign in Equation 9.25 comes from the fact that after the collision,
particle 2 has a y component of velocity that is downward. We now have two independent equations. As long as no more than two of the seven quantities in Equations 9.24 and 9.25 are unknown, we can solve the problem.
If the collision is elastic, we can also use Equation 9.16 (conservation of kinetic
energy), with v2i 0, to give
1
2
2 m1v1i
1
2
2 m1v1f
1
2
2 m2v2 f
(9.26)
Knowing the initial speed of particle 1 and both masses, we are left with four unknowns (v1f , v2 f , , ). Because we have only three equations, one of the four remaining quantities must be given if we are to determine the motion after the collision from conservation principles alone.
If the collision is inelastic, kinetic energy is not conserved and Equation 9.26
does not apply.
v1f
v1f sin θ
θ
v1i
φ
v1f cos θ
v2f cos φ
v2f sin φ
(a) Before the collision
Figure 9.14
v2f
(b) After the collision
An elastic glancing collision between two particles.
9.5
267
Two-Dimensional Collisions
Problem-Solving Hints
Collisions
The following procedure is recommended when dealing with problems involving collisions between two objects:
Set up a coordinate system and dene your velocities with respect to that system. It is usually convenient to have the x axis coincide with one of the initial velocities.
In your sketch of the coordinate system, draw and label all velocity vectors
and include all the given information.
Write expressions for the x and y components of the momentum of each object before and after the collision. Remember to include the appropriate
signs for the components of the velocity vectors.
Write expressions for the total momentum in the x direction before and after the collision and equate the two. Repeat this procedure for the total momentum in the y direction. These steps follow from the fact that, because
the momentum of the system is conserved in any collision, the total momentum along any direction must also be constant. Remember, it is the momentum of the system that is constant, not the momenta of the individual objects.
If the collision is inelastic, kinetic energy is not conserved, and additional information is probably required. If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the nal
velocities of the two objects are equal. Solve the momentum equations for
the unknown quantities.
If the collision is elastic, kinetic energy is conserved, and you can equate the
total kinetic energy before the collision to the total kinetic energy after the
collision to get an additional relationship between the velocities.
EXAMPLE 9.9
Collision at an Intersection
A 1 500-kg car traveling east with a speed of 25.0 m/s collides
at an intersection with a 2 500-kg van traveling north at a
speed of 20.0 m/s, as shown in Figure 9.15. Find the direction and magnitude of the velocity of the wreckage after the
collision, assuming that the vehicles undergo a perfectly inelastic collision (that is, they stick together).
y
vf
Solution Let us choose east to be along the positive x direction and north to be along the positive y direction. Before
the collision, the only object having momentum in the x direction is the car. Thus, the magnitude of the total initial momentum of the system (car plus van) in the x direction is
pxi
(1 500 kg)(25.0 m/s)
3.75
3.75
(20.0j) m/s
Figure 9.15
An eastbound car colliding with a northbound van.
(4 000 kg)vf cos
Because the total momentum in the x direction is constant,
we can equate these two equations to obtain
(1)
θ
x
104 kg m/s
Let us assume that the wreckage moves at an angle and
speed vf after the collision. The magnitude of the total momentum in the x direction after the collision is
pxf
(25.0i) m/s
104 kg m/s
(4 000 kg)vf cos
Similarly, the total initial momentum of the system in the
y direction is that of the van, and the magnitude of this momentum is (2 500 kg)(20.0 m/s). Applying conservation of
268
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
momentum to the y direction, we have
53.1°
pyi
pyf
(2 500 kg)(20.0 m/s)
(4 000 kg)vf sin
104 kg m/s
(4 000 kg)vf sin
5.00
(2)
When this angle is substituted into (2), the value of vf is
vf
If we divide (2) by (1), we get
sin
cos
104
104
5.00
3.75
tan
EXAMPLE 9.10
1.33
5.00 104 kg m/s
(4 000 kg)sin 53.1°
15.6 m/s
It might be instructive for you to draw the momentum vectors
of each vehicle before the collision and the two vehicles together after the collision.
Proton Proton Collision
Proton 1 collides elastically with proton 2 that is initially at
rest. Proton 1 has an initial speed of 3.50 105 m/s and
makes a glancing collision with proton 2, as was shown in Figure 9.14. After the collision, proton 1 moves at an angle of
37.0° to the horizontal axis, and proton 2 deects at an angle
to the same axis. Find the nal speeds of the two protons
and the angle .
Solution Because both particles are protons, we know that
m1 m 2 . We also know that
37.0° and v1i 3.50
105 m/s. Equations 9.24, 9.25, and 9.26 become
v1f cos 37.0°
v2 f cos
v1f sin 37.0°
v2 f sin
v1f
2
v2 f
EXAMPLE 9.11
3.50
105 m/s
0
2
(3.50
105 m/s)2
Solving these three equations with three unknowns simultaneously gives
v1f
2.80
105 m/s
v2 f
2.11
105 m/s
53.0°
90°. This result is not accidental. WhenNote that
ever two equal masses collide elastically in a glancing
collision and one of them is initially at rest, their nal
velocities are always at right angles to each other. The
next example illustrates this point in more detail.
Billiard Ball Collision
In a game of billiards, a player wishes to sink a target ball 2 in
the corner pocket, as shown in Figure 9.16. If the angle to the
corner pocket is 35°, at what angle is the cue ball 1 deected? Assume that friction and rotational motion are unimportant and that the collision is elastic.
y
Solution Because the target ball is initially at rest, conservation of energy (Eq. 9.16) gives
1
2
2 m1v1f
1
2
2 m1v1i
But m1
1
2
2 m2v2 f
m 2 , so that
(1)
v1i
2
v1f
2
v2 f
v1i
v1f
v1i
35°
Cue ball
v1f
v2 f
Note that because m 1 m 2 , the masses also cancel in (2). If
we square both sides of (2) and use the denition of the dot
x
θ
2
Applying conservation of momentum to the two-dimensional
collision gives
(2)
v2 f
Figure 9.16
9.6
product of two vectors from Section 7.2, we get
v1i2
(v1f
v2 f ) (v1f
v2 f )
v1f 2
v2 f 2
0
v1i2
v1f 2
v2 f 2
2v1f v2 f cos(
Subtracting (1) from (3) gives
0
9.6
6.7
2v1f v2 f cos(
35°)
cos(
35°)
90°
or
2v1f v2 f
Because the angle between v1f and v2f is
35°), and so
v1f v2 f v1f v2 f cos(
(3)
269
The Center of Mass
35°
35°,
35°)
55°
This result shows that whenever two equal masses undergo a
glancing elastic collision and one of them is initially at rest,
they move at right angles to each other after the collision.
The same physics describes two very different situations, protons in Example 9.10 and billiard balls in this example.
THE CENTER OF MASS
In this section we describe the overall motion of a mechanical system in terms of a
special point called the center of mass of the system. The mechanical system can
be either a system of particles, such as a collection of atoms in a container, or an
extended object, such as a gymnast leaping through the air. We shall see that the
center of mass of the system moves as if all the mass of the system were concentrated at that point. Furthermore, if the resultant external force on the system is
Fext and the total mass of the system is M, the center of mass moves with an acceleration given by a
Fext /M. That is, the system moves as if the resultant external force were applied to a single particle of mass M located at the center of mass.
This behavior is independent of other motion, such as rotation or vibration of the
system. This result was implicitly assumed in earlier chapters because many examples referred to the motion of extended objects that were treated as particles.
Consider a mechanical system consisting of a pair of particles that have different masses and are connected by a light, rigid rod (Fig. 9.17). One can describe the
position of the center of mass of a system as being the average position of the systems
mass. The center of mass of the system is located somewhere on the line joining the
CM
(a)
CM
(b)
CM
(c)
Figure 9.17 Two particles of unequal mass are connected by a
light, rigid rod. (a) The system rotates clockwise when a force is applied between the less massive particle and the center of mass.
(b) The system rotates counterclockwise when a force is applied
between the more massive particle
and the center of mass. (c) The system moves in the direction of the
force without rotating when a force
is applied at the center of mass.
This multiash photograph shows that as the acrobat executes a somersault, his center of mass
follows a parabolic path, the same path that a particle would follow.
270
CHAPTER 9
y
x CM
m2
m1
x
CM
x1
x2
Figure 9.18 The center of mass
of two particles of unequal mass on
the x axis is located at x CM , a point
between the particles, closer to the
one having the larger mass.
Linear Momentum and Collisions
particles and is closer to the particle having the larger mass. If a single force is applied at some point on the rod somewhere between the center of mass and the less
massive particle, the system rotates clockwise (see Fig. 9.17a). If the force is applied
at a point on the rod somewhere between the center of mass and the more massive
particle, the system rotates counterclockwise (see Fig. 9.17b). If the force is applied
at the center of mass, the system moves in the direction of F without rotating (see
Fig. 9.17c). Thus, the center of mass can be easily located.
The center of mass of the pair of particles described in Figure 9.18 is located
on the x axis and lies somewhere between the particles. Its x coordinate is
m1x1
m1
xCM
m2 x2
m2
(9.27)
For example, if x1 0, x2 d, and m2 2m1 , we nd that xCM 2 d. That is, the
3
center of mass lies closer to the more massive particle. If the two masses are equal,
the center of mass lies midway between the particles.
We can extend this concept to a system of many particles in three dimensions.
The x coordinate of the center of mass of n particles is dened to be
xCM
m1x1 m2 x2
m1 m2
m3x3
m3
mn xn
i
mn
mi xi
i
mi
(9.28)
where xi is the x coordinate of the i th particle. For convenience, we express the total mass as M
mi , where the sum runs over all n particles. The y and z coordii
nates of the center of mass are similarly dened by the equations
yCM
i
mi yi
and
M
i
zCM
mi zi
M
(9.29)
The center of mass can also be located by its position vector, rCM . The cartesian coordinates of this vector are x CM , y CM , and z C M , dened in Equations 9.28
and 9.29. Therefore,
rCM
xCMi yCM j zCMk
mi xi i
mi yi j
mi zi k
i
i
i
M
Vector position of the center of
mass for a system of particles
rCM
i
mi ri
(9.30)
M
where ri is the position vector of the i th particle, dened by
y
ri
mi
CM
ri
rCM
x
z
Figure 9.19 An extended object
can be considered a distribution of
small elements of mass mi . The
center of mass is located at the vector position rCM , which has coordinates x CM , y CM , and z CM .
xi i
yi j
zi k
Although locating the center of mass for an extended object is somewhat
more cumbersome than locating the center of mass of a system of particles, the basic ideas we have discussed still apply. We can think of an extended object as a system containing a large number of particles (Fig. 9.19). The particle separation is
very small, and so the object can be considered to have a continuous mass distribution. By dividing the object into elements of mass mi , with coordinates xi , yi , zi ,
we see that the x coordinate of the center of mass is approximately
xCM
i
xi mi
M
with similar expressions for y CM and z CM . If we let the number of elements n approach innity, then x CM is given precisely. In this limit, we replace the sum by an
9.6
271
The Center of Mass
integral and mi by the differential element dm :
xCM
lim
mi : 0
i
xi mi
M
1
M
x dm
and
zCM
1
M
(9.31)
Likewise, for y CM and z CM we obtain
yCM
1
M
y dm
C
z dm
(9.32)
We can express the vector position of the center of mass of an extended object
in the form
rCM
1
M
A
B
r dm
(9.33)
C
which is equivalent to the three expressions given by Equations 9.31 and 9.32.
The center of mass of any symmetric object lies on an axis of symmetry
and on any plane of symmetry.4 For example, the center of mass of a rod lies in
the rod, midway between its ends. The center of mass of a sphere or a cube lies at
its geometric center.
One can determine the center of mass of an irregularly shaped object by suspending the object rst from one point and then from another. In Figure 9.20, a
wrench is hung from point A, and a vertical line AB (which can be established with
a plumb bob) is drawn when the wrench has stopped swinging. The wrench is then
hung from point C, and a second vertical line CD is drawn. The center of mass is
halfway through the thickness of the wrench, under the intersection of these two
lines. In general, if the wrench is hung freely from any point, the vertical line
through this point must pass through the center of mass.
Because an extended object is a continuous distribution of mass, each small
mass element is acted upon by the force of gravity. The net effect of all these
forces is equivalent to the effect of a single force, Mg, acting through a special
point, called the center of gravity. If g is constant over the mass distribution,
then the center of gravity coincides with the center of mass. If an extended object
is pivoted at its center of gravity, it balances in any orientation.
If a baseball bat is cut at the location of its center of mass as shown in Figure 9.21, do the
two pieces have the same mass?
4This
B
Center of
mass
D
Figure 9.20 An experimental
technique for determining the center of mass of a wrench. The
wrench is hung freely rst from
point A and then from point C.
The intersection of the two lines
AB and CD locates the center of
mass.
QuickLab
Quick Quiz 9.9
Figure 9.21
A
A baseball bat cut at the location of its center of mass.
statement is valid only for objects that have a uniform mass per unit volume.
Cut a triangle from a piece of cardboard and draw a set of adjacent
strips inside it, parallel to one of the
sides. Put a dot at the approximate location of the center of mass of each
strip and then draw a straight line
through the dots and into the angle
opposite your starting side. The center of mass for the triangle must lie
on this bisector of the angle. Repeat
these steps for the other two sides.
The three angle bisectors you have
drawn will intersect at the center of
mass of the triangle. If you poke a
hole anywhere in the triangle and
hang the cardboard from a string attached at that hole, the center of
mass will be vertically aligned with the
hole.
272
CHAPTER 9
EXAMPLE 9.12
Linear Momentum and Collisions
The Center of Mass of Three Particles
A system consists of three particles located as shown in Figure
9.22a. Find the center of mass of the system.
y(m)
Solution We set up the problem by labeling the masses of
the particles as shown in the gure, with m1 m2 1.0 kg
and m3 2.0 kg. Using the basic dening equations for the
coordinates of the center of mass and noting that zCM 0,
we obtain
3
m3
2
mixi
xCM
yCM
m1x1 m2x2 m3x3
i
M
m1 m2 m3
(1.0 kg)(1.0 m) (1.0 kg)(2.0 m) (2.0 kg)(0 m)
1.0 kg 1.0 kg 2.0 kg
3.0 kg m
0.75 m
4.0 kg
miyi
my
my
my
11
i
22
1
rCM
m1
M
m1 m2 m3
(1.0 kg)(0) (1.0 kg)(0) (2.0 kg)(2.0 m)
4.0 kg
4.0 kg m
1.0 m
4.0 kg
0
m2
1
33
2
3 x(m)
(a)
The position vector to the center of mass measured from the
origin is therefore
rCM
xCM i
yCM j
0.75i m
M rCM
1.0 j m
rCM
m3r3
We can verify this result graphically by adding together
m1r1 m2r2 m3r3 and dividing the vector sum by M, the
total mass. This is shown in Figure 9.22b.
Figure 9.22 (a) Two 1-kg masses and a single 2-kg mass are located as shown. The vector indicates the location of the systems center of mass. (b) The vector sum of m i ri .
EXAMPLE 9.13
m1r1
m2r2
(b)
The Center of Mass of a Rod
(a) Show that the center of mass of a rod of mass M and
length L lies midway between its ends, assuming the rod has a
uniform mass per unit length.
Because
Solution The rod is shown aligned along the x axis in Figure 9.23, so that yCM zCM 0. Furthermore, if we call the
mass per unit length (this quantity is called the linear mass
density ), then
M/L for the uniform rod we assume here.
If we divide the rod into elements of length dx, then the mass
of each element is dm
dx. For an arbitrary element located a distance x from the origin, Equation 9.31 gives
One can also use symmetry arguments to obtain the same result.
xCM
1
M
x dm
1
M
L
x dx
0
x2
M2
L
0
L2
2M
M/L, this reduces to
xCM
L2
2M
M
L
L
2
(b) Suppose a rod is nonuniform such that its mass per unit
length varies linearly with x according to the expression
x, where is a constant. Find the x coordinate of the center
of mass as a fraction of L.
Solution
In this case, we replace dm by dx where
constant. Therefore, x CM is
is not
9.7
1
M
xCM
1
M
x dm
L
M
x2 dx
L
1
M
x dx
0
L3
L
x x dx
0
3M
0
y
We can eliminate by noting that the total mass of the rod is
related to through the relationship
L
M
L
dm
dx
0
x dx
0
dm = λdx
L
L2
2
x
O
x
Substituting this into the expression for x CM gives
L3
xCM
dx
2
L
3
3 L2/2
EXAMPLE 9.14
Figure 9.23
cated at x CM
The center of mass of a uniform rod of length L is loL/2.
The Center of Mass of a Right Triangle
An object of mass M is in the shape of a right triangle whose
dimensions are shown in Figure 9.24. Locate the coordinates
of the center of mass, assuming the object has a uniform mass
per unit area.
With this substitution, x CM becomes
xCM
By inspection we can estimate that the x coordinate of the center of mass must be past the center of the
base, that is, greater than a/2, because the largest part of the
triangle lies beyond that point. A similar argument indicates
that its y coordinate must be less than b/2. To evaluate the x
coordinate, we divide the triangle into narrow strips of width
dx and height y as in Figure 9.24. The mass dm of each strip is
total mass of object
total area of object
a
2
ab
x
0
a
2
a2
x2 dx
0
1
b
3
yCM
These values t our original estimates.
area of strip
y
dm
Therefore, the x coordinate of the center of mass is
xCM
1
M
1
M
x dm
a
x
0
2M
y dx
ab
2
ab
c
a
9.7
6.8
b
a
or
y
b
xy dx
y
0
To evaluate this integral, we must express y in terms of x.
From similar triangles in Figure 9.24, we see that
y
x
x3
3
a
0
By a similar calculation, we get for the y coordinate of the
center of mass
2M
y dx
ab
M
(y dx)
1/2 ab
2
a2
b
x dx
a
2
a
3
Solution
dm
273
Motion of a System of Particles
dx
O
b
x
a
MOTION OF A SYSTEM OF PARTICLES
We can begin to understand the physical signicance and utility of the center of
mass concept by taking the time derivative of the position vector given by Equation
9.30. From Section 4.1 we know that the time derivative of a position vector is by
x
a
Figure 9.24
x
274
Velocity of the center of mass
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
denition a velocity. Assuming M remains constant for a system of particles, that is,
no particles enter or leave the system, we get the following expression for the velocity of the center of mass of the system:
mivi
d rCM
1
dr
i
(9.34)
vCM
mi i
dt
Mi
dt
M
where vi is the velocity of the i th particle. Rearranging Equation 9.34 gives
Total momentum of a system of
particles
MvCM
mi vi
pi
i
(9.35)
ptot
i
Therefore, we conclude that the total linear momentum of the system equals
the total mass multiplied by the velocity of the center of mass. In other words, the
total linear momentum of the system is equal to that of a single particle of mass M
moving with a velocity vCM .
If we now differentiate Equation 9.34 with respect to time, we get the acceleration of the center of mass of the system:
Acceleration of the center of mass
aCM
d vCM
dt
1
M
mi
i
d vi
dt
1
M
mi a i
(9.36)
i
Rearranging this expression and using Newtons second law, we obtain
MaCM
mi a i
i
Fi
(9.37)
i
where Fi is the net force on particle i.
The forces on any particle in the system may include both external forces
(from outside the system) and internal forces (from within the system). However,
by Newtons third law, the internal force exerted by particle 1 on particle 2, for example, is equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to the internal force exerted by particle 2 on particle 1. Thus, when we sum over all internal forces in
Equation 9.37, they cancel in pairs and the net force on the system is caused only
by external forces. Thus, we can write Equation 9.37 in the form
Newtons second law for a system
of particles
Fext
MaCM
d ptot
dt
(9.38)
That is, the resultant external force on a system of particles equals the total mass
of the system multiplied by the acceleration of the center of mass. If we compare
this with Newtons second law for a single particle, we see that
The center of mass of a system of particles of combined mass M moves like an
equivalent particle of mass M would move under the inuence of the resultant
external force on the system.
Finally, we see that if the resultant external force is zero, then from Equation
9.38 it follows that
d ptot
dt
MaCM
0
9.7
Motion of a System of Particles
275
Figure 9.25
Multiash photograph showing an overhead view of a wrench moving on a horizontal surface. The center of mass of the wrench moves in a straight line as the wrench rotates
about this point, shown by the white dots.
so that
ptot
M vCM
constant
(when
Fext
0)
(9.39)
That is, the total linear momentum of a system of particles is conserved if no net
external force is acting on the system. It follows that for an isolated system of particles, both the total momentum and the velocity of the center of mass are constant
in time, as shown in Figure 9.25. This is a generalization to a many-particle system
of the law of conservation of momentum discussed in Section 9.1 for a two-particle
system.
Suppose an isolated system consisting of two or more members is at rest. The
center of mass of such a system remains at rest unless acted upon by an external
force. For example, consider a system made up of a swimmer standing on a raft,
with the system initially at rest. When the swimmer dives horizontally off the raft,
the center of mass of the system remains at rest (if we neglect friction between raft
and water). Furthermore, the linear momentum of the diver is equal in magnitude
to that of the raft but opposite in direction.
As another example, suppose an unstable atom initially at rest suddenly breaks
up into two fragments of masses MA and MB , with velocities vA and vB , respectively.
Because the total momentum of the system before the breakup is zero, the total
momentum of the system after the breakup must also be zero. Therefore,
MAvA MBvB 0. If the velocity of one of the fragments is known, the recoil velocity of the other fragment can be calculated.
EXAMPLE 9.15
The Sliding Bear
Suppose you tranquilize a polar bear on a smooth glacier as
part of a research effort. How might you estimate the bears
mass using a measuring tape, a rope, and knowledge of your
own mass?
Solution Tie one end of the rope around the bear, and
then lay out the tape measure on the ice with one end at the
bears original position, as shown in Figure 9.26. Grab hold
of the free end of the rope and position yourself as shown,
noting your location. Take off your spiked shoes and pull on
the rope hand over hand. Both you and the bear will slide
over the ice until you meet. From the tape, observe how far
you have slid, xp , and how far the bear has slid, xb . The point
where you meet the bear is the constant location of the center of mass of the system (bear plus you), and so you can determine the mass of the bear from m b x b m p x p . (Unfortunately, you cannot get back to your spiked shoes and so are in
big trouble if the bear wakes up!)
276
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
xp
xb
CM
Figure 9.26 The center of mass of an isolated system remains at rest unless acted on by an external
force. How can you determine the mass of the polar bear?
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 9.16
Exploding Projectile
A projectile red into the air suddenly explodes into several
fragments (Fig. 9.27). What can be said about the motion of
Motion
of center
of mass
the center of mass of the system made up of all the fragments
after the explosion?
Solution Neglecting air resistance, the only external force
on the projectile is the gravitational force. Thus, if the projectile did not explode, it would continue to move along the
parabolic path indicated by the broken line in Figure 9.27.
Because the forces caused by the explosion are internal, they
do not affect the motion of the center of mass. Thus, after
the explosion the center of mass of the system (the fragments) follows the same parabolic path the projectile would
have followed if there had been no explosion.
Figure 9.27 When a projectile explodes into several fragments,
the center of mass of the system made up of all the fragments follows
the same parabolic path the projectile would have taken had there
been no explosion.
EXAMPLE 9.17
The Exploding Rocket
A rocket is red vertically upward. At the instant it reaches an
altitude of 1 000 m and a speed of 300 m/s, it explodes into
three equal fragments. One fragment continues to move upward with a speed of 450 m/s following the explosion. The
second fragment has a speed of 240 m/s and is moving east
right after the explosion. What is the velocity of the third
fragment right after the explosion?
Solution Let us call the total mass of the rocket M ; hence,
the mass of each fragment is M/3. Because the forces of the
explosion are internal to the system and cannot affect its total
momentum, the total momentum pi of the rocket just before
the explosion must equal the total momentum pf of the fragments right after the explosion.
9.8
Before the explosion:
pi
vf
M vi
M
(240 i) m/s
3
M(80 i) m/s
450j) m/s
What does the sum of the momentum vectors for all the fragments look like?
M
(450 j) m/s
3
M
v
3f
where vf is the unknown velocity of the third fragment.
Equating these two expressions (because pi pf ) gives
M
v
3f
( 240i
M(300 j) m/s
After the explosion:
pf
277
Rocket Propulsion
M(150 j) m/s
M(300 j) m/s
Exercise
Find the position of the center of mass of the system of fragments relative to the ground 3.00 s after the explosion. Assume the rocket engine is nonoperative after the explosion.
Answer
The x coordinate does not change; yCM
1.86 km.
Optional Section
9.8
ROCKET PROPULSION
When ordinary vehicles, such as automobiles and locomotives, are propelled, the
driving force for the motion is friction. In the case of the automobile, the driving
force is the force exerted by the road on the car. A locomotive pushes against the
tracks; hence, the driving force is the force exerted by the tracks on the locomotive. However, a rocket moving in space has no road or tracks to push against.
Therefore, the source of the propulsion of a rocket must be something other than
friction. Figure 9.28 is a dramatic photograph of a spacecraft at liftoff. The operation of a rocket depends upon the law of conservation of linear momentum
as applied to a system of particles, where the system is the rocket plus its
ejected fuel.
Rocket propulsion can be understood by rst considering the mechanical system consisting of a machine gun mounted on a cart on wheels. As the gun is red,
Figure 9.28 Liftoff of the space shuttle
Columbia. Enormous thrust is generated
by the shuttles liquid-fuel engines, aided
by the two solid-fuel boosters. Many physical principles from mechanics, thermodynamics, and electricity and magnetism are
involved in such a launch.
278
CHAPTER 9
The force from a nitrogen-propelled, hand-controlled device allows an astronaut to move about
freely in space without restrictive
tethers.
v
M + m
Linear Momentum and Collisions
each bullet receives a momentum m v in some direction, where v is measured with
respect to a stationary Earth frame. The momentum of the system made up of cart,
gun, and bullets must be conserved. Hence, for each bullet red, the gun and cart
must receive a compensating momentum in the opposite direction. That is, the reaction force exerted by the bullet on the gun accelerates the cart and gun, and the
cart moves in the direction opposite that of the bullets. If n is the number of bullets red each second, then the average force exerted on the gun is Fav nm v.
In a similar manner, as a rocket moves in free space, its linear momentum
changes when some of its mass is released in the form of ejected gases. Because
the gases are given momentum when they are ejected out of the engine, the
rocket receives a compensating momentum in the opposite direction. Therefore, the rocket is accelerated as a result of the push, or thrust, from the exhaust
gases. In free space, the center of mass of the system (rocket plus expelled gases)
moves uniformly, independent of the propulsion process.5
Suppose that at some time t, the magnitude of the momentum of a rocket plus
its fuel is (M
m)v, where v is the speed of the rocket relative to the Earth (Fig.
9.29a). Over a short time interval t, the rocket ejects fuel of mass m, and so at
the end of this interval the rockets speed is v
v, where v is the change in
speed of the rocket (Fig. 9.29b). If the fuel is ejected with a speed ve relative to the
rocket (the subscript e stands for exhaust, and ve is usually called the exhaust
speed ), the velocity of the fuel relative to a stationary frame of reference is v ve .
Thus, if we equate the total initial momentum of the system to the total nal momentum, we obtain
(M
pi = (M + m)v
m)v
M(v
v)
ve)
where M represents the mass of the rocket and its remaining fuel after an amount
of fuel having mass m has been ejected. Simplifying this expression gives
(a)
ve m
Mv
M
m
m(v
v + v
(b)
Figure 9.29 Rocket propulsion.
(a) The initial mass of the rocket
plus all its fuel is M
m at a time
t, and its speed is v. (b) At a time t
t, the rockets mass has been reduced to M and an amount of fuel
m has been ejected. The rockets
speed increases by an amount v.
We also could have arrived at this result by considering the system in the center-of-mass frame of reference, which is a frame having the same velocity as the
center of mass of the system. In this frame, the total momentum of the system is
zero; therefore, if the rocket gains a momentum M v by ejecting some fuel, the
exhausted fuel obtains a momentum ve m in the opposite direction, so that M v
ve m 0. If we now take the limit as t goes to zero, we get v : dv and
m : dm. Futhermore, the increase in the exhaust mass dm corresponds to an
equal decrease in the rocket mass, so that dm
dM. Note that dM is given a negative sign because it represents a decrease in mass. Using this fact, we obtain
M dv
ve dm
ve dM
(9.40)
Integrating this equation and taking the initial mass of the rocket plus fuel to be
Mi and the nal mass of the rocket plus its remaining fuel to be Mf , we obtain
vf
Mf
dv
vi
vf
Expression for rocket propulsion
5It
vi
ve
Mi
ve ln
dM
M
Mi
Mf
(9.41)
is interesting to note that the rocket and machine gun represent cases of the reverse of a perfectly
inelastic collision: Momentum is conserved, but the kinetic energy of the system increases (at the expense of chemical potential energy in the fuel).
9.8
279
Rocket Propulsion
This is the basic expression of rocket propulsion. First, it tells us that the increase in
rocket speed is proportional to the exhaust speed of the ejected gases, ve . Therefore,
the exhaust speed should be very high. Second, the increase in rocket speed is proportional to the natural logarithm of the ratio Mi /Mf . Therefore, this ratio should
be as large as possible, which means that the mass of the rocket without its fuel
should be as small as possible and the rocket should carry as much fuel as possible.
The thrust on the rocket is the force exerted on it by the ejected exhaust
gases. We can obtain an expression for the thrust from Equation 9.40:
Thrust
M
dv
dt
ve
dM
dt
(9.42)
This expression shows us that the thrust increases as the exhaust speed increases
and as the rate of change of mass (called the burn rate) increases.
EXAMPLE 9.18
A Rocket in Space
A rocket moving in free space has a speed of 3.0 103 m/s
relative to the Earth. Its engines are turned on, and fuel is
ejected in a direction opposite the rockets motion at a speed
of 5.0 103 m/s relative to the rocket. (a) What is the speed
of the rocket relative to the Earth once the rockets mass is reduced to one-half its mass before ignition?
Solution We can guess that the speed we are looking for
must be greater than the original speed because the rocket is
accelerating. Applying Equation 9.41, we obtain
vf
vi
3.0
6.5
103 m/s)ln
Mi
0.5 Mi
103 m/s
Solution
ve
dM
dt
2.5
EXAMPLE 9.19
(5.0
(b) What is the thrust on the rocket if it burns fuel at the rate
of 50 kg/s?
Thrust
Mi
ve ln
Mf
103 m/s
(5.0
103 m/s)(50 kg/s)
105 N
Fighting a Fire
Two reghters must apply a total force of 600 N to steady a
hose that is discharging water at 3 600 L/min. Estimate the
speed of the water as it exits the nozzle.
their hands, the movement of the hose due to the thrust it receives from the rapidly exiting water could injure the reghters.
Solution The water is exiting at 3 600 L/min, which is
60 L/s. Knowing that 1 L of water has a mass of 1 kg, we can
say that about 60 kg of water leaves the nozzle every second.
As the water leaves the hose, it exerts on the hose a thrust
that must be counteracted by the 600-N force exerted on the
hose by the reghters. So, applying Equation 9.42 gives
Thrust
600 N
ve
ve
dM
dt
ve(60 kg/s)
10 m/s
Fireghters attack a burning house with a hose line.
Fireghting is dangerous work. If the nozzle should slip from
280
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
SUMMARY
The linear momentum p of a particle of mass m moving with a velocity v is
p
(9.1)
mv
The law of conservation of linear momentum indicates that the total momentum of an isolated system is conserved. If two particles form an isolated system, their total momentum is conserved regardless of the nature of the force between them. Therefore, the total momentum of the system at all times equals its
initial total momentum, or
p2i
p1i
p1f
p2 f
(9.5)
The impulse imparted to a particle by a force F is equal to the change in the
momentum of the particle:
tf
I
F dt
p
(9.9)
ti
This is known as the impulse momentum theorem.
Impulsive forces are often very strong compared with other forces on the system and usually act for a very short time, as in the case of collisions.
When two particles collide, the total momentum of the system before the collision always equals the total momentum after the collision, regardless of the nature
of the collision. An inelastic collision is one for which the total kinetic energy is
not conserved. A perfectly inelastic collision is one in which the colliding bodies
stick together after the collision. An elastic collision is one in which kinetic energy is constant.
In a two- or three-dimensional collision, the components of momentum in
each of the three directions (x, y, and z ) are conserved independently.
The position vector of the center of mass of a system of particles is dened as
rCM
i
mi ri
(9.30)
M
mi is the total mass of the system and ri is the position vector of the
where M
i
i th particle.
The position vector of the center of mass of a rigid body can be obtained from
the integral expression
1
rCM
r dm
(9.33)
M
The velocity of the center of mass for a system of particles is
vCM
i
mi vi
(9.34)
M
The total momentum of a system of particles equals the total mass multiplied
by the velocity of the center of mass.
Newtons second law applied to a system of particles is
Fext
MaCM
d ptot
dt
(9.38)
where aCM is the acceleration of the center of mass and the sum is over all external
forces. The center of mass moves like an imaginary particle of mass M under the
Questions
281
inuence of the resultant external force on the system. It follows from Equation
9.38 that the total momentum of the system is conserved if there are no external
forces acting on it.
QUESTIONS
1. If the kinetic energy of a particle is zero, what is its linear
momentum?
2. If the speed of a particle is doubled, by what factor is its
momentum changed? By what factor is its kinetic energy
changed?
3. If two particles have equal kinetic energies, are their momenta necessarily equal? Explain.
4. If two particles have equal momenta, are their kinetic energies necessarily equal? Explain.
5. An isolated system is initially at rest. Is it possible for parts
of the system to be in motion at some later time? If so, explain how this might occur.
6. If two objects collide and one is initially at rest, is it possible for both to be at rest after the collision? Is it possible
for one to be at rest after the collision? Explain.
7. Explain how linear momentum is conserved when a ball
bounces from a oor.
8. Is it possible to have a collision in which all of the kinetic
energy is lost? If so, cite an example.
9. In a perfectly elastic collision between two particles, does
the kinetic energy of each particle change as a result of
the collision?
10. When a ball rolls down an incline, its linear momentum
increases. Does this imply that momentum is not conserved? Explain.
11. Consider a perfectly inelastic collision between a car and
a large truck. Which vehicle loses more kinetic energy as
a result of the collision?
12. Can the center of mass of a body lie outside the body? If
so, give examples.
13. Three balls are thrown into the air simultaneously. What
is the acceleration of their center of mass while they are
in motion?
14. A meter stick is balanced in a horizontal position with the
index ngers of the right and left hands. If the two ngers are slowly brought together, the stick remains balanced and the two ngers always meet at the 50-cm mark
regardless of their original positions (try it!). Explain.
15. A sharpshooter res a rie while standing with the butt of
the gun against his shoulder. If the forward momentum
of a bullet is the same as the backward momentum of the
gun, why is it not as dangerous to be hit by the gun as by
the bullet?
16. A piece of mud is thrown against a brick wall and sticks to
the wall. What happens to the momentum of the mud? Is
momentum conserved? Explain.
17. Early in this century, Robert Goddard proposed sending a
rocket to the Moon. Critics took the position that in a vacuum, such as exists between the Earth and the Moon, the
gases emitted by the rocket would have nothing to push
against to propel the rocket. According to Scientic American ( January 1975), Goddard placed a gun in a vacuum
and red a blank cartridge from it. (A blank cartridge
res only the wadding and hot gases of the burning gunpowder.) What happened when the gun was red?
18. A pole-vaulter falls from a height of 6.0 m onto a foam
rubber pad. Can you calculate his speed just before he
reaches the pad? Can you estimate the force exerted on
him due to the collision? Explain.
19. Explain how you would use a balloon to demonstrate the
mechanism responsible for rocket propulsion.
20. Does the center of mass of a rocket in free space accelerate? Explain. Can the speed of a rocket exceed the exhaust speed of the fuel? Explain.
21. A ball is dropped from a tall building. Identify the system
for which linear momentum is conserved.
22. A bomb, initially at rest, explodes into several pieces.
(a) Is linear momentum conserved? (b) Is kinetic energy
conserved? Explain.
23. NASA often uses the gravity of a planet to slingshot a
probe on its way to a more distant planet. This is actually
a collision where the two objects do not touch. How can
the probe have its speed increased in this manner?
24. The Moon revolves around the Earth. Is the Moons linear momentum conserved? Is its kinetic energy conserved? Assume that the Moons orbit is circular.
25. A raw egg dropped to the oor breaks apart upon impact.
However, a raw egg dropped onto a thick foam rubber
cushion from a height of about 1 m rebounds without
breaking. Why is this possible? (If you try this experiment, be sure to catch the egg after the rst bounce.)
26. On the subject of the following positions, state your own
view and argue to support it: (a) The best theory of motion is that force causes acceleration. (b) The true measure of a forces effectiveness is the work it does, and the
best theory of motion is that work on an object changes
its energy. (c) The true measure of a forces effect is impulse, and the best theory of motion is that impulse
injected into an object changes its momentum.
282
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
Section 9.1
7. (a) A particle of mass m moves with momentum p. Show
that the kinetic energy of the particle is given by K
p 2/2m. (b) Express the magnitude of the particles momentum in terms of its kinetic energy and mass.
Linear Momentum and Its Conservation
1. A 3.00-kg particle has a velocity of (3.00i 4.00j) m/s.
(a) Find its x and y components of momentum.
(b) Find the magnitude and direction of its momentum.
2. A 0.100-kg ball is thrown straight up into the air with an
initial speed of 15.0 m/s. Find the momentum of the
ball (a) at its maximum height and (b) halfway up to its
maximum height.
3. A 40.0-kg child standing on a frozen pond throws a
0.500-kg stone to the east with a speed of 5.00 m/s. Neglecting friction between child and ice, nd the recoil
velocity of the child.
4. A pitcher claims he can throw a baseball with as much
momentum as a 3.00-g bullet moving with a speed of
1 500 m/s. A baseball has a mass of 0.145 kg. What must
be its speed if the pitchers claim is valid?
5. How fast can you set the Earth moving? In particular,
when you jump straight up as high as you can, you give
the Earth a maximum recoil speed of what order of
magnitude? Model the Earth as a perfectly solid object.
In your solution, state the physical quantities you take as
data and the values you measure or estimate for them.
6. Two blocks of masses M and 3M are placed on a horizontal, frictionless surface. A light spring is attached to
one of them, and the blocks are pushed together with
the spring between them (Fig. P9.6). A cord initially
holding the blocks together is burned; after this, the
block of mass 3M moves to the right with a speed of
2.00 m/s. (a) What is the speed of the block of mass M ?
(b) Find the original elastic energy in the spring if M
0.350 kg.
Section 9.2
F(N)
15 000
10 000
5 000
0
WEB
2.00 m/s
v
3M
M
After
(b)
Figure P9.6
1
2
3
t (ms)
Figure P9.9
Before
(a)
F = 18 000 N
20 000
3M
M
Impulse and Momentum
8. A car is stopped for a trafc signal. When the light turns
green, the car accelerates, increasing its speed from
zero to 5.20 m/s in 0.832 s. What linear impulse and average force does a 70.0-kg passenger in the car experience?
9. An estimated force time curve for a baseball struck by
a bat is shown in Figure P9.9. From this curve, determine (a) the impulse delivered to the ball, (b) the average force exerted on the ball, and (c) the peak force exerted on the ball.
10. A tennis player receives a shot with the ball (0.060 0 kg)
traveling horizontally at 50.0 m/s and returns the shot
with the ball traveling horizontally at 40.0 m/s in the
opposite direction. (a) What is the impulse delivered to
the ball by the racket? (b) What work does the racket
do on the ball?
11. A 3.00-kg steel ball strikes a wall with a speed of
10.0 m/s at an angle of 60.0° with the surface. It
bounces off with the same speed and angle (Fig. P9.11).
If the ball is in contact with the wall for 0.200 s, what is
the average force exerted on the ball by the wall?
12. In a slow-pitch softball game, a 0.200-kg softball crossed
the plate at 15.0 m/s at an angle of 45.0° below the horizontal. The ball was hit at 40.0 m/s, 30.0° above the
horizontal. (a) Determine the impulse delivered to the
ball. (b) If the force on the ball increased linearly for
4.00 ms, held constant for 20.0 ms, and then decreased
to zero linearly in another 4.00 ms, what was the maximum force on the ball?
283
Problems
y
60.0˚
x
60.0˚
Figure P9.11
inside the block. The speed of the bullet-plus-wood
combination immediately after the collision is measured
as 0.600 m/s. What was the original speed of the bullet?
18. As shown in Figure P9.18, a bullet of mass m and speed
v passes completely through a pendulum bob of mass
M. The bullet emerges with a speed of v/2. The pendulum bob is suspended by a stiff rod of length and negligible mass. What is the minimum value of v such that
the pendulum bob will barely swing through a complete
vertical circle?
13. A garden hose is held in the manner shown in Figure
P9.13. The hose is initially full of motionless water.
What additional force is necessary to hold the nozzle
stationary after the water is turned on if the discharge
rate is 0.600 kg/s with a speed of 25.0 m/s?
m
M
v/2
v
Figure P9.18
Figure P9.13
14. A professional diver performs a dive from a platform
10 m above the water surface. Estimate the order of
magnitude of the average impact force she experiences
in her collision with the water. State the quantities you
take as data and their values.
Section 9.3 Collisions
Section 9.4 Elastic and Inelastic Collisions
in One Dimension
15. High-speed stroboscopic photographs show that the
head of a golf club of mass 200 g is traveling at 55.0 m/s
just before it strikes a 46.0-g golf ball at rest on a tee. After the collision, the club head travels (in the same direction) at 40.0 m/s. Find the speed of the golf ball just
after impact.
16. A 75.0-kg ice skater, moving at 10.0 m/s, crashes into a
stationary skater of equal mass. After the collision, the
two skaters move as a unit at 5.00 m/s. Suppose the average force a skater can experience without breaking a
bone is 4 500 N. If the impact time is 0.100 s, does a
bone break?
17. A 10.0-g bullet is red into a stationary block of wood
(m 5.00 kg). The relative motion of the bullet stops
19. A 45.0-kg girl is standing on a plank that has a mass of
150 kg. The plank, originally at rest, is free to slide on a
frozen lake, which is a at, frictionless supporting surface. The girl begins to walk along the plank at a constant speed of 1.50 m/s relative to the plank. (a) What
is her speed relative to the ice surface? (b) What is the
speed of the plank relative to the ice surface?
20. Gayle runs at a speed of 4.00 m/s and dives on a sled,
which is initially at rest on the top of a frictionless snowcovered hill. After she has descended a vertical distance
of 5.00 m, her brother, who is initially at rest, hops on
her back and together they continue down the hill.
What is their speed at the bottom of the hill if the total
vertical drop is 15.0 m? Gayles mass is 50.0 kg, the sled
has a mass of 5.00 kg and her brother has a mass of
30.0 kg.
21. A 1 200-kg car traveling initially with a speed of
25.0 m/s in an easterly direction crashes into the rear
end of a 9 000-kg truck moving in the same direction at
20.0 m/s (Fig. P9.21). The velocity of the car right after
the collision is 18.0 m/s to the east. (a) What is the velocity of the truck right after the collision? (b) How
much mechanical energy is lost in the collision? Account for this loss in energy.
22. A railroad car of mass 2.50 104 kg is moving with a
speed of 4.00 m/s. It collides and couples with three
other coupled railroad cars, each of the same mass as
the single car and moving in the same direction with an
initial speed of 2.00 m/s. (a) What is the speed of the
four cars after the collision? (b) How much energy is
lost in the collision?
284
CHAPTER 9
25.0 m/s
Linear Momentum and Collisions
20.0 m/s
18.0 m/s
v
BIG
BIG
Joes
Joes
IRISH
BEER
IRISH
BEER
Before
After
Figure P9.21
WEB
23. Four railroad cars, each of mass 2.50 104 kg, are coupled together and coasting along horizontal tracks at a
speed of vi toward the south. A very strong but foolish
movie actor, riding on the second car, uncouples the
front car and gives it a big push, increasing its speed to
4.00 m/s southward. The remaining three cars continue
moving toward the south, now at 2.00 m/s. (a) Find the
initial speed of the cars. (b) How much work did the actor do? (c) State the relationship between the process
described here and the process in Problem 22.
24. A 7.00-kg bowling ball collides head-on with a 2.00-kg
bowling pin. The pin ies forward with a speed of
3.00 m/s. If the ball continues forward with a speed of
1.80 m/s, what was the initial speed of the ball? Ignore
rotation of the ball.
25. A neutron in a reactor makes an elastic head-on collision with the nucleus of a carbon atom initially at rest.
(a) What fraction of the neutrons kinetic energy is
transferred to the carbon nucleus? (b) If the initial kinetic energy of the neutron is 1.60 10 13 J, nd its nal kinetic energy and the kinetic energy of the carbon
nucleus after the collision. (The mass of the carbon nucleus is about 12.0 times greater than the mass of the
neutron.)
26. Consider a frictionless track ABC as shown in Figure
P9.26. A block of mass m 1 5.00 kg is released from A.
It makes a head-on elastic collision at B with a block of
mass m 2 10.0 kg that is initially at rest. Calculate the
maximum height to which m 1 rises after the collision.
0.650, what was the speed of the bullet immediately before impact?
28. A 7.00-g bullet, when red from a gun into a 1.00-kg
block of wood held in a vise, would penetrate the block
to a depth of 8.00 cm. This block of wood is placed on a
frictionless horizontal surface, and a 7.00-g bullet is
red from the gun into the block. To what depth will
the bullet penetrate the block in this case?
Section 9.5
Two-Dimensional Collisions
29. A 90.0-kg fullback running east with a speed of 5.00 m/s
is tackled by a 95.0-kg opponent running north with a
speed of 3.00 m/s. If the collision is perfectly inelastic,
(a) calculate the speed and direction of the players just
after the tackle and (b) determine the energy lost as a
result of the collision. Account for the missing energy.
30. The mass of the blue puck in Figure P9.30 is 20.0%
greater than the mass of the green one. Before colliding, the pucks approach each other with equal and opposite momenta, and the green puck has an initial
speed of 10.0 m/s. Find the speeds of the pucks after
the collision if half the kinetic energy is lost during the
collision.
30.0˚
30.0˚
A
m1
Figure P9.30
5.00 m
m2
B
C
Figure P9.26
WEB
27. A 12.0-g bullet is red into a 100-g wooden block initially at rest on a horizontal surface. After impact, the
block slides 7.50 m before coming to rest. If the coefcient of friction between the block and the surface is
31. Two automobiles of equal mass approach an intersection. One vehicle is traveling with velocity 13.0 m/s toward the east and the other is traveling north with a
speed of v2i . Neither driver sees the other. The vehicles
collide in the intersection and stick together, leaving
parallel skid marks at an angle of 55.0° north of east.
The speed limit for both roads is 35 mi/h, and the driver of the northward-moving vehicle claims he was
within the speed limit when the collision occurred. Is
he telling the truth?
285
Problems
32. A proton, moving with a velocity of vi i, collides elastically with another proton that is initially at rest. If the
two protons have equal speeds after the collision, nd
(a) the speed of each proton after the collision in terms
of vi and (b) the direction of the velocity vectors after
the collision.
33. A billiard ball moving at 5.00 m/s strikes a stationary
ball of the same mass. After the collision, the rst ball
moves at 4.33 m/s and at an angle of 30.0° with respect
to the original line of motion. Assuming an elastic collision (and ignoring friction and rotational motion), nd
the struck balls velocity.
34. A 0.300-kg puck, initially at rest on a horizontal, frictionless surface, is struck by a 0.200-kg puck moving initially along the x axis with a speed of 2.00 m/s. After the
collision, the 0.200-kg puck has a speed of 1.00 m/s at
an angle of
53.0° to the positive x axis (see Fig.
9.14). (a) Determine the velocity of the 0.300-kg puck
after the collision. (b) Find the fraction of kinetic energy lost in the collision.
35. A 3.00-kg mass with an initial velocity of 5.00i m/s collides with and sticks to a 2.00-kg mass with an initial velocity of 3.00j m/s. Find the nal velocity of the composite mass.
36. Two shufeboard disks of equal mass, one orange and
the other yellow, are involved in an elastic, glancing collision. The yellow disk is initially at rest and is struck by
the orange disk moving with a speed of 5.00 m/s. After
the collision, the orange disk moves along a direction
that makes an angle of 37.0° with its initial direction of
motion, and the velocity of the yellow disk is perpendicular to that of the orange disk (after the collision). Determine the nal speed of each disk.
37. Two shufeboard disks of equal mass, one orange and
the other yellow, are involved in an elastic, glancing collision. The yellow disk is initially at rest and is struck by
the orange disk moving with a speed vi . After the collision, the orange disk moves along a direction that
makes an angle with its initial direction of motion,
and the velocity of the yellow disk is perpendicular to
that of the orange disk (after the collision). Determine
the nal speed of each disk.
WEB
38. During the battle of Gettysburg, the gunre was so intense that several bullets collided in midair and fused
together. Assume a 5.00-g Union musket ball was moving to the right at a speed of 250 m/s, 20.0° above the
horizontal, and that a 3.00-g Confederate ball was moving to the left at a speed of 280 m/s, 15.0° above the
horizontal. Immediately after they fuse together, what is
their velocity?
39. An unstable nucleus of mass 17.0 10 27 kg initially at
rest disintegrates into three particles. One of the particles, of mass 5.00 10 27 kg, moves along the y axis
with a velocity of 6.00 106 m/s. Another particle, of
mass 8.40 10 27 kg, moves along the x axis with a
speed of 4.00 106 m/s. Find (a) the velocity of the
third particle and (b) the total kinetic energy increase
in the process.
Section 9.6
The Center of Mass
40. Four objects are situated along the y axis as follows: A
2.00-kg object is at 3.00 m, a 3.00-kg object is at
2.50 m, a 2.50-kg object is at the origin, and a 4.00-kg
object is at 0.500 m. Where is the center of mass of
these objects?
41. A uniform piece of sheet steel is shaped as shown in Figure P9.41. Compute the x and y coordinates of the center of mass of the piece.
y(cm)
30
20
10
10
20
x(cm)
30
Figure P9.41
42. The mass of the Earth is 5.98 1024 kg, and the mass of
the Moon is 7.36 1022 kg. The distance of separation,
measured between their centers, is 3.84 108 m. Locate the center of mass of the Earth Moon system as
measured from the center of the Earth.
43. A water molecule consists of an oxygen atom with two
hydrogen atoms bound to it (Fig. P9.43). The angle between the two bonds is 106°. If the bonds are 0.100 nm
long, where is the center of mass of the molecule?
H
0.100 nm
53°
O
53°
0.100 nm
H
Figure P9.43
286
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
of the velocity of the center of mass. (c) Write the position vector of the center of mass as a function of time.
49. A 2.00-kg particle has a velocity of (2.00i 3.00j) m/s,
and a 3.00-kg particle has a velocity of (1.00i 6.00j)
m/s. Find (a) the velocity of the center of mass and
(b) the total momentum of the system.
50. A ball of mass 0.200 kg has a velocity of 1.50i m/s; a ball
of mass 0.300 kg has a velocity of 0.400i m/s. They
meet in a head-on elastic collision. (a) Find their velocities after the collision. (b) Find the velocity of their center of mass before and after the collision.
44. A 0.400-kg mass m1 has position r1 12.0 j cm. A 0.800kg mass m 2 has position r2
12.0i cm. Another
0.800-kg mass m3 has position r3 (12.0i 12.0 j) cm.
Make a drawing of the masses. Start from the origin
and, to the scale 1 cm 1 kg cm, construct the vector
m1r1 , then the vector m1r1 m 2 r2 , then the vector m1r1
m 2 r2 m 3 r3 , and at last rCM (m1r1 m 2 r2
m 3 r3 )/(m1 m 2 m 3 ). Observe that the head of the
vector rCM indicates the position of the center of mass.
45. A rod of length 30.0 cm has linear density (mass-perlength) given by
50.0 g/m
20.0x g/m2
(Optional)
where x is the distance from one end, measured in meters. (a) What is the mass of the rod? (b) How far from
the x 0 end is its center of mass?
Section 9.7
Motion of a System of Particles
46. Consider a system of two particles in the xy plane:
m1 2.00 kg is at r1 (1.00i 2.00j) m and has velocity (3.00i 0.500j) m/s; m 2 3.00 kg is at r2
( 4.00i 3.00j) m and has velocity (3.00i 2.00j) m/s.
(a) Plot these particles on a grid or graph paper. Draw
their position vectors and show their velocities. (b) Find
the position of the center of mass of the system and mark
it on the grid. (c) Determine the velocity of the center of
mass and also show it on the diagram. (d) What is the total linear momentum of the system?
47. Romeo (77.0 kg) entertains Juliet (55.0 kg) by playing
his guitar from the rear of their boat at rest in still water, 2.70 m away from Juliet who is in the front of the
boat. After the serenade, Juliet carefully moves to the
rear of the boat (away from shore) to plant a kiss on
Romeos cheek. How far does the 80.0-kg boat move toward the shore it is facing?
48. Two masses, 0.600 kg and 0.300 kg, begin uniform motion at the same speed, 0.800 m/s, from the origin at
t 0 and travel in the directions shown in Figure P9.48.
(a) Find the velocity of the center of mass in unit
vector notation. (b) Find the magnitude and direction
y
0.600 kg
45.0°
Figure P9.48
Rocket Propulsion
51. The rst stage of a Saturn V space vehicle consumes
fuel and oxidizer at the rate of 1.50 104 kg/s, with an
exhaust speed of 2.60 103 m/s. (a) Calculate the
thrust produced by these engines. (b) Find the initial
acceleration of the vehicle on the launch pad if its initial mass is 3.00 106 kg. [ Hint: You must include the
force of gravity to solve part (b).]
52. A large rocket with an exhaust speed of ve 3 000 m/s
develops a thrust of 24.0 million newtons. (a) How
much mass is being blasted out of the rocket exhaust
per second? (b) What is the maximum speed the rocket
can attain if it starts from rest in a force-free environment with ve 3.00 km/s and if 90.0% of its initial mass
is fuel and oxidizer?
53. A rocket for use in deep space is to have the capability
of boosting a total load (payload plus rocket frame and
engine) of 3.00 metric tons to a speed of 10 000 m/s.
(a) It has an engine and fuel designed to produce an
exhaust speed of 2 000 m/s. How much fuel plus oxidizer is required? (b) If a different fuel and engine design could give an exhaust speed of 5 000 m/s, what
amount of fuel and oxidizer would be required for the
same task?
54. A rocket car has a mass of 2 000 kg unfueled and a mass
of 5 000 kg when completely fueled. The exhaust velocity is 2 500 m/s. (a) Calculate the amount of fuel used
to accelerate the completely fueled car from rest to
225 m/s (about 500 mi/h). (b) If the burn rate is constant at 30.0 kg/s, calculate the time it takes the car to
reach this speed. Neglect friction and air resistance.
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
0.300 kg
45.0°
Section 9.8
WEB
x
55. Review Problem. A 60.0-kg person running at an initial speed of 4.00 m/s jumps onto a 120-kg cart initially
at rest (Fig. P9.55). The person slides on the carts top
surface and nally comes to rest relative to the cart. The
coefcient of kinetic friction between the person and
the cart is 0.400. Friction between the cart and ground
can be neglected. (a) Find the nal velocity of the person and cart relative to the ground. (b) Find the frictional force acting on the person while he is sliding
287
Problems
across the top surface of the cart. (c) How long does
the frictional force act on the person? (d) Find the
change in momentum of the person and the change in
momentum of the cart. (e) Determine the displacement of the person relative to the ground while he is
sliding on the cart. (f) Determine the displacement of
the cart relative to the ground while the person is sliding. (g) Find the change in kinetic energy of the person. (h) Find the change in kinetic energy of the cart.
(i) Explain why the answers to parts (g) and (h) differ.
(What kind of collision is this, and what accounts for
the loss of mechanical energy?)
60.0 kg
58. A bullet of mass m is red into a block of mass M that is
initially at rest at the edge of a frictionless table of
height h (see Fig. P9.57). The bullet remains in the
block, and after impact the block lands a distance d
from the bottom of the table. Determine the initial
speed of the bullet.
59. An 80.0-kg astronaut is working on the engines of his
ship, which is drifting through space with a constant velocity. The astronaut, wishing to get a better view of the
Universe, pushes against the ship and much later nds
himself 30.0 m behind the ship and at rest with respect
to it. Without a thruster, the only way to return to the
ship is to throw his 0.500-kg wrench directly away from
the ship. If he throws the wrench with a speed of
20.0 m/s relative to the ship, how long does it take the
astronaut to reach the ship?
60. A small block of mass m1 0.500 kg is released from
rest at the top of a curve-shaped frictionless wedge of
mass m 2 3.00 kg, which sits on a frictionless horizontal surface, as shown in Figure P9.60a. When the block
leaves the wedge, its velocity is measured to be 4.00 m/s
to the right, as in Figure P9.60b. (a) What is the velocity
of the wedge after the block reaches the horizontal surface? (b) What is the height h of the wedge?
4.00 m/s
120 kg
Figure P9.55
56. A golf ball (m 46.0 g) is struck a blow that makes an
angle of 45.0° with the horizontal. The ball lands 200 m
away on a at fairway. If the golf club and ball are in
contact for 7.00 ms, what is the average force of impact?
(Neglect air resistance.)
57. An 8.00-g bullet is red into a 2.50-kg block that is initially at rest at the edge of a frictionless table of height
1.00 m (Fig. P9.57). The bullet remains in the block,
and after impact the block lands 2.00 m from the bottom of the table. Determine the initial speed of the
bullet.
m1
h
v2
m2
(a)
2.50 kg
1.00 m
2.00 m
Figure P9.57
Problems 57 and 58.
4.00 m/s
(b)
Figure P9.60
8.00 g
m2
288
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
61. Tarzan, whose mass is 80.0 kg, swings from a 3.00-m vine
that is horizontal when he starts. At the bottom of his
arc, he picks up 60.0-kg Jane in a perfectly inelastic collision. What is the height of the highest tree limb they
can reach on their upward swing?
62. A jet aircraft is traveling at 500 mi/h (223 m/s) in horizontal ight. The engine takes in air at a rate of
80.0 kg/s and burns fuel at a rate of 3.00 kg/s. If the exhaust gases are ejected at 600 m/s relative to the aircraft, nd the thrust of the jet engine and the delivered
horsepower.
63. A 75.0-kg reghter slides down a pole while a constant
frictional force of 300 N retards her motion. A horizontal 20.0-kg platform is supported by a spring at the bottom of the pole to cushion the fall. The reghter starts
from rest 4.00 m above the platform, and the spring
constant is 4 000 N/m. Find (a) the reghters speed
just before she collides with the platform and (b) the
maximum distance the spring is compressed. (Assume
the frictional force acts during the entire motion.)
64. A cannon is rigidly attached to a carriage, which can
move along horizontal rails but is connected to a post
by a large spring, initially unstretched and with force
constant k 2.00 10 4 N/m, as shown in Figure
P9.64. The cannon res a 200-kg projectile at a velocity
of 125 m/s directed 45.0° above the horizontal. (a) If
the mass of the cannon and its carriage is 5 000 kg, nd
the recoil speed of the cannon. (b) Determine the maximum extension of the spring. (c) Find the maximum
force the spring exerts on the carriage. (d) Consider
the system consisting of the cannon, carriage, and shell.
Is the momentum of this system conserved during the
ring? Why or why not?
x
L
Lx
(a)
(b)
Figure P9.65
66. Two gliders are set in motion on an air track. A spring
of force constant k is attached to the near side of one
glider. The rst glider of mass m 1 has a velocity of v1 ,
and the second glider of mass m 2 has a velocity of v2 , as
shown in Figure P9.66 (v 1 v 2 ). When m 1 collides with
the spring attached to m 2 and compresses the spring to
its maximum compression xm , the velocity of the gliders
is v. In terms of v1 , v2 , m 1 , m 2 , and k, nd (a) the velocity v at maximum compression, (b) the maximum compression xm , and (c) the velocities of each glider after
m1 has lost contact with the spring.
v2
k
v1
m2
m1
45.0°
Figure P9.66
Figure P9.64
65. A chain of length L and total mass M is released from
rest with its lower end just touching the top of a table,
as shown in Figure P9.65a. Find the force exerted by the
table on the chain after the chain has fallen through a
distance x, as shown in Figure P9.65b. (Assume each
link comes to rest the instant it reaches the table.)
67. Sand from a stationary hopper falls onto a moving conveyor belt at the rate of 5.00 kg/s, as shown in Figure
P9.67. The conveyor belt is supported by frictionless
rollers and moves at a constant speed of 0.750 m/s under the action of a constant horizontal external force
Fext supplied by the motor that drives the belt. Find
(a) the sands rate of change of momentum in the horizontal direction, (b) the force of friction exerted by the
belt on the sand, (c) the external force Fext , (d) the
work done by Fext in 1 s, and (e) the kinetic energy acquired by the falling sand each second due to the
change in its horizontal motion. (f) Why are the answers to parts (d) and (e) different?
289
Problems
0.750 m/s
Fext
Figure P9.67
68. A rocket has total mass Mi 360 kg, including 330 kg
of fuel and oxidizer. In interstellar space it starts from
rest, turns on its engine at time t 0, and puts out exhaust with a relative speed of ve 1 500 m/s at the constant rate k 2.50 kg/s. Although the fuel will last for
an actual burn time of 330 kg/(2.5 kg/s) 132 s, dene a projected depletion time as Tp Mi /k
360 kg/(2.5 kg/s) 144 s. (This would be the burn
time if the rocket could use its payload, fuel tanks, and
even the walls of the combustion chamber as fuel.)
(a) Show that during the burn the velocity of the rocket
is given as a function of time by
v(t)
v e ln(1
t/Tp)
(b) Make a graph of the velocity of the rocket as a function of time for times running from 0 to 132 s. (c) Show
that the acceleration of the rocket is
a(t)
v e /(Tp
t)
v 1i
(d) Graph the acceleration as a function of time.
(e) Show that the displacement of the rocket from its
initial position at t
0 is
x(t)
v e(Tp
t)ln(1
tween the boat and the water, (a) describe the subsequent motion of the system (child plus boat). (b) Where
is the child relative to the pier when he reaches the far end
of the boat? (c) Will he catch the turtle? (Assume he can
reach out 1.00 m from the end of the boat.)
70. A student performs a ballistic pendulum experiment,
using an apparatus similar to that shown in Figure
9.11b. She obtains the following average data: h
8.68 cm, m1 68.8 g, and m 2 263 g. The symbols refer to the quantities in Figure 9.11a. (a) Determine the
initial speed v1i of the projectile. (b) In the second part
of her experiment she is to obtain v1i by ring the same
projectile horizontally (with the pendulum removed
from the path) and measuring its horizontal displacement x and vertical displacement y (Fig. P9.70). Show
that the initial speed of the projectile is related to x and
y through the relationship
t/Tp)
vet
x
2y/g
What numerical value does she obtain for v1i on the basis of her measured values of x 257 cm and y
85.3 cm? What factors might account for the difference
in this value compared with that obtained in part (a)?
(f) Graph the displacement during the burn.
69. A 40.0-kg child stands at one end of a 70.0-kg boat that
is 4.00 m in length (Fig. P9.69). The boat is initially
3.00 m from the pier. The child notices a turtle on a
rock near the far end of the boat and proceeds to walk
to that end to catch the turtle. Neglecting friction be-
v1i
y
3.00 m
4.00 m
x
Figure P9.70
Figure P9.69
71. A 5.00-g bullet moving with an initial speed of 400 m/s
is red into and passes through a 1.00-kg block, as
shown in Figure P9.71. The block, initially at rest on a
290
CHAPTER 9
Linear Momentum and Collisions
frictionless, horizontal surface, is connected to a spring
of force constant 900 N/m. If the block moves 5.00 cm
to the right after impact, nd (a) the speed at which the
bullet emerges from the block and (b) the energy lost
in the collision.
400 m/s
5.00 cm
v
Figure P9.71
72. Two masses m and 3m are moving toward each other
along the x axis with the same initial speeds vi . Mass m is
traveling to the left, while mass 3m is traveling to the
right. They undergo a head-on elastic collision and
each rebounds along the same line as it approached.
Find the nal speeds of the masses.
73. Two masses m and 3m are moving toward each other
along the x axis with the same initial speeds vi . Mass m is
traveling to the left, while mass 3m is traveling to the
right. They undergo an elastic glancing collision such
that mass m is moving downward after the collision at
right angles from its initial direction. (a) Find the nal
speeds of the two masses. (b) What is the angle at
which the mass 3m is scattered?
74. Review Problem. There are (one can say) three coequal theories of motion: Newtons second law, stating
that the total force on an object causes its acceleration;
the work kinetic energy theorem, stating that the total
work on an object causes its change in kinetic energy;
and the impulse momentum theorem, stating that the
total impulse on an object causes its change in momentum. In this problem, you compare predictions of the
three theories in one particular case. A 3.00-kg object
has a velocity of 7.00j m/s. Then, a total force 12.0i N
acts on the object for 5.00 s. (a) Calculate the objects nal velocity, using the impulse momentum theorem.
(b) Calculate its acceleration from a (vf vi)/t.
(c) Calculate its acceleration from a
F/m. (d) Find
the objects vector displacement from r vit 1a t 2.
2
(e) Find the work done on the object from W F r.
(f) Find the nal kinetic energy from 1 mv f 2 1 mvf vf .
2
2
(g) Find the nal kinetic energy from 1 mv i2 W.
2
75. A rocket has a total mass of Mi 360 kg, including
330 kg of fuel and oxidizer. In interstellar space it starts
from rest. Its engine is turned on at time t 0, and it
puts out exhaust with a relative speed of ve 1 500 m/s
at the constant rate 2.50 kg/s. The burn lasts until the
fuel runs out at time 330 kg/(2.5 kg/s) 132 s. Set up
and carry out a computer analysis of the motion according to Eulers method. Find (a) the nal velocity of the
rocket and (b) the distance it travels during the burn.
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
9.1 (d). Two identical objects (m1 m 2 ) traveling in the
same direction at the same speed (v1 v 2 ) have the
same kinetic energies and the same momenta. However,
this is not true if the two objects are moving at the same
speed but in different directions. In the latter case, K1
K 2 , but the differing velocity directions indicate that
p 1 p 2 because momentum is a vector quantity.
It also is possible for particular combinations of
masses and velocities to satisfy K1 K 2 but not p 1 p 2 .
For example, a 1-kg object moving at 2 m/s has the
same kinetic energy as a 4-kg object moving at 1 m/s,
but the two clearly do not have the same momenta.
9.2 (b), (c), (a). The slower the ball, the easier it is to catch.
If the momentum of the medicine ball is the same as the
momentum of the baseball, the speed of the medicine
ball must be 1/10 the speed of the baseball because the
medicine ball has 10 times the mass. If the kinetic energies are the same, the speed of the medicine ball must
be 1/10 the speed of the baseball because of the
squared speed term in the formula for K. The medicine
ball is hardest to catch when it has the same speed as the
baseball.
9.3 (c) and (e). Object 2 has a greater acceleration because
of its smaller mass. Therefore, it takes less time to travel
the distance d. Thus, even though the force applied to
objects 1 and 2 is the same, the change in momentum is
less for object 2 because t is smaller. Therefore, because the initial momenta were the same (both zero),
p 1 p 2 . The work W Fd done on both objects is the
same because both F and d are the same in the two
cases. Therefore, K1 K 2 .
9.4 Because the passenger is brought from the cars initial
speed to a full stop, the change in momentum (the impulse) is the same regardless of whether the passenger is
stopped by dashboard, seatbelt, or airbag. However, the
dashboard stops the passenger very quickly in a frontend collision. The seatbelt takes somewhat more time.
Used along with the seatbelt, the airbag can extend the
passengers stopping time further, notably for his head,
which would otherwise snap forward. Therefore, the
Problems
dashboard applies the greatest force, the seatbelt an intermediate force, and the airbag the least force. Airbags
are designed to work in conjunction with seatbelts.
Make sure you wear your seatbelt at all times while in a
moving vehicle.
9.5 If we dene the ball as our system, momentum is not
conserved. The balls speed and hence its momentum continually increase. This is consistent with the
fact that the gravitational force is external to this chosen system. However, if we dene our system as the ball
and the Earth, momentum is conserved, for the Earth
also has momentum because the ball exerts a gravitational force on it. As the ball falls, the Earth moves up
to meet it (although the Earths speed is on the order
of 1025 times less than that of the ball!). This upward
movement changes the Earths momentum. The
change in the Earths momentum is numerically equal
to the change in the balls momentum but is in the opposite direction. Therefore, the total momentum of the
Earthball system is conserved. Because the Earths
mass is so great, its upward motion is negligibly small.
9.6 (c). The greatest impulse (greatest change in momentum) is imparted to the Frisbee when the skater reverses
its momentum vector by catching it and throwing it
back. Since this is when the skater imparts the greatest
impulse to the Frisbee, then this also is when the Frisbee
imparts the greatest impulse to her.
9.7 Both are equally bad. Imagine watching the collision
from a safer location alongside the road. As the crush
zones of the two cars are compressed, you will see that
291
the actual point of contact is stationary. You would see
the same thing if your car were to collide with a solid
wall.
9.8 No, such movement can never occur if we assume the
collisions are elastic. The momentum of the system before the collision is mv, where m is the mass of ball 1 and
v is its speed just before the collision. After the collision,
we would have two balls, each of mass m and moving
with a speed of v/2. Thus, the total momentum of the
system after the collision would be m (v/2) m (v/2)
mv. Thus, momentum is conserved. However, the kinetic
energy just before the collision is K i 1 mv 2, and that
2
after the collision is K f 1 m(v/2)2 1 m(v/2)2 1mv 2.
2
2
4
Thus, kinetic energy is not conserved. Both momentum
and kinetic energy are conserved only when one ball
moves out when one ball is released, two balls move out
when two are released, and so on.
9.9 No they will not! The piece with the handle will have less
mass than the piece made up of the end of the bat. To
see why this is so, take the origin of coordinates as the
center of mass before the bat was cut. Replace each cut
piece by a small sphere located at the center of mass for
each piece. The sphere representing the handle piece is
farther from the origin, but the product of lesser mass
and greater distance balances the product of greater
mass and lesser distance for the end piece:
PUZZLER
Did you know that the CD inside this
player spins at different speeds, depending on which song is playing? Why would
such a strange characteristic be incorporated into the design of every CD
player? (George Semple)
chapter
Rotation of a Rigid Object
About a Fixed Axis
Chapter Outline
10.1 Angular Displacement, Velocity,
and Acceleration
10.2 Rotational Kinematics: Rotational
Motion with Constant Angular
Acceleration
10.3 Angular and Linear Quantities
10.4 Rotational Energy
292
10.5 Calculation of Moments of
Inertia
10.6 Torque
10.7 Relationship Between Torque
and Angular Acceleration
10.8 Work, Power, and Energy in
Rotational Motion
293
10.1 Angular Displacement, Velocity, and Acceleration
W
hen an extended object, such as a wheel, rotates about its axis, the motion
cannot be analyzed by treating the object as a particle because at any given
time different parts of the object have different linear velocities and linear
accelerations. For this reason, it is convenient to consider an extended object as a
large number of particles, each of which has its own linear velocity and linear
acceleration.
In dealing with a rotating object, analysis is greatly simplied by assuming that
the object is rigid. A rigid object is one that is nondeformable that is, it is an
object in which the separations between all pairs of particles remain constant. All
real bodies are deformable to some extent; however, our rigid-object model is useful in many situations in which deformation is negligible.
In this chapter, we treat the rotation of a rigid object about a xed axis, which
is commonly referred to as pure rotational motion.
10.1
Rigid object
ANGULAR DISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY,
AND ACCELERATION
Figure 10.1 illustrates a planar (at), rigid object of arbitrary shape conned to
the xy plane and rotating about a xed axis through O. The axis is perpendicular
to the plane of the gure, and O is the origin of an xy coordinate system. Let us
look at the motion of only one of the millions of particles making up this object.
A particle at P is at a xed distance r from the origin and rotates about it in a circle
of radius r. (In fact, every particle on the object undergoes circular motion about
O.) It is convenient to represent the position of P with its polar coordinates (r, ),
where r is the distance from the origin to P and is measured counterclockwise from
some preferred direction in this case, the positive x axis. In this representation,
the only coordinate that changes in time is the angle ; r remains constant. (In
cartesian coordinates, both x and y vary in time.) As the particle moves along the
circle from the positive x axis (
0) to P, it moves through an arc of length s,
which is related to the angular position through the relationship
r
(10.1a)
s
r
s
(10.1b)
y
P
r
θ
O
Because the circumference of a circle is 2 r, it follows from Equation 10.1b that
360° corresponds to an angle of 2 r/r rad 2 rad (one revolution). Hence,
1 rad 360°/2
57.3°. To convert an angle in degrees to an angle in radians,
we use the fact that 2 rad 360°:
(rad)
180°
(deg)
For example, 60° equals /3 rad, and 45° equals /4 rad.
x
Figure 10.1 A rigid object rotating about a xed axis through O
perpendicular to the plane of the
gure. (In other words, the axis of
rotation is the z axis.) A particle at
P rotates in a circle of radius r centered at O.
It is important to note the units of in Equation 10.1b. Because is the ratio
of an arc length and the radius of the circle, it is a pure number. However, we commonly give the articial unit radian (rad), where
one radian is the angle subtended by an arc length equal to the radius of the
arc.
s
Radian
294
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
y
Q ,tf
r
P, ti
θf
In a short track event, such as a 200-m or
400-m sprint, the runners begin from staggered positions on the track. Why dont
they all begin from the same line?
θi
x
O
Figure 10.2 A particle on a rotating rigid object moves from P to Q
along the arc of a circle. In the
time interval t t f t i , the radius vector sweeps out an angle
f
i.
As the particle in question on our rigid object travels from position P to position
Q in a time t as shown in Figure 10.2, the radius vector sweeps out an angle
f
is dened as the angular displacement of the particle:
i . This quantity
f
We dene the average angular speed
placement to the time interval t :
(omega) as the ratio of this angular dis-
f
i
tf
Average angular speed
(10.2)
i
ti
t
In analogy to linear speed, the instantaneous angular speed
the limit of the ratio / t as t approaches zero:
lim
Instantaneous angular speed
t
t:0
d
dt
(10.3)
is dened as
(10.4)
Angular speed has units of radians per second (rad/s), or rather second 1
(s
because radians are not dimensional. We take to be positive when is increasing (counterclockwise motion) and negative when is decreasing (clockwise
motion).
If the instantaneous angular speed of an object changes from i to f in the
time interval t, the object has an angular acceleration. The average angular acceleration (alpha) of a rotating object is dened as the ratio of the change in
the angular speed to the time interval t :
1)
Average angular acceleration
f
tf
i
ti
t
(10.5)
295
10.1 Angular Displacement, Velocity, and Acceleration
ω
Figure 10.3 The right-hand rule for determining the direction of the angular velocity
vector.
ω
In analogy to linear acceleration, the instantaneous angular acceleration is
dened as the limit of the ratio
/ t as t approaches zero:
lim
t:0
t
d
dt
(10.6)
Angular acceleration has units of radians per second squared (rad/s2 ), or just second 2 (s 2 ). Note that is positive when the rate of counterclockwise rotation is
increasing or when the rate of clockwise rotation is decreasing.
When rotating about a xed axis, every particle on a rigid object rotates
through the same angle and has the same angular speed and the same angular acceleration. That is, the quantities , , and characterize the rotational
motion of the entire rigid object. Using these quantities, we can greatly simplify
the analysis of rigid-body rotation.
Angular position ( ), angular speed ( ), and angular acceleration ( ) are
analogous to linear position (x), linear speed (v), and linear acceleration (a). The
variables , , and differ dimensionally from the variables x, v, and a only by a
factor having the unit of length.
We have not specied any direction for
and . Strictly speaking, these
variables are the magnitudes of the angular velocity and the angular acceleration vectors
and , respectively, and they should always be positive. Because
we are considering rotation about a xed axis, however, we can indicate the directions of the vectors by assigning a positive or negative sign to and , as discussed earlier with regard to Equations 10.4 and 10.6. For rotation about a xed
axis, the only direction that uniquely species the rotational motion is the direction along the axis of rotation. Therefore, the directions of
and
are
along this axis. If an object rotates in the xy plane as in Figure 10.1, the direction of is out of the plane of the diagram when the rotation is counterclockwise and into the plane of the diagram when the rotation is clockwise. To illustrate this convention, it is convenient to use the right-hand rule demonstrated in
Figure 10.3. When the four ngers of the right hand are wrapped in the direction of rotation, the extended right thumb points in the direction of . The direction of follows from its denition d /dt. It is the same as the direction of
if the angular speed is increasing in time, and it is antiparallel to if the angular speed is decreasing in time.
Instantaneous angular
acceleration
296
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
Quick Quiz 10.1
Describe a situation in which
10.2
7.2
0 and
and
are antiparallel.
ROTATIONAL KINEMATICS: ROTATIONAL MOTION
WITH CONSTANT ANGULAR ACCELERATION
In our study of linear motion, we found that the simplest form of accelerated motion to analyze is motion under constant linear acceleration. Likewise, for rotational motion about a xed axis, the simplest accelerated motion to analyze is motion under constant angular acceleration. Therefore, we next develop kinematic
relationships for this type of motion. If we write Equation 10.6 in the form d
dt, and let ti 0 and tf t, we can integrate this expression directly:
f
(for constant )
t
i
(10.7)
Substituting Equation 10.7 into Equation 10.4 and integrating once more we
obtain
Rotational kinematic equations
f
1
2
it
i
t2
(for constant )
(10.8)
If we eliminate t from Equations 10.7 and 10.8, we obtain
f
2
i
2
2(
i)
f
(for constant )
(10.9)
Notice that these kinematic expressions for rotational motion under constant angular acceleration are of the same form as those for linear motion under constant
linear acceleration with the substitutions x : , v : , and a : . Table 10.1
compares the kinematic equations for rotational and linear motion.
EXAMPLE 10.1
Rotating Wheel
A wheel rotates with a constant angular acceleration of
3.50 rad/s2. If the angular speed of the wheel is 2.00 rad/s at
ti 0, (a) through what angle does the wheel rotate in 2.00 s?
Solution
We can use Figure 10.2 to represent the wheel,
and so we do not need a new drawing. This is a straightforward application of an equation from Table 10.1:
f
i
1
2
it
1
2
t2
(2.00 rad/s)(2.00 s)
(3.50 rad/s2)(2.00 s)2
11.0 rad
630°
360°/rev
(11.0 rad)(57.3°/rad)
630°
Solution Because the angular acceleration and the angular speed are both positive, we can be sure our answer must
be greater than 2.00 rad/s.
f
i
t
We could also obtain this result using Equation 10.9 and the
results of part (a). Try it! You also may want to see if you can
formulate the linear motion analog to this problem.
Exercise
Find the angle through which the wheel rotates
2.00 s and t 3.00 s.
1.75 rev
Answer
2.00 s?
(3.50 rad/s2)(2.00 s)
9.00 rad/s
between t
(b) What is the angular speed at t
2.00 rad/s
10.8 rad.
297
10.3 Angular and Linear Quantities
TABLE 10.1 Kinematic Equations for Rotational and Linear Motion
Under Constant Acceleration
Rotational Motion About a Fixed Axis
f
f
10.3
f
2
t
it
i
i
i
2
2(
1
2
f
Linear Motion
vf
xf
t2
i)
vf
2
vi
xi
vi
at
vit
2
2a (xf
1
2
at 2
xi )
y
ANGULAR AND LINEAR QUANTITIES
In this section we derive some useful relationships between the angular speed and
acceleration of a rotating rigid object and the linear speed and acceleration of an
arbitrary point in the object. To do so, we must keep in mind that when a rigid object rotates about a xed axis, as in Figure 10.4, every particle of the object moves
in a circle whose center is the axis of rotation.
We can relate the angular speed of the rotating object to the tangential speed
of a point P on the object. Because point P moves in a circle, the linear velocity
vector v is always tangent to the circular path and hence is called tangential velocity.
The magnitude of the tangential velocity of the point P is by denition the tangential speed v ds/dt, where s is the distance traveled by this point measured along
the circular path. Recalling that s r ( Eq. 10.1a) and noting that r is constant,
we obtain
v
Because d /dt
ds
dt
r
d
dt
v
P
r
θ
O
x
Figure 10.4 As a rigid object rotates about the xed axis through
O, the point P has a linear velocity
v that is always tangent to the circular path of radius r.
( see Eq. 10.4), we can say
v
(10.10)
r
That is, the tangential speed of a point on a rotating rigid object equals the perpendicular distance of that point from the axis of rotation multiplied by the angular speed. Therefore, although every point on the rigid object has the same angular speed, not every point has the same linear speed because r is not the same for
all points on the object. Equation 10.10 shows that the linear speed of a point on
the rotating object increases as one moves outward from the center of rotation, as
we would intuitively expect. The outer end of a swinging baseball bat moves much
faster than the handle.
We can relate the angular acceleration of the rotating rigid object to the tangential acceleration of the point P by taking the time derivative of v :
at
dv
dt
at
r
r
d
dt
(10.11)
That is, the tangential component of the linear acceleration of a point on a rotating rigid object equals the points distance from the axis of rotation multiplied by
the angular acceleration.
Relationship between linear and
angular speed
QuickLab
Spin a tennis ball or basketball and
watch it gradually slow down and
stop. Estimate and at as accurately
as you can.
Relationship between linear and
angular acceleration
298
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
In Section 4.4 we found that a point rotating in a circular path undergoes a
centripetal, or radial, acceleration ar of magnitude v 2/r directed toward the center
of rotation (Fig. 10.5). Because v r for a point P on a rotating object, we can
express the radial acceleration of that point as
y
at
a
ar
x
O
v2
r
ar
P
r
2
(10.12)
The total linear acceleration vector of the point is a at ar . (at describes
the change in how fast the point is moving, and ar represents the change in its direction of travel.) Because a is a vector having a radial and a tangential component, the magnitude of a for the point P on the rotating rigid object is
a
a t 2
a r2
r 2
2
r2
4
r
2
4
(10.13)
Figure 10.5
As a rigid object rotates about a xed axis through O,
the point P experiences a tangential component of linear acceleration at and a radial component of
linear acceleration ar . The total linear acceleration of this point is a
a t ar .
EXAMPLE 10.2
Quick Quiz 10.2
When a wheel of radius R rotates about a xed axis, do all points on the wheel have (a) the
same angular speed and (b) the same linear speed? If the angular speed is constant and
equal to , describe the linear speeds and linear accelerations of the points located at
(c) r 0, (d) r R/2, and (e) r R, all measured from the center of the wheel.
CD Player
On a compact disc, audio information is stored in a series of
pits and at areas on the surface of the disc. The information
is stored digitally, and the alternations between pits and at
areas on the surface represent binary ones and zeroes to be
read by the compact disc player and converted back to sound
waves. The pits and at areas are detected by a system consisting of a laser and lenses. The length of a certain number of
ones and zeroes is the same everywhere on the disc, whether
the information is near the center of the disc or near its
outer edge. In order that this length of ones and zeroes always passes by the laser lens system in the same time period,
the linear speed of the disc surface at the location of the lens
must be constant. This requires, according to Equation 10.10,
that the angular speed vary as the laser lens system moves radially along the disc. In a typical compact disc player, the disc
spins counterclockwise (Fig. 10.6), and the constant speed of
the surface at the point of the laser lens system is 1.3 m/s.
(a) Find the angular speed of the disc in revolutions per
minute when information is being read from the innermost
rst track (r 23 mm) and the outermost nal track (r
58 mm).
1
(56.5 rad/s) 2 rev/rad (60 s/min)
5.4
10 2 rev/min
23 mm
58 mm
Solution Using Equation 10.10, we can nd the angular
speed; this will give us the required linear speed at the position of the inner track,
i
v
ri
1.3 m/s
2.3 10 2 m
56.5 rad/s
Figure 10.6
A compact disc.
299
10.4 Rotational Energy
(c) What total length of track moves past the objective
lens during this time?
For the outer track,
v
rf
1.3 m/s
5.8 10 2 m
2.1
f
10 2 rev/min
22.4 rad/s
Solution Because we know the (constant) linear velocity
and the time interval, this is a straightforward calculation:
The player adjusts the angular speed of the disc within this
range so that information moves past the objective lens at a
constant rate. These angular velocity values are positive because the direction of rotation is counterclockwise.
(b) The maximum playing time of a standard music CD
is 74 minutes and 33 seconds. How many revolutions does the
disc make during that time?
Solution We know that the angular speed is always decreasing, and we assume that it is decreasing steadily, with
constant. The time interval t is (74 min)(60 s/min)
33 s 4 473 s. We are looking for the angular position f ,
where we set the initial angular position i 0. We can use
Equation 10.3, replacing the average angular speed with its
mathematical equivalent ( i
f )/2:
f
i
0
1
2( i
1
2 (540
(1.3 m/s)(4 473 s)
v it
rev/min
10 3 m
(d) What is the angular acceleration of the CD over the
4 473-s time interval? Assume that is constant.
Solution We have several choices for approaching this
problem. Let us use the most direct approach by utilizing
Equation 10.5, which is based on the denition of the term
we are seeking. We should obtain a negative number for the
angular acceleration because the disc spins more and more
slowly in the positive direction as time goes on. Our answer
should also be fairly small because it takes such a long time
more than an hour for the change in angular speed to be
accomplished:
22.4 rad/s 56.5 rad/s
4 473 s
i
t
210 rev/min)
5.8
More than 3.6 miles of track spins past the objective lens!
f
f )t
7.6
(1 min/60 s)(4 473 s)
2.8
xf
10
3
rad/s2
The disc experiences a very gradual decrease in its rotation
rate, as expected.
10 4 rev
web
10.4
7.3
R OTATIONAL ENERGY
Let us now look at the kinetic energy of a rotating rigid object, considering the object as a collection of particles and assuming it rotates about a xed z axis with an
angular speed
( Fig. 10.7). Each particle has kinetic energy determined by its
mass and linear speed. If the mass of the i th particle is mi and its linear speed is vi ,
its kinetic energy is
To proceed further, we must recall that although every particle in the rigid object
has the same angular speed , the individual linear speeds depend on the distance
ri from the axis of rotation according to the expression vi ri ( see Eq. 10.10).
The total kinetic energy of the rotating rigid object is the sum of the kinetic energies of the individual particles:
Ki
i
i
1
2
2m i v i
1
2
mi ri2
where we have factored
2
1
2
vi
m i ri 2
2
mi
ri
θ
O
x
2
i
We can write this expression in the form
KR
y
1
2
2 m iv i
Ki
KR
If you want to learn more about the physics
of CD players, visit the Special Interest
Group on CD Applications and Technology
at www.sigcat.org
(10.14)
i
from the sum because it is common to every particle.
Figure 10.7 A rigid object rotating about a z axis with angular
speed . The kinetic energy of
the particle of mass mi is 1 m iv i 2.
2
The total kinetic energy of the object is called its rotational
kinetic energy.
300
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
We simplify this expression by dening the quantity in parentheses as the moment
of inertia I :
Moment of inertia
mi ri 2
I
(10.15)
i
From the denition of moment of inertia, we see that it has dimensions of ML2
(kg m2 in SI units).1 With this notation, Equation 10.14 becomes
Rotational kinetic energy
KR
12
2I
(10.16)
1
Although we commonly refer to the quantity 2I 2 as rotational kinetic energy,
it is not a new form of energy. It is ordinary kinetic energy because it is derived
from a sum over individual kinetic energies of the particles contained in the rigid
object. However, the mathematical form of the kinetic energy given by Equation
10.16 is a convenient one when we are dealing with rotational motion, provided
we know how to calculate I.
It is important that you recognize the analogy between kinetic energy associated with linear motion 1mv 2 and rotational kinetic energy 1 I 2. The quantities I
2
2
and in rotational motion are analogous to m and v in linear motion, respectively.
(In fact, I takes the place of m every time we compare a linear-motion equation
with its rotational counterpart.) The moment of inertia is a measure of the resistance of an object to changes in its rotational motion, just as mass is a measure of
the tendency of an object to resist changes in its linear motion. Note, however,
that mass is an intrinsic property of an object, whereas I depends on the physical
arrangement of that mass. Can you think of a situation in which an objects moment of inertia changes even though its mass does not?
EXAMPLE 10.3
The Oxygen Molecule
Consider an oxygen molecule (O2 ) rotating in the xy plane
about the z axis. The axis passes through the center of the
molecule, perpendicular to its length. The mass of each oxygen atom is 2.66 10 26 kg, and at room temperature the
average separation between the two atoms is d 1.21
10 10 m (the atoms are treated as point masses). (a) Calculate the moment of inertia of the molecule about the z axis.
This is a very small number, consistent with the minuscule
masses and distances involved.
Solution This is a straightforward application of the definition of I. Because each atom is a distance d/2 from the z
axis, the moment of inertia about the axis is
Solution We apply the result we just calculated for the moment of inertia in the formula for K R :
mi ri 2
I
m
i
1
2 (2.66
10
d
2
26
2
m
kg)(1.21
1
d
2
1
2
2 md
10
m)2
10
46
kg m2
(b) If the angular speed of the molecule about the z axis is
4.60 1012 rad/s, what is its rotational kinetic energy?
KR
2
10
1.95
1
2
2I
1
2 (1.95
10
46
kg m2)(4.60
2.06
10
21
J
1012 rad/s)2
Civil engineers use moment of inertia to characterize the elastic properties (rigidity) of such structures as loaded beams. Hence, it is often useful even in a nonrotational context.
301
10.5 Calculation of Moments of Inertia
EXAMPLE 10.4
Four Rotating Masses
Four tiny spheres are fastened to the corners of a frame of
negligible mass lying in the xy plane (Fig. 10.8). We shall assume that the spheres radii are small compared with the dimensions of the frame. (a) If the system rotates about the y
axis with an angular speed , nd the moment of inertia and
the rotational kinetic energy about this axis.
Solution
First, note that the two spheres of mass m, which
lie on the y axis, do not contribute to Iy (that is, ri 0 for
these spheres about this axis). Applying Equation 10.15, we
obtain
m i ri 2
Iy
Ma 2
Ma 2
Therefore, the rotational kinetic energy about the y axis is
KR
1
2 Iy
2
1
2
2 (2Ma )
2
Ma 2
2
The fact that the two spheres of mass m do not enter into this
result makes sense because they have no motion about the
axis of rotation; hence, they have no rotational kinetic energy. By similar logic, we expect the moment of inertia about
the x axis to be Ix 2mb 2 with a rotational kinetic energy
about that axis of K R mb 2 2.
(b) Suppose the system rotates in the xy plane about an
axis through O (the z axis). Calculate the moment of inertia
and rotational kinetic energy about this axis.
2Ma 2
i
y
Solution
Because ri in Equation 10.15 is the perpendicular
distance to the axis of rotation, we obtain
m
mi ri 2
Iz
Ma 2
Ma 2
mb 2
mb 2
2Ma 2
2mb 2
i
b
M
a
a
M
O
KR
m
Figure 10.8
The four spheres are at a xed separation as shown.
The moment of inertia of the system depends on the axis about
which it is evaluated.
7.5
2
1
2
2 (2Ma
We can evaluate the moment of inertia of an extended rigid object by imagining
the object divided into many small volume elements, each of which has mass m.
r i 2 m i and take the limit of this sum as m : 0. In
We use the denition I
i
this limit, the sum becomes an integral over the whole object:
lim
mi :0 i
ri 2 mi
2
(Ma 2
mb 2)
2
Comparing the results for parts (a) and (b), we conclude
that the moment of inertia and therefore the rotational kinetic energy associated with a given angular speed depend on
the axis of rotation. In part (b), we expect the result to include all four spheres and distances because all four spheres
are rotating in the xy plane. Furthermore, the fact that the rotational kinetic energy in part (a) is smaller than that in part
(b) indicates that it would take less effort (work) to set the
system into rotation about the y axis than about the z axis.
CALCULATION OF MOMENTS OF INERTIA
I
2mb 2)
x
b
10.5
1
2 Iz
r 2 dm
(10.17)
It is usually easier to calculate moments of inertia in terms of the volume of
the elements rather than their mass, and we can easily make that change by using
m/V, where is the density of the object and V is its volume. We
Equation 1.1,
want this expression in its differential form
dm/dV because the volumes we
are dealing with are very small. Solving for dm
dV and substituting the result
302
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
into Equation 10.17 gives
r 2 dV
I
If the object is homogeneous, then is constant and the integral can be evaluated
for a known geometry. If is not constant, then its variation with position must be
known to complete the integration.
The density given by
m/V sometimes is referred to as volume density for the
obvious reason that it relates to volume. Often we use other ways of expressing
density. For instance, when dealing with a sheet of uniform thickness t, we can dene a surface density
t, which signies mass per unit area. Finally, when mass is
distributed along a uniform rod of cross-sectional area A, we sometimes use linear
density
M/L
A, which is the mass per unit length.
EXAMPLE 10.5
Uniform Hoop
y
Find the moment of inertia of a uniform hoop of mass M and
radius R about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the
hoop and passing through its center (Fig. 10.9).
dm
Solution
All mass elements dm are the same distance r
R from the axis, and so, applying Equation 10.17, we obtain
for the moment of inertia about the z axis through O :
Iz
r 2 dm
R2
dm
O
x
R
MR 2
Note that this moment of inertia is the same as that of a single particle of mass M located a distance R from the axis of
rotation.
Figure 10.9 The mass elements dm of a uniform hoop are all the
same distance from O.
Quick Quiz 10.3
(a) Based on what you have learned from Example 10.5, what do you expect to nd for the
moment of inertia of two particles, each of mass M/2, located anywhere on a circle of radius R around the axis of rotation? (b) How about the moment of inertia of four particles,
each of mass M/4, again located a distance R from the rotation axis?
EXAMPLE 10.6
Uniform Rigid Rod
Calculate the moment of inertia of a uniform rigid rod of
length L and mass M (Fig. 10.10) about an axis perpendicular to the rod (the y axis) and passing through its center of
mass.
Solution The shaded length element dx has a mass dm
equal to the mass per unit length multiplied by dx :
dm
dx
M
dx
L
Substituting this expression for dm into Equation 10.17, with
r x, we obtain
L/2
Iy
r 2 dm
x2
L/2
M
L
x3
3
L/2
L/2
M
dx
L
1
2
12 ML
M
L
L/2
x 2 dx
L/2
303
10.5 Calculation of Moments of Inertia
y
y
dx
x
O
x
Figure 10.10
A uniform rigid rod of length L . The moment of inertia about the y axis is less than that about the y axis. The latter axis
is examined in Example 10.8.
L
EXAMPLE 10.7
Uniform Solid Cylinder
A uniform solid cylinder has a radius R, mass M, and length
L. Calculate its moment of inertia about its central axis (the z
axis in Fig. 10.11).
Solution
It is convenient to divide the cylinder into many
z
cylindrical shells, each of which has radius r, thickness dr, and
length L, as shown in Figure 10.11. The volume dV of each
shell is its cross-sectional area multiplied by its length: dV
dA L (2 r dr )L. If the mass per unit volume is , then the
mass of this differential volume element is dm
dV
2 r L dr. Substituting this expression for dm into Equation
10.17, we obtain
R
dr
Iz
r 2 dm
2
r 3 dr
L
0
r
1
2
LR 4
Because the total volume of the cylinder is R 2L, we see that
M/V M/ R 2L. Substituting this value for into the
above result gives
R
L
(1)
Figure 10.11
Calculating I about the z axis for a uniform solid
cylinder.
Iz
1
2
2 MR
Note that this result does not depend on L, the length of the
cylinder. In other words, it applies equally well to a long cylinder and a at disc. Also note that this is exactly half the value
we would expect were all the mass concentrated at the outer
edge of the cylinder or disc. (See Example 10.5.)
Table 10.2 gives the moments of inertia for a number of bodies about specic
axes. The moments of inertia of rigid bodies with simple geometry (high symmetry) are relatively easy to calculate provided the rotation axis coincides with an axis
of symmetry. The calculation of moments of inertia about an arbitrary axis can be
cumbersome, however, even for a highly symmetric object. Fortunately, use of an
important theorem, called the parallel-axis theorem, often simplies the calculation. Suppose the moment of inertia about an axis through the center of mass of
an object is ICM . The parallel-axis theorem states that the moment of inertia about
any axis parallel to and a distance D away from this axis is
I
ICM
MD 2
(10.18)
Parallel-axis theorem
304
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
TABLE 10.2 Moments of Inertia of Homogeneous Rigid Bodies
with Different Geometries
Hoop or
cylindrical shell
I CM = MR 2
Hollow cylinder
I CM = 1 M(R 12 + R 22)
2
R
Solid cylinder
or disk
I CM = 1 MR 2
2
R1
R2
Rectangular plate
I CM = 1 M(a 2 + b 2)
12
R
b
a
Long thin rod
with rotation axis
through center
I CM = 1 ML 2
12
Long thin
rod with
rotation axis
through end
L
I = 1 ML 2
3
Solid sphere
I CM = 2 MR 2
5
L
Thin spherical
shell
I CM = 2 MR 2
3
R
R
Proof of the Parallel-Axis Theorem (Optional). Suppose that an object rotates
in the xy plane about the z axis, as shown in Figure 10.12, and that the coordinates
of the center of mass are x CM , y CM . Let the mass element dm have coordinates x, y.
Because this element is a distance r x 2 y 2 from the z axis, the moment of inertia about the z axis is
I
r 2 dm
(x 2
y 2) dm
However, we can relate the coordinates x, y of the mass element dm to the coordinates of this same element located in a coordinate system having the objects center of mass as its origin. If the coordinates of the center of mass are x CM , y CM in
the original coordinate system centered on O, then from Figure 10.12a we see that
the relationships between the unprimed and primed coordinates are x x
x CM
305
10.5 Calculation of Moments of Inertia
y
dm
x, y
z
y
Axis
through
CM
Rotation
axis
r
y
y
CM
xCM, yCM
O
yCM
CM
D
x
O
x
x
xCM
x
(a)
(b)
Figure 10.12
(a) The parallel-axis theorem: If the moment of inertia about an axis perpendicular to the gure through the center of mass is ICM , then the moment of inertia about the z axis
is Iz I CM MD 2. (b) Perspective drawing showing the z axis (the axis of rotation) and the parallel axis through the CM.
and y
I
y
[(x
[(x )2
y CM . Therefore,
x CM)2
(y
(y )2] dm
y CM)2] dm
2x CM
x dm
2y CM
y dm
(x CM2
y CM 2)
dm
The rst integral is, by denition, the moment of inertia about an axis that is parallel to the z axis and passes through the center of mass. The second two integrals
are zero because, by denition of the center of mass, x dm
y dm 0. The
last integral is simply MD 2 because dm M and D 2 x CM2 y CM2. Therefore,
we conclude that
I
EXAMPLE 10.8
ICM
MD 2
Applying the Parallel-Axis Theorem
Consider once again the uniform rigid rod of mass M and
length L shown in Figure 10.10. Find the moment of inertia
of the rod about an axis perpendicular to the rod through
one end (the y axis in Fig. 10.10).
Solution Intuitively, we expect the moment of inertia to
1
be greater than ICM 12ML 2 because it should be more difcult to change the rotational motion of a rod spinning about
an axis at one end than one that is spinning about its center.
Because the distance between the center-of-mass axis and the
y axis is D L/2, the parallel-axis theorem gives
I
MD 2
ICM
1
12
ML 2
M
L
2
2
1
3
ML 2
So, it is four times more difcult to change the rotation of a
rod spinning about its end than it is to change the motion of
one spinning about its center.
Exercise
Calculate the moment of inertia of the rod about
a perpendicular axis through the point x L/4.
Answer
I
7
48
ML 2.
306
CHAPTER 10
10.6
7.6
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
TORQUE
Why are a doors doorknob and hinges placed near opposite edges of the door?
This question actually has an answer based on common sense ideas. The harder
we push against the door and the farther we are from the hinges, the more likely
we are to open or close the door. When a force is exerted on a rigid object pivoted
about an axis, the object tends to rotate about that axis. The tendency of a force to
rotate an object about some axis is measured by a vector quantity called torque
(tau).
Consider the wrench pivoted on the axis through O in Figure 10.13. The applied force F acts at an angle to the horizontal. We dene the magnitude of the
torque associated with the force F by the expression
r F sin
Denition of torque
Moment arm
(10.19)
Fd
where r is the distance between the pivot point and the point of application of F
and d is the perpendicular distance from the pivot point to the line of action of F.
(The line of action of a force is an imaginary line extending out both ends of the
vector representing the force. The dashed line extending from the tail of F in Figure 10.13 is part of the line of action of F.) From the right triangle in Figure 10.13
that has the wrench as its hypotenuse, we see that d r sin . This quantity d is
called the moment arm (or lever arm) of F.
It is very important that you recognize that torque is dened only when a reference
axis is specied. Torque is the product of a force and the moment arm of that force,
and moment arm is dened only in terms of an axis of rotation.
In Figure 10.13, the only component of F that tends to cause rotation is F sin ,
the component perpendicular to r. The horizontal component F cos , because it
passes through O, has no tendency to produce rotation. From the denition of
torque, we see that the rotating tendency increases as F increases and as d increases. This explains the observation that it is easier to close a door if we push at
the doorknob rather than at a point close to the hinge. We also want to apply our
push as close to perpendicular to the door as we can. Pushing sideways on the
doorknob will not cause the door to rotate.
If two or more forces are acting on a rigid object, as shown in Figure 10.14,
each tends to produce rotation about the pivot at O. In this example, F2 tends to
F1
F sin φ
F
r
d1
φ
φ
O
d
F cos φ
Line of
action
Figure 10.13 The force F has a
greater rotating tendency about O
as F increases and as the moment
arm d increases. It is the component F sin that tends to rotate the
wrench about O.
O
d2
F2
Figure 10.14
The force F1 tends
to rotate the object counterclockwise about O, and F2 tends to rotate it clockwise.
307
10.7 Relationship Between Torque and Angular Acceleration
rotate the object clockwise, and F1 tends to rotate it counterclockwise. We use the
convention that the sign of the torque resulting from a force is positive if the turning tendency of the force is counterclockwise and is negative if the turning tendency is clockwise. For example, in Figure 10.14, the torque resulting from F1 ,
which has a moment arm d 1 , is positive and equal to F1 d 1 ; the torque from F2 is
negative and equal to F2 d 2 . Hence, the net torque about O is
1
2
F 1d 1
F 2d 2
Torque should not be confused with force. Forces can cause a change in linear motion, as described by Newtons second law. Forces can also cause a change
in rotational motion, but the effectiveness of the forces in causing this change depends on both the forces and the moment arms of the forces, in the combination
that we call torque. Torque has units of force times length newton meters in SI
units and should be reported in these units. Do not confuse torque and work,
which have the same units but are very different concepts.
EXAMPLE 10.9
The Net Torque on a Cylinder
A one-piece cylinder is shaped as shown in Figure 10.15, with
a core section protruding from the larger drum. The cylinder
is free to rotate around the central axis shown in the drawing.
A rope wrapped around the drum, which has radius R 1 , exerts a force F1 to the right on the cylinder. A rope wrapped
around the core, which has radius R 2 , exerts a force F2 downward on the cylinder. (a) What is the net torque acting on the
cylinder about the rotation axis (which is the z axis in Figure
10.15)?
y
F1
R1
R2
O
F2
A solid cylinder pivoted about the z axis through O.
The moment arm of F1 is R 1 , and the moment arm of F2 is R 2 .
10.7
7.6
1
2
R 1F 1
R 2F 2
We can make a quick check by noting that if the two forces
are of equal magnitude, the net torque is negative because
R 1 R 2 . Starting from rest with both forces acting on it, the
cylinder would rotate clockwise because F 1 would be more effective at turning it than would F 2 .
(b) Suppose F 1 5.0 N, R 1 1.0 m, F 2 15.0 N, and
R 2 0.50 m. What is the net torque about the rotation axis,
and which way does the cylinder rotate from rest?
x
z
Figure 10.15
Solution The torque due to F1 is R 1 F1 (the sign is negative because the torque tends to produce clockwise rotation).
The torque due to F2 is R 2 F 2 (the sign is positive because
the torque tends to produce counterclockwise rotation).
Therefore, the net torque about the rotation axis is
(5.0 N)(1.0 m)
(15.0 N)(0.50 m)
2.5 N m
Because the net torque is positive, if the cylinder starts from
rest, it will commence rotating counterclockwise with increasing angular velocity. (If the cylinders initial rotation is clockwise, it will slow to a stop and then rotate counterclockwise
with increasing angular speed.)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN TORQUE AND
ANGULAR ACCELERATION
In this section we show that the angular acceleration of a rigid object rotating
about a xed axis is proportional to the net torque acting about that axis. Before
discussing the more complex case of rigid-body rotation, however, it is instructive
308
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
rst to discuss the case of a particle rotating about some xed point under the inuence of an external force.
Consider a particle of mass m rotating in a circle of radius r under the inuence of a tangential force Ft and a radial force Fr , as shown in Figure 10.16. (As we
learned in Chapter 6, the radial force must be present to keep the particle moving
in its circular path.) The tangential force provides a tangential acceleration at , and
Ft
ma t
The torque about the center of the circle due to Ft is
A particle rotating
in a circle under the inuence of a
tangential force Ft . A force Fr in
the radial direction also must be
present to maintain the circular
motion.
(ma t )r
Ft r
Figure 10.16
Because the tangential acceleration is related to the angular acceleration through
the relationship at r (see Eq. 10.11), the torque can be expressed as
(mr 2)
(mr )r
Recall from Equation 10.15 that mr 2 is the moment of inertia of the rotating particle about the z axis passing through the origin, so that
Relationship between torque and
angular acceleration
y
That is, the torque acting on the particle is proportional to its angular acceleration, and the proportionality constant is the moment of inertia. It is important
to note that
I is the rotational analog of Newtons second law of motion,
F ma.
Now let us extend this discussion to a rigid object of arbitrary shape rotating
about a xed axis, as shown in Figure 10.17. The object can be regarded as an innite number of mass elements dm of innitesimal size. If we impose a cartesian coordinate system on the object, then each mass element rotates in a circle about the
origin, and each has a tangential acceleration at produced by an external tangential force d Ft . For any given element, we know from Newtons second law that
d Ft
dm
dFt
r
O
(10.20)
I
(dm)a t
The torque d associated with the force d Ft acts about the origin and is given by
x
d
Because at
Figure 10.17
A rigid object rotating about an axis through O.
Each mass element dm rotates
about O with the same angular acceleration , and the net torque on
the object is proportional to .
r dFt
(r dm)a t
r , the expression for d becomes
d
(r 2 dm)
(r dm)r
It is important to recognize that although each mass element of the rigid object may have a different linear acceleration at , they all have the same angular acceleration . With this in mind, we can integrate the above expression to obtain
the net torque about O due to the external forces:
(r 2 dm)
r 2 dm
where can be taken outside the integral because it is common to all mass elements. From Equation 10.17, we know that r 2 dm is the moment of inertia of the
object about the rotation axis through O, and so the expression for
becomes
Torque is proportional to angular
acceleration
I
(10.21)
Note that this is the same relationship we found for a particle rotating in a circle
(see Eq. 10.20). So, again we see that the net torque about the rotation axis is pro-
309
10.7 Relationship Between Torque and Angular Acceleration
portional to the angular acceleration of the object, with the proportionality factor
being I, a quantity that depends upon the axis of rotation and upon the size and
shape of the object. In view of the complex nature of the system, it is interesting to
note that the relationship
I is strikingly simple and in complete agreement
with experimental observations. The simplicity of the result lies in the manner in
which the motion is described.
Although each point on a rigid object rotating about a xed axis may not experience the same force, linear acceleration, or linear speed, each point experiences the same angular acceleration and angular speed at any instant. Therefore, at any instant the rotating rigid object as a whole is characterized by
specic values for angular acceleration, net torque, and angular speed.
Every point has the same
Q uickLab
Finally, note that the result
I also applies when the forces acting on the
mass elements have radial components as well as tangential components. This is
because the line of action of all radial components must pass through the axis of
rotation, and hence all radial components produce zero torque about that axis.
EXAMPLE 10.10
Solution
We cannot use our kinematic equations to nd
or a because the torque exerted on the rod varies with its position, and so neither acceleration is constant. We have
enough information to nd the torque, however, which we
can then use in the torque angular acceleration relationship
(Eq. 10.21) to nd and then a.
The only force contributing to torque about an axis
through the pivot is the gravitational force M g exerted on
the rod. (The force exerted by the pivot on the rod has zero
torque about the pivot because its moment arm is zero.) To
compute the torque on the rod, we can assume that the gravitational force acts at the center of mass of the rod, as shown
in Figure 10.18. The torque due to this force about an axis
through the pivot is
g
1
2
3 ML
With
I , and I
Table 10.2), we obtain
L/2
Mg
The uniform rod is pivoted at the left end.
L
2
for this axis of rotation (see
g (L/2)
I
13
L2
3g
2L
All points on the rod have this angular acceleration.
To nd the linear acceleration of the right end of the rod,
we use the relationship a t r (Eq. 10.11), with r L :
at
Figure 10.18
Tip over a childs tall tower of blocks.
Try this several times. Does the tower
break at the same place each time?
What affects where the tower comes
apart as it tips? If the tower were
made of toy bricks that snap together,
what would happen? (Refer to Conceptual Example 10.11.)
Rotating Rod
A uniform rod of length L and mass M is attached at one end
to a frictionless pivot and is free to rotate about the pivot in
the vertical plane, as shown in Figure 10.18. The rod is released from rest in the horizontal position. What is the initial
angular acceleration of the rod and the initial linear acceleration of its right end?
Pivot
and
L
3
2g
This result that at g for the free end of the rod is
rather interesting. It means that if we place a coin at the tip
of the rod, hold the rod in the horizontal position, and then
release the rod, the tip of the rod falls faster than the coin
does!
Other points on the rod have a linear acceleration that
is less than 3 g. For example, the middle of the rod has
2
an acceleration of 3 g.
4
310
CHAPTER 10
CONCEPTUAL EXAMPLE 10.11
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
Falling Smokestacks and Tumbling Blocks
When a tall smokestack falls over, it often breaks somewhere
along its length before it hits the ground, as shown in Figure
10.19. The same thing happens with a tall tower of childrens
toy blocks. Why does this happen?
Solution As the smokestack rotates around its base, each
higher portion of the smokestack falls with an increasing
tangential acceleration. (The tangential acceleration of a
given point on the smokestack is proportional to the distance of that portion from the base.) As the acceleration increases, higher portions of the smokestack experience an
acceleration greater than that which could result from
gravity alone; this is similar to the situation described in
Example 10.10. This can happen only if these portions are
being pulled downward by a force in addition to the gravitational force. The force that causes this to occur is the
shear force from lower portions of the smokestack. Eventually the shear force that provides this acceleration is greater
than the smokestack can withstand, and the smokestack
breaks.
EXAMPLE 10.12
Figure 10.19
A falling smokestack.
Angular Acceleration of a Wheel
A wheel of radius R, mass M, and moment of inertia I is
mounted on a frictionless, horizontal axle, as shown in Figure
10.20. A light cord wrapped around the wheel supports an
object of mass m. Calculate the angular acceleration of the
wheel, the linear acceleration of the object, and the tension
in the cord.
Solution The torque acting on the wheel about its axis
of rotation is
TR, where T is the force exerted by the
cord on the rim of the wheel. (The gravitational force exerted by the Earth on the wheel and the normal force exerted by the axle on the wheel both pass through the axis
of rotation and thus produce no torque.) Because
I,
we obtain
I
TR
M
O
R
T
T
TR
I
(1)
m
Now let us apply Newtons second law to the motion of the
object, taking the downward direction to be positive:
Fy
(2)
a
mg
T
mg
ma
T
m
Equations (1) and (2) have three unknowns, , a, and T. Because the object and wheel are connected by a string that
does not slip, the linear acceleration of the suspended object
is equal to the linear acceleration of a point on the rim of the
mg
Figure 10.20 The tension in the cord produces a torque about
the axle passing through O.
311
10.7 Relationship Between Torque and Angular Acceleration
wheel. Therefore, the angular acceleration of the wheel and
this linear acceleration are related by a R . Using this fact
together with Equations (1) and (2), we obtain
(3)
(4)
a
TR 2
I
R
a
R
m
Solution We shall dene the downward direction as positive for m 1 and upward as the positive direction for m 2 . This
allows us to represent the acceleration of both masses by a
single variable a and also enables us to relate a positive a to a
positive (counterclockwise) angular acceleration . Let us
write Newtons second law of motion for each block, using
the free-body diagrams for the two blocks as shown in Figure
10.21b:
(1)
m 1g T1 m 1a
T3
3.27 N; 10.9 rad/s2.
Answer
Atwoods Machine Revisited
Two blocks having masses m1 and m 2 are connected to each
other by a light cord that passes over two identical, frictionless pulleys, each having a moment of inertia I and radius R,
as shown in Figure 10.21a. Find the acceleration of each
block and the tensions T1 , T2 , and T3 in the cord. (Assume
no slipping between cord and pulleys.)
(2)
m 2g
Substituting Equation (6) into Equation (5), we have
[(m 1
(3)
(T1
T2)R
(T2
T3)R
(m 1
m 2)a]R
2I
(m 1
(7)
m 2)g
(m 1
m 2)a
(m 1
a
m1
a
R2
2I
m 2)g
2
m2
I
R2
This value of a can then be substituted into Equations (1)
T2
I
T1
T3 +
T1
m1
T3
m1
m2
m1g
m2
m2g
+
(a)
(b)
I
(4)
m 2)g
a/R, this expression can be simplied to
Because
m 2a
Next, we must include the effect of the pulleys on the motion. Free-body diagrams for the pulleys are shown in Figure
10.21c. The net torque about the axle for the pulley on the
left is ( T1 T2 )R, while the net torque for the pulley on the
right is ( T2 T3 )R. Using the relation
I for each pulley and noting that each pulley has the same angular acceleration , we obtain
(5)
(T1
T3)R
(6)
m 1g
T1
T1
n2
T2
mpg
mpg
T3
(c)
2I
Figure 10.21
Adding Equations (1) and (2) gives
T1
T2
n1
We now have four equations with four unknowns: a, T1 ,
T2 , and T3 . These can be solved simultaneously. Adding
Equations (3) and (4) gives
T3
R
The wheel in Figure 10.20 is a solid disk of M
2.00 kg, R 30.0 cm, and I 0.090 0 kg m2. The suspended
object has a mass of m 0.500 kg. Find the tension in the
cord and the angular acceleration of the wheel.
Substituting Equation (4) into Equation (2), and solving for
a and , we nd that
EXAMPLE 10.13
g
I/mR
Exercise
mR 2
I
1
g
I/mR 2
1
mg
mg
T
a
m 2g
(m 1
m 2)a
T3
(m 1
m 2)g
(m 1
m 2)a
(a) Another look at Atwoods machine.
(b) Free-body diagrams for the blocks. (c) Free-body diagrams for
the pulleys, where m p g represents the force of gravity acting on each
pulley.
312
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
and (2) to give T1 and T3 . Finally, T2 can be found from
Equation (3) or Equation (4). Note that if m 1 m 2 , the acceleration is positive; this means that the left block accelerates downward, the right block accelerates upward, and both
10.8
F
φ
ds
dθ
pulleys accelerate counterclockwise. If m 1 m 2 , then all the
values are negative and the motions are reversed. If m 1 m 2 ,
then no acceleration occurs at all. You should compare these
results with those found in Example 5.9 on page 129.
WORK, POWER, AND ENERGY
IN ROTATIONAL MOTION
In this section, we consider the relationship between the torque acting on a rigid
object and its resulting rotational motion in order to generate expressions for the
power and a rotational analog to the work kinetic energy theorem. Consider the
rigid object pivoted at O in Figure 10.22. Suppose a single external force F is applied at P, where F lies in the plane of the page. The work done by F as the object
rotates through an innitesimal distance ds r d in a time dt is
P
r
O
Figure 10.22
A rigid object rotates about an axis through O under the action of an external force
F applied at P.
F ds
dW
(F sin )r d
where F sin is the tangential component of F, or, in other words, the component
of the force along the displacement. Note that the radial component of F does no work
because it is perpendicular to the displacement.
Because the magnitude of the torque due to F about O is dened as r F sin
by Equation 10.19, we can write the work done for the innitesimal rotation as
dW
(10.22)
d
The rate at which work is being done by F as the object rotates about the xed axis is
d
dt
dW
dt
Because dW/dt is the instantaneous power
(see Section 7.5) delivered by the
force, and because d /dt
, this expression reduces to
dW
dt
Power delivered to a rigid object
(10.23)
Fv in the case of linear motion, and the exThis expression is analogous to
pression dW
d is analogous to dW Fx dx.
Work and Energy in Rotational Motion
In studying linear motion, we found the energy concept and, in particular, the
work kinetic energy theorem extremely useful in describing the motion of a
system. The energy concept can be equally useful in describing rotational motion.
From what we learned of linear motion, we expect that when a symmetric object
rotates about a xed axis, the work done by external forces equals the change in
the rotational energy.
To show that this is in fact the case, let us begin with
I . Using the chain
rule from the calculus, we can express the resultant torque as
I
I
d
dt
I
d
d
d
dt
I
d
d
10.8 Work, Power, and Energy in Rotational Motion
313
TABLE 10.3 Useful Equations in Rotational and Linear Motion
Rotational Motion
About a Fixed Axis
Linear Motion
Angular speed
d /dt
Angular acceleration
d /dt
Resultant torque
I
Linear speed v dx/dt
Linear acceleration a dv/dt
Resultant force F ma
If
f
constant
f
f
t
t
i
i
i
2
i
2
1
2
2(
If
a
t2
vi
xi
vf 2
i)
f
at
vit
vi2
1
2
at 2
2a(xf
xi )
xf
f
Work W
vf
xf
constant
Work W
d
xi
i
Rotational kinetic energy K R
Power
Angular momentum L I
Resultant torque
dL/dt
1
2
2I
Kinetic energy K 1mv 2
2
Power
Fv
Linear momentum p mv
Resultant force F dp/dt
Rearranging this expression and noting that
d
Fx dx
dW, we obtain
d
dW
Id
Integrating this expression, we get for the total work done by the net external
force acting on a rotating system
f
W
f
d
i
where the angular speed changes from
from i to f . That is,
1
2
2I f
Id
1
2
2I i
(10.24)
i
i
to
f
as the angular position changes
the net work done by external forces in rotating a symmetric rigid object about
a xed axis equals the change in the objects rotational energy.
Table 10.3 lists the various equations we have discussed pertaining to rotational motion, together with the analogous expressions for linear motion. The last
two equations in Table 10.3, involving angular momentum L , are discussed in
Chapter 11 and are included here only for the sake of completeness.
Quick Quiz 10.4
For a hoop lying in the xy plane, which of the following requires that more work be done by
an external agent to accelerate the hoop from rest to an angular speed : (a) rotation
about the z axis through the center of the hoop, or (b) rotation about an axis parallel to z
passing through a point P on the hoop rim?
Work kinetic energy theorem for
rotational motion
314
CHAPTER 10
EXAMPLE 10.14
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
Rotating Rod Revisited
A uniform rod of length L and mass M is free to rotate on a
frictionless pin passing through one end (Fig 10.23). The rod
is released from rest in the horizontal position. (a) What is its
angular speed when it reaches its lowest position?
energy is entirely rotational energy, 1 I 2, where I is the mo2
ment of inertia about the pivot. Because I 1 ML 2 (see Table
3
10.2) and because mechanical energy is constant, we have
Ei Ef or
1
2 MgL
Solution
The question can be answered by considering
the mechanical energy of the system. When the rod is horizontal, it has no rotational energy. The potential energy relative to the lowest position of the center of mass of the rod
(O ) is MgL/2. When the rod reaches its lowest position, the
1
2
2I
11
2
2
2 (3 ML )
3g
L
(b) Determine the linear speed of the center of mass and
the linear speed of the lowest point on the rod when it is in
the vertical position.
E i = U = MgL/2
O
L/2
Solution These two values can be determined from the relationship between linear and angular speeds. We know
from part (a), and so the linear speed of the center of mass is
O
v CM
1
2
3gL
Because r for the lowest point on the rod is twice what it is for
the center of mass, the lowest point has a linear speed equal
to
1
E f = K R = Iω 2
2
Figure 10.23 A uniform rigid rod pivoted at O rotates in a vertical
plane under the action of gravity.
EXAMPLE 10.15
L
2
r
3gL
2v CM
Connected Cylinders
Consider two cylinders having masses m1 and m 2 , where m1
m2 , connected by a string passing over a pulley, as shown in
Figure 10.24. The pulley has a radius R and moment of
Solution We are now able to account for the effect of a
massive pulley. Because the string does not slip, the pulley rotates. We neglect friction in the axle about which the pulley
rotates for the following reason: Because the axles radius is
small relative to that of the pulley, the frictional torque is
much smaller than the torque applied by the two cylinders,
provided that their masses are quite different. Mechanical energy is constant; hence, the increase in the systems kinetic energy (the system being the two cylinders, the pulley, and the
Earth) equals the decrease in its potential energy. Because
K i 0 (the system is initially at rest), we have
R
m2
h
h
m1
Figure 10.24
inertia I about its axis of rotation. The string does not slip
on the pulley, and the system is released from rest. Find the
linear speeds of the cylinders after cylinder 2 descends
through a distance h, and the angular speed of the pulley at
this time.
K
Kf
(1m 1v f 2
2
Ki
1
2
2 m 2v f
1
2
2I f )
where vf is the same for both blocks. Because vf
expression becomes
K
1
2
m1
m2
I
v2
R2 f
0
R f , this
315
Summary
From Figure 10.24, we see that the system loses potential energy as cylinder 2 descends and gains potential energy as
cylinder 1 rises. That is, U 2
m 2 gh and U 1 m 1gh. Applying the principle of conservation of energy in the form
K
U1
U 2 0 gives
1
2
m1
m2
vf
I
v2
R2 f
m 1gh
2(m 2
m1
m2
R f , the angular speed of the pulley at this invf
f
R
1
R
0
m 2gh
m 1)gh
Because v f
stant is
Exercise
I
R2
SUMMARY
If a particle rotates in a circle of radius r through an angle (measured in radians), the arc length it moves through is s r .
The angular displacement of a particle rotating in a circle or of a rigid object rotating about a xed axis is
(10.2)
i
The instantaneous angular speed of a particle rotating in a circle or of a
rigid object rotating about a xed axis is
d
dt
(10.4)
The instantaneous angular acceleration of a rotating object is
d
dt
(10.6)
When a rigid object rotates about a xed axis, every part of the object has the
same angular speed and the same angular acceleration.
If a particle or object rotates about a xed axis under constant angular acceleration, one can apply equations of kinematics that are analogous to those for linear motion under constant linear acceleration:
f
f
f
2
(10.7)
t
i
it
i
i
2
m1
m 1)gh
m2
1/2
I
R2
Repeat the calculation of vf , using
I applied to the pulley and Newtons second law applied to the
two cylinders. Use the procedures presented in Examples
10.12 and 10.13.
1/2
f
2(m 2
1
2
2(
f
t2
(10.8)
i)
(10.9)
A useful technique in solving problems dealing with rotation is to visualize a linear
version of the same problem.
When a rigid object rotates about a xed axis, the angular position, angular
speed, and angular acceleration are related to the linear position, linear speed,
and linear acceleration through the relationships
s
ru
(10.1a)
v
r
(10.10)
at
r
(10.11)
316
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
You must be able to easily alternate between the linear and rotational variables
that describe a given situation.
The moment of inertia of a system of particles is
mi ri 2
I
(10.15)
i
If a rigid object rotates about a xed axis with angular speed , its rotational
energy can be written
KR
1
2
2I
(10.16)
where I is the moment of inertia about the axis of rotation.
The moment of inertia of a rigid object is
I
r 2 dm
(10.17)
where r is the distance from the mass element dm to the axis of rotation.
The magnitude of the torque associated with a force F acting on an object is
(10.19)
Fd
where d is the moment arm of the force, which is the perpendicular distance from
some origin to the line of action of the force. Torque is a measure of the tendency
of the force to change the rotation of the object about some axis.
If a rigid object free to rotate about a xed axis has a net external torque acting on it, the object undergoes an angular acceleration , where
(10.21)
I
The rate at which work is done by an external force in rotating a rigid object
about a xed axis, or the power delivered, is
(10.23)
The net work done by external forces in rotating a rigid object about a xed
axis equals the change in the rotational kinetic energy of the object:
W
1
2
2I f
1
2
2I i
(10.24)
QUESTIONS
1. What is the angular speed of the second hand of a clock?
What is the direction of as you view a clock hanging
vertically? What is the magnitude of the angular acceleration vector of the second hand?
2. A wheel rotates counterclockwise in the xy plane. What is
the direction of ? What is the direction of if the angular velocity is decreasing in time?
3. Are the kinematic expressions for , , and valid when
the angular displacement is measured in degrees instead
of in radians?
4. A turntable rotates at a constant rate of 45 rev/min. What
is its angular speed in radians per second? What is the
magnitude of its angular acceleration?
5. Suppose a b and M m for the system of particles described in Figure 10.8. About what axis (x, y, or z ) does
the moment of inertia have the smallest value? the largest
value?
6. Suppose the rod in Figure 10.10 has a nonuniform mass
distribution. In general, would the moment of inertia
about the y axis still equal ML2/12? If not, could the moment of inertia be calculated without knowledge of the
manner in which the mass is distributed?
7. Suppose that only two external forces act on a rigid body,
and the two forces are equal in magnitude but opposite
in direction. Under what condition does the body rotate?
8. Explain how you might use the apparatus described in
Example 10.12 to determine the moment of inertia of the
wheel. (If the wheel does not have a uniform mass density, the moment of inertia is not necessarily equal to
1
2
2 MR .)
317
Problems
9. Using the results from Example 10.12, how would you calculate the angular speed of the wheel and the linear
speed of the suspended mass at t 2 s, if the system is released from rest at t 0? Is the expression v R valid
in this situation?
10. If a small sphere of mass M were placed at the end of the
rod in Figure 10.23, would the result for be greater
than, less than, or equal to the value obtained in Example
10.14?
11. Explain why changing the axis of rotation of an object
changes its moment of inertia.
12. Is it possible to change the translational kinetic energy of
an object without changing its rotational energy?
13. Two cylinders having the same dimensions are set into rotation about their long axes with the same angular speed.
14.
15.
16.
17.
One is hollow, and the other is lled with water. Which
cylinder will be easier to stop rotating? Explain your
answer.
Must an object be rotating to have a nonzero moment of
inertia?
If you see an object rotating, is there necessarily a net
torque acting on it?
Can a (momentarily) stationary object have a nonzero angular acceleration?
The polar diameter of the Earth is slightly less than the
equatorial diameter. How would the moment of inertia of
the Earth change if some mass from near the equator
were removed and transferred to the polar regions to
make the Earth a perfect sphere?
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
Section 10.2 Rotational Kinematics: Rotational
Motion with Constant Angular Acceleration
WEB
1. A wheel starts from rest and rotates with constant angular acceleration and reaches an angular speed of
12.0 rad/s in 3.00 s. Find (a) the magnitude of the angular acceleration of the wheel and (b) the angle (in
radians) through which it rotates in this time.
2. What is the angular speed in radians per second of
(a) the Earth in its orbit about the Sun and (b) the
Moon in its orbit about the Earth?
3. An airliner arrives at the terminal, and its engines are
shut off. The rotor of one of the engines has an initial
clockwise angular speed of 2 000 rad/s. The engines
rotation slows with an angular acceleration of magnitude 80.0 rad/s2. (a) Determine the angular speed after
10.0 s. (b) How long does it take for the rotor to come
to rest?
4. (a) The positions of the hour and minute hand on a
clock face coincide at 12 oclock. Determine all other
times (up to the second) at which the positions of the
hands coincide. (b) If the clock also has a second hand,
determine all times at which the positions of
all three hands coincide, given that they all coincide
at 12 oclock.
5. An electric motor rotating a grinding wheel at
100 rev/min is switched off. Assuming constant negative
acceleration of magnitude 2.00 rad/s2, (a) how long
does it take the wheel to stop? (b) Through how many
radians does it turn during the time found in part (a)?
6. A centrifuge in a medical laboratory rotates at a rotational speed of 3 600 rev/min. When switched off, it rotates 50.0 times before coming to rest. Find the constant
angular acceleration of the centrifuge.
7. The angular position of a swinging door is described by
5.00 10.0t 2.00t 2 rad. Determine the angular
position, angular speed, and angular acceleration of the
door (a) at t 0 and (b) at t 3.00 s.
8. The tub of a washer goes into its spin cycle, starting
from rest and gaining angular speed steadily for 8.00 s,
when it is turning at 5.00 rev/s. At this point the person
doing the laundry opens the lid, and a safety switch
turns off the washer. The tub smoothly slows to rest in
12.0 s. Through how many revolutions does the tub
turn while it is in motion?
9. A rotating wheel requires 3.00 s to complete 37.0 revolutions. Its angular speed at the end of the 3.00-s interval is 98.0 rad/s. What is the constant angular acceleration of the wheel?
10. (a) Find the angular speed of the Earths rotation on its
axis. As the Earth turns toward the east, we see the sky
turning toward the west at this same rate.
(b) The rainy Pleiads wester
And seek beyond the sea
The head that I shall dream of
That shall not dream of me.
A. E. Housman
(© Robert E. Symons)
Cambridge, England, is at longitude 0°, and Saskatoon,
Saskatchewan, is at longitude 107° west. How much
time elapses after the Pleiades set in Cambridge until
these stars fall below the western horizon in Saskatoon?
Section 10.3 Angular and Linear Quantities
11. Make an order-of-magnitude estimate of the number of
revolutions through which a typical automobile tire
318
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
sume the discus moves on the arc of a circle 1.00 m in
radius. (a) Calculate the nal angular speed of the discus. (b) Determine the magnitude of the angular acceleration of the discus, assuming it to be constant.
(c) Calculate the acceleration time.
17. A car accelerates uniformly from rest and reaches a
speed of 22.0 m/s in 9.00 s. If the diameter of a tire is
58.0 cm, nd (a) the number of revolutions the tire
makes during this motion, assuming that no slipping occurs. (b) What is the nal rotational speed of a tire in
revolutions per second?
18. A 6.00-kg block is released from A on the frictionless
track shown in Figure P10.18. Determine the radial and
tangential components of acceleration for the block
at P.
turns in 1 yr. State the quantities you measure or estimate and their values.
12. The diameters of the main rotor and tail rotor of a single-engine helicopter are 7.60 m and 1.02 m, respectively. The respective rotational speeds are 450 rev/min
and 4 138 rev/min. Calculate the speeds of the tips of
both rotors. Compare these speeds with the speed of
sound, 343 m/s.
A
Figure P10.12
(Ross Harrrison Koty/Tony Stone Images)
13. A racing car travels on a circular track with a radius of
250 m. If the car moves with a constant linear speed of
45.0 m/s, nd (a) its angular speed and (b) the magnitude and direction of its acceleration.
14. A car is traveling at 36.0 km/h on a straight road. The
radius of its tires is 25.0 cm. Find the angular speed of
one of the tires, with its axle taken as the axis of rotation.
15. A wheel 2.00 m in diameter lies in a vertical plane
and rotates with a constant angular acceleration of
4.00 rad/s2. The wheel starts at rest at t 0, and the
radius vector of point P on the rim makes an angle of
57.3° with the horizontal at this time. At t 2.00 s, nd
(a) the angular speed of the wheel, (b) the linear speed
and acceleration of the point P, and (c) the angular
position of the point P.
16. A discus thrower accelerates a discus from rest to a
speed of 25.0 m/s by whirling it through 1.25 rev. As-
Figure P10.16
(Bruce Ayers/Tony Stone Images)
h = 5.00 m
P
R = 2.00 m
Figure P10.18
WEB
19. A disc 8.00 cm in radius rotates at a constant rate of
1 200 rev/min about its central axis. Determine (a) its
angular speed, (b) the linear speed at a point 3.00 cm
from its center, (c) the radial acceleration of a point on
the rim, and (d) the total distance a point on the rim
moves in 2.00 s.
20. A car traveling on a at (unbanked) circular track accelerates uniformly from rest with a tangential acceleration
of 1.70 m/s2. The car makes it one quarter of the way
around the circle before it skids off the track. Determine the coefcient of static friction between the car
and track from these data.
21. A small object with mass 4.00 kg moves counterclockwise with constant speed 4.50 m/s in a circle of radius
3.00 m centered at the origin. (a) It started at the point
with cartesian coordinates (3 m, 0). When its angular
displacement is 9.00 rad, what is its position vector, in
cartesian unit-vector notation? (b) In what quadrant is
the particle located, and what angle does its position
vector make with the positive x axis? (c) What is its velocity vector, in unit vector notation? (d) In what direction is it moving? Make a sketch of the position and velocity vectors. (e) What is its acceleration, expressed in
unit vector notation? (f) What total force acts on the
object? (Express your answer in unit vector notation.)
319
Problems
22. A standard cassette tape is placed in a standard cassette
player. Each side plays for 30 min. The two tape wheels
of the cassette t onto two spindles in the player. Suppose that a motor drives one spindle at a constant angular speed of 1 rad/s and that the other spindle is free
to rotate at any angular speed. Estimate the order of
magnitude of the thickness of the tape.
y(m)
3.00 kg
2.00 kg
6.00 m
x(m)
O
Section 10.4 Rotational Energy
23. Three small particles are connected by rigid rods of
negligible mass lying along the y axis (Fig. P10.23). If
the system rotates about the x axis with an angular
speed of 2.00 rad/s, nd (a) the moment of inertia
about the x axis and the total rotational kinetic energy
evaluated from 1I 2 and (b) the linear speed of each
2
particle and the total kinetic energy evaluated from
1
2
2 m iv i .
4.00 m
2.00 kg
4.00 kg
Figure P10.25
y
4.00 kg
y = 3.00 m
x
O
2.00 kg
3.00 kg
y = 2.00 m
y = 4.00 m
Figure P10.26
Figure P10.23
WEB
24. The center of mass of a pitched baseball (3.80-cm radius) moves at 38.0 m/s. The ball spins about an axis
through its center of mass with an angular speed of
125 rad/s. Calculate the ratio of the rotational energy
to the translational kinetic energy. Treat the ball as a
uniform sphere.
25. The four particles in Figure P10.25 are connected by
rigid rods of negligible mass. The origin is at the center
of the rectangle. If the system rotates in the xy plane
about the z axis with an angular speed of 6.00 rad/s, calculate (a) the moment of inertia of the system about
the z axis and (b) the rotational energy of the system.
26. The hour hand and the minute hand of Big Ben, the famous Parliament tower clock in London, are 2.70 m
long and 4.50 m long and have masses of 60.0 kg and
100 kg, respectively. Calculate the total rotational kinetic energy of the two hands about the axis of rotation.
(You may model the hands as long thin rods.)
Problems 26 and 74. ( John Lawrence/Tony Stone Images)
27. Two masses M and m are connected by a rigid rod of
length L and of negligible mass, as shown in Figure
P10.27. For an axis perpendicular to the rod, show
that the system has the minimum moment of inertia
when the axis passes through the center of mass. Show
that this moment of inertia is I
L2, where
mM/(m M ).
L
m
M
x
Lx
Figure P10.27
Section 10.5 Calculation of Moments of Inertia
28. Three identical thin rods, each of length L and mass m,
are welded perpendicular to each other, as shown in
Figure P10.28. The entire setup is rotated about an axis
320
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
31. Attention! About face! Compute an order-of-magnitude estimate for the moment of inertia of your body as you
stand tall and turn around a vertical axis passing
through the top of your head and the point halfway between your ankles. In your solution state the quantities
you measure or estimate and their values.
Section 10.6 Torque
32. Find the mass m needed to balance the 1 500-kg truck
on the incline shown in Figure P10.32. Assume all pulleys are frictionless and massless.
3r
Axis of
rotation
r
Figure P10.28
that passes through the end of one rod and is parallel to
another. Determine the moment of inertia of this
arrangement.
29. Figure P10.29 shows a side view of a car tire and its radial dimensions. The rubber tire has two sidewalls of
uniform thickness 0.635 cm and a tread wall of uniform
thickness 2.50 cm and width 20.0 cm. Suppose its density is uniform, with the value 1.10 103 kg/m3. Find
its moment of inertia about an axis through its center
perpendicular to the plane of the sidewalls.
m
1500 kg
θ = 45°
Sidewall
Figure P10.32
33.0 cm
WEB
16.5 cm
33. Find the net torque on the wheel in Figure P10.33
about the axle through O if a 10.0 cm and b
25.0 cm.
10.0 N
30.5 cm
30.0°
Tread
a
O
12.0 N
Figure P10.29
30. Use the parallel-axis theorem and Table 10.2 to nd the
moments of inertia of (a) a solid cylinder about an axis
parallel to the center-of-mass axis and passing through
the edge of the cylinder and (b) a solid sphere about an
axis tangent to its surface.
b
9.00 N
Figure P10.33
34. The shing pole in Figure P10.34 makes an angle of
20.0° with the horizontal. What is the torque exerted by
321
Problems
2.00 m
I, R
m1
20.0°
37.0°
20.0°
m2
100 N
θ
Figure P10.39
Figure P10.34
the sh about an axis perpendicular to the page and
passing through the shers hand?
35. The tires of a 1 500-kg car are 0.600 m in diameter, and
the coefcients of friction with the road surface are
0.800 and k 0.600. Assuming that the weight is
s
evenly distributed on the four wheels, calculate the
maximum torque that can be exerted by the engine on
a driving wheel such that the wheel does not spin. If you
wish, you may suppose that the car is at rest.
36. Suppose that the car in Problem 35 has a disk brake system. Each wheel is slowed by the frictional force between a single brake pad and the disk-shaped rotor. On
this particular car, the brake pad comes into contact
with the rotor at an average distance of 22.0 cm from
the axis. The coefcients of friction between the brake
pad and the disk are s 0.600 and k 0.500. Calculate the normal force that must be applied to the rotor
such that the car slows as quickly as possible.
Section 10.7 Relationship Between
Torque and Angular Acceleration
WEB
37. A model airplane having a mass of 0.750 kg is tethered
by a wire so that it ies in a circle 30.0 m in radius. The
airplane engine provides a net thrust of 0.800 N perpendicular to the tethering wire. (a) Find the torque
the net thrust produces about the center of the circle.
(b) Find the angular acceleration of the airplane when
it is in level ight. (c) Find the linear acceleration of
the airplane tangent to its ight path.
38. The combination of an applied force and a frictional
force produces a constant total torque of 36.0 N m on a
wheel rotating about a xed axis. The applied force acts
for 6.00 s; during this time the angular speed of the
wheel increases from 0 to 10.0 rad/s. The applied force
is then removed, and the wheel comes to rest in 60.0 s.
Find (a) the moment of inertia of the wheel, (b) the
magnitude of the frictional torque, and (c) the total
number of revolutions of the wheel.
39. A block of mass m1 2.00 kg and a block of mass m 2
6.00 kg are connected by a massless string over a pulley
in the shape of a disk having radius R 0.250 m and
mass M 10.0 kg. These blocks are allowed to move on
a xed block wedge of angle
30.0°, as shown in
Figure P10.39. The coefcient of kinetic friction for
both blocks is 0.360. Draw free-body diagrams of both
blocks and of the pulley. Determine (a) the acceleration
of the two blocks and (b) the tensions in the string on
both sides of the pulley.
40. A potters wheel a thick stone disk with a radius of
0.500 m and a mass of 100 kg is freely rotating at
50.0 rev/min. The potter can stop the wheel in 6.00 s by
pressing a wet rag against the rim and exerting a radially inward force of 70.0 N. Find the effective coefcient
of kinetic friction between the wheel and the rag.
41. A bicycle wheel has a diameter of 64.0 cm and a mass of
1.80 kg. Assume that the wheel is a hoop with all of its
mass concentrated on the outside radius. The bicycle is
placed on a stationary stand on rollers, and a resistive
force of 120 N is applied tangent to the rim of the tire.
(a) What force must be applied by a chain passing over
a 9.00-cm-diameter sprocket if the wheel is to attain an
acceleration of 4.50 rad/s2? (b) What force is required
if the chain shifts to a 5.60-cm-diameter sprocket?
Section 10.8 Work , Power, and
Energy in Rotational Motion
42. A cylindrical rod 24.0 cm long with a mass of 1.20 kg
and a radius of 1.50 cm has a ball with a diameter of
8.00 cm and a mass of 2.00 kg attached to one end. The
arrangement is originally vertical and stationary, with
the ball at the top. The apparatus is free to pivot about
the bottom end of the rod. (a) After it falls through 90°,
what is its rotational kinetic energy? (b) What is the angular speed of the rod and ball? (c) What is the linear
speed of the ball? (d) How does this compare with the
speed if the ball had fallen freely through the same distance of 28 cm?
43. A 15.0-kg mass and a 10.0-kg mass are suspended by a
pulley that has a radius of 10.0 cm and a mass of 3.00 kg
(Fig. P10.43). The cord has a negligible mass and
causes the pulley to rotate without slipping. The pulley
322
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
rotates without friction. The masses start from rest
3.00 m apart. Treating the pulley as a uniform disk, determine the speeds of the two masses as they pass each
other.
44. A mass m 1 and a mass m 2 are suspended by a pulley that
has a radius R and a mass M (see Fig. P10.43). The cord
has a negligible mass and causes the pulley to rotate
without slipping. The pulley rotates without friction.
The masses start from rest a distance d apart. Treating
the pulley as a uniform disk, determine the speeds of
the two masses as they pass each other.
m
Figure P10.47
M
R
M = 3.00 kg
R = 10.0 cm
m1 = 15.0 kg
m2 = 10.0 kg
m1
3.00 m
m2
Figure P10.43
v. Show that the moment of inertia I of the equipment
(including the turntable) is mr 2(2gh/v 2 1).
48. A bus is designed to draw its power from a rotating
ywheel that is brought up to its maximum rate of rotation (3 000 rev/min) by an electric motor. The ywheel
is a solid cylinder with a mass of 1 000 kg and a diameter of 1.00 m. If the bus requires an average power of
10.0 kW, how long does the ywheel rotate?
49. (a) A uniform, solid disk of radius R and mass M is free
to rotate on a frictionless pivot through a point on its
rim (Fig. P10.49). If the disk is released from rest in the
position shown by the blue circle, what is the speed of
its center of mass when the disk reaches the position indicated by the dashed circle? (b) What is the speed of
the lowest point on the disk in the dashed position?
(c) Repeat part (a), using a uniform hoop.
Problems 43 and 44.
45. A weight of 50.0 N is attached to the free end of a light
string wrapped around a reel with a radius of 0.250 m
and a mass of 3.00 kg. The reel is a solid disk, free to rotate in a vertical plane about the horizontal axis passing
through its center. The weight is released 6.00 m above
the oor. (a) Determine the tension in the string, the
acceleration of the mass, and the speed with which the
weight hits the oor. (b) Find the speed calculated in
part (a), using the principle of conservation of energy.
46. A constant torque of 25.0 N m is applied to a grindstone whose moment of inertia is 0.130 kg m2. Using
energy principles, nd the angular speed after the
grindstone has made 15.0 revolutions. (Neglect friction.)
47. This problem describes one experimental method of
determining the moment of inertia of an irregularly
shaped object such as the payload for a satellite. Figure
P10.47 shows a mass m suspended by a cord wound
around a spool of radius r, forming part of a turntable
supporting the object. When the mass is released from
rest, it descends through a distance h, acquiring a speed
Pivot
R
g
Figure P10.49
50. A horizontal 800-N merry-go-round is a solid disk of radius 1.50 m and is started from rest by a constant horizontal force of 50.0 N applied tangentially to the cylinder.
Find the kinetic energy of the solid cylinder after 3.00 s.
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
51. Toppling chimneys often break apart in mid-fall (Fig.
P10.51) because the mortar between the bricks cannot
323
Problems
withstand much shear stress. As the chimney begins to
fall, shear forces must act on the topmost sections to accelerate them tangentially so that they can keep up with
the rotation of the lower part of the stack. For simplicity, let us model the chimney as a uniform rod of length
pivoted at the lower end. The rod starts at rest in a
vertical position (with the frictionless pivot at the bottom) and falls over under the inuence of gravity. What
fraction of the length of the rod has a tangential acceleration greater than g sin , where is the angle the
chimney makes with the vertical?
exerts on the wheel. (a) How long does the wheel take
to reach its nal rotational speed of 1 200 rev/min?
(b) Through how many revolutions does it turn while
accelerating?
54. The density of the Earth, at any distance r from its center, is approximately
[14.2
11.6 r/R]
where R is the radius of the Earth. Show that this density
leads to a moment of inertia I 0.330MR 2 about an axis
through the center, where M is the mass of the Earth.
55. A 4.00-m length of light nylon cord is wound around a
uniform cylindrical spool of radius 0.500 m and mass
1.00 kg. The spool is mounted on a frictionless axle and
is initially at rest. The cord is pulled from the spool with
a constant acceleration of magnitude 2.50 m/s2.
(a) How much work has been done on the spool when
it reaches an angular speed of 8.00 rad/s? (b) Assuming
that there is enough cord on the spool, how long does it
take the spool to reach this angular speed? (c) Is there
enough cord on the spool?
56. A ywheel in the form of a heavy circular disk of diameter 0.600 m and mass 200 kg is mounted on a frictionless bearing. A motor connected to the ywheel accelerates it from rest to 1 000 rev/min. (a) What is the
moment of inertia of the ywheel? (b) How much work
is done on it during this acceleration? (c) When the angular speed reaches 1 000 rev/min, the motor is disengaged. A friction brake is used to slow the rotational
rate to 500 rev/min. How much energy is dissipated as
internal energy in the friction brake?
57. A shaft is turning at 65.0 rad/s at time zero. Thereafter,
its angular acceleration is given by
10 rad/s2
Figure P10.51
A building demolition site in Baltimore,
MD. At the left is a chimney, mostly concealed by the building,
that has broken apart on its way down. Compare with Figure
10.19. ( Jerry Wachter/Photo Researchers, Inc.)
52. Review Problem. A mixing beater consists of three
thin rods: Each is 10.0 cm long, diverges from a central
hub, and is separated from the others by 120°. All turn
in the same plane. A ball is attached to the end of each
rod. Each ball has a cross-sectional area of 4.00 cm2 and
is shaped so that it has a drag coefcient of 0.600. Calculate the power input required to spin the beater at
1 000 rev/min (a) in air and (b) in water.
53. A grinding wheel is in the form of a uniform solid disk
having a radius of 7.00 cm and a mass of 2.00 kg. It
starts from rest and accelerates uniformly under the action of the constant torque of 0.600 N m that the motor
10 3 kg/m3
5t rad/s3
where t is the elapsed time. (a) Find its angular speed at
t 3.00 s. (b) How far does it turn in these 3 s?
58. For any given rotational axis, the radius of gyration K of a
rigid body is dened by the expression K 2 I/M,
where M is the total mass of the body and I is its moment of inertia. Thus, the radius of gyration is equal to
the distance between an imaginary point mass M and
the axis of rotation such that I for the point mass about
that axis is the same as that for the rigid body. Find the
radius of gyration of (a) a solid disk of radius R, (b) a
uniform rod of length L, and (c) a solid sphere of radius R, all three of which are rotating about a central
axis.
59. A long, uniform rod of length L and mass M is pivoted
about a horizontal, frictionless pin passing through one
end. The rod is released from rest in a vertical position,
as shown in Figure P10.59. At the instant the rod is horizontal, nd (a) its angular speed, (b) the magnitude of
its angular acceleration, (c) the x and y components of
the acceleration of its center of mass, and (d) the components of the reaction force at the pivot.
324
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
y
A drop that breaks loose on the next turn rises a distance h 2 h1 above the tangent point. The height to
which the drops rise decreases because the angular
speed of the wheel decreases. From this information,
determine the magnitude of the average angular acceleration of the wheel.
L
Pivot
x
Figure P10.59
62. The top shown in Figure P10.62 has a moment of inertia
of 4.00 10 4 kg m2 and is initially at rest. It is free to
rotate about the stationary axis AA . A string, wrapped
around a peg along the axis of the top, is pulled in such
a manner that a constant tension of 5.57 N is maintained. If the string does not slip while it is unwound
from the peg, what is the angular speed of the top after
80.0 cm of string has been pulled off the peg?
A
h
F
A
Figure P10.62
Figure P10.60
Problems 60 and 61.
60. A bicycle is turned upside down while its owner repairs
a at tire. A friend spins the other wheel, of radius
0.381 m, and observes that drops of water y off tangentially. She measures the height reached by drops moving
vertically (Fig. P10.60). A drop that breaks loose from
the tire on one turn rises h 54.0 cm above the tangent point. A drop that breaks loose on the next turn
rises 51.0 cm above the tangent point. The height to
which the drops rise decreases because the angular
speed of the wheel decreases. From this information,
determine the magnitude of the average angular acceleration of the wheel.
61. A bicycle is turned upside down while its owner repairs
a at tire. A friend spins the other wheel of radius R
and observes that drops of water y off tangentially. She
measures the height reached by drops moving vertically
(see Fig. P10.60). A drop that breaks loose from the tire
on one turn rises a distance h1 above the tangent point.
63. A cord is wrapped around a pulley of mass m and of radius r. The free end of the cord is connected to a block
of mass M. The block starts from rest and then slides
down an incline that makes an angle with the horizontal. The coefcient of kinetic friction between block
and incline is . (a) Use energy methods to show that
the blocks speed as a function of displacement d down
the incline is
v
[4gdM(m
2M ) 1(sin
cos )]1/2
(b) Find the magnitude of the acceleration of the block
in terms of , m, M, g, and .
64. (a) What is the rotational energy of the Earth about its
spin axis? The radius of the Earth is 6 370 km, and its
mass is 5.98 1024 kg. Treat the Earth as a sphere of
moment of inertia 2MR 2. (b) The rotational energy of
5
the Earth is decreasing steadily because of tidal friction.
Estimate the change in one day, given that the rotational period increases by about 10 s each year.
65. The speed of a moving bullet can be determined by allowing the bullet to pass through two rotating paper
disks mounted a distance d apart on the same axle (Fig.
P10.65). From the angular displacement
of the two
325
Problems
θ = 31°
v
ω
d
Figure P10.65
66.
67.
68.
69.
bullet holes in the disks and the rotational speed of the
disks, we can determine the speed v of the bullet. Find
the bullet speed for the following data: d 80 cm,
900 rev/min, and
31.0°.
A wheel is formed from a hoop and n equally spaced
spokes extending from the center of the hoop to its
rim. The mass of the hoop is M, and the radius of the
hoop (and hence the length of each spoke) is R. The
mass of each spoke is m. Determine (a) the moment of
inertia of the wheel about an axis through its center
and perpendicular to the plane of the wheel and
(b) the moment of inertia of the wheel about an axis
through its rim and perpendicular to the plane of the
wheel.
A uniform, thin, solid door has a height of 2.20 m, a
width of 0.870 m, and a mass of 23.0 kg. Find its moment of inertia for rotation on its hinges. Are any of the
data unnecessary?
A uniform, hollow, cylindrical spool has inside radius
R/2, outside radius R , and mass M (Fig. P10.68). It is
mounted so that it rotates on a massless horizontal axle.
A mass m is connected to the end of a string wound
around the spool. The mass m falls from rest through a
distance y in time t. Show that the torque due to the
frictional forces between spool and axle is
R[m(g 2y/t 2) M(5y/4t 2)]
f
An electric motor can accelerate a Ferris wheel of
moment of inertia I 20 000 kg m2 from rest to
10.0 rev/min in 12.0 s. When the motor is turned off,
friction causes the wheel to slow down from 10.0 to
8.00 rev/min in 10.0 s. Determine (a) the torque generated by the motor to bring the wheel to 10.0 rev/min
and (b) the power that would be needed to maintain
this rotational speed.
70. The pulley shown in Figure P10.70 has radius R and
moment of inertia I. One end of the mass m is connected to a spring of force constant k, and the other
end is fastened to a cord wrapped around the pulley.
The pulley axle and the incline are frictionless. If the
pulley is wound counterclockwise so that the spring is
stretched a distance d from its unstretched position and
is then released from rest, nd (a) the angular speed of
the pulley when the spring is again unstretched and
(b) a numerical value for the angular speed at this
point if I 1.00 kg m2, R 0.300 m, k 50.0 N/m,
m 0.500 kg, d 0.200 m, and
37.0°.
R
m
k
θ
Figure P10.70
71. Two blocks, as shown in Figure P10.71, are connected
by a string of negligible mass passing over a pulley of radius 0.250 m and moment of inertia I. The block on the
frictionless incline is moving upward with a constant acceleration of 2.00 m/s2. (a) Determine T1 and T2 , the
tensions in the two parts of the string. (b) Find the moment of inertia of the pulley.
72. A common demonstration, illustrated in Figure P10.72,
consists of a ball resting at one end of a uniform board
2.00 m/s2
M
T1
T2
15.0 kg
m1
m
m 2 20.0 kg
R/2
R/2
y
Figure P10.68
37.0°
Figure P10.71
326
CHAPTER 10
Rotation of a Rigid Object About a Fixed Axis
of length , hinged at the other end, and elevated at an
angle . A light cup is attached to the board at rc so that
it will catch the ball when the support stick is suddenly
Cup
rc
this limiting angle and the cup is placed at
rc
θ
Hinged end
Figure P10.72
removed. (a) Show that the ball will lag behind the
falling board when is less than 35.3° ; and that (b) the
ball will fall into the cup when the board is supported at
3 cos
(c) If a ball is at the end of a 1.00-m stick at this critical
angle, show that the cup must be 18.4 cm from the moving end.
73. As a result of friction, the angular speed of a wheel
changes with time according to the relationship
d /dt
Support
stick
2
0e
t
where 0 and are constants. The angular speed
changes from 3.50 rad/s at t 0 to 2.00 rad/s at
t 9.30 s. Use this information to determine and 0 .
Then, determine (a) the magnitude of the angular acceleration at t 3.00 s, (b) the number of revolutions
the wheel makes in the rst 2.50 s, and (c) the number
of revolutions it makes before coming to rest.
74. The hour hand and the minute hand of Big Ben, the famous Parliament tower clock in London, are 2.70 m
long and 4.50 m long and have masses of 60.0 kg and
100 kg, respectively (see Fig. P10.26). (a) Determine
the total torque due to the weight of these hands about
the axis of rotation when the time reads (i) 3:00,
(ii) 5:15, (iii) 6:00, (iv) 8:20, and (v) 9:45. (You may
model the hands as long thin rods.) (b) Determine all
times at which the total torque about the axis of rotation is zero. Determine the times to the nearest second,
solving a transcendental equation numerically.
ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
10.1 The fact that is negative indicates that we are dealing
with an object that is rotating in the clockwise direction.
We also know that when and are antiparallel,
must be decreasing the object is slowing down. Therefore, the object is spinning more and more slowly (with
less and less angular speed) in the clockwise, or negative, direction. This has a linear analogy to a sky diver
opening her parachute. The velocity is negative downward. When the sky diver opens the parachute, a large
upward force causes an upward acceleration. As a result,
the acceleration and velocity vectors are in opposite directions. Consequently, the parachutist slows down.
10.2 (a) Yes, all points on the wheel have the same angular
speed. This is why we use angular quantities to describe
rotational motion. (b) No, not all points on the wheel
have the same linear speed. (c) v 0, a 0.
(d) v R /2, a a r v 2/(R/2) R 2/2 ( at is zero
at all points because is constant).(e) v R , a R 2.
10.3 (a) I MR 2. (b) I MR 2. The moment of inertia of a
system of masses equidistant from an axis of rotation is
always the sum of the masses multiplied by the square of
the distance from the axis.
10.4 (b) Rotation about the axis through point P requires
more work. The moment of inertia of the hoop about
the center axis is I CM MR 2, whereas, by the parallelaxis theorem, the moment of inertia about the axis
through point P is IP I CM MR 2 MR 2 MR 2
2MR 2 .
PUZZLER
One of the most popular early bicycles
was the penny farthing, introduced in
1870. The bicycle was so named because
the size relationship of its two wheels
was about the same as the size relationship of the penny and the farthing, two
English coins. When the rider looks down
at the top of the front wheel, he sees it
moving forward faster than he and the
handlebars are moving. Yet the center of
the wheel does not appear to be moving
at all relative to the handlebars. How can
different parts of the rolling wheel move
at different linear speeds? (© Steve
Lovegrove/Tasmanian Photo Library)
chapter
Rolling Motion and Angular
Momentum
Chapter Outline
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Rolling Motion of a Rigid Object
The Vector Product and Torque
Angular Momentum of a Particle
Angular Momentum of a
Rotating Rigid Object
11.6 (Optional) The Motion of
Gyroscopes and Tops
11.7 (Optional) Angular Momentum
as a Fundamental Quantity
11.5 Conservation of Angular
Momentum
327
328
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
I
n the preceding chapter we learned how to treat a rigid body rotating about a
xed axis; in the present chapter, we move on to the more general case in
which the axis of rotation is not xed in space. We begin by describing such motion, which is called rolling motion. The central topic of this chapter is, however, angular momentum, a quantity that plays a key role in rotational dynamics. In analogy to the conservation of linear momentum, we nd that the angular momentum
of a rigid object is always conserved if no external torques act on the object. Like
the law of conservation of linear momentum, the law of conservation of angular
momentum is a fundamental law of physics, equally valid for relativistic and quantum systems.
11.1
7.7
ROLLING MOTION OF A RIGID OBJECT
In this section we treat the motion of a rigid object rotating about a moving axis.
In general, such motion is very complex. However, we can simplify matters by restricting our discussion to a homogeneous rigid object having a high degree of
symmetry, such as a cylinder, sphere, or hoop. Furthermore, we assume that the
object undergoes rolling motion along a at surface. We shall see that if an object
such as a cylinder rolls without slipping on the surface (we call this pure rolling motion), a simple relationship exists between its rotational and translational motions.
Suppose a cylinder is rolling on a straight path. As Figure 11.1 shows, the center of mass moves in a straight line, but a point on the rim moves in a more complex path called a cycloid. This means that the axis of rotation remains parallel to
its initial orientation in space. Consider a uniform cylinder of radius R rolling
without slipping on a horizontal surface (Fig. 11.2). As the cylinder rotates
through an angle , its center of mass moves a linear distance s R (see Eq.
10.1a). Therefore, the linear speed of the center of mass for pure rolling motion is
given by
v CM
ds
dt
R
d
dt
R
(11.1)
where is the angular velocity of the cylinder. Equation 11.1 holds whenever a
cylinder or sphere rolls without slipping and is the condition for pure rolling
Figure 11.1 One light source at the center of a rolling cylinder and another at one point on
the rim illustrate the different paths these two points take. The center moves in a straight line
(green line), whereas the point on the rim moves in the path called a cycloid (red curve). (Henry
Leap and Jim Lehman)
329
11.1 Rolling Motion of a Rigid Object
θ
R
s
Figure 11.2 In pure rolling motion, as the
cylinder rotates through an angle , its center
of mass moves a linear distance s R .
s = Rθ
motion. The magnitude of the linear acceleration of the center of mass for pure
rolling motion is
a CM
dv CM
dt
R
d
dt
R
(11.2)
where is the angular acceleration of the cylinder.
The linear velocities of the center of mass and of various points on and within
the cylinder are illustrated in Figure 11.3. A short time after the moment shown in
the drawing, the rim point labeled P will have rotated from the six oclock position
to, say, the seven oclock position, the point Q will have rotated from the ten
oclock position to the eleven oclock position, and so on. Note that the linear velocity of any point is in a direction perpendicular to the line from that point to the
contact point P. At any instant, the part of the rim that is at point P is at rest relative to the surface because slipping does not occur.
All points on the cylinder have the same angular speed. Therefore, because
the distance from P to P is twice the distance from P to the center of mass, P has
a speed 2v CM 2R . To see why this is so, let us model the rolling motion of the
cylinder in Figure 11.4 as a combination of translational (linear) motion and rotational motion. For the pure translational motion shown in Figure 11.4a, imagine
that the cylinder does not rotate, so that each point on it moves to the right with
speed v CM . For the pure rotational motion shown in Figure 11.4b, imagine that a
rotation axis through the center of mass is stationary, so that each point on the
cylinder has the same rotational speed . The combination of these two motions
represents the rolling motion shown in Figure 11.4c. Note in Figure 11.4c that the
top of the cylinder has linear speed v CM R
v CM v CM 2v CM , which is
greater than the linear speed of any other point on the cylinder. As noted earlier,
the center of mass moves with linear speed v CM while the contact point between
the surface and cylinder has a linear speed of zero.
We can express the total kinetic energy of the rolling cylinder as
7.2
K
1
2I P
2
(11.3)
where IP is the moment of inertia about a rotation axis through P. Applying the
parallel-axis theorem, we can substitute I P I CM MR 2 into Equation 11.3 to
obtain
K
1
2
2 I CM
1
22
2 MR
P
Q
2vCM
vCM
CM
P
Figure 11.3 All points on a
rolling object move in a direction
perpendicular to an axis through
the instantaneous point of contact
P. In other words, all points rotate
about P. The center of mass of the
object moves with a velocity vCM ,
and the point P moves with a velocity 2vCM .
330
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
P
P
v CM
v CM
CM
v=0
CM
v = Rω
v CM
P
(a) Pure translation
v = Rω
P
(b) Pure rotation
P
v = v CM + Rω = 2v CM
v = v CM
CM
v=0
P
(c) Combination of translation and rotation
Figure 11.4 The motion of a rolling object can be modeled as a combination of pure translation and pure rotation.
or, because v CM
R,
M
R
ω
x
h
θ
1
2
2 I CM
K
Total kinetic energy of a rolling
body
vCM
Figure 11.5 A sphere rolling
down an incline. Mechanical energy is conserved if no slipping
occurs.
1
2
2 Mv CM
(11.4)
The term 1 I CM 2 represents the rotational kinetic energy of the cylinder about its
2
center of mass, and the term 1Mv CM2 represents the kinetic energy the cylinder
2
would have if it were just translating through space without rotating. Thus, we can
say that the total kinetic energy of a rolling object is the sum of the rotational kinetic energy about the center of mass and the translational kinetic
energy of the center of mass.
We can use energy methods to treat a class of problems concerning the rolling
motion of a sphere down a rough incline. (The analysis that follows also applies to
the rolling motion of a cylinder or hoop.) We assume that the sphere in Figure
11.5 rolls without slipping and is released from rest at the top of the incline. Note
that accelerated rolling motion is possible only if a frictional force is present between the sphere and the incline to produce a net torque about the center of mass.
Despite the presence of friction, no loss of mechanical energy occurs because the
contact point is at rest relative to the surface at any instant. On the other hand, if
the sphere were to slip, mechanical energy would be lost as motion progressed.
Using the fact that v CM R for pure rolling motion, we can express Equation 11.4 as
2
v
1
2
K 1 I CM CM
2
2 Mv CM
R
K
1
2
I CM
R2
M v CM2
(11.5)
331
11.1 Rolling Motion of a Rigid Object
By the time the sphere reaches the bottom of the incline, work equal to Mgh has
been done on it by the gravitational eld, where h is the height of the incline. Because the sphere starts from rest at the top, its kinetic energy at the bottom, given
by Equation 11.5, must equal this work done. Therefore, the speed of the center of
mass at the bottom can be obtained by equating these two quantities:
I CM
R2
1
2
M v CM2
v CM
Mgh
1
2gh
I CM/MR 2
1/2
(11.6)
Quick Quiz 11.1
Imagine that you slide your textbook across a gymnasium oor with a certain initial speed.
It quickly stops moving because of friction between it and the oor. Yet, if you were to start
a basketball rolling with the same initial speed, it would probably keep rolling from one end
of the gym to the other. Why does a basketball roll so far? Doesnt friction affect its motion?
EXAMPLE 11.1
Sphere Rolling Down an Incline
For the solid sphere shown in Figure 11.5, calculate the linear
speed of the center of mass at the bottom of the incline and
the magnitude of the linear acceleration of the center of mass.
x sin . Hence, after squaring both sides, we can express the
equation above as
v CM2 170 gx sin
Solution
Comparing this with the expression from kinematics,
v CM2 2a CMx (see Eq. 2.12), we see that the acceleration of
the center of mass is
The sphere starts from the top of the incline
with potential energy U g Mgh and kinetic energy K 0. As
we have seen before, if it fell vertically from that height, it
would have a linear speed of !2gh at the moment before it hit
the oor. After rolling down the incline, the linear speed of
the center of mass must be less than this value because some
of the initial potential energy is diverted into rotational kinetic energy rather than all being converted into translational kinetic energy. For a uniform solid sphere, I CM
2
2
5 MR (see Table 10.2), and therefore Equation 11.6 gives
2gh
v CM
1
1/2
2/5MR 2
MR 2
10
gh
7
1/2
which is less than !2gh.
To calculate the linear acceleration of the center of mass,
we note that the vertical displacement is related to the displacement x along the incline through the relationship h
EXAMPLE 11.2
mass gives
5
7
g sin
These results are quite interesting in that both the speed
and the acceleration of the center of mass are independent of
the mass and the radius of the sphere! That is, all homogeneous solid spheres experience the same speed and acceleration on a given incline.
If we repeated the calculations for a hollow sphere, a solid
cylinder, or a hoop, we would obtain similar results in which
only the factor in front of g sin would differ. The constant
factors that appear in the expressions for v CM and a CM depend
only on the moment of inertia about the center of mass for the
specic body. In all cases, the acceleration of the center of
mass is less than g sin , the value the acceleration would have if
the incline were frictionless and no rolling occurred.
Another Look at the Rolling Sphere
In this example, let us use dynamic methods to verify the results of Example 11.1. The free-body diagram for the sphere
is illustrated in Figure 11.6.
Solution
a CM
Newtons second law applied to the center of
Fx
Mg sin
Fy
(1)
n
Mg cos
f
Ma CM
0
where x is measured along the slanted surface of the incline.
Now let us write an expression for the torque acting on
the sphere. A convenient axis to choose is the one that passes
332
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
y
clockwise direction,
n
x
CM
Because I CM
vCM
CM
2
2
5 MR
(2)
Mg sin θ
f
I CM
R
f
I CM
a CM/R, we obtain
2
2
5 MR
R
a CM
R
2
5 Ma CM
Substituting Equation (2) into Equation (1) gives
θ
Mg cos θ
and
fR
a CM
5
7g
sin
Mg
Figure 11.6
Free-body diagram for a solid sphere rolling down an
incline.
through the center of the sphere and is perpendicular to the
plane of the gure.1 Because n and M g go through the center of mass, they have zero moment arm about this axis and
thus do not contribute to the torque. However, the force of
static friction produces a torque about this axis equal to f R in
the clockwise direction; therefore, because is also in the
which agrees with the result of Example 11.1.
Note that F m a applies only if F is the net external
force exerted on the sphere and a is the acceleration of its
center of mass. In the case of our sphere rolling down an incline, even though the frictional force does not change the
total kinetic energy of the sphere, it does contribute to F
and thus decreases the acceleration of the center of mass. As
a result, the nal translational kinetic energy is less than it
would be in the absence of friction. As mentioned in Example 11.1, some of the initial potential energy is converted to
rotational kinetic energy.
QuickLab
Hold a basketball and a tennis ball
side by side at the top of a ramp and
release them at the same time. Which
reaches the bottom rst? Does the
outcome depend on the angle of the
ramp? What if the angle were 90°
(that is, if the balls were in free fall)?
Quick Quiz 11.2
Which gets to the bottom rst: a ball rolling without sliding down incline A or a box sliding
down a frictionless incline B having the same dimensions as incline A?
11.2
2.7
THE VECTOR PRODUCT AND TORQUE
Consider a force F acting on a rigid body at the vector position r (Fig. 11.7). The
origin O is assumed to be in an inertial frame, so Newtons rst law is valid
in this case. As we saw in Section 10.6, the magnitude of the torque due to this
force relative to the origin is, by denition, r F sin , where is the angle between
r and F. The axis about which F tends to produce rotation is perpendicular to the
plane formed by r and F. If the force lies in the xy plane, as it does in Figure 11.7,
the torque is represented by a vector parallel to the z axis. The force in Figure
11.7 creates a torque that tends to rotate the body counterclockwise about the z
axis; thus the direction of is toward increasing z, and is therefore in the positive
z direction. If we reversed the direction of F in Figure 11.7, then would be in the
negative z direction.
The torque involves the two vectors r and F, and its direction is perpendicular to the plane of r and F. We can establish a mathematical relationship between
, r, and F, using a new mathematical operation called the vector product, or
cross product:
r
Torque
1
F
(11.7)
Although a coordinate system whose origin is at the center of mass of a rolling object is not an inertial frame, the expression CM I still applies in the center-of-mass frame.
333
11.2 The Vector Product and Torque
z
We now give a formal denition of the vector product. Given any two vectors A
and B, the vector product A B is dened as a third vector C, the magnitude of
which is AB sin , where is the angle between A and B. That is, if C is given by
C
A
τ=r×F
(11.8)
B
then its magnitude is
(11.9)
AB sin
C
The quantity AB sin is equal to the area of the parallelogram formed by A and B,
as shown in Figure 11.8. The direction of C is perpendicular to the plane formed by
A and B, and the best way to determine this direction is to use the right-hand rule
illustrated in Figure 11.8. The four ngers of the right hand are pointed along A
and then wrapped into B through the angle . The direction of the erect right
thumb is the direction of A B C. Because of the notation, A B is often read
A cross B; hence, the term cross product.
Some properties of the vector product that follow from its denition are as
follows:
1. Unlike the scalar product, the vector product is not commutative. Instead, the
order in which the two vectors are multiplied in a cross product is important:
A
B
B
(B
C)
A
B
A
(11.11)
C
5. The derivative of the cross product with respect to some variable such as t is
d
(A
dt
B)
A
dB
dt
dA
dt
B
(11.12)
where it is important to preserve the multiplicative order of A and B, in view of
Equation 11.10.
It is left as an exercise to show from Equations 11.9 and 11.10 and from the
denition of unit vectors that the cross products of the rectangular unit vectors i,
Right-hand rule
C=A×B
A
θ
B
C = B × A
r
P
x
φ
Figure 11.7
Figure 11.8 The vector product
A B is a third vector C having a
magnitude AB sin equal to the area
of the parallelogram shown. The direction of C is perpendicular to the
plane formed by A and B, and this
direction is determined by the righthand rule.
F
The torque vector
lies in a direction perpendicular to
the plane formed by the position
vector r and the applied force vector F.
(11.10)
A
Therefore, if you change the order of the vectors in a cross product, you must
change the sign. You could easily verify this relationship with the right-hand
rule.
2. If A is parallel to B (
0° or 180°), then A B 0; therefore, it follows that
A A 0.
3. If A is perpendicular to B, then A B
AB.
4. The vector product obeys the distributive law:
A
y
O
Properties of the vector product
334
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
j, and k obey the following rules:
j
j
k
k
(11.13a)
i
i
i
j
j
i
k
(11.13b)
j
k
k
j
i
(11.13c)
k
Cross products of unit vectors
i
i
k
j
(11.13d)
0
Signs are interchangeable in cross products. For example, A ( B)
AB
and i ( j)
i j.
The cross product of any two vectors A and B can be expressed in the following determinant form:
A
B
i
Ax
Bx
jk
Ay Az
By Bz
i
Ay Az
By Bz
j
Ax Az
Bx Bz
k
Ax Ay
Bx By
Expanding these determinants gives the result
A
EXAMPLE 11.3
B
(Ay Bz
Using Equations 11.13a through 11.13d, we
obtain
A
B
(2i
2i
3j)
2j
(Ax Bz
Az Bx)j
Ay Bx)k
(Ax By
(11.14)
The Cross Product
Two vectors lying in the xy plane are given by the equations
A 2i 3 j and B
i 2j. Find A B and verify that
AB
B A.
Solution
Az By)i
(i
3j
2j)
( i)
4k
3k
7k
(We have omitted the terms containing i i and j j because, as Equation 11.13a shows, they are equal to zero.)
We can show that A B
B A, since
B
7.8
(i
2j)
(2i
i
3j
2j
3j)
2i
3k
4k
7k
Therefore, A B
B A.
As an alternative method for nding A B, we could use
Equation 11.14, with Ax 2, Ay 3, Az 0 and Bx
1,
By 2, Bz 0:
A
B
(0)i
(0)j
[(2)(2)
(3)( 1)]k
7k
Exercise
Use the results to this example and Equation 11.9
to nd the angle between A and B.
Answer
11.3
A
60.3°
A NGULAR MOMENTUM OF A PARTICLE
Imagine a rigid pole sticking up through the ice on a frozen pond (Fig. 11.9). A
skater glides rapidly toward the pole, aiming a little to the side so that she does not
hit it. As she approaches a point beside the pole, she reaches out and grabs the
pole, an action that whips her rapidly into a circular path around the pole. Just as
the idea of linear momentum helps us analyze translational motion, a rotational
analog angular momentum helps us describe this skater and other objects undergoing rotational motion.
To analyze the motion of the skater, we need to know her mass and her velocity, as well as her position relative to the pole. In more general terms, consider a
335
11.3 Angular Momentum of a Particle
particle of mass m located at the vector position r and moving with linear velocity v
(Fig. 11.10).
The instantaneous angular momentum L of the particle relative to the origin O
is dened as the cross product of the particles instantaneous position vector r
and its instantaneous linear momentum p:
L
r
(11.15)
p
Angular momentum of a particle
The SI unit of angular momentum is kg m2/s. It is important to note that both
the magnitude and the direction of L depend on the choice of origin. Following
the right-hand rule, note that the direction of L is perpendicular to the plane
formed by r and p. In Figure 11.10, r and p are in the xy plane, and so L points in
the z direction. Because p m v, the magnitude of L is
(11.16)
m vr sin
L
where is the angle between r and p. It follows that L is zero when r is parallel to
p(
0 or 180°). In other words, when the linear velocity of the particle is along
a line that passes through the origin, the particle has zero angular momentum
90°),
with respect to the origin. On the other hand, if r is perpendicular to p (
then L mvr. At that instant, the particle moves exactly as if it were on the rim of
a wheel rotating about the origin in a plane dened by r and p.
Quick Quiz 11.3
Recall the skater described at the beginning of this section. What would be her angular momentum relative to the pole if she were skating directly toward it?
Figure 11.9 As the skater passes
the pole, she grabs hold of it. This
causes her to swing around the
pole rapidly in a circular path.
In describing linear motion, we found that the net force on a particle equals the
time rate of change of its linear momentum, F d p/dt (see Eq. 9.3). We now
show that the net torque acting on a particle equals the time rate of change of its angular momentum. Let us start by writing the net torque on the particle in the form
r
F
dp
dt
r
z
L=r×p
(11.17)
O
Now let us differentiate Equation 11.15 with respect to time, using the rule given
by Equation 11.12:
dL
dt
d
(r
dt
p)
dp
dt
r
dr
dt
r
dp
dt
m
y
p
φ
x
p
Figure 11.10
Remember, it is important to adhere to the order of terms because A B
B A. The last term on the right in the above equation is zero because
v d r/dt is parallel to p m v (property 2 of the vector product). Therefore,
dL
dt
r
(11.18)
The angular momentum L of a particle of mass m
and linear momentum p located at
the vector position r is a vector
given by L r p. The value of L
depends on the origin about which
it is measured and is a vector perpendicular to both r and p.
Comparing Equations 11.17 and 11.18, we see that
dL
dt
(11.19)
The net torque equals time rate of
change of angular momentum
336
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
which is the rotational analog of Newtons second law, F d p/dt. Note that
torque causes the angular momentum L to change just as force causes linear momentum p to change. This rotational result, Equation 11.19, states that
the net torque acting on a particle is equal to the time rate of change of the
particles angular momentum.
and L are measured
It is important to note that Equation 11.19 is valid only if
about the same origin. (Of course, the same origin must be used in calculating all
of the torques.) Furthermore, the expression is valid for any origin xed in an
inertial frame.
Angular Momentum of a System of Particles
The total angular momentum of a system of particles about some point is dened
as the vector sum of the angular momenta of the individual particles:
L
L1
L2
Ln
Li
i
where the vector sum is over all n particles in the system.
Because individual angular momenta can change with time, so can the total
angular momentum. In fact, from Equations 11.18 and 11.19, we nd that the
time rate of change of the total angular momentum equals the vector sum of
all torques acting on the system, both those associated with internal forces
between particles and those associated with external forces. However, the net
torque associated with all internal forces is zero. To understand this, recall
that Newtons third law tells us that internal forces between particles of the system are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction. If we assume that these
forces lie along the line of separation of each pair of particles, then the torque
due to each action reaction force pair is zero. That is, the moment arm d from
O to the line of action of the forces is equal for both particles. In the summation, therefore, we see that the net internal torque vanishes. We conclude that
the total angular momentum of a system can vary with time only if a net external torque is acting on the system, so that we have
ext
i
d Li
dt
d
dt
Li
i
dL
dt
(11.20)
That is,
the time rate of change of the total angular momentum of a system about some
origin in an inertial frame equals the net external torque acting on the system
about that origin.
Note that Equation 11.20 is the rotational analog of Equation 9.38, Fext
for a system of particles.
d p /dt ,
337
11.4 Angular Momentum of a Rotating Rigid Object
EXAMPLE 11.4
Circular Motion
A particle moves in the xy plane in a circular path of radius r,
as shown in Figure 11.11. (a) Find the magnitude and direction of its angular momentum relative to O when its linear velocity is v.
though the direction of p m v keeps changing. You can visualize this by sliding the vector v in Figure 11.11 parallel to
itself until its tail meets the tail of r and by then applying the
right-hand rule. (You can use v to determine the direction of
L r p because the direction of p is the same as the direction of v.) Line up your ngers so that they point along r and
wrap your ngers into the vector v. Your thumb points upward and away from the page; this is the direction of L.
Hence, we can write the vector expression L (mvr ) k . If
the particle were to move clockwise, L would point downward and into the page.
Solution You might guess that because the linear momentum of the particle is always changing (in direction, not magnitude), the direction of the angular momentum must also
change. In this example, however, this is not the case. The
magnitude of L is given by
L
m vr sin 90°
(b) Find the magnitude and direction of L in terms of the
particles angular speed .
(for r perpendicular to v)
mvr
This value of L is constant because all three factors on the
right are constant. The direction of L also is constant, even
Solution Because v
we can express L as
r for a particle rotating in a circle,
y
L
v
m
x
Exercise
Answer
3.0
106 kg m2/s
ANGULAR MOMENTUM OF A
ROTATING RIGID OBJECT
Consider a rigid object rotating about a xed axis that coincides with the z axis of
a coordinate system, as shown in Figure 11.12. Let us determine the angular momentum of this object. Each particle of the object rotates in the xy plane about the
z axis with an angular speed . The magnitude of the angular momentum of a particle of mass mi about the origin O is m i vi ri . Because vi ri , we can express the
magnitude of the angular momentum of this particle as
Li
m ir i 2
The vector Li is directed along the z axis, as is the vector
I
A car of mass 1 500 kg moves with a linear speed
of 40 m/s on a circular race track of radius 50 m. What is the
magnitude of its angular momentum relative to the center of
the track?
Figure 11.11 A particle moving in a circle of radius r has an angular momentum about O that has magnitude mvr. The vector L r p
points out of the diagram.
11.4
mr 2
where I is the moment of inertia of the particle about the z
axis through O. Because the rotation is counterclockwise, the
direction of is along the z axis (see Section 10.1). The direction of L is the same as that of , and so we can write the
angular momentum as L I
I k.
r
O
m vr
.
338
CHAPTER 11
z
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
We can now nd the angular momentum (which in this situation has only a z
component) of the whole object by taking the sum of Li over all particles:
ω
m ir i 2
Lz
L
m ir i 2
i
Lz
r
vi
y
mi
(11.21)
I
where I is the moment of inertia of the object about the z axis.
Now let us differentiate Equation 11.21 with respect to time, noting that I is
constant for a rigid body:
x
dLz
dt
Figure 11.12
When a rigid body
rotates about an axis, the angular
momentum L is in the same direction as the angular velocity , according to the expression L I .
i
I
d
dt
(11.22)
I
where is the angular acceleration relative to the axis of rotation. Because dL z /dt
is equal to the net external torque (see Eq. 11.20), we can express Equation 11.22
as
ext
dLz
dt
(11.23)
I
That is, the net external torque acting on a rigid object rotating about a xed
axis equals the moment of inertia about the rotation axis multiplied by the objects angular acceleration relative to that axis.
Equation 11.23 also is valid for a rigid object rotating about a moving axis provided the moving axis (1) passes through the center of mass and (2) is a symmetry
axis.
You should note that if a symmetrical object rotates about a xed axis passing
through its center of mass, you can write Equation 11.21 in vector form as L I ,
where L is the total angular momentum of the object measured with respect to the
axis of rotation. Furthermore, the expression is valid for any object, regardless of
its symmetry, if L stands for the component of angular momentum along the axis
of rotation.2
EXAMPLE 11.5
Bowling Ball
Estimate the magnitude of the angular momentum of a bowling ball spinning at 10 rev/s, as shown in Figure 11.13.
Solution
We start by making some estimates of the relevant physical parameters and model the ball as a uniform
2
solid sphere. A typical bowling ball might have a mass of 6 kg
and a radius of 12 cm. The moment of inertia of a solid
sphere about an axis through its center is, from Table 10.2,
I
2
2
5 MR
2
5 (6
kg)(0.12 m)2
0.035 kg m2
Therefore, the magnitude of the angular momentum is
In general, the expression L I is not always valid. If a rigid object rotates about an arbitrary axis,
L and may point in different directions. In this case, the moment of inertia cannot be treated as a
scalar. Strictly speaking, L I applies only to rigid objects of any shape that rotate about one of three
mutually perpendicular axes (called principal axes ) through the center of mass. This is discussed in
more advanced texts on mechanics.
339
11.4 Angular Momentum of a Rotating Rigid Object
L
z
(0.035 kg m2)(10 rev/s)(2 rad/rev)
I
L
2.2 kg m2/s
Because of the roughness of our estimates, we probably want
2 kg m2/s.
to keep only one signicant gure, and so L
y
Figure 11.13 A bowling ball that rotates about the z axis in the direction shown has an angular momentum L in the positive z direction. If the direction of rotation is reversed, L points in the negative
z direction.
EXAMPLE 11.6
x
Rotating Rod
y
A rigid rod of mass M and length is pivoted without friction
at its center (Fig. 11.14). Two particles of masses m 1 and m 2
are connected to its ends. The combination rotates in a vertical plane with an angular speed . (a) Find an expression for
the magnitude of the angular momentum of the system.
m2
θ
O
Solution
This is different from the last example in that we
now must account for the motion of more than one object.
The moment of inertia of the system equals the sum of the
moments of inertia of the three components: the rod and the
two particles. Referring to Table 10.2 to obtain the expression
for the moment of inertia of the rod, and using the expression I mr 2 for each particle, we nd that the total moment
of inertia about the z axis through O is
I
1
M
12
2
4
2
2
m1
M
3
m1
2
m2
2
2
2
I
4
m1
2
cos
m 1g
Figure 11.14 Because gravitational forces act on the rotating rod,
there is in general a net nonzero torque about O when m 1 m 2 . This
net torque produces an angular acceleration given by
ext I.
The torque due to the force m 2 g about the pivot is
m 2g
m2
2
cos
(
2
into page)
Hence, the net torque exerted on the system about O is
Solution If the masses of the two particles are equal, then
the system has no angular acceleration because the net
torque on the system is zero when m 1 m 2 . If the initial angle is exactly /2 or
/2 (vertical position), then the rod
will be in equilibrium. To nd the angular acceleration of the
system at any angle , we rst calculate the net torque on the
system and then use ext I to obtain an expression for .
The torque due to the force m 1 g about the pivot is
m 1g
m1
2
M
3
(b) Find an expression for the magnitude of the angular
acceleration of the system when the rod makes an angle
with the horizontal.
1
m 2g
m2
Therefore, the magnitude of the angular momentum is
L
x
(
1
out of page)
ext
1
2
1
2 (m 1
m 2)g cos
is out of the page if m1 m 2 and is
m1 .
I , where I was obtained in part (a):
ext
The direction of
into the page if m 2
To nd , we use
ext
ext
I
2(m 1
(M/3
m 2)g cos
m 2)
m1
/2 (vertical position)
Note that is zero when is /2 or
and is a maximum when is 0 or ( horizontal position).
Exercise
Answer
If m 2
m 1, at what value of
/2.
is
a maximum?
340
CHAPTER 11
EXAMPLE 11.7
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
Two Connected Masses
A sphere of mass m 1 and a block of mass m 2 are connected by
a light cord that passes over a pulley, as shown in Figure
11.15. The radius of the pulley is R, and the moment of inertia about its axle is I. The block slides on a frictionless, horizontal surface. Find an expression for the linear acceleration
of the two objects, using the concepts of angular momentum
and torque.
Solution We need to determine the angular momentum
of the system, which consists of the two objects and the pulley. Let us calculate the angular momentum about an axis
that coincides with the axle of the pulley.
At the instant the sphere and block have a common speed
v, the angular momentum of the sphere is m 1 vR , and that of
the block is m 2 vR . At the same instant, the angular momentum of the pulley is I
Iv/R. Hence, the total angular momentum of the system is
(1)
L
m 1vR
m 2vR
I
v
R
v
Now let us evaluate the total external torque acting on the
system about the pulley axle. Because it has a moment arm of
zero, the force exerted by the axle on the pulley does not
contribute to the torque. Furthermore, the normal force acting on the block is balanced by the force of gravity m 2 g, and
so these forces do not contribute to the torque. The force of
gravity m 1 g acting on the sphere produces a torque about the
axle equal in magnitude to m 1 gR, where R is the moment
arm of the force about the axle. (Note that in this situation,
the tension is not equal to m 1 g.) This is the total external
torque about the pulley axle; that is, ext m 1 gR. Using this
result, together with Equation (1) and Equation 11.23, we
nd
m 1gR
Because dv/dt
m2
m1
Figure 11.15
11.5
7.9
Conservation of angular
momentum
d
(m 1
dt
m 1gR
(2)
(m 1
m 2)Rv
m 2)R
I
dv
dt
v
R
I dv
R dt
a, we can solve this for a to obtain
a
R
v
dL
dt
ext
(m 1
m 1g
m 2)
I/R 2
You may wonder why we did not include the forces that the
cord exerts on the objects in evaluating the net torque about
the axle. The reason is that these forces are internal to the
system under consideration, and we analyzed the system as a
whole. Only external torques contribute to the change in the
systems angular momentum.
CONSERVATION OF ANGULAR MOMENTUM
In Chapter 9 we found that the total linear momentum of a system of particles remains constant when the resultant external force acting on the system is zero. We
have an analogous conservation law in rotational motion:
The total angular momentum of a system is constant in both magnitude and direction if the resultant external torque acting on the system is zero.
This follows directly from Equation 11.20, which indicates that if
ext
dL
dt
(11.24)
0
then
L
(11.25)
constant
For a system of particles, we write this conservation law as
the index n denotes the n th particle in the system.
Ln
constant, where
341
11.5 Conservation of Angular Momentum
If the mass of an object undergoes redistribution in some way, then the objects moment of inertia changes; hence, its angular speed must change because
L I . In this case we express the conservation of angular momentum in the form
Li
Lf
constant
(11.26)
If the system is an object rotating about a xed axis, such as the z axis, we can
write Lz I , where Lz is the component of L along the axis of rotation and I is
the moment of inertia about this axis. In this case, we can express the conservation
of angular momentum as
Ii
If
i
f
constant
(11.27)
This expression is valid both for rotation about a xed axis and for rotation about
an axis through the center of mass of a moving system as long as that axis remains
parallel to itself. We require only that the net external torque be zero.
Although we do not prove it here, there is an important theorem concerning
the angular momentum of an object relative to the objects center of mass:
The resultant torque acting on an object about an axis through the center of
mass equals the time rate of change of angular momentum regardless of the
motion of the center of mass.
This theorem applies even if the center of mass is accelerating, provided and L
are evaluated relative to the center of mass.
In Equation 11.26 we have a third conservation law to add to our list. We can
now state that the energy, linear momentum, and angular momentum of an isolated system all remain constant:
Ui
Kf
pi
pf
Li
Ki
Uf
Lf
For an isolated system
There are many examples that demonstrate conservation of angular momentum. You may have observed a gure skater spinning in the nale of a program.
The angular speed of the skater increases when the skater pulls his hands and feet
close to his body, thereby decreasing I. Neglecting friction between skates and ice,
no external torques act on the skater. The change in angular speed is due to the
fact that, because angular momentum is conserved, the product I remains constant, and a decrease in the moment of inertia of the skater causes an increase in
the angular speed. Similarly, when divers or acrobats wish to make several somersaults, they pull their hands and feet close to their bodies to rotate at a higher rate.
In these cases, the external force due to gravity acts through the center of mass
and hence exerts no torque about this point. Therefore, the angular momentum
about the center of mass must be conserved that is, I i i I f f . For example,
when divers wish to double their angular speed, they must reduce their moment of
inertia to one-half its initial value.
Quick Quiz 11.4
A particle moves in a straight line, and you are told that the net torque acting on it is zero
about some unspecied point. Decide whether the following statements are true or false:
(a) The net force on the particle must be zero. (b) The particles velocity must be constant.
Angular momentum is conserved
as gure skater Todd Eldredge
pulls his arms toward his body.
(© 1998 David Madison)
342
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
A color-enhanced, infrared image of Hurricane Mitch, which devastated large areas of Honduras
and Nicaragua in October 1998. The spiral, nonrigid mass of air undergoes rotation and has angular momentum. (Courtesy of NOAA)
EXAMPLE 11.8
Formation of a Neutron Star
A star rotates with a period of 30 days about an axis through
its center. After the star undergoes a supernova explosion,
the stellar core, which had a radius of 1.0 104 km, collapses
into a neutron star of radius 3.0 km. Determine the period of
rotation of the neutron star.
Solution
The same physics that makes a skater spin faster
with his arms pulled in describes the motion of the neutron
star. Let us assume that during the collapse of the stellar core,
(1) no torque acts on it, (2) it remains spherical, and (3) its
mass remains constant. Also, let us use the symbol T for the
period, with Ti being the initial period of the star and Tf being the period of the neutron star. The period is the length
EXAMPLE 11.9
of time a point on the stars equator takes to make one complete circle around the axis of rotation. The angular speed of
a star is given by
2 /T. Therefore, because I is proportional to r 2, Equation 11.27 gives
Tf
Ti
rf
ri
2
3.0 km
1.0 10 4 km
(30 days)
2.7
10
6
days
2
0.23 s
Thus, the neutron star rotates about four times each second;
this result is approximately the same as that for a spinning
gure skater.
The Merry-Go-Round
A horizontal platform in the shape of a circular disk rotates
in a horizontal plane about a frictionless vertical axle (Fig.
11.16). The platform has a mass M 100 kg and a radius
R 2.0 m. A student whose mass is m 60 kg walks slowly
from the rim of the disk toward its center. If the angular
speed of the system is 2.0 rad/s when the student is at the
rim, what is the angular speed when he has reached a point
r
0.50 m from the center?
Solution The speed change here is similar to the increase
in angular speed of the spinning skater when he pulls his
arms inward. Let us denote the moment of inertia of the platform as Ip and that of the student as Is . Treating the student
as a point mass, we can write the initial moment of inertia I i
of the system (student plus platform) about the axis of rotation:
I i I pi I si 1MR 2 mR 2
2
343
11.5 Conservation of Angular Momentum
When the student has walked to the position r
ment of inertia of the system reduces to
If
m
1
2
2 MR
I sf
mr 2
Note that we still use the greater radius R when calculating Ipf
because the radius of the platform has not changed. Because
no external torques act on the system about the axis of rotation,
we can apply the law of conservation of angular momentum:
Ii
1
2
2 MR
M
I pf
R, the mo-
i
If
i
(1MR 2
2
mR 2
f
mr 2)
f
f
R
1
2
2 MR
1
2
2 MR
200
200
f
mR 2
i
mr 2
240
(2.0 rad/s)
15
4.1 rad/s
As expected, the angular speed has increased.
Figure 11.16
As the student walks toward the center of the rotating platform, the angular speed of the system increases because the
angular momentum must remain constant.
Exercise Calculate the initial and nal rotational energies
of the system.
Answer
Ki
880 J; K f
1.8
10 3 J.
Quick Quiz 11.5
Note that the rotational energy of the system described in Example 11.9 increases. What accounts for this increase in energy?
EXAMPLE 11.10
The Spinning Bicycle Wheel
In a favorite classroom demonstration, a student holds the
axle of a spinning bicycle wheel while seated on a stool that is
free to rotate (Fig. 11.17). The student and stool are initially
at rest while the wheel is spinning in a horizontal plane with
an initial angular momentum Li that points upward. When
the wheel is inverted about its center by 180°, the student and
Li
stool start rotating. In terms of Li , what are the magnitude
and the direction of L for the student plus stool?
Solution The system consists of the student, the wheel,
and the stool. Initially, the total angular momentum of the
system Li comes entirely from the spinning wheel. As the
wheel is inverted, the student applies a torque to the wheel,
but this torque is internal to the system. No external torque is
acting on the system about the vertical axis. Therefore, the
angular momentum of the system is conserved. Initially, we
have
L system
Li
L wheel
(upward)
After the wheel is inverted, we have Linverted wheel
L i . For
angular momentum to be conserved, some other part of the
system has to start rotating so that the total angular momentum remains the initial angular momentum L i . That other
part of the system is the student plus the stool she is sitting
on. So, we can now state that
Lf
Figure 11.17 The wheel is initially spinning when the student is
at rest. What happens when the wheel is inverted?
L student
stool
Li
L student
2L i
stool
Li
344
CHAPTER 11
EXAMPLE 11.11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
Disk and Stick
A 2.0-kg disk traveling at 3.0 m/s strikes a 1.0-kg stick that is
lying at on nearly frictionless ice, as shown in Figure 11.18.
Assume that the collision is elastic. Find the translational
speed of the disk, the translational speed of the stick, and the
rotational speed of the stick after the collision. The moment
of inertia of the stick about its center of mass is 1.33 kg m2.
We used the fact that radians are dimensionless to ensure
consistent units for each term.
Finally, the elastic nature of the collision reminds us that
kinetic energy is conserved; in this case, the kinetic energy
consists of translational and rotational forms:
Ki
1
2
2 m dv di
Solution
Because the disk and stick form an isolated system, we can assume that total energy, linear momentum, and
angular momentum are all conserved. We have three unknowns, and so we need three equations to solve simultaneously. The rst comes from the law of the conservation of linear momentum:
pi pf
m dv di
(2.0 kg)(3.0 m/s)
(1)
6.0 kg m/s
(2.0 kg)v d f
m dv d f
m sv s
(1.0 kg)v s
(2.0 kg)v d f
(1.0 kg)v s
Now we apply the law of conservation of angular momentum, using the initial position of the center of the stick as our
reference point. We know that the component of angular momentum of the disk along the axis perpendicular to the plane
of the ice is negative (the right-hand rule shows that Ld points
into the ice).
Li Lf
rm dv di
(2.0 m)(2.0 kg)(3.0 m/s)
rm dv d f
I
1
2 (2.0
kg)(3.0 m/s)2
54 m2/s2
(3)
Kf
1
1
1
2
2
2
2 m dv d f
2 m sv s
2I
1
1
2
2
2 (2.0 kg)v d f
2 (1.0 kg)v s
1
2
2
2 (1.33 kg m /s)
6.0v d f 2
3.0v s2
(4.0 m2)
In solving Equations (1), (2), and (3) simultaneously, we nd
that vd f 2.3 m/s, vs 1.3 m/s, and
2.0 rad/s. These
values seem reasonable. The disk is moving more slowly than it
was before the collision, and the stick has a small translational
speed. Table 11.1 summarizes the initial and nal values of variables for the disk and the stick and veries the conservation of
linear momentum, angular momentum, and kinetic energy.
Exercise
Verify the values in Table 11.1.
Before
After
vdi = 3.0 m/s
vdf
2.0 m
ω
(2.0 m)(2.0 kg)v d f
vs
(1.33 kg m2)
12 kg m2/s
(4.0 kg m)v d f
(1.33 kg m2)
(2)
9.0 rad/s
2
(3.0 rad/m)v d f
Figure 11.18
Overhead view of a disk striking a stick in an elastic
collision, which causes the stick to rotate.
TABLE 11.1 Comparison of Values in Example 11.11 Before and
After the Collisiona
v (m/s)
(rad/s)
p (kg m/s)
L (kg m2/s)
Ktrans
( J)
Krot
( J)
Before
Disk
Stick
Total
3.0
0
0
6.0
0
6.0
12
0
12
9.0
0
9.0
0
0
After
Disk
Stick
Total
2.3
1.3
2.0
4.7
1.3
6.0
9.3
2.7
12
5.4
0.9
6.3
2.7
2.7
a Notice
that linear momentum, angular momentum, and total kinetic energy are conserved.
345
11.6 The Motion of Gyroscopes and Tops
Optional Section
11.6
THE MOTION OF GYROSCOPES AND TOPS
A very unusual and fascinating type of motion you probably have observed is that
of a top spinning about its axis of symmetry, as shown in Figure 11.19a. If the top
spins very rapidly, the axis rotates about the z axis, sweeping out a cone (see Fig.
11.19b). The motion of the axis about the vertical known as precessional motion is usually slow relative to the spin motion of the top.
It is quite natural to wonder why the top does not fall over. Because the center
of mass is not directly above the pivot point O, a net torque is clearly acting on the
top about O a torque resulting from the force of gravity M g. The top would certainly fall over if it were not spinning. Because it is spinning, however, it has an angular momentum L directed along its symmetry axis. As we shall show, the motion
of this symmetry axis about the z axis (the precessional motion) occurs because
the torque produces a change in the direction of the symmetry axis. This is an
excellent example of the importance of the directional nature of angular
momentum.
The two forces acting on the top are the downward force of gravity M g and
the normal force n acting upward at the pivot point O. The normal force produces
no torque about the pivot because its moment arm through that point is zero.
However, the force of gravity produces a torque
r M g about O, where the
direction of is perpendicular to the plane formed by r and M g. By necessity, the
vector lies in a horizontal xy plane perpendicular to the angular momentum vector. The net torque and angular momentum of the top are related through Equation 11.19:
dL
dt
From this expression, we see that the nonzero torque produces a change in angular momentum d L a change that is in the same direction as . Therefore, like
the torque vector, d L must also be at right angles to L. Figure 11.19b illustrates the
resulting precessional motion of the symmetry axis of the top. In a time t , the
change in angular momentum is L L f L i
t. Because L is perpendicular to L, the magnitude of L does not change ( L i
L f ). Rather, what is changing is the direction of L. Because the change in angular momentum L is in the direction of , which lies in the xy plane, the top undergoes precessional motion.
The essential features of precessional motion can be illustrated by considering
the simple gyroscope shown in Figure 11.20a. This device consists of a wheel free
to spin about an axle that is pivoted at a distance h from the center of mass of the
wheel. When given an angular velocity about the axle, the wheel has an angular
momentum L I directed along the axle as shown. Let us consider the torque
acting on the wheel about the pivot O. Again, the force n exerted by the support
on the axle produces no torque about O, and the force of gravity M g produces a
torque of magnitude Mgh about O, where the axle is perpendicular to the support.
The direction of this torque is perpendicular to the axle (and perpendicular to L),
as shown in Figure 11.20a. This torque causes the angular momentum to change
in the direction perpendicular to the axle. Hence, the axle moves in the direction
of the torque that is, in the horizontal plane.
To simplify the description of the system, we must make an assumption: The
total angular momentum of the precessing wheel is the sum of the angular momentum I due to the spinning and the angular momentum due to the motion of
Precessional motion
z
L
CM
(a)
n
r
Mg
y
O
τ
x
L
Li
Figure 11.19
Lf
(b)
Precessional motion of a top spinning about its
symmetry axis. (a) The only external forces acting on the top are the
normal force n and the force of
gravity M g. The direction of the
angular momentum L is along the
axis of symmetry. The right-hand
rF
rule indicates that
r M g is in the xy plane. (b). The
direction of L is parallel to that of
in part (a). The fact that Lf
L L i indicates that the top precesses about the z axis.
346
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
h
n
O
τ
Li
τ
Lf
Li
Mg
dφ
Lf
dL
(a)
(b)
Figure 11.20 (a) The motion of a simple gyroscope pivoted a distance h from its center of
mass. The force of gravity M g produces a torque about the pivot, and this torque is perpendicular to the axle. (b) This torque results in a change in angular momentum d L in a direction perpendicular to the axle. The axle sweeps out an angle d in a time dt.
L
r
Mg
n
This toy gyroscope undergoes precessional motion about the vertical axis as it spins about its axis
of symmetry. The only forces acting on it are the force of gravity M g and the upward force of the
pivot n. The direction of its angular momentum L is along the axis of symmetry. The torque and
L are directed into the page. (Courtesy of Central Scientic Company)
the center of mass about the pivot. In our treatment, we shall neglect the contribution from the center-of-mass motion and take the total angular momentum to be
just I . In practice, this is a good approximation if is made very large.
In a time dt, the torque due to the gravitational force changes the angular momentum of the system by d L
dt . When added vectorially to the original total
347
11.7 Angular Momentum as a Fundamental Quantity
angular momentum I , this additional angular momentum causes a shift in the direction of the total angular momentum.
The vector diagram in Figure 11.20b shows that in the time dt, the angular
momentum vector rotates through an angle d , which is also the angle through
which the axle rotates. From the vector triangle formed by the vectors Li , Lf , and
d L, we see that
(Mgh)dt
dL
sin (d ) d
L
L
where we have used the fact that, for small values of any angle , sin
. Dividing through by dt and using the relationship L I , we nd that the rate at which
the axle rotates about the vertical axis is
p
d
dt
Mgh
(11.28)
I
The angular speed p is called the precessional frequency. This result is valid
only when p V . Otherwise, a much more complicated motion is involved. As
you can see from Equation 11.28, the condition p V is met when I is great
compared with Mgh. Furthermore, note that the precessional frequency decreases
as increases that is, as the wheel spins faster about its axis of symmetry.
Precessional frequency
Quick Quiz 11.6
How much work is done by the force of gravity when a top precesses through one complete
circle?
Optional Section
11.7
ANGULAR MOMENTUM AS A
FUNDAMENTAL QUANTITY
We have seen that the concept of angular momentum is very useful for describing the
motion of macroscopic systems. However, the concept also is valid on a submicroscopic scale and has been used extensively in the development of modern theories of
atomic, molecular, and nuclear physics. In these developments, it was found that the
angular momentum of a system is a fundamental quantity. The word fundamental in
this context implies that angular momentum is an intrinsic property of atoms, molecules, and their constituents, a property that is a part of their very nature.
To explain the results of a variety of experiments on atomic and molecular systems, we rely on the fact that the angular momentum has discrete values. These
discrete values are multiples of the fundamental unit of angular momentum
h/2 , where h is called Plancks constant:
Fundamental unit of angular momentum
1.054
10
34
kg m2/s
I CM
or
I CM
ω
m
Let us accept this postulate without proof for the time being and show how it
can be used to estimate the angular speed of a diatomic molecule. Consider the
O2 molecule as a rigid rotor, that is, two atoms separated by a xed distance d and
rotating about the center of mass (Fig. 11.21). Equating the angular momentum
to the fundamental unit , we can estimate the lowest angular speed:
d
m
CM
Figure 11.21
The rigid-rotor
model of a diatomic molecule. The
rotation occurs about the center of
mass in the plane of the page.
348
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
In Example 10.3, we found that the moment of inertia of the O2 molecule
about this axis of rotation is 1.95 10 46 kg m2. Therefore,
I CM
1.054
1.95
34
10
10
46
kg m2/s
kg m2
5.41
10 11 rad/s
Actual angular speeds are multiples of this smallest possible value.
This simple example shows that certain classical concepts and models, when
properly modied, might be useful in describing some features of atomic and molecular systems. A wide variety of phenomena on the submicroscopic scale can be
explained only if we assume discrete values of the angular momentum associated
with a particular type of motion.
The Danish physicist Niels Bohr (1885 1962) accepted and adopted this radical idea of discrete angular momentum values in developing his theory of the hydrogen atom. Strictly classical models were unsuccessful in describing many properties of the hydrogen atom. Bohr postulated that the electron could occupy only
those circular orbits about the proton for which the orbital angular momentum
was equal to n , where n is an integer. That is, he made the bold assumption that
orbital angular momentum is quantized. From this simple model, the rotational
frequencies of the electron in the various orbits can be estimated (see Problem 43).
SUMMARY
The total kinetic energy of a rigid object rolling on a rough surface without slipping equals the rotational kinetic energy about its center of mass, 1 I CM 2, plus the
2
1
translational kinetic energy of the center of mass, 2 Mv CM2:
K
The torque
to be
1
2
2 I CM
1
2
2 Mv CM
(11.4)
due to a force F about an origin in an inertial frame is dened
r
F
Given two vectors A and B, the cross product A
magnitude
AB sin
C
(11.7)
B is a vector C having a
(11.9)
where is the angle between A and B. The direction of the vector C A B is
perpendicular to the plane formed by A and B, and this direction is determined
by the right-hand rule.
The angular momentum L of a particle having linear momentum p m v is
L
r
p
(11.15)
where r is the vector position of the particle relative to an origin in an inertial
frame.
The net external torque acting on a particle or rigid object is equal to the
time rate of change of its angular momentum:
dL
dt
ext
(11.20)
The z component of angular momentum of a rigid object rotating about a
xed z axis is
Lz
I
(11.21)
349
Questions
where I is the moment of inertia of the object about the axis of rotation and is
its angular speed.
The net external torque acting on a rigid object equals the product of its moment of inertia about the axis of rotation and its angular acceleration:
ext
I
(11.23)
If the net external torque acting on a system is zero, then the total angular
momentum of the system is constant. Applying this law of conservation of angular momentum to a system whose moment of inertia changes gives
Ii
i
If
f
constant
(11.27)
QUESTIONS
1. Is it possible to calculate the torque acting on a rigid body
without specifying a center of rotation? Is the torque independent of the location of the center of rotation?
2. Is the triple product dened by A (B C) a scalar or a
vector quantity? Explain why the operation (A B) C
has no meaning.
3. In some motorcycle races, the riders drive over small hills,
and the motorcycles become airborne for a short time. If
a motorcycle racer keeps the throttle open while leaving
the hill and going into the air, the motorcycle tends to
nose upward. Why does this happen?
4. If the torque acting on a particle about a certain origin is
zero, what can you say about its angular momentum
about that origin?
5. Suppose that the velocity vector of a particle is completely
specied. What can you conclude about the direction of
its angular momentum vector with respect to the direction of motion?
6. If a single force acts on an object, and the torque caused
by that force is nonzero about some point, is there any
other point about which the torque is zero?
7. If a system of particles is in motion, is it possible for the
total angular momentum to be zero about some origin?
Explain.
8. A ball is thrown in such a way that it does not spin about
its own axis. Does this mean that the angular momentum
is zero about an arbitrary origin? Explain.
9. In a tape recorder, the tape is pulled past the read-andwrite heads at a constant speed by the drive mechanism.
Consider the reel from which the tape is pulled as the
tape is pulled off it, the radius of the roll of remaining
tape decreases. How does the torque on the reel change
with time? How does the angular speed of the reel
change with time? If the tape mechanism is suddenly
turned on so that the tape is quickly pulled with a great
force, is the tape more likely to break when pulled from a
nearly full reel or a nearly empty reel?
10. A scientist at a hotel sought assistance from a bellhop to
carry a mysterious suitcase. When the unaware bellhop
rounded a corner carrying the suitcase, it suddenly
moved away from him for some unknown reason. At this
point, the alarmed bellhop dropped the suitcase and ran
off. What do you suppose might have been in the suitcase?
11. When a cylinder rolls on a horizontal surface as in Figure
11.3, do any points on the cylinder have only a vertical
component of velocity at some instant? If so, where are
they?
12. Three objects of uniform density a solid sphere, a solid
cylinder, and a hollow cylinder are placed at the top of
an incline (Fig. Q11.12). If they all are released from rest
at the same elevation and roll without slipping, which object reaches the bottom rst? Which reaches it last? You
should try this at home and note that the result is independent of the masses and the radii of the objects.
Figure Q11.12
Which object wins the race?
13. A mouse is initially at rest on a horizontal turntable
mounted on a frictionless vertical axle. If the mouse begins to walk around the perimeter, what happens to the
turntable? Explain.
14. Stars originate as large bodies of slowly rotating gas. Because of gravity, these regions of gas slowly decrease in
size. What happens to the angular speed of a star as it
shrinks? Explain.
15. Often, when a high diver wants to execute a ip in
midair, she draws her legs up against her chest. Why does
this make her rotate faster? What should she do when she
wants to come out of her ip?
16. As a tether ball winds around a thin pole, what happens
to its angular speed? Explain.
350
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
17. Two solid spheres a large, massive sphere and a small
sphere with low mass are rolled down a hill. Which
sphere reaches the bottom of the hill rst? Next, a large,
low-density sphere and a small, high-density sphere having the same mass are rolled down the hill. Which one
reaches the bottom rst in this case?
18. Suppose you are designing a car for a coasting race the
cars in this race have no engines; they simply coast down
a hill. Do you want to use large wheels or small wheels?
Do you want to use solid, disk-like wheels or hoop-like
wheels? Should the wheels be heavy or light?
19. Why do tightrope walkers carry a long pole to help themselves keep their balance?
20. Two balls have the same size and mass. One is hollow,
whereas the other is solid. How would you determine
which is which without breaking them apart?
21. A particle is moving in a circle with constant speed. Locate one point about which the particles angular momentum is constant and another about which it changes
with time.
22. If global warming occurs over the next century, it is likely
that some polar ice will melt and the water will be distributed closer to the equator. How would this change the
moment of inertia of the Earth? Would the length of the
day (one revolution) increase or decrease?
PROBLEMS
1, 2, 3 = straightforward, intermediate, challenging
= full solution available in the Student Solutions Manual and Study Guide
WEB = solution posted at http://www.saunderscollege.com/physics/
= Computer useful in solving problem
= Interactive Physics
= paired numerical/symbolic problems
v
Section 11.1 Rolling Motion of a Rigid Object
WEB
1. A cylinder of mass 10.0 kg rolls without slipping on a
horizontal surface. At the instant its center of mass has
a speed of 10.0 m/s, determine (a) the translational kinetic energy of its center of mass, (b) the rotational energy about its center of mass, and (c) its total energy.
2. A bowling ball has a mass of 4.00 kg, a moment of inertia of 1.60 10 2 kg m2, and a radius of 0.100 m. If it
rolls down the lane without slipping at a linear speed of
4.00 m/s, what is its total energy?
3. A bowling ball has a mass M, a radius R, and a moment
of inertia 2MR 2. If it starts from rest, how much work
5
must be done on it to set it rolling without slipping at a
linear speed v ? Express the work in terms of M and v.
4. A uniform solid disk and a uniform hoop are placed
side by side at the top of an incline of height h. If they
are released from rest and roll without slipping, determine their speeds when they reach the bottom. Which
object reaches the bottom rst?
5. (a) Determine the acceleration of the center of mass of
a uniform solid disk rolling down an incline making an
angle with the horizontal. Compare this acceleration
with that of a uniform hoop. (b) What is the minimum
coefcient of friction required to maintain pure rolling
motion for the disk?
6. A ring of mass 2.40 kg, inner radius 6.00 cm, and outer
radius 8.00 cm rolls (without slipping) up an inclined
plane that makes an angle of
36.9° (Fig. P11.6). At
the moment the ring is at position x 2.00 m up the
plane, its speed is 2.80 m/s. The ring continues up the
plane for some additional distance and then rolls back
down. It does not roll off the top end. How far up the
plane does it go?
x
θ
Figure P11.6
7. A metal can containing condensed mushroom soup has
a mass of 215 g, a height of 10.8 cm, and a diameter of
6.38 cm. It is placed at rest on its side at the top of a
3.00-m-long incline that is at an angle of 25.0° to the
horizontal and is then released to roll straight down. Assuming energy conservation, calculate the moment of
inertia of the can if it takes 1.50 s to reach the bottom
of the incline. Which pieces of data, if any, are unnecessary for calculating the solution?
8. A tennis ball is a hollow sphere with a thin wall. It is
set rolling without slipping at 4.03 m/s on the horizontal section of a track, as shown in Figure P11.8.
It rolls around the inside of a vertical circular loop
90.0 cm in diameter and nally leaves the track at a
point 20.0 cm below the horizontal section. (a) Find
the speed of the ball at the top of the loop. Demonstrate that it will not fall from the track. (b) Find its
speed as it leaves the track. (c) Suppose that static
friction between the ball and the track was negligible,
so that the ball slid instead of rolling. Would its speed
351
Problems
B
F3
D
O
C
A
F2
F1
Figure P11.8
Section 11.3 Angular Momentum of a Particle
19. A light, rigid rod 1.00 m in length joins two particles
with masses 4.00 kg and 3.00 kg at its ends. The combination rotates in the xy plane about a pivot through
the center of the rod (Fig. P11.19). Determine the angular momentum of the system about the origin when
the speed of each particle is 5.00 m/s.
Section 11.2 The Vector Product and Torque
y
v
3.00
kg
m
x
00
WEB
9. Given M 6i 2j k and N 2i j 3k, calculate
the vector product M N.
10. The vectors 42.0 cm at 15.0° and 23.0 cm at 65.0° both
start from the origin. Both angles are measured counterclockwise from the x axis. The vectors form two sides
of a parallelogram. (a) Find the area of the parallelogram. (b) Find the length of its longer diagonal.
11. Two vectors are given by A
3i 4j and B 2i
3j. Find (a) A B and (b) the angle between A and B.
12. For the vectors A
3i 7j 4k and B 6i 10j
9k, evaluate the expressions (a) cos 1 (A B/AB ) and
(b) sin 1 ( A B /AB). (c) Which give(s) the angle
between the vectors?
13. A force of F 2.00i 3.00j N is applied to an object
that is pivoted about a xed axis aligned along the z coordinate axis. If the force is applied at the point r
(4.00i 5.00j 0k) m, nd (a) the magnitude of the
net torque about the z axis and (b) the direction of the
torque vector .
14. A student claims that she has found a vector A such that
(2i 3j 4k) A (4i 3j k). Do you believe
this claim? Explain.
15. Vector A is in the negative y direction, and vector B is in
the negative x direction. What are the directions of
(a) A B and (b) B A?
16. A particle is located at the vector position r (i 3j) m,
and the force acting on it is F (3i 2j) N. What is
the torque about (a) the origin and (b) the point having coordinates (0, 6) m?
17. If A B
A B, what is the angle between A and B?
18. Two forces F1 and F2 act along the two sides of an equilateral triangle, as shown in Figure P11.18. Point O is
the intersection of the altitudes of the triangle. Find a
third force F3 to be applied at B and along BC that will
make the total torque about the point O be zero. Will
the total torque change if F3 is applied not at B, but
rather at any other point along BC ?
1.
then be higher, lower, or the same at the top of the
loop? Explain.
Figure P11.18
4.00
kg
v
Figure P11.19
WEB
20. A 1.50-kg particle moves in the xy plane with a velocity
of v (4.20i 3.60j) m/s. Determine the particles
angular momentum when its position vector is r
(1.50i 2.20j) m.
21. The position vector of a particle of mass 2.00 kg is given
as a function of time by r (6.00i 5.00t j) m. Determine the angular momentum of the particle about the
origin as a function of time.
22. A conical pendulum consists of a bob of mass m in motion in a circular path in a horizontal plane, as shown in
Figure P11.22. During the motion, the supporting wire
of length maintains the constant angle with the vertical. Show that the magnitude of the angular momen-
352
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
tum of the mass about the center of the circle is
L
(m 2g
3
v1 = vxi i
sin4 /cos )1/2
vi
θ
v2
O
R
θ
Figure P11.25
m
Figure P11.22
23. A particle of mass m moves in a circle of radius R at a
constant speed v, as shown in Figure P11.23. If the motion begins at point Q, determine the angular momentum of the particle about point P as a function of time.
y
v
m
R
Q
P
cle about the origin when the particle is (a) at the origin, (b) at the highest point of its trajectory, and (c) just
about to hit the ground. (d) What torque causes its angular momentum to change?
26. Heading straight toward the summit of Pikes Peak, an
airplane of mass 12 000 kg ies over the plains of
Kansas at a nearly constant altitude of 4.30 km and with
a constant velocity of 175 m/s westward. (a) What is the
airplanes vector angular momentum relative to a wheat
farmer on the ground directly below the airplane?
(b) Does this value change as the airplane continues its
motion along a straight line? (c) What is its angular momentum relative to the summit of Pikes Peak?
27. A ball of mass m is fastened at the end of a agpole connected to the side of a tall building at point P, as shown
in Figure P11.27. The length of the agpole is , and
is the angle the agpole makes with the horizontal. Suppose that the ball becomes loose and starts to fall. Determine the angular momentum (as a function of time)
of the ball about point P. Neglect air resistance.
x
m
Figure P11.23
θ
24. A 4.00-kg mass is attached to a light cord that is wound
around a pulley (see Fig. 10.20). The pulley is a uniform solid cylinder with a radius of 8.00 cm and a mass
of 2.00 kg. (a) What is the net torque on the system
about the point O ? (b) When the mass has a speed v,
the pulley has an angular speed
v/R. Determine
the total angular momentum of the system about O.
(c) Using the fact that
d L/dt and your result from
part (b), calculate the acceleration of the mass.
25. A particle of mass m is shot with an initial velocity vi and
makes an angle with the horizontal, as shown in Figure P11.25. The particle moves in the gravitational eld
of the Earth. Find the angular momentum of the parti-
P
Figure P11.27
28. A reman clings to a vertical ladder and directs the nozzle of a hose horizontally toward a burning building.
The rate of water ow is 6.31 kg/s, and the nozzle speed
is 12.5 m/s. The hose passes between the remans feet,
which are 1.30 m vertically below the nozzle. Choose
the origin to be inside the hose between the remans
353
Problems
feet. What torque must the reman exert on the hose?
That is, what is the rate of change of angular momentum of the water?
34.
Section 11.4 Angular Momentum of a
Rotating Rigid Object
29. A uniform solid sphere with a radius of 0.500 m and a
mass of 15.0 kg turns counterclockwise about a vertical
axis through its center. Find its vector angular momentum when its angular speed is 3.00 rad/s.
30. A uniform solid disk with a mass of 3.00 kg and a radius
of 0.200 m rotates about a xed axis perpendicular
to its face. If the angular speed is 6.00 rad/s, calculate
the angular momentum of the disk when the axis of rotation (a) passes through its center of mass and
(b) passes through a point midway between the center
and the rim.
31. A particle with a mass of 0.400 kg is attached to the
100-cm mark of a meter stick with a mass of 0.100 kg. The
meter stick rotates on a horizontal, frictionless table
with an angular speed of 4.00 rad/s. Calculate the angular momentum of the system when the stick is pivoted
about an axis (a) perpendicular to the table through
the 50.0-cm mark and (b) perpendicular to the table
through the 0-cm mark.
32. The hour and minute hands of Big Ben, the famous
Parliament Building tower clock in London, are 2.70 m
and 4.50 m long and have masses of 60.0 kg and 100 kg,
respectively. Calculate the total angular momentum of
these hands about the center point. Treat the hands as
long thin rods.
Section 11.5 Conservation of Angular Momentum
35.
36.
WEB
37.
33. A cylinder with a moment of inertia of I1 rotates about a
vertical, frictionless axle with angular velocity i . A second cylinder that has a moment of inertia of I 2 and initially is not rotating drops onto the rst cylinder (Fig.
P11.33). Because of friction between the surfaces, the
two eventually reach the same angular speed f .
(a) Calculate f . (b) Show that the kinetic energy of
the system decreases in this interaction and calculate
38.
the ratio of the nal rotational energy to the initial rotational energy.
A playground merry-go-round of radius R 2.00 m has
a moment of inertia of I 250 kg m2 and is rotating at
10.0 rev/min about a frictionless vertical axle. Facing
the axle, a 25.0-kg child hops onto the merry-go-round
and manages to sit down on its edge. What is the new
angular speed of the merry-go-round?
A student sits on a freely rotating stool holding two
weights, each of which has a mass of 3.00 kg. When his
arms are extended horizontally, the weights are 1.00 m
from the axis of rotation and he rotates with an angular
speed of 0.750 rad/s. The moment of inertia of the student plus stool is 3.00 kg m2 and is assumed to be constant. The student pulls the weights inward horizontally
to a position 0.300 m from the rotation axis. (a) Find
the new angular speed of the student. (b) Find the kinetic energy of the rotating system before and after he
pulls the weights inward.
A uniform rod with a mass of 100 g and a length of
50.0 cm rotates in a horizontal plane about a xed,
vertical, frictionless pin passing through its center.
Two small beads, each having a mass 30.0 g, are
mounted on the rod so that they are able to slide without friction along its length. Initially, the beads are held
by catches at positions 10.0 cm on each side of center;
at this time, the system rotates at an angular speed of
20.0 rad/s. Suddenly, the catches are released, and the
small beads slide outward along the rod. Find (a) the
angular speed of the system at the instant the beads
reach the ends of the rod and (b) the angular speed of
the rod after the beads y off the rods ends.
A 60.0-kg woman stands at the rim of a horizontal
turntable having a moment of inertia of 500 kg m2 and
a radius of 2.00 m. The turntable is initially at rest and is
free to rotate about a frictionless, vertical axle through
its center. The woman then starts walking around the
rim clockwise (as viewed from above the system) at a
constant speed of 1.50 m/s relative to the Earth. (a) In
what direction and with what angular speed does the
turntable rotate? (b) How much work does the woman
do to set herself and the turntable into motion?
A puck with a mass of 80.0 g and a radius of 4.00 cm
slides along an air table at a speed of 1.50 m/s, as
shown in Figure P11.38a. It makes a glancing collision
I2
1.50 m/s
ωi
ωf
I1
Before
After
Figure P11.33
(a)
(b)
Figure P11.38
354
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
with a second puck having a radius of 6.00 cm and a
mass of 120 g (initially at rest) such that their rims just
touch. Because their rims are coated with instant-acting
glue, the pucks stick together and spin after the collision (Fig. P11.38b). (a) What is the angular momentum
of the system relative to the center of mass? (b) What is
the angular speed about the center of mass?
39. A wooden block of mass M resting on a frictionless horizontal surface is attached to a rigid rod of length and
of negligible mass (Fig. P11.39). The rod is pivoted at
the other end. A bullet of mass m traveling parallel to
the horizontal surface and normal to the rod with speed
v hits the block and becomes embedded in it. (a) What
is the angular momentum of the bullet block system?
(b) What fraction of the original kinetic energy is lost
in the collision?
Figure P11.40
m vi
M
R
d
M
v
Figure P11.41
Figure P11.39
maximum possible decrease in the angular speed of the
Earth due to this collision? Explain your answer.
(Optional)
40. A space station shaped like a giant wheel has a radius of
100 m and a moment of inertia of 5.00 108 kg m2. A
crew of 150 are living on the rim, and the stations rotation causes the crew to experience an acceleration of 1g
(Fig. P11.40). When 100 people move to the center of
the station for a union meeting, the angular speed
changes. What acceleration is experienced by the managers remaining at the rim? Assume that the average
mass of each inhabitant is 65.0 kg.
41. A wad of sticky clay of mass m and velocity vi is red at a
solid cylinder of mass M and radius R (Fig. P11.41).
The cylinder is initially at rest and is mounted on a
xed horizontal axle that runs through the center of
mass. The line of motion of the projectile is perpendicular to the axle and at a distance d, less than R, from the
center. (a) Find the angular speed of the system just after the clay strikes and sticks to the surface of the cylinder. (b) Is mechanical energy conserved in this process?
Explain your answer.
42. Suppose a meteor with a mass of 3.00 1013 kg is moving at 30.0 km/s relative to the center of the Earth and
strikes the Earth. What is the order of magnitude of the
Section 11.7 Angular Momentum as a
Fundamental Quantity
43. In the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, the electron
moves in a circular orbit of radius 0.529 10 10 m
around the proton. Assuming that the orbital angular
momentum of the electron is equal to h/2 , calculate
(a) the orbital speed of the electron, (b) the kinetic energy of the electron, and (c) the angular speed of the
electrons motion.
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
44. Review Problem. A rigid, massless rod has three equal
masses attached to it, as shown in Figure P11.44. The
rod is free to rotate in a vertical plane about a frictionless axle perpendicular to the rod through the point P,
and it is released from rest in the horizontal position at
t 0. Assuming m and d are known, nd (a) the moment of inertia of the system about the pivot, (b) the
torque acting on the system at t 0, (c) the angular acceleration of the system at t 0, (d) the linear acceleration of the mass labeled 3 at t 0, (e) the maximum
355
Problems
kinetic energy of the system, (f) the maximum angular
speed attained by the rod, (g) the maximum angular
momentum of the system, and (h) the maximum speed
attained by the mass labeled 2.
m
m
1
2d
3
P
2
time. (f) Find the work done by the drive motor during
the 440-s motion. (g) Find the work done by the string
brake on the sliding mass. (h) Find the total work done
on the system consisting of the disk and the sliding
mass.
m
3
B
d
d
Figure P11.44
45. A uniform solid sphere of radius r is placed on the inside surface of a hemispherical bowl having a much
greater radius R. The sphere is released from rest at an
angle to the vertical and rolls without slipping (Fig.
P11.45). Determine the angular speed of the sphere
when it reaches the bottom of the bowl.
r
θ
R
A
Figure P11.46
47. A string is wound around a uniform disk of radius R
and mass M. The disk is released from rest when the
string is vertical and its top end is tied to a xed bar
(Fig. P11.47). Show that (a) the tension in the string is
one-third the weight of the disk, (b) the magnitude of
the acceleration of the center of mass is 2 g/3, and
(c) the speed of the center of mass is (4 gh/3)1/2 as the
disk descends. Verify your answer to part (c) using the
energy approach.
Figure P11.45
46. A 100-kg uniform horizontal disk of radius 5.50 m turns
without friction at 2.50 rev/s on a vertical axis through
its center, as shown in Figure P11.46. A feedback mechanism senses the angular speed of the disk, and a drive
motor at A ensures that the angular speed remains constant. While the disk turns, a 1.20-kg mass on top of the
disk slides outward in a radial slot. The 1.20-kg mass
starts at the center of the disk at time t 0 and moves
outward with a constant speed of 1.25 cm/s relative to
the disk until it reaches the edge at t 440 s. The sliding mass experiences no friction. Its motion is constrained by a brake at B so that its radial speed remains
constant. The constraint produces tension in a light
string tied to the mass. (a) Find the torque as a function
of time that the drive motor must provide while the
mass is sliding. (b) Find the value of this torque at
t 440 s, just before the sliding mass nishes its motion. (c) Find the power that the drive motor must deliver as a function of time. (d) Find the value of the
power when the sliding mass is just reaching the end of
the slot. (e) Find the string tension as a function of
h
R
M
Figure P11.47
48. Comet Halley moves about the Sun in an elliptical orbit,
with its closest approach to the Sun being about
0.590 AU and its greatest distance from the Sun being
35.0 AU (1 AU the average Earth Sun distance). If
the comets speed at its closest approach is 54.0 km/s,
356
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
what is its speed when it is farthest from the Sun? The
angular momentum of the comet about the Sun is conserved because no torque acts on the comet. The gravitational force exerted by the Sun on the comet has a
moment arm of zero.
49. A constant horizontal force F is applied to a lawn roller
having the form of a uniform solid cylinder of radius R
and mass M (Fig. P11.49). If the roller rolls without slipping on the horizontal surface, show that (a) the acceleration of the center of mass is 2F/3M and that (b) the
minimum coefcient of friction necessary to prevent
slipping is F /3Mg. (Hint: Consider the torque with respect to the center of mass.)
F
M
R
The monkey climbs the rope in an attempt to reach the
bananas. (a) Treating the system as consisting of the
monkey, bananas, rope, and pulley, evaluate the net
torque about the pulley axis. (b) Using the results to
part (a), determine the total angular momentum about
the pulley axis and describe the motion of the system.
Will the monkey reach the bananas?
51. A solid sphere of mass m and radius r rolls without slipping along the track shown in Figure P11.51. The
sphere starts from rest with its lowest point at height h
above the bottom of a loop of radius R, which is much
larger than r. (a) What is the minimum value that h can
have (in terms of R ) if the sphere is to complete the
loop? (b) What are the force components on the
sphere at point P if h 3R ?
m
r
h
R
P
Figure P11.49
Figure P11.51
50. A light rope passes over a light, frictionless pulley. A
bunch of bananas of mass M is fastened at one end, and
a monkey of mass M clings to the other (Fig. P11.50).
M
M
Figure P11.50
52. A thin rod with a mass of 0.630 kg and a length of
1.24 m is at rest, hanging vertically from a strong xed
hinge at its top end. Suddenly, a horizontal impulsive
force (14.7i) N is applied to it. (a) Suppose that the
force acts at the bottom end of the rod. Find the acceleration of the rods center of mass and the horizontal
force that the hinge exerts. (b) Suppose that the force
acts at the midpoint of the rod. Find the acceleration of
this point and the horizontal hinge reaction. (c) Where
can the impulse be applied so that the hinge exerts no
horizontal force? (This point is called the center of percussion.)
53. At one moment, a bowling ball is both sliding and spinning on a horizontal surface such that its rotational kinetic energy equals its translational kinetic energy. Let
v CM represent the balls center-of-mass speed relative to
the surface. Let vr represent the speed of the topmost
point on the balls surface relative to the center of mass.
Find the ratio v CM /vr .
54. A projectile of mass m moves to the right with speed vi
(Fig. P11.54a). The projectile strikes and sticks to the
end of a stationary rod of mass M and length d that is
pivoted about a frictionless axle through its center (Fig.
P11.54b). (a) Find the angular speed of the system right
after the collision. (b) Determine the fractional loss in
mechanical energy due to the collision.
357
Problems
cal grape at the top of his bald head, which itself has the
shape of a sphere. After all of the children have had
time to giggle, the grape starts from rest and rolls down
your uncles head without slipping. It loses contact with
your uncles scalp when the radial line joining it to the
center of curvature makes an angle with the vertical.
What is the measure of angle ?
58. A thin rod of length h and mass M is held vertically with
its lower end resting on a frictionless horizontal surface.
The rod is then released to fall freely. (a) Determine
the speed of its center of mass just before it hits the horizontal surface. (b) Now suppose that the rod has a
xed pivot at its lower end. Determine the speed of the
rods center of mass just before it hits the surface.
ω
m
vi
O
d
(a)
O
(b)
Figure P11.54
WEB
55. A mass m is attached to a cord passing through a small
hole in a frictionless, horizontal surface (Fig. P11.55).
The mass is initially orbiting with speed vi in a circle of
radius ri . The cord is then slowly pulled from below,
and the radius of the circle decreases to r. (a) What is
the speed of the mass when the radius is r ? (b) Find the
tension in the cord as a function of r. (c) How much
work W is done in moving m from ri to r ? ( Note: The
tension depends on r.) (d) Obtain numerical values
for v, T, and W when r 0.100 m, m 50.0 g, ri
0.300 m, and vi 1.50 m/s.
ri
m
vi
59. Two astronauts (Fig. P11.59), each having a mass of
75.0 kg, are connected by a 10.0-m rope of negligible
mass. They are isolated in space, orbiting their center of
mass at speeds of 5.00 m/s. (a) Treating the astronauts
as particles, calculate the magnitude of the angular momentum and (b) the rotational energy of the system. By
pulling on the rope, one of the astronauts shortens the
distance between them to 5.00 m. (c) What is the new
angular momentum of the system? (d) What are the astronauts new speeds? (e) What is the new rotational energy of the system? (f) How much work is done by the
astronaut in shortening the rope?
60. Two astronauts (see Fig. P11.59), each having a mass M,
are connected by a rope of length d having negligible
mass. They are isolated in space, orbiting their center of
mass at speeds v. Treating the astronauts as particles,
calculate (a) the magnitude of the angular momentum
and (b) the rotational energy of the system. By pulling
on the rope, one of the astronauts shortens the distance
between them to d /2. (c) What is the new angular momentum of the system? (d) What are the astronauts
new speeds? (e) What is the new rotational energy of
the system? (f) How much work is done by the astronaut in shortening the rope?
Figure P11.55
CM
56. A bowler releases a bowling ball with no spin, sending it
sliding straight down the alley toward the pins. The ball
continues to slide for some distance before its motion
becomes rolling without slipping; of what order of magnitude is this distance? State the quantities you take as
data, the values you measure or estimate for them, and
your reasoning.
57. Following Thanksgiving dinner, your uncle falls into a
deep sleep while sitting straight up and facing the television set. A naughty grandchild balances a small spheri-
d
Figure P11.59
Problems 59 and 60.
61. A solid cube of wood of side 2 a and mass M is resting
on a horizontal surface. The cube is constrained to ro-
358
CHAPTER 11
Rolling Motion and Angular Momentum
tate about an axis AB (Fig. P11.61). A bullet of mass m
and speed v is shot at the face opposite ABCD at a
height of 4 a/3. The bullet becomes embedded in the
cube. Find the minimum value of v required to tip the
cube so that it falls on face ABCD. Assume m V M.
C
2a
D
v
4a/3
B
Figure P11.64
Problems 64 and 65.
A
Figure P11.61
62. A large, cylindrical roll of paper of initial radius R lies
on a long, horizontal surface with the open end of the
paper nailed to the surface. The roll is given a slight
shove (vi 0) and begins to unroll. (a) Determine the
speed of the center of mass of the roll when its radius
has diminished to r. (b) Calculate a numerical value
for this speed at r 1.00 mm, assuming R 6.00 m.
(c) What happens to the energy of the system when the
paper is completely unrolled? ( Hint: Assume that the
roll has a uniform density and apply energy methods.)
63. A spool of wire of mass M and radius R is unwound under a constant force F (Fig. P11.63). Assuming that the
spool is a uniform solid cylinder that does not slip, show
that (a) the acceleration of the center of mass is
4F/3M and that (b) the force of friction is to the right
and is equal in magnitude to F/3. (c) If the cylinder
starts from rest and rolls without slipping, what is the
speed of its center of mass after it has rolled through a
distance d ?
a horizontal surface and released, as shown in Figure
P11.64. (a) What is the angular speed of the disk once
pure rolling takes place? (b) Find the fractional loss in
kinetic energy from the time the disk is released until
the time pure rolling occurs. (Hint: Consider torques
about the center of mass.)
65. Suppose a solid disk of radius R is given an angular
speed i about an axis through its center and is then
lowered to a horizontal surface and released, as shown
in Problem 64 (see Fig. P11.64). Furthermore, assume
that the coefcient of friction between the disk and the
surface is . (a) Show that the time it takes for pure
rolling motion to occur is R i /3 g. (b) Show that the
distance the disk travels before pure rolling occurs is
R 2 i 2/18 g.
66. A solid cube of side 2a and mass M is sliding on a frictionless surface with uniform velocity v, as shown in Figure P11.66a. It hits a small obstacle at the end of the
table; this causes the cube to tilt, as shown in Figure
F
M
ω
2a
Mg
M
R
v
Figure P11.63
64. A uniform solid disk is set into rotation with an angular
speed i about an axis through its center. While still rotating at this speed, the disk is placed into contact with
(a)
Figure P11.66
(b)
359
Problems
P11.66b. Find the minimum value of v such that the
cube falls off the table. Note that the moment of inertia
of the cube about an axis along one of its edges is
8Ma 2/3. (Hint: The cube undergoes an inelastic collision at the edge.)
67. A plank with a mass M 6.00 kg rides on top of two
identical solid cylindrical rollers that have R 5.00 cm
and m 2.00 kg (Fig. P11.67). The plank is pulled by a
constant horizontal force of magnitude F 6.00 N applied to the end of the plank and perpendicular to the
axes of the cylinders (which are parallel). The cylinders
roll without slipping on a at surface. Also, no slipping
occurs between the cylinders and the plank. (a) Find
the acceleration of the plank and that of the rollers.
(b) What frictional forces are acting?
M
m
F
R
m
R
that the critical angle for which the spool does not slip
and remains stationary is
cos
c
r
R
(Hint: At the critical angle, the line of action of the applied force passes through the contact point.)
70. In a demonstration that employs a ballistics cart, a ball
is projected vertically upward from a cart moving with
constant velocity along the horizontal direction. The
ball lands in the catching cup of the cart because both
the cart and the ball have the same horizontal component of velocity. Now consider a ballistics cart on an incline making an angle with the horizontal, as shown in
Figure P11.70. The cart (including its wheels) has a
mass M, and the moment of inertia of each of the two
wheels is mR 2/2. (a) Using conservation of energy considerations (assuming that there is no friction between
the cart and the axles) and assuming pure rolling motion (that is, no slipping), show that the acceleration of
the cart along the incline is
M
ax
2m
M
Figure P11.67
g sin
(b) Note that the x component of acceleration of the
ball released by the cart is g sin . Thus, the x component of the carts acceleration is smaller than that of the
ball by the factor M/(M 2m). Use this fact and kinematic equations to show that the ball overshoots the
cart by an amount x, where
68. A spool of wire rests on a horizontal surface as in Figure
P11.68. As the wire is pulled, the spool does not slip at
the contact point P. On separate trials, each one of the
forces F1 , F2 , F3 , and F4 is applied to the spool. For
each one of these forces, determine the direction in
which the spool will roll. Note that the line of action of
F2 passes through P.
x
4m
M 2m
sin
v yi 2
cos2
g
and vyi is the initial speed of